DDW-2024-007015

GREEN ROAD WELLHOUSE
PROJECT MANUAL
APRIL 2023
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

03/2023 INSIDE COVER
254.07.100 PAGE 00 00 01 - 1

WEBER BASIN
WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT

GREEN ROAD WELLHOUSE

April 2023

PROJECT MANUAL

Project Engineer

HANSEN, ALLEN, & LUCE, INC.
Consultants/Engineers
859 West South Jordan Parkway – Ste 200
South Jordan, Utah 84095
[phone]

03/2023 INSIDE COVER
254.07.100 PAGE 00 00 01 - 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE(S)

01/2023 TABLE OF CONTENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 00 00 03 - 1
00 00 01 Inside Cover .................................................................................... 00 00 01 - 1 to 2
00 00 03 Table of Contents ............................................................................ 00 00 03 - 1 to 6

PART 1 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

00 11 13 Advertisement for Bid ...................................................................... 00 11 13 - 1 to 2
00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders ..................................................................... 00 21 13 - 1 to 10
00 41 00 Bid Form .......................................................................................... 00 41 00 - 1 to 8
00 43 13 Bid Bond .......................................................................................... 00 43 13 - 1 to 2
00 44 00 Contractor Qualifications.................................................................. 00 44 00 - 1 to 4
00 45 16 List of Subcontractors ...................................................................... 00 45 16 - 1 to 2

PART 2 - CONTRACT FORMS

00 51 00 Notice of Award ............................................................................... 00 51 00 - 1 to 2
00 52 00 Agreement ....................................................................................... 00 52 00 - 1 to 8
00 55 00 Notice to Proceed ............................................................................ 00 55 00 - 1 to 2
00 61 13 Performance Bond ........................................................................... 00 61 00 - 1 to 4
00 61 14 Payment Bond ................................................................................. 00 61 50 - 1 to 4
00 63 50 Certificate of Substantial Completion ............................................... 00 62 50 - 1 to 2
00 63 63 Change Order Form ........................................................................ 00 63 63 - 1 to 2

PART 3 - CONTRACT CONDITIONS

00 70 00 General Conditions ........................................................................... 00 70 00 - 1 to 70
00 80 00 Supplementary Conditions ................................................................ 00 80 00 - 1 to 12

PART 4 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 Summary of Work ............................................................................. 01 11 00 - 1 to 2
01 14 00 Work Restrictions .............................................................................. 01 14 00 - 1 to 2
01 22 00 Measurement and Payment .............................................................. 01 22 00 - 1 to 8
01 30 00 Administrative Requirements ............................................................ 01 30 00 - 1 to 4
01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule ....................................................... 01 32 16 - 1 to 8
01 33 00 Submittal Procedures ........................................................................ 01 33 00 - 1 to 6
01 41 00 Permits .............................................................................................. 01 41 00 - 1 to 2
01 42 13 Abbreviations .................................................................................... 01 42 13 - 1 to 4
01 42 19 Referenced Standards ...................................................................... 01 42 19 - 1 to 2
01 45 00 Quality Control and Materials Testing ................................................ 01 45 00 - 1 to 6
01 45 23 Testing Agency Services ................................................................... 01 45 23 - 1 to 4
01 50 00 Temporary Construction Utilities and Environmental Controls ........... 01 50 00 - 1 to 6
01 50 30 Protection of Existing Facilities .......................................................... 01 50 30 - 1 to 6
01 55 26 Traffic Control .................................................................................. 01 55 26 - 1 to 2
01 56 00 Dust Control ...................................................................................... 01 56 00 - 1 to 2
01 60 00 Product Requirements ...................................................................... 01 60 00 - 1 to 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE(S)

01/2023 TABLE OF CONTENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 00 00 03 - 2
01 71 13 Mobilization ....................................................................................... 01 71 13 - 1 to 2
01 78 20 Operation and Maintenance Manuals ................................................ 01 78 20 - 1 to 4
01 78 50 Project Closeout ................................................................................ 01 78 50 - 1 to 10

DIVISION 02 - NOT USED

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories .................................................. 03 10 00 - 1 to 4
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement ................................................................... 03 20 00 - 1 to 4
03 25 00 Expansion Joints, Construction Joints and Waterstops ..................... 03 25 00 - 1 to 6
03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete ..................................................................... 03 30 00 - 1 to 18
03 31 05 CLSM (Flowable Fill) ......................................................................... 03 31 05 - 1 to 6
03 60 00 Grout ................................................................................................. 03 60 00 - 1 to 12

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

04 22 00 Reinforced Unit Masonry ................................................................... 04 22 00 - 1 to 12

DIVISION 05 – METALS

05 45 00 Mechanical Metal Supports (Pipe Supports) ...................................... 05 45 00 - 1 to 8
05 50 00 Miscellaneous Specialties ................................................................. 05 50 00 - 1 to 6

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry ............................................................................... 06 10 00 - 1 to 6
06 20 23 Interior Finish Carpentry .................................................................... 06 20 23 - 1 to 10

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 11 00 Moisture Protection ........................................................................... 07 11 00 - 1 to 4
07 21 00 Insulation .......................................................................................... 07 21 00 - 1 to 6
07 32 00 Metal Roofing System ....................................................................... 07 32 00 - 1 to 6
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.......................................................... 07 62 00 - 1 to 8
07 92 00 Joint Sealants .................................................................................. 07 92 00 - 1 to 8

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

08 10 00 Doors, Frames, and Hardware .......................................................... 08 10 00 - 1 to 10
08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors .................................................................... 08 33 23 - 1 to 8
08 62 00 Skylights ........................................................................................... 08 62 00 - 1 to 4

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 20 00 Gypsum Board ................................................................................ 09 20 00 - 1 to 10
09 90 00 Painting and Finishes ........................................................................ 09 90 00 - 1 to 22
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE(S)

01/2023 TABLE OF CONTENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 00 00 03 - 3
09 98 10 Pipeline Coatings and Linings ........................................................... 09 98 10 - 1 to 14

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties ............................................................... 10 44 00 - 1 to 2

DIVISIONS 11 through 21 - NOT USED

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

22 10 10 Plumbing, Piping, and Specialties ..................................................... 22 10 10 - 1 to 8

DIVISION 23 – HVAC

23 05 00 General HVAC Requirements ........................................................... 23 05 00 - 1 to 12
23 05 20 HVAC Identification ........................................................................... 23 05 20 - 1 to 2
23 05 30 HVAC Operation and Maintenance Manuals ..................................... 23 05 30 - 1 to 4
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing ...................................................... 23 05 93 - 1 to 6
23 06 03 Supporting Devices for HVAC ........................................................... 23 06 03 - 1 to 2
23 06 05 Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control ............................ 23 06 05 - 1 to 4
23 06 07 Motors, Drives & Electrical Requirements ......................................... 23 06 07 - 1 to 4
23 09 00 HVAC Control Systems ..................................................................... 23 09 00 - 1 to 8
23 31 00 Ductwork ........................................................................................... 23 31 00 - 1 to 6
23 31 10 Ductwork Accessories ....................................................................... 23 31 10 - 1 to 4
23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets ......................................................................... 23 37 00 - 1 to 4
23 76 00 Terminal Electric Heat Transfer Units ................................................ 23 76 00 - 1 to 4
23 81 26 Split System Air Conditioning Units .................................................. 23 61 00 - 1 to 2
23 82 00 Power Ventilators .............................................................................. 23 82 00 - 1 to 4
23 90 00 Air Filters ........................................................................................... 23 90 00 - 1 to 4

DIVISIONS 24 through 25 - NOT USED

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 Electrical General Requirements ....................................................... 26 05 00 - 1 to 12
26 05 05 Operation and Maintenance Manuals - Electrical .............................. 26 05 05 - 1 to 4
26 05 07 Electrical Power System Studies ....................................................... 26 05 07 - 1 to 16
26 05 09 Electrical Identification ...................................................................... 26 05 09 - 1 to 4
26 05 19 Conductors and Cables ..................................................................... 26 05 19 - 1 to 4
26 05 22 Wiring Devices .................................................................................. 26 05 22 - 1 to 4
26 05 24 Equipment Wiring .............................................................................. 26 05 24 - 1 to 4
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding .................................................................... 26 05 26 - 1 to 4
26 05 30 Conduits .......................................................................................... 26 05 30 - 1 to 10
26 05 32 Conduit Ductbanks .......................................................................... 26 05 32 - 1 to 2
26 05 34 Electrical Boxes and Fittings ............................................................. 26 05 34 - 1 to 2
26 05 74 Electrical Motors ............................................................................... 26 05 74 - 1 to 8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE(S)

01/2023 TABLE OF CONTENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 00 00 03 - 4
26 09 13 Control Devices ................................................................................. 26 09 13 - 1 to 12
26 16 00 Control Panels and Consoles ............................................................ 26 16 00 - 1 to 12
26 20 00 Service and Distribution Systems ...................................................... 26 20 00 - 1 to 4
26 22 00 Dry Type Transformers ..................................................................... 26 22 00 - 1 to 2
26 24 16 Branch Circuit Panelboards ............................................................... 26 24 16 - 1 to 8
26 24 17 Distribution Panelboards ................................................................... 26 24 17 - 1 to 6
26 24 18 Distribution Switchgear ..................................................................... 26 24 18 - 1 to 10
26 26 00 Terminal Blocks ................................................................................ 26 26 00 - 1 to 2
26 28 13 Fuses ................................................................................................ 26 28 13 - 1 to 2
26 29 23 Pulse Width Modulated Variable Frequency Drives ........................... 26 29 23 - 1 to 10
26 35 53 Surge Protection Devices .................................................................. 26 35 53 - 1 to 8
26 80 10 HVAC Systems Control ..................................................................... 26 80 10 - 1 to 2

DIVISIONS 27 through 30 - NOT USED

DIVISION 31 - EARTH WORK

31 05 19 Geosynthetics ................................................................................... 31 05 19 - 1 to 6
31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing ...................................................................... 31 11 00 - 1 to 2
31 22 00 Site Grading ...................................................................................... 31 22 00 - 1 to 4
31 22 16 Fine Grading ..................................................................................... 31 22 16 - 1 to 2
31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines ...................................... 31 23 15 - 1 to 10
31 23 19 Dewatering ........................................................................................ 31 23 19 - 1 to 2
31 23 23 Excavation and Backfill for Structures ............................................... 31 23 23 - 1 to 6

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 11 23 Road Base - Untreated Base Course ................................................ 32 11 23 - 1 to 4
32 12 16 Hot-Mix Asphalt Concrete Paving ...................................................... 32 12 16 - 1 to 6
32 31 13 Chain Link Fence and Gates ............................................................. 32 31 13 - 1 to 6

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

33 05 03 Copper Pipe ...................................................................................... 33 05 03 - 1 to 4
33 05 05 Ductile Iron Pipe ................................................................................ 33 05 05 - 1 to 12
33 05 07 Polyvinyl Chloride Pressure Pipe, Rubber Joints (AWWA C900) ..... 33 05 07 - 1 to 6
33 05 07.1 PVC Pressure Pipe ASTM D 1785 .................................................. 33 05 07 - 1 to 6
33 05 11 HDPE Pressure Pipe C901, C906 ..................................................... 33 05 11 - 1 of 4
33 05 13 Precast Concrete Manholes and Structures ...................................... 33 05 13 - 1 to 6
33 05 26 Utility Identification ............................................................................ 33 05 26 - 1 to 6
33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances ............................................................... 33 12 00 - 1 to 8
33 12 30 Deep Well Pump and Motor - Oil Lube .............................................. 33 12 30 - 1 to 8
33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection ...................................................... 33 13 00 - 1 to 4
33 14 13 Drainage System............................................................................... 33 14 13 - 1 to 4
33 92 10 Steel Pipe, Specials, and Fittings (AWWA C200 Modified) ................ 33 92 10 - 1 to 18

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE(S)

01/2023 TABLE OF CONTENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 00 00 03 - 5
DIVISIONS 34 through 39 – NOT USED

DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION

40 05 13.13 Steel Process Piping ..................................................................... 40 05 13 - 1 to 6
40 05 13.19 Stainless Steel Process Piping ...................................................... 40 05 19 - 1 to 4
40 10 00 Process Control and Instrumentation System - General .................... 40 10 00 - 1 to 12
40 11 00 Programmable Logic Center (PLC) ................................................... 40 11 00 - 1 to 4
40 12 50 Pressure Transmitter ......................................................................... 40 12 50 - 1 to 2
40 15 10 Process Control Strategies ................................................................ 40 15 10 - 1 to 8
40 20 00 Instruments General .......................................................................... 40 20 00 - 1 to 6
40 21 20 Magnetic Flow Meters ....................................................................... 40 21 20 - 1 to 2
40 24 10 Ultrasonic Level Measurement .......................................................... 40 24 10 - 1 to 2
40 27 60 Pressure Switches and Seals ............................................................ 40 27 60 - 1 to 4
40 91 20 Pressure Gauges .............................................................................. 40 91 20 - 1 to 4
40 91 23 Miscellaneous Properties Measurement Devices .............................. 40 91 23 - 1 to 6

DIVISIONS 41 through 45 – NOT USED

DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

46 31 12 Fluoride Chemical Process System ................................................... 46 31 12 - 1 to 10
46 33 13 On-Site Hypochlorite Generation System .......................................... 46 33 13 - 1 to 8
46 34 00 Filter Tech Filter System for Green Road Well .................................. 46 34 00 - 1 to 4
Appendices (Prepared by Filter Tech)
Proposal Update Summary March 21, 2023 (with Cost and Schedule) ............ 4 pages
Section 1 - Design Criteria Binder .................................................................. 12 pages
Section 2 - Mechanical Drawings Binder ........................................................ 16 pages
Section 3 - Mechanical Equipment Binder ...................................................... 41 pages
Installation Instructions for Equipment and Filter Media .................................... 7 pages

DIVISIONS 47 through 49 – NOT USED

PART 5 – DRAWINGS – See Volume II

PART 6 – APPENDICIES

1. AGEC Geotech Report, Green Road Well House (27 pages)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE(S)

01/2023 TABLE OF CONTENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 00 00 03 - 6

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PART 1
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

07/2023 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID
254.07.100 PAGE 00 11 13 - 1
SECTION 00 11 13
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

NOTICE: Notice is hereby given that the Weber Basin Water Conservancy District (OWNER),
will accept bids for the construction of the GREEN ROAD WELLHOUSE Project (Project)
according to Contract Drawings and Specifications prepared by HANSEN, ALLEN & LUCE,
INC. (ENGINEER), and described in general as:

Construct and functionally commission all parts of a 600 gpm drinking water
wellhouse system including two buildings (wellhouse and fluoride) of masonry
block with pitched roofs; 150 HP vertical turbine pump, motor, piping, valves,
onsite hypochlorite generation system, fluoridation system, filtration system with
automated backwash system, vault and monitoring, landscaping and irrigation
system, HVAC, electrical, controls, paving, C&G, sidewalks, driveways, chain link
fence and gates, drainage and water pipelines, and other work.

BIDS DUE: Separate sealed bids will be received by the OWNER in their office located at 2837
E Highway 193, Layton, UT 84040 until 2:00 p.m. on Thursday, Aug 17, 2023, and then at
said office publicly opened and read aloud. Bids shall be addressed and delivered to the District
offices prior to the Bid Opening.

BIDDDER QUALIFICATIONS: 2 Bidders have been prequalified (see Instructions to Bidders in
specifications); all others must submit bidder qualifications with their bids. All must use Owner
Prequalified Electrical subcontractors.

BID DOCUMENTS: Electronic Files (.pdf files) of Bidding Documents may be obtained by
emailing Jesse Moreno (Owner project manager) at [e-mail] on or after
August 2, 2023. No paper copies of the Contract Documents will be available for purchase.
Bid security in the amount of 5% of the base bid will be required to accompany bids.

PRE-BID CONFERENCE: Prospective Bidders are invited to a non-mandatory Pre-Bid
Conference to be held at District offices at 2837 E Highway 193, Layton, UT 84040 at 2:00
p.m. on Thursday, August 10, 2023 to acquaint Bidders with the site conditions, specifications,
and to answer any questions which Bidders may have concerning the project.

QUESTIONS: All communication and questions relative to the project shall be directed to
Engineer Nathaniel Jones (phone below) at [e-mail] at least 2 days before bid
opening. Please copy each communication to Jesse Moreno at [e-mail].

Nathaniel Jones, P.E., Project Engineer
at HANSEN, ALLEN & LUCE, INC.
[e-mail]
Telephone: [phone]

The OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all bids; or to accept or reject the whole or any
part of any bid; or to waive any informality or technicality in any bid in the best interest of the
District. Only bids giving a firm quotation properly signed will be accepted.

- END OF DOCUMENT –

07/2023 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID
254.07.100 PAGE 00 11 13 - 2

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

7/2023 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
254.07.100 00 21 13-1

SECTION 00 21 13
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

TABLE OF ARTICLES

ARTICLE 1 - DEFINED TERMS

1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders will have the meanings indicated in the General
Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to
Bidders have the meanings indicated below:

A. Issuing Office--The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued and where
the bidding procedures are to be administered.

ARTICLE 2 - COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

2.01 Bidding Documents may be obtained by emailing Jesse Moreno at
[e-mail]. Complete sets of Bidding Documents will be sent as
portable document format (.pdf).

2.02 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor
Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use
of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

2.02 Owner and Engineer in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms
do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not confer a license or grant
for any other use.

ARTICLE 3 - QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS

3.01 Contractors are already prequalified to bid the Work: VanCon, Inc and COP Construction.
They need not submit qualifications with their bids.

3.02 All other prime contractors must submit with their bid a copy of Spec Section 00 44 00
“Contractor Qualifications”, completely filled out, including at least 3 similar projects they
have constructed.

3.03 Prequalified Electrical Subcontractors. All bids must list subcontractors including one of
the following Owner Prequalified Electrical Contractors.
1. Freedom Electric
2. Turner Electric
3. Cache Valley Electric
4. S&S Electric
5. Skyline Electric
6. Wood Electric
.

7/2023 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
254.07.100 00 21 13-2

ARTICLE 4 – SITE AND OTHER AREAS; EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS; EXAMINATION OF
SITE; OWNER’S SAFETY PROGRAM; OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
4.01 Site and Other Areas
A. The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. By definition, the Site includes rights-
of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by OWNER for the use of the
CONTRACTOR. Any additional lands required for temporary construction facilities,
construction equipment, or storage of materials and equipment, and any access
needed for such additional lands, are to be obtained and paid for by CONTRACTOR.
4.02 Existing Site Conditions
A. Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions
1. The Supplementary Conditions identify:
a. those reports known to OWNER of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or adjacent to the Site.
b. those drawings known to OWNER of physical conditions relating to existing
surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).
c. reports and drawings known to OWNER relating to Hazardous
Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site.
d. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
2. OWNER will make copies of reports and drawings referenced above available to
any Bidder on request. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract
Documents, but the Technical Data contained therein upon whose accuracy
Bidder is entitled to rely, as provided in the General Conditions, has been
identified and established in the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible
for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any Technical Data or any
other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or
shown or indicated in such drawings.
3. If the Supplementary Conditions do not identify Technical Data, the default
definition of Technical Data set forth in Article 1 of the General Conditions will
apply.
B. Underground Facilities: Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding
Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site
are set forth in the Contract Documents and are based upon information and data
furnished to OWNER and ENGINEER by OWNERs of such Underground Facilities,
including OWNER, or others.
C. Adequacy of Data: Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data
furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical
conditions, and Underground Facilities, and possible changes in the Bidding
Documents due to differing or unanticipated subsurface or physical conditions appear
in Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 of the General Conditions. Provisions concerning
responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect
to a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site, if any, and possible changes in
the Contract Documents due to any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered
or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in the Contract Drawings or

7/2023 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
254.07.100 00 21 13-3

Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the
Work, appear in Paragraph 5.06 of the General Conditions.
4.03 Site Visit and Testing by Bidders
A. Contractors are invited to visit the project site. Contractors are invited to a non -
mandatory Pre-Bid Conference to be held at 2:00 p.m. on Thursday August 10,
2023. This meeting will start at the District offices located at 2837 E Highway 193,
Layton, UT 84040.
B. Bidder is not required to conduct any subsurface testing, or exhaustive investigations
of Site conditions.
C. On request, and to the extent OWNER has control over the Site, and schedule
permitting, OWNER will provide Bidder access to the Site to conduct such additional
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems
necessary for preparing and submitting a successful Bid. OWNER will not have any
obligation to grant such access if doing so is not practical because of existing
operations, security or safety concerns, or restraints on OWNER’s authority regarding
the Site.
D. Bidder shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations regarding excavation
and location of utilities, obtain all permits, and comply with all terms and conditions
established by OWNER or by property OWNERs or other entities controlling the Site
with respect to schedule, access, existing operations, security, liability insurance, and
applicable safety programs.
E. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon
completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies.
4.04 OWNER’s Safety Program
A. Site visits and work at the Site may be governed by an OWNER safety program. As
the General Conditions indicate, if an OWNER safety program exists, it will be noted
in the Supplementary Conditions.
4.05 Other Work at the Site
A. Reference is made to Article 8 of the Supplementary Conditions for the identification
of the general nature of other work of which OWNER is aware (if any) that is to be
performed at the Site by OWNER or others (such as utilities and other prime
CONTRACTORs) and relates to the Work contemplated by these Bidding
Documents. If OWNER is party to a written contract for such other work, then on
request, OWNER will provide to each Bidder access to examine such contracts (other
than portions thereof related to price and other confidential matters), if any.
ARTICLE 5 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS
5.01 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:
A. examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, and any data and reference
items identified in the Bidding Documents;
B. visit the Site, conduct a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site and adjacent
areas, and become familiar with and satisfy itself as to the general, local, and Site
conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;

7/2023 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
254.07.100 00 21 13-4

C. become familiar with and satisfy itself as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect
cost, progress, and performance of the Work;
D. carefully study all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or
adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface
or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary
Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings,
and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any,
at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions,
especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings;
E. consider the information known to Bidder itself; information commonly known to
CONTRACTORS doing business in the locality of the Site; information and
observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site-
related reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the
effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress,
and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and
procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder; and (3) Bidder’s safety
precautions and programs;
F. agree, based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding
paragraph, that at the time of submitting its Bid no further examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the
determination of its Bid for performance of the Work at the price bid and within the
times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding
Documents;
G. become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by OWNER and
others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents;
H. promptly give ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that the
written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to Bidder;
I. determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey
understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance and furnishing of the
Work; and
J. agree that the submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation
by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, that without
exception the Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and
furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 6 – PRE-BID CONFERENCE
6.01 A pre-Bid conference will be held at the time and location stated in the invitation or
advertisement to bid. The pre-Bid conference is mandatory. Representatives of OWNER
and ENGINEER will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend
and participate in the conference. ENGINEER will transmit to all prospective Bidders of
record such Addenda as ENGINEER considers necessary in response to questions
arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding
or legally effective.

7/2023 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
254.07.100 00 21 13-5

ARTICLE 7 – INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
7.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted
to ENGINEER in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by
ENGINEER in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered to all
parties recorded as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than
seven days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions
answered by Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will
be without legal effect.
7.02 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, supplement, or change the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 8 – BID SECURITY
8.01 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to OWNER in an amount of
5 percent of Bidder’s maximum Bid price (determined by adding the base bid and all
alternates) and in the form of a certified check, bank money order, or a Bid bond (on the
form included in the Bidding Documents) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of
Paragraphs 6.01 and 6.02 of the General Conditions.
8.02 The Bid security of the apparent Successful Bidder will be retained until OWNER awards
the contract to such Bidder, and such Bidder has executed the Contract Documents,
furnished the required contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of
Award, whereupon the Bid security will be released. If the Successful Bidder fails to
execute and deliver the Contract Documents and furnish the required contract security
within 15 days after the Notice of Award, OWNER may consider Bidder to be in default,
annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited. Such
forfeiture shall be OWNER’s exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults.
8.03 The Bid security of other Bidders that OWNER believes to have a reasonable chance of
receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier of seven days after the
Effective Date of the Contract or 61 days after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security
furnished by such Bidders will be released.
8.04 Bid security of other Bidders that OWNER believes do not have a reasonable chance of
receiving the award will be released within seven days after the Bid opening.
ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT TIMES
9.01 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be substantially
completed and ready for final payment are set forth in the Agreement.
ARTICLE 10 – LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
10.01 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, for failure to timely attain a Milestone,
Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work in readiness for final payment, are set
forth in the Agreement.
ARTICLE 11 – SUBSTITUTE AND “OR-EQUAL” ITEMS
11.01 The Contract for the Work, as awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equip ment
specified or described in the Bidding Documents without consideration during the bidding

7/2023 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
254.07.100 00 21 13-6

and Contract award process of possible substitute or “or-equal” items. In cases in which
the Contract allows the CONTRACTOR to request that ENGINEER authorize the use of
a substitute or “or-equal” item of material or equipment, application for such acceptance
may not be made to and will not be considered by ENGINEER until after the Effective Date
of the Contract.
11.02 All prices that Bidder sets forth in its Bid shall be based on the presumption that the
CONTRACTOR will furnish the materials and equipment specified or described in the
Bidding Documents, as supplemented by Addenda. Any assumptions regarding the
possibility of post-Bid approvals of “or-equal” or substitution requests are made at Bidder’s
sole risk.
ARTICLE 12 – SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS
12.01 A Bidder shall be prepared to retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals
or entities for the performance of the Work if required by the Bidding Documents (most
commonly in the Specifications) to do so. If a prospective Bidder objects to retaining any
such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the concern is not relieved
by an Addendum, then the prospective Bidder should refrain from submitting a Bid.
12.02 Subsequent to the submittal of the Bid, OWNER may not require the Successful Bidder or
CONTRACTOR to retain any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity against
which CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection.
12.03 The apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall within five days
after Bid opening, submit to OWNER a list of the Subcontractors or Suppliers proposed
for the following portions of the Work: pumps and motors, electrical sub-contractor,
electrical equipment supplier, meters, and booster pump control valves.
If requested by OWNER, such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with
pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each
such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. If OWNER or ENGINEER, after
due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier,
individual, or entity, OWNER may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent
Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute, in which case apparent Successful
Bidder shall submit a substitute, Bidder’s Bid price will be increased (or decreased) by the
difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and OWNER may consider such price
adjustment in evaluating Bids and making the Contract award.
12.04 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, OWNER may award
the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors,
Suppliers, or other individuals or entities. Declining to make requested substitutions will
not constitute grounds for forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor,
Supplier, individual, or entity so listed and against which OWNER or ENGINEER makes
no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable
to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to subsequent revocation of such acceptance as
provided in Paragraph 7.06 of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 13 – PREPARATION OF BID
13.01 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents.

7/2023 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
254.07.100 00 21 13-7

A. All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed in ink and the Bid Form signed in ink.
Erasures or alterations shall be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid Form. A
Bid price shall be indicated for each section, Bid item, alternate, adjustment unit price
item, and unit price item listed therein.
B. If the Bid Form expressly indicates that submitting pricing on a specific alternate item
is optional, and Bidder elects to not furnish pricing for such optional alternate item,
then Bidder may enter the words “No Bid” or “Not Applicable.”
13.02 A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by a corporate officer
(whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to
sign. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown. The corporate
seal shall be affixed and attested by the corporate secretary or an assistant corporate
secretary.
13.03 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a member
or other authorized person and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state
of formation of the firm and the official address of the firm shall be shown.
13.04 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder’s name and official address.
13.05 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by an authorized representative of each joint
venturer in the manner indicated on the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture
shall be shown.
13.06 All names shall be printed in ink below the signatures.
13.07 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which
shall be filled in on the Bid Form.
13.08 Postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid
shall be shown.
13.09 The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder’s authority and qualification to do business in the
state where the Project is located, or Bidder shall covenant in writing to obtain such
authority and qualification prior to award of the Contract and attach such covenant to the
Bid. Bidder’s state contractor license number, if any, shall also be shown on the Bid Form.
ARTICLE 14 – BASIS OF BID
14.01 Unit Price
A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a unit price basis for each item of Work listed in the unit
price section of the Bid Form.
B. The “Bid Price” (sometimes referred to as the extended price) for each unit price Bid
item will be the product of the “Estimated Quantity” (which OWNER or its
representative has set forth in the Bid Form) for the item and the corresponding “Bid
Unit Price” offered by the Bidder. The total of all unit price Bid items will be the sum
of these “Bid Prices”; such total will be used by OWNER for Bid comparison purposes.
The final quantities and Contract Price will be determined in accordance with
Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions.
C. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be
resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any

7/2023 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
254.07.100 00 21 13-8

column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct
sum.
14.02 Allowances
A. For cash allowances the Bid price shall include such amounts as the Bidder deems
proper for CONTRACTOR's overhead, costs, profit, and other expenses on account
of cash allowances, if any, named in the Contract Documents, in accordance with
Paragraph 13.02.B of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 15 – SUBMITTAL OF BID
15.01 The Bid Form is to be completed and submitted with all the attachments outlined in Article
7 of the Bid Form.
15.02 A Bid shall be submitted no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place
indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid and shall be enclosed in a plainly marked
package with the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for
which the Bid is submitted), the name and address of Bidder, and shall be accompanied
by the Bid security and other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery
system, the sealed envelope containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate package
plainly marked on the outside with the notation “BID ENCLOSED.” A mailed Bid shall be
addressed to OWNER at address in Article 1.01 of Bid Form.
15.03 Bids received after the date and time prescribed for the opening of bids, or not submitted
at the correct location or in the designated manner, will not be accepted and will be
returned to the Bidder unopened.
15.04 Bidder must also complete and submit the following documents with their Bids:
A. Bid Form – Section 00 41 43
B. Bid Bond – Section 00 43 12
C. List of Subcontractors – Section 00 45 30
D. Contractor Qualifications – Section 00 44 00 (except for VanCon and COP)
ARTICLE 16 – MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID
16.01 A Bid may be withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same manner
that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted
prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. Upon receipt of such notice, the
unopened Bid will be returned to the Bidder.
16.02 If a Bidder wishes to modify its Bid prior to Bid opening, Bidder must withdraw its initial Bid
in the manner specified in Paragraph 16.01 and submit a new Bid prior to the date and
time for the opening of Bids.
16.03 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with
OWNER and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER
that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder
may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid,
that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work.

7/2023 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
254.07.100 00 21 13-9

ARTICLE 17 – OPENING OF BIDS
17.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to
bid and, unless obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts
of the base Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the
opening of Bids.
ARTICLE 18 – BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE
18.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid Form, but
OWNER may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the
end of this period.
ARTICLE 19 – EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT
19.01 OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation,
nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. OWNER will reject the
Bid of any Bidder that OWNER finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be
responsible. If Bidder purports to add terms or conditions to its Bid, takes exception to any
provision of the Bidding Documents, or attempts to alter the contents of the Contract
Documents for purposes of the Bid, then the OWNER will reject the Bid as nonresponsive;
provided that OWNER also reserves the right to waive all minor informalities not involving
price, time, or changes in the Work.
19.02 If OWNER awards the contract for the Work, such award shall be to the responsible Bidder
submitting the lowest responsive Bid.
19.03 Evaluation of Bids
A. In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the
prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be
requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.
B. For the determination of the apparent low Bidder when unit price bids are submitted,
Bids will be compared on the basis of the total of the products of the estimated quantity
of each item and unit price Bid for that item, together with any lump sum items.
19.04 In evaluating whether a Bidder is responsible, OWNER will consider the qualifications of
the Bidder and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and
Suppliers proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors
and Suppliers must be submitted as provided in the Bidding Documents.
19.05 OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to establish the
responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders and any proposed
Subcontractors or Suppliers.
ARTICLE 20 – BONDS AND INSURANCE
20.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions,
sets forth OWNER’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds and insurance.
When the Successful Bidder delivers the Agreement (executed by Successful Bidder) to
OWNER, it shall be accompanied by required bonds and insurance documentation.

7/2023 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
254.07.100 00 21 13-10

ARTICLE 21 – SIGNING OF AGREEMENT
21.01 When OWNER issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it shall be accompanied
by the unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract
Documents as identified in the Agreement. Within 15 days thereafter, Successful Bidder
shall execute and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement (and any
bonds and insurance documentation required to be delivered by the Contract Documents)
to OWNER. Within ten days thereafter, OWNER shall deliver one fully executed
counterpart of the Agreement to Successful Bidder, together with printed and electronic
copies of the Contract Documents as stated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 22 – ENGINEER/OWNER RESPONSES TO PRE-BID MEETING CONTRACTOR
QUESTIONS (FROM MAY 8, 2023 FIRST PRE-BID MEETING)
Responses to Pre Bid Meeting Contractor Questions:

1. Contractor shall put installation costs for Filter System in Bid Item 20 (not Item 29). See A1.2.
2. Contractor shall install filter media per Section 46 34 00, fifth Appendix entitled “Installation
Instructions for Equipment and Filter Media, 7 pages.”
3. WBWCD will provide the chemicals to fill both bulk tanks (Chlorine Salt and Fluoride).
4. WBWCD will call Fruit Heights and inform Contractors if they must pay for permit.
5. Contractor to perform materials testing per Sections 01 45 00 and 01 45 23.
6. There are no Davis-Bacon or “Build American” requirements.
7. WBWCD will pay for Rocky Mountain Power fees and to install permanent power facilities.
8. Contractor will pay for temporary power during construction, including temporary meter.
9. Contractor shall install (per RMP Stds) 4” (not 6”) conduit from pole NW of Site to
transformer including HDD bore under Green Road. See Elec Plans and Item A1.9.
10. The 75Kva transformer with 125A breaker on primary and 300A breaker on secondary
with 300A secondary ampacity of wiring - is all correct.
11. Q. Will customer-supplied Medium Voltage equipment come with load break elbows? Yes.
12. Q. Is it correct Rob Roy is required for part of conduit run? Yes. Tape will not be accepted.

- END OF SECTION -

7/2023 BID FORM
254.07.100 00 41 00-1

SECTION 00 41 00
BID FORM

Project Identification: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District – Green Road Wellhouse

Contract Identification and Number: 254.07.100

ARTICLE 1 - BID RECIPIENT

1.01 This Bid Is Submitted To: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District, 237 UT-193,
Layton UT 84040

1.02 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an
Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work
as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times
indicated in the Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding
Documents.

ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement and Instructions to
Bidders, including without limitations those dealing with the dispositions of Bid security. The
Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 30 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer
period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner.

ARTICLE 3 - BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS

3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that:

A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, the other related
data identified in the Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of which is
hereby acknowledged:

Addendum No. Addendum Date
____________ _____________
____________ _____________
____________ _____________

B. Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general,
local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

C. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all Federal, state, and local Laws and
Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or
relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except
Underground Facilities) which have been identified in SC-4.02, and (2) reports and
drawings of Hazard Environmental Conditions, if any, at the Site that have been
identified in SC-4.06 as containing reliable “technical data.”

7/2023 BID FORM
254.07.100 00 41 00-2

E. Bidder has considered the information known to Bidder; information commonly known to
contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations
obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site-related reports and
drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such
information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of
the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of
construction to be employed by Bidder, including applying the specific means, methods,
techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding
Documents; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs.
F. Based on the information and observations referred to in Paragraph 3.01.E above,
Bidder does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations,
tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of
the Work at the price(s) bid and within the times and in accordance with the other terms
and conditions of the Bidding Documents.

G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of the Work to be performed by Owner and others
at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.

H. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written
resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder.

I. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of
all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work for which this Bid is submitted.

J. Bidder will submit written evidence of its authority to do business in the State or other
jurisdiction where the Project is located not later than the date of its execution of the
Agreement.

ARTICLE 4 - BIDDER’S CERTIFICATION

4.01 Bidder further represents that:

A. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on the behalf of any undisclosed
individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any
group, association, organization, or corporation;

B. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a
false or sham Bid;

C. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and

D. Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in
competing for the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 4.01.D:
1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of
value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process;
2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to
influence the bidding process to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish bid prices at
7/2023 BID FORM
254.07.100 00 41 00-3

artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and
open competition;
3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders,
with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish bid prices
at artificial, non-competitive levels; and
4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly,
persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect
the execution of the Contract.
ARTICLE 5 - BASIS OF BID

5.01 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the prices
identified in the bid schedule on the following page.

A. The completion dates shall be fixed with no additional days or extensions provided for
work stoppage including weather delays.
B. Unit Prices have been computed in accordance with paragraph 11.03.B of the General
Conditions.
C. Bidder acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and are solely for
the purpose of comparison of Bids, and final payment for all Unit Price Bid items will be
based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the contract Documents.
BID SCHEDULE

Item
No. Description Unit Est
Quant.
Bid Unit
Price Bid Price
1 Mobilization / Demobilization LS 1
2 Construction Surveying LS 1
3 Testing and Testing Agency Services LS 1
4 SWPPP and Implementation LS 1
5
Owner to Pay RMP to Provide Power
to Site (excludes Contractor-installed
RMP conduits).
LS 1 $ 0 $0.00
6 All Earthwork, Haul Off Excess,
Finished Grading, Topsoils
LS 1
8 12-inch Storm Drain LF 352
8 Curb Inlet (APWA Plan 315.1) EA 5
9 8” DIP Water Pipeline and Fluoride
Injection MH LS 1
10 Misc Drains Outside BLDGs (2” to 8”) LS 1
7/2023 BID FORM
254.07.100 00 41 00-4

11 Drain MHs: 48”, 60”, 72” and 4” GV LS 1
12 Precast Conc Vault (8’x16’x9’) LS 1
13 Appurtenances for MHs & Vault: Level
Monitors, Valves, Automation, etc LS 1
14 Type E Curb & Gutter LF 710
15 4’ Wide Waterway LF 130
16
Fruit Heights Standard Det CS-04
Driveway with adjacent sidewalk and
remove exst C&G and sidewalk.
EA 1
17 (not used) LF 0 $ 0 $0.00
18 PVC Coated Chain Link Fence, Gates LF 980
19 AC Paving: 4” AC over 12” UTBC Sq Ft 16,900
20 Wellhouse Building Piping Systems
include cost to install and test Filter System LS 1
21 Wellhouse Structure LS 1
22 Fluoride Building Structure LS 1
23 Deep Well Pump & Motor LS 1
24 All Elec & I&C Systems (on- and off-
site and in 2 buildings) Complete
(except 5, 13, 23, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29)
LS 1
25 Main Control Panel & Programming LS 1
26 HVAC Systems Complete LS 1
27 Chlorination System Complete LS 1
28 Fluoridation System Complete LS 1
29 Well Water Filtration System Complete
This is price for all Filter Tech Work LS 1 $541,179 $541,179
30 Landscaping LS 1

Total Bid Schedule $

7/2023 BID FORM
254.07.100 00 41 00-5

ARTICLE 6 - TIME OF COMPLETION

6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready
for final payment in accordance with paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before
the dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement.

6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damage.

ARTICLE 7 - ATTACHEMENTS TO THIS BID

7.01 The following documents are attached to and made a condition of the Bid:

A. Required Bid security in the form of a Bid Bond (EJCDC No. C-430) or Certified Check);

B. Document 00 45 00 - List of Subcontractors;

C. Evidence of authority to do business in the state or jurisdiction of the Project; or a written
covenant to obtain such license within the time frame for acceptance of Bids.

ARTICLE 8 - DEFINED TERMS

8.01 The terms used in this Bid with the initial capital letters have the meanings indicated in the
Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions.
7/2023 BID FORM
254.07.100 00 41 00-6

ARTICLE 9 - BID SUBMITTAL

9.01 This Bid is submitted by:

If Bidder is:

An Individual

Name (typed or printed): ____________________________________________________

By: _____________________________________________________________________
(Individual’s signature)

Doing business as:
_______________________________________________________________

A Partnership

Partnership Name: _________________________________________________________

By: _____________________________________________________________________
(Signature of general partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign)

Name (typed or printed):
__________________________________________________________

A Corporation

Corporation Name:
_______________________________________________________________

State or Jurisdiction of Incorporation: ______________________________

Type (General Business, Profession, Service, Limited Liability):
___________________________

By: ___________________________________________________________________
(Signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign)

Name (typed or printed):
___________________________________________________________

Title: ____________________________________________

Attest ____________________________________________________________
(Signature of Corporate Secretary)

Date of Qualification to do business in ____________ [State or other jurisdiction where
Project is located] is ___/___/______

SEAL,
if required
by State
SEAL,
if required
by State
CORPORATE
SEAL,
if required by State
7/2023 BID FORM
254.07.100 00 41 00-7

A Joint Venture

Name of Joint Venture:
________________________________________________________

First Joint Venture Name: ____________________________________________________

By: ____________________________________________________________________
(Signature of joint venture partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign)

Name (typed or printed):
____________________________________________________________

Title: ____________________________________________

Second Joint Venture Name:
____________________________________________________

By: ____________________________________________________________________
(Signature of joint venture partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign)

Name (typed or printed):
____________________________________________________________

Title: ____________________________________________

(Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership, and
corporation that is party to the venture should be in the manner indicated above.)

Bidder’s Business address: __________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

Business Phone No. (_____)______________

Business E-Mail Address
_______________________________________________________________________

State Contractor License No. ____________________________________. (If applicable)

Employer’s Tax ID No. _______________________________________

Phone Numbers and Address for receipt of official communications, if different from
Business contact information:
_________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________

9.02 Bid submitted on ______________________________, 20___.

SEAL,
if required
by State
SEAL,
if required
by State
7/2023 BID FORM
254.07.100 00 41 00-8

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PENAL SUM FORM

07/2023 BID BOND
254.07.100 PAGE 00 43 13 - 1
SECTION 00 43 13
BID BOND
Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
BIDDER (Name and Address):

SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business):

OWNER (Name and Address):

BID
Bid Due Date:
Description: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District – Green Road Wellhouse

BOND
Bond Number:
Date (Not earlier than Bid due date):
Penal sum $
(Words) (Figures)

Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause this
Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

BIDDER SURETY
(Seal) (Seal)
Bidder’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:
Signature Signature (Attach Power of Attorney)

Print Name Print Name

Title Title

Attest: Attest:
Signature Signature

Title Title
Note: Above addresses are to be used for giving any required notice. Provide execution by any additional
parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.
PENAL SUM FORM

07/2023 BID BOND
254.07.100 PAGE 00 43 13 - 2
1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors ,
and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of
the penal sum is the extent of Bidder’s and Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this
Bond shall be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder.
2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the
Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents.
3. This obligation shall be null and void if:
3.1 Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or
any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding
Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or
3.2 All Bids are rejected by Owner, or
3.3 Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents
(or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when
required by Paragraph 5 hereof).
4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after
receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable
promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due.
5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of
Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award
including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from Bid due date without Surety’s written
consent.
6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default
required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety and in no case later than o ne year after Bid due
date.
7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in
the state in which the Project is located.
8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses
shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United
States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective
upon receipt by the party concerned.
9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the
authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and
deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby.
10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any
applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at
length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall
govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect.
11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable.

07/2023 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
254.07.100 00 44 00 - 1
SECTION 00 44 00

CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

The Bidder, unless already prequalified for this project, shall furnish the following information.
Failure to comply with this requirement will render the Bid non-responsive and may cause its
rejection. Additional sheets shall be attached as required.

A. CONTRACTOR's Contact Information:

Name:
Address:
Telephone Number:
Email Address:
B. CONTRACTOR’s Representative:
C. CONTRACTOR's License: Primary Classification
Utah State License No.
Supplemental Classifications held, if any.
D. Number of years as a contractor in Construction Work of this type:
E. Names and titles of Principal Officers of CONTRACTOR's Firm:

Name Title

Name Title

Name Title

F. Name of person who inspected site of proposed work for your firm:

Name: Date of Inspection:

G. Name, address, and telephone number of surety company and agent who will
provide the required bonds on this Contract:

07/2023 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
254.07.100 00 44 00 - 2
H. A certified copy of financial statement prepared during current fiscal year as
prepared for bank or bonding company will not be required with submission of the
Bid, but may be required by the OWNER of the apparent successful bidder prior
to award as part of the evaluation and review process.

I. List of current jobs now under construction (use additional sheets if necessary):

Client Reference
Name
Telephone
Number
Dollar
Amount
Name,
Type of Job

J. List at least three (3) similar projects (regardless of size) completed within the last
ten years (use additional sheets if necessary):

Client Reference
Name
Telephone
Number
Dollar
Amount
Name,
Type of Job

K. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, when, where
and why? (use additional sheets if necessary)

07/2023 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
254.07.100 00 44 00 - 3
L. List your major equipment available for this Contract (use additional sheets if
necessary):

CONTRACTOR's Signature

- END OF DOCUMENT -

07/2023 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
254.07.100 00 44 00 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

01/2023 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
254.07.100 00 45 16 - 1
DOCUMENT 00 45 16
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS

The bidder shall list below the names and business address of each subcontractor who will
perform Work under this Contract in excess of five percent (0.05) of the total bid price and shall
also list the portion of the work which will be done by such subcontractor. After the opening of
proposals, no changes or substitutions will be allowed without the written approval of the Owner.
NOTE: Attach additional sheets if required.

WORK TO BE PERFORMED

SUBCONTRACTOR'S NAME AND ADDRESS
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

- END OF DOCUMENT -

01/2023 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
254.07.100 00 45 16 - 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PART 2
CONTRACT FORMS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

03/2023 NOTICE OF AWARD
254.07.100 00 51 00 - 1
SECTION 00 51 00
NOTICE OF AWARD

Date: _________________

Project: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District – GREEN ROAD WELLHOUSE
Owner: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District Owner's Contract No.: 20016
Contract: GREEN ROAD WELLHOUSE Engineer's Project No.: 360.39.100
Bidder:
Bidder's Address:

You are notified that your Bid dated ___________________ for the above Contract has been
considered. You are the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for GREEN ROAD
WELLHOUSE.

Total Work

The Contract Price of your Contract is:_______________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________

Three copies of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany this Notice of
Award.
Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise made available to you immediately.
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date you receive
this Notice of Award.
1. Deliver to the Owner three fully executed counterparts of the Contract Documents.
2. Deliver with the executed Contract Documents the Contract security [Bonds] as specified
in the Instructions to Bidders (Article 20), General Conditions (Paragraph 5.01), and
Supplementary Conditions (Paragraph SC-5.01).
3. Other conditions precedent: N/A

Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you
in default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited.
Within ten days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully
executed counterpart of the Contract Documents.
Weber Basin Water Conservancy District
Owner
By:
Authorized Signature

Title

Copy to Engineer

03/2023 NOTICE OF AWARD
254.07.100 00 51 00 - 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
03/2023 AGREEMENT
254.07.100 00 52 00 - 1
SECTION 00 52 00
AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT is by and between Weber Basin Water Conservancy District (“Owner”) and
(“Contractor”).
Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1 – WORK
1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The
Work is generally described as follows:
Construct and functionally commission all parts of a 600 gpm drinking water wellhouse
system including two buildings (wellhouse and fluoride) of masonry block with pitched
roofs; 150 HP vertical turbine pump, motor, piping, valves, onsite hypochlorite
generation system, fluoridation system, filtration system with automated backwash
system, vault and monitoring, landscaping and irrigation system, HVAC, electrical,
controls, paving, C&G, sidewalks, driveways, chain link fence and gates, drainage and
water pipelines, and other work.
ARTICLE 2 – THE PROJECT
2.01 The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part
is generally described as follows: Green Road Wellhouse.
ARTICLE 3 – ENGINEER
3.01 The Project has been designed by Hansen, Allen & Luce, Inc (Engineer), which is to act as
Owner’s representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority
assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT TIMES
4.01 Time of the Essence
A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for
final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.
4.02 Dates for Substantial Completion and Final Payment
A. The project shall be substantially completed on or before May 31, 2025 and completed and
ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or
before June 30, 2025.
4.03 Liquidated Damages
03/2023 AGREEMENT
254.07.100 00 52 00 - 2
A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01
above and that Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times
specified in Paragraph 4.02 and 4.03 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in
accordance with Article 11 of the General Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays,
expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss
suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any
such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a
penalty), Contractor shall pay Owner $500.00 for each day that expires after the time specified
in Paragraph 4.02 above for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete.
After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the
remaining Work within the Contract Time or any proper extension thereof granted by Owner,
Contractor shall pay Owner $500.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in
Paragraph 4.02 or 4.03 above for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is
completed and ready for final payment.
ARTICLE 5 – CONTRACT PRICE
5.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts determine d pursuant to
Paragraphs 5.01.A below:
A. For all Work, at the prices stated in Contractor’s Bid, attached hereto as an exhibit.
ARTICLE 6 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES
6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments
A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General
Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the
General Conditions.
6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage
A. Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of
Contractor’s Applications for Payment on or about the 1st day of each month during
performance of the Work as provided in Paragraph 6.02.A.1 below. All such payments will be
measured by the schedule of values established as provided in Paragraph 2.03.3 of the
General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units
completed) or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General
Requirements.
1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to
the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments
previously made and less such amounts as Engineer may determine or Owner may
withhold, including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with Paragraph
15.01 of the General Conditions.
a. 95% percent of Work completed (with the balance being retainage). If the Work has
been 50 percent completed as determined by Engineer, and if the character and
progress of the Work have been satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, then as long as
the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to Owner and Engineer,
there will be no additional retainage; and
03/2023 AGREEMENT
254.07.100 00 52 00 - 3
b. 95% percent of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with the
balance being retainage).
B. Upon Substantial Completion, Owner shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total
payments to Contractor to 97.5 percent of the Work completed, less such amounts as
Engineer shall determine in accordance with Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and
less 100 percent of Engineer’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as
shown on the tentative list of items to be completed or corrected attached to the certificate of
Substantial Completion.
6.03 Final Payment
A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 15.05 of the
General Conditions, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by
Engineer as provided in said Paragraph 15.06.
ARTICLE 7 – INTEREST
7.01 All moneys not paid when due as provided in Article 15 of the General Conditions shall bear
interest at the rate of 4% percent per annum.
ARTICLE 8 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS
8.01 In order to induce Owner to enter into this Agreement, Contractor makes t he following
representations:
A. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related
data identified in the Bidding Documents.
B. Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general,
local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
C. Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and
Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
D. Contractor has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to
existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities), if any
and (2) reports and drawings of Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any.
E. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor; information commonly known
to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained
from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings
identified in the Contract Documents, with respect to the effect of such information,
observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by
Contractor, including any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures
of construction expressly required by the Contract Documents; and (3) Contractor’s safety
precautions and programs.
F. Based on the information and observations referred to in Paragraph 8.01.E above, Contractor
does not consider that further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data
03/2023 AGREEMENT
254.07.100 00 52 00 - 4
are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract
Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
G. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the
Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.
H. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written
resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.
I. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all
terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.
ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
9.01 Contents
A. The Contract Documents consist of the following:
1. This Agreement.
2. Performance bond (together with power of attorney).
3. Payment bond (together with power of attorney).
4. General Conditions .
5. Supplementary Conditions.
6. Specifications as listed in the Table of Contents of the Project Manual.
7. Drawings (not attached but incorporated by reference) consisting of all sheets listed in
Index of Drawings (see Sheet G-2), each bearing the following general title : Green Road
Wellhouse.
8. Addenda (numbers to , inclusive).
9. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows):
a. Contractor’s Bid
b. Documentation submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award.
10. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement and are not attached hereto:
a. Notice to Proceed.
b. Work Change Directives.
c. Change Orders
03/2023 AGREEMENT
254.07.100 00 52 00 - 5
d. Field Orders
e. Warranty Bond, if any.
B. The documents listed in Paragraph 9.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as
expressly noted otherwise above).
C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 9.
D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in
Paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 10 – MISCELLANEOUS
10.01 Terms
A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and
the Supplementary Conditions.
10.02 Assignment of Contract
A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding
on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and,
specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may
not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction
may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to
an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or
responsibility under the Contract Documents.
10.03 Successors and Assigns
A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal
representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal
representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the
Contract Documents.
10.04 Severability
A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any
Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be
valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, who agree that the Contract Documents shall
be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable
provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.
10.05 Contractor’s Certifications
A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive
practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph
10.05:
03/2023 AGREEMENT
254.07.100 00 52 00 - 6
1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of value
likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the Contract
execution;
2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence
the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner, (b) to
establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner
of the benefits of free and open competition;
3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with
or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at
artificial, non-competitive levels; and
4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or
their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution
of the Contract.

03/2023 AGREEMENT
254.07.100 00 52 00 - 7
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement. Counterparts have been
delivered to Owner and Contractor. All portions of the Contract Documents have been signed or have been
identified by Owner and Contractor or on their behalf.

This Agreement will be effective on (which is the Effective Date of the Agreement).

OWNER: CONTRACTOR
Weber Basin Water Conservancy District
By: By:
Title: Title:

(If Contractor is a corporation, a partnership,
or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority
to sign.)
Attest: Attest:
Title: Title:
Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:
Weber Basin Water Conservancy District
2837 E Highway 193
Layton, UT 84040
License No.:
(If Owner is a corporation, attach evidence
of authority to sign. If Owner is a public body,
attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution
or other documents authorizing execution
of this Agreement.)

(Where applicable)

Agent for service of process:

03/2023 AGREEMENT
254.07.100 00 52 00 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 NOTICE TO PROCEED
254.07.100 00 55 00 - 1

SECTION 00 55 00
NOTICE TO PROCEED

Date: __________________

Project: GREEN ROAD WELLHOUSE
Owner: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District Owner's Contract No.: N/A
Contract: GREEN ROAD WELLHOUSE Engineer's Project No.: 254.07.100
Contractor:
Contractor's Address:

You are notified that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run
, 2023. On or before that date, you are to start performing your obligations
under the Contract Documents. In accordance with Article 4 of the Agreement, the date of
Substantial Completion is , and the date of readiness for final payment is
.
Before you may start any Work at the Site, Paragraph 2.01.B of the General Conditions
provides that you and Owner must each deliver to the other (with copies to Engineer and other
identified additional insureds and loss payees) certificates of insurance which each is required to
purchase and maintain in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Also, before you may start any Work at the Site, you must:
• Execute Contract document provided by the City
• Apply for and receive an approved City Encroachment permit.
____________________________ ____
Owner: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District
Given by:

Authorized Signature

Title

Date
Copy to Engineer
01/2023 NOTICE TO PROCEED
254.07.100 00 55 00 - 2

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 PERFORMANCE BOND
254.07.100 PAGE 00 61 13 - 1
SECTION 00 61 13
PERFORMANCE BOND

Contractor Surety
Name: [Full formal name of Contractor] Name: [Full formal name of Surety]
Address: (principal place of business): Address: (principal place of business):
[Address of Contractor’s principal place of
business]
[Address of Surety’s principal place of
business]
Owner Contract
Name: [Full formal name of Owner] Description: (name and location):
Mailing address (principal place of business): [Owner’s project/contract name, and
location of the project] [Address of Owner’s principal place of
business] Contract
Price: [Amount from Contract]
Effective Date of
Contract:
[Date from
Contract]
Bond
Bond Amount: [Amount]
Date of Bond: [Date]
(Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective
Date of Contract)
Modifications to this Bond form: ☐ None ☐ See Paragraph 16
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in
this Performance Bond, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an
authorized officer, agent, or representative.
Contractor as Principal Surety

(Full formal name of Contractor) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)
By: By:

(Signature)

(Signature)(Attach Power of
Attorney)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:

Attest: Attest:
(Signature) (Signature)
Title: Title:
Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2)
Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where
applicable.
01/2023 PERFORMANCE BOND
254.07.100 PAGE 00 61 13 - 2
1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction
Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.
2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have
no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as
provided in Paragraph 3.
3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation under
this Bond will arise after:
3.1. The Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is
considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice may indicate whether the Owner
is requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor, and Surety to discuss the
Contractor’s performance. If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may,
within five (5) business days after receipt of the Owner’s notice, request such a
conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless
the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Paragraph 3.1 will
be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the
Owner, the Contractor, and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a
reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement does not
waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default;
3.2. The Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and
notifies the Surety; and
3.3. The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the
terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform
the Construction Contract.
4. Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Paragraph 3.1 does
not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or
release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual
prejudice.
5. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and
at the Surety’s expense take one of the following actions:
5.1. Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the
Construction Contract;
5.2. Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents
or independent contractors;
5.3. Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner
for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for
a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the
Owners concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by
a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay
to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the
Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default;
or
5.4. Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new
contractor, and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:
5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner
and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to
the Owner; or
5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for
denial.
01/2023 PERFORMANCE BOND
254.07.100 PAGE 00 61 13 - 3
6. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with reasonable promptness, the
Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional
written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations
under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the
Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 5.4, and the Owner refuses the
payment, or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice, the
Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner.
7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the
Surety to the Owner will not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction
Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety will not be greater than those of
the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay
the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication for:
7.1. the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of
the Construction Contract;
7.2. additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s
Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 5;
and
7.3. liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction
Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the
Contractor.
8. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to
the amount of this Bond.
9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are
unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price will not be
reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action will accrue
on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns.
10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction
Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.
11. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond must be instituted in any court of
competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and must
be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after
the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform
its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are
void or prohibited by law, the minimum periods of limitations available to sureties as a defense
in the jurisdiction of the suit will be applicable.
12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor must be mailed or delivered to the address
shown on the page on which their signature appears.
13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in
the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting
with said statutory or legal requirement will be deemed deleted therefrom and provisions
conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein.
When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not
as a common law bond.
14. Definitions
14.1. Balance of the Contract Price—The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor
under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made including
allowance for the Contractor for any amounts received or to be received by the Owner
in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled,
01/2023 PERFORMANCE BOND
254.07.100 PAGE 00 61 13 - 4
reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under
the Construction Contract.
14.2. Construction Contract—The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified
on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the
agreement and the Contract Documents.
14.3. Contractor Default—Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived,
to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract.
14.4. Owner Default—Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay
the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete
or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.
14.5. Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the agreement between the
Owner and Contractor.
15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term
Contractor in this Bond will be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner will be
deemed to be Contractor.
16. Modifications to this Bond are as follows: [Describe modification or enter “None”]

01/2023 PAYMENT BOND
254.07.100 PAGE 00 61 14 - 1
SECTION 00 61 14
PAYMENT BOND

Contractor Surety
Name: [Full formal name of Contractor] Name: [Full formal name of Surety]
Address: (principal place of business): Address: (principal place of business):
[Address of Contractor’s principal place of
business]
[Address of Surety’s principal place of business]
Owner Contract
Name:
Description: (name and location): [Owner’s project
Address: (principal place of business): /contract name, and location of the project]

Contract Price: [Amount, from Contract]
Effective Date of
Contract: [Date, from Contract]
Bond
Bond Amount: [Amount]
Date of Bond: [Date]
(Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of Contract)
Modifications to this Bond form: ☐ None ☐ See Paragraph 18
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in this
Payment Bond, do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or
representative.
Contractor as Principal Surety

(Full formal name of Contractor) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)
By: By:

(Signature)

(Signature)(Attach Power of Attorney)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:

Attest: Attest:
(Signature) (Signature)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:
Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to
Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where applicable.
01/2023 PAYMENT BOND
254.07.100 PAGE 00 61 14 - 2
1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials, and
equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is
incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms.
2. If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends,
indemnifies, and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens, or suits by any
person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the
performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no
obligation under this Bond.
3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the
Owner under this Bond will arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the
Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against
the Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor,
materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract,
and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to the Contractor and the
Surety.
4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at
the Surety’s expense defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered
claim, demand, lien, or suit.
5. The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond will arise after the following:
5.1. Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor
5.1.1. have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor, stating with
substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the
materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor
was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor
or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and
5.1.2. have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).
5.2. Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have sent
a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).
6. If a notice of non-payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the
Contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non-
payment under Paragraph 5.1.1.
7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable,
the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions:
7.1. Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after
receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for
challenging any amounts that are disputed; and
7.2. Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.
7.3. The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 will not be
deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire
as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have
reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under
Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable
attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and
owing to the Claimant.
8. The Surety’s total obligation will not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of
reasonable attorney’s fees provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this Bond will
be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety.
01/2023 PAYMENT BOND
254.07.100 PAGE 00 61 14 - 3
9. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract will be used
for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any
construction performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this
Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the
Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfying obligations of the Contractor and Surety
under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.
10. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of the
Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for
the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under
this Bond no obligation to make payments to or give notice on behalf of Claimants, or
otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond.
11. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction
Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.
12. No suit or action will be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of
competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction
Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant
sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor
or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by
anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions
of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to
sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit will be applicable.
13. Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor must be mailed or delivered to
the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or
Claims, however accomplished, will be sufficient compliance as of the date received.
14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in
the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting
with said statutory or legal requirement will be deemed deleted here from and provisions
conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein.
When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not
as a common law bond.
15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond,
the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to
be made.
16. Definitions
16.1. Claim—A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum:
16.1.1. The name of the Claimant;
16.1.2. The name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment
furnished;
16.1.3. A copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials,
or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction
Contract;
16.1.4. A brief description of the labor, materials, or equipment furnished;
16.1.5. The date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials
or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;
16.1.6. The total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment
furnished as of the date of the Claim;
16.1.7. The total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and
01/2023 PAYMENT BOND
254.07.100 PAGE 00 61 14 - 4
16.1.8. The total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials, or
equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim.
16.2. Claimant—An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a
subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the
performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any
individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s
lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The
intent of this Bond is to include without limitation in the terms of “labor, materials, or
equipment” that part of the water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service,
or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering
services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s
subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the
jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished.
16.3. Construction Contract—The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified
on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the
agreement and the Contract Documents.
16.4. Owner Default—Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay
the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete
or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.
16.5. Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the agreement between the
Owner and Contractor.
17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term
Contractor in this Bond will be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner will be
deemed to be Contractor.
18. Modifications to this Bond are as follows: [Describe modification or enter “None”]
CERTIFICATE OF
3/2023 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
254.07.100 00 62 50-1

SECTION 00 62 50
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

Owner: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District Owner Project No: 20016
Engineer: Hansen, Allen & Luce Engineer’s Project No.: 254.07.100
Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:
Project: WBWCD – GREEN ROAD WELLHOUSE
Contract:
This ☐ Preliminary ☐ Final Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to:
☒ All Work ☐ The following specified portions of the Work:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Date of Substantial Completion: __________________________________________________________
The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of Owner,
Contractor, and Engineer, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion of
the Work or portion thereof designated above is hereby established, subject to the provisions of the
Contract pertaining to Substantial Completion. The date of Substantial Completion in the final Certificate
of Substantial Completion marks the commencement of the contractual correction period and
applicable warranties required by the Contract.
A punch list of items to be completed or corrected is attached to this Certificate. This list may not be all-
inclusive, and the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the
Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Amendments of contractual responsibilities recorded in this Certificate should be the product of mutual
agreement of Owner and Contractor; see Paragraph 15.03.D of the General Conditions.
The responsibilities between Owner and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat,
utilities, insurance, and warranties upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work must be as provided in
the Contract, except as amended as follows:
Owner’s Amended Responsibilities: ☐ None ☐ As follows:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor’s Amended Responsibilities: ☐ None ☐ As follows:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
CERTIFICATE OF
3/2023 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
254.07.100 00 62 50-2

This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract
Documents, nor is it a release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.

Executed by Engineer Date

Accepted by Contractor Date

Accepted by Owner Date

01/2023 CHANGE ORDER FORM
254.07.100 PAGE 00 63 63 - 1
SECTION 00 63 63
CHANGE ORDER FORM

Change Order No.

Date of Issuance: Effective Date:
Owner: Owner's Contract No.: 20016
Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:
Engineer: Engineer's Project No.: 254.07.100
Project: Contract Name:
The Contract is modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order:
Description:

Attachments: [List documents supporting change]

CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES
[note changes in Milestones if applicable]
Original Contract Price: Original Contract Times:
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for Final Payment:
days or dates
[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change
Orders No. to No. :
[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change
Orders No. to No. :
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for Final Payment:

days
Contract Price prior to this Change Order: Contract Times prior to this Change Order:
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for Final Payment:
days or dates
[Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order: [Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order:
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for Final Payment:

days or dates
Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: Contract Times with all approved Change Orders:
Substantial Completion:
$ Ready for Final Payment:
days or dates
RECOMMENDED: ACCEPTED: ACCEPTED:
By: By: By:
Engineer (if required) Owner (Authorized Signature) Contractor (Authorized Signature)
Title: Title
:
Title
:

Date: Date
:
Date
:

Approved by Funding Agency (if applicable)
By: Date:
Title:

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PART 3
CONTRACT CONDITIONS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 00 72 00
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The General Conditions to be used for the Project are the Standard General Conditions of the
Construction Contract prepared by Engineers Joint Contract Documents Council (No. EJCDC C-
700, 2018 Edition) as included in this Section.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with
respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of
the contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Prepared By

Endorsed By

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
TOC Page 1 of 6
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1—Definitions and Terminology ........................................................................................................ 1
1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.02 Terminology .................................................................................................................................. 6
Article 2—Preliminary Matters ..................................................................................................................... 7
2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance......................................... 7
2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................... 7
2.03 Before Starting Construction ........................................................................................................ 7
2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives .................................. 8
2.05 Acceptance of Schedules .............................................................................................................. 8
2.06 Electronic Transmittals ................................................................................................................. 8
Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse .................................................................... 9
3.01 Intent ............................................................................................................................................. 9
3.02 Reference Standards ..................................................................................................................... 9
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ...................................................................................... 10
3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents ................................................................................. 10
3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 11
Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work .............................................................................. 11
4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ............................................................. 11
4.02 Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................ 11
4.03 Reference Points ......................................................................................................................... 11
4.04 Progress Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 12
4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress .................................................................................................. 12
Article 5—Site; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions .................... 13
5.01 Availability of Lands .................................................................................................................... 13
5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ........................................................................................................ 14
5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ............................................................................................ 15
5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................... 16

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
TOC Page 2 of 6
5.05 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................ 17
5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ............................................................................. 19
Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................. 21
6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .................................................................................. 21
6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ................................................................................................... 22
6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ................................................................................................................ 24
6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance .............................................................................. 25
6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation ..................................................................................................... 25
6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds .......................................................... 27
Article 7—Contractor’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 27
7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction .................................................................... 27
7.02 Supervision and Superintendence .............................................................................................. 27
7.03 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................. 27
7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 28
7.05 “Or Equals” .................................................................................................................................. 28
7.06 Substitutes .................................................................................................................................. 29
7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers .................................................................................. 31
7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 32
7.09 Permits ........................................................................................................................................ 33
7.10 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 33
7.11 Laws and Regulations .................................................................................................................. 33
7.12 Record Documents ...................................................................................................................... 33
7.13 Safety and Protection ................................................................................................................. 34
7.14 Hazard Communication Programs .............................................................................................. 35
7.15 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................ 35
7.16 Submittals ................................................................................................................................... 35
7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee ......................................................................... 38
7.18 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 39
7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ................................................................................ 39
Article 8—Other Work at the Site ............................................................................................................... 40
8.01 Other Work ................................................................................................................................. 40
8.02 Coordination ............................................................................................................................... 41
8.03 Legal Relationships ...................................................................................................................... 41

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
TOC Page 3 of 6
Article 9—Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................ 42
9.01 Communications to Contractor .................................................................................................. 42
9.02 Replacement of Engineer ............................................................................................................ 42
9.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 42
9.04 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................. 42
9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings ................................................................. 43
9.06 Insurance ..................................................................................................................................... 43
9.07 Change Orders ............................................................................................................................ 43
9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ............................................................................................... 43
9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................... 43
9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ...................................................................... 43
9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ........................................................................................... 43
9.12 Safety Programs .......................................................................................................................... 43
Article 10—Engineer’s Status During Construction .................................................................................... 44
10.01 Owner’s Representative .......................................................................................................... 44
10.02 Visits to Site ............................................................................................................................. 44
10.03 Resident Project Representative............................................................................................. 44
10.04 Engineer’s Authority ............................................................................................................... 44
10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work ....................................................................................... 45
10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................... 45
10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ...................................................... 45
10.08 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................ 45
Article 11—Changes to the Contract .......................................................................................................... 46
11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract .......................................................................... 46
11.02 Change Orders ........................................................................................................................ 46
11.03 Work Change Directives .......................................................................................................... 46
11.04 Field Orders ............................................................................................................................. 47
11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ................................................................................ 47
11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................ 47
11.07 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................ 47
11.08 Change of Contract Times ....................................................................................................... 49
11.09 Change Proposals .................................................................................................................... 49
11.10 Notification to Surety .............................................................................................................. 50

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
TOC Page 4 of 6
Article 12—Claims ....................................................................................................................................... 50
12.01 Claims ...................................................................................................................................... 50
Article 13—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ...................................................................... 51
13.01 Cost of the Work ..................................................................................................................... 51
13.02 Allowances .............................................................................................................................. 55
13.03 Unit Price Work ....................................................................................................................... 55
Article 14—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work .................... 56
14.01 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................ 56
14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................... 56
14.03 Defective Work ....................................................................................................................... 57
14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................ 58
14.05 Uncovering Work .................................................................................................................... 58
14.06 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................... 58
14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work ....................................................................................... 59
Article 15—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................ 59
15.01 Progress Payments .................................................................................................................. 59
15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................ 62
15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................... 62
15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy ........................................................................................................ 63
15.05 Final Inspection ....................................................................................................................... 64
15.06 Final Payment .......................................................................................................................... 64
15.07 Waiver of Claims ..................................................................................................................... 65
15.08 Correction Period .................................................................................................................... 66
Article 16—Suspension of Work and Termination ..................................................................................... 67
16.01 Owner May Suspend Work ..................................................................................................... 67
16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................ 67
16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience................................................................................. 68
16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................... 68
Article 17—Final Resolution of Disputes .................................................................................................... 69
17.01 Methods and Procedures ........................................................................................................ 69
Article 18—Miscellaneous .......................................................................................................................... 69
18.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................... 69
18.02 Computation of Times............................................................................................................. 69

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
TOC Page 5 of 6
18.03 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................. 70
18.04 Limitation of Damages ............................................................................................................ 70
18.05 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................... 70
18.06 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................ 70
18.07 Controlling Law ....................................................................................................................... 70
18.08 Assignment of Contract........................................................................................................... 70
18.09 Successors and Assigns ........................................................................................................... 70
18.10 Headings .................................................................................................................................. 70

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
TOC Page 6 of 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALL LEFT BLANK

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 70
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
1.01 Defined Terms
A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with
initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning
indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial
capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and
paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.
1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which
clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract
Documents.
2. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets forth
the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer, and
designates the specific items that are Contract Documents.
3. Application for Payment—The document prepared by Contractor, in a form acceptable to
Engineer, to request progress or final payments, and which is to be accompanied by such
supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.
4. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for
the Work to be performed.
5. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner.
6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents, and
all Addenda.
7. Bidding Requirements—The Advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders,
Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments.
8. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an
addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the
Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective Date of
the Contract.
9. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with
the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or
Contract Times; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of
the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents;
challenging a set-off against payments due; or seeking other relief with respect to the
terms of the Contract.
10. Claim
a. A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in compliance
with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment of Contract
Price or Contract Times; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 70
requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the
Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal;
seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address; or
seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.
b. A demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance
with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision
regarding a Change Proposal, or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that
Engineer has declined to address.
c. A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with
the procedural requirements set forth herein, made pursuant to Paragraph 12.01.A.4,
concerning disputes arising after Engineer has issued a recommendation of final
payment.
d. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim.
11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated
biphenyls (PCBs), lead-based paint (as defined by the HUD/EPA standard), hazardous
waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other material of any nature whatsoever
that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to Laws and Regulations
regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any
hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material.
12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between Owner and Contractor
concerning the Work.
13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which together
comprise the Contract.
14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a) achieve
Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the Work.
16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance
of the Work.
17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition.
18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and
character of the Work to be performed by Contractor.
19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the
Contract becomes effective.
20. Electronic Document—Any Project-related correspondence, attachments to
correspondence, data, documents, drawings, information, or graphics, including but not
limited to Shop Drawings and other Submittals, that are in an electronic or digital format.
21. Electronic Means—Electronic mail (email), upload/download from a secure Project
website, or other communications methods that allow: (a) the transmission or
communication of Electronic Documents; (b) the documentation of transmissions,
including sending and receipt; (c) printing of the transmitted Electronic Document by the

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 3 of 70
recipient; (d) the storage and archiving of the Electronic Document by sender and
recipient; and (e) the use by recipient of the Electronic Document for purposes permitted
by this Contract. Electronic Means does not include the use of text messaging, or of
Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, or similar social media services for transmission of
Electronic Documents.
22. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.
23. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the
Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times.
24. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of Concern
in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property
exposed thereto.
a. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the Work,
or that are to be incorporated into the Work, and that are controlled and contained
pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the
Contract, is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition.
b. The presence of Constituents of Concern that are to be removed or remediated as
part of the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition.
c. The presence of Constituents of Concern as part of the routine, anticipated, and
obvious working conditions at the Site, is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition.
25. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules,
regulations, ordinances, codes, and binding decrees, resolutions, and orders of any and
all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.
26. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds, real
property, or personal property.
27. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract requires
Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date, or by a time prior to
Substantial Completion of all the Work.
28. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of the
Bid.
29. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the
Work.
30. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the
Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work, pursuant
to the terms of the Contract.
31. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the
sequence and duration of the activities comprising Contractor’s plan to accomplish the
Work within the Contract Times.
32. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers, contractors,
and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing, commissioning, and
start-up, and of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents is a part.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 4 of 70
33. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned to
assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative (RPR)
includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative.
34. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are
representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which
such portion of the Work will be judged.
35. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required
submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals.
36. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating
portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for
reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.
37. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or
information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and
submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether
approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents.
38. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner
upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements, and
such other lands or areas furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of
Contractor.
39. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for
materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and
certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work.
40. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with
any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work.
41. Submittal—A written or graphic document, prepared by or for Contractor, which the
Contract Documents require Contractor to submit to Engineer, or that is indicated as a
Submittal in the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer. Submittals may include
Shop Drawings and Samples; schedules; product data; Owner-delegated designs;
sustainable design information; information on special procedures; testing plans; results
of tests and evaluations, source quality-control testing and inspections, and field or Site
quality-control testing and inspections; warranties and certifications; Suppliers’
instructions and reports; records of delivery of spare parts and tools; operations and
maintenance data; Project photographic documentation; record documents; and other
such documents required by the Contract Documents. Submittals, whether or not
approved or accepted by Engineer, are not Contract Documents. Change Proposals,
Change Orders, Claims, notices, Applications for Payment, and requests for interpretation
or clarification are not Submittals.
42. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has
progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part
thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the
Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended.
The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part
of the Work refer to Substantial Completion of such Work.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 5 of 70
43. Successful Bidder—The Bidder to which the Owner makes an award of contract.
44. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements these
General Conditions.
45. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor.
46. Technical Data
a. Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions,
with respect to either (1) existing subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site, or
existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site including existing surface or
subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities) or (2) Hazardous
Environmental Conditions at the Site.
b. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to
conditions at the Site, then Technical Data is defined, with respect to conditions at
the Site under Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06, as the data contained in boring logs,
recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, assessments of the condition of
subsurface facilities, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective information
regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical, environmental,
or other Site or facilities conditions report prepared for the Project and made
available to Contractor.
c. Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities
are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data, and
instead Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings.
47. Underground Facilities—All active or not-in-service underground lines, pipelines,
conduits, ducts, encasements, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other
such facilities or systems at the Site, including but not limited to those facilities or systems
that produce, transmit, distribute, or convey telephone or other communications, cable
television, fiber optic transmissions, power, electricity, light, heat, gases, oil, crude oil
products, liquid petroleum products, water, steam, waste, wastewater, storm water,
other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. An abandoned facility or
system is not an Underground Facility.
48. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
49. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result
of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce
such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment
into such construction; and may include related services such as testing, start-up, and
commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents.
50. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the Effective
Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer, ordering an
addition, deletion, or revision in the Work.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 6 of 70
1.02 Terminology
A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraphs 1.02.B, C, D, and E are not defined terms that
require initial capital letters, but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract
Documents, have the indicated meaning.
B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,”
“as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an
exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,”
“suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are
used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that
such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in
general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with
the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract
Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such
term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty
or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to
undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the
Contract Documents.
C. Day: The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next
midnight.
D. Defective: The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is
unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:
1. does not conform to the Contract Documents;
2. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test,
or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or
3. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless
responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial
Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or Paragraph 15.04).
E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide
1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment,
means to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some
other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition.
2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment,
means to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment
complete and ready for intended use.
3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or
equipment, means to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete
and ready for intended use.
4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific
services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words
“furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said
services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 7 of 70
F. Contract Price or Contract Times: References to a change in “Contract Price or Contract Times”
or “Contract Times or Contract Price” or similar, indicate that such change applies to
(1) Contract Price, (2) Contract Times, or (3) both Contract Price and Contract Times, as
warranted, even if the term “or both” is not expressed.
G. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known
technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in
accordance with such recognized meaning.
ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance
A. Performance and Payment Bonds: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the
Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner the performance bond and
payment bond (if the Contract requires Contractor to furnish such bonds).
B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the
Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional
insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates, endorsements, and other evidence of
insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6, except to the
extent the Supplementary Conditions expressly establish other dates for delivery of specific
insurance policies.
C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the signed counterparts of the Agreement and
all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor,
with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates and other
evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6.
2.02 Copies of Documents
A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully
signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format
(PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.
B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the
Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other
design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract
available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this
provision to Engineer.
2.03 Before Starting Construction
A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as otherwise
required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review:
1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for
starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones
specified in the Contract;
2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and
3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices
of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 8 of 70
into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments
during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of
overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.
2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives
A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer,
and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties
as to the Work, and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.03.A, procedures for
handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other Submittals, processing Applications for Payment,
electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required records.
B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual
to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under
the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit and receive information,
render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective
party.
2.05 Acceptance of Schedules
A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference, attended
by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review the schedules
submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A. No progress payment will be made to
Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer.
1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression
of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose
on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or
progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full
responsibility therefor.
2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a
workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.
3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance
if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the
Work.
4. If a schedule is not acceptable, Contractor will have an additional 10 days to revise and
resubmit the schedule.
2.06 Electronic Transmittals
A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor
may send, and shall accept, Electronic Documents transmitted by Electronic Means.
B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for Electronic Means, then Owner, Engineer, and
Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols.
C. Subject to any governing protocols for Electronic Means, when transmitting Electronic
Documents by Electronic Means, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long-
term compatibility, usability, or readability of the Electronic Documents resulting from the
recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware
differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the Electronic Documents.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 9 of 70
ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE
3.01 Intent
A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one Contract Document is
as binding as if required by all.
B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part
thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the
electronic versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from
such electronic versions) and the printed record version, the printed record version will
govern.
D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether
written or oral.
E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided
herein.
F. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any
Law or Regulation will be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions will continue to be
valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, which agree that the Contract Documents will
be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable
provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.
G. Nothing in the Contract Documents creates:
1. any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor,
Supplier, or other individual or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work, for the
benefit of such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; or
2. any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any
money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, except as may
otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.
3.02 Reference Standards
A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations
1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference
standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or
Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, means the standard
specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the
time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there were no Bids),
except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.
2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, and
no instruction of a Supplier, will be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of
Owner, Contractor, or Engineer from those set forth in the part of the Contract
Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be effective
to assign to Owner or Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the
performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 10 of 70
inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for
Engineer.
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies
A. Reporting Discrepancies
1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each
part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check and
verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to applicable
field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict,
error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of,
and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict, error, ambiguity,
or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an
amendment or supplement to the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.
2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of the
Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the
Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or
Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference
standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly
report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected
thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until the conflict, error,
ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or
by an amendment or supplement to the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.
3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error,
ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual
knowledge thereof.
B. Resolving Discrepancies
1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions
of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer take precedence in
resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such provisions of the
Contract Documents and:
a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or
the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference
as a Contract Document); or
b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work
(unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would
result in violation of such Law or Regulation).
3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents
A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall
submit to the Engineer in writing all matters in question concerning the requirements of the
Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation—
RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as
possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements
of the Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 11 of 70
B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or
decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract
Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and
binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner,
unless it appeals by filing a Claim.
C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract Documents
that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the Contract
Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3)
other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly notify Owner and
Contractor in writing that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or interpretation. If Owner
and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question, either party
may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12.
3.05 Reuse of Documents
A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not:
1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or
other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer
or its consultants, including electronic media versions, or reuse any such Drawings,
Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any
other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written
verification or adaptation by Engineer; or
2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse any
such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written consent, or
violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents.
B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the
Contract. Nothing herein precludes Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract
Documents for record purposes.
ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK
4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed
A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the 30th day after the Effective Date of the
Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A
Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the
Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the 60th day after
the day of Bid opening or the 30th day after the Effective Date of the Contract, whichever
date is earlier.
4.02 Starting the Work
A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence
to run. No Work may be done at the Site prior to such date.
4.03 Reference Points
A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which
in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work.
Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 12 of 70
established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or
relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer
whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires
relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for
the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by
professionally qualified personnel.
4.04 Progress Schedule
A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with
Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.
1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in
Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in
changing the Contract Times.
2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times must
be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11.
B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with Owner. No Work will be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by
Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress
A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes
with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an
equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times.
B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay,
disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay, disruption,
and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be
deemed to be within the control of Contractor.
C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by
unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and those
for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment
in Contract Times. Such an adjustment will be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the
delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption,
or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Times under this paragraph
include but are not limited to the following:
1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and
earthquakes;
2. Abnormal weather conditions;
3. Acts or failures to act of third-party utility owners or other third-party entities (other than
those third-party utility owners or other third-party entities performing other work at or
adjacent to the Site as arranged by or under contract with Owner, as contemplated in
Article 8); and
4. Acts of war or terrorism.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 13 of 70
D. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of Contract Times or Contract Price is limited as
follows:
1. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on the
delay, disruption, or interference adversely affecting an activity on the critical path to
completion of the Work, as of the time of the delay, disruption, or interference.
2. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price for any delay,
disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or
interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Such a concurrent delay by
Contractor shall not preclude an adjustment of Contract Times to which Contractor is
otherwise entitled.
3. Adjustments of Contract Times or Contract Price are subject to the provisions of
Article 11.
E. Each Contractor request or Change Proposal seeking an increase in Contract Times or Contract
Price must be supplemented by supporting data that sets forth in detail the following:
1. The circumstances that form the basis for the requested adjustment;
2. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference began to affect the
progress of the Work;
3. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference ceased to affect the
progress of the Work;
4. The number of days’ increase in Contract Times claimed as a consequence of each such
cause of delay, disruption, or interference; and
5. The impact on Contract Price, in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 11.07.
Contractor shall also furnish such additional supporting documentation as Owner or Engineer
may require including, where appropriate, a revised progress schedule indicating all the
activities affected by the delay, disruption, or interference, and an explanation of the effect
of the delay, disruption, or interference on the critical path to completion of the Work.
F. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting
from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility
that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated with
reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are
governed by Article 5, together with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E.
G. Paragraph 8.03 addresses delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress
of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site.
ARTICLE 5—SITE; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL
CONDITIONS
5.01 Availability of Lands
A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor in writing of any encumbrances or
restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which
Contractor must comply in performing the Work.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 14 of 70
B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of
record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements are
to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s
or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.
5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas
A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas
1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the
storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent
areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise,
and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably
encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction equipment or other
materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a) damage to the
Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c)
damage to any other adjacent land or areas, or to improvements, structures, utilities, or
similar facilities located at such adjacent lands or areas; and (d) for injuries and losses
sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such
damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or
conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.
2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area
because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the
Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take
immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.13, or otherwise; (b)
promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such
owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute
resolution proceeding, or in a court of competent jurisdiction; and (c) to the fullest extent
permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer,
and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against any such claim, and against all
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable,
brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party
indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part by,
or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions or
conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.
B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the
Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste
materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish,
and other debris will conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the
Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor
shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction equipment

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 15 of 70
and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not
designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be
loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part
of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them.
5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:
1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site
that contain Technical Data;
2. Those drawings of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site, including those
drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to the Site
(except Underground Facilities), that contain Technical Data; and
3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
B. Underground Facilities: Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings,
pursuant to Paragraph 5.05, and not in the drawings referred to in Paragraph 5.03.A.
Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not
intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data.
C. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the
Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such
reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such
express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the
Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b.
D. Limitations of Other Data and Documents: Except for such reliance on Technical Data,
Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their
officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors,
with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but
not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and
procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto;
2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown
or indicated in such drawings;
3. the contents of other Site-related documents made available to Contractor, such as
record drawings from other projects at or adjacent to the Site, or Owner’s archival
documents concerning the Site; or
4. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such
other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 16 of 70
5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions
A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is
uncovered or revealed at the Site:
1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled
to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate;
2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications;
3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or
4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and
generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract
Documents;
then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing
the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except
in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about
such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in
connection therewith (except with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written
statement permitting Contractor to do so.
B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph,
Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine
whether it is necessary for Owner to obtain additional exploration or tests with respect to the
condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site
condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information
from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption
of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for
any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s
findings, conclusions, and recommendations.
C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s written
findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to
Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in
question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating
whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting
Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in part.
D. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection with
the subsurface or physical condition in question may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s
review or Owner’s issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the condition in question
has been adequately documented, and analyzed on a preliminary basis, then the Engineer
may at its discretion instruct Contractor to resume such Work.
E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments
1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract
Times, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or
any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 17 of 70
Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to
the following:
a. Such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in
Paragraph 5.04.A;
b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract
Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and,
c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the
provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E.
2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times
with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if:
a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a
commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the
submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or otherwise;
b. The existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed
as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and
contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract
Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such
commitment; or
c. Contractor failed to give the written notice required by Paragraph 5.04.A.
3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or
extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then any such
adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order.
4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or
extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later than 30 days
after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the
subsurface or physical condition in question.
F. Underground Facilities; Hazardous Environmental Conditions: Paragraph 5.05 governs rights
and responsibilities regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities.
Paragraph 5.06 governs rights and responsibilities regarding Hazardous Environmental
Conditions. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03 and 5.04 are not applicable to the presence or
location of Underground Facilities, or to Hazardous Environmental Conditions.
5.05 Underground Facilities
A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, the cost of all of the following are included in the Contract Price, and Contractor
shall have full responsibility for:
1. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities
at the Site;
2. complying with applicable state and local utility damage prevention Laws and
Regulations;

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 18 of 70
3. verifying the actual location of those Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the
Contract Documents as being within the area affected by the Work, by exposing such
Underground Facilities during the course of construction;
4. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such Underground
Facilities, during construction; and
5. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and repairing
any damage thereto resulting from the Work.
B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered or
revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or
indicated on the Drawings with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after
becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or
performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by
Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing regarding such Underground Facility.
C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will:
1. promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such Underground
Facility was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated with
reasonable accuracy;
2. identify and communicate with the owner of the Underground Facility; prepare
recommendations to Owner (and if necessary issue any preliminary instructions to
Contractor) regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the
Underground Facility in question;
3. obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; determine the extent,
if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to reflect and
document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and
4. advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations.
During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such
Underground Facility.
D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of Engineer’s
written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement
to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in question
addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility, indicating
whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting
Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in part.
E. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection with
the Underground Facility may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s review or Owner’s
issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the Underground Facility in question and
conditions affected by its presence have been adequately documented, and analyzed on a
preliminary basis, then the Engineer may at its discretion instruct Contractor to resume such
Work.
F. Possible Price and Times Adjustments
1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract
Times, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 19 of 70
or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy,
or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in
Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to
the following:
a. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract
Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03;
b. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the
provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E; and
c. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B.
2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or
extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then any such
adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order.
3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or
extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later than 30 days
after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the
Underground Facility in question.
4. The information and data shown or indicated on the Drawings with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at the Site is based on information and data (a) furnished by the
owners of such Underground Facilities, or by others, (b) obtained from available records,
or (c) gathered in an investigation conducted in accordance with the current edition of
ASCE 38, Standard Guideline for the Collection and Depiction of Existing Subsurface Utility
Data, by the American Society of Civil Engineers. If such information or data is incorrect
or incomplete, Contractor’s remedies are limited to those set forth in this
Paragraph 5.05.F.
5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:
1. those reports known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have
been identified at or adjacent to the Site;
2. drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have
been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and
3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy
of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to
such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no
such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely on the accuracy of the
Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b. Except for such reliance on Technical
Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of
their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or
subcontractors, with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but
not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 20 of 70
of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs
incident thereto;
2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown
or indicated in such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such
other data, interpretations, opinions or information.
C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous
Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such
removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the
scope of the Work.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all Constituents
of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for
whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the costs of removing
and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the presence of any such
Constituents of Concern.
E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose
removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within
the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates
a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall immediately: (1) secure or
otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in
any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15); and (3)
notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner
shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified
expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting
with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely
obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by
Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created the
Hazardous Environmental Condition in question, then Owner may remove and remediate the
Hazardous Environmental Condition, and impose a set-off against payments to account for
the associated costs.
F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental
Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related
thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such condition
and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2)
specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely.
G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any,
of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, as a result of such Work stoppage, such
special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, or any costs or
expenses incurred in response to the Hazardous Environmental Condition, then within 30
days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of Work, Contractor may submit a
Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set-off. Entitlement to any such adjustment is
subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D, 4.05.E, 11.07, and 11.08.
H. If, after receipt of such written notice, Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based
on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 21 of 70
conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such
condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change procedures in
Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own
forces or others in accordance with Article 8.
I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from
and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court, arbitration,
or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental
Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was not shown or
indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents, identified as
Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or identified in the
Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2) was not created by
Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.I
obligates Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of
that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.
J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees,
agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims,
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to control, contain, or remove a
Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor
is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone
for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.J obligates Contractor to
indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or
entity’s own negligence.
K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents
of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.
ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE
6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds
A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at least
equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of
Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds must remain in effect until one year
after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period
specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or
Regulations, the terms of a prescribed bond form, the Supplementary Conditions, or other
provisions of the Contract.
B. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds (if any) as are required by the Supplementary
Conditions or other provisions of the Contract.
C. All bonds must be in the form included in the Bidding Documents or otherwise specified by
Owner prior to execution of the Contract, except as provided otherwise by Laws or

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 22 of 70
Regulations, and must be issued and signed by a surety named in “Companies Holding
Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable
Reinsuring Companies” as published in Department Circular 570 (as amended and
supplemented) by the Bureau of the Fiscal Service, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A bond
signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that
individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority must show that it is
effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed the accompanying bond.
D. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or
authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue bonds in the
required amounts.
E. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or
the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor shall promptly notify
Owner and Engineer in writing and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such
notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which must comply with the bond and
surety requirements above.
F. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from
the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.
G. Upon request to Owner from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming
to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance of the
Work, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity.
H. Upon request to Contractor from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity
claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance
of the Work, Contractor shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity.
6.02 Insurance—General Provisions
A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this article and in
the Supplementary Conditions.
B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or
Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized
in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue insurance policies for the
required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the Supplementary
Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under this Contract shall
have an A.M. Best rating of A-VII or better.
C. Alternative forms of insurance coverage, including but not limited to self-insurance and
“Occupational Accident and Excess Employer’s Indemnity Policies,” are not sufficient to meet
the insurance requirements of this Contract, unless expressly allowed in the Supplementary
Conditions.
D. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the
Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Contractor has
obtained and is maintaining the policies and coverages required by the Contract. Upon
request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such
required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies, documentation of
applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and deductibles, full disclosure of all relevant
exclusions, and evidence of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 23 of 70
Subcontractors or Suppliers. In any documentation furnished under this provision, Contractor,
Subcontractors, and Suppliers may block out (redact) (1) any confidential premium or pricing
information and (2) any wording specific to a project or jurisdiction other than those
applicable to this Contract.
E. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured identified in the
Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Owner has obtained
and is maintaining the policies and coverages required of Owner by the Contract (if any). Upon
request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence of such
required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies, documentation of
applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and deductibles, and full disclosure of all
relevant exclusions. In any documentation furnished under this provision, Owner may block
out (redact) (1) any confidential premium or pricing information and (2) any wording specific
to a project or jurisdiction other than those relevant to this Contract.
F. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other
party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or Contractor
to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, will not be construed as a
waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance.
G. In addition to the liability insurance required to be provided by Contractor, the Owner, at
Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain Owner’s own liability insurance. Owner’s liability
policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies required to be provided
by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability policies for any of
Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties.
H. Contractor shall require:
1. Subcontractors to purchase and maintain worker’s compensation, commercial general
liability, and other insurance that is appropriate for their participation in the Project, and
to name as additional insureds Owner and Engineer (and any other individuals or entities
identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on Contractor’s liability
policies) on each Subcontractor’s commercial general liability insurance policy; and
2. Suppliers to purchase and maintain insurance that is appropriate for their participation in
the Project.
I. If either party does not purchase or maintain the insurance required of such party by the
Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to
the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required
coverage.
J. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Contractor’s entitlement
to enter or remain at the Site will end immediately, and Owner may impose an appropriate
set-off against payment for any associated costs (including but not limited to the cost of
purchasing necessary insurance coverage), and exercise Owner’s termination rights under
Article 16.
K. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required
insurance, the other party may elect (but is in no way obligated) to obtain equivalent
insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required
to provide such coverage, and the Contract Price will be adjusted accordingly.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 24 of 70
L. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract
necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests. Contractor is
responsible for determining whether such coverage and limits are adequate to protect its
interests, and for obtaining and maintaining any additional insurance that Contractor deems
necessary.
M. The insurance and insurance limits required herein will not be deemed as a limitation on
Contractor’s liability, or that of its Subcontractors or Suppliers, under the indemnities granted
to Owner and other individuals and entities in the Contract or otherwise.
N. All the policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained under this Contract will
contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, or
renewal refused, until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the purchasing
policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, the purchasing
policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured and Engineer.
6.03 Contractor’s Insurance
A. Required Insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain Worker’s Compensation,
Commercial General Liability, and other insurance pursuant to the specific requirements of
the Supplementary Conditions.
B. General Provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 as supplemented
must:
1. include at least the specific coverages required;
2. be written for not less than the limits provided, or those required by Laws or Regulations,
whichever is greater;
3. remain in effect at least until the Work is complete (as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D),
and longer if expressly required elsewhere in this Contract, and at all times thereafter
when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work as a warranty
or correction obligation, or otherwise, or returning to the Site to conduct other tasks
arising from the Contract;
4. apply with respect to the performance of the Work, whether such performance is by
Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may
be liable; and
5. include all necessary endorsements to support the stated requirements.
C. Additional Insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability,
employer’s liability, umbrella or excess, pollution liability, and unmanned aerial vehicle
liability policies, if required by this Contract, must:
1. include and list as additional insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities
identified as additional insureds in the Supplementary Conditions;
2. include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees,
and consultants of all such additional insureds;
3. afford primary coverage to these additional insureds for all claims covered thereby
(including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed operations);

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 25 of 70
4. not seek contribution from insurance maintained by the additional insured; and
5. as to commercial general liability insurance, apply to additional insureds with respect to
liability caused in whole or in part by Contractor’s acts or omissions, or the acts and
omissions of those working on Contractor’s behalf, in the performance of Contractor’s
operations.
6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance
A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall
purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis, in
the amount of the Work’s full insurable replacement cost (subject to such deductible amounts
as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations).
The specific requirements applicable to the builder’s risk insurance are set forth in the
Supplementary Conditions.
B. Property Insurance for Facilities of Owner Where Work Will Occur: Owner is responsible for
obtaining and maintaining property insurance covering each existing structure, building, or
facility in which any part of the Work will occur, or to which any part of the Work will attach
or be adjoined. Such property insurance will be written on a special perils (all-risk) form, on a
replacement cost basis, providing coverage consistent with that required for the builder’s risk
insurance, and will be maintained until the Work is complete, as set forth in
Paragraph 15.06.D.
C. Property Insurance for Substantially Complete Facilities: Promptly after Substantial
Completion, and before actual occupancy or use of the substantially completed Work, Owner
will obtain property insurance for such substantially completed Work, and maintain such
property insurance at least until the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D. Such
property insurance will be written on a special perils (all-risk) form, on a replacement cost
basis, and provide coverage consistent with that required for the builder’s risk insurance. The
builder’s risk insurance may terminate upon written confirmation of Owner’s procurement of
such property insurance.
D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the
Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then
Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will
provide advance notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer, and obtain an
endorsement consenting to the continuation of coverage prior to commencing such partial
occupancy or use.
E. Insurance of Other Property; Additional Insurance: If the express insurance provisions of the
Contract do not require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, then the entity
or individual owning such property item will be responsible for insuring it. If Contractor elects
to obtain other special insurance to be included in or supplement the builder’s risk or property
insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 6.04, it may do so at Contractor’s expense.
6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation
A. The builder’s risk insurance policy purchased and maintained in accordance with
Paragraph 6.04 (or an installation floater policy if authorized by the Supplementary
Conditions), will contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or
damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 26 of 70
Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, or subcontractors.
1. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and the respective officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of
each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting
from any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other
property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against
Engineer, its consultants, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary
Conditions as builder’s risk or installation floater insureds, and the officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any
of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused.
2. None of the above waivers extends to the rights that any party making such waiver may
have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or
otherwise payable under any policy so issued.
B. Any property insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage, or
consequential loss to Owner’s existing structures, buildings, or facilities in which any part of
the Work will occur, or to which any part of the Work will attach or adjoin; to adjacent
structures, buildings, or facilities of Owner; or to part or all of the completed or substantially
completed Work, during partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after
Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to
Paragraph 15.06, will contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss
or damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or
against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of them, and that the
insured is allowed to waive the insurer’s rights of subrogation in a written contract executed
prior to the loss, damage, or consequential loss.
1. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the
officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out
of, or resulting from fire or any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss covered by such
policies.
C. The waivers in this Paragraph 6.05 include the waiver of rights due to business interruption,
loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to
Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured
peril, risk, or cause of loss.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that each Subcontract contains provisions
whereby the Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or
entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its
consultants, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants,
and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out
of, relating to, or resulting from fire or other peril, risk, or cause of loss covered by builder’s
risk insurance, installation floater, and any other property insurance applicable to the Work.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 27 of 70
6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds
A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of property insurance required by
Paragraph 6.04 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the policy.
Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to such other
insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other insured may state
its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days after notice of such
claim.
B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to multiple
insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as fiduciary
for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause. A named
insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance
required by Paragraph 6.04 shall maintain such proceeds in a segregated account, and
distribute such proceeds in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may
reach, or as otherwise required under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or
applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. If no other special agreement is reached, Contractor shall repair or replace the damaged
Work, using allocated insurance proceeds.
ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and
procedures of construction.
B. If the Contract Documents note, or Contractor determines, that professional engineering or
other design services are needed to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, or for Site safety, then Contractor
shall cause such services to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, at
Contractor’s expense. Such services are not Owner-delegated professional design services
under this Contract, and neither Owner nor Engineer has any responsibility with respect to
(1) Contractor’s determination of the need for such services, (2) the qualifications or licensing
of the design professionals retained or employed by Contractor, (3) the performance of such
services, or (4) any errors, omissions, or defects in such services.
7.02 Supervision and Superintendence
A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident
superintendent who will not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer
except under extraordinary circumstances.
7.03 Labor; Working Hours
A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the
Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall
maintain good discipline and order at the Site.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 28 of 70
B. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of
Contractor’s employees; of Suppliers and Subcontractors, and their employees; and of any
other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work, just as Contractor is
responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions.
C. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property
at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all
Work at the Site will be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday.
Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday. Contractor may
perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays only
with Owner’s written consent, which will not be unreasonably withheld.
7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment
A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume
full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction
equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water,
sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the
performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are
specifically called for in the Contract Documents.
B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work must be new and of good quality,
except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and
guarantees required by the Specifications will expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If
required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of
required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.
C. All materials and equipment must be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected,
protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable
Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.
7.05 “Or Equals”
A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Whenever an item of equipment or material is
specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the names of one or more
proprietary items or specific Suppliers, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor
furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an item is intended
to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or
description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal”
item is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of
equipment or material, or items from other proposed Suppliers, under the circumstances
described below.
1. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of equipment or material
proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that
no change in related Work will be required, Engineer will deem it an “or equal” item. For
the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of equipment or material will be
considered functionally equal to an item so named if:
a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that the proposed item:
1) is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance,
strength, and design characteristics;

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 29 of 70
2) will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results
imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole;
3) has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and
4) is not objectionable to Owner.
b. Contractor certifies that, if the proposed item is approved and incorporated into the
Work:
1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and
2) the item will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item
named in the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or equal”
item at Contractor’s expense.
C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data
about the proposed “or-equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or-
equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete
and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or-equal,” which will be evidenced by
an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will advise Contractor
in writing of any negative determination.
D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request will
result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request will be
final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the
Contract.
E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of equipment or
material proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may
request that Engineer consider the item a proposed substitute pursuant to Paragraph 7.06.
7.06 Substitutes
A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Unless the specification or description of an item of
equipment or material required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is
followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that
Engineer authorize the use of other items of equipment or material under the circumstances
described below. To the extent possible such requests must be made before commencement
of related construction at the Site.
1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to
determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that
named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests for
review of proposed substitute items of equipment or material from anyone other than
Contractor.
2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.06.B, as
supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the
circumstances.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 30 of 70
3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute
item of equipment or material that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application:
a. will certify that the proposed substitute item will:
1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the
general design;
2) be similar in substance to the item specified; and
3) be suited to the same use as the item specified.
b. will state:
1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will
necessitate a change in Contract Times;
2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in
any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract
with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed
substitute item; and
3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with
the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty.
c. will identify:
1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from the item specified; and
2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services.
d. will contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or
indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in
Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors
affected by any resulting change.
B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner.
Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute
item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered, furnished,
installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the
proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be evidenced by a
Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution itself and all related
impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Engineer will advise
Contractor in writing of any negative determination.
C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special
performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.
D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a
substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a
substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the
reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall
also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the
Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting
from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 31 of 70
E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute
at Contractor’s expense.
F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request, Contractor
shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution. The Engineer’s
denial of a substitution request will be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an
appeal under any provision of the Contract. Contractor may challenge the scope of
reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.06.D, by timely submittal of a Change
Proposal.
7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers
A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work.
Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. The Contractor’s retention
of a Subcontractor or Supplier for the performance of parts of the Work will not relieve
Contractor’s obligation to Owner to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
B. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of
designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so.
C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the
Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor or Supplier to furnish
or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has reasonable objection.
D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to
Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already
deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable during the bidding process or
otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner
unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 5 days.
E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier. Owner also may
require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not
require a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has
submitted the identity of certain Subcontractors or Suppliers for acceptance by Owner, and
Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto), then
Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any such Subcontractor or Supplier so
identified solely on the basis of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation.
Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor or
Supplier.
F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier retained by Contractor
to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in
Contract Price or Contract Times, with respect to the replacement; and Contractor shall
initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30 days of Owner’s requirement of
replacement.
G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor or Supplier, whether initially or as a
replacement, will constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 32 of 70
H. On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors
and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and
Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal.
I. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of
Subcontractors and Suppliers.
J. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings do not
control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or in delineating
the Work to be performed by any specific trade.
K. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier must be pursuant to an
appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to
the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
L. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information
about amounts paid to Contractor for Work performed for Contractor by the Subcontractor
or Supplier.
M. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors and Suppliers from communicating with Engineer
or Owner, except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly
allowed in this Contract.
7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties
A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in
the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design,
process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others.
If an invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for
use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its
use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or
royalty to others, the existence of such rights will be disclosed in the Contract Documents.
B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, and subcontractors, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or
relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the
performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention,
design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as
being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or
copyrights.
C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees,
agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims,
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights
incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the
Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract
Documents.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 33 of 70
7.09 Permits
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all
construction permits, licenses, and certificates of occupancy. Owner shall assist Contractor,
when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental
charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable
at the time of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a
negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for
providing permanent service to the Work.
7.10 Taxes
A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by
Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are
applicable during the performance of the Work.
7.11 Laws and Regulations
A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations
applicable to the performance of the Work. Neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible
for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.
B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to know
that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and losses,
and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of
them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all
fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work or other
action. It is not Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Work described in the
Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this does not relieve
Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03.
C. Owner or Contractor may give written notice to the other party of any changes after the
submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a
negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of
performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations having
an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar
taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or
extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from such
changes, then within 30 days of such written notice Contractor may submit a Change
Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim.
7.12 Record Documents
A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings,
Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written
interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such
record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during
construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be available
to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record
documents to Engineer.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 34 of 70
7.13 Safety and Protection
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve
Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance
of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations.
B. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative whose duties
and responsibilities are the prevention of Work-related accidents and the maintenance and
supervision of safety precautions and programs.
C. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the
necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to:
1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;
2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage
on or off the Site; and
3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground
Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of
construction.
D. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.13.C.2 or 7.13.C.3
caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier,
or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform
any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or
Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any
of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or
indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor,
Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them).
E. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of
persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss;
and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.
F. Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property; the owners of Underground
Facilities and other utilities (if the identity of such owners is known to Contractor); and other
contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site, in writing, when
Contractor knows that prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with
them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in
progress.
G. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any.
Any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work are identified or included in the
Supplementary Conditions or Specifications.
H. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s
safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must
comply while at the Site.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 35 of 70
I. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will continue until all the
Work is completed, Engineer has issued a written notice to Owner and Contractor in
accordance with Paragraph 15.06.C that the Work is acceptable, and Contractor has left the
Site (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).
J. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will resume whenever
Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction
obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.
7.14 Hazard Communication Programs
A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of safety data sheets (formerly
known as material safety data sheets) or other hazard communication information required
to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance
with Laws or Regulations.
7.15 Emergencies
A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the
Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury, or loss.
Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant
changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused by an
emergency, or are required as a result of Contractor’s response to an emergency. If Engineer
determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of an emergency or
Contractor’s response, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.
7.16 Submittals
A. Shop Drawing and Sample Requirements
1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall:
a. review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and
Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents;
b. determine and verify:
1) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design
criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar
information with respect to the Submittal;
2) the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated
application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation
pertaining to the performance of the Work; and
3) all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods,
techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions
and programs incident thereto;
c. confirm that the Submittal is complete with respect to all related data included in the
Submittal.
2. Each Shop Drawing or Sample must bear a stamp or specific written certification that
Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with
respect to Contractor’s review of that Submittal, and that Contractor approves the
Submittal.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 36 of 70
3. With each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice
of any variations that the Submittal may have from the requirements of the Contract
Documents. This notice must be set forth in a written communication separate from the
Submittal; and, in addition, in the case of a Shop Drawing by a specific notation made on
the Shop Drawing itself.
B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall label and submit Shop
Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted
Schedule of Submittals.
1. Shop Drawings
a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications.
b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings must be complete with respect to quantities,
dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to
show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide, and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes
required by Paragraph 7.16.C.
2. Samples
a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications.
b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data
such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may
require to enable Engineer to review the Submittal for the limited purposes required
by Paragraph 7.16.C.
3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule
of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the
pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor.
C. Engineer’s Review of Shop Drawings and Samples
1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the
accepted Schedule of Submittals. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to
determine if the items covered by the Submittals will, after installation or incorporation
in the Work, comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and be
compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as
indicated by the Contract Documents.
2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques,
sequences, or procedures of construction, or to safety precautions or programs incident
thereto.
3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of
the assembly in which the item functions.
4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Contractor
from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents
unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and
Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation
thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer will

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 37 of 70
document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Contract
Documents in a Field Order or other appropriate Contract modification.
5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Contractor
from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraphs 7.16.A and B.
6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from the
requirements of the Contract Documents, will not, under any circumstances, change the
Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order.
7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance, or approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample
will result in such item becoming a Contract Document.
8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and
commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the provisions
of Paragraph 7.16.C.4.
D. Resubmittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples
1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required
number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for
review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other
than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous Submittals.
2. Contractor shall furnish required Shop Drawing and Sample submittals with sufficient
information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than two
resubmittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a third or subsequent
resubmittal of a Shop Drawing or Sample, and Contractor shall be responsible for
Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set-off against payments
due Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges.
3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved Shop Drawing or Sample,
Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and
Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor to secure reimbursement
for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor.
E. Submittals Other than Shop Drawings, Samples, and Owner-Delegated Designs
1. The following provisions apply to all Submittals other than Shop Drawings, Samples, and
Owner-delegated designs:
a. Contractor shall submit all such Submittals to the Engineer in accordance with the
Schedule of Submittals and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Contract
Documents.
b. Engineer will provide timely review of all such Submittals in accordance with the
Schedule of Submittals and return such Submittals with a notation of either Accepted
or Not Accepted. Any such Submittal that is not returned within the time established
in the Schedule of Submittals will be deemed accepted.
c. Engineer’s review will be only to determine if the Submittal is acceptable under the
requirements of the Contract Documents as to general form and content of the
Submittal.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 38 of 70
d. If any such Submittal is not accepted, Contractor shall confer with Engineer regarding
the reason for the non-acceptance, and resubmit an acceptable document.
2. Procedures for the submittal and acceptance of the Progress Schedule, the Schedule of
Submittals, and the Schedule of Values are set forth in Paragraphs 2.03. 2.04, and 2.05.
F. Owner-delegated Designs: Submittals pursuant to Owner-delegated designs are governed by
the provisions of Paragraph 7.19.
7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the
Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer is entitled to rely on Contractor’s
warranty and guarantee.
B. Owner’s rights under this warranty and guarantee are in addition to, and are not limited by,
Owner’s rights under the correction period provisions of Paragraph 15.08. The time in which
Owner may enforce its warranty and guarantee rights under this Paragraph 7.17 is limited
only by applicable Laws and Regulations restricting actions to enforce such rights; provided,
however, that after the end of the correction period under Paragraph 15.08:
1. Owner shall give Contractor written notice of any defective Work within 60 days of the
discovery that such Work is defective; and
2. Such notice will be deemed the start of an event giving rise to a Claim under
Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim must be brought within 30 days of the
notice.
C. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:
1. abuse, or improper modification, maintenance, or operation, by persons other than
Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom
Contractor is responsible; or
2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.
D. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents is absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is
not in accordance with the Contract Documents, a release of Contractor’s obligation to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or a release of Owner’s
warranty and guarantee rights under this Paragraph 7.17:
1. Observations by Engineer;
2. Recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;
3. The issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment
related thereto by Owner;
4. Use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;
5. Any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal;
6. The issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer;
7. The end of the correction period established in Paragraph 15.08;
8. Any inspection, test, or approval by others; or

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 39 of 70
9. Any correction of defective Work by Owner.
E. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into by
Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in the
assigned contract will govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner
for the Work described in the assigned contract.
7.18 Indemnification
A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other
obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and
hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from losses,
damages, costs, and judgments (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising from third-party claims or actions relating to or resulting from the
performance or furnishing of the Work, provided that any such claim, action, loss, cost,
judgment or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to damage
to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use
resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them
may be liable.
B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, by any employee (or the survivor
or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier,
or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of
the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
under Paragraph 7.18.A will not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type
of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such
Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts,
disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.
7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services
A. Owner may require Contractor to provide professional design services for a portion of the
Work by express delegation in the Contract Documents. Such delegation will specify the
performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy, and the Submittals that
Contractor must furnish to Engineer with respect to the Owner-delegated design.
B. Contractor shall cause such Owner-delegated professional design services to be provided
pursuant to the professional standard of care by a properly licensed design professional,
whose signature and seal must appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications,
certifications, and Submittals prepared by such design professional. Such design professional
must issue all certifications of design required by Laws and Regulations.
C. If a Shop Drawing or other Submittal related to the Owner-delegated design is prepared by
Contractor, a Subcontractor, or others for submittal to Engineer, then such Shop Drawing or
other Submittal must bear the written approval of Contractor’s design professional when
submitted by Contractor to Engineer.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 40 of 70
D. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness
of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by the design
professionals retained or employed by Contractor under an Owner-delegated design, subject
to the professional standard of care and the performance and design criteria stated in the
Contract Documents.
E. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.19, Engineer’s review, approval, and other determinations
regarding design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other Submittals
furnished by Contractor pursuant to an Owner-delegated design will be only for the following
limited purposes:
1. Checking for conformance with the requirements of this Paragraph 7.19;
2. Confirming that Contractor (through its design professionals) has used the performance
and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents; and
3. Establishing that the design furnished by Contractor is consistent with the design concept
expressed in the Contract Documents.
F. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of performance or design criteria
specified by Owner or Engineer.
G. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and
Regulations.
ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
8.01 Other Work
A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may
perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by Owner’s
employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner may also
arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or
adjacent to the Site.
B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or through
contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior
to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding the start of any
third-party utility work that Owner has arranged to take place at or adjacent to the Site,
Owner shall provide such information to Contractor.
C. Contractor shall afford proper and safe access to the Site to each contractor that performs
such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is
performing other work with Owner’s employees, and provide a reasonable opportunity for
the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other
work.
D. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to
properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate
with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting,
excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or
alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be
affected.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 41 of 70
E. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work
performed by others, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to
Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it
unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work.
Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and
proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in
such other work.
F. The provisions of this article are not applicable to work that is performed by third-party
utilities or other third-party entities without a contract with Owner, or that is performed
without having been arranged by Owner. If such work occurs, then any related delay,
disruption, or interference incurred by Contractor is governed by the provisions of
Paragraph 4.05.C.3.
8.02 Coordination
A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to
the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to
arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be
set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any
such other work:
1. The identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for
coordination of the activities among the various contractors;
2. An itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility;
and
3. The extent of such authority and responsibilities.
B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority
and responsibility for such coordination.
8.03 Legal Relationships
A. If, in the course of performing other work for Owner at or adjacent to the Site, the Owner’s
employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner that Owner has
arranged to perform work, causes damage to the Work or to the property of Contractor or its
Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts, interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the
performance of the Work, through actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an
equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. Contractor must submit any
Change Proposal seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times
under this paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering
event. The entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment will take into account
information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the Contract
Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms of the
Contract, and any remedies available to Contractor under Laws or Regulations concerning
utility action or inaction. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price
will be conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other
contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that
is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract
Times or Contract Price is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 42 of 70
B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying,
disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner
performing other work at or adjacent to the Site.
1. If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or
interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner, then Owner may
impose a set-off against payments due Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or
utility owner the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach
of the obligations set forth in this Paragraph 8.03.B.
2. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees,
Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable
direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of
Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s
other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may
impose a set-off against payments due Contractor.
C. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor,
or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s
failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim
arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at or
adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor,
Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all
parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve
the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) indemnify
and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against
any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all
fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such damage, delay,
disruption, or interference.
ARTICLE 9—OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
9.01 Communications to Contractor
A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all
communications to Contractor through Engineer.
9.02 Replacement of Engineer
A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor
makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s
status under the Contract Documents will be that of the former Engineer.
9.03 Furnish Data
A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.
9.04 Pay When Due
A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the Agreement.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 43 of 70
9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings
A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01.
B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points
are set forth in Paragraph 4.03.
C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of
explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions relating
to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site.
9.06 Insurance
A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and
property insurance are set forth in Article 6.
9.07 Change Orders
A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11.
9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals
A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in
Paragraph 14.02.B.
9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities
A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible
for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or
the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to
comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not
be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition
A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set
forth in Paragraph 5.06.
9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements
A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that
financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract
(including obligations under proposed changes in the Work).
9.12 Safety Programs
A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed.
B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 44 of 70
ARTICLE 10—ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
10.01 Owner’s Representative
A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract.
10.02 Visits to Site
A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of
construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe, as an experienced and
qualified design professional, the progress that has been made and the quality of the various
aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and
observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is
proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to
make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the
Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of
confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On
the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress
of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work.
B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and
responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.07. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a
result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise,
direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods,
techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and
programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and
Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.
10.03 Resident Project Representative
A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project
Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the progress
and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project
Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the
responsibilities thereof will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions and in
Paragraph 10.07.
B. If Owner designates an individual or entity who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or
employee to represent Owner at the Site, then the responsibilities and authority of such
individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
10.04 Engineer’s Authority
A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14.
B. Engineer’s authority as to Submittals is set forth in Paragraph 7.16.
C. Engineer’s authority as to design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications and
other Submittals from Contractor in response to Owner’s delegation (if any) to Contractor of
professional design services, is set forth in Paragraph 7.19.
D. Engineer’s authority as to changes in the Work is set forth in Article 11.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 45 of 70
E. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15.
10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work
A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed
by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03.
10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work
A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and
judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for
initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such
decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will
not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings,
interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith.
10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities
A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other
provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise
or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance
of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, will create, impose, or give rise to any duty in
contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier,
any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.
B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for
Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the
safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply
with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be
responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work.
D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, and
all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of
inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by
Contractor under Paragraph 15.06.A, will only be to determine generally that their content
complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and
approvals, that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.07 also apply
to the Resident Project Representative, if any.
10.08 Compliance with Safety Program
A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs of which Engineer has
been informed.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 46 of 70
ARTICLE 11—CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT
11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract
A. The Contract may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work Change Directive,
or a Field Order.
B. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract includes a change in the Contract Price or
the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change Order.
C. All changes to the Contract that involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work,
(2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other
engineering or technical matters, must be supported by Engineer’s recommendation. Owner
and Contractor may amend other terms and conditions of the Contract without the
recommendation of the Engineer.
11.02 Change Orders
A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering:
1. Changes in Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including
any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with
a Work Change Directive;
2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has duly
contested such set-off;
3. Changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.05,
(b) required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or
Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the
parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work
involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise) or other
engineering or technical matters; and
4. Changes that embody the substance of any final and binding results under:
Paragraph 11.03.B, resolving the impact of a Work Change Directive; Paragraph 11.09,
concerning Change Proposals; Article 12, Claims; Paragraph 13.02.D, final adjustments
resulting from allowances; Paragraph 13.03.D, final adjustments relating to
determination of quantities for Unit Price Work; and similar provisions.
B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed
under the terms of Paragraph 11.02.A, it will be deemed to be of full force and effect, as if
fully executed.
11.03 Work Change Directives
A. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is
evidence that the parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Work
Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following
negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract
Price and Contract Times; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the
terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including
Paragraph 11.07 regarding change of Contract Price.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 47 of 70
B. If Owner has issued a Work Change Directive and:
1. Contractor believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is necessary,
then Contractor shall submit any Change Proposal seeking such an adjustment no later
than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive.
2. Owner believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is necessary, then
Owner shall submit any Claim seeking such an adjustment no later than 60 days after
issuance of the Work Change Directive.
11.04 Field Orders
A. Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an
adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design
concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract
Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner
and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved promptly.
B. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or
Contract Times, then before proceeding with the Work at issue, Contractor shall submit a
Change Proposal as provided herein.
11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work
A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time
or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Changes involving
the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise) or other engineering or
technical matters will be supported by Engineer’s recommendation.
B. Such changes in the Work may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Owner and Contractor
have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract Times or Contract Price; or by
a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly
proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, promptly cease
construction activities with respect to such deleted Work. Added or revised Work must be
performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents.
C. Nothing in this Paragraph 11.05 obligates Contractor to undertake work that Contractor
reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety
obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations.
11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work
A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency as
provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in
Paragraph 14.05.C.2.
11.07 Change of Contract Price
A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an
adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09. Any
Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 12.
B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows:

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 48 of 70
1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents,
then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to
the provisions of Paragraph 13.03);
2. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract
Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for
overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2); or
3. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract
Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on the
basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a
Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.07.C).
C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit will be
determined as follows:
1. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or
2. If a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the
various portions of the Cost of the Work:
a. For costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee will
be 15 percent;
b. For costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee will be 5 percent;
c. Where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a
fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a and
11.07.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee will be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent of the
costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2 by the Subcontractor that
actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with respect to Contractor itself
and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually
performs the Work, a fee of 5 percent of the amount (fee plus underlying costs
incurred) attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor; provided, however, that
for any such subcontracted Work the maximum total fee to be paid by Owner will be
no greater than 27 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually
performs the Work;
d. No fee will be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4,
13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C;
e. The amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which
results in a net decrease in Cost of the Work will be the amount of the actual net
decrease in Cost of the Work and a deduction of an additional amount equal to
5 percent of such actual net decrease in Cost of the Work; and
f. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change or Change Proposal,
the adjustment in Contractor’s fee will be computed by determining the sum of the
costs in each of the cost categories in Paragraph 13.01.B (specifically, payroll costs,
Paragraph 13.01.B.1; incorporated materials and equipment costs,
Paragraph 13.01.B.2; Subcontract costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.3; special consultants
costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.4; and other costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.5) and applying to
each such cost category sum the appropriate fee from Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a
through 11.07.C.2.e, inclusive.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 49 of 70
11.08 Change of Contract Times
A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an
adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09. Any
Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 12.
B. Delay, disruption, and interference in the Work, and any related changes in Contract Times,
are addressed in and governed by Paragraph 4.05.
11.09 Change Proposals
A. Purpose and Content: Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an
adjustment in the Contract Times or Contract Price; contest an initial decision by Engineer
concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of
the Work under the Contract Documents; challenge a set-off against payment due; or seek
other relief under the Contract. The Change Proposal will specify any proposed change in
Contract Times or Contract Price, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the
proposed change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract
Documents. Each Change Proposal will address only one issue, or a set of closely related
issues.
B. Change Proposal Procedures
1. Submittal: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer within 30 days after
the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after such initial decision.
2. Supporting Data: The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the proposed
change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and Owner within
15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal.
a. Change Proposals based on or related to delay, interruption, or interference must
comply with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E.
b. Change proposals related to a change of Contract Price must include full and detailed
accounts of materials incorporated into the Work and labor and equipment used for
the subject Work.
The supporting data must be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting
data are accurate and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the
entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event.
3. Engineer’s Initial Review: Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and
consider any comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal. If in its
discretion Engineer concludes that additional supporting data is needed before
conducting a full review and making a decision regarding the Change Proposal, then
Engineer may request that Contractor submit such additional supporting data by a date
specified by Engineer, prior to Engineer beginning its full review of the Change Proposal.
4. Engineer’s Full Review and Action on the Change Proposal: Upon receipt of Contractor’s
supporting data (including any additional data requested by Engineer), Engineer will
conduct a full review of each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after such receipt of
the Contractor’s supporting data, either approve the Change Proposal in whole, deny it in
whole, or approve it in part and deny it in part. Such actions must be in writing, with a
copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take action on the Change

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 50 of 70
Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter
submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of Engineer’s inaction the
Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the
denial under Article 12.
5. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision is final and binding upon Owner and Contractor,
unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under Article 12.
C. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design
(as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or
other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties in writing that
the Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of
such a Change Proposal, such notice will be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose to
seek resolution under the terms of Article 12.
D. Post-Completion: Contractor shall not submit any Change Proposals after Engineer issues a
written recommendation of final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.B.
11.10 Notification to Surety
A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the
general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not
limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s
responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of
any such change.
ARTICLE 12—CLAIMS
12.01 Claims
A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor are subject to the
Claims process set forth in this article:
1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals;
2. Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other relief
under the Contract Documents;
3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the design
(as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work,
or other engineering or technical matters; and
4. Subject to the waiver provisions of Paragraph 15.07, any dispute arising after Engineer
has issued a written recommendation of final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.B.
B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to
the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving
rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision
under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the Engineer, for its
information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the party making the
Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Times or
Contract Price, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the
supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 51 of 70
and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to
which Contractor is entitled.
C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full
consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the
exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for
resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim will be stated in writing
and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer.
D. Mediation
1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to
mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate will stay the Claim
submittal and response process.
2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such agreement,
either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the
Claim submittal and decision process will resume as of the date of the termination. If the
mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim submittal and
decision process will resume as of the date of the conclusion of the mediation, as
determined by the mediator.
3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs.
E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in part,
such action will be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other party
invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes.
F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim
may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does
not take action on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time
thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction, the
Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A denial of
the Claim will be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other party invokes
the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes.
G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, whether
through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a Claim is
approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become final and
binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a
Change Order or other written document to the extent they affect the Contract, including the
Work, the Contract Times, or the Contract Price.
ARTICLE 13—COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK
13.01 Cost of the Work
A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum
of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined
below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes:
1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract
Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 52 of 70
2. When needed to determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off,
or other adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is
determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those
additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because
of the event giving rise to the adjustment.
B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in
the Cost of the Work will be in amounts no higher than those commonly incurred in the
locality of the Project, will not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and will
include only the following items:
1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the
Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor in
advance of the subject Work. Such employees include, without limitation,
superintendents, foremen, safety managers, safety representatives, and other personnel
employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on
the Work will be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs
include, but are not limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which
include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’
compensation, health and retirement benefits, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay
applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours,
on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, will be included in the above to the extent
authorized by Owner.
2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including
costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in
connection therewith. All cash discounts accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits
funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts
will accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of
surplus materials and equipment will accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make
provisions so that they may be obtained.
3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors.
If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors
acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, which will then
determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any
subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work
plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee will be determined in the same
manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01.
4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing
laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed or retained for services
specifically related to the Work.
5. Other costs consisting of the following:
a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of
Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.
b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment,
machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, which are

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 53 of 70
consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items
used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor.
1) In establishing included costs for materials such as scaffolding, plating, or
sheeting, consideration will be given to the actual or the estimated life of the
material for use on other projects; or rental rates may be established on the basis
of purchase or salvage value of such items, whichever is less. Contractor will not
be eligible for compensation for such items in an amount that exceeds the
purchase cost of such item.
c. Construction Equipment Rental
1) Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof, in
accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner as to price (including any
surcharge or special rates applicable to overtime use of the construction
equipment or machinery), and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading,
assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs will be in accordance
with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment,
machinery, or parts must cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for
the Work.
2) Costs for equipment and machinery owned by Contractor or a Contractor-related
entity will be paid at a rate shown for such equipment in the equipment rental
rate book specified in the Supplementary Conditions. An hourly rate will be
computed by dividing the monthly rates by 176. These computed rates will
include all operating costs.
3) With respect to Work that is the result of a Change Order, Change Proposal,
Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price (“changed Work”), included
costs will be based on the time the equipment or machinery is in use on the
changed Work and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly,
dismantling, and removal when directly attributable to the changed Work. The
cost of any such equipment or machinery, or parts thereof, must cease to accrue
when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the changed Work.
d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which
Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.
e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them
may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.
f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not
compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with
the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible
amounts of builder’s risk or other property insurance established in accordance with
Paragraph 6.04), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other
than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses
include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such
losses, damages, and expenses will be included in the Cost of the Work for the
purpose of determining Contractor’s fee.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 54 of 70
g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.
h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier
services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work.
i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by the
Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.
C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work does not include any of the following items:
1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals,
general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants,
purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel
employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office
for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon
schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered
by Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to
be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.
2. The cost of purchasing, renting, or furnishing small tools and hand tools.
3. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the
Site.
4. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital
employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.
5. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including
but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment
wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.
6. Expenses incurred in preparing and advancing Claims.
7. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not
specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B.
D. Contractor’s Fee
1. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus-a-fee, then:
a. Contractor’s fee for the Work set forth in the Contract Documents as of the Effective
Date of the Contract will be determined as set forth in the Agreement.
b. for any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other
adjustment in Contract Price on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee will be
determined as follows:
1) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a percentage of the Cost of the Work,
the fee will automatically adjust as the Cost of the Work changes.
2) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a fixed fee, the fee for any additions or
deletions will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2.
2. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of a stipulated sum, or any other
basis other than cost-plus-a-fee, then Contractor’s fee for any Work covered by a Change

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 55 of 70
Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price on the basis
of Cost of the Work will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2.
E. Documentation and Audit: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be
determined pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor and pertinent Subcontractors will establish
and maintain records of the costs in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices.
Subject to prior written notice, Owner will be afforded reasonable access, during normal
business hours, to all Contractor’s accounts, records, books, correspondence, instructions,
drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work
and Contractor’s fee. Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of three years
after the final payment by Owner. Pertinent Subcontractors will afford such access to Owner,
and preserve such documents, to the same extent required of Contractor.
13.02 Allowances
A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in
the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums
and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that:
1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts)
of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and
all applicable taxes; and
2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead,
profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in
the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment for
any of the foregoing will be valid.
C. Owner’s Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that an Owner’s contingency allowance,
if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs.
D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by
Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor for Work covered by allowances, and the
Contract Price will be correspondingly adjusted.
13.03 Unit Price Work
A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal
to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the
estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.
B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for
the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to
Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities.
C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate
to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.
D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed
by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary
determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by
recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 56 of 70
thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual
conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, and the final adjustment of
Contract Price will be set forth in a Change Order, subject to the provisions of the following
paragraph.
E. Adjustments in Unit Price
1. Contractor or Owner shall be entitled to an adjustment in the unit price with respect to
an item of Unit Price Work if:
a. the quantity of the item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially
and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the
Agreement; and
b. Contractor’s unit costs to perform the item of Unit Price Work have changed
materially and significantly as a result of the quantity change.
2. The adjustment in unit price will account for and be coordinated with any related changes
in quantities of other items of Work, and in Contractor’s costs to perform such other
Work, such that the resulting overall change in Contract Price is equitable to Owner and
Contractor.
3. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item.
ARTICLE 14—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
14.01 Access to Work
A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner,
independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction have access to the Site
and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor
shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s
safety procedures and programs so that they may comply with such procedures and programs
as applicable.
14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals
A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts
thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing
personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests.
B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory,
or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required
by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs incurred
in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work will be governed by the provisions of
Paragraph 14.05.
C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of
such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such
inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer
the required certificates of inspection or approval.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 57 of 70
D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and
tests required:
1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate
responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner;
2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be
incorporated in the Work;
3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents;
4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be
incorporated into the Work; and
5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to
Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.
Such inspections and tests will be performed by independent inspectors, testing laboratories,
or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner,
Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals.
F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by
Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering will be at Contractor’s expense
unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the
same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
14.03 Defective Work
A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not defective.
B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective, and
to reject defective Work.
C. Notice of Defects: Prompt written notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer
has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor.
D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective
Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed,
or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the Project and
replace it with Work that is not defective.
E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no action
that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said
Work.
F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations with
respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising
out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the inspection,
testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective Work, fines
levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is defective, and the
costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective Work. Prior to final
payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the measure of such claims, costs,

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 58 of 70
losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then Owner may impose a reasonable
set-off against payments due under Article 15.
14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work
A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner
prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final
payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the design
intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety). Contractor
shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and
determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to
reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid
by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions
in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work will be incorporated in a Change Order.
If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the
diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against
payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final
payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to Owner.
14.05 Uncovering Work
A. Engineer has the authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work, whether
or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.
B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if
requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace the
covering, all at Contractor’s expense.
C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or
inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose,
or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require,
that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and
equipment.
1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for all
claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure,
observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and
pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to
impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.
2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an
increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, directly attributable
to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and
reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, then
Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of the determination that the
Work is not defective.
14.06 Owner May Stop the Work
A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work
will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work,

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 59 of 70
or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right
of Owner to stop the Work will not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this
right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or
entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.
14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work
A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct
defective Work, or to remove and replace defective Work as required by Engineer, then
Owner may, after 7 days’ written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency.
B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed
expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude
Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend
Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and
equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored
elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees,
Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to
enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph.
C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights
and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set-offs
against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include
but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or
damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work.
D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in
the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and
remedies under this Paragraph 14.07.
ARTICLE 15—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD
15.01 Progress Payments
A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will
serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application
for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments for Unit Price Work will be based on
the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under the provisions of
Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on Cost of the Work
completed by Contractor during the pay period.
B. Applications for Payments
1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment
(but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review
an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work
completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting
documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.
2. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the
Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in
writing, the Application for Payment must also be accompanied by: (a) a bill of sale,
invoice, copies of subcontract or purchase order payments, or other documentation

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 60 of 70
establishing full payment by Contractor for the materials and equipment; (b) at Owner’s
request, documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and
equipment free and clear of all Liens; and (c) evidence that the materials and equipment
are covered by appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other
arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to
Owner.
3. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application must include an
affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received by Contractor
have been applied to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior
Applications for Payment.
4. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the
Agreement.
C. Review of Applications
1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including each
resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the
Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing
Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor
may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.
2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will
constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of
the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s
review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to
the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:
a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;
b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents
(subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon
Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract
Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work
under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation);
and
c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to
have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work.
3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have
represented that:
a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been
performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress,
or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically
assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or
b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle
Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to
Contractor.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 61 of 70
4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending
payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will
impose responsibility on Engineer:
a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work;
b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or
the safety precautions and programs incident thereto;
c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to
Contractor’s performance of the Work;
d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used
the money paid by Owner; or
e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to
Owner free and clear of any Liens.
5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s
opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in
Paragraph 15.01.C.2.
6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s
opinion to protect Owner from loss because:
a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;
b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with
Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;
d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental
Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or
e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would
constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under
the Contract Documents.
D. Payment Becomes Due
1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s
recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set-offs) will become
due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.
E. Reductions in Payment by Owner
1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner is
entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following:
a. Claims have been made against Owner based on Contractor’s conduct in the
performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or
damages resulting from Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the
Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from workplace
injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, and
patent infringement;

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 62 of 70
b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage,
delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site;
c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance;
d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental
Condition for which Contractor is responsible;
e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews,
evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to
manufacturing or assembly facilities;
f. The Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;
g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with
Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;
h. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
i. An event has occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore
justify a termination for cause;
j. Liquidated or other damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to
achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work;
k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has
delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and
discharge of such Liens; or
l. Other items entitle Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended.
2. If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge or
on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate
written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and the
specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining
after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the
amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, if
Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction imposed will be binding
on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal contesting the reduction.
3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the
amount wrongfully withheld will be treated as an amount due as determined by
Paragraph 15.01.D.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.
15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment furnished
under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title defects,
and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than 7 days after the
time of payment by Owner.
15.03 Substantial Completion
A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify
Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that
Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the same time

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 63 of 70
submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be completed or corrected
before final payment.
B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an
inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider
the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons
therefor.
C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a
preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which will fix the date of Substantial
Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or
corrected before final payment. Owner shall have 7 days after receipt of the preliminary
certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the
certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the provisions of the
preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete,
Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary certificate to Owner, notify
Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially complete, stating the reasons therefor.
If Owner does not object to the provisions of the certificate, or if despite consideration of
Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the Work is substantially complete, then
Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a final
certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch list of items to be completed or
corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary certificate as Engineer believes
justified after consideration of any objections from Owner.
D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and
Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial
Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of the builder’s
risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent
property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in
writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work,
property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the
Work.
E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of
items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor
may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the
progress payment procedures set forth above.
F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial
Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and
complete or correct items on the punch list.
15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy
A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially
completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents,
or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and
usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 64 of 70
significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject
to the following conditions:
1. At any time, Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or occupy
any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If and when
Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor,
Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A through 15.03.E for
that part of the Work.
2. At any time, Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor
considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to issue
a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.
3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall
make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If
Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer
will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer
considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of
Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that
part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.
4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to
compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.04 regarding builder’s risk or other
property insurance.
15.05 Final Inspection
A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will
notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work, or
agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such
measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
15.06 Final Payment
A. Application for Payment
1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections
identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract
Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds,
certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, annotated record
documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.12), and other documents, Contractor may make
application for final payment.
2. The final Application for Payment must be accompanied (except as previously delivered)
by:
a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents;
b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;
c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work,
materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other
title defects, or will so pass upon final payment.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 65 of 70
d. a list of all duly pending Change Proposals and Claims; and
e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien
rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work.
3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as approved
by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor
that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for
which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other
indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible,
or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been
paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release
or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner
to indemnify Owner against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks
payable to Contractor and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers.
B. Engineer’s Review of Final Application and Recommendation of Payment: If, on the basis of
Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s
review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by
the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and
Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within 10
days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s
recommendation of final payment and present the final Application for Payment to Owner
for payment. Such recommendation will account for any set-offs against payment that are
necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with
respect to progress payments. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to
Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in
which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for
Payment.
C. Notice of Acceptability: In support of its recommendation of payment of the final Application
for Payment, Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is
acceptable, subject to stated limitations in the notice and to the provisions of
Paragraph 15.07.
D. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is ready
for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment
and issuance of notice of the acceptability of the Work.
E. Final Payment Becomes Due: Upon receipt from Engineer of the final Application for Payment
and accompanying documentation, Owner shall set off against the amount recommended by
Engineer for final payment any further sum to which Owner is entitled, including but not
limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under the provisions of this
Contract with respect to progress payments. Owner shall pay the resulting balance due to
Contractor within 30 days of Owner’s receipt of the final Application for Payment from
Engineer.
15.07 Waiver of Claims
A. By making final payment, Owner waives its claim or right to liquidated damages or other
damages for late completion by Contractor, except as set forth in an outstanding Claim,

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 66 of 70
appeal under the provisions of Article 17, set-off, or express reservation of rights by Owner.
Owner reserves all other claims or rights after final payment.
B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all
claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly
submitted as a Claim, or appealed under the provisions of Article 17.
15.08 Correction Period
A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as
may be prescribed by the Supplementary Conditions or the terms of any applicable special
guarantee required by the Contract Documents), Owner gives Contractor written notice that
any Work has been found to be defective, or that Contractor’s repair of any damages to the
Site or adjacent areas has been found to be defective, then after receipt of such notice of
defect Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s
written instructions:
1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such adjacent areas;
2. correct such defective Work;
3. remove the defective Work from the Project and replace it with Work that is not
defective, if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, and
4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the
work of others, or to other land or areas resulting from the corrective measures.
B. Owner shall give any such notice of defect within 60 days of the discovery that such Work or
repairs is defective. If such notice is given within such 60 days but after the end of the
correction period, the notice will be deemed a notice of defective Work under
Paragraph 7.17.B.
C. If, after receipt of a notice of defect within 60 days and within the correction period,
Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an
emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the
defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced.
Contractor shall pay all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration
or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such
removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others). Contractor’s failure to pay such costs, losses, and damages within 10 days of
invoice from Owner will be deemed the start of an event giving rise to a Claim under
Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim must be brought within 30 days of the failure
to pay.
D. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start
to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.
E. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected
or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with respect
to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or
removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 67 of 70
F. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and
warranties. The provisions of this paragraph are not to be construed as a substitute for, or a
waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.
ARTICLE 16—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
16.01 Owner May Suspend Work
A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a
period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer.
Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work
on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or an
extension of the Contract Times directly attributable to any such suspension. Any Change
Proposal seeking such adjustments must be submitted no later than 30 days after the date
fixed for resumption of Work.
16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause
A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by
Contractor and justify termination for cause:
1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or
suitable materials or equipment, or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule);
2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the
Contract Documents;
3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or
4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer.
B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving
Contractor (and any surety) 10 days’ written notice that Owner is considering a declaration
that Contractor is in default and termination of the Contract, Owner may proceed to:
1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) written notice
that the Contract is terminated; and
2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond.
C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has
terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take
possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the
Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete
the Work as Owner may deem expedient.
D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if
Contractor within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its failure
to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure.
E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to
receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the
Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs,
losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 68 of 70
attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid to
Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses, and
damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such
claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their
reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When
exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain
the lowest price for the Work performed.
F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not
affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may
thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety under
any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due Contractor
by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.
G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions
of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond will govern over any inconsistent provisions
of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D.
16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience
A. Upon 7 days’ written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such
case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):
1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents
prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead
and profit on such Work;
2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and
furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses; and
3. other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred
to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal.
B. Contractor shall not be paid for any loss of anticipated profits or revenue, post-termination
overhead costs, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate
A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90
consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2)
Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (3)
Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then
Contractor may, upon 7 days’ written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or
Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the contract
and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03.
B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if
Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted,
or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due,
Contractor may, 7 days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until
payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 69 of 70
provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a
Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for
expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by
this paragraph.
ARTICLE 17—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES
17.01 Methods and Procedures
A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final
resolution under the provisions of this article:
1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in full,
pursuant to Article 12; and
2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work, or obligations under the
Contract Documents, that arise after final payment has been made.
B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this article, Owner or
Contractor may:
1. elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the
Supplementary Conditions;
2. agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution process;
or
3. if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or
mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the
dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction.
ARTICLE 18—MISCELLANEOUS
18.01 Giving Notice
A. Whenever any provision of the Contract requires the giving of written notice to Owner,
Engineer, or Contractor, it will be deemed to have been validly given only if delivered:
1. in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the recipient’s place of
business;
2. by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the recipient’s place of business; or
3. by e-mail to the recipient, with the words “Formal Notice” or similar in the e-mail’s subject
line.
18.02 Computation of Times
A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to exclude
the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a
Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction,
such day will be omitted from the computation.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright© 2018 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,
and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Page 70 of 70
18.03 Cumulative Remedies
A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies
available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in
any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are
otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or
by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if
repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty,
obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.
18.04 Limitation of Damages
A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution, and
other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to
Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in
connection with any other project or anticipated project.
18.05 No Waiver
A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision will not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor
will it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract.
18.06 Survival of Obligations
A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or
given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the
Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination
of the Contract or of the services of Contractor.
18.07 Controlling Law
A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.
18.08 Assignment of Contract
A. Unless expressly agreed to elsewhere in the Contract, no assignment by a party to this
Contract of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on the other party
without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without
limitation, money that may become due and money that is due may not be assigned without
such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law),
and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no
assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the
Contract.
18.09 Successors and Assigns
A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives to
the other party hereto, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all
covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.
18.10 Headings
A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts
of these General Conditions.
01/2023 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
254.07.100 00 80 00 - 1
SECTION 00 80 00
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the
Construction Contract (No. EJCDC C-700, 2013 Edition) and other provisions of the Contract
Documents as indicated below. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented
remain in full force and effect.
ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
The terms used in these supplementary conditions which are defined in the standard
general conditions of the construction contract (EJCDC C-700, 2013 edition) have the
meanings assigned to them in the general conditions.
ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS
SC-2.01 Delete Paragraphs 2.01 B. and C. in their entirety and insert the following in their
place:
B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the executed
counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
Owner copies of the policies of insurance (including all endorsements, and
identification of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles) required to
be provided by Contractor in Article 6. Contractor may block out (redact) any
confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or
endorsement furnished under this provision.
C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt from Contractor of the executed
counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance
documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor copies of the
policies of insurance to be provided by Owner under Article 6 (if any). Owner
may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information
contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.
SC-2.02.A. Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 2.02.A. to read as follows:
Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to 5 copies of the Contract Documents
which may include bound reduced drawings. Additional quantities of the
Contract Documents will be furnished at reproduction cost.
ARTICLE 3 – DOCUMENTS INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE
Add the following new paragraph immediately after paragraph 3.03.B:
C. In the event of an inconsistency between provisions in any of the contract
documents, the order of precedence shall be established by the most
stringent of the criteria and conditions.
ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK
SC-4.01.A Delete paragraph 4.01.A of the General Conditions and insert the following in its
place:
A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice
to Proceed. Any Work undertaken by CONTRACTOR prior to the date
indicated in the Notice to Proceed will be entirely at his own risk
01/2023 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
254.07.100 00 80 00 - 2
ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
SC-5.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.03.B:
C. The following report of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or
adjacent to the Site are known to Owner:
1. Report dated July 11, 2022, prepared by AGEC, Sandy, Utah, entitled:
“Geotechnical Investigation Proposed Pump Station approximately 700
West South of Pony Express Parkway, Saratoga Springs, Utah (Job No.
1220067). The Technical Data contained in such report upon whose
accuracy Contractor may rely are those indicated in the definition of
Technical Data in the General Conditions.
SC 5.06 Delete Paragraphs 5.06.A and 5.06.B in their entirety and insert the following:
A. No reports or drawings related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the
Site are known to Owner.
B. Not Used.
ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE
SC 6.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.03.J:
K. Contractor shall provide the following minimum insurance coverage with insurers
admitted in the State of Utah with a Bests' rating of no less than A-, IX, and in the
limits as listed in this document, unless approved by the Director of Risk
Management and written for not less than the following, or greater if required by law
and all such insurance to be primary to any insurance maintained by Owner, shall
name Owner as additional insured with waiver of subrogation:
1. WORKERS' COMPENSATION and EMPLOYERS LIABILITY: Workers'
compensation statutory limits, as required by the Workers Compensation Act of
the State of Utah, and Employers Liability limits set at a minimum of $300,000
for each accident, disease, and employee. No officer or owner of any business
or organization subject to the Workers’ Compensation Act of the State of Utah
may be excluded from this requirement.
2. AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY: $1,000,000 combined single limit “per accident” for
bodily injury and property damage. "Any Auto" coverage is required.
3. GENERAL LIABILITY: $1,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence,
personal injury and property damage. 2,000,000 aggregate. Broad Form
Commercial General Liability is required (ISO 1993 or better). Completed
Operations insurance must be kept in effect for 2 years after completion of work.
4. The Contractor shall not commence Work under this Agreement until all of the
insurance required herein shall have been obtained by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall furnish to the Owner Certificates of Insurance verifying that
such insurance has been obtained. Such certificates will provide that Owner will
receive at least thirty (30) days prior written notice of any material change in,
cancellation of, or non-renewal of such insurance.
5. If applicable, professional liability (errors & omissions) Insurance coverage for a
limit of $2,000,000. Insurance shall be carried for two years after the work has
been completed.
01/2023 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
254.07.100 00 80 00 - 3
6. EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES LIABILITY: $1,000,000 per occurrence,
$1,000,000 aggregate. Required for employers subject to the provisions of Title
VII of the Civil Rights Act and the Utah Antidiscrimination Act.
7. If Contractor uses any subcontractors, Contractor will provide for subcontractors
or require the same insurance provisions for its subcontractors.
8. The Contractor shall warranty all work for one year according to the provisions
included within Article 15.08 of the General Conditions.
9. Any deductibles or self-insured retention exceeding 5% of the limit of the policy
must be declared to and approved by the City. At the option of the City, the
insurer may be required to either: reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-
insured retention with respect to the City, its officers, officials, and employees; or
the contracting party may be required to procure a bond guaranteeing payment
of losses and related investigations, claim distributions, and defense expenses.
10. The contracting party shall disclose to the City all incidents or occurrences of
accident, injury, and property damage within 24 hours of occurrence.
11. The policies are to contain, or to be endorsed to contain, the following
provisions:
a. General Liability and Automobile Liability Coverages
i. The City and its officers, officials, employees, and volunteers are to
be covered as an additional insured with respect to liability arising
out of activities performed by or on behalf of the contracting party;
products and completed or ongoing operations of the contracting
party; premises owned, leased, hired, or borrowed by the contracting
party. The coverage shall contain no limitations on the scope of
protection afforded to the City and its officers, officials, employees, or
volunteers.
ii. The contracting party's insurance coverage shall be a primary
insurance. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the City, its
officers, officials, employees, or volunteers shall be in excess of the
contracting party's insurance and shall not reduce the contracting
party’s obligations in this policy.
iii. Any failure to comply with any reporting provision of the any policy
shall not affect coverage provided to the City and its officers, officials,
employees, or volunteers.
iv. The contracting party's insurance shall apply separately to each
insured against whom a claim is made or suit is brought, except with
respect to the limits of the insurer's liability.
v. All property damage liability insurance must include coverage for
damages to premises rented. This provision may not be excluded by
endorsement or omission from the commercial general liability
coverage.
b. Workers' Compensation and General Liability Coverage
i. The insurer shall agree to waive all rights of subrogation against
the City and its officers, officials, employees, and volunteers for
losses arising from work performed by the contracting party for
the City, and for any loss falling under general liability insurance
coverage.
01/2023 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
254.07.100 00 80 00 - 4
c. All Coverage
i. Each insurance policy required by this clause shall be endorsed
to state that coverage shall not be suspended, voided, canceled
by either party, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty
(30) days' prior written notice by certified mail, return receipt
requested, has been given to the City.
d. Waivers of Insurance
i. A waiver of automobile insurance may be granted by the City if
the party seeking a waiver certifies to the City that it does not
intend to use an automobile or any other motorized vehicle in the
course of its business or within the City limits.
ii. A waiver of workers’ compensation insurance may be granted by
the City if the party seeking a waiver certifies to the City that it is
a sole proprietor or is an organization with no employees. All
such waivers are conditioned on compliance with the
requirements to obtain a workers’ compensation waiver found in
the Workers’ Compensation Act.
iii. Builder’s Risk.
e. Special Coverages
i. The City may require special coverages in addition to the
coverages listed in this policy for certain types of contractors,
providers of certain services, or the issuance of certain permits.
The limits for special coverages shall be determined through
consideration of the hazardousness of the work or project, the
proximity of the project to the public, and the duration of the work
or project. Special coverage(s), if required, may not be excluded
from the insured party’s policy by endorsement. Special
coverages which the City may require include:
a. Abuse and molestation coverage;
b. Advertising injury coverage;
c. Aircraft liability coverage;
d. Asbestos abatement liability coverage;
e. Boiler and machinery liability coverage;
f. Builder’s risk coverage;
g. Course of construction coverage;
h. Environmental coverage;
i. Excess liability coverage;
j. Explosion, collapse, underground (XCU) coverage;
k. Garagekeeper’s coverage;
l. Liquor liability coverage;
m. Medical malpractice coverage;
n. On-hook liability coverage;
o. Pollution liability coverage;
01/2023 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
254.07.100 00 80 00 - 5
p. Railroad protective liability coverage;
q. Watercraft liability coverage
f. Claims-made Policies
i. With the exception of policies for professional liability, including
errors and omissions, environmental liability, and employment
liability, claims-made policies will not be accepted by the City as
adequate insurance coverage.
g. Evaluation of Loss History
i. The City reserves the right to adjust all liability limits based on a
pre-contract evaluation of a party’s loss history. The City shall
give fair notice of any adjustment of liability limits. In order to
properly and fairly evaluate the risk of loss, the City shall require
that all contract and permit applicants submit detailed plans for
the contract or permit applied for, as well as a loss history
conducted by a credible third party.
h. Care, Custody, or Control Exclusions
i. If a contracting party’s business requires the exercise of care,
custody, or control over City property or public property within the
limits of the City, and the party’s general liability coverage
includes a care, custody, or control exclusion, that party must
also possess supplementary insurance which covers the City or
public property within the insured party’s care, custody, or
control.
i. Other Laws
i. All contracting parties shall obey all federal, state, county, and
municipal laws, ordinances, regulations, and rules applicable to
their operations and required insurance. Failure to do so shall
result in the contracting party holding the City harmless from any
liability arising out of or in connection with said violations. This
shall include any attorney’s fees and costs incurred by the City in
connection with a violation of any federal, state, county, or
municipal law, ordinance, or regulation by a contracting party.

SC-6.05. Add the following to the list of requirements in Paragraph 6.05.A, as a numbered
item:
13. Include by express endorsement coverage of damage to Contractor’s
equipment.
ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
SC-7.02.B. Amend the first and second sentences of Paragraph 7.02.B to state “…all Work
at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday through
Friday. Contractor shall not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal
holiday without written authorization from the Owner.”
SC-7.02.C.Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.02.B:
Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any overtime pay or other expense
incurred by the Owner for Engineer’s services (including those of the Resident
01/2023 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
254.07.100 00 80 00 - 6
Project Representative, if any), Owner's representative, and construction
observation services, occasioned by the performance of Work on Saturday,
Sunday, any legal holiday, or as overtime on any regular work day. If Contractor
is responsible but does not pay, or if the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments
due under Article 15.
SC-7.02.C. Add the following new subparagraph immediately after Paragraph 7.02.C:
1. For purposes of administering the foregoing requirement, additional overtime
costs are defined as any hours over 8 hours on any regular work day and any
hours worked on Saturday, Sunday, and any legal holiday.
SC-7.12.H. Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 7.12 G. of the General
Conditions which is to read as follows:
H. Protection of Person and Property: CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for
safety measures in connection with the Project. CONTRACTOR shall take
appropriate measures to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (1) all persons on
the site or who may be affected by the Project; (2) all labor, materials and
equipment to be incorporated into the Project; (3) other property at the site or
adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures, utilities and underground facilities. CONTRACTOR
shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations relating to the safety and
protection of persons or property. CONTRACTOR shall erect and maintain all
necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. If CONTRACTOR must
enter a confined space, it shall have all personnel and monitoring equipment
on site to necessary to comply with all OSHA and Owner's safety guidelines.
A Confined Space Entry Permit shall be properly completed before entering a
confined space. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to erect and maintain all
necessary traffic barricades and to provide all necessary traffic control.
CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property, including Blue
Stakes notification to underground utility owners and shall cooperate with
them in the protection, removal, relocation or replacement of their property.
Any damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in
whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any subcontractor, supplier, individual or
entity performing the Project, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR.
SC-7.18.D. Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 7.18 C. of the General
Conditions which is to read as follows:
D. To the fullest extent permitted by law, CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify
and hold harmless Owner from and against all claims, costs, losses and
damages, including attorney fees, arising out of the performance of this
Agreement, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage: (1) is
attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease , death, injury to tangible
property, loss of use of property, including interruption of business; and (2) is
caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of
CONTRACTOR, any subcontractor or supplier for whom CONTRACTOR is
responsible, regardless of whether caused in part by any negligent act or
omission of Owner.
01/2023 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
254.07.100 00 80 00 - 7
ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions which is
to read as follows:

C. Should CONTRACTOR cause damage to the work or property of any separate
contractor at the site, or should any claim arising out of CONTRACTOR's
performance of the Work at the site be made by any separate contractor against
CONTRACTOR, OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, the Construction
Coordinator or any other person, CONTRACTOR shall promptly attempt to settle
with such other contractor by agreement, or otherwise resolve the dispute by
arbitration or at law. CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws
and Regulations, indemnify and hold OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's
Consultants and the Construction Coordinator harmless from and against all claims,
damages, losses and expenses (including, but not limited to, fees of engineers,
architects, attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration costs) arising
directly, indirectly or consequentially out of any action, legal or equitable, brought by
any separate contractor against OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants or
the Construction Coordinator to the extent based on a claim arising out of
CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Should a separate contractor cause
damage to the Work or property of CONTRACTOR or should the performance of
Work by any separate contractor at the site give rise to any other claim,
CONTRACTOR shall not institute any action, legal or equitable, against OWNER,
ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants or the Construction Coordinator or permit any
action against any of them to be maintained and continued in its name or for its
benefit in any court or before any arbiter which seeks to impose liability on or to
recover damages from OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants or the
Construction Coordinator on account of any such damage or claim. If
CONTRACTOR is delayed at any time in performing or furnishing Work by any act or
neglect of a separate contractor and OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to
agree as to the extent of any adjustment in Contract Times attributable thereto,
CONTRACTOR may make a claim for an extension of times in accordance with
Article 11. An extension of the Contract Times shall be CONTRACTOR's exclusive
remedy with respect to OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and
Construction Coordinator for any delay, disruption, interference or hinderance
caused by any separate contractor. This paragraph does not prevent recovery from
OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultant or Construction Coordinator for
activities that are their respective responsibilities.
ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
SC-10.03 Project Representative
Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 10.03.A:
B. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be Engineer's representative at the
Site, will act as directed by and under the supervision of Engineer, and will confer
with Engineer regarding RPR's actions.
1. General: RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in general shall be
with Engineer and Contractor. RPR's dealings with Subcontractors shall only be
through or with the full knowledge and approval of Contractor. RPR shall
generally communicate with Owner only with the knowledge of and under the
direction of Engineer.
01/2023 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
254.07.100 00 80 00 - 8
2. Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing and
Sample submittals, and Schedule of Values prepared by Contractor and consult
with Engineer concerning acceptability.
3. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as
preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences, and other
Project-related meetings, and prepare and circulate copies of minutes thereof.
4. Liaison:
a. Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor. Working principally through
Contractor’s authorized representative or designee, assist in providing
information regarding the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents.
b. Assist Engineer in serving as Owner’s liaison with Contractor when
Contractor’s operations affect Owner’s on-Site operations.
c. Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, when
required for proper execution of the Work.
5. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Report to Engineer when clarifications
and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and transmit to
Contractor clarifications and interpretations as issued by Engineer.
6. Shop Drawings and Samples:
a. Record date of receipt of Samples and Contractor-approved Shop
Drawings.
b. Receive Samples which are furnished at the Site by Contractor, and notify
Engineer of availability of Samples for examination.
c. Advise Engineer and Contractor of the commencement of any portion of
the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal for which RPR
believes that the submittal has not been approved by Engineer.
7. Modifications: Consider and evaluate Contractor’s suggestions for modifications
in Drawings or Specifications and report such suggestions, together with RPR’s
recommendations, if any, to Engineer. Transmit to Contractor in writing
decisions as issued by Engineer.
8. Review of Work and Rejection of Defective Work:
a. Conduct on-Site observations of Contractor’s work in progress to assist
Engineer in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
b. Report to Engineer whenever RPR believes that any part of Contractor’s
work in progress is defective, will not produce a completed Project that
conforms generally to the Contract Documents, or will imperil the integrity
of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as
indicated in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged, or does not
meet the requirements of any inspection, test or approval required to be
made; and advise Engineer of that part of work in progress that RPR
believes should be corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for
observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval.
9. Inspections, Tests, and System Start-ups:
a. Verify that tests, equipment, and systems start-ups and operating and
maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate
01/2023 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
254.07.100 00 80 00 - 9
Owner’s personnel, and that Contractor maintains adequate records
thereof.
b. Observe, record, and report to Engineer appropriate details relative to the
test procedures and systems start-ups.
10. Records:
a. Prepare a daily report or keep a diary or log book, recording Contractor’s
hours on the Site, Subcontractors present at the Site, weather conditions,
data relative to questions of Change Orders, Field Orders, Work Change
Directives, or changed conditions, Site visitors, deliveries of equipment or
materials, daily activities, decisions, observations in general, and specific
observations in more detail as in the case of observing test procedures;
and send copies to Engineer.
b. Record names, addresses, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, web site
locations, and telephone numbers of all Contractors, Subcontractors, and
major Suppliers of materials and equipment.
c. Maintain records for use in preparing Project documentation.
11. Reports:
a. Furnish to Engineer periodic reports as required of progress of the Work
and of Contractor’s compliance with the Progress Schedule and schedule
of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals.
b. Draft and recommend to Engineer proposed Change Orders, Work Change
Directives, and Field Orders. Obtain backup material from Contractor.
c. Immediately notify Engineer of the occurrence of any Site accidents,
emergencies, acts of God endangering the Work, force majeure or delay
events, damage to property by fire or other causes, or the discovery of any
Constituent of Concern or Hazardous Environmental Condition.
12. Payment Requests: Review applications for payment with Contractor for
compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward
with recommendations to Engineer, noting particularly the relationship of the
payment requested to the Schedule of Values, Work completed, and materials
and equipment delivered at the Site but not incorporated in the Work.
13. Certificates, Operation and Maintenance Manuals: During the course of the
Work, verify that materials and equipment certificates, operation and
maintenance manuals and other data required by the Contract Documents to
be assembled and furnished by Contractor are applicable to the items actually
installed and in accordance with the Contract Documents, and have these
documents delivered to Engineer for review and forwarding to Owner prior to
payment for that part of the Work.
14. Completion:
a. Participate in Engineer’s visits to the Site to determine Substantial
Completion, assist in the determination of Substantial Completion and the
preparation of a punch list of items to be completed or corrected.
b. Participate in Engineer’s final visit to the Site to determine completion of
the Work, in the company of Owner and Contractor, and prepare a final
punch list of items to be completed and deficiencies to be remedied.
01/2023 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
254.07.100 00 80 00 - 10
c. Observe whether all items on the final list have been completed or
corrected and make recommendations to Engineer concerning acceptance
and issuance of the notice of acceptability of the work.
C. The RPR shall not:
1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of
materials or equipment (including “or-equal” items).
2. Exceed limitations of Engineer’s authority as set forth in the Contract
Documents.
3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, or
Suppliers.
4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of the
means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of Contractor’s work.
5. Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security or safety
practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities or
operations of Owner or Contractor.
6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted off-
site by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer.
7. Accept Shop Drawing or Sample submittals from anyone other than Contractor.
8. Authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part.
ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK
SC 13.01.B.5.c Delete Paragraph 13.01.B.5.c in its entirety and insert the following in its
place:
c. Construction Equipment and Machinery:
1) Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof, in
accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of
Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly,
dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the
terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery,
or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.
2) Costs for equipment and machinery owned by Contractor will be paid at a rate
shown for such equipment in the Rental Rate Blue Book. An hourly rate will be
computed by dividing the monthly rates by 176. These computed rates will
include all operating costs. Costs will include the time the equipment or
machinery is in use on the changed Work and the costs of transportation,
loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal when directly
attributable to the changed Work. The cost of any such equipment or
machinery, or parts thereof, shall cease to accrue when the use thereof is no
longer necessary for the changed Work. Equipment or machinery with a value
of less than $1,000 will be considered small tools.
SC 13.03.E Delete Paragraph 13.03.E in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
E. The unit price of an item of Unit Price Work shall be subject to reevaluation and
adjustment under the following conditions:
1. if the extended price of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 25
percent or more of the Contract Price (based on estimated quantities at the time
01/2023 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
254.07.100 00 80 00 - 11
of Contract formation) and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of
Unit Price Work actually furnished or performed by Contractor differs by more
than 25 percent from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the
Agreement; and
2. if there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work;
and
3. if Contractor believes that Contractor has incurred additional expense as a
result thereof, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or if Owner believes
that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the unit price,
Owner may make a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price.
ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION
PERIOD
SC 15.01.B.1 The first sentence of paragraph 15.01.B.1 of the general conditions is hereby
deleted in its entirety and the following is substituted in lieu thereof:
1. At least thirty (30) days before the date established in the Agreement for each
progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall
submit to engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by
Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and
accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract
Documents.SC 15.01.D.1 The first sentence of paragraph 15.01.D.1 of the
general conditions is hereby deleted in its entirety and the following is
substituted in lieu thereof:
SC 15.03.B Add the following new subparagraph to Paragraph 15.03.B:
1. If some or all of the Work has been determined not to be at a point of Substantial
Completion and will require re-inspection or re-testing by Engineer, the cost of such
re-inspection or re-testing, including the cost of time, travel and living expenses,
shall be paid by Contractor to Owner. If Contractor does not pay, or the parties are
unable to agree as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-
off against payments due under Article 15.
SC15.01.D.1. The first sentence of paragraph 15.01.D.1 of the general conditions is hereby
deleted in its entirety and the following is substituted in lieu thereof:
1. Twenty days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with
Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended (sub ject to any Owner set-
offs) will become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.
SC 15.03.B Add the following new subparagraph to Paragraph 15.03.B:
1. If some or all of the Work has been determined not to be at a point of Substantial
Completion and will require re-inspection or re-testing by Engineer, the cost of such
re-inspection or re-testing, including the cost of time, travel and living expenses,
shall be paid by Contractor to Owner. If Contractor does not pay, or the parties are
unable to agree as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-
off against payments due under Article 15.
01/2023 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
254.07.100 00 80 00 - 12
ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES
SC-17.02 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.01.
SC-17.02 Arbitration
A. All matters subject to final resolution under this Article will be decided by arbitration
in accordance with the rules of the State of Utah, subject to the conditions and
limitations of this paragraph. This agreement to arbitrate and any other agreement
or consent to arbitrate entered into will be specifically enforceable under the
prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction.
B. The demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract
and with the selected arbitrator or arbitration provider, and a copy will be sent to
Engineer for information. The demand for arbitration will be made within the specific
time required in this Article, or if no specified time is applicable within a reasonable
time after the matter in question has arisen, and in no event shall any such demand
be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on
such matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. The
demand for arbitration should include specific reference to Paragraph SC-17.02.D
below.
C. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include by consolidation,
joinder, or in any other manner any other individual or entity (including Engineer,
and Engineer’s consultants and the officers, directors, partners, agents, employees
or consultants of any of them) who is not a party to this Contract unless:
1. the inclusion of such other individual or entity is necessary if complete relief is
to be afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration; and
2. such other individual or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or
fact which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration and
which will arise in such proceedings.
D. The award rendered by the arbitrator(s) shall be consistent with the agreement of
the parties, in writing, and include a concise breakdown of the award, and a written
explanation of the award specifically citing the Contract provisions deemed
applicable and relied on in making the award.
E. The award will be final. Judgment may be entered upon it in any court having
jurisdiction thereof, and it will not be subject to modification or appeal, subject to
provisions of the Laws and Regulations relating to vacating or modifying an arbitral
award.
F. The fees and expenses of the arbitrators and any arbitration service shall be shared
equally by Owner and Contractor.
SC-17.03 Attorneys’ Fees: For any matter subject to final resolution under this Article,
the prevailing party shall be entitled to an award of its attorneys’ fees incurred in the final
resolution proceedings, in an equitable amount to be determined in the discretion of the
court, arbitrator, arbitration panel, or other arbiter of the matter subject to final resolution,
taking into account the parties’ initial demand or defense positions in comparison with
the final result.

- END OF DOCUMENT -
PART 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

01/2023 SUMMARY OF WORK
254.07.100 PAGE 01 11 00 - 1
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
GENERAL
The Work to be performed under this Project shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials,
and equipment necessary or required to complete the work in all respects as shown on
the Contract Drawings and as herein specified. All work, materials, and services not
expressly shown or called for in the Contract Documents which may be necessary to
complete the construction of the work in good faith shall be performed, furnished, and
installed by CONTRACTOR as though originally so specified or shown, at no increase in
cost to OWNER.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Construct and functionally commission all parts of a 600 gpm drinking water wellhouse
system including two buildings (wellhouse and fluoride) of masonry block with pitched
roofs; 150 HP vertical turbine pump, motor, piping, valves, onsite hypochlorite generation
system, fluoridation system, filtration system with automated backwash system, vault and
monitoring, landscaping and irrigation system, HVAC, electrical, controls, paving, C&G,
sidewalks, driveways, chain link fence and gates, drainage and water pipelines, and other
work.
The work is located on the property that is north east of the intersection of Highway 89
and Green Road in Fruit Heights, Utah.
CONTRACT METHOD
The Work hereunder will be constructed under a single unit price contract.
CONTRACTOR USE OF PROJECT SITE
CONTRACTOR's use of the Project Site shall be limited to its construction operations,
including on-site storage of materials, on-site fabrication facilities.
PROJECT SECURITY
CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary provisions to protect the Project and
CONTRACTOR's facilities from fire, theft, and vandalism, and the public from
unnecessary exposure to injury.
CHANGES IN THE WORK
It is mutually understood that it is inherent in the nature of public works construction that
some changes in the plans and specifications may be necessary during the course of
construction to adjust them to unforeseen field conditions, and that it is of the essence of
the Contract to recognize a normal and expected margin of change. ENGINEER shall
have the right to make such changes, from time to time, in the plans, in the character if
the Work, and in the scope of the Project as may be necessary or desirable to ensure the
completion of the Work in the most satisfactory manner without invalidating the Contract.
01/2023 SUMMARY OF WORK
254.07.100 PAGE 01 11 00 - 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 WORK RESTRICTIONS
254.07.100 PAGE 01 14 00 - 1
SECTION 01 14 00
WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
OWNER and/or utility owners may be working within the Project area while this contract
is in progress. If so, CONTRACTOR shall schedule Work in conjunction with these
other entities to minimize mutual interference.
All compaction and other testing requirements specified shall be provided and paid for
by CONTRACTOR.
CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER of the schedule for materials testing as required
in Section 01400 – Quality Requirements and Section 01400M – Quality Requirements
(Modified) a minimum of 24 hours in advance in order to provide ENGINEER time to be
present during desired testing. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining copies
of testing reports or data and ensuring that the work is in full compliance with the
Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of Private rights-of-way 72 hours prior to work being
performed across owner’s right-of-way.
If required to work in City Streets or Utah Department of Transportation (UDOT) right-of-
way, CONTRACTOR shall notify right-of-way owner 72 hours prior to work being
performed therein. Work within the City Streets or UDOT right-of-way shall be in
accordance with required permits and any license agreement with OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall obtain and comply with all required permits.
CONTRACTOR must work with all adjacent property owners to ensure no harm or
damage is caused to homes or property during construction of the project.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work Restrictions shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be
included as part of the various items to which it relates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 WORK RESTRICTIONS
254.07.100 PAGE 01 14 00 - 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

07/2023 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
254.07.100 PAGE 01 22 00 - 1
SECTION 01 22 00
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
All work completed under this contract shall be in accordance with the Contract
Drawings and Specifications and will be measured by ENGINEER/OWNER. The
quantities appearing on the Bid Schedule are approximate only, and are prepared for the
comparison of bids. Payment to CONTRACTOR on bid items with unit prices other than
"Lump Sum" will be made for actual quantities of work performed and accepted, or
material furnished in accordance with the Contract. The scheduled quantities of work to
be done and materials to be furnished may be increased or decreased in accordance
with the General Conditions.
The term "Lump Sum" when used as an item of payment will mean complete payment
for the work described in the contract. When a complete structure, portion of work, or
unit is specified "Lump Sum" as the unit of measurement, the unit will include fittings,
accessories, and all work necessary to complete the work as shown on the Drawings
and as specified.
Unit Price Payment” Includes: Full compensation for required labor, products, tools,
equipment, plant and facilities, transportation, services and incidentals; erection,
application or installation of an item of the Work; and overhead and profit.
When the accepted quantities of work vary from the quantities in the Bid Schedule,
CONTRACTOR shall accept as payment in full, so far as contract items are concerned,
payment at the original contract unit prices for the work done. OWNER reserves the
right to add to or delete from quantities listed in the bid schedule in order to match the
total bid with the budgeted money available.
BASE BID SCHEDULE
Payments will be as described below, less retainage amounts described in the General
Conditions. Retainage amounts will be released as described in the General Conditions.
Bid Item 1 – Mobilization / Demobilization
Mobilization includes general and miscellaneous responsibilities and operations not
normally attributed to any other single bid item. It includes, but is not limited to, work
described in Section 01 71 13 – Mobilization.
It will be measured based on percent of total work in Bid Schedule completed.
Payment of lump sum bid amount in Bid Schedule will be as follows:
a. When 10% of contract amount is earned, 25% of this item will be paid.
b. When 25% of contract amount is earned, 25% more of this item will be paid.
c. When 50% of contract amount is earned, 25% more of this item will be paid.
d. When 100% of contract amount is earned (Startup Testing and Demobilization),
the last 25% of this item will be paid.
Bid Item 2 – Construction Surveying

07/2023 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
254.07.100 PAGE 01 22 00 - 2
1. Contractor work to provide all Construction Surveying per Section 01 30 00
Administrative Requirements, performed by a registered professional land surveyor.
2. Measured based on percent of work complete.
3. Payment of lump sum bid amount in Bid Schedule will be as follows:
a. When 10% of total contract amount is earned, 75% of this item will be paid.
b. When 75% of total contract amount is earned, the rest of this item will be paid.
Bid Item 3 – QC and Testing Agency Services
1. This item is for Contractor's QC Work and Testing Agency Services, including, but
not limited to, all work in Sections 01 45 23 and 01 45 00.
2. It will be measured based on percent of successful QC testing work complete which
is based on the percent of total Contract work complete (tested and accepted).
3. Payment of lump sum bid amount in Bid Schedule will be as follows:
a. When 10% of contract amount is earned, 25% of this item will be paid.
b. When 25% of contract amount is earned, 25% more of this item will be paid.
c. When 50% of contract amount is earned, 25% more of this item will be paid.
d. When 75% of contract amount is earned, the last 25% of this item will be paid
Bid Item 4 – SWPPP and Implementation
1. Pay and perform all work for SWPPP and Implementation. Submit SWPPP.
2. Measurement is based on percent of be paid for each permit and percent of SWPPP
implementation which is complete
3. SWPPP payment will be as follows:
a. When 100% of SWPPP implementation facilities are installed, 75% of SWPPP
permit Work will be paid.
b. The last 25%, which is for SWPPP maintenance, will be paid at Substantial
Completion.
Bid Item 5 – Owner to Pay RMP to Provide Power to Site (excludes Contractor-installed
RMP conduits)
1. Owner shall pay RMP directly to provide power to site so this bid item is zero. RMP
will provide overhead pole, power cable (through a Contractor-installed conduit),
meter, transformer, testing and startup.
2. However, Contractor is responsible to make all arrangements for, and do all
coordination for, and construct conduit for, RMP to provide power supply including,
but not limited to:
a. furnish and install RMP conduit (comply with on-line RMP standards) from a pole
(to be installed by RMP). As shown on plans, Contractor shall horizontally
directionally drill conduit under 40- ft wide asphalt road and install RMP conduit
across project site to the new electric meter and transformer shown on Sheet C-
2. Contractor costs to provide arrangements for, coordination for, and RMP
conduit for, RMP to supply electric power supply to site shall be put in bid
item 24.
Bid Item 6 – All Earthwork, Haul off Excess, Finished Grading
1. Perform all earthwork including removing soils down to elevation 4599.50 under both
buildings and replacing it with the required backfill; hauling off and disposing of

07/2023 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
254.07.100 PAGE 01 22 00 - 3
excess earth from: under buildings, trenches, MHs, vault; under AC paving and
walks, and earth pile (volume approximately 2000 cubic yards) on north property line
(see Sheet C-2); and doing all finished grading except landscaping.
2. Measurement and Payment will be based on the following:
a. 25% will be paid when the excess from the vault, MH and north property line
earth pile are hauled of.
b. Another 25% will be paid when both building foundations are placed and
backfilled with imported earth.
c. Another 25% will be paid when the subgrade for AC paving and sidewalk are
prepared and their excess hauled off.
d. The last 25% will be paid when finished grading and topsoils are done.
Bid Item 7 – 12-inch Storm Drain
1. This will be measured based on the horizontal linear feet of 12-inch storm drain (pipe
shall be either RCP or ADS HP Storm) is acceptably installed and backfilled.
2. Measurement and payment of unit cost bid amount in Bid Schedule will be for each
linear foot of pipe completed and accepted. No payment will be made until 12-inch
pipe connections are made to existing storm drain box, so drains can function.
Bid Item 8 – Curb Inlet (APWA Plan 315.1)
1. This will be measured and paid based on the number of cube inlet boxes based
correctly located, installed, backfilled and functional (to drain).
Bid Item 9 – 8” DIP Water Pipeline and Fluoride Injection MH
1. 75 percent of the pipeline will be paid when the pipeline and Fluoride Injection MH is
correctly installed backfilled, tested, disinfected, and accepted. The last 25 percent
will be paid when the final connection to the existing 8-inch pipeline is complete and
accepted.
Bid Item 10 – Misc Drains Outside Buildings (2- to 8-inch Dia)
1. These will be measured and paid on a lump sum basis when drains are properly
installed, backfilled and accepted. This includes the 2- to 8-inch drains tied to
backwash vault, the 4-inch drains not under the wellhouse nor under the Fluoride
Building.
Bid Item 11 – Drain MH’s: 48”, 60”, 72” and 4” Gate Valve
1. This will be measured and paid based on the percent of total work complete, tested
water tight, and accepted. 50% will be paid for the 72” MH and valve, the other 50%
for the other two MH’s. Work includes flap valves but not automation.
Bid Item 12 – Precast Concrete Vault (8’ x 16’ x 9;’ high) inside dimensions
1. This will be measured and paid (a single payment) when the vault is installed,
backfilled, tested water tight, and approved. The Work includes design and
submitting HS20 rated vault design with two access MHs, a ladder, a weir, Sch 80
PVC connections (water tight cast with vault), installation and backfill, and leak test.

07/2023 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
254.07.100 PAGE 01 22 00 - 4
Bid Item 13 – Appurtenances for MHs and Vault: Level Monitors, Vaults, Automation.
1. This will be measured and paid when the system is fully function including both level
monitors (for 72” MH and for vault) are functionally tied to RTU to automatically
operate backwash system based on water level in vault, and to signal to WBWCD
SCADA system an alarm if water depth in 72” MH exceeds 6-inches.
Bid Item 14 – Type E Curb and Gutter
1. This will be measured and paid for based on the number of linear feet of Type E
Curb and Gutter installed and accepted on accepted compacted subgrade. Before
payment, drainage test curb and gutter in presence of Engineer to verify there are
not puddles.
Bid Item 15 – 4 Foot Wide Concrete Waterway
1. This will be measured and paid for based on the number of linear feet of 4-foot wide
concreted waterway installed and accepted on accepted compacted subgrade.
Before payment, drainage test waterway in presence of Engineer to verify there are
not puddles.
Bid Item 16 – APWA Plan 222 (Sim) Conc Driveway
1. This will be measured and paid for per each driveway (6” THK, 42’ wide sawcut at
TBC, 30’ wide at 9’ north of TBC), properly installed, sawcut curb w/ sloped edges at
12:1 (Plan 221 sim), compacted subgrade, placed concrete, finished and cured,
complete.
Bid Item 17 – 6-ft wide Conc Sidewalk (Match Exst C&G Elev - outside W & S fences)
1. This will be measured and paid per each linear foot of 6-foot wide concrete side walk
installed per specs and per Fruit Heights Standard Detail CS-03. Work required: 95%
compacted subgrade; FG sidewalk to slope at 2% (from fence) to existing TBC; finish
and cure complete.
Bid Item 18 – Black PVC Coated Chain Link Fence and Gates
1. This will be measured and paid for per each linear foot of fence and gate per plans
and specifications. Fence the perimeter of the wellhouse property per Sheet C-1.
Provide a 32-ft roller gate and a 32-foot wide, 2-panel gate, pad-lockable swing gate
with drop rod drilled into conc at each driveway.
Bid Item 19 – AC Paving: 4” AC over 12” UTBC
1. This will be measured and paid for per each square foot of AC paving (4-inch min
thick asphalt concrete over 12-inch min thick untreated based course 95%
compacted over 95% compacted subgrade. AC pave all areas in Note 4, Sheet C-2,
including areas in the public street south of the existing C&G. Slope AC paving
fished surfaces per Sheet C-2 so there are not puddles. Before payment, Engineer to
witness AC paving flooding to verify there are not puddles.
Bid Item 20 – Wellhouse Building Piping System

07/2023 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
254.07.100 PAGE 01 22 00 - 5
1. Wellhouse Building Piping Systems shall be measured and paid for on percent of the
lump sum amount for all wellhouse building piping complete, tested and accepted.
Work includes all piping, materials (DIP, WSP, PVC, HDPE, copper, SS, etc) types
(pressure, drains, water, etc), components (valves, meters, gages, couplings, fittings,
insulting flanges, diffusers, adapters, ties to other systems) of all piping within and
below wellhouse, complete, tested, functional, and accepted.
Bid Item 21 – Wellhouse Structure
1. Wellhouse Structure shall be measured and paid for on percent of the lump sum
amount for materials and installation complete of all well house structure work per
plans and specifications, including but not limited to footings, foundations, masonry
walls, concrete floor, perimeter sidewalks, housekeeping pads, pump base, doors,
windows, trusses, roofing system, cupolas for roof access for pumps and equipment,
skylights, insulation, interior finishes, painting, and all other work.
Bid Item 22 – Fluoridation Building Structure
1. Fluoridation Building Structure shall be measured and paid for on percent of the lump
sum amount for materials and installation complete of all Fluoridation Building
Structure work per plans and specifications, including but not limited to footings,
foundations, masonry walls, concrete floor, perimeter sidewalks, housekeeping pads,
doors, windows, trusses, roofing system, insulation, interior finishes, painting, and all
other work.
Bid Items 23 – Deep Well Pump & Motor
1. This will be measured and paid for as a single lump sum item based on percentage
of work complete, tested, and accepted in accordance with plans and specifications.
Bid Item 24 – Electrical and I&C Systems (on- and off- site and in 2 buildings) Complete
(except items 5, 13, 23, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29)
1. Electrical and I&C (Instrumentation and Controls) Systems Compete shall be
measured and paid for based on percentage of work complete, tested and accepted
in accordance with plans and specifications; including furnishing and installing all
electrical, instrumentation, and controls equipment, VFD, etc, and coordinating all
work, debugging, startup and operationally testing all work for the project.
Work includes: variable frequency drive, panelboards, transformers, lighting, service
outlets, pressure switches, pressure transducers, intrusion switches, flood switches,
buried conduits, functional SCADA and Ethernet terminations and connections to
control panels and to WBWCD existing systems, electrical service connection,
connecting up pump motor, grounding (lightning protection system), connections to
HVAC, access card readers on doors, network door controllers, CCTV security
cameras, and all other items as shown on the Contract Drawings required for a
complete and operable electrical system.
Bid Item 25 – Main Control Panel and Programming
Main Control Panel and Programming for all facilities on project site shall be
measured and paid for as a single payment when wellhouse and all systems are

07/2023 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
254.07.100 PAGE 01 22 00 - 6
complete, tested, functionally operable, and accepted by Engineer and
Owner. Contractor shall contract for this work to either SKM or M8
Automation: to provide complete control panel with PLC, HMI and
programming. Contractor to coordinate who terminates instrumentation and who
installs it on the wall. Work includes all labor, materials, and equipment to furnish,
install, program, test, debug the control panel / RTU for all system operations
including pumping systems, controls, filtration system, backwash system,
chlorination system, fluoridation system, all instrumentation, cabinet, supports,
components, electrician support during loop checks, and all other related items
internal to control panel per plans and specifications not paid elsewhere. Site
installation of the control panel, wiring and conductors is under bid item 24.
Bid Item 26 – HVAC System Complete
1. HVAC System Compete shall be measured and paid for based on percentage of
work complete, tested and accepted in accordance with plans and specifications,
including but not limited to all materials, wire, ductwork, insulation, equipment,
electric unit heaters, ductwork, exhaust fans, supports, thermostats, air handling
units, balancing, startup, debugging, operationally testing, acceptable and complete
HVAC systems for both buildings.
Bid Item 27 – Chlorination Generation System Complete
1. Chlorination Generation System Complete shall be measured and paid for based on
percentage of work complete, tested and accepted in accordance with plans and
specifications including, but not limited to, all labor, materials, and equipment for
furnishing, installing, and testing the chlorine chlorination system, chlorine generator,
brine tank, chlorine solution tank; exhaust fan; dust bag housing, water softeners,
water filters; piping and tubing, valves, supports; two metering pumps; FRP table; all
equipment in schedule on Sheet C--8; all work in Section 46 32 13; wiring,
connections, testing, until functionally operating properly and efficiently, and all other
related work.
Bid Item 28 – Fluoridation System Complete
1. Fluoridation System Complete shall be measured and paid for based on percentage
of work complete, tested and accepted in accordance with plans and specifications
including, but not limited to, all labor, materials, and equipment for furnishing,
installing, and testing the fluoridation system, bulk and day tank; exhaust fan;
transfer pump, dosing pump, solution pump; piping and tubing, valves, supports;
emergency eyewash and shower system, compressor and pneumatic system, all
equipment in schedules and tables on Sheets C-10 and C-12; all work in Section 46
31 12; wiring, connections, testing, debugging, until functionally operating properly
and efficiently, and all other related work.
Bid Item 29 – Iron and Manganese Filtration System Complete
1. Iron and Manganese Filtration System Complete (Materials) shall be measured and
paid for based on percentage of work complete, tested and accepted in accordance
with plans and specifications including, but not limited to, all labor, materials, and
equipment for furnishing the fully automated well water filtration system, filters,

07/2023 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
254.07.100 PAGE 01 22 00 - 7
controls, instrumentation, power, piping and tubing, valves, supports; backwash
system that backwashes in response to both pressure and backwash tank water
level, all equipment and work shown in plans and in Section 46 34 00 and its
appendix pages; wiring, connections, and all other related work. Put all costs for
system installation, including testing and debugging until functionally operating
properly and efficiently in bid item 20 - Wellhouse Building Piping System.
Bid Item 30 – Landscaping
1. Landscaping shall be measured and paid for based on percentage of work complete,
tested and accepted in accordance with plans and specifications including, but not
limited to, all labor, materials, and equipment for furnishing, installing all landscaping,
protecting existing trees, upland grass seed mix, concrete mow strips, weeding, bark
mulch, multiple types of rock surfacing, boulders, and all other work, as shown in the
plans and detailed in specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
- END OF SECTION –

07/2023 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
254.07.100 PAGE 01 22 00 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

01/2023 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 01 30 00- 1
SECTION 01 30 00
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
Coordinate scheduling, Submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to
ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction
elements.
Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for
Substantial Completion.
After OWNER occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of
defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize
disruption of OWNER's activities.
OWNER, UDOT, land owners, and/or utility owners may be working within the project
area while this contract is in progress. If so, CONTRACTOR shall schedule his work in
conjunction with these other organizations to minimize mutual interference.
All existing City waterlines and service connections shall remain active during
construction except during connections to new water mains are required. All
connections to the existing waterlines, except those being hot-tapped, shall only be done
upon successful completion of mainline installation and testing.
Water service to this area can be interrupted to that CONTRACTOR shall connect up
new 24- and 16-inch pipelines. Included in Construction Schedule forecasted
connection dates for these water lines. Schedule with City final connection dates and
times. A copy of CONTRACTOR’S notification letter shall be reviewed and approved by
OWNER prior to distribution.
If required to work in Foothill Blvd, or any other City Street or Utah Department of
Transportation (UDOT) right-of-way, CONTRACTOR shall notify UDOT 72 hours prior to
work being performed therein. Work within the City Streets or UDOT right-of-way shall
be in accordance with their required permit and their license agreement with OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall obtain and comply with all required permits.
Coordination with Adjacent Property Owner
Once each week, CONTRACTOR shall hand deliver or mail a written "Construction
Status Update Notice" to all residents, businesses, schools and property owners
adjacent to and affected by the Work. Notice shall be on CONTRACTOR's company
letterhead paper and be secured to doorknob should occupants not be home.
Obtain ENGINEER's review of notice prior to distribution. As a minimum the notice
shall contain the following:

name and phone number of CONTRACTOR's representative for the project
work anticipated for the next 7 days including work locations and work by
subcontractors and utility companies
rough estimate of construction schedule through end of project

01/2023 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 01 30 00- 2
anticipated driveway approach closures
anticipated water, sewer or power outages
anticipated vehicular traffic impacts, rerouting or lane closures
anticipated pedestrian impacts and sidewalk closures
changes to public transportation bus routes
any other construction or work items which will impact or restrict the normal use
of streets and amenities

Failure to comply with this contract provision is considered grounds for project
suspension per Article 16.01 of the General Conditions (EJCDC 00 70 00).
FIELD ENGINEERING
ENGINEER shall provide the following construction staking at no cost to
CONTRACTOR.
Benchmark network throughout the construction zone
Pipeline alignment stakes at approximately 100-foot intervals and all bends and
designated changes in grade.
Stake locations for air valve vaults, air vents and other fittings
Construction staking and surveying shall be performed by a registered Land Surveyor in
the State of Utah.
CONTRACTOR shall provide all other survey construction staking as necessary to
complete the required work according to the contract documents.
ENGINEER shall not be responsible for stakes, etc. removed through negligence of
CONTRACTOR and in that event shall be compensated by CONTRACTOR for re-
staking efforts.
Locate and protect survey control and reference points. Promptly notify ENGINEER of
discrepancies discovered.
Control datum for survey is that shown on Contract Drawings.
Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference
points during construction.
Promptly report to ENGINEER loss or destruction of reference point or relocation
required because of changes in grades or other reasons.
Coordinate with all property owners to determine the location of existing sewer and
water service laterals.
All service laterals shall be verified and indicated on the Record Drawings supplied by
CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER.
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
Prior to the commencement of work at the site, a preconstruction conference will be held
at a mutually agreed time and place which shall be attended by CONTRACTOR’s

01/2023 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 01 30 00- 3
Project Manager, its superintendent, and its subcontractors as appropriate. Other
attendees will be:
ENGINEER and the Resident Project Representative (RPR)
Representatives of OWNER
Governmental representatives as appropriate
Others as requested by CONTRACTOR, OWNER, or ENGINEER.
Unless previously submitted to ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall bring to the
conference one copy of each of the following:
Progress schedule
Procurement schedule of major equipment and materials and items requiring long
lead time
Shop Drawings/Sample/Substitute or "Or Equal" submittal schedule.
The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish a
working relationship. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures
for handling such matters established. The agenda may include the following:
CONTRACTOR's tentative schedules
Transmittal, review, and distribution of CONTRACTOR's submittals
Processing applications for payment
Maintaining record documents
Critical work sequencing
Field decisions and Change Orders
Use of project site, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and OWNER's
needs
Major equipment deliveries and priorities
CONTRACTOR's assignments for safety and first aid
ENGINEER will preside at the preconstruction conference and will arrange for keeping
the minutes and distributing the minutes to all persons in attendance.
CONTRACTOR should plan on the conference taking no less than 6 hours.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
CONTRACTOR shall schedule and hold regular on-site progress meetings at least
weekly and at other times as required by ENGINEER or as required by progress of the
work. CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and all subcontractors active on the site shall be
represented at each meeting. CONTRACTOR may at its discretion request attendance
by representatives of its suppliers, manufacturers’, and other subcontractors.
ENGINEER shall preside at the meetings and provide for keeping and distribution of the
minutes. The purpose of the meetings will be to review the progress of the work,
maintain coordination of efforts, discuss changes in scheduling, and resolve other
problems which may develop.
At each construction progress meeting a progress report shall be presented by
CONTRACTOR containing an updated Progress Schedule. Where the delayed
completion date of a project phase is noted, CONTRACTOR shall describe the

01/2023 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 01 30 00- 4
anticipated delays or problems and outline the action plan being taken to resolve the
issues.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
254.07.100 01 32 16- 1

SECTION 01 32 16
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
CONTRACTOR shall prepare a schedule of the WORK in accordance with the Contract
Documents that will allow ENGINEER and/or OWNER to determine if the WORK can be
substantially complete within the Contract Time.
CONTRACTOR shall develop the project construction schedule using a computer
software program using the Critical Path Method (CPM) for scheduling. The program
shall be Primavera Project Planner (P6), or approved equal.
RELATED WORK
Related work in other sections includes but is not limited to:
01 30 00 Administrative Requirements
01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
DEFINITIONS
Activity. A discrete, identifiable task or event that takes time, uses resources, has a
definable start and stop date, furthers the work’s progress, and can be used to plan,
schedule, and monitor a project.
Activity ID. A unique, alphanumeric, identification code assigned to an activity.
Bar Chart. Also called a Gantt chart, a graphic representation of a schedule without
relationships. A timescale appears along the horizontal axis.
Completion Date, Contract. The original date specified in the contract for completion of
the project or a revised date resulting from authorized time extensions. The contract may
also specify completion dates for interim milestones, phases, or other portions of the
project.
Completion Date, Scheduled. The completion date projected or forecasted by the
schedule. The schedule may also project or forecast interim completion dates for
milestones, phases, or other portions of the project.
Constraints. A restriction imposed on the start or finish dates of an activity that modifies
or overrides the activity’s logic relationships.
Critical Path. The Longest Path.
Data Date. The first day in the Initial or Baseline Schedule and the first day for
performance of the work remaining in the Monthly Schedule Update. (May also be
defined as the date from which a schedule is calculated.)
Float, Total. The amount of time an activity can be delayed and not delay the project
completion date.
01/2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
254.07.100 01 32 16- 2

Holidays. Holidays observed are:
1st day in January (New Year's Day)
3rd Monday in January (Martin Luther King, Jr. Day)
3rd Monday in February (Presidents’ Day)
Last Monday in May (Memorial Day)
4th day in July (Independence Day)
24th day in July (Pioneer Day)
1st Monday in September (Labor Day)
11th day in November (Veterans Day)
4th Thursday in November (Thanksgiving Day)
25th day in December (Christmas Day)
For holidays that fall on a Saturday, both the Saturday and the preceding Friday are
considered to be holidays. For holidays that fall on a Sunday, both the Sunday and
the following Monday are considered to be holidays.
Longest Path. The sequence of activities that establishes the scheduled completion
date.
Open End. The condition that exists when an activity has either no predecessor or no
successor, or when an activity’s only predecessor relationship is a finish-to-finish
relationship or only successor relationship is a start-to-start relationship.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
General Requirements - Plan and schedule the project and report progress to the owner.
Provide a schedule using the critical path method (CPM). The owner’s acceptance of
any schedule, whether initial, baseline, or update, does not modify the contract or
constitute endorsement or validation by OWNER of the contractor's logic, activity
durations, or assumptions in creating the schedule. By accepting the schedule, OWNER
does not guaranty that the project can be performed or completed as scheduled. If
CONTRACTOR or OWNER discovers errors after the schedule has been accepted,
correct the error in the next schedule submission.
Title Block: Show on each page the following items:
Project Title, Contract Number, and CONTRACTOR’s name
Date of Submittal, revision number, page number, and Project status cutoff date
Approval signatures for each subcontractor
Legend of Symbols, codes, and abbreviations
Network nomenclature, e.g., “Detailed” or “Summary” or “Building Area” identification
Required Schedules
Initial Schedule - OWNER will use the initial schedule to monitor progress until the
baseline schedule is accepted. Prepare and submit a schedule for the first 60
calendar days of work plus a summary bar chart schedule for the balance of the
project. Activity durations on the summary chart may exceed 15 working days.

At least 10 calendar days before the preconstruction meeting, submit the initial
schedule to the owner. Ensure that the schedule shows milestone and
01/2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
254.07.100 01 32 16- 3

completion dates no later than the specified contract milestone and completion
dates.
OWNER will review the initial schedule at the preconstruction meeting. At this
meeting, be prepared to generally discuss the proposed schedule for the entire
project, not just the 60-day period covered by the initial schedule. If deviations to
the staging, phasing, or sequencing required by the contract documents are
proposed, be prepared to discuss these deviations.

Within 5 calendar days of the preconstruction meeting, OWNER will respond by
accepting the initial schedule, rejecting the schedule and identifying the reason
for rejection, or by asking for more information. Address the reasons for rejection
or provide the information requested and resubmit the revised initial schedule no
more than 5 calendar days after OWNER's response. OWNER may withhold
progress payments until CONTRACTOR submits the initial schedule.

Baseline Schedule - No more than 30 calendar days after approval of the initial
schedule, prepare and submit a baseline schedule to OWNER for review. Within 10
calendar days of receipt of the baseline schedule, OWNER will respond by accepting
the baseline schedule, rejecting the schedule and identifying the reason for rejection,
or by asking for more information. Address the reasons for rejection or provide the
information requested and resubmit the revised baseline schedule no more than 10
calendar days after OWNER's response. OWNER may withhold progress payments
until the contractor submits and OWNER accepts the baseline schedule.

Monthly Schedule Update - Prepare and submit a monthly schedule update to
OWNER that depicts the status of the project as of the end of the month. The update
will reflect a new data date, work performed up to, but not including, the new data
date, and the plan for completing the project. Submit the schedule update by the first
Monday of the following month. OWNER may withhold progress payments until the
contractor submits and the owner accepts the schedule update.

Final Schedule - Within 30 calendar days of final acceptance of the project, submit a
final schedule with actual start and finish dates for each activity. Include with the
submission a certification signed by the principal of the firm stating:

“To the best of my knowledge, the enclosed final schedule reflects the actual
start and finish dates of the activities contained herein.”
SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS
Provide a schedule that meets the following requirements:
Calculate the schedule using the Retained Logic scheduling option unless written
authorization is obtained from OWNER to use the Progress Override scheduling
option.
Do not use the following types of logic relationships:
Negative lags
Lags in excess of 10 workdays
Start-to-Finish relationships
Open Ends (Only the first activity will have no predecessor and only the last
activity will have no successor)
01/2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
254.07.100 01 32 16- 4

Constraints (CONTRACTOR may use a limited number of constraints only with
OWNER’s written authorization)
Manually modified dates (CONTRACTOR may manually modify dates only with
OWNER’s written authorization)
Obtain OWNER’s authorization prior to using lags with finish-to-start relationships
Includes the following work activities, as applicable:
Work to be performed by CONTRACTOR, subcontractors, and suppliers.
Work to be performed by OWNER, other contractors, and third parties such as
government agencies and authorities, permitting authorities, or other entities
required for completion of the project.
The project start date, scheduled completion date, and other contractually
mandated milestones, start or finish dates for phases, or site access or
availability dates.
Submittal, review, and approval activities when applicable, including time periods
for OWNER’s approval as specified in the contract documents.
Fabrication, delivery, installation, testing, and similar activities for materials,
plants, and equipment
Sampling and testing periods
Settlement and surcharge periods
Cure periods
Utility notification and relocation
Installation, erection and removal, and similar activities related to temporary
systems or structures such as temporary electrical systems or shoring.
Punch list, substantial completion, final cleanup, and similar activities.
Required acceptance testing, inspections, or similar activities.
Duration for receipt of permits or acquisition of rights-of-way.
Define the following attributes for each activity in the schedule:
A unique alphanumeric Activity ID.
A unique descriptive name, using such attributes as work type and location to
distinguish activities.
A duration stated in workdays of no more than 15 workdays, unless a longer
duration is requested by CONTRACTOR and approved by OWNER.
SCHEDULE SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
For each schedule submission, submit the following items:
A Transmittal Letter
A narrative report
A Primavera Version 6.0 compatible electronic file of the schedule on a CD, DVD, or
thumb-drive
The critical path in bar chart format (Longest Path sort)
Work paths with total float values within 20 workdays of the critical path’s total float
value in bar chart format. For example, if the critical path has a total float value of
zero, then show all of the work paths with total float values of 20 or less.
An activity network diagram plotted in color, on E-size paper, with each sheet of the
plot including a title, match data for diagram correlation, a page number, and a
legend. The activity network diagram should only be submitted with schedules with
revised relationships or activity durations.
A Predecessor/Successor report with the following items for each activity:
Activity ID and description
01/2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
254.07.100 01 32 16- 5

Original duration
Remaining duration
Calendar ID
Predecessors and Successors
Early state date
Early finish date
Late start date
Late finish date
Total float
Relationship type
Lags
Constraints
Narrative Reports for the Initial and Baseline Schedule – For each submission of the
initial and baseline schedule provide a narrative report that includes the following
information:
Explanation of the overall plan to complete the project, including where the work will
begin and the how the work and crews will flow through the project.
Use and application of the workdays per week, number of shifts per day, number of
hours per shift, holidays observed, and how the schedule accommodates adverse
weather days for each month or activity.
If the project is a multi-year project, then identify the work to be completed in each
construction season
A statement explaining why the schedule completion date is forecast to occur before
or after the contract completion date
An explanation stating why any of the contract milestone dates are forecast to occur
late
A description of problems or issues anticipated.
A description of anticipated delays, including:
Identification of the delayed activity by activity ID and description
Type of delay
Cause of the delay
Effect of the delay on other activities, milestones, and completion dates
Identification of the actions needed to avoid or mitigate the delay
A description of the critical path
A description of work paths with total float values within 20 workdays of the critical
path’s total float value. For example, if the critical path has a total float value of zero,
then describe all of the work paths with total float values of 20 or less.
A statement identifying constraints and an explanation of the reason for and purpose
of each constraint
A statement describing the status of required permits
The statement describing the reason for the use of each lag
Narrative Reports for the Monthly Schedule Update and Revised Schedule – For each
submission of the monthly schedule update and revised schedule provide a narrative
report that includes the following information:
A description of the status of the scheduled completion date (and any contract
milestone date(s)) since the last schedule submitted
01/2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
254.07.100 01 32 16- 6

A statement explaining why the scheduled completion date is forecast to occur
before or after the contract completion date. An explanation stating why any of the
contract milestone dates are forecasted to occur late
A description of the work performed since the last schedule update.
A description of unusual labor, shift, equipment, or material conditions or restrictions
encountered or anticipated.
A description of the problems encountered or anticipated since the last schedule
submission.
A statement that identifies and describes any current and anticipated delays. A
discussion of delays in the narrative report does not constitute notice and does not
replace the need for CONTRACTOR to provide notice as required by the contract.
Include the following:
Identification of the delayed activity by activity ID and description
Type of delay
Cause of the delay
Effect of the delay on other activities, milestones, and completion dates
Identification of the actions needed to avoid or mitigate the delay.
A description of the critical path
A description of changes in the critical path and schedule completion date (for the
project or its milestones) from the last schedule submission
Descriptions of the status of work paths that have total float values within 20
workdays of the critical path identified in the previous schedule submission.
Descriptions of work paths with total float values within 20 workdays of the critical
path’s total float value. For example, if the critical path has a total float value of
negative 25, then show all of the near critical paths with total float values of negative
5 or less.
A statement or Claim Digger report that identifies the changes made between the
previous schedule submission and the current proposed schedule, including, but not
limited to:
Data date
Completion date
Activity code assignments
Scheduling options
Activity descriptions
Added activities
Deleted activities
Added activity relationships
Deleted activity relationships
Activity original durations
Activity remaining durations
Activity actual start and finishes
Percent complete
Constraints
Activity resources
Activity costs
Activity coding
A statement providing status of pending items, including, but not limited to:
Permits
Change orders
Time extension requests
01/2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
254.07.100 01 32 16- 7

Noncompliance or similar notices indicating deficiencies in CONTRACTOR’s
performance
FLOAT TIME
Neither OWNER nor CONTRACTOR owns the float time. The Project owns the float
time. Liability for the delay to the project complete date rests with the party causing the
delay.
CHANGE ORDERS
Upon approval of a Change Order or upon receipt by CONTRACTOR of authorization to
proceed with additional work, the change shall be reflected in the next Monthly Schedule
update. Contractor shall utilize a sub-network in the schedule depicting the changed
work and its effect on other activities. This sub-network shall be tied to the main network
with appropriate logic so that a true analysis of the critical path can be made. In order to
receive an extension in Contract Times and change in price for time extension,
CONTRACTOR must submit the sub-network analysis.
INCLEMENT WEATHER PROVISIONS
CONTRACTOR’s schedule shall include at least the number of days of delay due to
unusually severe weather as required by the Supplementary General Conditions.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for construction progress
scheduling. Full compensation for construction progress scheduling shall be considered
as included in the contract unit or lump sum bid prices for the various items of the
contract to which it relates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

- END OF SECTION –
01/2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
254.07.100 01 32 16- 8

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1/31/2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
254.07.100 01 33 00 – 1
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Wherever Submittals are required by the Contract Documents, transmit 5 copies of each
Submittal to ENGINEER with a Submittal transmittal form which is acceptable to
ENGINEER.
Sequentially number transmittal forms. Mark revised Submittals with original number and
sequential alphabetic suffix, i.e., Submittal 1, Submittal 1.A, etc.
Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor and/or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail
number, and Specification section number, appropriate to Submittal.
CONTRACTOR shall review Submittals prior to submission to ENGINEER. Apply
Contractor's stamp, signed and dated, certifying that review, approval, verification of
products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of
information is in accordance with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
Identify any deviations from the Contract Documents on the Submittal transmittal form.
Schedule Submittals to expedite Project, and deliver to ENGINEER at their business
address. Coordinate submission of related items.
Submittals shall be submitted sufficiently in advance to allow ENGINEER not less than
ten regular working days for examining the drawings. These drawings shall be accurate,
distinct, and complete and shall contain all required information, including satisfactory
identification of items and unit assemblies in relation to the contract drawings and/or
specifications.
Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which
may adversely affect successful performance of completed Work.
If a Submittal is returned to CONTRACTOR marked “APPROVED”, or similar
notification, formal revision and resubmission will not be required.
If a Submittal is returned marked “APPROVED – MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED”, or
similar notification, CONTRACTOR shall make the corrections on the Submittal,
however, formal revision and resubmission will not be required.
Resubmittals
If a Submittal is returned marked “AMEND AND RESUBMIT”, or similar notification,
CONTRACTOR shall revise the Submittal and resubmit the required number of
copies.
Identify changes made since the previous submission.
Rejected Submittals
If a Submittal is returned marked “REJECTED – RESUBMIT”, or similar notification,
it shall mean either that the proposed material or product does not satisfy the
1/31/2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
254.07.100 01 33 00 – 2
specification, the Submittal is so incomplete that is cannot be reviewed, or is a
substitution request not submitted in accordance with Section 01 60 00 – Product
Requirements.
CONTRACTOR shall prepare a new Submittal or submit a substitution request
according to Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements and shall submit the required
number of copies.
Distribute copies of reviewed Submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly
report inability to comply with requirements.
Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
Unless noted otherwise, corrections indicated on Submittals shall be considered as
changes necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall not
be taken as changes to the contract requirements.
Fabrication or purchase of an item may only commence after ENGINEER has reviewed
the pertinent Submittals and returned copies to CONTRACTOR marked either
“APPROVED” or “APPROVED – MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED”.
ENGINEER's review of CONTRACTOR Submittals shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of
the entire responsibility for the corrections of details and dimensions. CONTRACTOR
shall assume all responsibility and risk for any misfits due to any errors in
CONTRACTOR Submittals. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for dimensions and
quantities, coordinating with all trades, the design of adequate connections and details,
and satisfactory and safe performance of the work.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
Submit initial schedules within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. After
review comments on the initial schedule are received from ENGINEER and OWNER,
CONTRACTOR shall resubmit required revised data within ten days.
Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment.
Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to Project site file, subcontractors, suppliers,
and other concerned parties. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems
anticipated by projections indicated in schedules.
Submit computer generated horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major portion
of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week.
Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages
and other logically grouped activities. Indicate early and late start, early and late finish,
float dates, and duration.
Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.
Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and
samples.
1/31/2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
254.07.100 01 33 00 – 3
PRODUCT DATA
Product Data: Submit to ENGINEER for review for limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract
Documents.
Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES article and for record documents described in Section 01 78 50 - Project
Closeout.
SHOP DRAWINGS
Shop Drawings: Submit to ENGINEER for review for limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract
Documents.
Fabrication of an item may be commenced only after ENGINEER has reviewed the
pertinent submittals and returned copies to CONTRACTOR marked either
"APPROVED", or "APPROVED - MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED". Corrections
indicated on submittals shall be considered as changes necessary to meet the
requirements of the Contract Documents and shall not be taken as the basis of claims
for extra work.
When required by individual specification sections, provide shop drawings signed and
sealed by professional engineer responsible for designing components shown on shop
drawings.
Include signed and sealed calculations to support design.
Submit drawings and calculations in form suitable for submission to and approval by
authorities having jurisdiction.
Make revisions and provide additional information when required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES article and for record documents described in Section 01 78 50 - Project
Closeout.
SAMPLES
Whenever indicated in the Specifications or requested by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR
shall submit at least 1 sample of each item or material to ENGINEER for acceptance at
no additional cost to OWNER.
Samples, as required herein, shall be submitted for acceptance prior to ordering such
material for delivery to the jobsite, and shall be submitted in an orderly sequence so that
dependent materials or equipment can be assembled and reviewed without causing
delay in the Work.
1/31/2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
254.07.100 01 33 00 – 4
Unless otherwise specified, all colors and textures of specified items will be selected by
ENGINEER from the manufacturer's standard colors and standard materials, products,
or equipment lines.
CERTIFICATES
When specified in individual Specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer,
installation/application subcontractor, or CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER, in quantities
specified for Product Data.
Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be
acceptable to ENGINEER.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
When specified in individual Specification sections, submit printed instructions for
delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to ENGINEER
for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data.
Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special
environmental criteria required for application or installation.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS
When required in individual sections, have Manufacturer or Supplier provide qualified
representative to observe field conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality
of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as
applicable and to make written report of observations and recommendations to
ENGINEER.
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL
CONTRACTOR shall furnish to ENGINEER five (5) identical sets of Operations and
Maintenance Manuals. Each set shall consist of one or more volumes, each of which
shall be bound in a standard size, 3-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl, hard-cover binder suitable for
bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2.5 inches. A Table of Contents
shall be provided which indicates all equipment and suppliers in the Operations and
Maintenance Manuals.
CONTRACTOR shall also furnish ENGINEER one copy of the Operations and
Maintenance Manuals in PDF electronic format.
CONTRACTOR shall include in the Operations and Maintenance manuals full details for
care and maintenance for all visible surfaces as well as the following for each item of
mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation equipment (except for equipment furnished
by the Owner):
Complete operating instructions, including location of controls, special tools or other
equipment required, related instrumentation, and other equipment needed for
operation.
1/31/2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
254.07.100 01 33 00 – 5
Preventative maintenance procedures and schedules
A description of proper maintenance activities
Complete parts lists, by generic title, identification number, and catalog number,
complete with exploded views of each assembly.
Disassembly and reassembly instruction
Name and location of nearest supplier and spare parts warehouse
Name and location of manufacturer
Recommended troubleshooting and start-up procedures
Prints of the record drawings, including diagrams and schematics, as required under
the electrical and instrumentation portions of these specifications.
All Operations and Maintenance manuals shall be submitted in final form to ENGINEER
not later than the 75 percent of construction completion date. All discrepancies found by
ENGINEER in the Operations and Maintenance manuals shall be corrected by
CONTRACTOR prior to final acceptance of the project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

- END OF SECTION –

1/31/2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
254.07.100 01 33 00 – 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
02/2023 PERMITS
254.07.100 PAGE 01 41 00 - 1
SECTION 01 41 00
PERMITS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section is to furnish the known list of required permits, and several of the
requirements of these permits, for the Work under the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR should note that the list is not necessarily complete and that
additional permit requirements may exist or arise.
1.2 GENERAL
A. During the Bid period, CONTRACTOR shall review all permits and the
requirements of all permits and shall comply with said requirements wherever said
permit compliance work has not been performed by OWNER or others, or has not
been agreed to be performed in the Contract documents.
B. During the bid period, permits and the conditions of permits will be available for
review at the office of OWNER.
C. CONTRACTOR shall obtain all permits required for the execution of the Work that
have not been obtained by OWNER, as indicated in this Section. Submit copies of
all CONTRACTOR obtained permits to the Owner/Engineer and keep a copy of
each onsite. Comply with the conditions of all Owner and Contractor obtained
permits.
D. Include in the Bid the cost of obtaining all necessary permits, including application
fees and other costs, and the costs of complying with the conditions of all permits,
including the conditions of permits obtained by OWNER which have not already
been done by OWNER. Any permit fees listed in this Section are estimates and for
Contractor’s information only. CONTRACTOR shall verify and pay all actual fees.
E. Completeness of the list of Contractor obtained permits is not guaranteed. The
absence of information does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for
determining and verifying the extent of permits required, of obtaining such permits,
and complying with the conditions of each permit. Some permit applications, and
conditions have been obtained during design and are provided in this Section for
Contractor convenience. OWNER does not guarantee the accuracy of the permit
applications, requirements, and/or fees.
1.3 SUMMARY OF PERMITS OBTAINED BY OWNER
A. The following permits or licenses have been, or shall be, obtained by OWNER for
this Project. Copies of the permits and their requirements are available at Owner’s
offices. No additional compensation or Contract Extensions shall be granted to
Contractor because of delays by Owner to obtain any permit unless
CONTRACTOR is unable to proceed and complete the Work because of such
delays as demonstrated by CONTRACTOR’s approved Project schedule.
07/2023 PERMITS
254.07.100 PAGE 01 41 00 - 2
1. Plan Approval from the Utah Division of Drinking Water.

1.4 SUMMARY OF PERMITS TO BE OBTAINED BY CONTRACTOR
A. The following permits shall be obtained and paid for by Contractor.
1. Fruit Heights City.
a. $60 Excavation Permit
b. $65 Plan Review Fee
c. $700 Building Permit.
d. Construction Water Supply Permit: As needed to secure a treated water
supply at the Contractor’s trailer OR staging area.
2. Utah Division of Water Quality: Construction Activity Stormwater Permit.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
3 PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
- END OF SECTION -
01/2023 ABBREVIATIONS
254.07.100 01 42 13 - 1
SECTION 01 42 13
ABBREVIATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
Wherever in these Specifications references are made to the standards, specifications, or other
published data of the various national, regional, or local organizations, such organizations may
be referred to by their acronym or abbreviation only. As a guide to the user of these
Specifications, the following acronyms or abbreviations which may appear in these
Specifications shall have the meanings indicated herein.
See Drawings Sheet G-3 for other Abbreviations.
Abbreviations and acronyms not included in below list are per ASME Y 1.1.
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
AASHTO American Association of the State Highway and Transportation Officials
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (formerly AFBMA)
ACI American Concrete Institute
AGA American Gas Association
AGC American General Contractors
AI The Asphalt Institute
AIA American Institute of Architects
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
ANSI American Nation Standards Institute, Inc.
APA American Plywood Association
API American Petroleum Institute
APWA American Public Works Association
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASOC American Society of Quality Control
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau
BBC Basic Building Code, Building Officials and Code Administrators
International
CGA Compressed Gas Association
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute
CMA Concrete Masonry Association
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CWI Certified Welding Inspector
DIP Ductile Iron Pipe
DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association
DWQ Department of Water Quality
01/2023 ABBREVIATIONS
254.07.100 01 42 13 - 2
DWR Drinking Water Regulations
ECTC Erosion Control Technology Council
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
ETC Electrical Test Laboratories
FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency
FHWA Federal Highway Administration
FM Factory Mutual System
HI Hydraulic Institute
IBC International Building Code
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
ICC International Code Council
ICC-ES International Code Council Evaluation Service
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IES Illuminating Engineering Society
IFC International Fire Code
IMC International Mechanical Code
IPC International Plumbing Code
ISA Instrument Society of America
ISO International Organization of Standardization
ITE Institute of Traffic Engineers
LPI Lightning Protection Institute
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NFPA National Forest Products Association
NISO National Information Standards Organization
NSF NSF International (formerly National Sanitation Foundation)
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PCA Portland Cement Association
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
RJ Restrained Joint Piping
RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association
RWMA Resistance Welder Manufacturer's Association
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
SSPC Society for Protective Coating (formerly Steel Structure Painting Council)
SSPWC Standard Specification for Public Works Construction
TB Thrust Block
TPI Truss Plate Institute
UDOT Utah Department of Transportation
UBC Uniform Building Code
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UNO Unless Noted Otherwise
WCRSI Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
WI Woodwork Institute
01/2023 ABBREVIATIONS
254.07.100 01 42 13 - 3
WRI Wire Reinforcements Institute, Inc.
WSP Welded Steel Pipe
WWPA Western Wood Products Association

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 ABBREVIATIONS
254.07.100 01 42 13 - 4

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

01/2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS
254.07.100 01 42 19 - 1
SECTION 01 42 19
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
QUALITY ASSURANCE
TITLES OF SECTIONS AND PARAGRAPHS. Captions accompanying Specifications
sections and paragraphs are for convenience of reference only, and do not form a part of
the Specification.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS. Whenever in these Specifications references are made
to published specifications, codes, standards, or other requirements, it shall be
understood that wherever no date is specified, only the latest specifications, standards
or requirements of the respective issuing agencies which have been published as of the
date that the work is advertised for bids, shall apply; except to the extent that said
standards or requirements may be in conflict with applicable laws, ordinances, or
governing codes. No requirements set forth herein or shown on the drawings shall be
waived because of any provision of, or omission from, said standards or requirements.
SPECIALISTS, ASSIGNMENTS. In certain instances, specifications test requires (or
implies) that specific work is to be assigned to specialists or expert entities, who must be
engaged for the performance of that work. Such assignments shall be recognized as
special requirements and shall not be interpreted so as to conflict with the enforcement
of building codes and similar regulations governing the work; also, they are not intended
to interfere with local union jurisdiction settlements and similar conventions. Such
assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of
work is recognized as "expert" for the indicated construction processes or operations.
Nevertheless, the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of contract
requirements remains with CONTRACTOR.
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the Specifications, all Work
specified herein shall conform to or exceed the requirements of all applicable codes and
the applicable requirements of the following documents to the extent that the provisions
of such documents are not in conflict with the requirements of these Specifications nor
the applicable codes.
Reference herein to "Building Code" or “Uniform Building Code” shall mean the
International Building Code of the International Code Council. The latest edition of the
code as approved and used by the local agency as of the date of award, as adopted by
the agency having jurisdiction, shall apply to the Work herein, including all addenda,
modifications, amendments, or other lawful changes thereto.
In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, drawings and the other Contract
Document, the most stringent requirements shall govern. All conflicts shall be brought to
the attention of ENGINEER for clarification and directions prior to ordering or providing
any materials or labor. CONTRACTOR shall bid the most stringent requirements.
APPLICABLE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. CONTRACTOR shall construct the
Work specified herein in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents
01/2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS
254.07.100 01 42 19 - 2
and the referenced portions of those referenced codes, standards, and Specifications
listed herein; except, that wherever references to "Standard Specifications" are made,
the provisions therein for measurement and payment shall not apply.
References in the Contract Documents to "Standard Specifications" shall mean the
Contract Documents including all current supplements, addenda, and revisions thereof.
References herein to "OSHA Regulations for Construction" shall mean Title 29, Part
1926, Construction Safety and Health Regulations, Code of Federal Regulations
(OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto.
References herein to "OSHA Standards" shall mean Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational
Safety and Health Standards, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including changes
and amendments thereto.
UTAH DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY. Wells, tanks, pumping
stations and culinary water pipelines shall conform to the requirements of Utah
Administrative Code Rule R 309. Water and sewer pipeline installation shall conform to
the requirements of Utah Administrative Code Rule R 317-3-2.9 “Protection of Water
Supplies” for horizontal and vertical separation.
UTAH DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (UDOT) REQUIREMENTS.
CONTRACTOR's work on UDOT property or right-of-way shall conform to UDOT’s latest
edition of Standard Specifications For Road and Bridge Construction.
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE) REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR's work
shall conform to COE Specifications in accordance with Section 404 of the Clean Water
Act for excavation in wetlands.
Reference herein to APWA shall mean the latest edition of the “Manual of Standard
Specifications” and “Manual of Standard Plans” as prepared by the American Public
Works Association and the Associated General Contractors of America.
All provisions of the Manual of Standard Specifications, Latest Edition and Manual of
Standard Plans, Latest Edition both published by the Utah Chapter of the American
Public Works Association are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents by
reference. The publications may be purchased separately from the Utah Technology
Transfer Center, Utah State University, 4111 Old Main Hill, Logan, UT 84322-4111. Any
conflicts, between the technical specifications, drawings, and other provisions or
documents contained in the Contract Form or Contract Documents versus provisions
contained in the Manual of Standard Specifications, Latest Edition and Manual of
Standard Plans, Latest Edition published by the Utah Chapter of the American Public
Works Association, shall be resolved in favor of the technical specifications, drawing,
and provisions contained in the Contract form or Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING
254.07.100 01 45 00- 1
SECTION 01 45 00
QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
This Section outlines responsibilities for controlling quality of materials, products and
workmanship.
MATERIALS
All materials incorporated in the project shall be new and shall fully comply with the
Specifications. Unless otherwise clearly provided in the Specifications, all workmanship,
equipment, materials, and articles incorporated in the Work covered by the Contract are
to be of the best available grade of their respective kinds. Whenever, in the
specifications, any material, article, device, product, fixture, form, type of construction, or
process indicated or specified by patent or proprietary name, by name of manufacturer,
or by catalog number, such specifications shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of
establishing a standard of quality and facilitating the description of the material or
process desired and shall be deemed to be followed by the words "or approved equal"
and CONTRACTOR may in such case, upon receiving ENGINEER's approval, purchase
and use any item, type, or process which shall be substantially equal in every respect to
that indicated or specified.
Materials and equipment may be used in the Work based upon receipt of a Supplier’s
certificate of compliance. Certificate must be in possession of CONTRACTOR and
reviewed by ENGINEER prior to use.
Quality Assurance Testing by OWNER and/or ENGINEER shall not relieve
CONTRACTOR of responsibility to furnish materials and work in full compliance with
Contract Documents.
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
Should instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification before
proceeding.
When required in individual sections, submit manufacturer’s instructions in the quantity
required for product data, delivery, handling, storage, assembly, installation, start-up,
adjusting, balancing, and finishing, as appropriate.
WORKMANSHIP
Maintain performance control and supervision over Subcontractors, Suppliers,
manufacturers, products, services, workmanship, and site conditions, to produce work in
accordance with Contract Documents.
Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified
requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.

01/2023 QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING
360.39.100 01 45 00- 2
Provide suitable qualified personnel to produce specified quality.
Ensure finishes match approved samples.
TOLERANCES
Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable
Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When manufacturers' tolerances conflict with
Contract Documents, request clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding.
Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
Testing agency and testing for quality control and material testing shall be furnished by
CONTRACTOR as part of the project. Results of testing shall be reported to
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER on site. Reports of the testing shall be transmitted
directly to ENGINEER.
Materials to be supplied under this contract will be tested and/or inspected either at their
place of origin or at the site of the work by the testing agency. CONTRACTOR shall give
ENGINEER written notification well in advance of actual readiness of materials to be
tested and/or inspected at point of origin so ENGINEER may witness testing by the
testing agency. Satisfactory tests and inspections at the point of origin shall not be
construed as a final acceptance of the material nor shall it preclude retesting or
reinspection at the site of the work.
CONTRACTOR shall furnish such samples of materials as are requested by the
ENGINEER, without charge. No material shall be used until reports from the testing
agency have been reviewed and accepted by ENGINEER. See Section 01 33 00 -
Submittal Procedures.
UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS
Examine areas and conditions under which materials and products are to be installed.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to installer.
AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE
Refer to Section 00 73 00 "Supplementary Conditions" sub-section SC 10.03 "Resident
Project Representative".
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
ENGINEER’s failure to detect any defective Work or materials does not prevent later
rejection when such defect is discovered nor does it obligate ENGINEER for
acceptance.

01/2023 QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING
360.39.100 01 45 00- 3
CONTRACTOR shall provide 24-hours minimum notice to ENGINEER for all testing
required by these specifications so ENGINEER may coordinate or be present during
testing.
TESTING ACCEPTANCE AND FREQUENCY
Minimum Quality Control Testing Frequency: As defined in Table 01 45 00-1,
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to ensure that all testing is performed at the
frequencies shown. CONTRACTOR shall uncover any work at no cost to OWNER to
allow the testing agency to perform required testing at the frequency shown.
Acceptance of Defective Work: As defined in Article 14.04 of the General Conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent
Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work
being applied or attached.
Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations.
PREPARATION
Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner
prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond.

01/2023 QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING
360.39.100 01 45 00- 4
TABLE 01 45 00-1: QUALITY CONTROL TESTING FREQUENCY

SYSTEM
or
MATERIAL
TESTS MINIMUM REQUIRED FREQUENCY
SUBGRADE AND BACKFILL MATERIALS
Section 31 23 15
Excavation and
Backfill for Buried
Pipelines
Field Density 1 test per 200 linear feet per 1.5 feet of backfill thickness
placed.
Laboratory 1 test for each material type which includes proctor,
classification, and gradation.
Section 31 23 23
Excavation and
Backfill for
Structures
Field Density
1 test per 2000 square feet per 1.5 feet of backfill thickness
placed within 20 feet of pump station building. At least one test
per 1.5 feet of backfill thickness under pump station.
Laboratory 1 test for each material type which includes proctor,
classification, and gradation.
Section 32 11 23
Road Base -
Untreated Base
Course
Field Density Base course subgrade: 1 test per 2,000 square feet of area.
Base course: 1 test per 2,000 square feet of area.
Laboratory Base course: 1 test for each material type which includes
proctor, classification, and gradation.
ASPHALT
Section 32 12 16
Hot-Mix Asphalt
Concrete Paving
Mix Design
Marshall Test Method: 1 test initially per each type of material
and each change in target, and for each day of production
thereafter.
Specific Gravity: 1 per each Marshall Test
Extraction: 1 test per each Marshall Test
Field Density Bituminous surfaces: 1 test per 2,000 square feet placed or
part thereof.
Asphalt
Thickness
and Core
Density
Bituminous surfaces: 1 test sample every 300 linear feet of
completed roadway.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
Section 3 30 00

Cast-in-Place
Concrete
Slump
1 test every day of placement (if less than 100 cubic yards in a
day), 1 test for every 100 cubic yards, or 1 test for each 3,000
square feet of surface area for slabs and more frequently if
batching appears inconsistent.
Entrained air 1 test with slump test.
Ambient and
concrete
temperatures
1 test with slump test.
Water cement
ratio. to be verified and provided with batch tickets.

01/2023 QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING
360.39.100 01 45 00- 5

- END OF SECTION –

SYSTEM
or
MATERIAL
TESTS MINIMUM REQUIRED FREQUENCY
Compressive
strength
1 set of 5 cylinders. 1 test every day of placement (if less than
100 cubic yards in a day), 1 test for every 100 cubic yards, or 1
test for each 3,000 square feet of surface area for slabs, and
more frequently if batching appears inconsistent.
NOTES:
1 Additional tests shall be conducted when variations occur due to the contractor's operations,
weather conditions, site conditions, etc.
2 Classification, moisture content, Atterberg limits and specific gravity tests shall be conducted
for each compaction test if applicable.
3 Tests can substitute for same tests required under "Aggregates" (from bins or source),
although gradations will be required when blending aggregates.
4 Aggregate moisture tests are to be conducted in conjunction with concrete strength tests for
water/cement calculations.

01/2023 QUALITY CONTROL AND MATERIALS TESTING
360.39.100 01 45 00- 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES
254.07.100 PAGE 01 45 23 - 1
SECTION 01 45 23
TESTING AGENCY SERVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing Construction Quality Control Testing
of all soils, concrete, etc. as required by the various sections of these Specifications.
This section includes the following:
Use of independent testing agency
Control testing report submittal requirements
Responsibilities of testing agency
RELATED WORK
Related work specified in other sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 22 00 Measurement and Payment
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the
Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM D 3740 Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies
Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in
Engineering Design and Construction.
ASTM D 4561 Standard Practice for Quality Control Systems for Organizations
Producing and Applying Bituminous Paving Materials
ASTM E 329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction
Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.
DEFINITIONS
Independent Testing Agency: A testing agency NOT owned by CONTRACTOR, and an
agency that does not have any preferential affiliation or association with CONTRACTOR,
or any of CONTRACTOR’s Subcontractors and Suppliers other than entering into a
contract with CONTRACTOR to perform the duties defined in these Specifications.
Professional Engineer: An engineer who complies with Utah licensing law and is
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

01/2023 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES
254.07.100 PAGE 01 45 23 - 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
CONTRACTOR shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency
which complies with ASTM D 3740, ASTM D 4561, and ASTM E 329 to test materials for
contract compliance.
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
If CONTRACTOR is employing and paying for an independent testing agency, prior to
start of Work, submit testing agency’s name, address, telephone number and the
following:
Concrete Technician: Approved by ENGINEER or ACI certified.
Person charged with engineering managerial responsibility
Professional engineer on staff to review services
Level of certification of technicians
TESTING AGENCY SUBMITTALS
Field Test Report: Submit report no later than the end of the current day.
Laboratory Test Report: Submit original report within 48 hours after test results are
determined.
Final Summary Report: Submit prior to final payment
On all reports include:
Project title, number and date of the report
Date, time and location of test
Name and address of material Supplier
Identification of product being tested and type of test performed
Identify whether test is initial test or retest
Results of testing and interpretation of results
Name of technician who performed the testing
RESPONSIBILITIES OF TESTING AGENCY
Calibrate testing equipment at least annually with devices with an accuracy traceable to
either National Bureau of Standards or acceptable values of natural physical constraints.
Provide sufficient personnel at site and cooperate with CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and
OWNER’s Representative in performance of testing service.
Secure samples using procedures specified in the applicable testing code.
Perform testing of products in accordance with applicable sections of the Contract
Documents.
Immediately report any compliance or noncompliance of materials and mixes to
CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and OWNER’s Representative.
01/2023 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES
254.07.100 PAGE 01 45 23 - 3
When an out-of-tolerance condition exists, perform additional inspections and testing
until the specified tolerance is attained, and identify retesting on test reports.
LIMITS ON TESTING AGENCY AUTHORITY
Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract
Documents.
Agency may not suspend Work.
Agency has no authority to accept Work for OWNER.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Testing agency services shall be measured or paid as provided in Section 01 22 00-
Measurement and Payment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES
254.07.100 PAGE 01 45 23 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TEMPRORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES
01/2023 AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
254.07.100 01 50 00 – 1

SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This section covers temporary utilities, including electricity, lighting, telephone service,
water, and sanitary facilities; temporary controls, including barriers, protection of work,
and water control; and construction facilities, including parking, progress cleaning, and
temporary buildings.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Temporary Electricity: CONTRACTOR shall provide, maintain, and pay for all power
required by CONTRACTOR, including electrical service to CONTRACTORS field office.
Temporary Lighting: CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary lighting required for
execution of his work and for employee and public safety. As a minimum, lighting levels
during working hours shall meet the requirements of OSHA Subsection 1926.56
illumination.
Temporary Heating and Cooling
Provide heating and cooling devices as needed to maintain specified conditions for
construction operations.
Temporary Ventilation
Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to
prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
Telephone Service: CONTRACTOR shall provide, maintain and pay for telephone
service to the field office at time of project mobilization.
Temporary Water Service
CONTRACTOR shall provide for all his workers on the project, adequate and
reasonably convenient uncontaminated drinking water supply. All facilities shall
comply with the regulations of the local and State Departments of Health.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to arrange for water, both potable and non-
potable water.
When water is taken from a city water system or any other potable water supply
source for construction purposes, suitable precautions shall be taken to prevent
cross connections and contamination of water supply.
Temporary Sanitary Facilities: CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain sanitary
facilities for his employees and his subcontractors' employees that will comply with the
regulations of the local and State Departments of Health.
TEMPRORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES
01/2023 AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
254.07.100 01 50 00 – 2

TEMPORARY CONTROLS
Barriers: Provide barriers as necessary to prevent unauthorized entry to construction
areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from
construction operations. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and
structures from damage.
Project Security
CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary provisions to protect the project and
CONTRACTOR's facilities from fire, theft, and vandalism, and the public from
unnecessary exposure to injury.
Entry Control:
Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site.
Allow entrance only to authorized persons.
Dust Control: Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction
operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into the
atmosphere. Give all unpaved streets, roads, detours, or haul roads used in the
construction area an approved dust-preventive treatment or periodically water to prevent
dust. Applicable environmental regulations for dust prevention shall be strictly enforced.
Pest Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents, pests and
insects from damaging the Work.
Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of
soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants
produced by construction operations. All chemicals used during construction or
furnished for project operation whether defoliant, soil sterilant, herbicide, pesticide,
disinfectant, polymer, reactant or of other classification, shall show approval of the U.S.
Department of Agriculture. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be
in strict accordance with the printed instruction of the manufacturer.
Protection of Work: CONTRACTOR shall protect installed work and provide special
protection where specified in individual specifications sections. CONTRACTOR shall
provide temporary and removable protection for installed products, and shall control
activity in immediate work area to minimize damage.
Open Burning: No open burning of waste materials will be allowed.
Explosives and Blasting: The use of explosives on the work will not be permitted.
Noise Abatement: In inhabited areas, particularly residential, operations shall be
performed in a manner to minimize unnecessary noise generation.
STORM AND GROUND WATER
CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain at all times during construction, ample
means and devices with which to promptly remove and properly dispose of all water
entering the excavation or other parts of the work, whether the water be from surface
or underground water sources.
TEMPRORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES
01/2023 AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
254.07.100 01 50 00 – 3

In excavation, fill, and grading operations, care shall be taken to disturb the pre-
existing drainage pattern as little as possible. Particular care shall be taken not to
direct drainage water into private property or into streets or drainage ways
inadequate for the increased flow.
CONTRACTOR shall maintain effective means to minimize the quantity of sediments
leaving the work area either by storm water or CONTRACTOR's own dewatering
operations. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining required permits and
complying with all City, State, and Federal storm water management regulations and
requirements, including preparing and implementing a Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for Construction Activities. If required, CONTRACTOR
shall submit a copy of the Notice of Intent and the SWPPP to the OWNER for review
and approval.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
VEHICULAR ACCESS
Construct temporary access roads from public thoroughfares to serve construction
area, of width and load bearing capacity to accommodate unimpeded traffic for
construction purposes.
Extend and relocate vehicular access as Work progress requires, provide detours as
necessary for unimpeded traffic flow.
Location of temporary access roads and detours shall be approved by ENGINEER.
Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles.
Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants and control valves free of obstructions.
Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
When possible, use existing on-site roads for construction traffic.
Parking: CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary parking areas to accommodate use of
construction personnel. Parking shall be located in an area approved by ENGINEER.
Progress Cleaning
CONTRACTOR shall maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish.
Maintain the site in a clean and orderly condition. Upon completion of work, repair all
damage caused by equipment and leave the project site free of rubbish or excess
materials of any kind.
Thoroughly clean all spilled dirt, gravel, or other foreign materials caused by the
construction operations from all streets and roads at the conclusion of each day's
operation.
It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to promptly clean up and remove any
oil and/or fuel spills caused by CONTRACTOR or his Sub-contractors during the
course of the project. Contaminated soil shall be properly disposed of by
CONTRACTOR in accordance with all applicable laws. CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible for any damages to OWNER resulting from CONTRACTOR's negligence
in promptly cleaning up said spills.
REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
Prior to Final Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR shall remove temporary above
grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials; clean and repair damage
TEMPRORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES
01/2023 AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
254.07.100 01 50 00 – 4

caused by installation or use of temporary work; and restore existing facilities used
during construction to original condition.
CULTURAL RESOURCES
CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966
(16 U.S.C. 470) and 36 CFR 800 which provides for the preservation of potential
historical architectural, archeological, or cultural resources (hereinafter called "cultural
resources").
CONTRACTOR shall conform to the applicable requirements of the National Historic
Preservation Act of 1966 as it relates to the preservation of cultural resources.
If a suspected or unsuspected historical, archaeological, or paleontological item, feature,
or site or other cultural resource is encountered during subsurface excavations at the
site of construction, the following procedures shall be instituted:
Construction operations shall be immediately stopped in the vicinity of the discovery
and ENGINEER and OWNER shall be notified of the nature and exact location of the
finding. CONTRACTOR shall not damage the discovered objects and shall provide
written confirmation of the discovery to ENGINEER within two (2) calendar days.
OWNER and ENGINEER will then immediately notify the State Historical
Preservation Office (SHPO) and the Utah Geological Survey (UGS).
SHPO and UGS will investigate the finding and determine if the resource requires
protection and the disposition of the said resource.
If SHPO and UGS determine that the potential find is a bona fide cultural resource,
CONTRACTOR shall suspend work at the location of the find under the provisions for
changes contained in Articles 11, 12, and 13 of the General Conditions, Section 00 70
00 – General Conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS
EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS
Erosion control blankets shall meet the requirements of the Erosion Control
Technology Council (ECTC) and the FHWA Standard Specifications for Construction
of Roads and Bridges on Federal Highway Projects, FP-03 Section 713.17 as a Type
3.B Extended Term Double Net Erosion Control Blanket. The erosion control blanket
shall be fabricated from UV-stabilized polypropylene and a straw/coconut blend. The
blanket shall be Model SC150 by Tensar North American Green, Excel CS-3 by
Western Excelsior, or approved equal. The functional longevity shall be 24 months
minimum.
SILT FENCE
Use woven fabric meeting the following properties.

TEMPRORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES
01/2023 AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
254.07.100 01 50 00 – 5

Table 1 - Silt Fence Geotextile
Property ASTM MARV’s
Standard High Performance
Grab Tensile Strength, lbs. D 4632 90(a) 120(a)
Grab Elongation, % D 4632 < 40 < 40
Flux, gal/min/ft2 D 4491 15 90
Apparent Opening Size,
(AOS-US sieve) D 4751 > 20 > 30
Ultraviolet Degradation, % D 4355 70 90
NOTES
(a) Percent of tensile strength retained determined after weathering per ASTM D
4355 for 500-hours

High performance fence to have tape yarns in one principle direction only.
Add stabilizers or inhibitors to make the filaments resistant to sunlight or heat
deterioration.
Finish edges to prevent outer yarn from pulling away from the fabric.
Sheets of fabric may be sewn or bonded together. Provide minimum width
recommended by manufacturer.
No deviation from any requirement in Table 2 due to the presence of seams.
Manufactured with pockets for posts, hems with cord, or with posts pre-attached
using staples or button head nails.
POSTS
Minimum length: 4-feet.
Steel: Round, U shaped, T shaped, or C shaped with a minimum weight of 1.3-
pounds per foot, and have projections for fastening wire.
Wood as follows:
Soft wood posts at least 3-inches in diameter, or nominal 2 x 4-inches and
straight to provide a fence without noticeable misalignment.
Hard wood post providing a minimum cross-sectional area of 2.25 square-inches.
Fasteners for Wooden Posts:
Wire staples No. 17 gage minimum with a crown at least 3/4-inches wide and
legs at least 1/2-inch long.
Nails 14 gage minimum, 1-inch long with 3/4-inch button.

TEMPRORARY CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES
01/2023 AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
254.07.100 01 50 00 – 6

PART 3 EXECUTION
SILT FENCE
Beginning work means acceptance of existing conditions.
Maintain the silt fence until revegetation is complete (defined as when cover reaches a
density of at least 70% of pre-disturbance levels.
Clear area of any debris and obstructions that may damage geotextile.
Place post in all low points.
Install posts a maximum of 8-feet apart with at least 18-inches in the ground. If not
possible to achieve depth, secure posts to prevent overturning.
Attach filter fabric by wire, cord, pockets, staples, nails, or other effective means.
When using a wire support fence, provide at least 6 horizontal wires with a minimum
of 12 gage wire. Space vertical wires 6-inches maximum. Secure geotextile to the
up slope side of the post. Extend wire into the trench a minimum of 2-inches and
extend a maximum or 36-inches above the ground surface.
Install fabric so 6 to 8-inches of fabric remain at the bottom to be buried. Splice together
only at support posts with at least a minimum overlap of 18-inches. Extend buried
portion 6-inches deep and the rest upstream of the fabric fence.
Sediment Removal: Remove sediment before deposit reaches 1/2 of the height of the
silt fence or raise the height of silt fence. After removal of sediment, dress landscape.
Schedule of Locations: Typical locations include the toe of fill slopes, the downhill side
of fill slopes, the downhill side of large cut areas, and at natural drainage areas. Limit
geotextile materials to handle an area equivalent to 1,000 square feet per 10-feet of
fence. Use caution should site slope be steeper than 1:1 (horizontal:vertical), and water
flow rates exceed 1 cubic foot per second per 10-feet of fence face.

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
254.07.100 01 50 30 - 1
SECTION 01 50 30
PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
Any existing facilities, disturbed which are located in or adjacent to the line of work such
as curbs, gutters, drive approaches, sidewalks, driveways, fences, underground pipes,
conduits, or utilities, shall be cleaned up and restored in kind by CONTRACTOR and in
accordance with the Specifications contained herein governing the various types of
services involved.
CONTRACTOR shall not perform work that would affect any oil, gas, sewer, or water
pipeline; any telephone, fiber optic, television cable, or electric transmission line; any
fence; or any structure, until authorization has been obtained from owner of the
improvement. Provide owner of the improvement due notice of the beginning of the
work, and remove, shore, support, or otherwise protect such improvement or replace the
same.
RELATED WORK
Related work specified in other sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 78 50 Project Closeout
RESTORATION OF FENCES
Where it is necessary to remove any fence to facilitate CONTRACTOR's operation,
CONTRACTOR shall obtain prior agreement with owner of the fence for removal of the
fence and shall be responsible for any damage due to negligence of CONTRACTOR.
As soon as practical, the fence shall be restored substantially to the same or improved
condition as it was prior to the commencement of the work. Where livestock is present
CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary fencing to keep livestock away from the
construction area.
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT
Prior to any excavation in the vicinity of any existing underground facilities, including all
water, sewer, storm drain, gas, petroleum products, or other pipelines; all buried electric
power, communications, or television cables; all traffic signal and street lighting facilities;
and all roadway and state highway rights-of-way, CONTRACTOR shall notify the
regional notification center (Blue Stakes of Utah) at 1-800-662-4111 or 811 or submit an
on-line request at www.bluestakes.org at least 2 days, but no more than 7 days, prior to
such excavation.
INTERFERING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
CONTRACTOR shall exercise all possible caution to prevent damage to existing
structures and utilities, whether above ground or underground. Prior to submittal of
Shop Drawings, and prior to commencing any excavations for new pipelines or
structures, conduct investigations, including exploratory excavations and borings, to
01/2023 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
254.07.100 01 50 30 - 2
determine the location and type of underground utilities and services connections that
could result in damage to such utilities. It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR
to locate and expose all existing underground and overhead structures and utilities in
such a manner as to prevent damage to same. CONTRACTOR shall notify all utility
offices concerned at least 48 hours in advance of construction operations in which a
utility agency's facilities may be involved. This shall include, but not be limited to,
irrigation water, culinary water, telephone, television cables, fiber optic communication,
gas, and electric. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any and all changes to,
reconnections to public utility facilities encountered or interrupted during prosecution of
the work, and all costs relating hereto shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense.
CONTRACTOR shall contract with and pay Public Utility Agencies for work required in
connection with all utility interferences and handle all necessary notifications,
scheduling, coordination, and details. The cost of public utility interferences shall be
included in CONTRACTOR's lump sum or unit price bid covering the major contract
facility to which interference or changes are attributable.
All exploratory excavations shall be performed as soon as practicable after Notice to
Proceed and, in any event, a sufficient time in advance of the construction to avoid
possible delays to CONTRACTOR’s progress. Prepare a report identifying each utility
by its size, elevation, station and material of construction. Immediately notify
ENGINEER and the utility in writing as to any utility discovered in a different position
than as marked in the field or shown on the Drawings, or any utility which is not marked
in the field or not shown on the Drawings.
The number of exploratory excavations required shall be that number which is sufficient
to determine the alignment and grade of the utility. Conform to local agency
requirements for backfill and pavement repair subsequent to performing exploratory
excavations.
Any damages to private property, either inside or outside the limits of the easements
provided by OWNER, shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Any roads,
structures, or utilities damaged by the work shall be repaired or replaced in a condition
equal to or better than the condition prior to the damage. Such repair or replacement
shall be accomplished at CONTRACTOR's expense without additional compensation
from OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall remove and replace small miscellaneous structures such as
fences and culverts which are damaged by the construction activity at his own expense
without additional compensation from OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall replace these
structures in a condition as good as or better than their original condition.
At points where CONTRACTOR's operations are adjacent to or across properties of
railway, telegraph, telephone, irrigation canal, power, gas, water, or adjacent to other
property (damage to which might result in considerable expense, loss, and
inconvenience), no work shall be started until all arrangements necessary for the
protection thereof have been made.
The locations of the major existing culinary water lines, gas pipes, underground electric,
cable television, and telephone lines that are shown on the plans were taken from city
maps, and maps supplied by the utility owner. No excavations were made to verify the
locations shown for underground utilities, unless specifically stated on the Drawings. It
should be expected that some location discrepancies will occur. Neither OWNER nor its
01/2023 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
254.07.100 01 50 30 - 3
officers or agents shall be responsible for damages to CONTRACTOR as a result of the
locations of the utilities being other than those shown on the plans or for the existence of
utilities not shown on the plans.
CONTRACTOR shall be solely and directly responsible to owners and operators of such
properties for any damage, injury, expense, loss or inconvenience, delay, suits, actions,
or claims of any character brought because of an injury or damage which may result
from the carrying out of the work to be done under the contract.
All utilities including all water, sewer, storm drain, gas, petroleum products, or other
pipelines; all buried electric power, communications, or television cables; all traffic signal
and street lighting facilities encountered along the line of the work shall remain
continuously in service during all operations under the Contract, unless other
arrangements satisfactory to ENGINEER are made with owner of said utility.
In the event of interruption to either domestic or irrigation water, or to other utility
services as a result of accidental breakage, or as a result of being exposed or
unsupported, CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify the proper authority. CONTRACTOR
shall cooperate with the authority in restoration of service as soon as possible, and shall
not allow interruption of any water or utility service outside working hours unless prior
approval is received.
In case it shall be necessary to move the property of any public utility or franchise
holder, such utility company or franchise holder will, upon request of CONTRACTOR, be
notified by OWNER to move such property within a specified reasonable time. When
utility lines that are to be moved are encountered within the area of operations,
CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER a sufficient time in advance for the necessary
measures to be taken to prevent interruption of service.
Where the proper completion of the WORK requires the temporary or permanent
removal and/or relocation of an existing Utility or other improvement which is indicated,
CONTRACTOR shall remove and, without unnecessary delay, temporarily replace or
relocate such Utility or improvement in a manner satisfactory to ENGINEER and
OWNER of the facility. In all cases of such temporary removal or relocation, restoration
to the former location shall be accomplished by CONTRACTOR in a manner that will
restore or replace the Utility or improvement as nearly as possible to its former locations
and to as good or better condition than found prior to removal.
RIGHTS-OF-WAY
CONTRACTOR shall be required to confine construction operations within the dedicated
rights-of-way for public thorough fares, or within areas for which construction easements
have been obtained, unless they have made special arrangements with the affected
property owners in advance. CONTRACTOR shall be required to protect stored
materials, cultivated trees and crops, and other items adjacent to the proposed
construction site.
CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval by ENGINEER the type and size of equipment
used, and the methods for work performed on the rights-of-way across private
properties, to avoid or minimize injury to trees, shrubs, gardens, lawns, fences,
driveways, retaining walls, or other improvements within the rights-of-way.
01/2023 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
254.07.100 01 50 30 - 4
The construction easement widths and access to private properties are as shown on the
Drawings and as described in the easement documents; however CONTRACTOR is to
minimize impacts to surface improvements within the right-of-way. CONTRACTOR shall
obtain a signed release from the property owner, approving restoration of work in the
construction easements across or bordering private properties. See Project Closeout
Section 01 78 50, 1.4.D.
Property owners affected by the construction shall be notified by CONTRACTOR at least
48 hours in advance of the time the construction begins. During all construction
operations, CONTRACTOR shall construct and maintain such facilities as may be
required to provide access by all property owners to their property. No person shall be
cut off from access to his property for a period exceeding 8 hours unless
CONTRACTOR has made special arrangements with the affected persons.
CONTRACTOR shall, daily or more frequently if necessary, grade all disturbed areas to
be smooth for motor vehicle traffic.
PROTECTION OF SURVEY, STREET OR ROADWAY MARKERS
CONTRACTOR shall not destroy, remove, or otherwise disturb any existing survey
markers or other existing street or roadway markers without proper authorization. No
pavement breaking or excavation shall be started until all survey or other permanent
marker points that will be disturbed by the construction operations have been properly
referenced. Survey markers or points disturbed by CONTRACTOR shall be accurately
restored after street or roadway resurfacing has been completed.
TREES OR SHRUBS WITHIN PROJECT LIMITS
Except where trees or shrubs are indicated to be removed, CONTRACTOR shall
exercise all necessary precautions so as not to damage or destroy any trees or shrubs,
including those lying within street rights-of-way and project limits, and shall not trim or
remove any trees unless such trees have been approved for trimming or removal by the
jurisdictional agency or OWNER. Existing trees and shrubs which are damaged during
construction shall be trimmed or replaced by CONTRACTOR or a certified tree company
under permit from the jurisdictional agency and/or OWNER. Tree trimming and
replacement shall be accomplished in accordance with the following paragraphs.
Symmetry of the tree shall be preserved; no stubs or splits or torn branches left;
clean cuts shall be made close to the trunk or large branch. Spikes shall not be used
for climbing live trees. Cuts over 1-1/2 inches in diameter shall be coated with a tree
paint product that is waterproof, adhesive, and elastic, and free from kerosenes, coal
tar, creosote, or other material injurious to the life of the tree.
CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the jurisdictional agency and/or OWNER if
any tree or shrub is damaged by CONTRACTOR's operations. If, in the opinion of
said agency or OWNER, the damage is such that replacement is necessary,
CONTRACTOR shall replace the tree or shrub at its own expense. The tree or shrub
shall be of a like size and variety as the one damaged, or, if of a smaller size,
CONTRACTOR shall pay to OWNER of said tree a compensatory payment
acceptable to the tree or shrub owner, subject to the approval of the jurisdictional
agency or OWNER. The size of the tree or shrub shall be not less than 1-inch
diameter nor less than 6 feet in height.

01/2023 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
254.07.100 01 50 30 - 5
RESTORATION OF PAVEMENT
Pavement work shall meet the specifications for installation as noted in APWA Section
33 12 16.
All paved areas damaged during construction shall be replaced with similar materials of
equal thickness to match the existing adjacent undisturbed areas, except where specific
resurfacing requirements have been called for in the Contract or in the requirements of
the agency issuing the permit. The pavement restoration requirement to match existing
sections shall apply to all components of existing sections, including sub-base, base,
and pavement. Pavements which are subject to partial removal shall be neatly sawcut in
straight lines.
Wherever required by the local agency having jurisdiction, CONTRACTOR shall place
temporary surfacing promptly after backfilling and shall maintain such surfacing for the
period of time fixed by said authorities before proceeding with the final restoration of
improvements.
CONCRETE WORK
Concrete work shall meet the specifications for installation as noted in APWA Section 32
16 13 Driveway, Sidewalk, Curb and Gutter.
All flat work in streets tying into existing flatwork shall be doweled into the existing
concrete. Dowels to be spaced at 12" O.C. and be No. 5 rebar x 14" for slabs up to 8
inches in thickness and No. 8 rebar x 18" for slabs over 8 inches.
LAWNS
Lawns that are damaged or destroyed during performance of the work shall be repaired
or replaced with turf sod according to APWA Section 32 92 00 - Turf and Grass.
FENCES
Fences that are damaged or destroyed during performance of the work shall be repaired
or replaced back to the original condition or better to the satisfaction of the land owner
and OWNER.
LANDSCAPING
All landscaping on private property that is damaged or destroyed during performance of
the work shall be repaired or replaced back to the original condition or better to the
satisfaction of the land owner and OWNER.
OTHER SURFACE IMPROVEMENTS
All other surface improvements not explicitly mentioned herein that are damaged or
destroyed during performance of the work shall be repaired or replaced back to original
condition or better.

01/2023 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
254.07.100 01 50 30 - 6
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 TRAFFIC CONTROL
254.07.100 PAGE 01 55 26 - 1
SECTION 01 55 26
TRAFFIC CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
CONTRACTOR shall comply with all rules and regulations of the City, County, and State
authorities regarding the closing of public streets or highways. If conditions justify,
ENGINEER may authorize CONTRACTOR to conduct his work in specific areas and to
specific tasks to avoid sporadic and unorganized work efforts.
All work performed on or within the right-of-way of state roads shall have traffic control
devices in place before work begins that meet the requirements of Utah Department of
Transportation's "Specifications for Excavation on State Highways".
No road shall be closed by CONTRACTOR to the public except by express permission
of ENGINEER and after obtaining the required permits. Where it is necessary to close a
county or city road to thru traffic, the road shall be closed to thru traffic only - not local
traffic. The road shall be closed for one block only, not over 700 feet. The road shall be
barricaded at each point of public access with barricades meeting the Utah Department
of Transportation's specifications.
Traffic must be kept open on those roads and streets where no detour is possible.
CONTRACTOR shall, at all times, conduct his work so as to insure the least possible
obstruction to traffic and normal commercial pursuits. All obstructions within traveled
roadways shall be protected by approved signs, barricades, and lights where necessary
for the safety of the traveling public. The convenience of the general public and
residents, and the protection of persons and property are of prime importance and shall
be provided for by CONTRACTOR in an adequate and satisfactory manner.
Excavations on project sites from which the public is excluded shall be marked or
guarded in a manner appropriate for the hazard.
TRAFFIC CONTROL
For the protection of traffic in public or private streets and ways, CONTRACTOR shall
provide, place, and maintain all necessary barricades, traffic cones, warning signs,
lights, and other safety devices in accordance with the requirements of the "Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways, Part VI - Temporary Traffic
Control," published by U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway
Administration. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the protection of
the work and the safety of the public. All barricades and obstructions shall be
illuminated at night, and all lights shall be kept burning from sunset until sunrise.
CONTRACTOR shall station such guards or flaggers and shall conform to such special
safety regulations relating to traffic control as may be required by the public authorities
within their respective jurisdictions. All signs, signals, and barricades shall conform to
the requirements of Subpart G, Part 1926, of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for
Construction.

01/2023 TRAFFIC CONTROL
254.07.100 PAGE 01 55 26 - 2
If at any time the conditions indicate that CONTRACTOR's protective facilities and
service are inadequate to assure the safety of the public or CONTRACTOR's workers,
CONTRACTOR shall provide additional facilities or services as may be necessary to
assure protection at no additional cost to OWNER.
Where required, CONTRACTOR shall obtain a traffic control permit from the governing
agency prior to beginning work, and shall comply with all requirements of the permit.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Traffic Control shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be included as
part of the various items to which it relates.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

- END OF SECTION -
01/2023 DUST CONTROL
254.07.100 PAGE 01 56 00-1
SECTION 00 56 00
DUST CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
SCOPE OF WORK
Furnish all labor, materials and equipment as required to provide dust control for the
project.
All materials and services shall comply with the requirements of the State of Utah,
Department of Environmental Quality, Division of Air Quality and the City’s Municipal
Code.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Water. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to arrange and pay for water for dust
control.
Calcium chloride shall be added to the water used to provide dust control, if required by
the City.
PART 3 EXECUTION
DUST CONTROL
CONTRACTOR shall comply with the requirements of the State of Utah Department of
Environmental Quality, Air Quality Regulations (including R301-205 Emission Standards:
Fugitive Emissions and Fugitive Dust, and R307-309 Fugitive Emissions and Fugitive
Dust, of the Utah Air Conservation Rules (UACR). CONTRACTOR shall submit a
Fugitive Dust Control Plan to the Utah Division of Air Quality, which meets the
requirements of R307-309-4. CONTRACTOR shall obtain a permit from the Division of
Air Quality.
CONTRACTOR shall execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from
construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from
dispersing into the atmosphere. Give all unpaved streets, roads, detours, or haul roads
used in the construction area an approved dust-preventive treatment or periodically
water to prevent dust. Applicable environmental regulations for dust prevention shall be
strictly enforced.
WATER PLACEMENT FOR DUST CONTROL
CONTRACTOR is responsible for placement of sufficient water to control dust on the
project. Dust control is defined by the permit requirements of the State of Utah, Division
of Environmental Quality, Division of Air Quality. Permit shall be obtained by
CONTRACTOR.
01/2023 DUST CONTROL
254.07.100 PAGE 01 56 00-2
WATER AND CALCIUM CHLORIDE MIXTURE FOR DUST CONTROL
CONTRACTOR may also use a water and calcium chloride solution to abate the dust for
the project. The mixture of calcium chloride per 10,000-gallon truck shall be 10 pounds.
The calcium chloride shall be added to the water truck container as the water is being
put into the water truck in order to provide sufficient mixing.
In the absence of providing the water and calcium chloride mixture, CONTRACTOR
shall meet the requirements of Subsection 3.2 of this document, or shall use other
approved methods by OWNER that will allow CONTRACTOR to meet permit
requirements.

- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 01 60 00 - 1

SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
PRODUCTS
Furnish products of qualified manufacturers suitable for intended use. Furnish products
of each type by single manufacturer unless specified otherwise.
Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as
specifically permitted by Contract Documents.
Furnish interchangeable components from same manufacturer for components being
replaced.
PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Promptly inspect shipments to ensure products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an
environment favorable to product.
For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide
ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.
Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent mixing
with foreign matter.
Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify
products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
PRODUCT OPTIONS
Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting
those standards or description.
01/2023 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 01 60 00 - 2

Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of one of
manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Provision for
Substitutions: Submit request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in
accordance with the following article.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
ENGINEER will consider requests for Substitutions only after Notice of Award.
Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault
of CONTRACTOR.
Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed
Substitution with Contract Documents.
A request constitutes a representation that CONTRACTOR:
Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds quality
level of specified product.
Will provide same warranty for Substitution as for specified product.
Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required
for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to OWNER.
Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently
become apparent.
Will reimburse OWNER for review or redesign services associated with re-approval
by authorities having jurisdiction.
Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing
or Product Data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will
require revision to Contract Documents.
Substitution Submittal Procedure:
Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration to ENGINEER.
Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and certified test results attesting to proposed
product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
ENGINEER may require CONTRACTOR to provide additional data about the
proposed substitution.
ENGINEER will be the sole judge as to the type, function, and quality of any such
substitution and ENGINEER’s decision shall be final.
ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of decision to accept or reject
request.
Acceptance by ENGINEER of a substitution proposed by CONTRACTOR shall not
relieve CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for full compliance with the Contract
Documents and for the adequacy of the substitution.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
01/2023 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 01 60 00 - 3

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 01 60 00 - 4

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 MOBILIZATION
254.07.100 01 71 13 - 1
SECTION 01 71 13
MOBILIZATION
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This Section is provided to cover CONTRACTOR's cost of general and miscellaneous
responsibilities and operations not normally attributed to, or included in, any other single
bid item. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, work described or
enumerated in this section under the following subsections.
MOVING TO AND FROM THE JOB SITE
This shall include CONTRACTOR's preliminary arrangement for starting and stopping
construction operations, work schedules, and transportation of equipment and personnel
to and from the project.
CLEAN-UP
The cost of all clean-up Work as specified and not covered under other items shall be
included in the Bid. Values shall be included in the Bid Schedule, lump-sum price, for
"Mobilization".
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
The cost of water, power, etc. required by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work
specified in the Contract shall be included in the Bid. Values shall be included in the Bid
Schedule, lump-sum price, for "Mobilization".
PERFORMANCE BOND, PAYMENT BOND, AND INSURANCE
The cost of the Performance Bond, Payment Bond, and any required insurance and/or
other miscellaneous cost associated with this Project shall be included with the Bid.
Values shall be included in the Bid Schedule, lump-sum price, for "Mobilization”.
PERMITS
CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary permits for completion of the Work. Values
shall be included in the Bid Schedule, lump-sum price, for "Mobilization”.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION VIDEO RECORDS
CONTRACTOR is required to produce a preconstruction video recording of areas where
Work is to be performed. The video record shall be of professional quality and the
coverage shall be such, as to allow accurate determination of location, size, and
conditions, etc. of existing features and improvements within the rights-of-way.
CONTRACTOR shall provide OWNER with a copy of the preconstruction video in DVD
format before construction begins.

01/2023 MOBILIZATION
254.07.100 01 71 13 - 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

- END OF SECTION -

02/2023 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
254.07.100 PAGE 01 78 20 - 1
SECTION 01 78 20
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
Section includes: Preparation and submittal of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
SUBMITTALS
Submit for Engineer review a complication of all operation and maintenance manuals
(for all project facilities) with a .pdf electronic copy of the PROJECT Operations and
Maintenance Manual.
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals before field quality control testing and
before training of each piece of equipment or system.
Submit 3 hardcopy manuals for each piece of equipment or system.
Submit 1 electronic copy manuals for each piece of equipment or system.
Make manuals available at project site for use by construction personnel and
ENGINEER.
Make additions and revisions to the manuals in accordance with ENGINEER's review
comments.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Furnish three (3) identical sets of Operations and Maintenance Manuals. Each set shall
consist of one or more volumes, each of which shall be bound in a standard size, 3-ring,
loose-leaf, vinyl, hard-cover binder suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall
not exceed 2.5 inches. A Table of Contents shall be provided which indicates all
equipment and suppliers in the Operations and Maintenance Manuals.
Furnish to one copy of Operations and Maintenance Manuals in PDF electronic format.
Include in Operations and Maintenance manuals full details for care and maintenance for
all visible surfaces as well as the following for each item of mechanical, electrical, and
instrumentation equipment (except for equipment furnished by the Owner):
Complete operating instructions, including location of controls, special tools or other
equipment required, related instrumentation, and other equipment needed for
operation.
Preventative maintenance procedures and schedules
A description of proper maintenance activities
Complete parts lists, by generic title, identification number, and catalog number,
complete with exploded views of each assembly.
Disassembly and reassembly instruction
Name and location of nearest supplier and spare parts warehouse

02/2023 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
254.07.100 PAGE 01 78 20 - 2
Name and location of manufacturer
Recommended troubleshooting and start-up procedures
Prints of the record drawings, including diagrams and schematics, as required under
the electrical and instrumentation portions of these specifications.
All Operations and Maintenance manuals shall be submitted in final form to ENGINEER
not later than the 75 percent of construction completion date. All discrepancies found by
ENGINEER in the Operations and Maintenance manuals shall be corrected by
CONTRACTOR prior to final acceptance of the project.
Preparation:
Provide hardcopy Operations and Maintenance Manuals in 3-ring binders with rigid
covers. Utilize numbered tab sheets to organize information.
Provide electronic copy Operations and Maintenance Manuals in PDF Format.
Provide original and clear text on reproducible non-colored paper.
Provide all dimensions in English units.
Contents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
Cover page:
Equipment name, equipment tag number, project name, OWNER's name,
appropriate date.
Table of Contents:
General description of information provided within each tab section.
Equipment Summary Form:
Completed form in the format shown in Appendix A.
The manufacturer's standard form will not be acceptable.
Lubrication information:
Required lubricants and lubrication schedules.
Control diagrams:
Internal and connection wiring, including logic diagrams, wiring diagrams for
control panels, ladder logic for computer based systems, and connections
between existing systems and new additions, and adjustments such as
calibrations and set points for relays, and control or alarm contact settings.
Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of the control system.
Complete set of control schematics.
Programming:
Copies of all CONTRACTOR furnished programming.
Start-up procedures:
Recommendations for installation, adjustment, calibration, and troubleshooting.
8. Operating procedures:
Step-by-step procedures for starting, operating, and stopping equipment under
specified modes of operation.
Include safety precautions and emergency operating shutdown instructions.
Preventative maintenance procedures:
Recommended steps and schedules for maintaining equipment.
Overhaul instructions:

02/2023 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
254.07.100 PAGE 01 78 20 - 3
Directions for disassembly, inspection, repair and reassembly of the equipment;
safety precautions; and recommended tolerances, critical bolt torques, and
special tools that are required.
Parts list:
Complete parts list for all equipment being provided.
Catalog data for all products or equipment furnished including generic title and
identification number of each component part of equipment. Include bearing
manufacturer, model and ball or roller pass frequencies for every bearing.
Spare parts list:
Recommended number of parts to be stored at the site and special storage
precautions.
Drawings:
Exploded view or plan and section views with detailed callouts.
Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of equipment.
Provide electrical and instrumentation schematic record drawings.
Source (factory) quality control test results: Provide copies of factory quality control
test reports for all equipment.
Field quality control test results: After field-testing is completed, insert field test
reports for (piping, valving, equipment, and system startup tests), into O&M manual.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
- END OF SECTION –

02/2023 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
254.07.100 PAGE 01 78 20 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

01/2023 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
254.07.100 01 78 50 - 1
SECTION 01 78 50
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 GENERAL
FINAL CLEANUP
CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from the vicinity of the completed Work, all
rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms, construction equipment, and temporary
structures and facilities used during construction. Final acceptance of the Work by
OWNER will be withheld until CONTRACTOR has satisfactorily complied with the
foregoing requirements for final cleanup of the Project Site.
TOUCH-UP AND REPAIR
CONTRACTOR shall touch up or repair all finished surfaces on structures, equipment,
fixtures, etc., that have been damaged prior to final acceptance. Surface on which such
touch-up or repair cannot be successfully accomplished shall be completely refinished or
in the case of hardware and similar small items, the item shall be replaced.
CLOSEOUT TIMETABLE
CONTRACTOR shall establish dates for equipment testing, acceptance periods and on-
site instructional periods (as required under the Contract). Such dates shall be
established not less than one week prior to beginning any of the foregoing items, to
allow OWNER, ENGINEER, and their authorized representatives sufficient time to
schedule attendance at such activities.
MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE
CONTRACTOR shall comply with the maintenance and guarantee requirements
contained in Article 7 of the General Conditions, Section 00 70 00.
Replacement of earth fill or backfill, where it has settled below the required finish
elevations, shall be considered as part of such required repair work, and any repair or
resurfacing which becomes necessary by reason of such required repair work shall be
completed by CONTRACTOR at no cost to OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall make all repairs and replacements promptly upon receipt of written
order from OWNER. If CONTRACTOR fails to make such repairs or replacement
promptly, OWNER reserves the right to do the work and CONTRACTOR and his surety
shall be liable to OWNER for the cost thereof.
CONTRACTOR shall obtain a signed release from the property owner approving
restoration of work in the construction easements across or bordering private property.
BOND
CONTRACTOR shall provide a bond to guarantee performance of the provisions
contained in Paragraph "Maintenance and Guarantee" above, and Article 6 of the
General Conditions, Section 00 70 00.

01/2023 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
254.07.100 01 78 50 - 2
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
Final acceptance and final payment shall not be made until all provisions of the General
Conditions Section 00 70 00 Article 15 have been satisfied.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the
Work:
Drawings.
Specifications.
Addenda.
Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by OWNER.
Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly.
Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual
products installed, including the following:
Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
Record Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:
Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements
Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work
Field changes of dimension and detail
Details not on original Contract drawings
Submit documents to ENGINEER with claim for final Application for Payment.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
As a condition precedent to final acceptance of the project, CONTRACTOR shall
complete the following forms and submit the original and two copies of each form to the
Project Representative.
Contractor’s Certificate of Substantial Completion
Contractor’s Certificate of Final Completion
Contractor’s Final Waiver of Lien
Consent of Surety for Final Payment
Affidavit of Payment
Affidavit of Release of Liens by the Contractor
01/2023 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
254.07.100 01 78 50 - 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

01/2023 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
254.07.100 01 78 50 - 4
CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

OWNER

TO: Name
Address
City, State, Zip Code

PROJECT:

ATTENTION:

FROM:
Firm or Corporation

This is to certify that I, am an authorized official of
working in the capacity of
and have been properly authorized by said form or corporation to sign the following
statements pertaining to the subject contract.

I know of my own personal knowledge, and do hereby certify, that the work of the Contract
described above has been substantially performed, and materials used and installed to date
in accordance with, and in conformity to, the Contract drawings and specifications. A list of
all incomplete work is attached.

The Contractor hereby releases the Owner and its agents from all claims and liability to the
Contractor for anything done or finished for or relating to the Work, as specified in the
Project Manual, except demands against the Owner for the remainder of progress payments
retained to date, and unresolved written claims prior to this date.

The Contract Work is now substantially complete, ready for its intended use, and ready for
your inspection. You are requested to issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion.

Signature:

Date:
01/2023 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
254.07.100 01 78 50 - 5
CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION

OWNER

TO:
Name
Address
City, State, Zip Code

PROJECT:

ATTENTION:

FROM:
Firm or Corporation

This is to certify that I, am an authorized official of
working in the capacity of
and have been properly authorized by said form or corporation to sign the following
statements pertaining to the subject contract.

I know of my own personal knowledge, and do hereby certify, that the work of the Contract
described above has been substantially performed, and materials used and installed to date
in accordance with, and in conformity to, the Contract drawings and specifications.

The Contractor hereby releases the Owner and its agents from all claims and liability to the
Contractor for anything done or finished for or relating to the Work. The Contract Work is
now complete in all parts and requirements, ready for its intended use, excepting the
attached list of minor deficiencies and the reason for each being incomplete to date, for
which exemption from final payment requirements is requested (if no exemptions requested,
write “none”) . The Work is now
ready for your final inspection. The following items are required from the Contractor prior to
application for final payment and are submitted herewith, if any:

I understand that neither the issuance, by the Owner, or a Certificate of Final Completion,
nor the acceptance thereof by the Owner, shall operate as a bar claim against the
Contractor under the terms of the guarantee provisions of the Contract Documents.

Signature:
Date:
01/2023 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
254.07.100 01 78 50 - 6
CONTRACTORS FINAL WAIVER OF LIEN

TO ALL WHOM IT MAY CONCERN:

WHEREAS, the undersigned has furnished labor and materials for (A)

in the City of , County of , State of Utah, of which City of
is the Owner.

NOW THEREFOR, this day of , 20 , for and in
consideration of the sum of (B) dollars paid
simultaneously herewith, the receipt whereof is hereby acknowledged by the undersigned, the
undersigned does hereby waive and release any lien* right to, or claim of lien with respect to
and on said above described premises, and the improvements thereon, and on the monies or
other consideration due or to become due from the Owner, on account of labor, services,
materials, fixtures, apparatus or machinery heretofore or which may hereafter be furnished by
the undersigned to or for the above described premises by virtue of said contract.

(C) (SEAL)
(Name of sole ownership, corporation or partnership)

(C) (SEAL)
(Signature of Authorized Representative)

Title:

INSTRUCTION FOR FINAL WAIVER:

A. Project name.

B. Final Contract amount received (total amount of Contract as adjusted).

C. If the waiver is for a corporation, corporate name should be used, corporate seal affixed,
and title of officer signing waiver should be set forth; if waiver is for a partnership, the
partnership name should be used, partner should sign and designate himself/herself as
partner.

* The word Lien as used herein shall include Stop Orders, Stop Notices, or Freeze Orders on
monies or other consideration of the Owner which are due or are to become due on the
Contract referenced above.
01/2023 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
254.07.100 01 78 50 - 7
CONSENT OF SURETY FOR FINAL PAYMENT

Project Name:

Location:

Type of Contract:

Amount of Contract:

In accordance with the provisions of the above named contract between the Owner and the
Contractor, the following named surety:

on the Payment Bond of the following named Contractor:

hereby approves of final payment to the Contractor, and further agrees that said final payment
to the Contractor shall not relieve the Surety Company named herein of any of its obligations to
the following named Owner (as set forth in said Surety Company’s bond):

Owners Name
Owners Address
City, State, Zip Code

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand and seal this
day of , 20 .

(Name of Surety Company)

(Signature of Authorized Representative)

Title:

01/2023 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
254.07.100 01 78 50 - 8
AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT

TO ALL WHOM IT MAY CONCERN:

WHEREAS, the undersigned has been employed by (Insert Owners Name) to furnish labor and
materials under a contract dated for the project named
in the City of County
of , State of Utah.

NOW THEREFORE, this day of , 20 , the
undersigned, as the Contractor for the above named Contract pursuant to the conditions of the
Contract, hereby certifies that, except as listed below, he has paid in full or has otherwise
satisfied all obligations for all materials and equipment furnished, for all work, labor, and
services performed, and for all known indebtedness and claims against the Contractor for
damages arising in any manner in connection with the performance of the Contract referenced
above for which the Owner or its property might in any way be held responsible.

EXCEPTIONS: (If none, write “none”. If required by the Owner, the Contractor furnish bond
satisfactory to the Owner for each exception).

{AFFIX CORPORATE}
{SEAL HERE} Contractor (Name of sole ownership,
Corporation or partnership)

(Signature of Authorized Representative)

Title:
01/2023 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
HAL Standard – 1/20/2016 01 78 50 - 9

AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS BY THE CONTRACTOR

TO ALL WHOM IT MAY CONCERN:

WHEREAS, the undersigned has been employed by (Insert Owners Name) to furnish labor and
materials under a contract dated for the project named
in the City of County of , State of Utah.

NOW THEREFOR, this day of , 20 , the
undersigned, as the Contractor for the above named Contract pursuant to the conditions of the
Contract, hereby certifies that to the best of his/her knowledge, information and belief, except as
listed below, the Releases or Waivers of Lien* attached hereto include the Contractor, all
subcontractors, all suppliers of material and equipment, and all performers of work, labor or
services, who have or may have liens against any property of the Owner and on the monies or
other consideration due to becomes due from the Owner arising in any manner in connection
with the performance of the Contract referenced above.

EXCEPTIONS: (If none, write “none”. If required by the Owner, the Contractor furnish bond
satisfactory to the Owner for each exception).

ATTACHMENTS:

1. Contractor’s Release or Waiver of Liens, conditional upon receipt of final payment.

2. Separate Release or Waiver of Liens from subcontractors and material suppliers.

{AFFIX CORPORATE}
{SEAL HERE} Contractor (Name of sole ownership,
Corporation or partnership)

(Signature of Authorized Representative)

Title:

* The word Lien as used herein shall include Stop Orders, Stop Notices, or Freeze Orders on
monies or other consideration of the Owner which are due or are to become due on the
Contract referenced above.

- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
HAL Standard – 1/20/2016 01 78 50 - 10

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
254.07.100 PAGE 03 10 00 - 1
SECTION 03 10 00
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
This Section covers the work necessary to furnish, install, and complete, the concrete
formwork.
RELATED WORK
Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Concrete formwork shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be
included as part of the various items to which it relates.
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
American Concrete Institute (ACI) -ACI 347R- Guide to Formwork for Concrete
American Hardboard Association (AHA) -AHA A135.4- Basic Hardboard
Department of Commerce (DOC) -DOC PS 1- Structural Plywood
ACI 350R-01 – Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete
Structures and Commentary
NSF International (NSF) 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects
DESIGN
Formwork shall be designed in accordance with methodology of ACI 347R for
anticipated loads, lateral pressures, and stresses. Forms shall be capable of producing
a surface which meets the requirements of the finish specified in Section 03 30 00 Cast-
in-Place Concrete. Forms shall be capable of withstanding the pressures resulting from
placement and vibration of concrete.
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
The following shall be submitted:
Drawings showing details of forming, shoring and bracing for footings, walls, and
floors shall be submitted to ENGINEER at least 3 weeks prior to their use. Drawings
showing details of formwork shall include joints, supports, studding and shoring, and
sequence of form and shoring removal.
01/2023 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
254.07.100 PAGE 03 10 00 - 2
If requested by ENGINEER, design analysis and calculations shall be submitted for
form design and methodology used in the design. The analysis and calculations
shall verify the selection of form ties, horizontal and vertical stiff-backs or braces for
wall panels, forming and form openings, or any other part of forming, shoring or
bracing which may be considered critical by ENGINEER.
Manufacturer's data including literature describing form materials, accessories, and
form releasing agents.
Manufacturer's recommendation on method and rate of application of form releasing
agent.
ENGINEER's review will not relieve CONTRACTOR from any responsibility as to the
adequacy of the forming, shoring and bracing design. Any formwork installed by
CONTRACTOR shall be solely at CONTRACTOR's risk. ENGINEER's review will not
lessen or diminish CONTRACTOR's liability.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
FORM MATERIALS
Form surfaces shall be in "new and undamaged" condition and may be plywood, hard
plastic finished plywood, overlaid waterproof particle board, and steel of sufficient
strength and surface smoothness to produce the specified finish. CONTRACTOR shall
verify that his types of form surfaces and panel sizes satisfy all requirements of these
specifications.
The wall form design shall be such that wall sections can be poured full height without
creating horizontal cold joints and without causing snapping of form ties which shall be
of sufficient strength and number to prevent spreading of the forms during the placement
of concrete and which shall permit ready removal of the forms without spalling or
damaging the concrete.
FORM TIES
Form ties on exposed surfaces shall be located in a uniform pattern. Snap ties shall not
be broken until the concrete has reached the design concrete strength. The use of tie
wires as form ties will not be permitted. Snap ties, designed so that the ends must be
broken off before the forms can be removed, shall not be used. Form ties shall be
Plastic Cone Snap Tie by Dayton-Superior, Wrench Head Snap Tie by MASCO
Mason Supply, or approved equal.
Taper ties with plastic or rubber plugs of an approved and proven design may also be
used. The plugs must be driven into the hole with a steel rod, placed in a cylindrical
recess made therefore in the plug. At no time shall plugs be driven on the flat area
outside the cylindrical recess. Taper ties shall be Taper Tie by Dayton-Superior,
Taper-Tie by MASCO Mason Supply, or approved equal.
FORM RELEASING AGENTS
Form releasing agents shall be commercial formulations that will not bond with, stain or
adversely affect concrete surfaces. Agents shall not impair subsequent treatment of
concrete surfaces depending upon bond or adhesion nor impede the wetting of surfaces
to be cured with water or curing compounds.
01/2023 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
254.07.100 PAGE 03 10 00 - 3
Any agents used inside of the reservoir shall consist of products which are certified by
laboratories approved by ANSI and shall comply with be NSF Standard 61 for approved
use in potable water systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Forms shall be mortar tight, properly aligned and adequately supported to produce
concrete surfaces meeting the surface requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 Cast-
in-Place Concrete. Forms shall be used, whenever necessary, to confine the concrete,
to shape the concrete to the required lines and grades, and to obtain a thoroughly
compacted dense concrete through proper vibrating. The forms shall have sufficient
strength and rigidity to hold the concrete and to withstand the necessary pressure,
tamping and vibration, without deflection from the prescribed lines. Where forms for
continuous surfaces are placed in successive units, care shall be taken to fit the forms
over the completed surface so as to obtain accurate alignment of the surface and to
prevent leakage of mortar.
The surfaces of all forms in contact with the concrete shall be clean, rigid, tight and
smooth. All dirt, chips, sawdust, mud, water and other foreign matter shall be removed
from within the forms or within the excavated areas, before any concrete is deposited
therein.
Forms shall not be reused if there is any evidence of surface wear and tear or defects
which would impair the quality of the surface. Surfaces of forms to be reused shall be
thoroughly cleaned of mortar from previous concreting and of all other dirt and foreign
matter before reuse. Form ties that are to be completely withdrawn shall be coated with
a nonstaining bond breaker.
Bulkheads to form vertical wall joints shall be strong enough to withstand concrete
pressures during pouring and vibrating, and shall be properly placed between the forms
to avoid mortar seepage. Holes shall be provided in the bulkheads to permit passage of
horizontal mild steel reinforcing where required by the Contract Drawings. Unless these
are specifically called for on the Contract Drawings, no chamfer strips shall be placed in
the corners of vertical construction joints.
COATING
Form inside surfaces shall be coated with a form releasing agent before the form or
reinforcement is placed in final position. The coating shall be used as recommended in
the manufacturer's printed or written instructions. Surplus coating on form surfaces and
coating on reinforcing steel and construction joints shall be removed before placing
concrete.
ALIGNMENT AND TOLERANCES
Forms shall be properly aligned and adequately supported to produce concrete surfaces
conforming to construction tolerance given in Table 03 10 00-1, Tolerances for Formed
Surfaces.

01/2023 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
254.07.100 PAGE 03 10 00 - 4
TABLE 03 10 00-1
TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES

Condition Measurement Tolerance
1. Variations from the plumb:

In any 10 feet of length 1/4-inch
a. In the lines and surfaces of
columns, piers, walls and in arises
b. For exposed corner columns,
control-joint grooves, and other
conspicuous lines
Maximum for entire length

In any 20 feet of length
Maximum for entire length
1 inch

1/4-inch
1/2-inch
2. Variation from the level or from the
grades indicated on the drawings
In any 10 feet of length
In any bay or in any 20 feet of length
1/4-inch
3/8-inch
3. Variation of the linear building lines
from established position in plan
In any 20 feet
Maximum
1/2-inch
1-inch
4. Variation of distance between walls,
columns, partitions
1/4-inch per 10 feet of distance, but not
more than 1/2-inch in any one bay, and not
more than 1-inch total variation

5. Variation in the thickness of slabs
and walls
Minus
Plus
1/4-inch
1/2-inch

FORM REMOVAL
Forms shall be removed in a manner that will prevent injury to the concrete and ensure
the complete safety of the structure. Forms shall not be removed until approval is given
by ENGINEER. Formwork for columns, walls, side of beams and other parts not
supporting the weight of concrete may be removed when the concrete has attained
sufficient strength to resist damage from the removal operation but not before at least 24
hours has elapsed since concrete placement.
CONTRACTOR shall remove all wood splinters on concrete surfaces after stripping of
wood forms.

- END OF SECTION -
01/2023 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
254.07.100 PAGE 03 20 00 - 1
SECTION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
GENERAL
SUMMARY
This Section covers the reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric or rod mats for cast-in-place
concrete.
RELATED WORK
Related Work in other sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete
ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and
Commentary
ACI 350R Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete
Structures and Commentary
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 184 Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM A 767 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 775 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars
ASTM A 1064 Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)
CRSI (DA4) Manual of Standard Practice (MSP-1)
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures:
01/2023 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
254.07.100 PAGE 03 20 00 - 2
Drawings of Concrete Reinforcement System with details showing reinforcing steel
schedules, sizes, grades, and splicing and bending details. Drawings shall show
support details including types, sizes and spacing.
Reinforcing Steel with certified copies of mill reports attesting that the reinforcing
steel furnished meets the requirements specified, prior to the installation of
reinforcing steel.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Reinforcement and accessories shall be stored off the ground on platforms, skids, or
other supports.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Concrete reinforcement shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be
included as part of the various items to which it relates.
PRODUCTS
DOWELS
Dowels shall conform to ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
FABRICATED BAR MATS
Fabricated bar mats shall conform to ASTM A 184.
REINFORCING STEEL
Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A 615 grades and sizes
as indicated. Cold drawn wire used for spiral reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A
1064. When no grade is indicated use 60 ksi grade steel. Special coated bars (epoxy
and zinc) may be specified for use in a highly corrosive atmosphere where concrete
cover is not considered sufficient. In which case reference to ASTM A 767 and A 775
will be included.
WELDED WIRE FABRIC
Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A 1064.
WIRE TIES
Wire ties shall be 16-gauge or heavier black annealed steel wire.
SUPPORTS
Bar supports for formed surfaces shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with
CRSI (DA4) MSP-1 and shall be steel or precast concrete blocks. Precast concrete
blocks shall be not less than 4 inches square when supporting reinforcement on ground.
Precast concrete block shall have compressive strength equal to that of the surrounding
concrete.
01/2023 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
254.07.100 PAGE 03 20 00 - 3
Where concrete formed surfaces will be exposed to weather or where surfaces are to be
painted, steel supports within ½ inch of concrete surface shall be plastic protected or of
stainless steel. Concrete supports used in concrete exposed to view shall have the
same color and texture as the finish surface. For slabs on grade, supports shall be
precast concrete blocks, plastic coated steel fabricated with bearing plates, or
specifically designed wire-fabric supports fabricated of plastic.
EXECUTION
REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcement shall be fabricated to shapes and dimensions shown and shall conform
to the requirements of ACI 318. Reinforcement shall be cold bent unless otherwise
authorized. Bending may be accomplished in the field or at the mill. Bars shall not be
bent after embedment in concrete.
Safety caps shall be placed on all exposed ends of vertical concrete reinforcement bars
that pose a danger to life safety.
Placement:
Reinforcement shall be free from loose rust and scale, dirt, oil, or other deleterious
coating that could reduce bond with the concrete.
Reinforcement shall be placed in accordance with ACI 318 at locations shown plus
or minus one bar diameter. Reinforcement shall not be continuous through
expansion joints and shall be as indicated through construction or contraction joints.
Concrete coverage shall be as indicated or as required by ACI 318. If bars are
moved more than one bar diameter to avoid interference with other reinforcement,
conduits or embedded items, the resulting arrangement of bars, including additional
bars required to meet structural requirements, shall be approved before concrete is
placed.
Splicing:
Splices of reinforcement shall conform to ACI 318 and shall be made only as
required or indicated. Splicing shall be by lapping or by mechanical connection;
except that lap splices shall not be used for bars larger than No. 11 unless otherwise
indicated. Lapped bars shall be placed in contact and securely tied or spaced
transversely apart to permit the embedment of the entire surface of each bar in
concrete. Lapped bars shall not be spaced farther apart than one-fifth the required
length of lap or 6-inches. Mechanical butt splices shall be in accordance with the
recommendation of the manufacturer of the mechanical splicing device. Butt splices
shall develop 125 percent of the specified minimum yield tensile strength of the
spliced bars or of the smaller bar in transition splices. Bars shall be flame dried
before butt splicing. Adequate jigs and clamps or other devices shall be provided to
support, align, and hold the longitudinal centerline of the bars to be butt spliced in a
straight line.
WELDED-WIRE FABRIC
Welded-wire fabric shall be placed in slabs as indicated. Fabric placed in slabs on
grade shall be continuous between expansion, construction, and contraction joints. Lap
01/2023 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
254.07.100 PAGE 03 20 00 - 4
splices shall be made in such a way that the overlapped area equals the distance
between the outermost crosswires plus 2 inches. Laps shall be staggered to avoid
continuous laps in either direction. Fabric shall be wired or clipped together at laps at
intervals not to exceed 4 feet. Fabric shall be positioned by the use of supports.
DOWELS
A. Dowels shall be installed in slabs on grade at locations indicated and at right angles to
joint being doweled. Dowels shall be accurately aligned parallel to the finished concrete
surface and rigidly supported during concrete placement. One end of dowels shall be
coated with a bond breaker.

- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS
254.07.100 PAGE 03 25 00 - 1
SECTION 03 25 00
EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND WATERSTOPS
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This Section covers the work necessary to furnish, install and complete expansion and
construction joints, including waterstops.
All waterstops and sealants in contact with potable water including waterstops
embedded in concrete floors and walls of potable water tanks shall be NSF 61 certified.
RELATED WORK
Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 03 33 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM D 412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers—Tension
ASTM C 920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM D 570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
ASTM D 624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional
Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers
ASTM D 638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D 746 Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and
Elastomers by Impact
ASTM D 747 Standard Test Method for Apparent Bending Modulus of Plastics
by Means of a Cantilever Beam.
ASTM D 792 Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative
Density) of Plastics by Displacement
ASTM D 1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and
Resilient Bituminous Types)
ASTM D 1752 Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork
and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction
01/2023 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS
254.07.100 PAGE 03 25 00 - 2
ASTM D 2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness
FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)
FS-TT-S-00227E Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component (For
Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures)
NSF International (NSF)
NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Procedures:
Submit certificates of compliance stating that the joint filler and sealant materials and
waterstops conform to the requirements specified. ENGINEER, may take samples
of any materials and have them tested by an independent testing laboratory to verify
their compliance with these Specifications. All such costs shall be borne by
OWNER. If any materials should fail to meet these Specifications, all costs for
further testing of the replacement material shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
Samples of factory fabricated waterstop joints representing in all respects the
material and workmanship of the material that will be furnished under this contract.
Samples will be submitted and approved by ENGINEER prior to use of the factory
joints in the field.
Manufacturer's catalog data and manufacturer's recommended instructions for
splicing of waterstops.
OBSTRUCTIONS
CONTRACTOR shall pay particular attention to removing all obstructions such as
concrete, nails, etc., from joints when movements of floor or wall sections can be
expected under temperature and other conditions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Waterstop manufacturer shall demonstrate five years (minimum) continuous, successful
experience in production of waterstops.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Material delivered and placed in storage shall be stored off the ground and protected
from moisture, dirt, and other contaminants. Sealants shall be delivered in the
manufacturer's original unopened containers. Sealants whose shelf life has expired
shall be removed from the site.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for expansion joints, construction
joints, and waterstops. Full compensation for expansion joints, construction joints, and
waterstops shall be considered as included in the Contract unit or lump sum prices for
the various items of the Contract to which it relates.
01/2023 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS
254.07.100 PAGE 03 25 00 - 3
PRODUCTS
HORIZONTAL JOINT SEALANT
Horizontal joints not requiring waterstops or when so indicated on the Contract
Drawings, shall be sealed using Sikaflex-2c NS, or approved equal, and shall meet the
requirements of ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25 and FS-TT-S-00227E, Type
II, Class A, and shall be NSF 61 certified (Sikaflex 2c NS EZ) if in contact with potable
water. Color shall match color of concrete.
VERTICAL JOINT SEALANT
Vertical joints not requiring waterstops or when so indicated on the Contract Drawings,
shall be sealed using Sikaflex-2c NS, or approved equal, and shall meet the
requirements of ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25 and FS-TT-S-00227E, Type
II, Class A, and shall be NSF 61 (Sikaflex 2c NS EZ) certified if in contact with potable
water. Color shall match color of concrete.
JOINT PRIMER
All joints receiving a joint sealant shall be primed using Sikaflex Primers 429/202, or
approved equal.
EXPANSION JOINTS
Expansion joints shall be composed of cellular fibers securely bonded together and
uniformly saturated with asphalt. Joint shall be resilient, flexible, and non-extruding.
Expansion joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 1751. Manufacturer shall be
Fibre Expansion Joint by W.R. Meadows, Fiberflex by JD Russel Company, or
approved equal.
PVC WATERSTOPS
Waterstops shall be of an approved type, supplied by an approved manufacturer and
shall be plastic made of virgin polyvinylchloride (PVC) compound, shall be ribbed,
uniform in dimensions, dense, homogeneous, free from porosity, and as detailed on the
Contract Drawings. No reclaimed PVC shall be used in the compound. Waterstop in
contact with potable water shall be NSF 61 certified.
The finished waterstop material shall meet the following minimum requirements:
Tensile strength 2,000 psi min. (ASTM D 638)
Ultimate elongation 300% min. (ASTM D 638)
Shore A hardness 75 ± 5 (ASTM D 2240)
Specific gravity 1.38 max (ASTM D 792)
Stiffness in flexure 600 psi min. (ASTM D 747)
Cold brittleness No Failure at -35°F (ASTM D 746)
Water absorption: 48 hours 0.15% max (ASTM D 570)
Tear Resistance 290 lb./in. min. (ASTM D 624)
01/2023 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS
254.07.100 PAGE 03 25 00 - 4
Manufacturer, or approved equal:
Vinylex Waterstop & Accessories
Greenstreak, Inc. (Sika Corporation)
Durajoint Concrete Accessories
Factory made waterstop joints shall have a tensile strength across the joint equal to at
least 600 psi. Field splices and joints shall be made in accordance with the waterstop
manufacturer's instructions using a thermostatically-controlled heating iron.
HYDROPHILIC WATERSTOP
Non-bentonite rubber hydrophilic waterstop shall only be used where shown on the
Contract Drawings or when approved by ENGINEER. Hydrophilic waterstop in contact
with potable water including in potable water tank floor slabs and walls shall be NSF 61
certified. Size shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
The hydrophilic waterstop shall meet the following physical properties:
Physical Property Test Method Result
Tensile Strength (Minimum) ASTM D412 350 psi
Elongation (minimum) ASTM D412 600 %
Hardness ASTM D2240 52 +/-5 Shore A
Tear Resistance ASTM D624 50 lb/in
Specific Gravity ASTM D792 1.35 +/-5
Manufacturer, or approved equal:
Conseal CS-231
Sika Hydrotite CJ-1020-2K
EXECUTION
WATERSTOPS
Waterstops shall be of the type indicated and shall be installed at the locations shown to
form a continuous water-tight diaphragm. The waterstop shall be correctly positioned in
the forms so that the center of the waterstop is centered on the joint. Waterstop shall be
held in place in the forms by use of a split form or other approved method that will
positively hold the waterstop in the correct position and to the correct alignment. Vibrate
concrete to obtain impervious concrete in the vicinity of all joints. In horizontal joints,
ensure that the areas below the water stop are completely filled with concrete.
Horizontal plastic waterstops shall be bent up during placing of concrete until the
concrete has been brought to the level of the waterstop; additional concrete shall then
be placed over the waterstop, after which the concrete shall be thoroughly vibrated. All
horizontal and vertical waterstops, which are not accessible during pouring, shall be tied
off in two directions every 12 inches in such a manner that bending over one way or
another is prevented. A hog-ring or nail may be driven through both ends of the
waterstop to facilitate placing and tying of waterstops to reinforcing steel forms or
form-ties.
01/2023 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS
254.07.100 PAGE 03 25 00 - 5
Adequate provision shall be made to support and completely protect the waterstops
during the progress of the work. Any waterstop punctured or damaged shall be repaired
or replaced. All waterstops shall be properly spliced and joints shall be checked for
strength and pinholes after splicing. Splices shall be strong enough to develop a pulling
force of 75 percent of the strength of the waterstop, and shall be watertight. Splices in
waterstop shall be made in conformance with the recommendations of the waterstop
manufacturer. Continuity of cross sectional features shall be maintained across the
splice. Splices showing evidence of separation after bending shall be remade.
Install hydrophilic waterstop in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.
Adhesives used on hydrophilic waterstop shall be NSF 61 certified. Adhesives shall
meet the requirements of ASTM C 920 and shall be Manus Bond 75-AM Lot NSF61,
DAP Premium Polyurethane Construction Adhesive, or approved equal.
JOINTS
Joints shall be installed at locations indicated and as authorized. Joints shall be
constructed so as to produce straight joints, and shall be vertical or horizontal, except
where walls intersect sloping floors.
Construction Joints
Prior to placing the abutting concrete for all construction joints, the contact surface
shall be cleaned by approved means to remove all laitance and expose the
aggregate. The exposed portion of the reinforcing steel shall be cleaned of all
concrete. The cleaning method shall be conducted so as to not damage waterstop, if
waterstop is present. Where the joint is to receive a sealant, a recess 3/4-inch deep
shall be formed along the joint using a dressed-and-oiled wood strip or other method
approved by ENGINEER. The wood strip shall be removed after the concrete has
set.
Expansion Joints
Expansion joint filler shall be used where required on the Contract Drawings. The
edges of the joint shall be neatly finished with an edging tool of 1/8-inch radius,
except where a resilient floor surface will be applied. Where the joint is to receive a
sealant, the filler strips shall be installed at the proper level below the finished floor
with a slightly tapered, dressed-and-oiled wood strip temporarily secured to the top
thereof to form a recess 3/4-inch deep to be filled with sealant. The wood strip shall
be removed after the concrete has set. In lieu of the wood strip a removable
expansion filler cap designed and fabricated for this purpose may be used.
Joint Sealant
The joint cavity shall be cleaned by sandblasting or power wire brushing and shall be
blown clean of dust and sand with compressed air before the joint sealant may be
applied. Joints must be frost-free, free of oils, grease, curing compound residues,
and any other foreign matter that might prevent bond. A bond breaker tape shall be
installed over the joint per manufacturer's instructions. After the joints have been
prepared as described above, the joints shall be primed and the sealant shall be
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
01/2023 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS
254.07.100 PAGE 03 25 00 - 6
- END OF SECTION -

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 1
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

GENERAL
SUMMARY
This Section covers cast-in-place concrete mix design and placement.
CONTRACTOR shall provide cast-in-place concrete as indicated in the Specifications
and the Contract Drawings.
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 45 00 Quality Control and Material Testing
Section 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories
Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03 25 00 Expansion Joints, Construction Joints, and Waterstops
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes
Section 31 23 23 Excavation and Backfill for Structures
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the
Contract. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)
ACI 117 Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
and Commentary
ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and
Mass Concrete
ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings
ACI 304 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary
ACI 350R Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete
Structures and Commentary
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM C 31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field
ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 2
Concrete Specimens
ASTM C 42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
Sawed Beams of Concrete
ASTM C 78 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using
Simple Beam With Third-Point Loading)
ASTM C 94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens)
ASTM C 143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C 171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM C 172 Standard Specification for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 173 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Volumetric Method
ASTM C 192 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Laboratory
ASTM C 231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Pressure Method
ASTM C 260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for Curing Concrete
ASTM C 494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 618 Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)
NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
DEFINITIONS
Average Strength (fcr): The required average strength for 30 consecutive strength tests
which statistically assures not more than the permissible proportions of tests will fall
below Specified Strength.
Specified Strength (fc'): The indicated strength.
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Procedures.
Provide catalog information for all products to be used as part of the submitted mix
design.
The results of trial mix designs along with a statement giving the maximum nominal
coarse aggregate size and the proportions of all ingredients that will be used in the
manufacture of each strength of concrete, at least 14 days prior to commencing
concrete placing operations. Aggregate weights shall be based on the saturated surface
dry condition. The statement shall be accompanied by test results from an independent
commercial testing laboratory, attesting that the proportions selected will produce

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 3
concrete of the qualities indicated. No substitutions shall be made in the materials used
in the work without additional tests to show that the quality of the concrete is
satisfactory. Indicate whether mixes have been designed for pumping. Include in the
report the following information:
Water-cement ratio.
Proportion of materials in the mix.
Source and type of cement.
Analysis of water to be used unless potable.
Type and name of admixtures applied. Indicate when accelerating or retarding
admixtures are to be used and the resulting change in placement times.
Slump, air content and temperature of samples.
Unit weight of fresh and dry light weight concrete.
Preapproved Mix Design Data: If supplier has on record, an OWNER approved mix
design, submit name and address of supplier for each mix design 1 day prior to using
concrete mix.
Certified copies of laboratory test reports, including all test data, for aggregate,
admixtures, and curing compound. These tests shall be made by an approved
commercial laboratory or by a laboratory maintained by the manufacturers of the
materials. Test reports shall meet the following requirements:
Date of mix design: No older than 365 days from the date of submission.
Physical properties of the aggregate: Test results shall not be older than 455 days
from the date of submission. A new report will be required if aggregate source is
changed.
Cementitious Materials showing Manufacturer's certification of compliance,
accompanied by mill test reports attesting that the materials meet the requirements of
the specification under which it is furnished, for cement and pozzolan.
Submit catalog information on the curing compound and the proposed location to be
used.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Do not change material sources, type of cement, air-entraining agent, water reducing
agent, other admixtures, or aggregate without ENGINEER'S approval.
In proportioning materials for mixing, use scales certified by the State of Utah. Do not
use volume measurement except for water and liquid admixtures.
Do not change the quantity of cement per cubic yard for approved mix design without
written approval of ENGINEER.
Use of admixtures will not relax hot or cold weather placement requirements.
Ready-mixed concrete to be in accordance with Alternate No. 3 of ASTM C-94 and the
requirements in this Section.

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 4
Tolerances for concrete construction and materials shall be in accordance with ACI 117.
PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
Store bagged and bulk cement in weatherproof enclosures to exclude moisture and
contaminants.
Stockpile aggregate to avoid segregation and prevent contamination.
Avoid contamination, evaporation, or damage to admixtures. Protect liquid admixtures
from freezing.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Cast-in-place concrete shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be
included as part of the various items to which it relates.
PRODUCTS
ADMIXTURES
Admixtures shall be approved by ENGINEER prior to use. Any admixtures to be used
shall be included in proposed concrete mix designs.
Air Entrainment: ASTM C 260.
Later Reducing and Set Retarding Agents: ASTM C494.
Type A: Set water reducing.
Type B: Set retarding.
Type C: Set accelerating.
Type D: Water reducing and set retarding.
Type E: Water reducing and set accelerating.
Type F: High range water reducing (super plasticizer).*
Type G: High range water reducing and set retarding.*

* The relative durability factor of water reducing admixtures shall not be less than 80
and the chlorides content (as Cl-) expressed as a percent of the cement shall not
exceed 0.1 percent by weight.
Calcium Chloride: None allowed.
Pozzolan: Pozzolan conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 618, Class F, is allowed
as a Portland cement replacing agent under the following conditions:
The maximum percentage of Portland cement replacement is:
a. 15 percent, for concrete exposed to weather.
b. 20 percent, for interior concrete.
Pozzolan should not exceed 25% by weight of the cement plus pozzolans.
The minimum cement content shall be used in the design formulas before
replacement is made.
Loss of ignition of pozzolan is less than 3 percent and the water requirement does

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 5
not exceed 100 percent.
All other requirements of this section still apply.
Mix designs including trial batches are required for each aggregate source and for
each concrete class.
Cementitious Materials showing Manufacturer's certification of compliance,
accompanied by mill test reports attesting that the materials meet the requirements of
the specification under which it is furnished, for cement and pozzolan.
CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
Cementitious materials shall each be of one type and from one source when used in
concrete which will have surfaces exposed in the finished structure. Cementitious
materials shall each be of one type and from one source when used in concrete which
will have surfaces exposed in the finished structure. Cementitious materials shall
conform to one of the following:
Cement: Use Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type II, Type IIA, or Type V, low alkali,
unless noted otherwise.
Portland - Pozzolan Cement: ASTM C-595, Type IP-A(MS). Do not use Pozzolan
cement unless approved by ENGINEER
Only one brand of cement from one manufacturing plant may be used.
AGGREGATES
Aggregates shall be natural aggregates, free from deleterious coatings, and shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM C 33, except as modified herein. Aggregates
shall not be potentially reactive as defined in Appendix XI of ASTM C 33.
CONTRACTOR shall import nonreactive aggregates if local aggregates are reactive.
Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, sharp, natural sand and shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C 33. Fine aggregate shall be graded as follows:

FINE AGGREGATES
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
3/8 inch 100
#4 95-100
#8 80-100
#16 50-85
#30 25-60
#50 10-30
#100 2-10

Fine aggregates shall have no more than two percent by weight passing #200 sieve.
Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall be washed gravel or crushed stone, or a combination of

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 6
these materials, consisting of hard, tough, durable particles free from adherent
coatings. It shall contain no more than 15 percent flat or elongated particles. A thin,
flat or elongated particle is defined as a particle having a maximum dimension in
excess of five times its minimum dimension. Aggregate which has disintegrated or
weathered badly under exposure conditions similar to those which will be
encountered in the work under consideration shall not be used. Coarse aggregate
shall be graded as follows (ASTM C 33):

COARSE AGGREGATES
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
1-1/2 inch 100
1 inch 95-100
½ inch 25-60
#4 0-10
#8 0-5

Coarse aggregates shall have no more than 1.75 percent by weight passing #200
sieve. Proof of gradation will be provided to ENGINEER by CONTRACTOR.
ACI MIX DESIGN
The amount by which the average strength (fcr) of a concrete mix exceeds the specified
compressive strength (f'c) shall be based upon no more than 1 in 100 random individual
strength tests falling more than 500 psi below the specific strength.
Proportion the materials in accordance with ACI 211.1, 211.2 or 211.3 as applicable to
produce concrete having the properties or limitations of Table No. 03 30 00-A.
HAND MIXING
Do not hand mix batches exceeding 0.5 cubic yards.
Hand mix only on watertight platform. Mix cement and aggregate prior to adding water.
Ensure all stones are thoroughly covered with mortar and mixture is of uniform color and
consistency.
HEATING, WATER AND AGGREGATE
Do not allow products of fuel combustion to contact the aggregate.
Heat mixing water to maximum temperature of 150 degrees F. Heat aggregates
uniformly.
Do not mix cement with water and aggregate at a mix temperature greater than 100
degrees F.
WATER
Water shall be potable, except that non-potable water may be used if it produces mortar
cubes having 7- and 28-day strengths at least 90 percent of the strength of similar

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 7
specimens made with water from a municipal supply. The strength comparison shall be
made on mortars, identical except for mixing water, prepared and tested in accordance
with ASTM C 109. Water for curing shall not contain any substance injurious to
concrete, or which causes staining.
PROPORTIONS OF MIX
Mixture Proportioning, Normal Weight Concrete: All concrete that must be watertight
and resistant to freeze-thaw cycles and to naturally occurring or commonly used
chemicals should be air entrained. All materials should be proportioned to produce a
well-graded mixture of high density and maximum workability with a minimum specified
28 day compressive strength of concrete classification. Trial batches shall contain
materials proposed to be used in the project. Trial mixtures having proportions,
consistencies and air content suitable for the work shall be made based on methodology
described in ACI 211.1, using at least three different water-cement ratios. Trial mixes
shall be proportioned to produce concrete strengths specified. In the case where ground
iron blast-furnace slag is used, the weight of the slag will be substituted in the equations
for the term P which is used to denote the weight of pozzolan. Trial mixtures shall be
designed for maximum permitted slump and air content. The temperature of concrete in
each trial batch shall be reported. For each water-cement ratio at least three test
cylinders for each test age shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C 192.
They shall be tested at 7 and 28 days in accordance with ASTM C 39. From these test
results a curve shall be plotted showing the relationship between water-cement ratio and
strength. Maximum water-cement or water-cement plus pozzolan Ratio: 0.45.
Average Strength: In meeting the strength requirements specified, the selected mixture
proportion shall produce an average compressive strength exceeding the specified
strength by the amount indicated below. Where a concrete production facility has test
records, a standard deviation shall be established. Test records from which a standard
deviation is calculated shall represent materials, quality control procedures, and
conditions similar to those expected; shall represent concrete produced to meet a
specified strength or strengths within 1,000 psi of that specified for proposed work; and
shall consist of at least 30 consecutive tests. A strength test shall be the average of the
strengths of two cylinders made from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28
days or at other test age designated for determination of the specified strength.

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 8
TABLE NO. 03 30 00-A
CONCRETE MIX PROPERTIES (e)
CONCRETE PROPERTIES
CONCRETE CLASSIFICATION(S)
Class 4000 Class 3500 Class 3000
Specified Compressive Strength fc' at 28 days,
min., psi
4,000 3,500
(d)
3,000
(d)
Compressive Strength at 7 days, min., psi (a) 2,680 2,345 2,010
Cement content (94 lb. sacks of cement per
cubic yard of concrete), min. (b)
6.0 5.75 5.5
Entrained air content, (% by volume). 6±1 6±1 6±1
Slump Range, in. (c) 1 - 4 (f) 2 - 4 2 - 4
Maximum Water Cement Ratio 0.45 0.45 0.45

(a) Used for monitoring purposes only.
(b) May include pozzolan replacements if approved by ENGINEER.
(c) Not more than 8 inches after adding high range water reducing admixture (super-
plasticizer) at site.
(d) Not allowed if concrete is exposed to freezing and thawing temperatures. Use Class
4000 or higher compressive strength and 6±1.0 percent air entrainment.
(e) All mix designs must be approved by ENGINEER.
(f) 1-3" for footings, sub-structural walls and 1-4" for slabs, beams, reinforced walls and
columns.
CURING MATERIALS
Normal Curing Compound
Curing compound shall be white pigmented and shall conform to ASTM C 309, Type
2 Class B.
Sodium silicate compounds cannot be used.
Manufacturer, or approved equal:
a. 1200-White by W.R. Meadows
b. White Resin Cure J10W by Dayton Superior
c. Safe-Cure 2000 by ChemMasters
d. Aqua Kure White by Lambert Corporation
Dissipating Curing Compound
When the curing compound must be removed for finishes or grouting, compounds
shall be of a dissipating type, conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 309, Type
1 or Type 2, Class B

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 9
Manufacturer, or approved equal:
a. 1100-Clear by W.R. Meadows
b. Kurez DR VOX by Euclid Chemical Company
c. Clear Cure VOC J7WB by Dayton Superior
d. Safe-Cure Clear DR by ChemMasters
EXECUTION
GENERAL
CONTRACTOR shall inform ENGINEER at least 72 hours in advance of time and places
at which CONTRACTOR intends to place concrete. All preparation work for concrete
placements shall be substantially completed at least 2 workdays prior to the scheduled
start of concrete placement to allow for ENGINEER's review and any necessary
corrections.
PREPARATION OF SURFACES
Surfaces to receive concrete shall be clean and free from frost, ice, mud, and water.
Conduit and other similar items shall be in place and clean of any deleterious substance.
Foundations: Earthwork shall be as specified. Flowing water shall be diverted without
washing over freshly deposited concrete. Rock foundations shall be cleaned by high
velocity air-water jets, sandblasting, or other approved methods. Debris and loose, semi-
detached or unsound fragments shall be removed. Rock surfaces shall be moist but
without free water when concrete is placed. Semi porous subgrades for foundations and
footings shall be damp when concrete is placed. Pervious subgrades shall be sealed by
blending impervious material with the top 6 inches of the in-place pervious material or by
covering with an impervious membrane.
Preparation of Previously Placed Concrete: Concrete surfaces to which other concrete
is to be bonded shall be roughened in an approved manner that will expose sound
aggregate uniformly without damaging the concrete. Laitance and loose particles shall
be removed. Surfaces shall be moist but without free water when concrete is placed.
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
Embedded items shall be free from oil, loose scale or rust, and paint. Embedded items
shall be installed at the locations indicated and required to serve the intended purpose.
Voids in sleeves, slots and inserts shall be filled with readily removable material to
prevent the entry of concrete.
Reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts, and similar items shall be set and secured
in the forms at locations as indicated or shown on the Contract Drawings. Proper
placement and locations shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
BATCHING, MIXING AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
Ready-mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed, and transported in accordance with
ASTM C 94, except as otherwise specified. Truck mixers, agitators, and non-agitating
units shall comply with NRMCA TMMB-1. Ready-mix plant equipment and facilities shall

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 10
be certified in accordance with NRMCA-QC 3.
The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be
permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready-mixed
concrete will not be permitted. The quantity and quality of materials used in ready-mixed
concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at the
batching plant by ENGINEER.
Truck mixers and their operation must be such that the concrete throughout the mixed
batch as discharged is within acceptable limits of uniformity with respect to consistency,
mix, and grading. If slump tests taken at approximately the 1/4 and 3/4 points of the
load during discharge give slumps differing by more than 1 inch when the specified
slump is 3 inches or less, or more than 2 inches when the specified slump is more than
3 inches, the mixer shall not be used on the work unless the causing condition is
corrected and satisfactory performance is verified by additional slump tests. All
mechanical details of the mixer, such as water measuring and discharge apparatus,
condition of the blades, speed of rotation, general mechanical condition of the unit, and
clearance of the drum, shall be checked before a further attempt to use the unit will be
permitted.
Admixtures: Admixtures shall be batched within an accuracy of 3 percent. Where two
or more admixtures are used in the same batch, they shall be batched separately and
must be compatible. Retarding admixture shall be added within one minute after
addition of water is complete or in the first quarter of the required mixing time, whichever
is first. Superplasticizing admixtures shall be added at the project site, and the concrete
with the admixture shall be mixed 4 to 5 minutes before placing as recommended by
manufacturer. Concrete that shows evidence of total collapse or segregation caused by
the use of admixture shall be removed from the site.
Control of Mixing Water: No water from the truck system or elsewhere shall be added
after the initial introduction of mixing water for the batch. No water shall be added at the
jobsite without the approval of ENGINEER.
SAMPLING AND TESTING
Sampling and Testing of the concrete will be as defined in Section 01 45 00 – Quality
Control and Material Testing.
Aggregates: Aggregates for normal weight concrete shall be sampled and tested in
accordance with ASTM C 33.
Sampling of Concrete: Samples of concrete for air, slump, unit weight, and strength
tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C 172.
a. Air Content: Test for air content shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C
173 or ASTM C 231. A minimum of 1 test shall be conducted each time a slump
test is made.
b. Slump: At least 1 slump test shall be made on randomly selected batches of
each mixture of concrete for every 100 cubic yards of ready-mixed concrete
delivered to the job site. Also note the time batched at the plant and the starting
time when unloading began at the site. Tests shall be performed in accordance
with ASTM C 143.

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 11
c. Temperature: Concrete and air temperatures shall be measured and recorded
with each set of cylinders and the air temperature shall also be recorded when
the air temperature at the site is 40 degrees F or below and/or 90 degrees F or
above.
Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete
a. Frequency of Testing: Samples for strength tests of each class of concrete
placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day, nor less than once for
each 100 cubic yards of concrete, nor less than once for each 3,000 square feet
of surface area for slabs or walls. If this sampling frequency results in less than 5
strength tests for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least 5
randomly selected trucks or from each truck if fewer than 5 truck loads are used.
Field cured specimens for determining form removal time or when a structure
may be put in service shall be made in numbers directed to check the adequacy
of curing and protection of concrete in the structure. The specimens shall be
removed from the molds at the age of 24 hours and shall be cured and protected,
insofar as practicable, in the same manner as that given to the portion of the
structure the samples represent.
b. Testing Procedures: Cylinders for acceptance tests shall be molded and cured in
accordance with ASTM C 31. Cylinders shall be tested in accordance with
ASTM C 39. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of two
cylinders made from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days or at
another specified test age.
c. Evaluation of Results: Concrete specified on the basis of compressive strength
will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive
strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength and no individual
strength test result falls below the required strength by more than 500 pounds
per square inch.
d. Unless noted otherwise, make a minimum of five (5) concrete cylinders each time
a test is required. When concrete is being placed in suspended slabs, beams
and retaining walls make two (2) extra cylinders which must be cured on site.
The extra cylinders will be used to determine when to remove forms and/or when
to backfill.
Investigation of Low-Strength Test Results: When any strength test of standard-cured
test cylinder falls below the specified strength requirement by more than 500 pounds per
square inch, or if tests of field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and
curing, steps shall be taken to assure that load-carrying capacity of the structure is not
jeopardized. Nondestructive testing in accordance with ASTM C 597, ASTM C 803 or
ASTM C 805 may be permitted by ENGINEER to determine the relative strengths at
various locations in the structure as an aid in evaluating concrete strength in place or for
selecting areas to be cored. Such tests, unless properly calibrated and correlated with
other test data, shall not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection. When strength
of concrete in place is considered potentially deficient, cores shall be obtained and
tested in accordance with ASTM C 42. At least three representative cores shall be
taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially
deficient. The location of cores shall be determined by ENGINEER to least impair the
strength of the structure. If the concrete in the structure will be dry under service
conditions, the cores shall be air dried (temperature 60 to 80 degrees F, relative
humidity less than 60 percent) for seven days before testing and shall be tested dry. If
the concrete in the structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions,

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 12
the cores shall be tested after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C 42.
Concrete in the area represented by the core testing will be considered adequate if the
average strength of the cores is equal to or at least 85 percent of the specified strength
requirement and if no single core is less than 75 percent of the specified strength
requirement. If the core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain, or if structural
analysis does not confirm the safety of the structure, load tests may be directed by
ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318. Concrete work evaluated
by structural analysis or by results of a load test and found deficient shall be corrected in
a manner satisfactory to ENGINEER. All investigations, testing, load tests, and
correction of deficiencies shall be performed, and approved by ENGINEER, at the
expense of CONTRACTOR.
CONVEYING CONCRETE
Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to forms as rapidly as possible and within the
time interval specified in paragraph 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT by methods which
will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. Conveying concrete shall be in
accordance with the requirements of ACI 304.
Chutes: When concrete can be placed directly from a truck mixer or other
transporting equipment, chutes attached to this equipment may be used. Separate
chutes will not be permitted except when specifically approved.
a. Use metal or metal lined chutes with a maximum length of 20-feet.
b. The minimum slopes of chutes shall be such that concrete of the indicated
consistency will readily flow in them.
Buckets: Bucket design shall be such that concrete of the required slump can be
readily discharged. Bucket gates shall be essentially grout tight when closed. The
bucket shall provide means for positive regulations of the amount and rate of deposit
of concrete in each dumping position.
Pumps: Concrete may be conveyed by positive displacement pumps when
approved. Pump shall be the piston or squeeze pressure type. Pipeline shall be
steel pipe or heavy duty flexible hose. Inside diameter of the pipe shall be at least
three times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate. Distance to be pumped shall
not exceed the limits recommended by the pump manufacturer. Concrete shall be
supplied to the pump continuously. When pumping is completed, the concrete
remaining in the pipeline shall be ejected without contaminating the concrete in
place. After each use, the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Flushing water
shall be wasted outside the forms.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
Mixed concrete which is transported in truck mixers or agitators or concrete which is
truck mixed, shall be discharged within 1-1/2 hours or before the drum has revolved 300
revolutions, whichever comes first after the introduction of the mixing water to the
cement and aggregates or the introduction of the cement to the aggregates. These
limitations may be waived by ENGINEER if the concrete is of such slump after the 1-1/2
hour time or 300 revolution limit has been reached that it can be placed, without the
addition of water to the batch. When the concrete temperature exceeds 85 degrees F,
the time shall be reduced to 45 minutes. Concrete shall be placed within 15 minutes
after it has been discharged from the truck.

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 13
Placing Operation: Concrete shall be handled from mixer to forms in a continuous
manner until the approved unit of operation is completed. Adequate scaffolding,
ramps and walkways shall be provided so that personnel and equipment are not
supported by in-place reinforcement. Placing will not be permitted when the sun,
heat, wind, or limitations of facilities furnished by CONTRACTOR prevent proper
consolidation, finishing and curing. Concrete shall be deposited as close as possible
to its final position in the forms, and there shall be no vertical drop greater than 4 feet
except where suitable equipment is provided to prevent segregation and where
specifically authorized. Concrete should not be allowed to drop through a cage of
reinforcing steel. Depositing of the concrete shall be so regulated that it will be
effectively consolidated in horizontal layers not more than 12 inches thick, except
that all slabs shall be placed in a single layer. Concrete to receive other construction
shall be screened to the proper level to avoid excessive shimming or grouting.
a. Additional requirements for depositing concrete in walls include, but are not
limited to:
Deposit concrete in a continuous operation until section is completed.
Place concrete in approximately horizontal layers 2 ft maximum
thickness.
Each layer of concrete shall be plastic when covered with following layer.
Rate of vertical rise not more than 4 ft per hour.
Pump concrete or use a tremie having varying lengths for placing
concrete in columns and walls to prevent free fall of more than 4 ft.
Allow concrete to thoroughly settle before top is finished. Remove all
laitance, debris, and surplus water from surfaces at tops of forms by
screeding, scraping, or other effective means.
b. Additional requirements for depositing concrete in slabs include, but are not
limited to:
Deposit concrete in a continuous operation until section is completed.
Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable to its final position to
avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing.
In sloping slabs, proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top
for the full width of the placement.
Consolidation: Immediately after placing, each layer of concrete shall be
consolidated by internal vibrators, except for slabs 4 inches or less. The vibrators
shall at all times be adequate in effectiveness and number to properly consolidate
the concrete; a spare vibrator shall be kept at the jobsite during all concrete placing
operations. The vibrators shall have a frequency of not less than 8,000 vibrations
per minute, and the head diameter and amplitude shall be appropriate for the
concrete mixture being placed. Vibrators shall be inserted vertically at uniform
spacing over the area of placement. The distance between insertions shall be
approximately 1-1/2 times the radius of action of the vibrator so that the area being
vibrated will overlap the adjacent just-vibrated area by a few inches. The vibrator
shall penetrate rapidly to the bottom of the layer and at least 6 inches into the
preceding layer if there is such. Vibrator shall be held stationary until the concrete is
consolidated and then withdrawn slowly. The use of form vibrators must be
specifically approved. Vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete within the
forms. Slabs 4 inches and less in thickness shall be consolidated by properly
designed vibrating screeds or other approved technique.
Cold Weather Requirements: Cold weather requirements shall conform to ACI 306 and

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 14
this Specification. Special protection measures, approved by ENGINEER, shall be used
if freezing temperatures are anticipated before the expiration of the specified curing
period. Provisions should be made to keep the concrete at a minimum temperature of
50 degrees F for 7 days. The ambient temperature of the air where concrete is to be
placed and the temperature of surfaces to receive concrete shall be not less than 32
degrees F. No concrete shall be placed on frozen ground. The temperature of the
concrete when placed shall be not less than 55 degrees F nor more than 75 degrees F.
Heating of the mixing water or aggregates will be required to regulate the concrete
placing temperature. Materials entering the mixer shall be free from ice, snow, or frozen
lumps. Salt, chemicals or other materials shall not be incorporated in the concrete to
prevent freezing. Calcium chloride shall not be used.
Hot Weather Requirements: Hot weather requirements shall conform to ACI 305 and this
Specification. The temperature of the concrete placed during hot weather shall not
exceed 85 degrees F except where an approved retarder is used. The mixing water
and/or aggregates shall be cooled, if necessary, to maintain a satisfactory placing
temperature. In no case shall the placing temperature exceed 95 degrees F.
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints shall be located as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Where
concrete work is interrupted by weather, end of work shift or other similar type of delay,
location and type of construction joint shall be subject to approval of ENGINEER.
Unless otherwise indicated and except for slabs on grade, reinforcing steel shall extend
through construction joints. Construction joints in slabs on grade shall be keyed or
doweled as shown. Concrete columns, walls, or piers shall be in place at least 2 hours,
or until the concrete is no longer plastic, before placing concrete for beams, girders, or
slabs thereon. In walls having door or window openings, lifts shall terminate at the top
and bottom of the opening. Other lifts shall terminate at such levels as to conform to
structural requirements or architectural details. Where horizontal construction joints are
required, a strip of 1-inch square-edge lumber, beveled and oiled to facilitate removal,
shall be tacked to the inside of the forms at the construction joint. Concrete shall be
placed to a point 1 inch above the underside of the strip. The strip shall be removed 1
hour after the concrete has been placed, and any irregularities in the joint line shall be
leveled off with a wood float, and all laitance shall be removed. Prior to placing
additional concrete, horizontal construction joints shall be prepared as specified in
paragraph 3.1, PREPARATION OF SURFACES.
FINISHING CONCRETE
Formed Surfaces
Repair of Surface Defects: Surface defects shall be repaired within 24 hours after
the removal of forms. Honeycombed and other defective areas shall be cut back to
solid concrete or to a depth of not less than 1 inch, whichever is greater. Edges shall
be cut perpendicular to the surface of the concrete. The prepared areas shall be
dampened and brush-coated with neat cement grout. The repair shall be made using
mortar consisting of not more than 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand. The mixed
mortar shall be allowed to stand to stiffen (approximately 45 minutes), during which
time the mortar shall be intermittently remixed without the addition of water. After the
mortar has attained the stiffest consistency that will permit placing, the patching mix

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 15
shall be thoroughly tamped into place by means approved by ENGINEER and
finished slightly higher than the surrounding surface. For Class A and Class B
finished surfaces the cement used in the patching mortar shall be a blend of job
cement and white cement proportioned to produce a finished repair surface
matching, after curing, the color of adjacent surfaces. Holes left after the removal of
form ties shall be cleaned and filled with patching mortar. Holes left by the removal
of tie rods shall be reamed and filled by dry-packing. Repaired surfaces shall be
cured as required for adjacent surfaces. The temperature of concrete, mortar
patching material, and ambient air shall be above 50 degrees F while making repairs
and during the curing period. Concrete with defects which affect the strength of the
member or with excessive honeycombs will be rejected, or the defects shall be
corrected as directed by ENGINEER.
Class A Finish: Where a Class A finish is indicated, fins shall be removed. A mortar
mix consisting of one-part Portland cement and two parts well-graded sand passing
a No. 30 sieve, with water added to give the consistency of thick paint, shall be
prepared. White cement shall be used to replace part of the job cement. After the
surface has been thoroughly wetted and allowed to approach surface dryness, the
mortar shall be vigorously applied to the area by clean burlap pads or by cork or
wood-floating, to completely fill all surface voids. Excess grout shall be scraped off
with a trowel. As soon as it can be accomplished without pulling the mortar from the
voids, the area shall be rubbed with burlap pads until all visible grout film is removed.
The rubbing pads shall have on their surfaces the same sand-cement mix specified
above but without any mixing water. The finish of any area shall be completed in the
same day, and the limits of a finished area shall be made at natural breaks in the
surface. The surface shall be continuously moist cured for 48 hours. The
temperature of the air adjacent to the surface shall be not less than 50 degrees F for
24 hours prior to, and 48 hours after, the application. In hot, dry weather the smooth
finish shall be applied in shaded areas.
Class B Finish: Where a Class B finish is indicated, fins shall be removed. Concrete
surface shall be smooth with a texture at least equal to that obtained through the use
of Grade B-B plywood forms.
Class C Finish: Where a Class C finish is indicated, fins shall be removed. Concrete
surfaces shall be relatively smooth with a texture imparted by the forms used.
Class D Finish: Where a Class D finish is indicated, fins exceeding 1/4 inch in height
shall be chipped or rubbed off. Concrete surfaces shall be left with the texture
imparted by the forms used.
See Specification Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes for required finishes.
Unformed Surfaces: In cold weather, the air temperature in areas where concrete is
being finished shall not be less than 50 degrees F in accordance with ACI 306R. In hot
windy weather when the rate of evaporation of surface moisture, as determined by
methodology presented in ACI 305R, may reasonably be expected to exceed 0.2
pounds per square foot per hour; coverings, windbreaks, or fog sprays shall be provided
as necessary to prevent premature setting and drying of the surface. The dusting of
surfaces with dry materials or the addition of water during finishing will not be permitted.
Finished surfaces shall be plane, with no deviation greater than 5/16-inch when tested
with a 10-foot straightedge. Surfaces shall be pitched to drains.
Rough-Slab Finish: Slabs to receive fill or mortar setting beds shall be screened with
straightedges immediately after consolidation to bring the surface to the required

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 16
finish level with no coarse aggregate visible.
Float Finish: Slabs to receive a steel trowel finish and slabs where indicated shall be
given a float finish. Screeding shall be followed immediately by darbying or bull
floating before bleeding water is present, to bring the surface to a true, even plane.
After the concrete has stiffened to permit the operation and the water sheen has
disappeared, it shall be wood floated. Concrete that portrays stickiness shall be
finished with a magnesium float in lieu of a wood float, and left free of ridges and
other projections. Float finish is normally specified for surfaces that will receive other
treatment such as built-up roofing, nonslip surfacing material. Float Finish shall not
be used on wearing surfaces.
Trowel Finish: Slabs where indicated, shall be given a trowel finish immediately
following floating. Surfaces shall be trowelled to produce smooth, dense slabs free
from blemishes including trowel marks. In lieu of hand finishing, an approved power
finishing machine may be used in accordance with the directions of the machine
manufacturer. A final hard steel troweling shall be done by hand. Trowel finish shall
be used on wearing surfaces and where a smooth finish is required.
Broom Finish: After floating, slabs where indicated, shall be lightly troweled, and
then broomed with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of the main
traffic.
See Specification Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes for required finishes.
CURING AND PROTECTION
General: All concrete shall be cured by an approved method for the period of time given
below:
Concrete with Type III cement 3 days
Concrete with Type II or IIA, or V, low alkali cement 7 days
Concrete with Type IP-A(MS) cement blended with pozzolan 10 days
Immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected from premature drying
extremes in temperatures, rapid temperature change, mechanical injury and injury from
rain and flowing water. Air and forms in contact with concrete shall be maintained at a
temperature above 50 degrees F for the first 3 days and at a temperature above 32
degrees F for the remainder of the specified curing period. Exhaust fumes from
combustion heating units shall be vented to the outside of the enclosure and heaters
and ducts shall be placed and directed so as not to cause areas of overheating and
drying of concrete surfaces or to create fire hazards. All materials and equipment
needed for adequate curing and protection shall be available and at the site prior to
placing concrete. No fire or excessive heat shall be permitted near or in direct contact
with the concrete at any time. Curing shall be accomplished by any of the following
methods, or combination thereof, as approved.
Moist Curing: Concrete to be moist-cured shall be maintained continuously wet for the
entire curing period. If water or curing materials used stains or discolors concrete
surfaces which are to be permanently exposed, the concrete surfaces shall be cleaned.
When wooden forms are left in place during curing, they shall be kept wet at all times. If
the forms are removed before the end of the curing period, curing shall be carried out as
on unformed surfaces, using suitable materials. Horizontal surfaces shall be cured by

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 17
ponding, by covering with a 2-inch minimum thickness of continuously saturated sand, or
by covering with waterproof paper, polyethylene sheet, polyethylene-coated burlap or
saturated burlap. Once the moist curing has started the concrete surface must not be
allowed to become surface dry for the entire curing period.
Membrane Curing:
Normal membrane curing compound shall not be used on surfaces that are to
receive any subsequent treatment depending on adhesion or bonding to the
concrete. Use a Dissipating curing compound for surfaces which are to be painted or
are to receive bituminous roofing or waterproofing, or f loors that are to receive
adhesive applications of resilient flooring.
The curing compound selected shall be compatible with any subsequent paint,
roofing, waterproofing or flooring specified. Membrane curing compound shall not be
used on surfaces that are maintained at curing temperatures with free steam.
Curing compound shall be applied to formed surfaces immediately after the forms
are removed and prior to any patching or other surface treatment except the cleaning
of loose sand, mortar, and debris from the surface.
Surfaces shall be thoroughly moistened with water and the curing compound shall be
applied to slab surfaces as soon as the bleeding water has disappeared, with the
tops of joints being temporarily sealed to prevent entry of the compound and t o
prevent moisture loss during the curing period.
Compound shall be applied in a one-coat continuous operation by mechanical
spraying equipment, at a uniform coverage in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions.
Concrete surfaces which have been subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after curing
compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage
specified.
On surfaces permanently exposed to view, the surface shall be shaded from direct
rays of the sun for the duration of the curing period.
Surfaces coated with curing compound shall be kept free of foot and vehicular traffic,
and from other sources of abrasion and contamination during the curing period.
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
Quality Control Testing shall be in accordance with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control
and Material Testing.

- END OF SECTION -

02/2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
254.07.100 PAGE 03 30 00 - 18
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL
254.07.100 PAGE 03 31 05 - 1
SECTION 03 31 05

CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM or FLOW FILL)
PART 1 GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
CONTRACTOR shall provide Controlled Low Strength Material (all called CLSM or Flow
Fill), complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
CLSM shall be placed where indicated and may be used, if ENGINEER approves, for
the following purposes:
Normal CLSM with high slump, non-segregating consistency that readily flows and
fills voids and difficult to reach places: pipe zone fill, trench zone fill, pipe
abandonment, structure backfill, and structure cavity fill.
Foundation CLSM is used where higher early strengths are required and future
excavation is not likely to be required.
RELATED WORK
Related work in other sections includes but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 138 Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield and Air
Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C 260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
ASTM C 403 Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by
Penetration Resistance
ASTM C 494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C 803 Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Hardened
Concrete
ASTM D 4318 Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D 4832 Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled
Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders
01/2023 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL
254.07.100 PAGE 03 31 05 - 2
SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Procedures.
Shop Drawings:
CLSM mix designs which show the proportions and gradations of all materials
proposed for each type of CLSM indicated. Each mix design shall be accompanied
by independent laboratory test results of the indicated properties.
If Contractor proposes to provide lower strength CLSM with aggregates that do not
conform to ASTM C 33, Shop Drawings shall include a testing program that will be
used to control the variability of the aggregates. The testing program shall be
acceptable to ENGINEER.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
All testing will be done by a testing laboratory at CONTRACTOR’S expense, except as
otherwise indicated.
If tests of the CLSM show non-compliance with the specifications, CONTRACTOR shall
make changes as may be required to achieve compliance. Performing and paying for
subsequent testing to show compliance shall be CONTRACTOR’s responsibility.
Correlation Tests
CONTRACTOR shall perform a field correlation test for each mix of CLSM used in
pipe zone, trench zone, or backfill used in amounts greater than 100 cubic yards or
when CLSM is required to support traffic or other live loads on the fill less than 7
days.
Field correlation tests shall be performed in a test pit similar in cross section to the
WORK and at least 10-feet long at a location near the WORK. The proposed
location shall be acceptable to ENGINEER.
Laboratory and field tests shall be performed on samples taken from the same CLSM
batch mix. All tests shall be performed by a laboratory at CONTRACTOR’s expense.
Testing shall be performed once each 2-hours during the first 8 hours, once each 8-
hours during the first week, and once each 24-hours until the CLSM mix reaches the
maximum design strength.
a. Compression testing shall be in accordance with ASTM D 4832.
b. Setting test shall be in accordance with ASTM C 403.
c. Density tests shall be in accordance with ASTM C 138.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL
CLSM shall be a mixture of cement, pozzolan, coarse and fine aggregate, admixtures,
and water, mixed in accordance with ASTM C 94.
Composition: The following parameters shall be within the indicated limits and as
necessary to produce the indicated compressive strengths.
01/2023 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL
254.07.100 PAGE 03 31 05 - 3
The actual mix proportions and flow characteristics shall be determined by the
producer of the CLSM to meet requirements for compressive strength as specified
for Normal CLSM or Foundation CLSM.
Entrained air content shall be between 15 percent minimum and 30 percent
maximum.
Water reducing agent content as necessary.
Properties
Density shall be between 120 PCF minimum and 145 PCF maximum.
Slump shall be as required by CONTRACTOR methods, but shall not promote
segregation, nor shall slump exceed 10 inches.
Compressive strength at 28 days:
a. Normal CLSM: Between 100 psi minimum and 300 psi maximum. Unless
specifically indicated otherwise, all CLSM shall be Normal CLSM.
b. Foundation CLSM: 500 psi to 1,000 psi.
CEMENT
Cement shall be Type ll in accordance with ASTM C 150.
POZZOLAN
Pozzolan shall be Type F or C in accordance with ASTM C 618. Pozzolan content, by
weight, in Normal CLSM, shall not be greater than 90 percent.
AGGREGATE
Aggregate shall consist of a well graded mixture of crushed rock, soil, or sand, with a
nominal maximum size of 3/8-inch. One hundred percent shall pass the 1 inch sieve; no
more than 30 percent shall be retained on the 3/8-inch sieve; and no more than 12
percent shall pass the number 200 sieve. If more than 5 percent of the aggregate
passes the number 200 sieve, the material passing the number 200 sieve shall have a
plasticity index of less than 0.73(liquid limit-20), when tested in accordance with ASTM D
4318. All aggregate shall be free from organic matter and shall not contain more alkali,
sulfates, or salts than the native materials at the Site.
ADMIXTURES
Air entraining admixtures shall be in accordance with ASTM C 260.
Water reducing admixtures shall be in accordance with ASTM C 494.
WATER
Water shall be potable, clean, and free from objectionable quantities of silt, organic
matter, alkali, salt, and other impurities.
01/2023 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL
254.07.100 PAGE 03 31 05 - 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
PREPARATION
Subgrade and compacted fill to receive CLSM shall be prepared according to Section 31
23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines.
BATCHING, MIXING AND DELIVERY
Batching, mixing, and delivery of CLSM shall conform to ASTM C 94. CLSM shall be
mixed at a batch plant acceptable to the ENGINEER and shall be delivered in standard
transit mix trucks.
PLACEMENT
CLSM shall be placed by tailgate discharge, conveyor belts, pumped, or other means
acceptable to the ENGINEER. CLSM shall be directed in place by vibrator, shovel, or
rod to fill all crevices and pockets. Avoid over-consolidation which causes separation of
aggregate sizes.
CLSM shall be continuously placed against fresh material unless otherwise approved by
ENGINEER. When new material is placed against existing CLSM, the placement area
shall be free from all loose and foreign material. The surface of the existing material
shall be soaked a minimum of one hour before placement of fresh material but no
standing water shall be allowed when placement begins.
CLSM placement for piping. Pipe shall be placed on soil pads and bedding placed
under the pipe from one side and vibrated, as necessary, so that the CLSM flows to the
opposite side. CLSM shall then be added to both sides of the pipe and vibrated until it
fills the space between the pipe and the excavated trench bottom. CLSM shall be
deposited in such a manner as to avoid uplift and deposited in its final position to avoid
disturbing the pipe trench causing foreign material to mix with the cement slurry.
Pipe zone backfill shall not be placed or compacted until the CLSM has reached initial
set. Pipes placed on steep slopes may require a stiffer mix to prevent CLSM from
flowing down the trench. Vibration may be required to ensure that the CLSM fills all
voids.
Temperature of the CLSM shall be between 50 and 90 degrees F, when placed. CLSM
shall not be placed when the air temperature is below 40 degrees F. No CLSM shall be
placed against frozen subgrade or other materials having temperature less than 32
degrees F.
FINISHING
The finish surface shall be smooth and to the grade indicated or directed by the
ENGINEER. Surfaces shall be free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, and
honeycombing. Finishing by wood float, steel trowel, or similar methods is not required.
CURING
CLSM shall be kept damp for a minimum of 7 days or until final backfill is placed.
01/2023 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL
254.07.100 PAGE 03 31 05 - 5
PROTECTION
CLSM shall be protected from freezing for 72 hours after placement.
No fill or loading shall be placed on CLSM until probe penetration resistance, as
measured in accordance with ASTM C 803 exceeds 650 psi.
CLSM shall be protected from running water, rain, and other damage until the Material
has been accepted and final fill completed.

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL
254.07.100 PAGE 03 31 05 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 GROUTING
254.07.100 PAGE 03 60 00 - 1
SECTION 03 60 00
GROUT
PART 1 GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
CONTRACTOR shall provide grout, complete and in place, in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
Unless indicated otherwise, grouts shall be provided as listed in this Section whether
indicated on the Contract Drawings or not.
The following types of grout are covered in this Section:
Cement Grout
Non-Shrink Grout – Class I (cement based)
Non-Shrink Grout – Class II (cement based)
Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout
Epoxy Anchor Grout for Adhesive Anchors
Topping Grout and Concrete/Grout Fill
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements
Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 136 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C 307 Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant
Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings
ASTM C 494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 496 Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens
ASTM C 531 Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of
Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts,
Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes
ASTM C 579 Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-
Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer
Concretes
01/2023 GROUTING
254.07.100 PAGE 03 60 00 - 2
ASTM C 580 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of
Elasticity of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic
Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes
ASTM C 827 Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of
Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures
ASTM C 881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems
for Concrete
ASTM C 882 Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems
Used With Concrete By Slant Shear
ASTM C 939 Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate
Concrete (Flow Cone Method)
ASTM C 942 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Grouts for
Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory
ASTM C 1090 Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of
Cylindrical Specimens of Hydraulic-Cement Grout
ASTM C 1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink)
ASTM C 1339 Standard Test Method for Flowability and Bearing Area of
Chemical-Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts
ASTM D 648 Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics
Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position
ASTM D 695 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Procedures.
Provide the following submittals for each type of grout used on the project:
Test reports accompanied by a manufacturer’s statement that previously tested
material is of similar type, quality, and manufacture as that which is proposed for use
on this project shall be submitted for:

a. Cement
b. Aggregates
c. Retardants
d. Bonding compounds
e. Epoxy Resin

Certifications that grouts used on the project contain no chlorides or other chemicals
that cause corrosion.
Manufacturer’s literature containing instructions and recommendations on the mixing,
handling, placement, curing, and appropriate uses for each type of grout used in the
WORK, and location of use. ICBO/ES report shall be submitted for epoxy anchor
grout for adhesive anchors.

Manufacturer’s certification that non-shrink grout does not contain aluminum, zinc, or
magnesium powders as a method of expansion.
Submit manufacturer's written warranty as indicated herein.
01/2023 GROUTING
254.07.100 PAGE 03 60 00 - 3
Name and telephone number of grout manufacturer's representative who will give
on-Site service. The representative shall have at least one year of experience with
the indicated grouts.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling,
storing, and protecting products.
Grout and grout materials shall be stored in a dry shelter, protected from moisture, and
for prepackaged grout, maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The work shall be subject to inspection at all times by OWNER and ENGINEER for the
purpose of determining that the work is properly executed in accordance with this
specification. Failure to detect defective workmanship or material during any interim
inspection shall not constitute acceptance of workmanship and materials.
All testing will be done by a testing laboratory at CONTRACTOR’S expense, except as
otherwise indicated.
Field Tests
Compression test specimens will be taken from the first placement of each type of
grout, and at intervals thereafter selected by ENGINEER.
Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for cement grout and cement based
non-shrink grout will be performed in accordance with ASTM C 1107, at intervals
during construction selected by ENGINEER. A set of 3 specimens will be made for
testing at 7 Days, 28 Days, and each additional time period as appropriate.
Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for topping grout and concrete/grout
fill will be performed in accordance with Section 03 31 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete,
at intervals during construction selected by ENGINEER.
Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for epoxy grouts will be performed
in accordance with ASTM C 579, Method B, at intervals during construction selected
by ENGINEER. A set of 3 specimens will be made for testing at 7 Days and each
earlier time period as appropriate.
Construction tolerances shall be as indicated in Section 03 31 00 Cast-in-Place
Concrete unless noted otherwise.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Cement: Portland cement shall be ASTM C 150 Type II of Type V.
Aggregate:
General: Aggregate shall be non-reactive and shall be washed before use. When
sources of aggregate are changed, test reports shall be provided for the material
from the new source prior to commencing grout work.
01/2023 GROUTING
254.07.100 PAGE 03 60 00 - 4
Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be sand or crush stone conforming to ASTM C
33 as modified herein. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 136, gradation shall
be such that 100 percent by weight passes a No. 8 sieve and not less than 45
percent by weight passes a standard No. 40 sieve. Variation from the specified
gradation in individual tests will be accepted if the average of three consecutive tests
is within the following variation:

Standard Sieve Permissible Variation in
Individual Test
No. 30 or coarser 2% by weight
No. 50 or finer 0.5% by weight
Admixtures
General: Admixtures shall be compatible with the grout and shall comply with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Admixtures shall be added to the grout mix
separately.
Water Reducing Retarder: Water reducing retarder shall comply with ASTM C 494,
Type D and shall be Master Builders (BASF) MasterSet R 300, Sika Corporation
Plastiment, or approved equal.
Lubricant: Lubricant additive for cement pressure grouting shall be Sika Intraplast,
or approved equal.
Water:
Water for washing aggregate, for mixing and for curing shall be potable, shall not
contain more than 1,000 mg/L of chlorides as Cl, nor more than 1,300 mg/L of
sulfates as SO4, and shall not contain impurities which may change the setting time
by more than 25 percent or a reduction of more than 5 percent of the compressive
strength of the grout at 14 days when compared to the results for grout made with
distilled water.
CEMENT GROUT
Application: Surface repairs of concrete.
Cement grout shall be composed of one part cement, 3 parts sand, and the minimum
amount of water necessary to obtain the desired consistency. Where needed to match
the color of adjacent concrete, white Portland cement shall be blended with regular
cement as needed. The minimum compressive strength at 28 Days shall be 4000 psi.
Cement grout materials shall be as indicated in Section 03 31 00 Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
NON-SHRINK GROUT
General
Non-shrink cementitious grout shall be a flowable, prepackaged, inorganic, non-
metallic, cement type grout requiring only the addition of water. Cement from kilns
burning metal-rich hazardous waste fuel shall not be used. The manufacturer shall
have at least 10 years’ experience in the manufacture of cement based grouts. The
01/2023 GROUTING
254.07.100 PAGE 03 60 00 - 5
manufacturer shall provide technical services and provide a representative at the
jobsite for product training prior to product installation.
Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each bag or other container in which
the materials are packaged. The specific formulation for each class of non-shrink
grout shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application.
Grout shall not contain chlorides or additives that may contribute to corrosion.
Grout shall be formulated to be used at any consistency from fluid to plastic.
Cement-based non-shrink grout shall have the following minimum properties when
tested at a fluid consistency, at 28 Days:
a. Minimum tensile splitting strength of 500 psi per ASTM C 496.
b. Minimum flexural strength of 1,000 psi per ASTM C 580.
c. Minimum bond strength (concrete to grout) of 1,900 psi per modified ASTM C
882.
d. Grout shall be certified for use in freeze/thaw environments.
Class I Non-Shrink Grout
Application: Anchor bolts and reinforcing steel required to be set in grout in which the
average working or operating temperature will be over 100 degrees F or in high fire
risk areas; Beam and column (1 or 2 story) base plates less than 16-inches in the
least dimension; Storage tanks and other non-motorized equipment and machinery
under 30 horsepower; Filling blockout spaces for embedded items such as railing
posts, gate guide frames, etc.; Repair of holes and defects in concrete members
which are not water bearing and not in contact with soil or other fill material; and any
other location not specifically listed in this Section or on the Contract Drawings.
Class I non-shrink grout shall have a minimum 28 Day compressive strength of 5,000
psi when mixed at a fluid consistency.
Class I non-shrink grout shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107, Grade B or C,
when mixed to fluid, flowable, and plastic consistencies.
Grout shall have a maximum early age height change of 4.0% expansion, and shall
have no shrinkage (0.0%) in accordance with ASTM C 827. The grout when tested
shall not bleed or segregate at maximum allowed water.
Grout shall have no shrinkage (0.0%) and a maximum of 0.3% expansion in the
hardened state when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1090.
Furnish certification that the non-shrink property of grout is not based on gas
production or gypsum expansion.
Class I Non-Shrink Grout shall be Five Star Grout by Five Star Products,
Sikagrout 212 by Sika Corporation, CB-G PG by Hilti, or equal.
Class II Non-Shrink Grout
Application: Column base plates (greater than 2 story or larger than 16-inches in the
least dimension); under precast concrete elements; and repair of holes and defects
in concrete members which are water bearing or in contact with soil or other fill
materials.
Class II non-shrink grout shall be a high precision, fluid, extended working time,
grout. The minimum 28-Day compressive strength shall be 7,500 psi, when mixed at
a fluid consistency.
Grout shall have a maximum early age height change of 4.0% expansion, and shall
have no shrinkage (0.0%) in accordance with ASTM C 827.
01/2023 GROUTING
254.07.100 PAGE 03 60 00 - 6
Grout shall have no shrinkage (0.0%) and a maximum of 0.3% expansion in the
hardened state when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1090.
Class II non-shrink grout shall have an extended working time of 30 minutes
minimum when mixed to a fluid consistency as defined in ASTM C 827 at
temperature extremes of 45 to 90 degrees F in accordance with ASTM C 1107.
Class II non-shrink grout shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107, Grade B or C
when tested using the amount of water needed to achieve fluid consistency per
ASTM C 939.
The grout when tested shall not bleed or segregate at maximum allowed water
content.
Provide certification that its non-shrink property is not based on gas production or
gypsum expansion.
Class II non-shrink grout shall be Five Star Fluid Grout 100 by Five Star Products,
Crystex by L&M Construction Chemicals, or equal.
NON-SHRINK EPOXY GROUT
Application: Pumps over 1,000 horsepower, unless indicated otherwise.
Non-shrink epoxy grout shall be a flowable, non-shrink, 100 percent solids system. The
epoxy grout system shall have 3 components: resin, hardener, and specially blended
aggregate, each premeasured and prepackaged. The resin component shall not contain
any non-reactive diluents. Resins containing butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) or other highly
volatile and hazardous reactive diluents are not acceptable. Variation of component
ratios is not permitted unless specifically recommended by the manufacturer.
Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each container in which the materials are
packaged.
Epoxy grout shall have a maximum early age height change of 4.0% expansion, and
shall have no shrinkage (0.0%) in accordance with ASTM C 827, (modified for epoxy
grouts by using an indicator ball with a specific gravity between 0.9 and 1.1).
Epoxy grout shall have a negligible (less than 0.0006 in/in) length change after
hardening, and a coefficient of thermal expansion less than 18x10-6 in/in F when tested
according to ASTM C 531.
The epoxy grout shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 9,000 psi in 24 hours
and 13,000 psi in seven days when tested in accordance with ASTM C 579, method B.
The mixed epoxy grout shall have a minimum working life of 90 to 120 minutes at 70
degrees F.
The effective bearing area shall be a minimum of 95 percent EBA in accordance with
ASTM C 1339.
The chemical formulation of the epoxy grout shall be that recommended by the
manufacturer for the particular application. Do not reduce aggregate loading or add
solvents to increase flowability.
Non-shrink epoxy grout shall have the following minimum properties when tested at 7
Days:
01/2023 GROUTING
254.07.100 PAGE 03 60 00 - 7
Minimum bond strength to concrete of 3,000 psi per ASTM C 882 modified.
Minimum bond strength to steel of 1,700 psi per ASTM C 882 modified.
Minimum flexural strength of 2,500 psi per ASTM C 580.
Minimum tensile strength of 2,000 psi per ASTM C 307.
Non-shrink epoxy grout shall be Five Star DP Epoxy Grout by Five Star Products,
Inc., Sikadur 42 Grout-Pak by Sika Corporation, or equal.
EPOXY ANCHOR GROUT
Application: Anchor bolts and reinforcing steel required to be set in grout that is not in
high temperature or high fire risk areas.
Epoxy anchor grout shall conform to ASTM C 881, Type IV, Class A, B, and C, Grade 3
with the exception of gel time.
Heat deflection temperature shall be a minimum of 139 °F per ASTM D 648.
Manufacturer shall certify that the epoxy anchor grout will maintain 90 percent of its
strength up to a temperature of 125 °F.
Grout shall come in a 2 chambered cartridge with a metering system that provides the
proper ratio of hardener and resin. The grout shall also come with a static mixer nozzle
to thoroughly mix the hardener and resin together.
Epoxy anchor grout shall be capable of being used in submersed applications once
cured.
Minimum compressive strength shall be 12,000 psi per ASTM D 695.
Overhead anchors and anchors in fire-resistive construction shall be cast-in anchors.
Embedment of adhesive anchors/rebar shall be deep enough to develop the
anchor/rebar. Embedment shall not exceed 67 percent of the member depth.
Epoxy anchor grout shall be Epcon C6+ by ITW Ramset/Red Head, Power-Fast
Epoxy Injection Gel by Powers Fasteners, RE 500 by Hilti, or equal.
TOPPING GROUT AND CONCRETE/GROUT FILL
A. Where fill is thicker than 3-inches, structural concrete as indicated in Section 03 31 00 -
Cast-in-Place Concrete, may be used when accepted by ENGINEER.
B. Grout for topping of slabs and concrete/grout fill for built-up surfaces of tank, channel,
and basin bottoms shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate,
water, and admixtures proportioned and be mixed as indicated. Materials and
procedures indicated for normal concrete in Section 03 31 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete,
shall apply unless indicated otherwise.
C. Topping grout and concrete/grout fill shall contain a minimum of 564 pounds of cement
per cubic yard with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.45. Topping grout in clarifiers
shall contain between 750 and 800 pounds of cement per cubic yard with a maximum
water cement ratio of 0.42.
01/2023 GROUTING
254.07.100 PAGE 03 60 00 - 8
D. Coarse aggregate shall be graded as follows:
U.S. Standard Sieve Size Percent By Weight Passing
1/2 in 100
3/8 in 90-100
No. 4 20-55
No. 8 5-30
No. 16 0-10
No. 30 0

E. Final mix design shall be as determined by trial mix design as indicated in Section 03 30
00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
F. Topping grout and concrete grout/fill shall contain air-entraining agent per Section 03 30
00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
G. Strength: Minimum compressive strength of topping grout and concrete/grout fill at 28
Days shall be 4,000 psi.
CONSISTENCY
A. The consistency of grouts shall be that necessary to completely fill the space to be
grouted for the particular application. Dry pack consistency is defined such that the
grout is plastic and moldable but will not flow. Where "dry pack" is called for in the
Contract Documents, it shall mean a grout of that consistency; the type of grout to be
used shall be as indicated herein for the particular application.
B. The slump for topping grout and concrete/grout fill shall be adjusted to match placement
and finishing conditions but shall not exceed 4-inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
PREPARATION
Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from
concrete surfaces by brushing, hammering, chipping or other similar means until sound,
clean concrete surface is achieved.
Rough concrete lightly, but not enough to interfere with placement of grout.
Remove foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout.
Align, level, and maintain final positioning of components to be grouted.
GENERAL
CONTRACTOR shall arrange for the manufacturer of prepackaged grouts to provide on-
Site technical assistance within 72 hours of request, as part of the WORK.
Grout shall not be placed until base concrete or masonry has attained its design
strength, unless authorized otherwise by ENGINEER.
01/2023 GROUTING
254.07.100 PAGE 03 60 00 - 9
When cementitious grouts are used on concrete surfaces, the concrete surface shall be
saturated with water for 24 hours prior to placement. Upon completion of the saturation
period, excess water shall be removed. Concrete substrate shall not be wet prior to
placement of epoxy grouts.
Surface preparation, curing, and protection of cement grout shall be in accordance with
Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. The finish of the grout surface shall match
that of the adjacent concrete unless otherwise indicated.
Surfaces that will be in contact with grout shall be free of dirt, loose rust, oil, wax,
grease, curing compounds, laitance, loose concrete, and other deleterious materials.
Shade the WORK from sunlight for at least 24 hours before and 48 hours after grouting.
Contact the grout manufacturer's representative for assistance on hot and cold weather
grouting techniques and precautions if applicable.
GROUTING PROCEDURES
General: Mixing, surface preparation, handling, placing, consolidation, curing, and other
means of execution for prepackaged grouts shall be done according to the instructions
and recommendations of the manufacturer.
Structural, equipment, tank, and piping support bases shall be grouted, unless indicated
otherwise.
The original concrete shall be blocked out or finished off a sufficient distance below
the plate to provide for a minimum one-inch thickness of grout or other thickness if
indicated.
After the base plate has been set in position at the proper elevation by steel wedges
or double nuts on the anchor bolts, the space between the bottom of the plate and
the original pour of concrete shall be filled with non-shrink-type grout through a
headbox of appropriate size. The mixture shall be of a fluid consistency and poured
continuously into the space between the plate and the base concrete. Forms for
grout shall be tight against retaining surfaces, and joints shall be sealed as
recommended by the grout manufacturer to be liquid-tight. Forms shall be coated as
recommended by the grout manufacturer for easy form release. Where this method
of placement is not practical or where required by ENGINEER, alternate grouting
methods shall be submitted for acceptance by ENGINEER.
Concrete equipment pads for equipment bases that will be epoxy-grouted shall be
sized so that, when the equipment base is fully grouted, the epoxy grout is stopped
not less than 4-inches from the edge of the pad.
Drilled Anchors and Reinforcing Bars
General
a. Drilled anchors and reinforcing bars shall be installed in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions. Holes shall be roughened with a brush on a
power drill, and cleaned. Drilled anchors shall not be installed until the concrete
has reached the required 28 Day compressive strength. Anchors shall not be
loaded until the grout has reached its indicated strength in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
01/2023 GROUTING
254.07.100 PAGE 03 60 00 - 10
b. CONTRACTOR shall identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded
items prior to drilling holes. Care shall be exercised in coring and drilling to avoid
damaging existing reinforcing or embedded items. Notify ENGINEER if
reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Take
precautions as necessary to avoid damaging prestressing tendons, electrical and
communications conduit, and piping.
Epoxy Adhesive Anchors
a. Grout shall be proportioned and mixed with automatic equipment.
b. Unless otherwise indicated, embedment shall be sufficient to develop the
ultimate tensile strength of the anchor or reinforcing bar per the manufacturer's
ICBO/ES report, but shall not be less than 8 diameters for threaded rod or 12
diameters for reinforcing or smooth bars.
c. Holes required for grouting shall be blown or vacuumed clean and are to be free
of dust and standing water. Horizontal holes for grouting are to be drilled at a
slight downward angle and with the inserted dowel or bolt bent to match.
Cement Based Non-Shrink Grout
a. In places of high temperature or fire hazard, anchor bolts shall be grouted in
using cement based non-shrink grout, Class I.
b. Unless otherwise indicated, embedment shall be sufficient to develop the
ultimate tensile strength of the anchor or reinforcing bar per the manufacturer's
ICBO/ES report, but shall not be less than 16 diameters for threaded rod or 24
diameters for reinforcing or smooth bars.
c. When the bolt diameter is one-inch or less, the hole diameter should be a
minimum of 2-inches. When the bolt diameter is greater than one-inch, the hole
diameter should be at least twice the bolt diameter.
d. Drilled holes shall be saturated with water for not less than 24 hours before
installation of anchor/rod/rebar.
e. The non-shrink grout should be placed in the holes in a non-sag (trowelable)
consistency. The grout should be placed in the holes before the anchor and then
the anchor inserted and vibrated to ensure proper coverage.
Topping Grout and Concrete/Grout Fill
Mechanical, electrical, and finish WORK shall be completed prior to placement of
topping or concrete/grout fill. To ensure bonding to the base slab, the base slab
shall be given an exposed aggregate finish. Alternatively, where accepted by
ENGINEER, the base slab shall be given a roughened textured surface by a close-
spaced rake while the surface is green. After curing, high pressure washing shall
expose the aggregates and produce not less than a 3/16-inch amplitude roughness.
Jackhammers or chipping hammers shall not be used.
The minimum thickness of grout topping and concrete/grout fill shall be one-inch.
Where the finished surface of concrete/grout fill is to form an intersecting angle of
less than 45 degrees with the concrete surface it is to be placed against, a key shall
be formed in the concrete surface at the intersection point. The key shall be a
minimum of 3-1/2 inches wide by 1-1/2 inches deep.
The base slab shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted to saturated surface dry
(SSD) condition per the International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) -- Technical
Guide for Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers,
Coatings, and Polymer Overlays, prior to placing topping and fill. No topping
concrete shall be placed until the slab is completely free from standing pools or
ponds of water. A thin coat of neat cement grout shall be broomed into the surface
01/2023 GROUTING
254.07.100 PAGE 03 60 00 - 11
of the slab just before topping or fill placement. The neat cement grout shall not be
allowed to dry before topping placement. If it does dry, it must be immediately
removed using wet stiff brooms and reapplied. The topping and fill shall be
compacted by rolling or thorough tamping, brought to established grade, and floated.
Grouted fill for tank and basin bottoms where scraping mechanisms are to be
installed shall be screeded by blades attached to the revolving mechanism of the
equipment in accordance with the procedures outlined by the equipment
manufacturer after the grout is brought to the established grade. Coat surface with
evaporation retardant as needed to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks.
Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the
slab to the top, for the full width of the placement.
The surface shall be tested with a straight edge to detect high and low spots that
shall be immediately eliminated. When the topping or fill has hardened sufficiently, it
shall be steel troweled to a smooth surface free from pinholes and other
imperfections. An approved type of mechanical trowel may be used as an assist in
this operation, but the last pass over the surface shall be by hand-troweling. During
finishing, no water, dry cement, or mixture of dry cement and sand shall be applied to
the surface.
As soon as topping or fill finishing is completed, coat surface with curing compound.
After the topping is set and sufficiently hard in clarifiers and where required by
ENGINEER, the tank shall be filled with sufficient water to cover the entire floor for
14 days.
CONSOLIDATION
Grout shall be placed in such a manner, for the consistency necessary for each
application, to assure that the space to be grouted is completely filled.
CURING
Cement based grouts shall be cured per 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete and per the
manufacturer's recommendations.

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 GROUTING
254.07.100 PAGE 03 60 00 - 12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
03/2023 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
254.07.100 PAGE 04 22 00 - 1
SECTION 04 22 00
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This Section covers reinforced unit masonry and appurtenant work.
RELATED WORK
Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-place Concrete
Section 07 21 00 Insulation
Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICA CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)
ACI SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual
ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
ACI 530.1 Specifications for Masonry Structures
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel
Wire
ASTM A 951 Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint
Reinforcement
ASTM A 1064 Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
ASTM C 90 Standard Specification for Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units
ASTMC 140 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete
Masonry Units and Related Units
ASTM C 144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C 207 Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
ASTM C 270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
ASTM C 404 Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout
ASTM C 476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry
ASTM C 578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation
ASTM C 652 Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units
Made From Clay or Shale)
03/2023 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
254.07.100 PAGE 04 22 00 - 2
ASTM C 1019 Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout
ASTM C 1314 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry
Prisms
ASTM C 1384 Standard Specification for Admixtures for Masonry Mortars
ASTM D 226 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing
ASTM D 2000 Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive
Applications
ASTM D 2287 Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and
Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds
ASTM E 514 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage
Through Masonry
ASTM E 518 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry
NATIONAL CONCRETE MASONRY ASSOCIATION (NCMA)
NCMA-TEK 45 Removal of Stains from Concrete Masonry Walls
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of masonry unit,
accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type
complies with specified requirements and color samples. Include in the submittal
dimensioned drawings for each type of block to be used on the project including, but not
limited to, standard field block, lintel block, end block, caps, etc. Submit certificates
showing compliance to the specifications for reinforcing steel, manufacturer’s literature
for anchor ties and any other accessories used, grout and mortar mix design, samples
for mortar color selection, and manufacturer’s literature for mortar and grout admixtures
used along with CONTRACTOR’s proposed usage details.
Three sample specimens of the masonry units proposed for incorporation into the project
shall be submitted to ENGINEER.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of
reinforcement bars, complying with ACI SP-66. Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent
bars, stirrup, spacing, lateral ties, and other components required for fabrication and
placement of masonry reinforcement.
Submit product data for premolded control joint strips and joint sealant.
A minimum 4-ft square free-standing sample panel shall be prepared for approval before
starting masonry work. The panel shall remain at the site for reference until masonry
work is completed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Masonry units shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 140.
03/2023 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
254.07.100 PAGE 04 22 00 - 3
CONTRACTOR shall have mortar and grout tested to assure compliance with the
Specifications and the governing codes by a testing laboratory approved by ENGINEER.
The test reports shall be submitted to ENGINEER.
Tests shall be taken at the following times:
At commencement of masonry work, at least 2 sam ples each of mortar and grout
shall be taken on 3 successive days.
At any change in materials or job conditions, at least 2 samples of each modified
material, grout and mortar shall be tested.
Make four (4) random tests each of mortar and grout. The random test samples
shall be taken when requested by ENGINEER.
The costs of tests shall be paid by CONTRACTOR as part of the work. The
costs of additional tests, when required to verify compliance when requested by
OWNER or ENGINEER, will be paid by OWNER. When tests do no verify
compliance, the cost of additional tests shall be paid by CONTRACTOR.
Samples shall be stored in a moist environment until tested, unless directed
otherwise by ENGINEER or the testing laboratory. Testing for mortar shall be in
accordance with ASTM C 270. Testing for grout shall be in accordance with ASTM
C 1019.
CONTRACTOR shall test the masonry units to assure compliance with the specifications
and governing codes. Testing will be by a laboratory approved by ENGINEER.
Testing will be made of the following items:
At the time of the construction of the sample panel, at least 3 masonry units shall
be tested for each type of block, except separate tests are not required for block
which only varies by texture.
At any change in materials during construction, at least 3 masonry units shall be
tested.
Additional sets of at least 3 masonry units shall be tested whenever, in the
judgment of ENGINEER, additional tests are necessary to determine the quality
of the material.
CONTRACTOR shall submit a letter of certification from the masonry unit
supplier at the time of, or prior to, delivery of the materials to the site that the
materials used in construction are representative of the materials used to
construct the prisms.
The masonry units shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 140
Whenever required under the provisions of the Building Code, the work shall be subject
to inspection by a Special Inspector selected by ENGINEER and approved by the local
building code representative having jurisdiction. Costs of such inspections will be paid
by OWNER. The Special Inspector will work under the supervision of ENGINEER.
Cold weather construction shall be per ACI 530.1, IBC Section 2104.3, and the local
code requirements, whichever is more stringent.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to deliver, handle, and store masonry units by
means which will prevent mechanical damage and deterioration due to moisture,
temperature changes, and corrosion. CONTRACTOR shall provide protection which will
limit moisture absorption of concrete masonry units to the maximum percentage
03/2023 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
254.07.100 PAGE 04 22 00 - 4
specified for Type I units for the average relative humidity at the project site, as reported
by the nearest National Weather Service station.
Cementitious materials shall be stored off the ground and protected from moisture.
Aggregates shall be stored in a manner which will preserve grading characteristics.
Masonry accessories shall be stored to prevent corrosion, dirt accumulation, and other
deterioration.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Cold Weather Protection: Do no lay masonry units when outside air temperature is
below 40 degrees F.
Grouted construction: On any day when the minimum anticipated nighttime
temperature is 32 degrees F or less, in addition to complying with general
procedures above, grout materials shall be heated to 90 degrees F to produce an in-
place grout temperature of not less than 70 degrees F at end of work day. Protective
blankets or enclosures shall remain in place for not less than 48 hours after
placement of masonry units.
Water: Water for mortar or grout shall not be heated to more than 160 degrees F.
Hot-Weather Protection: Cover or shade masonry units and mortar materials and use
cool water for mortar whenever ambient air temperature is 90 degrees F or greater. At
air temperatures of 85 degrees F or above, if relative humidity is less than 30 percent or
wind is in excess of 15 miles per hour, provide protection by immediately covering newly
constructed walls by providing windbreaks, or by using fog spray to reduce rate of
evaporation.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for reinforced unit masonry. Full
compensation for all reinforced unit masonry shall be considered as included in the
contract unit or lump sum bid prices for the various items of the contract to which
reinforced unit masonry relates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards for types required, and as follows:
Unit, Grade and Type: Masonry units shall conform to the requirements of the
following table:

Unit ASTM Grade Type Min Net Area(1)
Compressive
Strength (psi)
Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) C 90 Medium Weight per Drawings 2,000
Note: (1) Average of 3 units

03/2023 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
254.07.100 PAGE 04 22 00 - 5
Size: The size of masonry units shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Special shapes and sizes shall be provided as required, whether or not specifically
indicated on the Contract Drawings as special.
Surfaces: Special surface texture or architectural faces shall be provided where
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Color: Where the finished surface will be visible, masonry units shall have colors as
indicated on the Contract Drawings. Where colors are not specified, OWNER shall
determine colors to be provided.
MATERIALS
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II or IIA.
Type III may be substituted during cold-weather construction.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
Aggregate for Mortar: Sand conforming to ASTM C 144.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
Admixture for grout, if used, shall be Sika Grout Aid by Sika Corp.,or approved equal.
Water: Clean and potable.
Masonry cleaner shall be a non-acidic cleaner, SafEtch by Prosoco, Inc., or approved
equal.
Accelerating Admixture: Non-chloride admixture for use in mortar mixes during cold
weather, proportioned and mixed to comply with directions of manufacturer.
Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of ASTM
C 1384 and the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable.
MORSET by Grace Construction Products
or approved equal
Water-repellant and efflorescence control admixture.
All exterior masonry units shall utilize a water-repellant and efflorescence control
admixture as recommended by the manufacturer to obtain ASTM E 514 test
extended to 72 hours, class E rating.
Admixtures shall be MasterPel 240 (Rheopel Plus) by BASF, Eucon Blocktite by
Euclid Chemical Company, or approved equal.
Integral water repellant admixture is required for mortar for exterior masonry units and
shall be MasterPel 240MA (Rheopel Plus Mortar Admixture) by BASF, Blocktite
Mortar Admixture by Euclid Chemical Company, or approved equal.
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
Reinforcing Bars shall be in accordance with Section 03 20 00 – Concrete
Reinforcement.
03/2023 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
254.07.100 PAGE 04 22 00 - 6
Joint Reinforcement and Anchorage Materials: shall comply with ASTM A 951 and the
following general requirements for materials required in joint reinforcement and
anchorage devices.
Steel wire: ASTM A 1064.

Zinc coating: ASTM A 641 Class 1.
Application: Use at interior locations.
Joint Reinforcement: Provide welded-wire units prefabricated into straight lengths of not
less than 10 feet, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods, and as
follows:
Width: Approximately 1-1/2 inches less than nominal wall width, providing not less
than 1/2 inch mortar coverage on each exposure.
Wire sizes:
Side rod diameter: 0.1483 inch.
Cross rod diameter: 0.1483 inch.
Configuration:
Applications of single unit width: Ladder design, cross rods at not more than 16
inches on center.
Corners: Provide prefabricated L- and T-shaped units.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
Premolded Control Joints Strips: Joints designed to fit standard sash block and to
maintain lateral stability in masonry wall, of size and configuration indicated or as
required for conditions, and as follows:
Styrene-butadiene rubber compound complying with ASTM D 2000, 2AA-805, or
Polyvinyl chloride complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC 654-4.
Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt).
Joint Sealant: Provide joint sealants in accordance with Section 07 92 00
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
General: Do not use admixtures unless indicated and approved by ENGINEER. Do not
use calcium chloride in mortar or grout mixture.
Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix ingredients in a mechanical batch mixer; comply
with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water content.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 and IBC Section 2103.7, Proportion
Specification, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated.
Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement and lime.
Use Type S mortar for reinforced masonry. Compressive strength: 1800 psi @ 28
days.
03/2023 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
254.07.100 PAGE 04 22 00 - 7
Mortar for use with colored masonry units shall have the integral color as approved
by OWNER.
Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476 and IBC 2103.10 for grout used in construction of unit
masonry elements. Use grout of consistency indicated or as required at time of
placement to fill completely all spaces intended to receive grout. Compressive strength:
2000 psi @ 28 days.
Use fine grout in spaces less than 2 inches in least horizontal dimension, unless
otherwise indicated.
Use coarse grout in spaces 2 inches or more in least horizontal dimension, unless
otherwise indicated.
Mortar for use with colored masonry units shall have the integral color as approved
by OWNER.
MASONRY SEALERS
Sealers shall be as noted in Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Finishes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
GENERAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
Concrete Masonry Units: Do not wet concrete masonry units prior to laying.
Measurements for mortar and grout shall be accurately made. Shovel measurements
are not acceptable. Mortar proportions shall be accurately controlled and maintained.
Reinforcing: Before placing masonry reinforcing, remove loose rust, dirt, and other
coatings.
Masonry Thickness: Build masonry elements to full thickness shown.
Build single-wythe walls to actual thickness of masonry units, using units of size
indicated.
Chases and Recesses: Build masonry to accommodate the work of other trades,
including chases and recesses as shown or required. Provide not less than 8 inches of
masonry between jambs of openings and chases and recesses.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed in masonry. After installation of
equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately adjacent to opening.
Cutting Masonry Units: Use motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work.
Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units.
Add insulation to open cells if required on the Contract Ddrawings. See Section 07 21
00 - Insulation.
Work shall be performed in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1, the latest edition of
the IBC, and local governing codes for reinforced concrete hollow-unit masonry.
03/2023 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
254.07.100 PAGE 04 22 00 - 8
CONTRACTOR shall set or embed anchors, bolts, reglets, sleeves, conduits, and other
items as required.
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances in vertical
elements, including surfaces of walls, columns, and arises:
1/4 inch to 10 feet
3/8 inch to one story height, or 20 feet, whichever is less, except 1/4 inch for external
corners, expansion joints, and other highly conspicuous vertical elements
1/2 inch for 40 feet or more
Plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 1/2 inch maximum, for vertical alignment of head
joints.
Variation from Level: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances for bed joints
and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous
horizontal elements:
1/4 inch in one bay or in 20 feet maximum
1/2 inch in 40 feet or more
Variation from Plan Lines: Do not exceed the following horizontal construction
tolerances for related portions of columns, walls, and partitions:
3/8 inch in any bay of 16 feet maximum
1/2 inch in 32 feet or more
Variation in Cross Section: Do not exceed the following masonry elements:
Minus 1/4 inch
Plus 1/2 inch
Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances
for thickness of mortar joints:
Bed joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch
Head joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch
MASONRY CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL
Layout: Lay out masonry for accurate pattern bond, for uniform joint widths, and for
accurate location of specific features before beginning actual construction. Avoid use of
masonry units of less than 1/2 size. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch
horizontal face dimensions at corners and jambs.
Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in 1/2 running bond with vertical joints in each
course centered on units in course above and below except where other bonds are
indicated at special features.
Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond.
Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners.
03/2023 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
254.07.100 PAGE 04 22 00 - 9
Reinforced Concrete Unit Masonry: Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities.
Keep cavities clear of mortar, including bed area of first course, to provide minimum
clear dimension indicated, to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical
reinforcement bars, and to provide direct grout contact with supporting surfaces.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Lay masonry in proper sequence to avoid toothing.
Rack walls back in each course at end of each day. Before resuming, clean exposed
surfaces and remove loose masonry units and mortar.
Built-in Work: As work progresses, build in items indicated for installation in masonry,
filling around built-in items solidly with masonry.
Fill spaces between metal frames and masonry elements solidly with mortar, unless
otherwise indicated.
Install lintels of types indicated at all openings.
Bearing: Provide not less than 8 inches of bearing at each jamb unless otherwise
indicated.
Reinforcement: At masonry openings greater than one foot in width, install
horizontal joint reinforcement in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8 inches apart
immediately above lintel and immediately below sill. Extend reinforcement which is
in addition to required continuous joint reinforcement not less than 24 inches beyond
jambs of the opening, except at control joints.
Formwork: Provide temporary formwork and shores as required for temporary support
of reinforced masonry elements. Construct formwork to shape line, and dimensions
shown. Make sufficiently tight to avoid leakage of mortar and grout.
Brace, tie, and support as required to maintain position and shape during
construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other reasonable temporary loads that may
be placed on them during construction.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
Lay hollow masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
Bed webs in mortar in starting course and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters,
and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be grouted or filled with concrete.
Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond
alignment. Except as otherwise indicated, maintain joint widths of 3/8 inch.
Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are concealed or covered by other materials,
unless otherwise indicated.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless
otherwise indicated.
03/2023 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
254.07.100 PAGE 04 22 00 - 10
Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not
pound corners of jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position.
If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar.
HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT OF SINGLE-WYTHE WALLS
General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement for all single-wythe masonry
walls, unless otherwise indicated. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches.
Install joint reinforcing in mortar joints at not more than 16 inches on center vertically.
Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints.
Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by means of prefabricated L- and T-
shaped sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for
continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special
conditions.
INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT
Preparation: Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on Contract
Drawings or final shop drawings. Do not use bars with cross section reduced due to
excessive rusting and other causes.
Placement: Position reinforcement bars accurately at spacings indicated. Support and
secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal bars may be placed as the work
progresses. Provide not less than the greater of either the bar diameter or 1 inch clear
between bars. For columns, piers, and pilasters, provide a clear distance between
vertical bars as indicated, but not less than 1-1/2 times the nominal bar diameter or 1-1/2
inches, whichever is greater.
Splicing: Provide lapped splices at locations shown; do not splice at other points or by
other methods, unless approved by ENGINEER. Provide not less than minimum lap
indicated, or as required by governing code.
GROUTING
Grouting Technique:
Provide minimum clear dimension of 2 inches and minimum clear area of 8 square
inches in vertical cores to be grouted. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying
concrete masonry units, extending above elevation of maximum pour height as
required for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar
diameters or 10 feet, whichever is less.
Grout shall be placed in all open areas of the masonry block as specified herein.
Lay masonry units to maximum pour height, not to exceed 4 feet.
Pour grout using chute or container with spout. Vibrate grout during placement.
Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring operation for more than 1 hour.
Terminate pour 1-1/2 inches below top of highest course in pour, except at tops of
walls.
03/2023 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
254.07.100 PAGE 04 22 00 - 11
Stop grout in vertical cells 1-1/2 inches below bond beam course. Place horizontal
reinforcement in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place
grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beams.
REPAIR AND POINTING
Repair: Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained,
or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new
units to match adjoining units, and install in fresh mortar or grout pointed to eliminate
evidence of replacement.
Pointing: During the tooling of mortar joints, enlarge any holes or voids except weep
holes and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints, including corners, openings, and
adjacent work, to provide a neat and uniform appearance.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Clean masonry as follows after mortar is thoroughly set and cured:
Remove large mortar particles by hand, using wooden paddles and nonmetallic
scrape hoes or chisels.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel, leaving half of panel uncleaned for
comparison.
Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with directions of masonry manufacturer and
as recommended by NCMA in Tek Bulletin No. 45.
Protection: CONTRACTOR shall protect all masonry until such time as the Work is
completed and accepted by ENGINEER.
FINISH
Block shall be finished as per Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Finishes.

- END OF SECTION –

03/2023 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
254.07.100 PAGE 04 22 00 - 12

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

01/2023 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS
254.07.100 PAGE 05 45 00 - 1
SECTION 05 45 00
MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS (PIPE SUPPORTS)
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This Section covers materials and installation of mechanical metal supports, pipe
supports, hangers, guides, anchors and appurtenances as specified and indicated.
CONTRACTOR shall provide mechanical metal supports in accordance with this Section
whether shown on the Contract Drawings or not.
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metals
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes
Section 33 05 03 Copper Pipe
Section 33 05 05 Ductile Iron Pipe
Section 33 05 07.1 PVC Pressure Pipe (ASMT 1785)
Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances
Section 40 05 13.13 Steel Process Piping
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTING
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials Design and Manufacture
MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application
MSS SP-89 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Fabrication and Installation
Practices
MSS SP-127 Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design,
Selection, Application
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)
ASME B 31.1 Power Piping
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A 47 Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A 48 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A 123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products.
ASTM A 153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and
01/2023 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS
254.07.100 PAGE 05 45 00 - 2
Steel Hardware
ASTM A 575 Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality,
M-Grades
ASTM A 576 Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought,
Special Quality
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
CONTRACTOR shall submit complete shop drawings of mechanical supports, pipe
supports, hangers and guides. Provide scaled shop drawings showing locations of the
supports and detailed drawings for each support. Identify each type of hanger or
support by the manufacturer’s part number of figure on the drawing.
Provide installation drawings and manufacturer’s catalog information on each type of
hanger and support.
Provide structural calculations for special supports and anchors, stamped and signed by
a professional engineer registered in the State of Utah.
PART 2 MATERIALS
GENERAL
All pipe hanger and supports shall be manufactured to comply with MSS-SP-58, MSS-
SP-569, MSS-SP-89 except as modified herein. Where applicable, design and
manufacture must also conform to ANSI/ASME B31.1. Supports for plumbing or fire
piping shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the applicable plumbing or fire
code and the requirements of the local jurisdiction.
Hangers, supports, anchors and restraints must be designed in accordance with MSS-
SP-127 to withstand all static and dynamic loading conditions which act upon the piping
system and associated equipment. Piping supports and equipment must be considered
as a total system and appropriate balance calculations made to determine load forces at
critical stress points. Loading conditions to be considered may include, but are not
limited to:
The total load of pipe, fittings, valves, insulation and any expected contents of the
pipe.
Thermal expansion and contraction
Stress from cycling of equipment or process.
Vibration transmitted to or from equipment or terminal connection.
Wind, snow or ice loading on outdoor piping
Loading due to seismic forces
Static and dynamic forces at points of attachments must be considered to help ensure
structural integrity of buildings or equipment. Hanger and supports must be selected so
as to minimize the effect of piping system loading on the structure.
In general, piping shall be supported from structural members, such as walls, beams,
columns and slabs, using approved structural attachments. In situations where
01/2023 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS
254.07.100 PAGE 05 45 00 - 3
approved attachments cannot be used, alternative attachments or substructure
assemblies must receive approval by ENGINEER prior to installation. Prior approval by
ENGINEER must be given before any cutting or drilling of building structural steel.
Damage to the structure through welding, cutting or drilling will not be permitted if it
reduces the structures strength below the established safety factor for the structure.
Any additional structural steel required to properly support piping or equipment shall be
furnished and installed by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to OWNER.
SUPPORT MATERIALS
Pipe supports, hangers, guides, etc. shall be hot-dip galvanized carbon steel, unless
noted otherwise on the Drawings. Steel shall be in accordance with ASTM A 36, ASTM
A 575, or ASTM A 576. Hot-dip galvanizing shall be in accordance with ASTM A 123 or
ASTM A 153. Bases, rollers, and anchors shall be steel as described above or may be
cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48. Pipe clamps shall be steel as described above or
may be malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47.
Submerged supports, as well as piping in hydraulic structures within 24 inches of the
high water level, shall have supports, including hardware and anchors constructed of
Type 316 stainless steel, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
Piping in chemical or corrosive areas shall have supports, including hardware and
anchors constructed of Type 316 stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP),
unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
Supports fabricated from other materials specified on the Drawings shall have a
protective coating in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Painting
and Coatings.
FLOOR MOUNTED SUPPORTS
Floor mounted pipe supports shall be the adjustable saddle support with stanchion, base
and U-bolt or adjustable flange support type with stanchion and base. Pipe supports
with stanchion and base plate shall be sized for the pipe or mechanical appurtenance it
supports. All pipe supports shall have a 1-inch-high grouted pad to be used as a
leveling base. Pipe supports shall be secured to the floor. An EPDM Rubber insulation
pad shall be provided between the pipe and the U-Bolt.
SPRING-TYPE HANGERS
Spring-type hangers shall be provided for piping subject to vibration or vertical
expansion/contraction such as engine exhaust piping. Design the spring-type hangers
per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
CONCENTRATED LOADS
Concentrated loads, such as meters, valves, and equipment, on PVC piping systems
shall have supports on each side of the concentrated load.
CONCRETE ANCHORS
Anchors shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00 – Miscellaneous Metals.
01/2023 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS
254.07.100 PAGE 05 45 00 - 4
MANUFACTURERS
Mechanical Metal Support (pipe support) manufacturers shall be Anvil International
Inc., B-Line by Eaton (Cooper Industries), Utility Coatings & Fabrication, Piping
Technology & Products, Inc. (PT&P), or approved equal. To be considered an
approved equal, materials must be of similar diameter, thickness, and strength to the
product specified
PIPE SUPPORTS FOR COPPER PRELUBE PIPE
Submit, furnish and install acceptable pipe support clamps for copper pipes. For
attaching (copper) well prelube water pipe to DIP and connections to CLA valves, use
Erico ET 0050HD, or acceptable equal. Submit acceptable attachments to attach
(copper) well prelube pipe and valves to wellhead
PART 3 EXECUTION
GENERAL
Mechanical metal supports, pipe supports, hangers, guides, etc. shall be installed per
the manufacturer’s instructions and ASME B31.1 – Power Piping.
Pipe supports shall be positioned in order to produce an orderly, neat piping system.
Hanger rods shall be vertical without offsets.
Hangers shall be adjusted to line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage
and venting as close to ceilings or roods as possible and without interference with other
work.
Hangers shall be installed in a manner to prevent obstructing ladders, manhole covers,
and access hatches.
Set embedded inserts accurately in position and support them rigidly before concrete is
placed and prevent displacement during and after placement of concrete.
Provide separate hangers or supports at valves, meters, elbows, tees, and other
equipment. Provide separate hangers on each both sides of each non-rigid joint or
flexible coupling.
Install piping without springing, forcing, or stressing the pipe or any connecting valves,
pumps, or other pipe to which the pipe is connected.
Hangers and supports for rigid plastic pipe shall be provided with a support shield to
spread the load bearing surface.
Use of wire hangers, perforated strap, hanging from unreinforced metal deck and
cellular roof deck are not permitted.
Repair or replace metal items damaged during installation. Follow the manufacturer’s
procedures for repairing damaged surfaces.
Galvanizing Field Repairs
01/2023 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS
254.07.100 PAGE 05 45 00 - 5
Surface preparation shall consist of removing oil, grease, soil, and soluble material
by cleaning with water and detergent (SSPC SP1) followed by brush-off blast
cleaning (SSPC SP7) over an area extending at least 4 inches into the undamaged
area.
The coating shall be applied to at least 3 mils dry film thickness and shall be Zinc-
Clad XI by Sherwin-Williams, Galvax by Alvin Products, Galvite by ZRC
Worldwide, or approved equal.
SUPPORT LOCATION AND SPACING
Supports for horizontal piping shall be spaced to prevent excessive sag, bending and
stresses in the piping. Spacing shall not exceed the maximum indicated spans.
Maximum spans indicated in the tables below are for ambient temperatures or the
temperatures listed for the materials and pipe wall thicknesses shown. Adjust the span
spacing for different temperatures and/or pipe wall thicknesses per the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Install pipe supports on horizontal and vertical runs at the spacing shown or detailed on
the Drawings. If no spacing or rod sizes are given on the Drawings or in the
specifications for a particular piping system, use the following tables or the
recommendations of the support or pipe manufacturer.
Support Spacing for Steel Pipe (Section 40 05 13.13 – Steel Process Piping)
Schedule 40 and Schedule 80:

Pipe
Size
(inches)
Maximum Span
Water Service
(feet)
Maximum Span
Vapor Service
(feet)
Minimum Hanger
Rod Size
(inches)
3/8 and smaller 4 5 3/8
1/2 through 1 6 8 3/8
1-1/4 through 2 8 10 3/8
2-1/2 through 3 10 14 1/2
3-1/2 through 4 10 15 5/8
6 12 20 3/4
8 12 24 3/4
Note: These spacings do not apply where span calculations are made or
where there are concentrated loads between supports such as flanges,
valves, specialties, etc. or changes in direction requiring additional
supports.

Support Spacing for Copper Pipe (Section 33 05 03 – Copper Pipe) per MSS-SP-69,
Table 3:

Pipe
Size
(inches)
Maximum Span
Water Service
(feet)
Maximum Span
Vapor Service
(feet)
Minimum Rod
Size
(inches)
1/2 5 6 3/8
3/4 5 7 3/8
1 6 8 3/8
1-1/4 7 9 3/8
1-1/2 8 10 3/8
2 8 11 3/8
01/2023 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS
254.07.100 PAGE 05 45 00 - 6
2-1/2 9 12 1/2
3 10 14 1/2
3-1/2 11 15 1/2
4 12 16 5/8
Note: These spacings do not apply where span calculations are made or
where there are concentrated loads between supports such as flanges,
valves, specialties, etc. or changes in direction requiring additional
supports.

Support Spacing for PVC Pipe (Section 33 05 07.1 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe)
Schedule 40 and Schedule 80. The table below is meant as a general guideline and
it is recommended that the pipe manufacturer be consulted for specific spacing
recommendations relating to their pipe, load conditions, operating temperatures, and
service conditions.

Pipe
Size
(inches)
Maximum Span
Schedule 40
(feet)
Maximum Span
Schedule 80
(feet)
60°F 80°F 100°F 120°F 60°F 80°F 100°F 120°F
1/2 4.5 4.5 4 2.5 5 4.5 4.5 3
3/4 5 4.5 4 2.5 5.5 5 4.5 3
1 5.5 5 4.5 3 6 5.5 5 3.5
1-1/4 5.5 5.5 5 3 6 6 5.5 3.5
1-1/2 6 5.5 5 3.5 6.5 6 5.5 3.5
2 6 5.5 5 3.5 7 6.5 6 4
2-1/2 7 6.5 6 4 7.5 7.5 6.5 4.5
3 7 7 6 4 8 7.5 7 4.5
4 7.5 7 6.5 4.5 9 8.5 7.5 5
6 8.5 8 7.5 5 10 9.5 9 6
8 9 8.5 8 5 11 10.5 9.5 6.5
10 10 9 8.5 5.5 12 11 10 7
12 11.5 10.5 9.5 6.5 13 12 10.5 7.5

Note: These spacings do not apply where span calculations are made or
where there are concentrated loads between supports such as flanges,
valves, specialties, etc. or changes in direction requiring additional supports.
Data taken from Anvil International, Inc. Catalog PH-2006, page PH-213 and
is based on continuous span and for un-insulated line carrying fluids of
specific gravity up to 1.00.

Supports for Ductile Iron Pipe (Section 33 05 05 – Ductile Iron Pipe) should be
installed in locations shown on the Drawings with a minimum of one support per 20-
foot length of pipe. If longer spans are required, the supports should be designed in
accordance with DIPRA – Design of Ductile Iron Pipe on Supports and the pipe
manufacturer’s recommendations. Supports should be cradle type with a saddle
angle of 120 degrees. The table below shows the recommended maximum spans
per US Pipe – Long Span and Bridge Crossing Pipe guidelines.

Pipe Size (inches) Maximum Span Water Service (feet)
6 28
8, 10 30
12, 14 35
01/2023 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS
254.07.100 PAGE 05 45 00 - 7
16, 18 42
20 to 64 45
Note: These spacings do not apply where span calculations are made or
where there are concentrated loads between supports such as flanges,
valves, specialties, etc. or changes in direction requiring additional supports.

Support Spacing for ABS Pipe (Section 33 05 01 – ABS Pipe) Schedule 40. The
table below is meant as a general guideline and it is recommended that the pipe
manufacturer be consulted for specific spacing recommendations relating to their
pipe, load conditions, operating temperatures, and service conditions.

Pipe Size (inches) Maximum Span Schedule 40 (feet)
60°F 80°F 100°F 120°F 140°F
1-1/2 6 6 5.5 3.5 3
2 6 6 5.5 3.5 3
3 7 7 7 4 3.5
4 7.5 7.5 7 4.5 4
6 8.5 8.5 8 5 4.5
Note: Plumbing code may require a maximum horizontal spacing of 4 feet for
all pipe sizes. Verify requirement with the local governing agency.

Support spacing for other pipe materials shall be based on recommendations from
the pipe manufacturer.
Provide sway bracing for hangers where shown on the Drawings. If no bracing is
shown, provide bracing at 10 foot maximum center-to-center intervals.
- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 MECHANICAL METAL SUPPORTS
254.07.100 PAGE 05 45 00 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
02/2023 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
254.07.100 PAGE 05 50 00 - 1
SECTION 05 50 00
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION

RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

REFERENCES

Manual of Steel Construction

ASTM A 36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A 53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A 123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products.
ASMT A 153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and
Steel Hardware
ASTM A 276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
ASTM A 307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60,000 psi Tensile Strength
ASTM A 615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM F 593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws,
and Studs
ASTM F 594 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts

RELATED WORK

02/2023 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
254.07.100 PAGE 05 50 00 - 2
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes
SUBMITTALS

QUALITY ASSURANCE

PART 2 MATERIALS
CARBON STEEL

STAINLESS STEEL

02/2023 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
254.07.100 PAGE 05 50 00 - 3

HOT-DIPPED GALVANIZED

BOLTS

Buried locations
Submerged locations
Locations subject to occasional flooding
Inside hydraulic structures
Chemical handling areas
Inside buried manholes, vaults, and structures that do not have a gravity drain or
sump pump
Inside trenches, containment walls, and curbed areas.

LIFTING EYEBOLTS

THREADED INSERTS

02/2023 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
254.07.100 PAGE 05 50 00 - 4
ADHESIVE ANCHORS

WEDGE ANCHORS

STEEL PIPE

STEEL VENTS

COVERS AND FRAMES

POLYPROPYLENE STEPS

02/2023 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
254.07.100 PAGE 05 50 00 - 5

GRATING

PART 3 EXECUTION
GENERAL

02/2023 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
254.07.100 PAGE 05 50 00 - 6

Surface preparation shall consist of removing oil, grease, soil, and soluble material
by cleaning with water and detergent (SSPC SP1) followed by brush-off blast
cleaning (SSPC SP7) over an area extending at least 4 inches into the undamaged
area.
The coating shall be applied to at least 3 mils dry film thickness and shall be Zinc-
Clad XI by Sherwin-Williams, Galvax by Alvin Products, Galvite by ZRC
Worldwide, or approved equal.

- END OF SECTION -
02/2023 ROUGH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 10 00 - 1
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This Section covers the rough carpentry work which includes wood framing, plates,
joists, rafters, purlins, wood trusses, blocking, furring, backing, nailers, plywood
sheathing, siding, and similar elements, material and accessories, complete and in place
according to the contract documents.
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN PLYWOOD ASSOCIATION (APA)
APA AFG-01 Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Wood Framing
APA Form E30 Design/Construction Guide, Residential and Commercial
AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA)
AWPA M4 Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60 000 psi Tensile Strength
ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM D 3498 Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to
Lumber Framing for Floor Systems
ASTM F 1667 Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and
Staples
AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA)
AWPA U1-13 Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood
NATIONAL FOREST PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (NFOPA)
NFOPA-01 National Design Specification for Wood Construction
NFOPA-02 Manual for Wood Frame Construction
TRUSS PLATE INSTITUTE (TPI)
TPI TPI-85 Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses
TPI QST 88 Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses
Addendum to TPI-85
02/2023 ROUGH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 10 00 - 2
WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA)
WWPA-01 Western Lumber Grading Rules
RELATED WORK
Related work in other sections includes but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Manufacturer’s catalogs showing rough hardware conforming to or equivalent to
hardware indicated on the Drawings.
Structural and Miscellaneous Wood Members: Design analysis and calculations of
fabricated wood trusses shall show design criteria used to accomplish the applicable
analysis. Calculations and drawings shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer
licensed in the State of Utah.
Shop Drawings: Drawings of fabricated wood trusses shall indicate materials and shop
and field erection details including methods of fastening.
Manufacturer's Certificates: Manufacturer's certificates attesting that lumber and material
not normally grade marked or exempt from being grade marked meets the specified
requirements.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Materials shall be delivered to the site in undamaged condition, stored off ground in fully
covered, well ventilated areas, and protected from extreme changes in temperature and
humidity.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Materials and assembly shall be inspected to determine compliance with the Building
Code.
At completion of fabrication of the trusses, the fabricator shall submit a certificate of
compliance to Engineer stating that the work was performed in accordance with the
contract documents.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Rough carpentry shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be included
as part of the various items to which it relates.

02/2023 ROUGH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 10 00 - 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
LUMBER AND SHEATHING
Grading and Marking: Materials shall bear the grademark, stamp or other identifying
marks indicating grades of material and rules or standards under which produced. Such
identifying marks on material shall be in accordance with the rule or standard under
which the material is produced, including requirements for qualifications and authority of
the inspection organization, usage of authorized identification, and information included
in the identification. The inspection agency for lumber shall be certified by the Board of
Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade species used. Except for
plywood and lumber; bundle marking will be permitted in lieu of marking each individual
piece. Surfaces that are to be architecturally exposed to view shall not bear
grademarks, stamps, or other types of identifying marks.
Sizes: Lumber and material sizes shall conform to requirements of the rules or
standards under which produced. Unless otherwise specified, lumber shall be surfaced
on four sides. Size references, unless otherwise specified, are nominal sizes, and actual
sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the standard under which the
product is produced.
Trussed Rafters: Rafters shall be a prefabricated design. Connections shall be made
with light-metal plate-connectors. Light-metal-plate-connected wood trusses shall be
designed in conformance with TPI TPI-85 and fabricated in conformance with TPI QST-
88.
Plywood: Plywood shall be APA performance rated, Grade C-D with exterior glue.
Sheathing for roof without corner bracing of framing shall have a span rating of 16/0 or
greater for supports 16 inches on center and a span rating of 24/0 or greater for supports
24 inches on center.
Wood: Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. Provide seasoned
lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture. For structural framing use No. 2 grade
Douglas-fir or Larch or any species or grade meeting the following requirements:
Fb: 900 psi
E: 1,600,000 psi
TRUSSES
Marking: Each truss shall be marked or have permanently affixed thereto the following
information near the center of the span on the bottom chord: truss manufacturer’s name
and address, design load, and spacing of the trusses.
Connector plates shall be designed by the truss manufacturer in accordance with TPI
Standards. Structural plates shall be structural quality steel and hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 653. Connector plates shall be provided on both sides of the
truss, i.e. 2 plates per joint.
02/2023 ROUGH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 10 00 - 4
PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
The treatment of lumber, timber, and plywood shall meet the requirements of AWPA
UC3B for above ground use only. All products shall bear the appropriate AWPB Quality
Mark. The wood shall then be dried to the moisture content specified and marked with
the word "Dry." Surfaces of lumber that will be exposed shall not be incised. Exposed
areas of treated wood that are cut or drilled after treatment shall receive a field treatment
in accordance with AWPA M4. Wood preservative shall be Wolman AG by Arch
Treatment Technologies, Preserve CA by Viance, or approved equal. Unless
otherwise specified the following items will always be treated:
All wood members used in built-up roofing systems.
All wood members set into concrete regardless of location, including flush-with-deck
wood nailers for roofs.
All wood members used for rough framing of openings in exterior concrete or
masonry walls.
Nailing strips or nailers used in conjunction with roof systems.
ACCESSORIES AND NAILS
Anchor Bolts shall conform to ASTM A 307, size as indicated, complete with nuts and
washers.
Expansion Shields shall be the Type and size best suited for intended use.
Joist Hangers and Truss Clips shall be steel or iron, zinc-coated, size to fit members
where used, sufficient strength to develop the full strength of supported member,
complete with any special nails or bolts required. Framing devices shall be
manufacturer by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc., USP Structural Connectors, or
approved equal.
Nails and Staples shall be of the size and type best suited for purpose and shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM F 1667. For sheathing, length of nails shall be sufficient to
extend 1 inch into supports. In general, 8-penny or larger nails shall be used for nailing
through 1-inch thick lumber and for toe nailing 2-inch thick lumber; 16-penny or larger
nails shall be used for nailing through 2-inch thick lumber. Nails used with treated
lumber and sheathing shall be galvanized.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF FRAMING AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD MEMBERS
General: Members shall be closely fitted, accurately set to required lines and levels, and
rigidly secured in place. Nailing shall be in accordance with the recommended Nailing
Schedule as contained in NFOPA-02. Where detailed nailing requirements are not
specified, nail size and nail spacing shall be sufficient to develop an adequate strength
for the connection without splitting the members. Installation of timber connections shall
conform to applicable requirements of NFOPA-01. Members shall be framed for
passage of ducts and pipes shall be cut, notched, or bored in accordance with
applicable requirements of NFOPA-02. Rafters, purlins, and joists shall be set with
crown edge up. Leveling of joists, beams, and girders on masonry or concrete shall be
with slate or steel; on wood or metal leveling shall be without shims.
02/2023 ROUGH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 10 00 - 5
Cutting and Notching: Wood members shall not be cut, notched or bored more than 1/4
of their depth without adequate and approved reinforcing.
Sill Plates: Sill plates shall be set level and square and anchor bolted at not more than 2
feet 8 inches on centers and not more than 12 inches from end of each piece. A
minimum of two anchors shall be used for each piece. Sill plates and other wood resting
on or embedded in concrete or masonry shall be pressure treated.
Wall Framing: Wall studs shall be installed at a spacing of 16-inches on center unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings. A single plate shall be provided at the bottom and
a double plate at the top of wall framing unless noted otherwise. Joints in the top plates
shall be staggered not less than 4 feet.
Roof Framing or Rafters: Tops of supports or rafters shall form a true plane. Valley,
ridge, and hip members shall be of depth equal to cut on rafters where practicable, but in
no case less than depth of rafters. Valleys, hips, and ridges shall be straight and true
intersections of roof planes. Necessary crickets and watersheds shall be formed.
Rafters, except hip and valley rafters, shall be spiked to wall plate and to ceiling joists
with no less than three 8-penny nails. Rafters shall be toe-nailed to ridge; valley, or hip
members with at least three 8-penny nails. Rafters shall be braced to prevent
movement until permanent bracing, decking or sheathing is installed. Hip and valley
rafters shall be secured to wall plates by clip angles. Openings in roof shall be framed
with headers and trimmers. Unless otherwise indicated, headers carrying more than two
rafters and trimmers supporting headers carrying more than one rafter shall be double.
Hip rafters longer than the available lumber shall be butt jointed and scabbed. Valley
rafters longer than the available lumber shall be double, with pieces lapped not less than
4 feet and well spiked together. Trussed rafters shall be installed in accordance with TPI
TPI-85.
Blocking and Backing: Blocking and backing shall be nominal 2-inch thick material and
shall be provided as necessary to meet the latest codes for lateral bracing and for
application of siding, sheathing, subflooring, wallboard, and other materials or building
items, and to provide fire stopping. Blocking and backing shall be cut to fit between
framing members and rigidly nailed thereto.
INSTALLATION OF SHEATHING
Plywood: Sheathing shall be applied in accordance with APA standards and with edges
1/8 inch apart at side and end joints, and nailed at supported edges at 6 inches on
center and at intermediate supports 12 inches on center. Nailing of edges shall be 3/8
inch from the edges. Wall sheathing shall extend over top and bottom plates, and if
applied horizontally the vertical joints shall be made over supports and staggered. Roof
sheathing shall be applied with long dimension at right angles to supports, end joints
made over supports, and end joints staggered.
INSTALLATION OF ROOF TRUSSES
Contractor shall be responsible for field erection of the trusses, including proper
handling, safety precautions, temporary bracing to prevent toppling, and other
safeguards which are consistent with good workmanship and building erection practices.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable requirements and recommendations of TPI.
02/2023 ROUGH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 10 00 - 6
Contractor shall not field repair, cut or otherwise alter trusses without consulting the
truss manufacturer.
- END OF SECTION -
01/2023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 20 23 - 1
SECTION 06 20 23
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be provided by the Interior Contractor
and shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
This Section covers the finish carpentry work which includes coordination, fabrication, and
installation of all interior exposed wood members shown on Contract Drawings and
specified herein, including but not limited to the following:
Lumber
Standing and Running Trim
Moldings
Wood Shelving
Plastic Laminate
Paneling
Plywood
Miscellaneous Items
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN HARDWOOD ASSOCIATION (AHA)
AHA A 135 Hardboard Plywood
AMERICAN WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI)
AWI 0620 Finish Carpentry/Installation
AMERICAN PLYWOOD ASSOCIATION (APA)
APA AFG-01 Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Wood Framing
AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA)
AWPA M4 Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products
AWPA U1-13 Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
01/2023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 20 23 - 2
HARDWOOD PLYWOOD AND VENEER ASSOCIATION (HPVA)
HPVA HP-1 American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative
Plywood
NATIONAL FOREST PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (NFOPA)
NFOPA-01 National Design Specification for Wood Construction
NFOPA-02 Manual for Wood Frame Construction
NATIONAL HARDWOOD LUMBER ASSOCIATION (NHLA)
NHLA Rules Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood and
Cypress
WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA)
WWPA-01 Western Lumber Grading Rules
RELATED WORK
Related Work in other sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Submit the following items of finish carpentry:
Shop Drawings, indicating fabrication and installation methods, to include plans and
elevations and details. Indicate required anchorage and blocking, accessory items,
field dimensions, materials and finishes. Indicate compliance with specification
requirements. Indicate weight of any materials or systems to be suspended or which
require support from structure.
Manufacturer's Product Data for all specialty items not manufactured by the Finish
Carpentry Fabricator.
Two samples of each species and finish of wood specified. Samples shall be minimum
12-inch by 12-inch finished as specified on one face, one edge, and one end. Samples
shall be fire retardant treated wood where such has been specified or required by
codes. Review will be for color and texture only; compliance with other requirements
is the responsibility of Interior Contractor. Samples of finishes shall be applied on the
appropriate wood or base material as will occur in the final Finish Carpentry item when
installed.
Product data for each type of process, factory and non-factory fabricated product.
Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, colors and include
construction and application details.
Where variations in wood and finish may occur, a minimum of three variations showing
the extremes which may be expected of any and all wood and finishes as specified
shall be submitted to ENGINEER for approval. Minimum size: 12-inch by 20-inch.
01/2023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 20 23 - 3
Where required by OWNER or ENGINEER, the Interior Contractor shall provide full
size mockup of panel or woodwork assembly.
Interior Contractor shall submit to ENGINEER three samples 20-inch minimum length
of all moldings or molding assemblies to be used for the Project. These shall be full
size and finished as specified in the Contract Documents.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Materials shall be delivered to the site in undamaged condition, stored off ground in fully
covered, well ventilated areas, and protected from extreme changes in temperature and
humidity.
Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber,
plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be
stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry,
and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with applicable provisions for Premium Grade as defined in the latest edition of
the AWI Quality Standards for all materials, fabrication and workmanship for all work of
this Section.
All Work of this Section shall be performed by skilled mechanics of the trade and shall be
of the highest quality. Comply with applicable Industry Standards for all Work and
materials as specified.
The Interior Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and complying with all code and
regulatory agency requirements for materials and methods.
The Interior Contractor shall be responsible for accurately obtaining all field dimensions
related to his/her work prior to fabrication. Where discrepancies are found, he/she shall
notify ENGINEER immediately in writing.
Protect sanded and finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and
installation.
Provide temporary protection of all Finish Carpentry as required to protect Work from
damage.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Finish carpentry shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be included
as part of the various items to which it relates.
01/2023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 20 23 - 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
All woodwork materials shall be new and shall conform to the Premium Grade
requirements of the AWI Quality Standards, latest edition.
All lumber shall be kiln-dried to the average moisture content as recommended by the
AWI Quality Standards latest edition appropriate for the climatic conditions of the Site.
All solid wood elements shall be clear, straight-grain lumber of the best grade of specified
species as listed by the NHLA. Lumber shall be free of any defects which might impair
serviceability, aesthetics, and/or finish. Solid wood elements shall also be according to
the following, unless indicated otherwise on Contract Drawings and/or Specifications:
Specie of Face Woods receiving transparent finishes shall be as specified on the
Contract Drawings and shall be selected for specified grain with uniform color and
grain suitable for use with the finished plywood with which it is used.
Face Woods receiving opaque finishes shall be Birch, Poplar or custom grade but
otherwise shall have same specification as solid stock for Face Woods above.
Unexposed woods shall be Custom grade Poplar, kiln dried.
All veneer core elements shall be clear straight-grain lumber of the best grade of the
specified species as listed by the NHLA Lumber shall be free of any defects which might
impair serviceability, aesthetics, and/or finish. Where veneer differs on two sides, veneers
shall be of similar thickness, density, and characteristics to prevent any warpage. Veneer
core elements shall also be according to the following, unless indicated on Contract
Drawings or Specifications:
Adhesives shall be water-resistant resin or approved equal; process shall be hot plate
method using the following number of plys to achieve specified thickness:
a. 1/4-inch overall thickness shall be of 3- ply veneer core construction.
b. 3/8-inch overall thickness shall be of 5- ply veneer core construction.
c. 1/2-inch overall thickness shall be of 5- ply veneer core construction.
d. 3/4-inch overall thickness shall be of 7- ply veneer core construction.
e. 1-inch overall thickness shall be of 9-ply veneer core construction.
Where burl paneling is specified, core must be cross banded with poplar prior to
applying burl veneer.
Provide Douglas Fir or Poplar V-type solid edge trim on all exposed edges of plywood
not designated to be surfaced by plastic laminate.
For Face Woods receiving transparent finishes, Species shall be as specified on
drawings; faces shall be selected and matched by the Interior Contractor with respect
to cutting lengths, uniformity of color, figure, and grain character. Face veneers shall
not contain open joints, face depressions, glue stain or other manufacturing
irregularities.
Face Woods receiving opaque finishes shall have custom grade (face veneer) Birch
or Poplar select, but otherwise shall have same specification as Plywood for Face
Woods (Paragraph 2.1.D.1).
Unexposed woods shall be Birch, Poplar or Douglas Fir, rotary cut, Unselect, good
one side, interior type plywood, one side Grade A and one side Grade B; Grade A
faces shall not contain plugs, knots, pitch pockets, splits, rough grain or other open
defects.
01/2023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 20 23 - 5
Wood for plastic lamination shall be minimum 3/4-inch Mahogany face core plywood,
good one side.
All particle board shall be resin impregnated wood flakes of high-density construction as
manufactured by Boise Cascade Corporation, Roseburg, or approved equal and shall
be 3/4-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise specified.
For Enameled Face Woods: High density particle board may be substituted for
plywood panels, unless specified otherwise on Contract Drawings.
For Unexposed Woods: High density particle board may be substituted for plywood
panels, unless specified otherwise on Contract Drawings.
All masonite shall be 1/8-inch thick tempered, as manufactured by Masonite
Corporation, or an approved equal.
All Finish Carpentry shall be finished as indicated on Contract Drawings and
Specifications. Transparent and Opaque Finishes shall match approved samples
submitted according to Section 01 33 00 and Paragraph 1.4 above. All plastic laminate
finishes shall be of the quality, color and finish as indicated on the Contract Drawings and
Specifications.
SOFTWOOD PLYWOOD
Each sheet of plywood must bear the mark of a recognized association or independent
inspection agency that maintains continuing control over the quality of the plywood.
The mark must identify the plywood by species group or identification index, and show
glue type, grade, and compliance with PS1.
Plastic Laminate Plywood Cores to be exterior type in any species and in Grade A or as
required per the Contract Documents.
Shelving Plywood to be interior type in any species and in grade or as required per
Architect.
HARDWOOD PLYWOOD
Comply with AHA A 135.
Each sheet of hardwood plywood must bear the mark of a recognized association or
independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over the quality of the
plywood. The mark must identify the plywood by species group or identification index, and
show glue type, grade, and compliance with HP-1.
Hardwood plywood type to meet minimum standards and must comply with specifications.
PLASTIC LAMINATE
Exposed decorative surfaces including countertops, cabinet doors, and for items having
plastic laminate finish type to be per specification.
Cabinet Interiors including Shelving: Both of following options to comply with NEMA CLS
Grade, as a minimum.
01/2023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 20 23 - 6
Cover exposed edges with plastic laminate, except where aluminum, stainless steel, or
plastic molded edge strips are shown or specified.
Provide Douglas Fir or Poplar V-type solid edge trim on all exposed edges of plywood not
designated to be surfaced by plastic laminate.
PANELING
Hardwood Veneer Plywood Paneling: Manufacturer's stock hardwood plywood panels
complying with HPVA HP-1, made without urea-formaldehyde adhesive. Manufacturers
Subject to compliance with requirements,
For Face Woods receiving transparent finishes, Species shall be as specified on Contract
Drawings; faces shall be selected and matched by the Interior Contractor with respect to
cutting lengths, uniformity of color, figure, and grain character. Face veneers shall not
contain open joints, face depressions, glue stain or other manufacturing irregularities.
Where burl paneling is specified core must be cross banded with poplar prior to applying
burl veneer.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type,
size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,
concealed where possible.
All required hardware and accessories shall be furnished and installed by Interior
Contractor and shall be as indicated on Contract Drawings and Specifications. Where
specific products are not specified in the Contract Documents, the Interior Contractor shall
recommend hardware to provide the function or condition indicated in the Contract
Documents. Hinges, screws, clips and other mounting, attachments or fasteners to be
concealed unless otherwise noted on Contract Drawings.
Interior Contractor shall submit samples of each hardware item/type and accessory
item/type to ENGINEER for approval according to Paragraph 1.4 above and Section 01
33 00.
Paneling Adhesive: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written recommendations for
adhesives. VOC levels shall not exceed what is approved for Project.
All Finish Carpentry hardware and accessories shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
OTHER MATERIALS
Interior Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing all items and materials
as indicated on Contract Drawings and Specifications comprising all or part of the Finish
Carpentry shown. Such items and materials shall be fabricated and/or installed according
to manufacturer's recommendations and comply with applicable AWI Quality Standards
and Industry Standards.
01/2023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 20 23 - 7
All paint and other finish material shall be pure, unadulterated and best quality from
specified manufacturer as indicated on the Contract Drawings and Specifications. (See
Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Finishes).
All finish materials shall be flame retardant or treated with flame-retardant process where
required by local code. Should flame-retardant process cause change in color and effect
on finish material, Interior Contractor shall notify ENGINEER.
All finishes and processes shall be in compliance with code requirements for the location
of installation.
All transparent finishes shall be alcohol, water and burn resistant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS
The Interior Contractor shall be responsible for examination of the substrate and the
conditions under which the Work under this section is to be performed, and notify
ENGINEER in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work under
this section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Verify surfaces and substrates are prepared to receive products of this section.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify ENGINEER of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding Examine substrates and conditions, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of decorative metal.
Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet,
moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the Project conditions.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing
humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
FABRICATION
All Work shall be performed in such manner as to fulfill the intent of the Contract Drawings
and Specifications.
All items to be mill fabricated per AWI Premium Grade specifications and according to the
sizes and designs indicated on the Contract Drawings and Specifications, and assembled
in single and complete units insofar as the dimensions thereof will permit shipment to and
installation at the building. Large pieces requiring sectional construction shall have their
01/2023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 20 23 - 8
several parts accurately fitted and aligned with each other and be provided with ample
screws, glue and bolt blocks, tongues, grooves and splines, dowels, mortises and tenons,
screws, bolts, or suitable means of concealed fastening, as required to render the Work
substantial, rigid and permanently secured in proper position to each related section.
Where necessary to fit at site provide ample allowance for cutting and fitting. Sufficient
additional material shall be allowed to permit accurate scribing to walls, floors and related
work; and due allowance made wherever possible for such shrinkage as may develop
after installation. All single and sectional units shall be provided with adequate cleating,
blocking, crating and other forms of protection as required to preclude damages thereto
during shipping and handling and installation.
Framing and blocking members shall be assembled with bolted and screwed connections,
and shall be secured to the structural backings with expansion screws, or toggle bolts, as
required, spaced and installed so as to insure ample strength and rigidity. Rails and stiles
shall be mortised and tenoned, work neatly mitered and membered, all butt joints made
flush and smooth, and all permanent joints made up with water-resistant glue. All fixtures
shall be assembled without face screws or nails, except where it may be necessary to
attach trim items. All face screws or nails which are necessary to attach trim items shall
be countersunk and plastic wood or wood plugs used to cover heads, and the plug neatly
touched up to match finish. The heads of all screws used in any assembly shall be
countersunk below the surface.
All items where paint is required shall be shop spray finished, except where impractical or
otherwise specified.
Backsides of all Finish Carpentry concealed by the building shall be given a prime coat of
paint, color to closely approximate the value and hue of the face finish.
All shelving shall be adjustable unless indicated otherwise on Contract Drawings and
Specifications. Shelving standards shall be concealed unless otherwise noted.
Plastic Laminate edges shall be square, self-edged, or postformed as indicated on
drawings. Metal trim is not acceptable. Edges shall be neatly beveled, joints shall be
minimized in quantity and be made to a smooth hairline and puttied. Appearance of
unsightly or excessive joints will be cause for rejection.
INSTALLATION
Installation at the Project shall be by skilled mechanics supervised by the Interior
Contractor in accordance with accepted standards.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the approved shop
drawings and in proper relationship with adjacent construction.
Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
Install all Finish Carpentry straight, plumb, level and in true alignment except where
otherwise indicated. Fit all joints closely and fasten all pieces rigidly in place. Nails shall
be finish or casing nails. Countersink nail heads and leave ready for putty. Joints shall be
neatly matched and mitered. Fill exposed joints prior to jointing.
01/2023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 20 23 - 9
Finished size shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Surfaces shall be left free from hammer marks, free from warp, twist, open joints or
other defects and shall be cleaned, scraped and sanded ready for finishing.
Lengths of all running trim shall be as long as practical.
Shim as required using concealed shims.
Cut Finish Carpentry to fit unless specified to be shop fabricated or shop-cut to exact size.
Where Finish Carpentry abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Before
making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners.
Distribute defects allowed in the quality grade specified to the best overall advantage,
when installing job assembled items.
Attach Finish Carpentry securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and
building movements. Attach to substrates by anchoring and fastening as shown, as
required by recognized standards, and as follows:
Nailing: Blind nail where possible. Use fine finishing nails where exposed. Set exposed
nail heads for filling except for exterior wood which is to receive a natural finish (if any).
Anchoring: Secure Finish Carpentry to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached
to substrates.
For standing and running trim, install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-
length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24
inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and
running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-
surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane
backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for
alignment.
Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement tor warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and
fill holes.
Cope moldings at returns, miter interior angles and corners.
Where finishes are applied at job site, clean items and fill nail holes in preparation for
finishes application. Where work is to receive a transparent finish, use matching wood
filler.
For Fire-Retardant Finish Carpentry, handle, store and install in accordance with
manufacturer's direction and as required to meet the required classification or rating.
Provide special fasteners, adhesives and other accessories as tested and listed for the
type of fire-retardant work indicated. Re-coat any and all cut surfaces with a heavy brush
coating of the same compound used for wood treatment.
Fit Finish Carpentry to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate
location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper support.
Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in
grain character and color between adjacent panels. Leave 1/4-inch gap to be covered with
trim at top, bottom, and openings. Install with uniform tight joints between panels.
01/2023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
254.07.100 PAGE 06 20 23 - 10
Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and
fasteners. Space fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer.
Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent.
Adjust all hardware for smooth operation.
Coordinate with plumbing and electrical work for installation of fixtures and service
connections in millwork items.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Clean shop finished work, touch-up finish as required and remove and refinish damaged
or soiled areas of finish.
Protect installed Finish Carpentry from damage by Work of other trades until OWNER's
acceptance of the Work. Subcontractor to advise Interior Contractor of procedures and
precautions for protection of materials and installed work from damage and of the required
temperature/humidity conditions which must be maintained during the remainder of the
construction period in areas of Finish Carpentry installations.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence
remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop;
make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

- END OF SECTION -
01/2023 MOISTURE PROTECTION
254.07.100 PAGE 07 11 00 - 1
SECTION 07 11 00
MOISTURE PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
This Section provides specifications for all waterproofing and damp proofing of the
buried or below grade concrete surfaces, including moistureproof underlays for concrete
slabs.
RELATED WORK
Related Work in other sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Performance and Design Requirements. Prior to application of waterproofing,
CONTRACTOR shall cause a representative of the manufacturer of the materials to
inspect and certify that the surfaces to be waterproofed are in a condition suitable for
application of the waterproofing. Following application of the waterproofing,
CONTRACTOR shall cause a representative of the manufacturer of the materials to
inspect and certify that the materials were applied in complete accordance with the
manufacturer's current recommendations.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM D 450 Standard Specification for Coal-Tar Pitch Use in Roofing,
Dampproofing, and Waterproofing
ASTM D 882 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting
ASTM D 1668 Standard Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for
Roofing and Waterproofing.
ASTM E 1643 Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and
Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth
or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slab
ASTM F 1249 Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic
Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor
PRESSURE SENSITIVE TAPE COUNCIL (PSTC)
PSTC 101 International Standard for Peel Adhesion of Pressure-Sensitive
Tape
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Submit manufacturer product data, cut sheets, and recommended installation
instructions.
01/2023 MOISTURE PROTECTION
254.07.100 PAGE 07 11 00 - 2
Prior to acceptance of the work, CONTRACTOR shall deliver to ENGINEER two copies
of the specified certifications for material application.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
WATERPROOF COATING
Waterproof coating shall be coal tar epoxy resin. Acceptable products are Bitumastic
300M by Carboline, Targuard Low VOC Coal Tar Epoxy by Sherwin Williamns,
PorterTuf 2000 HB Coal Tar Epoxy by Porter Coating, Series 46H-413 HB Tneme-
Tar by Tnemec, Amercoat 78HB by PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, or approved
equal.
MOISTUREPROOF COATING
Moistureproof coating shall be coal tar solution. Acceptable products are Bitumastic 50
by Carboline, Corothane I Coal Tar by Sherwin Williams, Series 46-465 HB
Tnemecol by Tnemec, HE107 by Henry, or approved equal.
WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
Water-roof Pitch: Waterproof pitch shall be coal tar pitch.
Membrane Fabric: Membrane fabric shall be coal tar pitch coated open mesh fabric per
paragraph 1.2 B.
Reglets: Reglets for anchoring membrane shall be fabricated of 16-ounce copper.
Protective Board: Protective board shall be 2-inch Celotex insulation board treated to
prevent decay.
MOISTUREPROOF UNDERLAY
Plastic Membrane. Plastic membrane for moistureproof underlay shall be an ASTM E
1745 Class A membrane manufactured from virgin polyolefin resins having a minimum
film thickness of 10 mils. Plastic membrane shall meet the following specifications:
Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms maximum (perm unit = grains/(ft2*hr*in-Hg)) in
accordance with ASTM F 1249.
Tensile Strength: 50 lbf/in (minimum) per ASTM D 882.
Acceptable membranes are Stego Wrap Class A by Stego Industries, Perminator by
W. R. Meadows, Vapor Barrier Blue VB10 by Americover, or approved equal.
Pressure Sensitive Tape. Pressure sensitive tape shall be minimum 3-inch wide, 6 mil
pressure sensitive polyethylene tape with acrylic, pressure-sensitive adhesive.
Manufacturers shall be Stego Tape by Stego Industries, Perminator Tape by W.R.
Meadows, VTW Vapor Tape by Americover, or approved equal.
01/2023 MOISTURE PROTECTION
254.07.100 PAGE 07 11 00 - 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
WATERPROOF COATING
Location. Waterproof coating shall be applied to the water side of walls and bottoms of
channels or tanks which are common with areas to be occupied by equipment, piping or
personnel. Waterproof coating shall not be applied to those surfaces to receive liquid
waterproofing.
Surface Preparation. New concrete to be waterproofed shall have aged at least 60 days
and shall have a moisture content of less than 14%. Concrete surface shall be brush
treated with a 10% muriatic acid solution and thoroughly flushed with water after 10
minutes.
Walls of existing channels and tanks shall be steam cleaned prior to application of
waterproofing material.
Application. Prime coat shall be thinned and applied at the rate of approximately
200-300 square feet per gallon depending on surface condition. Finish coats shall be
applied at the rate of 100 square feet per gallon. Final coat shall be black. Total dry film
thickness shall be minimum 20 mils. Drying time between coats shall be as
recommended by the paint manufacturer.
Application Procedures. Following the manufacturer’s application instructions and these
application procedures for waterproofing products as listed in paragraph 2.1 are as
follows:
1. Prime coat shall consist of one coat of coal tar epoxy resin coating, black. Finish
coats shall consist of two coats of coal tar epoxy resin coating, alternating red
and black colors.
MOISTUREPROOF COATING
Location. Moistureproof coating shall be applied to below grade, earth side of outside
concrete walls which are common with areas to be occupied by equipment, piping, or
personnel. Moistureproof coating is not required for walls to be provided with waterproof
membrane or for walls which are poured directly against an excavated surface.
Surface Preparation. Preparation of concrete and masonry walls shall conform to
manufacturer's recommendations.
Application. Prime and finish coats shall be applied at the rate of 70 square feet per
gallon. The number of finish coats shall be sufficient to produce a dry film thickness of at
least 13 mils. Drying time between coats shall be as recommended by the paint
manufacturer.
WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
Location. Waterproof membrane shall be applied to exterior surfaces as designated on
the drawings.
Surface Preparation. Concrete surfaces to receive waterproof membrane shall be clean,
dry and shall have at least a Class II form finish.
01/2023 MOISTURE PROTECTION
254.07.100 PAGE 07 11 00 - 4
MOISTUREPROOF UNDERLAY
Install moistureproof underlay in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation
instructions.
Location. Unless otherwise noted, moistureproof underlay shall be provided under all
concrete floors or floating slabs-on-grade deposited on gravel base or sand.
Moistureproof underlay shall be provided under all concrete floors or floating
slabs-on-grade with pressure relief valves and gravel base.
Surface Preparation. Backfilled surfaces to receive moistureproof underlay shall be
leveled off and smoothed over to minimize contact with sharp edges. Joints shall be
sealed by means of pressure sensitive tape. Where pipes and conduits pass through
the plastic membrane, they shall be wrapped tightly with separate sheets of membrane
which shall then be sealed with tape to the main membrane. Reinforcing steel or mesh
shall be supported by small precast placing chairs designed with flat bases to protect the
membrane. CONTRACTOR shall exercise care to maintain the integrity of the
membrane at all times.

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 INSULATION
254.07.100 PAGE 07 21 00 - 1
SECTION 07 21 00
INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
This Section covers the work required to provide and install insulation in buildings and
structures, complete and in place.
RELATED WORK
Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 04 22 00 Reinforced Unit Masonry
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM C 518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus
ASTM C 547 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation
ASTM C 549 Standard Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation
ASTM C 553 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications
ASTM C 578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation
ASTM C 592 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and
Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial
Type)
ASTM C 612 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
Insulation
ASTM C 665 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured
Housing
ASTM C 1029 Standard Specification for Spray-Applied Rigid Cellular
Polyurethane Thermal Insulation
ASTM D 1622 Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular
Plastics
ASTM D 1621 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Cellular Plastics
ASTM D 2842 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular
Plastics
ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
01/2023 INSULATION
254.07.100 PAGE 07 21 00 - 2
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL1256 Fire Test of Rook Deck Constructions
FACTORY MUTUAL (FM)
Approval Standard for Class 1 Fire Rating of Insulated Wall or Wall and Roof/Ceiling
Panels, Interior Finish Materials or Coatings and Exterior Wall Systems
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Submit manufacturer’s literature, installation instructions, product test reports and
technical data.
Submit manufacturer’s certification that the proposed materials comply with this Section.
For foam-in-place insulation, submit a copy of the foam insulation contractor’s certification
and ICC-ES report and manufacturer’s documentation confirming material conforms to
ASTM C 1029.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Materials shall not be allowed to become wet, soiled, or covered with ice and snow.
Manufacturer's recommendations for handling storage and protection shall be strictly
followed. If required, during cold weather, store in heated storage areas following the
manufacturer’s guidelines for minimum and maximum temperatures. Material shall not be
exposed to sunlight and shall be protected against ignition. Materials shall be concealed
as quickly as possible after completion of work.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for Insulation. Full compensation
for all insulation shall be considered as included in the contract unit or lump sum bid prices
for the various items of the contract to which it relates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
INSULATION
Thermal resistance of insulation shall be not less than the R-values shown on the Contract
Drawings. R-values shall be determined at 75 degrees F in accordance with ASTM C 518.
Insulation shall be the standard product of a manufacturer and factory marked or identified
with manufacturer's name or trademark and R-value. Identification shall be on individual
pieces or individual packages.
01/2023 INSULATION
254.07.100 PAGE 07 21 00 - 3
The materials and application of building insulation shall conform to the applicable
requirement of the Underwriters Laboratories “Fire Resistance Index”, Factory Mutual
requirements, and the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Minimum R-Value in all roof insulation shall be R-30.
FOAMED-IN-PLACE THERMAL INSULATION
Foamed-in-place or sprayed polyurethane foam plastic insulation conforming to the
requirements of ASTM C 1029 shall be placed in cavities of masonry walls. Foamed-in-
place thermal insulation in walls shall be 2-component cellular plastic insulation comprised
of a spray-dried polymeric resin and a foaming catalyst concentrate insulation by
frothing/pouring in place. It shall have the following characteristics:
Foamed-in-place insulation shall be InsulSmart Interior Foam Insulation by CfiFOAM,
Inc., Core-Fill 500 by Tailored Chemical Products, or approved equal.
BLANKET INSULATION
Blanket insulation shall be glass or other inorganic fibers and resinous binders formed into
flexible blankets complying with ASTM C 665, Type III, with foiled back vapor barrier
laminated to one face, with 1-inch flanges on long edges, and vapor transmission not more
than 0.50 perms. Manufacturers shall be Owens-Corning, CertainTeed, Johns-
Manville, or approved equal.
EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD (RIGID) INSULATION
Rigid insulation shall be polystyrene conforming to ASTM C 578, Type IV with surface
burning characteristics per ASTM E84 maximum of 5 for flame-spread and 175 for smoke
developed. Minimum thermal resistance per inch of R-5.0 per ASTM C 518 at 75°F mean
temperature. Minimum compressive strength of 25 psi per ASTM D 1621.
Insulation for roof decks shall be listed per UL 1256 and shall be in compliance with FM
Class I roof decks.
Insulation thickness in interior walls shall be 4 inches.
Manufacturers shall be Dow Chemical, Owens Corning, or approved equal.
Sill Sealer: Mineral wool, 1 inch thick and compressible to 1/32 inch, width of sill, designed
to perform as an air, dirt, and insect seal.
ALUMINUM SHEETING WITH RIGID INSULATION
Vaults with electric power shall be insulated with a combination of rigid insulation (see 2.4)
and 24-mil thick (min) aluminum sheeting coated flat white.
Property Requirement Standard
Core Density 0.5-1.0 pcf ASTM D 1622
Termal Resistance at 140°F/90
day Aged R Value, at 75°F mean
Temp, min
R4.6/inch ASTM C 518
01/2023 INSULATION
254.07.100 PAGE 07 21 00 - 4
Accessories:
Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer. Adhesive shall be formulated
specifically to bond insulation to steel (hatches and panels) and to concrete surfaces.
Tape: Aluminum foil tape with facing to match rigid insulation as recommended by the
manufacturer.
J-Channel: PVC Closure strip as recommended by manufacturer for terminations.
Clip Strip: PVC closure strip for vertical and horizontal seams.
Fasteners: Hilti Insulation Fasteners (IZ-type), or approved equal.
Aluminum Sheet Manufacturer: Insul-Mate by RPR Products, Inc., or approved equal.
EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD (RIGID) INSULATION (BURIED LOCATIONS)
Rigid insulation for buried locations shall be polystyrene conforming to ASTM C 578, Type
IV with surface burning characteristics per ASTM E84 maximum of 75 for flame-spread
and maximum of 450 for smoke-developed. Minimum thermal resistance per inch of R-5.0
per ASTM C 518 at 75°F mean temperature. Minimum compressive strength of 25 psi per
ASTM D 1621.
Insulation thickness for exterior foundation walls shall be 1.5 inches minimum.
Manufacturers shall be Dow Chemical, Owens Corning, or approved equal.
Sill Sealer: Mineral wool, 1 inch thick and compressible to 1/32 inch, width of sill, designed
to perform as an air, dirt, and insect seal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
PREPARATION
Verify substrate and adjacent materials and insulation board are dry and ready to receive
adhesive.
Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested.
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION
Insulation shall be installed after construction has advanced to a point that the installed
insulation will not be damaged by remaining work. For thermal insulation the actual
installed thickness shall provide the R-values shown. For acoustical insulation the
installed thickness shall be as shown. Insulation shall be installed on the weather side of
such items as electrical boxes and water lines. Unless otherwise specified, installation
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
INSTALLATION OF FOAMED-IN-PLACE THERMAL INSULATION
The polyurethane foam shall be placed in 4-foot lifts. All insulation shall be done in close
coordination with the masonry contractor to allow quality control.
The polyurethane foam shall be applied by qualified firms with proper dispensing
equipment.
01/2023 INSULATION
254.07.100 PAGE 07 21 00 - 5
Apply in accordance with ASTM C 1029 guidelines and the manufacturer’s instructions.
INSTALLATION - RIGID INSULATION
Foundation Perimeter:
Adhere a 6 inches wide strip of polyethylene sheet over joints with double beads of
adhesive each side of the joint. Tape seal joints between sheets. Extend sheet full
height of joint.
Install boards on foundation wall perimeter, horizontally. Place boards in a method to
maximize contact bedding. Stagger end joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent
board and to protrusions.
Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to foundation 12 inches either side of
joint.
Exterior Walls:
Apply adhesive in 3 continuous beads per board length. Daub adhesive tight to
protrusions.
Install boards on wall surface perimeter, vertically. Place membrane surface of
insulation against adhesive.
Place boards in a method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger side joints. Butt
edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions.
Place 24" side polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings from adhesive vapor
and air retarder bed to window and door frames. Tape seal in place to ensure
continuity of vapor and air retarder.
Cavity Walls:
Secure impale fasteners to substrate at a frequency of 6 per insulated board.
Apply adhesive in 3 continuous beads per board length. Daub adhesive tight to
protrusions to ensure continuity of vapor and air retarder.
Install boards horizontally between wall reinforcement.
Under Concrete Slabs:
Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted.
Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and
placing concrete slab.
INSTALLATION - BATT INSULATION
Install batt insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Install batt insulation without gaps or voids
Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage.
Fit insulation tight in spaces airtight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
within the plane of insulation.
Protect all insulation materials during storage and insulation from moisture, tears or other
damage. All damaged material shall be replaced at no additional cost to OWNER.
01/2023 INSULATION
254.07.100 PAGE 07 21 00 - 6

- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 32 00 - 1
SECTION 07 32 00

METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install metal roofing and soffit panels, system support
framing, and appurtenant work, complete and in place. Metal roofing shall be a
concealed fastener metal roofing system.
The principal items of sheet metal work included in the metal roofing system shall
include sheet metal flashing, covers, trim, enclosure batts, collars and sleeves at all roof
penetrations, metal soffit panels, and all other sheet metal items necessary for a
complete and watertight metal roofing system.
The metal roofing applicator shall coordinate his work with sheet metal gutter work and
shall report to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER if any sheet metal work provided by
others affects his work negatively.
RELATED WORK
Related work in other sections includes but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 924 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM D 226 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing
ASTM D 1938 Standard Test Method for Tear-Propagation Resistance (Trouser
Tear) of Plastic Film and Thin Sheeting by a Single-Tear Method
ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
ASTM E 330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
ASTM E 1646 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal
Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E 1680 Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Metal Roof Panel Systems

01/2023 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 32 00 - 2
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY (UL)
UL 580 Test for Uplift Resistance of Prepared Roof Assemblies
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Submit detailed shop drawings showing materials, gages, finishes, layout, corners, trim,
flashing, enclosures, edge conditions, jointing, profiles, supports, fasteners, fabrication of
special shapes, and method of attachment to adjacent construction to Engineer prior to
fabrication. Submit drawings indicating roof size, location and type of penetrations,
perimeter and penetration details, roof insulation make-up and sheet layout that have
been accepted by an authorized manufacturer’s representative.
Submit manufacturer’s literature indicating materials, finish, construction, and method of
installation of prefabricated items and sealant.
Provide color samples for color selection by OWNER.
Submit the following test reports, certified by an Independent Testing Laboratory or a
professional engineer registered in the State of Utah to verify the proposed roofing will
meet performance requirements of this Specification:
Thermal Cycle Test
ASTM E-330 Adapted to Test Formed Metal Panels
Clip Fastener Pull-Out Tests and Calculations
UL 580 Class 90
Concentrated Load Test Data
Air Infiltration (E-283) and Water Penetration (E-331) Test Results
Coating Performance Testing
Submit certification by the manufacturer that the roofing assembly is listed in the UL
Building Materials Directory with a Class 1-90 wind uplift rating, including relevant
construction number.
WARRANTIES
Manufacturer shall provide to OWNER written warranty that the roof panels will not
rupture, fail structurally, or perforate due to corrosion for a period of 20 years from the
date of installation.
Roofing manufacturer shall provide written 10-year material and labor warranty
beginning at the date of final acceptance.
CONTRACTOR shall provide to OWNER written warranty that the roof system is
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and will be free from
defective workmanship and remain watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for
two (2) years following Project Substantial Completion date.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A single installer shall perform the work of this Section and shall have completed
01/2023 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 32 00 - 3
projects of similar scope and complexity.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for roof systems. Full
compensation for roofing systems shall be considered as included in the contract unit or
lump sum bid prices for the various items of the Contract to which roof system relates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
GENERAL
Subject to compliance with the requirements, manufacturers who may offer metal roofing
systems and products, which may be incorporated into the work, include AEP Span,
Fabral, or approved equal.
ROOF PANELS
Minimum Performance Ratings and Properties:
Air infiltration: Panel shall have no air infiltration at 20 psf pressure differential and
no air exfiltration at 20 psf pressure differential when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 1680.
Water penetration: Panel shall have no leakage through panel joints when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 1646 at static pressure differential of 20.0 psf.
Provide UL90 rated roofing system that has been tested in accordance with UL 580
test procedure. Panels shall be capable of spanning 5’-0” on-center purlins with
UL90 rating.
Profile:
Roof panels shall be factory formed ribbed seam pattern with minimum 1” high
seams and a nominal panel width of 16 inches.
Soffit panels shall be 12-inches wide, 1-1/2” deep, 22- gauge, G90 galvanized finish
steel, with concealed fastener, lock-joint design and shall be continuous-vented.
Length:
Provide panels of sufficient length to minimize end laps.
Profile Composition:
Base metal shall be a minimum 24-gage structural steel (minimum yield strength
50,000 psi) with G90 hot dipped galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A 653.
Sheet metal trim, flashing, and accessories shall be the same material, gauge, finish,
and color as the metal roofing.
Paint Finish:
a. All panels shall receive a factory applied Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 finish applied to
both sides of the panel over the base protective coating, or approved equal. The
exposed side coating shall have a minimum total dry film thickness of 1.0 mil and
the underside coating shall have a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
Color to be as determined by OWNER.
01/2023 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 32 00 - 4
Concealed-Clips:
Material: 18-gauge steel with class G60 galvanized coating.
Configuration: clips shall be designed so as to attach with two concealed fasteners,
and fully attach two ribs of every panel.
Spacing: In accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Fasteners:
Self-drilling or self-tapping galvanized steel screws and/or stainless steel pop rivets
painted to match the panels where visible, per the panel manufacturer's
recommendations.
Sealants:
Sealants shall not contain oil, asbestos, or asphalt. Factory applied sealant shall be
applied in the seam and designed for metal to metal concealed joints. Field applied
panel end sealant shall be mastic tape sealant. Exposed sealant shall be one-part
polyurethane joint sealant. All sealants used shall be as recommended by the metal
roofing manufacturer for the job conditions and warranty requirements.
Weather resistive barrier:
Membrane underlayment shall be composed of a high-strength, spun-bonded
polypropylene base sheet, co-extruded on both sides with UV stabilized polyolefin,
weight 30-pound. Membrane underlayment shall conform to ASTM D 226, Type II.
Permeability shall be 0.54 perms maximum in accordance with ASTM E 96,
Procedure A, and tear strength shall be minimum 20 pounds in accordance with
ASTM D 1938. Membrane underlayment shall be Grace Tri-Flex 30 by Grace
Construction Products, or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Verify proper placement of all roof openings, pipes, curbs, sleeves, ducts, vents and
drains.
SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for preparation of substrate to receive roofing.
Clean substrate of dust, debris and other substances detrimental to the roofing work.
NAILERS
Install treated wood nailers at roof perimeters, at base of roof projections, and around
specified roof penetrations.
Total nailer height shall match total thickness of insulation being used. Install with
1/8” gap between each length and at changes in direction.
Firmly fasten nailer to the deck, wall, or existing structurally sound and secured nailer
at (16”) o.c. maximum, so as to resist a force of 200 pounds per lineal foot in any
direction.
01/2023 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 32 00 - 5
Taper nailer where applicable to be flush at point of contact with membrane in either
the vertical or horizontal applications.
GENERAL
The metal roofing shall be installed by an applicator and fabricator approved by the
roofing system manufacturer who has working experience with the roofing system.
Contractor shall provide a letter signed by the roofing manufacturer that the installer is
an approved applicator and fabricator of the roofing system.
The metal roofing systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and recommendations applicable to the job conditions and supporting
substrates.
The panels and other components of the system shall be securely anchored and placed
with concealed fasteners and shall be provided with provisions for thermal/structural
movement.
Shim and align panel units within installed tolerances of 1/4-inch in 20 feet on
level/plumb/slope and location/line as indicated, and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining
faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
Joint sealers shall be furnished and installed where necessary or where required for
weatherproofing of the system.
INSTALLATION
Metal panels shall be installed in accordance with the approved shop drawings and the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Remove any strippable protective coating on the panels and flashings prior to installation
and in any case do not allow the strippable coating to remain on the panels in extreme
heat, cold, or in direct sunlight or other UV source.
Loosely lay roof insulation with end joints staggered. (Stagger joints between layers.)
Joints shall be 1/4" or less in width. Neatly cut and fit insulation around roof penetrations
and projections. Install only dry insulation and only as much insulation as can be
covered the same day with membrane and completed.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Panels and other components of the work which have been damaged or have
deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of finish touch-ups or similar minor
repair procedures, shall be removed and replaced at no cost to Owner.
Temporary protective coverings and strippable films shall be removed from the materials
during installation. Upon completion of the work, the roofing systems shall be cleaned
as recommended by the roofing manufacturer and shall be maintained in a clean
condition until acceptance of the work by Owner.

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 32 00 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

01/2018 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
254.07.100 PAGE 07 62 00 - 1
SECTION 07 62 00
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
The CONTRACTOR shall provide and install sheet metal flashing and trim, and
appurtenant work, complete in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
The scop of Work includes edge, eaves, and other trim, expansion joint covers, copings,
prefinished sheet metal flashings, collards, pitch pockets (pans), equipment platforms
(sleeper)support at all roof penetrations which are not provided as part of the roofing
system, and all other components, mastic, sealants, and anchors necessary to make the
structure weathertight.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Related work in other Sections includes but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry
Section 07 32 00 Metal Roofing Systems
Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and
Steel Hardware.
ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A792 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
ASTM C1311 Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.
ASTM D1187 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as
Protective Coatings for Metal.
ASTM D4586 Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors Association, SMACNA - Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Materials, anchorage, fastenings and workmanship shall qualify for U.L. Class 115 MPH
(3 second gust) wind uplift rating.
01/2018 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
254.07.100 PAGE 07 62 00 - 2
General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing,
rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.
Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation,
overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of
sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and night time-sky heat loss.
Temperature Change (Range): 120° F, ambient; 180° F, material surfaces.
Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration
to building interior.
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and
elevations. Show materials, gauges, finishes, layout, joints, sizes, profiles and fasteners.
Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:
Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.
Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams,
and dimensions.
Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and
trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work.
Details of expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and
contraction.
Submit manufacturer’s specifications, literature, and published installation and
maintenance instructions for all sheet metal products.
Provide samples of color where required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal
flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.
Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to
prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
01/2018 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
254.07.100 PAGE 07 62 00 - 3
Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other
materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
COORDINATION
Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining
construction to provide a leak-proof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
PART 2 MATERIALS
SHEET METAL
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation;
structural quality.
Thickness 0.0239-inch (24 U.S. Standard gauge), unless shown otherwise.
Finish-factory applied to match color of metal frames, or trim.
Manufacturers shall be Cheney Flashing Company, Fry Reglet Corporation,
Heckmann Building Products, Inc., or approved equal.
DOWNSPOUTS, GUTTER AND TRIM
Downspouts, gutters and trim shall be same metal and thickness as roof panels.
Fabricate gutters in minimum 96-inch long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets
and flat-stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from the same material as gutters.
Fabricate expansion joints, expansion joints covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and
gutter accessories from same material as gutters. Shop fabricate interior and exterior
corners.
Color shall match roof panels.
FASCIA AND RAKE TRIM
Fascia and rake trim shall be same metal and thickness as roof panels.
Color shall match roof panels.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete
sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners
designed to withstand design loads.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps
or factory-applied coating. Steel, galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M or stainless
steel.
01/2018 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
254.07.100 PAGE 07 62 00 - 4
Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Steel, galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M or
stainless steel. Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer
head.
Blind Fasteners: High-strength stainless-steel rivets.
Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, non-
staining tape.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and
trim and remain watertight.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,
polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-
mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design,
dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items
where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and
metal.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with
flatlock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work
cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet
metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
01/2018 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
254.07.100 PAGE 07 62 00 - 5
Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for
application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
Reinforcement and Supports; Provide same material as flashing, unless other material
is shown. Steel, where shown or required, shall be galvanized or stainless.
Rigid Joints and Seams: make mechanically strong. Solder galvanized and stainless
steel metal joints. Do not us solder to transmit stress.
Provide watertight closures at exposed ends of counterflashing.
LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material:
Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
DOWNSPOUTS AND GUTTERS FABRICATION
Form downspouts and gutters in maximum lengths as practicable to sizes and shapes
indicated on the Drawings.
Lock longitudinal joints of downspouts.
Telescope end joints 1-1/2 inches.
Provide elbows at bottom where downspouts discharge onto splash blocks.
Anchor downspouts with straps of same material as downspouts.
Install gutters at locations indicated on drawings.
MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
FLEXIBLE BASE PIPE SEALS
Flexible base pipe seals shall be prefabricated on-piece aluminum flanged base with
stepped, graduated EPDM profile which creates a compression seal between the piping
and the flashing. Aluminum base shall be flexible to conform to profile of roof panels.
Manufacturers and Products:
Pate Co.; Dektite.
Portals Plus, Inc.; Deck-Mate.
Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals in accordance with 3.2.B of this
Section.
Isolation tape shall be butyl or polyisobutylene, internally reinforced.
01/2018 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
254.07.100 PAGE 07 62 00 - 6
Fasteners shall be stainless steel of type required.
FINISHES
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces
are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual
locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,
solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous
items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive
substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous
coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or
manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install
a course of polyethylene underlayment.
Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof
performance.
Use only stainless steel fasteners to connect isolated dissimilar metals.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and [elastomeric] [butyl] sealant.
01/2018 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
254.07.100 PAGE 07 62 00 - 7
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 30 inches
of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be
used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing
hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within
joints.
Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction.
Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not
less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When
ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70° F, set
joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at
temperatures below 40° F.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 -
"Joint Sealants."
Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin
edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pretinned
surface would show in finished Work.
Pretinning is not required for lead-coated copper.
Where surfaces to be soldered are lead coated, do not tin edges, but wire brush lead
coating before soldering.
Lead-Coated Copper Soldering: Wire brush edges of sheets before soldering.
Do not use open-flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and
flow solder into joints. Fill joints completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from
exposed surfaces.
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance
requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and
seams that will be permanently watertight.
Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with
top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base
flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base
flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a
minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant.
01/2018 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
254.07.100 PAGE 07 62 00 - 8
Secure in a waterproof manner by means of anchor and washer at 36-inch centers,
or other method approved by ENGINEER.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with
installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
Use appropriate flexible base pipe seal where pipe, conduit or cable, etc. penetrate
roofing system.
Make work watertight and free of expansion and contraction noise. Seal and clamp
flashing to pipes penetrating roof.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and
trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including
removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing.
Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have
deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.
END OF SECTION -

01/2023 JOINT SEALANTS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 92 00 - 1
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES:
Polyurethane Sealants
Tape Mastic Sealants
Non-skinning Sealants
Silicone Sealants
Acrylic Sealants
Acoustic Sealants
SECTION EXCLUDES:
Concrete joint sealants which are per Section 03 25 00.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURER’S ASSOCIATION (AAMA)
AAMA 800-10 Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 653 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
ASTM A 792 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
ASTM C 639 Standard Test Method for Rheological (Flow) Properties of
Elastomeric Sealants
ASTM C 661 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-
Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer
ASTM C 681 Standard Test Method for Volatility of Oil- and Resin-Based, Knife
Grade, Channel Glazing Compounds
ASTM C 711 Standard Test Method for Low-Temperature Flexibility and
Tenacity of One-Part, Elastomeric, Solvent-Release Type
Sealants
01/2023 JOINT SEALANTS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 92 00 - 2
ASTM C 794 Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint
Sealants
ASTM C 834 Standard Specification for Latex Sealants
ASTM C 908 Standard Test Method for Yield Strength of Preformed Tape
Sealants
ASTM C 919 Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications
ASTM C 920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM D 56 Standard Test Method for Flash Point by Tag Closed Cup Tester
ASTM D 217 Standard Test Methods for Cone Penetration of Lubricating
Grease
ASTM D 412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers - Tension
ASTM D 792 Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative
Density) of Plastics by Displacement
ASTM D 925 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property—Staining of Surfaces
(Contact, Migration, and Diffusion)
ASTM D 2452 Standard Test Method for Extrudability of Oil- and Resin-Base
Caulking Compounds
ASTM D 2453 Standard Test Method for Shrinkage and Tenacity of Oil- and
Resin Base Caulking Compounds
ASTM D 1475 Standard Test Method For Density of Liquid Coatings, Inks, and
Related Products
ASTM D 2202 Standard Test Method for Slump of Sealants
ASTM D 2203 Standard Test Method for Staining from Sealants
ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
ASTM E 90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
ASTM E 814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop
Systems
ASTM E 1966 Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
ASTM G 154 Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Ultraviolet (UV) Lamp
Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
INTERIM FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)
FS TT-S-00230C Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component
FS TT-C-1796A Caulking Compounds, Metal Seam and Wood Seam
FS TT-S-001543A Sealing Compounds: Silicone Rubber Base (For Caulking,
Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures
SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD)
Rule 1168 Adhesive and Sealant Applications
UNDERWRITER’S LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 580 Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies
SUBMITTALS
Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
01/2023 JOINT SEALANTS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 92 00 - 3
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Provide in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200,
Hazard Communication
Product Test Reports: Reports of tests required by this section performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating that the sealants comply with the requirements.
VOC Content: Provide documentation of the Volatile Organic Content (VOC) in
accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168
WARRANTY
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric
sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace
those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this
Section within 5 years of installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
Substrate Requirements: When testing is required on a substrate, the material used
shall be either ASTM A653 G-90 or ASTM A792 AZ50 and tests shall be conducted with
each of the following coatings:
Bare (No coating)
Acrylic (Galvalume Plus)
Polyester
Siliconized Polyester
Polyvinylidene Fluoride Resin (PVDF)
POLYURETHANE SEALANT
General: Provide Sealants that meet the following specifications:
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use: NT, A, M, G and O paintable
sealant
AAMA 808.3
FS TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A
Color: The sealant color shall be selected by OWNER.
Physical Properties: The sealant shall have the following additional physical properties:
Peel Adhesion: All panels shall have at least a 90% cohesive failure of at least 15
lb/in when tested in accordance with ASTM C 794.
Tensile Strength: Sealant shall have a tensile maximum of 300 psi and an elongation
of 500-600% when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412.
Sag: There shall be no sag when tested in accordance with ASTM C 639.
Hardness: Shore “A” hardness on all three samples shall not exceed 40 when tested
in accordance with ASTM C 661
Service Temperature Range: -40 degrees F to 200 degrees F.
01/2023 JOINT SEALANTS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 92 00 - 4
Water Resistance: There shall be no presence of voids, cracks, separation or
breakdown of the compound when tested in accordance with AAMA 800-10, Section
2.11.1.
Flash Point: No less than 145 degrees F when tested in accordance with ASTM D
56.
Shelf Life: The compound shall have a shelf life of 9 months or more when stored at
or below 80 degrees.
Skin Time: The compound shall have a skin time of 2-4 hours
Cure Time: The compound shall have a cure time of 24-48 hours
VOC Content: The Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content shall be less than 250
g/L when calculated SCAQMD Rule 1168.
TAPE MASTIC SEALANT
General: Provide Sealants that meet the following specifications:
AAMA 804.3
AAMA 807.3
FS TT-C-1796A, Type II, Class B
Approved by Underwriters Laboratories for use in roof deck constructions classified
under UL-518 Class 90
Color: The sealant color shall be selected by OWNER.
Physical Properties: The sealant shall have the following additional physical properties:
Specific Gravity: 1.4 or higher when tested in accordance with ASTM D 792
Tensile Adhesive Strength: 20 psi or higher when tested in accordance with ASTM C
908
Elongation: 1000% or higher when tested in accordance with ASTM C 908
Cone Penetration: The sealant shall meet the following conditions when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 217 with a 300g cone in 5 seconds:
8.5 – 100 mm at 77 degrees F
125-135 mm at 120 degrees F
45-55 mm at Zero degrees F
VOC Content: The Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content shall be less than 250
g/L when calculated SCAQMD Rule 1168.
NON-SKINNING SEALANT
General: Provide sealants that meet the following specifications:
AAMA 809,2
FS TT-C-1796A, Type 1, Class A
Color: The sealant color shall be selected by OWNER.
Physical Properties: The sealant shall have the following additional physical properties:
Extrudability: The sealant shall deposit in 30 to 50 seconds through a 0.104” orifice
at 50 psi pressure in accordance with ASTM D 2452.
01/2023 JOINT SEALANTS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 92 00 - 5
Total Solids: At least 85% by weight when determined in accordance with ASTM C
681.
Volume Shrinkage: Less than 15% when determined in accordance with ASTM D
2453.
Weight per U.S. Gallon: 10.75 lbs. +/- 0.25 lbs. when determined in accordance with
ASTM D 1475.
Vehicle Bleed out: There shall be no visible exudation of vehicle from sealant after
21 days at 158 degrees F on the test panel.
Flexibility: There shall be no loss of adhesion at -60 degrees F when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 711.
Sag: 0.20 in max, full button when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2202.
Staining: Sealant will not stain a painted test panel when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 925, Method A.
UV Resistance: There shall be no cracking, bleeding, or loss of elasticity after 1,000
hours of QUV exposure in accordance with ASTM G 154.
Wet Flammability: No less than 110 degree F flash point when determined in
accordance with ASTM D 56.
Coverage: Each gallon of sealant shall provide the following minimum coverage:
500 lineal feet with 1/8-inch bead
690 lineal feet with 3/16-inch bead
390 lineal feet with 1/4-inch bead.
Shelf Life: 18 months minimum in unopened container when stored at or below 90
degrees F.
Drying time: Non-skinning, remains permanently soft and tacky.
Engageability: Sealant will easily engage and transfer to male joint at 10 degrees F.
Service Temperature Range: -60 degrees F to 200 degrees F.
Application Temperature Range: 10 degrees F to 120 degrees F.
Non-Reactive: Will not darken, etch, or leave salt deposits on the test panel after two
years.
VOC Content: The Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content shall be less than 250
g/L when calculated SCAQMD Rule 1168.
SILICONE SEALANT
General: Provide sealants that meet the following specifications:
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25
AAMA 802.3, Type I and II
AAMA 805.2 Group C
AAMA 808.3
FS TT-S-001543A, Class A
FS TT-S-00230C, Class A
Color: Clear
Physical Properties: The sealant shall have the following additional physical properties:
Mechanical Properties: The sealant shall have the following mechanical properties
as determined by ASTM D 412:
Tensile Strength: 150 psi minimum (Method A)
Modulus at 100% Elongation: 35 psi minimum
Elongation: 400% minimum
01/2023 JOINT SEALANTS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 92 00 - 6
Recovery: 100%
Hardness: Maximum Shore A hardness of 15 when determined in accordance with
ASTM C 661.
Tack-free Time: 1/4-inch diameter bead at 77 degrees F, 50% relative humidity, 10-
15 minutes.
Cure Time: 1/4-inch diameter bead at 77 degrees F, 50% relative humidity, 10-12
hours.
Service Temperature: -60 degrees F to 300 degrees F.
Shelf Life: 9 months when stored in unopened original containers at 80 degrees F or
less.
VOC Content: The Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content shall be less than 250
g/L when calculated SCAQMD Rule 1168.
ACRYLIC SEALANT
Color:
Clear
White
Gray
Physical Properties:
Percent Solids:
Colors: 75% minimum determined in accordance with ASTM D 1475
Clear: 70% minimum determined in accordance with ASTM D 1475
Peel Adhesion: All panels shall have at least a 90% cohesive failure of at least 5 lb/in
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 794.
Weight per U.S. Gallon: 8.7 lbs. +/- 0.25 lbs. when determined in accordance with
ASTM D 1475.
Viscosity: The sealant shall meet the following conditions when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 2452 with a 20g cone with a 0.104-inch orifice at 60 psi at 77 degrees
F in the indicated time:
Colors: 40-60 seconds
Clear: 35-45 seconds
Elongation: 200% minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412.
Hardness: Maximum Shore A hardness of 55 when determined in accordance with
ASTM C 661.
Flash Point: No less than the following when tested in accordance with ASTM D 56
Colors: 52 degrees F
Clear: 40 degrees F
Slump: 0.10” maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2202.
Vehicle Migration: No vehicle migration from the sealant edge when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2203 as modified by Section 2.8.1 of AAMA 800-10.
Paintability: Compatible with Alkyds, enamels and lacquers post-solvent release.
Service Temperature Range: Zero degrees F to 180 degrees F.
Shelf Life:18 months when stored in original, unopened containers at or below 80
degrees F.
ACOUSTIC SEALANT
Color
01/2023 JOINT SEALANTS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 92 00 - 7
White
Off-White
Furnish and install an acrylic, latex-based sound caulk for use as a sealant in fire-rated
partitions, smoke barriers and sound-rated assemblies that meets the following
requirements:
ASTM C 834 specifications for latex sealants
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Class A 5/0 (flame spread/smoke developed) or
better in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Solids: 73% ± 3% (minimum)
ASTM E 90 (sound tests)
ASTM E 1966 (fire-resistant joint systems)
ASTM E 814 (through-penetration firestop systems)
Manufacturer, or approved equal:
USG Sheetrock Brand, Acoustical Sealant
Liquid Nails, AS-825
Auralex Acoustics, Stop Gap
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Install joint sealants in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and requirements.
Install acoustical sealant in accordance with ASTM C 919.
- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 JOINT SEALANTS
254.07.100 PAGE 07 92 00 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 DOORS AND FRAMES
254.07.100 PAGE 08 10 00 - 1
SECTION 08 10 00
DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This Section covers all the work necessary to furnish and install the new doors, frames,
and hardware, complete and operable.
All doors and their pressed steel frames shall be steel, insulated, and the type and size
as indicated on the Door Schedule on the Contract Drawings.
RELATED WORK
Related work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract.
The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A 115.IG Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware
ANSI A 156.6 Standard for Architectural Door Trim
ANSI A 156.16 Standard for Auxiliary Hardware
ANSI A 250.8 SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames
ANSI A 250.10 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames
ANSI A 250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A 108 Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold
Finished
ASTM A 123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A 229 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Quenched and Tempered for
Mechanical Springs
ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process
ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable
01/2023 DOORS AND FRAMES
254.07.100 PAGE 08 10 00 - 2
ASTM A 1011 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-
Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
ASTM C 177 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements
and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-
Hot-Plate Apparatus
ASTM D 256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact
Resistance of Plastics
ASTM D 635 Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time
of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position
ASTM D 790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D 792 Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative
Density) of Plastics by Displacement
ASTM D 882 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic
Sheeting
ASTM D 1622 Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular
Plastics
ASTM D 2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by
Means of a Barcol Impressor
ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
ASTM E 330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS D1.1 Structural Welding - Steel
AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel
SUBMITTALS
Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Manufacturer's catalog data and preprinted installation instructions of doors.
A schedule showing the location of each door shall be included with the drawings.
Submittal drawings shall include elevations of each door type, details and method of
anchorage, details of construction, method of assembling sections, location and
installation of hardware, shape and thickness of materials, details of joints and
connections.
Manufacturer’s certificates that certify products meet or exceed the specified
requirements.
Warranty: Provide documentation of the manufacturer’s standard written one (1) year
warranty.
01/2023 DOORS AND FRAMES
254.07.100 PAGE 08 10 00 - 3
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Doors shall be delivered to the job site wrapped in a protective covering with the brands
and names clearly marked thereon. Doors shall be stored in a dry location that is
adequately ventilated and free from dust or water, and in a manner that permits easy
access for inspection and handling. Doors shall be handled carefully to prevent damage
to the faces, edges, and ends. Damaged items that cannot be restored to like-new
condition shall be replaced.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for doors, frames, and hardware.
Full compensation for all doors, frames, and hardware shall be considered as included in
the contract unit or lump sum bid prices for the various items of the Contract to which
doors relate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
STEEL DOORS
Steel doors and frames shall be of hollow metal construction and shall be full flush design
with no visible seams. Interior and Exterior door face sheets shall be galvannealed, hot-
dip galvanized according to the requirements of ASTM A 653 with A60 finish.
Manufacturers shall be Republic Doors and Frames, Steelcraft, Ceco Door Products,
or approved equal. Doors shall conform to ANSI A 250.8 and to the following
requirements:
Hollow metal door, 1 3/4 inches thick flush type, constructed of two sheets of not less
than stretcher leveled, 16-gauge steel sheets formed and welded for flush pan
assembly, with internal 20-gauge vertical reinforcing channels spaced not over 8
inches on centers the full height of the door. There shall be no visible joints on the
face of the doors. Reinforcing channels shall be uniformly spot welded to face plates
at top and bottom of all doors. Filler channels shall be provided at the top and bottom
of doors to provide a flush closure. The top of exterior doors shall be provided with
flush, water- and weather-tight top enclosures.
All interior void spaces shall be completely filled with EPS foam or polyurethane.
Concealed sheet or bar steel reinforcement shall be provided for mortise type
hardware. Reinforcing shall not be less than the following: 9-gauge for butts, 12-
gauge for locksets and 14-gauge for surface applied hardware. Reinforcing shall be
drilled and tapped to template requirements. Concealed reinforcing shall be provided
for closures. Door bottom weather stripping shall be included to match thresholds.
Door frames shall be pressed steel constructed of not less than 16-gauge steel and
shall be of the shape indicated on the plans and as required to fit the various wall
constructions. Frames shall be of welded unit construction assembled and welded in
the shop. Welding shall be to a hairline joint with all exposed beads ground smooth.
a. Restroom Door Frame (Door 103): Frame shall wrap around both sides of the
metal stud wall and gypsum. Supplier shall adjust frame width if needed based on
manufacturers backbend length.
b. Interior Electrical Room (Door 111) and Office (Door 104): Frame shall wrap
around the metal stud wall and gypsum wall on the interior room side. The frame
can wrap around the CMU wall, but this not required.
Concealed reinforcing of the frames for the mortise hardware shall be not less than
01/2023 DOORS AND FRAMES
254.07.100 PAGE 08 10 00 - 4
the following: 3/16 inch for butts, 12- gauge for lock strike, 14-gauge for surface applied
items and 18-gauge for plaster guards over mortised hardware reinforcement. Frames
shall be mortised drilled and tapped to template requirements. Lock reinforcing units
shall be supplied by finishing hardware supplier. Frames shall be anchored as shown
in the drawings.
Hinges shall be heavy duty ball bearing hinges with non-removable pins.
Pull plates shall be chrome plated or stainless steel and mounted on interior and
exterior sides of all doors.
All double doors are to be supplied with a “Z” astragal of 14-gage steel for 1-3/4-inch
doors and 16-gage for 1-3/8-inch doors.
Hardware including locksets and hinges shall be stainless steel.
Door Swing: All doors shall be installed with 160 to 180 degree swing except Door
103 and Door 111.
DOOR HARDWARE
Trim material shall be stainless steel, unless noted otherwise.
Pull Plates: 8” CTC pull, 4” x 16” plate, stainless steel, No. 110 x 70C by Rockwood Mfg.
Co., or approved equal, conforming to ANSI A 156.6.
Hinges: satin stainless steel, 5 knuckles minimum, non-rising pin for interior doors and
non-removable pin for exterior doors, number of hinges per door manufacturer’s
recommendation (minimum of 3 hinges per door). Where necessary to keep door leaf
clear of walls, casings, jambs or reveals in door opening, wide throw hinges of an
approved type shall be furnished. Finish shall be stainless steel satin (32D or 630).
Manufacturer shall be Mckinney T4A3386, Hager, Stanley Works FBB199 (32D), or
approved equal.
Cylinder Lock Set: Best Access Systems, Lockset 47H-7-AB-15-J-630-SH-S6-VT for
exterior doors and 45H-7-N-15-M-630 for interior doors. Locks must be compatible with
Owners existing keys. Contractor shall provide lock sets and keys that will match Owner’s
requirements. Lock set shall be ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1 Operational,
Strength, and Security.
Exit Panic Devices: Exit panic devices shall be the rim style with mortice lock meeting the
requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, UL listed (3 hours) for “A” label door
applications, and ANSI A117.1 Section 404.2.6 accessibility Code (ADA Compliant). Exit
devices shall have a stainless-steel latch bolt, strike with stainless steel body with plated
steel roller standard fire-rated stainless-steel strike, zinc die-cast head cap & end cap,
escutcheon with keyed deadbolt with 7-pin Best Access cylinder, stile width 3 7⁄8"
minimum, hex key dogging, and sex bolts. Manufacturer and style shall be Stanley Sierra
or approved equal.
Lever Extension Flush Bolt, Upper, Rockwood No. 555, or approved equal, cadmium
plated finish (inactive leaf only), conforming to ANSI A 156.16.
Lever Extension Flush Bolt, Lower, Rockwood No. 555, or approved equal, cadmium
plated finish (inactive leaf only), conforming to ANSI A 156.16.
Threshold: #277AS by Pemko Corporation, or approved equal, raised interior, extruded
aluminum threshold with neoprene seal.
01/2023 DOORS AND FRAMES
254.07.100 PAGE 08 10 00 - 5
Drip Cap: Provide drip cap on all exterior doors. Drip cap shall be clear anodized
aluminum, Pemko 346C, or approved equal.
Door Closers: Door closers shall be full rack and pinion, cast iron, with adjustable
regulators for closing and latching speed, back check and spring power. Closers shall be
mounted for 180 degrees of swing whenever possible. All closers shall be LCN Model
4040XP with 4041-3071 DEL cylinder with extra duty hold open arm. Mounting plates
shall be supplied as necessary. All door closers attached to mineral core or particle filled
doors shall be installed with hex bolts. Cover shall be metal 4040XP-72MC with 689
Aluminum finish.
Lock Strikes: Strikes shall have extended curved lips where required to protect trim from
being marred by latch bolt. Strike lips shall not protrude more than 1/8-inch beyond door
frame trim. Wrought box strikes shall be furnished on all locks, latches and deadlocks.
Door Stop: Solid cast brass, DuraFlex bumper, Rockwood #445, or approved equal
(Inactive leaf only)
Non-Mortise Door Edge with Astragal: 0.06” thick stainless steel, Rockwood HD306B-
AST, or approved equal (double doors only)
Kick Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, kick plates shall be provided and shall be satin
stainless 18-8, 18 gage, Rockwood No. K1050F, or approved equal.
Weatherstripping and Seals: silicone gasketing, Pemko S88D, or approved equal.
Door Bottom Sweep: stainless steel with neoprene seal, Pemko 3151SSN, or approved
equal.
ACOUSTIC SOUND DOORS AND FRAMES
General: Sound retardant doors and frames shall be complete factory-built, and
laboratory tested assemblies, complete with perimeter compression seals and automatic,
door-bottom seals at sill. Assemblies shall be complete with metal frame, door(s), sealing
system, and Cam-lift hinges.
Performance: Sound retardant metal swinging door system shall be Overly Model No.
5292185, or approved equal, with a STC rating of 52 when tested as and operable system
in accordance with ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413.
Materials: Sound doors and frames shall be constructed from formed sheet steel or
structural shapes and bars. Sheet steel shall be commercial quality, level, cold rolled steel
conforming to ASTM A 366 or hot rolled, pickled, and oiled steel conforming to ASTM A
1011. Steel shapes shall comply with ASTM A 36 and steel bars with ASTM A 108, Grade
1018. Exterior and Interior units shall be fabricated from Galvannealed material
conforming to ASTM A 653 (A60) with a coating weight of not less than 0.60 ounces per
square foot.
Door Design: Sound doors shall be a 1-3/4” nominal minimum thickness construction
with sizes as indicated on the Contract Drawings. No visible seams shall be permitted on
door faces. Face gauges, internal sound retardant core and perimeter door edge
construction to be manufacturer’s standard for the specified model. No lead or asbestos
01/2023 DOORS AND FRAMES
254.07.100 PAGE 08 10 00 - 6
shall be permitted in door construction to achieve STC performance.
Frame Design: Sound door shall be 14-gauge minimum welded units with integral trim
and shipped with temporary spreader. Knock-down frames are not acceptable.
Cam Lift Hinges: When required to achieve STC, manufacturer to furnish laboratory test
data certifying hinges have been cycled a minimum of 1,000,000 while supporting a
minimum door weight of 350 pounds.
Hardware Reinforcements: Factory mortise, reinforce drill and tap and door and frames
for all mortise hardware as required by hardware manufacturer’s template. Provide
necessary reinforcement plates as required for surface mounted hardware; all drilling and
tapping to be done in field by installer. Provide dust cover boxes on all frame mortises.
Perimeter Seals: Perimeter seals shall be made of sturdy vinyl with a magnetic tape
insert. The hinge side shall be constructed to avoid pinching or other distortion of the seal
from opening and closing the door.
Automatic Door Bottoms: Automatic door bottoms shall close the entire gap between
the door and the floor. The seal shall be 50 to 60 durometer neoprene, and the actuating
mechanism shall compress or retract the seal properly when the outer face of the door is
within 2-inchs of the strike jamb.
Anchors: Provide suitable anchors to properly install frames in walls. Frames in masonry
walls shall have adjustable strap or wire anchors and headers and jambs must be fully
grouted in the field.
Painting and Cleaning: After fabrication of frames, all tool marks and surface
imperfections shall be removed, and exposed faces of all welded joints dressed smooth.
Chemically treat all surfaces to insure maximum paint adhesion and coat with a rust-
inhibitive primer.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES MISCELLANEOUS
Fabricate doors and frames as shown on the drawings and in accordance with best shop
practices. Frames shall be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. Field
measurements shall be taken as required for coordination with adjoining work.
Form exposed surfaces free from warp, wave, and buckle, with all corners square, unless
otherwise shown. Set each member in proper alignment and relationship to other
members with all surfaces straight and in a true plane.
Reinforce members and joints with plates, tubes or angles for rigidity and strength.
Doors and frames shall be mortised and reinforced for hardware in accordance with the
hardware manufacturer’s instructions and templates. The reinforcing shall be designed
to receive hinges, locks, strikes, closures, etc.
Mortar guard boxes shall be provided for hardware cutouts in frames.
Furnish at least three (3) metal anchors or polymer spacers in each jamb of frames up to
84" high and one (1) additional anchor for each 24" in height above 84", in shapes, sizes
and spacing shown or required for anchorage into adjoining wall construction. Fabricate
01/2023 DOORS AND FRAMES
254.07.100 PAGE 08 10 00 - 7
joint anchor of stainless steel.
Terminate bottom of frames at the indicated finished floor level.
Provide clearance for doors of 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/4" clearance above threshold.
Where glazing is required, flush integral stops on one side and screw-on stops on the
opposite side shall be provided.
FINISH
Surfaces shall be provided with a shop-primed galvanized finish. Prior to receiving primer,
all surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and phosphate-treated to assure maximum paint
adherence. Primer shall be a metallic oxide or synthetic resin primer of the manufacturer's
standard type and shall be applied by dipping or spraying in accordance with ANSI A
250.10.
Field painting of doors and frames shall be in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting
and Finishes. Finish coat shall be compatible with the shop applied primer coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Doors shall be installed in accordance with approved detail drawings and manufacturer's
instructions and in accordance with ANSI A 115IG. Anchors and inserts for guides,
brackets, hardware, and other accessories shall be accurately located. Upon completion,
doors shall be weather tight and shall be free from warp, twist, or distortion. Doors shall
be lubricated, properly adjusted, and demonstrated to operate freely.
Access Door Frame Installation
Place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors
are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders
leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Frame must not be drilled for brace
supports as finish may be damaged. Install frames in accordance with ANSI A 250.11.
Locate three (3) wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. Frames may be
grouted full of mortar at jambs and anchors shall be built into the joints as walls are
laid up. A continuous bead of silicone sealant is to be applied between the head and
jamb at the miter joint.
Adjust doors for free swing without binding. Adjust hinge sets, locksets, and other
hardware. Lubricate using a suitable lubricant compatible with the door and frame
coatings.
Install work of this Section in strict accordance with approved shop drawings and
manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions. Where installations require field
welding, all work must be performed by certified welders in accordance with AWS
D1.1/D1.3.
Upon installation, secure the services of a qualified representative of the manufacturer to
visit the jobsite and inspect the complete installation of the door and frame assemblies,
01/2023 DOORS AND FRAMES
254.07.100 PAGE 08 10 00 - 8
test all components thru a minimum of ten (10) cycles of operation and direct installer in
correcting any non-conforming items found.
Remove temporary coverings. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean
installed products in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions before acceptance
by OWNER.
Clearances at edge of doors:
Between door and frame at head and jambs: 1/8 inch.
At meeting edges pairs of doors and at mullions: 1/8 inch.
At transom panels, without transom bars: 1/8 inch.
At sills without thresholds: 5/8-inch maximum above finish floor.
At sills with thresholds: 1/8-inch above threshold.
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
The hardware schedule is arranged for convenience of locating hardware and does not
preclude in any way the requirements that all necessary hardware shall be furnished and
properly installed. Hardware not specifically called out shall be similar to that required for
similar uses.
Hardware equal in quality and utility will be accepted provided it conforms in operation,
quality, weight, size, workmanship, and finish to the products hereinafter described. All
component parts of locksets shall be the product of one manufacturer.

Hardware Set 100 (Single Exterior Doors: 101, 103, 105, 111, 112, 113)
Each to Receive:
Quantity Item Model No. Finish Manufacturer
3 each* Hinge T4A3386-NRP
4.5”x4.5”
32D McKinney
1 each Exit Devices QED311-
QET330-M
689 Stanley
1 each Closer 4040XP 689 LCN
1 each Kickplate K1050F 630 Rockwood
1 each Wall Stop 409 32D Rockwood
3 each Silencer 608 Gray Rockwood
1 each Threshold 277AS Alum Pemko
1 each Drip Cap 346C Alum Pemko
1 set Perimeter Seal S88D Alum Pemko
*Five Knuckle, Stainless Steel, Non-removal Pin Hinges (size and quantity by door
manufacturer)

01/2023 DOORS AND FRAMES
254.07.100 PAGE 08 10 00 - 9
Hardware Set 600 (Double Exterior Door: 102)
Each to Receive:
Quantity Item Model No. Finish Manufacturer
3 each*** Hinge MKCL-180*** 32D McKinney
1 each* Lockset 47H-7-AB-15-M-
630-S6-VT
630 Best Access Systems
1 each Closer 4040XP 689 LCN
1 each Kickplate K1050F 630 Rockwood
1 each Astragal HD306B-AST 630 Rockwood
1 each** Flush Bolt, upper 555 626 Rockwood
1 each** Flush Bolt, lower 555 626 Rockwood
1 each Threshold 277AS Alum Pemko
1 each Drip Cap 346C Alum Pemko
1 set Perimeter Seal S88D Alum Pemko
* Deadbolt required on Active Leaf only
** Inactive Leaf Only
*** Cam lift hinges, stainless steel (size and quantity by door manufacturer)

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 DOORS AND FRAMES
254.07.100 PAGE 08 10 00 - 10

01/2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
254.07.100 PAGE 08 33 23 - 1
SECTION 08 33 23
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This section covers all the work necessary to furnish and install new overhead coiling
doors, frames, motors, and hardware, complete and operable.
RELATED WORK
Related work in other sections includes but is not limit to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metals
Section 09 91 00 Painting and Finishes
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the
Contract. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM D 3363 Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test

ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials

ASTM E 90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings
American Society OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)
ASCE-7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
UNDERWRITERS laboratories (UL)
UL 325 Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators
and Systems

01/2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
254.07.100 PAGE 08 33 23 - 2
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Manufacturer's catalog product data and preprinted installation instructions of doors.
A schedule showing the location of each door shall be included with the shop drawings.
Submittal drawings shall include elevations of each door type, details and method of
anchorage, details of construction, wiring diagrams in motors are required, locations of
louvers and glass if required, method of assembling sections, location and installation of
hardware, shape and thickness of materials, details of joints and connections.
Submit calculations stamped by a registered engineer showing connections are
designed to meet code requirements and loads.
Provide manufacturer and installer qualifications as noted below.
Manufacturer’s certificates that certify products meet or exceed the specified
requirements.
Submit operation and maintenance manual.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Doors shall be delivered to the job site wrapped in a protective covering with the brands
and names clearly marked thereon. Doors shall be stored in a dry location that is
adequately ventilated and free from dust or water, and in a manner that permits easy
access for inspection and handling. Doors shall be handled carefully to prevent damage
to the faces, edges, and ends. Damaged items that cannot be restored to like-new
condition shall be replaced.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: A minimum of five (5) years experience in producing doors
of the type specified.
Installer Qualifications: Installer must be approved or certified by the manufacturer.
WARRANTY
Standard Warranty: Two years from data of shipment against defects in material and
workmanship.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for overhead coiling doors. Full
compensation for all doors shall be considered as included in the contract unit or lump
sum bid prices for the various items of the contract to which doors relate.
01/2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
254.07.100 PAGE 08 33 23 - 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
OVERHEAR COILING DOORS
General: Overhead coiling doors (roll-up doors) shall be of the metal curtain slat design,
motor operated, and shall be weather and dust-resistant. Wiring diagrams shall be
submitted for motor operated doors. Doors shall be provided complete with slats,
guides, hoods, reduction gears, galvanized hand chain, operating mechanism, motors,
controls, wiring, brackets, gears, head, bottom and side weather stripping, hardware,
and other items necessary for complete installation and operation.
Wind Loading: The doors shall be designed to withstand a wind load of 1115 MPH,
Exposure B. Door shall also be designed to withstand 20 psf inward and 26 psf outward.
Within 10 feet of corner inward pressure to be 33 psf and outward pressure to be 26 psf
Air infiltration shall comply with ASHRAE 90.1 requirements of less than 1.0 CFM/SF.
Cycle Life: Design doors of standard construction for normal use of up to 20 cycles per
day maximum and an overall maximum of 50,000 operating cycles for the life of the
door.
Provide manufacturer’s seismic calculations confirming ASCE 7-05.
Manufacturer, or approved equal:
Cookson Model TMWI
Cornell Model ESD30
Overhead Door Stormtite Series
MATERIALS
Curtain: Shall have an air infiltration rate of less than 0.4 CFM/SF, validated by an
independent testing agency.
Fabrication:

Slat Material: No. 6F or 3/4 inch minimum by 2-1/2 inch minimum, (Listed
Exterior/Interior):

1) Galvanized Steel/Galvanized Steel: Manufacturer recommended
gauge based on performance requirements. Minimum 24/24
gauge, Grade 40, ASTM A 653 galvanized steel zinc coating

Insulation: foamed-in-place, closed cell urethane. Insulation shall be CFC Free
with an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) rating of zero.

Flame Spread Index of 5 and a Smoke Developed Index of 10 as tested per
ASTM E 84

R-value: 7.7 minimum (U-value of 0.125) per ASHRAE.

01/2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
254.07.100 PAGE 08 33 23 - 4
STC Rating: Up to 30 for the curtain and up to 22 for the entire assembly, as
tested per ASTM E 90 and based on testing a complete, operable assembly.

Exterior and Interior Slat Finish:

ColorCote® (or equivalent) Coating System:

ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating treated with dual process rinsing agents in
preparation for chemical bonding, gray baked-on base coat and gray baked-on
polyester finish coat.

Phosphate treatment followed by baked-on polyester powder coat, with color as
selected by OWNER from manufacturer's standard color range; minimum 2.5
mils cured film thickness; ASTM D 3363 pencil hardness: H or better.
Endlocks: Fabricate interlocking sections with high strength nylon or galvanized cast
iron endlocks on alternate slats each secured with two 1/4 inch rivets. Provide windlocks
as required to meet specified wind load.
Nylon: Required up to 21’-5” width (DBG - Distance Between Guides)

Galvanized cast iron: Required if above 21’-5” width (DBG - Distance Between
Guides)
Insulated Bottom Bar: Reinforced extruded aluminum interior face with full depth
insulation and exterior skin slat to match curtain material and gauge. Minimum 4” tall x 1-
1/16” thickness.
Finish:

Exterior: Match slats
Interior: Powder coat to match slats

Air Infiltration Certification Label: Must be affixed to bottom bar
Guides:
Fabrication:

Thermal break required: Minimum 3/16 inch stainless steel angles. Provide
windlock bars of same material when windlocks are required to meet specified
wind load. Top of inner and outer guide angles to be flared outwards to form
bellmouth for smooth entry of curtain into guides. Provide removable guide
stoppers to prevent over travel of curtain and bottom bar.

Finish:

Stainless Steel: Type 304 #4 Finish
Counterbalance Shaft Assembly:
01/2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
254.07.100 PAGE 08 33 23 - 5
Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03
inches per foot of width.

Spring Balance: Oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly
designed for proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not
exceed 25 lbs. Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque.
Brackets: Fabricate from minimum 3/16 inch steel plate with permanently lubricated ball
or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly
and form end closures.
Finish: Hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 123, Grade 85 zinc coating. Hot-dip
galvanize after fabrication.
Hood: Minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel with reinforced top and bottom edges.
Provide minimum 1/4 inch steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent
excessive sag.
Finish:

ColorCote® (or equivalent) Coating System:

ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating treated with dual process rinsing
agents in preparation for chemical bonding, gray baked-on base coat and
gray baked-on polyester finish coat.

Phosphate treatment followed by baked-on polyester powder coat, with
color as selected by OWNER from manufacturer's standard color range;
minimum 2.5 mils cured film thickness; ASTM D 3363 pencil hardness: H
or better.
Weather Stripping:
Bottom Bar:

Manually Operated Doors: Replaceable, bulb-style, compressible EDPM gasket
extending into guides.

Motor Operated Doors: Sensing/weather edge with neoprene astragal extending
full width of door bottom bar

Guides: Replaceable vinyl strip on guides sealing against both sides of curtain.

Lintel Seal: Nylon brush seal fitted at door header to impede air flow.

Hood: Neoprene/rayon baffle to impede air flow above coil.

01/2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
254.07.100 PAGE 08 33 23 - 6
OPERATION
Manual Chain Hoist: Provide chain hoist operator with endless steel chain, chain
pocket wheel and guard, geared reduction unit, and chain keeper secured to guide.
Fabricate gear box to completely enclose operating mechanism and be oil-tight.
Motor Operator: The operator must not extend above or below the door coil when
mounted front-of-coil. Rated for a maximum of 20 cycles per hour (not to be used for
consecutive hours) UL listed, Totally Enclosed Non-Ventilated gear head operator(s)
rated 1/2 hp min, or larger, as recommended by door manufacture for size and type of
door, 480 Volts, Three Phase, 60 Hz. Provide complete with electric motor and factory
pre-wired motor control terminals, maintenance free solenoid actuated brake,
emergency manual chain hoist, and control station. Motor shall be high starting torque,
industrial type, protected against overload with an auto-reset thermal sensing device.
Primary speed reduction shall be heavy-duty, lubricated gears with mechanical braking
to hold the door in any position. Operator shall be equipped with an emergency manual
chain hoist assembly that safely cuts operator power when engaged.
A disconnect chain shall not be required to engage or release the manual chain hoist.
Operator drive and door driven sprockets shall be provided with #50 roller chain. Provide
an integral Motor Mounted Interlock system to prevent damage to door and operator
when mechanical door locking devices are provided. Operator shall be capable of driving
the door at a speed of 8 to 9 inches per second.
Fully adjustable, driven linear screw type cam limit switch mechanism shall synchronize
the operator with the door. The electrical contractor shall mount the control station and
supply the appropriate disconnect switch, all conduit and wiring per the overhead door
wiring instructions. The motor-operated doors, motors, controls, safety devices, and
wiring shall conform to requirements of governing codes and authorities. Motor operator
shall be Cookson Model SG, Cornell Model MG, Overhead Door Model RHX, or
approved equal.
Control Station: “Open/Close” key switch with “Stop” push button in a NEMA 3R
enclosure.
Control Operation:
Momentary Contact to Close, Fail-safe UL 325 Compliant entrapment protection for
motor operation; 2-wire, E.L.R. electric sensing/weather edge extending full width of
door bottom bar. Contact before door fully closes shall cause door to immediately
stop downward travel and reverse direction to the fully opened position.

Sensing/Weather Edge: Automatic reversing control by an automatic sensing switch
within neoprene or rubber astragal extending full width of door bottom bar.

Electric sensing edge device. Provide a wireless sensing edge connection to
motor operator eliminating the need for a physical traveling electric cord
connection between bottom bar sensing edge device and motor operator.
01/2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
254.07.100 PAGE 08 33 23 - 7
ACCESSORIES
Locking: For non-motor operated doors, provide a master keyable cylinder operable from
both sides of bottom bar, options for all types of operation. Cylinder shall be BEST 7-pin.
Vision Panels: 10 x 1-1/2 x 3/4 inch thick oval acrylic panes set with double-sided foam
glazing tape and fully contained within slat assembly. Refer to drawings for number and
placement. Smaller vision panels are not acceptable.
Operator and Bracket Mechanism Cover: If the operator components are lower than 8
feet above finish floor level, provide Minimum 0.040 inch aluminum sheet metal cover to
enclose exposed moving operating components at coil area of unit.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in
accordance with approved shop drawings
Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory
substrates.
Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate.
INSTALLATION
General: Install overhead coiling door and operating equipment with necessary
hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and supports in accordance with the
manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Doors and frames shall be accurately cut, fitted, and installed level, square, plumb, and
in alignment. Fasteners shall be of sufficient length and shall be sized for loads
imposed.
Installation of motor operators shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation
instructions and as required by Division 26.
ADJUSTING
Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test, and
adjust the doors for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion.
CLEANING
Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by the manufacturer.
Remove surplus materials and debris from the site.
DEMONSTRATION
Demonstrate proper operation to OWNER’s Representative.
01/2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
254.07.100 PAGE 08 33 23 - 8
Instruct OWNER’s Representative in maintenance procedures.

- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 SKYLIGHTS
254.07.100 PAGE 08 62 00 - 1
SECTION 08 62 00
SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
This Section covers all the Work necessary to furnish and install skylights, complete and
in place.
RELATED WORK
Related work in other Sections includes but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the
Contract. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURER’S ASSOCIATION (AAMA)
AAMA 1606 Voluntary Uniform Load Structural Standard for Plastic
Domed Skylights
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products
ASTM B 221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
ASTM D 256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact
Resistance of Plastics
ASTM D 4802 Standard Specification for Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic
Plastic Sheet
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
General: Provide unit skylights capable of withstanding loads indicated without failure.
Failure includes the following:
Thermal stresses transferred to the building structure.
Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movement, to glazing.
Noise or vibration created by thermal and structural movement and wind.
Weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
01/2023 SKYLIGHTS
254.07.100 PAGE 08 62 00 - 2
Structural Loads: Provide unit skylights that meet the requirements of AAMA 1606-82,
which requires acrylic thickness adequate to withstand a positive and negative test
pressure of 60 PSF.
SUBMITTALS
Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Product Data Sheet: For each type of skylight specified, include details of construction
and installation, relative to applicable roofing materials, materials, gauges, sizes,
finishes, and fasteners.
Samples for Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts showing a full range of colors
available for each type of skylight glazing and Aluminum Finish.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Skylights shall be delivered to the jobsite wrapped in a protective covering with the
brands and names clearly marked thereon.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer shall provide to the Owner written guarantee against defects in material or
workmanship for a period of five (5) years.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for skylights. Full compensation
for all skylights shall be considered as included in the contract unit or lump sum bid
prices for the various items of the Contract to which they relate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
SKYLIGHTS
Skylights shall be as noted on the drawings and be manufactured by Wasco Products,
Inc., Aladdin Industries, or approved equal. Skylights shall be factory assembled with
square double-dome type designed to meet applicable OSHA and building code
requirements. Skylights shall be watertight with curb frame insulation and meet the
requirements specified herein. All hardware shall be stainless steel throughout.
Skylights shall be provided with a permanent label showing the manufacturer's name
and address and the model number.
Curb Frame: High performance PVC with minimum effective thickness of 0.60 inch.
Provide integral condensation gutter with corners fully welded for waterproof quality.
Retainer Frame: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5 (min) conforming to ASTM B 221
with minimum effective thickness of 0.60 inch.
Integral Curbs (Where indicated): Fabricated from double skin of 1100-H14 sheet
aluminum, insulated with 1-inch fiberglass insulation. Provide thermal break at top
and bottom. Provide minimum 0.025 inch minimum thickness inner and outer skin.
Outer skin to be 0.032 inch when length exceeds 48 inches.
01/2023 SKYLIGHTS
254.07.100 PAGE 08 62 00 - 3
Plastic Sheets: Monolithic, formable, transparent (colorless – Clear) with good
weather and impact resistant.
a. Acrylic: Conforming to ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, acrylic (methacrylate),
Category C-2 or CC-2 Type UVA (formulated with ultraviolet absorber), with
Finish 1 (smooth or polished), unless otherwise indicated. Average impact
strength of 5.0 ft-lb/in when tested per ASTM D 256 (Charpy unnotched).
b. Impact Modified Acrylic: Conforming to ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, acrylic
(methacrylate) impact modified sheets manufactured by the extrusion process,
category C-2 or CC-2, type UVA (formulated with ultraviolet absorber) with Finish
1 (smooth or polished). Average impact strength of 0.75 ft-lb/inch (40 J/m of
notch) when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A (Izod).
Thermal Break: Fabricate skylight units with thermal barrier separating interior metal
framing from materials exposed to outside temperature.
Shape and Size: As indicated by model number.
Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened or non-magnetic stainless steel
as recommended by the manufacturer.
SKYLIGHT SCREENS
All skylights that do not meet OSHA and building code requirements for opening
protection shall be provide with skylight screens. Screens shall be designed to meet
OSHA regulation 29 CFR 910.23(e)(8) and shall meet the code requirements for
opening protection. The entire assembly and anchoring system shall be designed and
tested to withstand a minimum impact load of 300 foot pounds.
Screens shall be hot-dip galvanized, 3-inch by 4-inch welded wire mesh with a minimum
diameter of 0.195-inch. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A 123.
Screens shall be manufactured by Wasco Products, Inc., Aladdin Industries,
Plasteco, Inc., or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Skylights shall be installed in accordance with approved detail drawings and
manufacturer's instructions. Anchors and inserts for guides, brackets, hardware, and
other accessories shall be accurately located. Upon completion, skylights shall be
weather tight and shall be free from warp, twist, or distortion.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape as recommended by
the manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry,
protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. Where
aluminum will contact pressure-treated wood, separate dissimilar materials by methods
recommended by the manufacturer.
01/2023 SKYLIGHTS
254.07.100 PAGE 08 62 00 - 4
Coordinate with installation of the roof deck and other substrates to receive skylights.
Coordinate vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing material, and flashing as required to
assure that each element of the work performs properly and that combined elements
was waterproof and watertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structure substrates
to adequately withstand lateral and thermal stresses as well as inward and outward
loading pressures.
Where counter flashing is required as a component of the skylight, install to provide
adequate waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing. Seal with a thick bead of
mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation.

- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 GYPSUM BOARD
254.07.100 PAGE 09 20 00 - 1
SECTION 09 20 00
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
CONTRACTOR shall provide gypsum board and appurtenances, complete and in place,
as shown on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with the specifications.
RELATED WORK
Related Work in other sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM C 473 Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel
Products
ASTM C 475 Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for
Finishing Gypsum Board
ASTM C 754 Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members
to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products
ASTM C 840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum
Board
ASTM C 919 Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications
ASTM C 920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C 1002 Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to
Wood Studs or Steel Studs
ASTM C 1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use
as Sheathing
ASTM C 1178 Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant
Gypsum Backing Panel
ASTM C 1280 Standard Specification for Application of Exterior Gypsum Panel
Products for Use as Sheathing
ASTM C 1325 Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced
Cementitious Backer Units
ASTM C 1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board
ASTM C 1629 Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior
Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels
ASTM C 1658 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels
ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the
Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber
01/2023 GYPSUM BOARD
254.07.100 PAGE 09 20 00 - 2
ASTM E 72 Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels
for Building Construction
ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
ASTM E 90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
ASTM E 119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials
ASTM E 136 Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube
Furnace at 750°C
ASTM E 814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop
Systems
ASTM G 21 Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic
Polymeric Materials to Fungi
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
ANSI A 108.11 Specifications for Interior Installations of Cementitious Backer
Units
ANSI A 118.9 Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units
Gypsum Association (GA)
GA-214 Recommended Levels of Finish – Gypsum Board, Glass Mat &
Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panels
GA-216 Application Finishing Gypsum Panel Products
GA-234 Control Joints for Fire-Resistance Rated Systems
GA-253 Application of Gypsum Sheathing
GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual
Wall and Ceiling Bureau (WCB)
TB-52010 Control Joints for Gypsum Board
SUBMITTALS
CONTRACTOR shall submit documents per the requirements of Section 01 33 00
Submittal Procedures.
Submit manufacturer’s literature, product data sheets, and installation instructions for
plaster and gypsum products and appurtenances to be used in the Work.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Delivery, storage, and handling of gypsum products shall be in accordance with Section
01 60 00 – Product Requirements, the manufacturer’s printed instructions, and as
indicated below.
Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original unbroken packages, containers, or
bundles, bearing the manufacturer’s label.
01/2023 GYPSUM BOARD
254.07.100 PAGE 09 20 00 - 3
Verify products undamaged before acceptance at the Project Site. Do not use products
with visible signs of mold and damage.
Storage
Store the materials in an area that is protected from the elements as recommended
by the manufacturer.
Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage to the material and its finish.
Materials shall be stored above ground in a dry and ventilated space,
Boards that will be directly applied to masonry walls shall be stored at 70 degrees F
for 24 hours prior to installation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Do not install gypsum board when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for plaster and gypsum board.
Full compensation for plaster and gypsum board shall be considered as included in the
contract unit or lump sum bid prices for the various items of the contract to which it
relates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS OR APPROVED EQUAL:
National Gypsum Company
United States Gypsum Company (USG Corporation)
Georgia Pacific Corporation
Certainteed (a Saint-Gobain Company)
ACOUSTICALLY ENHANCED GYPSUM BOARD
Performance Criteria – Wall Assembly STC: (wood stud construction) 52 (metal stud
construction 55.
Attach gypsum board to furring channels hung from KNC “Wave Hanger” Acoustic
System per manufacturer instructions.
Panel Physical Characteristics
Core
Inner Layer: Viscoelastic damping polymer
Outer layers: Enhanced, high density mold-resistant gypsum core
Overall thickness: 5/8 inch, Type X
Long Edges: Tapered
Mold Resistance:
10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273
0 when tested in accordance with ASTM G 21
01/2023 GYPSUM BOARD
254.07.100 PAGE 09 20 00 - 4
Surface Abrasion Resistance: Classification Level 3 in accordance with ASTM C
1629
Indentation Resistance: Classification Level 1 in accordance with ASTM C 1629
Soft Body Impact Resistance: Classification Level 2 in accordance with ASTM C
1629
Hard Body Impact Resistance: Level 1 in accordance with ASTM C 1629
Environmental Requirements: Provide products that comply with testing and product
requirements for low emitting materials
ACCESSORY PRODUCTS
Acoustical Sealant
Conform to ASTM C 919
VOC content less than 15 g/L
Manufacturer, or approved equal:
Grabber Acoustical Sealant GSCS
USG Acoustical Sealant
STI SpecSeal Smoke N Sound Caulk
BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant
Firestopping
Conform to ASTM E 90
Manufacturer, or approved equal:
STI SpecSeal SSP Putty Pads
USG Firecode Smoke-Sound Sealant
3M Fire Barrier Moldable Putty Pads MPP+
BOSS 818 Fire Rated Putty Pads
Metal trim, corner beads, edge, casing beads, and accessories shall be manufactured
from galvanized sheet steel unless noted otherwise.
FASTENERS
General: Fastener screws shall be of the self-drilling, self-tapping, bugle head type for
use with power tools, with a length as recommended by the Gypsum Association
referenced standards and in accordance with the local Building Code.
Types:
Type “S” for board-to-sheet metal application
Type “W” for board-to-wood application
Type “G” for board-to-board application
Type “S” or “S-12”, for tile backing board-to-metal studs application
TAPE
General: Joint reinforcing tape shall conform to ASTM C 475 and ASTM C 840.
Tape:
01/2023 GYPSUM BOARD
254.07.100 PAGE 09 20 00 - 5
Paper Tape: 2- 1/16 inches wide, ProForm Joint Tape – Heavy, USG Heavy Joint
Tape, CertainTeed Marco Spark-Perf 94# Heavy Weight, or approved equal.
Fiberglass Mesh Tape: Nominal 2-inch wide self-adhering tape, ProForm
Fiberglass Mesh Tape, FibaTape Drywall Joint Tape, or approved equal.
JOINT COMPOUND
General: Joint compound shall conform to ASTM C 475.
Drying Type Compound:
Ready Mix vinyl base compound, ProForm All Purpose Ready Mix Joint
Compound, USG All Purpose Joint Compound - Select, CertainTeed All
Purpose, or approved equal.
Ready Mix vinyl base compound formulated for enhanced mold and mildew
resistance, ProForm XP Ready Mix Joint Compound, CertainTeed Mold
Resistant Lite All-Purpose, or approved equal, conforms to ASTM D 3273
Ready Mix vinyl base topping compound for finish coating, ProForm Topping
Compound, CertainTeed Topping, USG Topping Joint Compound, or approved
equal
Ready Mix vinyl base compound for embedding joint tape, cornerbeads or other
accessories, ProForm Taping Joint Compound, CertainTeed Heavy Taping Joint
Compound, USG Ready-Mixed Taping Joint Compound, or approved equal
Field Mix vinyl base compound, ProForm Triple-T Compound, or approved equal
Setting Compound:
Field mixed hardening compound, ProForm Quick Set Setting Compound, USG
Durabond Setting-Type Compound, or approved equal
Field mixed hardening compound for fire resistance rated construction and
penetrations, ProForm Fire Shield 90, USG Firecode Compound, or approved
equal, conforms to ASTM E 136 and ASTM E 814.
Field mixed hardening compound for mold and moisture resistance, CertainTeed
M2Tech 90 Setting Compound, or approved equal.
Joint Sealant
Joint sealants shall conform to ASTM C 920
Joint sealants shall have VOC content less than 2 g/L
ACCESS PANELS
Provide access panels where indicated or where required for access to valves and
equipment
Standard access panels: flush installation type, grey powder coated steel, double-acting
concealed spring hinges, screw type lock, Milcor Type DW, KARP Model KDW, or
approved equal.
Acoustical access panel: recessed panel, with screw type lock, Milcor Type AP, or
approved equal.
01/2023 GYPSUM BOARD
254.07.100 PAGE 09 20 00 - 6
Fire rated access panel: UL listed, self-closing, self-latching, Milcor Type UFR, or
approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
GENERAL
Provide gypsum board over framing and furring members.
Gypsum board installation and fire-rated gypsum board construction shall conform to
applicable codes, reference standards, manufacturer’s printed recommendations, the
Gypsum Association’s recommendations, and the following requirements:
Gypsum board shall be applied first to the ceiling and then to the walls.
Fastening
Gypsum board shall be screwed to metal framing and furring.
The fastener spacing shall be in accordance with the referenced standards.
Do not attach gypsum board to metal roof decking.
The gypsum wall board surface finish shall be as indicated below.
The installation of the steel framing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 754 and
code requirements.
EXAMINATION
Verify installation conditions are satisfactory to receive work of this Section before
beginning.
Verify framing systems, including backing, insulation, vapor barriers, and other systems
ready for work of this Section.
Do not begin work until building envelope is fully enclosed and temperature, ventilation,
and humidity are controlled.
Do not begin work under conditions that gypsum board installation may be exposed to
contact with water.
PREPARATION
Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage.
Avoid soiling, spatter, and damage to work of other trades. Use cover cloths, or other
means of protection. Remove, clean, and repair soiled or damaged work.
INSTALLATION
Conform to ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer’s instructions.
Corner Trim: Reinforce external corners with specified corner beads.
Edge Trim: Install square edged metal trim bead at exposed edges and boundaries of
areas where abutting dissimilar materials.
Reveal Trim:
01/2023 GYPSUM BOARD
254.07.100 PAGE 09 20 00 - 7
Install with screws at 12 inch on center in 10 foot lengths, except where shorter
lengths are sufficient for dimension of wall plane.
Make butt joints tight and in alignment.
Miter corners.
Promptly remove excess joint compound.
Control Joints: Conform to WCB TB-52010 and GA-234, except as otherwise indicated.
Verify that required double framing is in place before installing control joints.
Door and Other Openings: Install control joints at each side of wall opening and at
both sides of wall, except alcoves and similar wall configurations.
Continuous Wall Planes: Install control joints floor to ceiling at each 30 lineal foot of
wall.
Ceilings: Install across ceiling at each 50 lineal foot distance and each 2,500 square
foot of ceiling area.
Joints with Other Materials: Install where gypsum board meets masonry, concrete,
and other materials, except where joints are concealed under horizontal chair rails or
other trim.
Other Trim: Install as indicated or required for complete and finished installation.
Panel Joints:
Layout: Design to reduce joints to minimum.
Install board in maximum lengths to minimize horizontal and vertical joints.
Start installation of panels at exterior wall to position butt joints as far away from
exterior wall as possible.
Place edges in contact and fit neatly, without forcing into place.
Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions and on same side of wall surface at
adjacent joints.
Maintain 1/2 inch clearance from bottom of wall panel and top of floor. Seal with
acoustical sealant.
In order to prevent wicking of moisture, do not let gypsum board rest on floor after
installation.
Single Layer Systems: Install in accordance with ASTM C840. Where modified,
amended, or required by fire resistive or sound isolation system, conform to the
requirements of the manufacturer's tests, as approved.
Double Layer Systems: Install in accordance with ASTM C840, including System VIII for
double layer gypsum wallboard installations applied with screws. Conform to required
fire resistance standards.
Joint Sealant and Acoustical Sealant: Install to completely fill void between wallboard
edges and adjacent surface.
Firestopping and Smoke Sealants: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Plumbing, HVAC, and Electrical: Coordinate work with other Divisions. Provide for
installations and penetrations of ductwork, equipment, receptacles, and other work.
01/2023 GYPSUM BOARD
254.07.100 PAGE 09 20 00 - 8
TOLERANCES
Shim panels as necessary to conform to tolerances.
Between Board Faces: 1/16 inch offset.
ADJUSTING
Remove and replace the following gypsum board installations:
Board in contact with water for over 18 hour time period
Gypsum core exhibiting dampness or water intrusion
Facing paper exhibiting delamination
Facing of core exhibiting mold growth or turning black
Board sagging or warped
Board directly exposed to water determined to be contaminated
CLEANING
Clean beads, screeds, metal base, metal trim, mechanical and electrical items, and
other work.
Wipe clean, leaving work ready for finish specified under other Sections.
As work is completed in each space, clean all rubbish, utensils, and surplus materials
from the space. Leave floors broom-clean.
SURFACE FINISH
Gypsum board joints shall be taped, and joints, end trim, corner beads, fasteners, and
other depressions shall be treated with joint and finishing compounds, applied in
accordance with the manufacturer’s printed recommendations for Level 4 Finish (3-coat
work) according to ASTM C 840 and the table below.
The gypsum board shall be sanded smooth, dusted, and provided with a smooth finish
coat.
PAINTING
The surface shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes.
LEVEL OF FINISH
Finish Level Description
Level 0 No taping, finishing or corner beads are required.
Level 1 All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint
compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool
marks and ridges shall be acceptable.
Level 2
(1-coat work)
All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint
compound and shall be immediately wiped with a joint knife or trowel
leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior
angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat
of joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound.
01/2023 GYPSUM BOARD
254.07.100 PAGE 09 20 00 - 9
Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Joint compound applied over
the body of the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be
considered a separate coat of joint compound and shall satisfy the
conditions of this level.
Level 3
(2-coat work)
All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint
compound and shall be immediately wiped with a joint knife or trowel
leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior
angles. One additional coat of joint compound shall be applied over all
joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be
covered with two separate coats of joint compound. All joint
compounds shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. The
prepared surface shall be covered with a drywall primer prior to the
application of the final decoration.
Level 4
(3-coat work)
All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint
compound and shall be immediately wiped with a joint knife or trowel
leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior
angles. Two separate coats of joint compound shall be applied over all
flat joints. One separate coat of joint compound shall be applied over
interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with
three separate coats of joint compound. All joint compounds shall be
smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. The prepared surface shall
be covered with a drywall primer prior to the application of the final
decoration.
Level 5
(3-coat work)
All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint
compound and shall be immediately wiped with a joint knife or trowel
leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior
angles. Two separate coats of joint compound shall be applied over all
flat joints. One separate coat of joint compound shall be applied over
interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with
three separate coats of joint compound. A thin skim coat of joint
compound shall be trowel-applied to the entire surface. Excess
compound is immediately sheared off, leaving a film of skim coating
compound completely covering the paper. As an alternate to a skim
coat, a material manufactured especially for this purpose shall be
applied. The surface shall be smooth and free of toll marks and ridges.

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 GYPSUM BOARD
254.07.100 PAGE 09 20 00 - 10

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 1
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTING AND FINISHES
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This section covers furnishing, surface preparation, and applying paints and coatings,
complete and in place, to all specified surfaces including exposed valves, piping or fittings.
Definitions
The term “paint”, “coatings”, or “finishes” as used herein, shall include surface
treatments, emulsions, enamels, paints, epoxy resins, and other protective coatings,
excepting galvanizing or anodizing, whether used as a pretreatment, primer,
intermediate coat, or finish coat.
The term “DFT” means minimum dry film thickness, without any negative tolerance.
The term “mil” means thousandths of an inch.
The term “SSPC” means The Society for Protective Coatings.
The following surfaces shall not be coated:
Concrete, unless required by items on the concrete coating schedule below or the
Drawings.
Stainless steel
Machined surfaces
Grease fittings
Glass
Equipment nameplates
Platform gratings, stair treads, door thresholds, and other walk surfaces, unless
specifically indicated to be coated.
The protective coatings applicator (Applicator) shall possess a valid state license as
required for the performance of the painting and coating work called for in this specification
and shall provide 5 references which show the Applicator has previous successful
experience with the indicated of comparable coating systems. Include the name, address,
and the telephone number for the owner of each installation for which the Applicator
provided the protective coating.
RELATED WORK
Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limit to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 33 05 05 Ductile Iron Pipe
Section 33 11 10 Miscellaneous Appurtenances
Section 33 92 10 Steel Pipe, Specials, and Fittings

01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 2
REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract:
OSHA Occupation Safety and Health Act: State of Utah and Federal
ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute Guideline No. 310.2 –
Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for
Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A 13.1 Standard for Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems
ANSI Z 535 Standard for Safety Colors
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM C 309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for Curing Concrete
ASTM D 520 Standard Specification for Zinc Dust Pigment
ASTM D 521 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Zinc Dust (Metallic
Zinc Powder)
ASTM D 6943 Standard Practice for Immersion Testing of Industrial Protective
Coatings Linings
ASTM D 1653 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic
Coating Films
ASTM D 2370 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings
ASTM D 2794 Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the
Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)
ASTM D 4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the
Plastic Sheet Method
ASTM D 4414 Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by
Notch Gages
ASTM D 4417 Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile
of Blast Cleaned Steel
ASTM D 7234 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings
on Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers
ASTM D 7682 Standard Test Method for Replication and Measurement of
Concrete Surface Profiles Using Replica Putty
ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
ASTM F 1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission
Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride
ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in
Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C 210 Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel
Water Pipelines
AWWA C 222 Polyurethane Coatings for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water
Pipe and Fittings
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 3
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete
NACE International (NACE)
NACE RP0287 Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Abrasive Blast-Cleaned
Steel Surfaces Using a Replica Tape
NACE SP0188 Standard Practice for Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective
Linings
NACE SP0892 Standard Practice for Coatings and Linings over Concrete for
Chemical Immersion and Containment Service
NACE No. 1/SSPC-SP 5 White Metal Blast Cleaning
NACE No. 2/SSPC-SP10 Near White Metal Blast Cleaning
NACE No. 3/SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning
NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP13 Surface Preparation of Concrete
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)
SSPC PA1 - Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel
SSPC-PA2 – Paint Application Specification No. 2: Measurement of Dry Coating
Thickness with Magnetic Gages.
SSPC-PA11 - Protecting Edges, Crevices, and Irregular Steel Surfaces by Stripe
Coating
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.
SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 - Near White Metal Blast Cleaning
SSPC-SP16 – Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel,
Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals
SSPC-VIS 1 - Guide to Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Dry
Abrasive Blast Cleaning
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
CONTRACTOR shall supply shop drawings for approval on all paint materials at least 30
days prior to installation. Submittals shall include the following data sheets:
For each paint system used herein, furnish a Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS),
Technical Data Sheets, and paint colors available (where applicable) for each product
used in the paint system, except for products applied by equipment manufacturers.
Where ANSI/NSF 61 approval is required, submit ANSI/NSF 61 certification letter for each
coating in the system indicating the product application limits on size of tank or piping, dry
film thickness, number of coats, specific product tests, colors certified, and approved
additives.
Quality Control Submittals:
Furnish a list of references for the Applicator substantiating the requirements as
specified.
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 4
Manufacturer’s certification stating factory applied coating systems meets or exceeds
requirements specified herein.
If the manufacturer of finish coating differs from that of shop primer, provide both
manufacturers’ written confirmation that materials are compatible.
PAINT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver paint to the project site in unopened containers that plainly show, at the time of
use, the designated name, date of manufacture, color, and name of manufacturer.
Store paints in a suitable protected area that is heated or cooled as required to maintain
temperatures within the range recommended by the manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
All inspection for quality assurance shall ultimately be the responsibility of
CONTRACTOR. OWNER retains the right to observe, accept, or reject the work based
on the results of CONTRACTOR’s inspection or observations by ENGINEER, at
OWNER’s discretion, in accordance with the specifications.
Repair and recoat all runs, overspray, roughness, or any other signs of improper
application in accordance with paint manufacturer’s instructions and as reviewed by
ENGINEER.
Observations by OWNER or ENGINEER, or the waiver of inspection of any particular
portion of the work, shall not be construed to relieve CONTRACTOR of his responsibility
to perform the work in accordance with these specifications.
MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
Furnish paint manufacturer’s representative to visit jobsite at intervals during surface
preparation and painting as may be required for product application quality assurance,
and to determine compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and these specifications,
and as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable to, or associated with,
manufacturer’s products furnished under this Contract.
SPECIAL CORRECTION OF DEFECTS REQUIREMENTS
An inspection may be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of
coating work. CONTRACTOR and a representative of the coating material manufacturer
shall attend this inspection. Defective work shall be repaired in accordance with these
specifications and to the satisfaction of OWNER. OWNER may, by written notice to
CONTRACTOR, reschedule the inspection to another date within the one-year correction
period or may cancel the inspection altogether. CONTRACTOR is not relieved of its
responsibilities to correct defects whether or not the inspection is conducted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
GENERAL
CONTRACTOR shall use suitable coating materials as recommended by the
manufacturer. Materials shall comply with Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits
applicable at the Site.
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 5
Where manufacturers and product numbers are listed, it is to show the type and quality of
coatings that are required. If a named product does not comply with VOC limits in effect
at the time of Bid opening, that product will not be accepted, and CONTRACTOR shall
propose a substitution product of equal quality that does comply. Proposed substitute
materials will be considered as indicated below. Coating materials shall be materials that
have a record of satisfactory performance in industrial plants, manufacturing facilities, and
water and wastewater treatment plants.
In any coating system only compatible materials from a single manufacturer shall be used
in the work. Particular attention shall be directed to compatibility of primers and finish
coats. If necessary, a barrier coat shall be applied between existing prime coat and
subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility.
Colors and shades of colors of coatings shall be as indicated or selected by ENGINEER.
Each coat shall be of a slightly different shade to facilitate observation of surface coverage
of each coat. Finish colors shall be as selected from the manufacturer's standard color
samples by OWNER.
Substitute or “Or-Equal” Products
Basis of Design: The Coating Systems listed below in paragraph 2.3 are based on
products from Tnemec Company Incorporated, except where indicated below.
Product Substitution: To establish equality under Section 01 60 00 – Product
Requirements, the specified coating systems are the minimum standard of quality for
this project. Equivalent materials of other manufacturers may be substituted only by
approval of ENGINEER. Requests for material substitutions shall be in accordance
with requirements of the project specification.
Product Requirements: CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory documentation from
the manufacturer of the proposed substitute or "or equal" product that the material
meets the indicated requirements and is equivalent or better in the following properties:
Quality, Durability, Resistance to abrasion and physical damage, Life expectancy,
Ability to recoat in the future, Solids content by volume, Dry film thickness per coat,
Compatibility with other coatings, Suitability to chemical attack, Temperature
limitations during application and in service, Type and quality of recommended
undercoats or topcoats, Ease of repairing damaged areas, and stability of colors.
Manufacturers of “or equal” products shall provide direct performance comparison with
the materials specified, in addition to complying with all other requirements of these
Specifications. “Or equal” products shall employ the same generic type materials and
system components as the specified coating systems.
Requests for product substitution shall be made and approved at least 10 days prior
to bid date.
CONTRACTOR shall bear any additional costs, if a proposed substitution requires
changes or additional work.
COLORS
Provide colors as selected by OWNER or ENGINEER.
Colors shall be formulated with colorants free of lead, lead compounds, or other materials
which might be affected by the presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas likely to be
present at the project.
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 6
Proprietary identification of colors is for identification only. Any authorized manufacturer
may supply color matches.
Equipment colors;
Equipment shall mean the machinery or vessel itself plus the structural supports and
fasteners.
Paint non-submerged portions of equipment in the same color as the process piping it
serves, except as indicated below:

Dangerous parts of equipment and machinery: OSHA Orange
Fire protection equipment and apparatus: OSHA Red
Radiation hazards: OSHA Purple
Physical hazards in normal operating area: OSHA Yellow

Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) equipment with an integral colored gel coat does
not require painting, provided the color is as specified.
Piping color coding shall be in accordance with ANSI A13.1, Division of Drinking Water R-
309-525, and International Plumbing Code.
Color code non-submerged metal piping except electrical conduit. Paint fittings and
valves the same color as the pipe unless otherwise specified.
Pipe supports: If pipe supports are not galvanized or stainless steel, supports shall be
painted ANSI No. 70 light gray as specified in ANSI Z535.
Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe and polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe located
outside of buildings and enclosed structures will not require painting, unless noted
otherwise on the Drawings.
COATING SYSTEMS
System No. 1 Steel – Immersion Potable Water NSF 61 Certification
Materials

Type Epoxy conforming to AWWA C 210 and
D 102 (for steel tanks).
VOC content, max, g/L 250
Volume Solids, min, % 67
Demonstrated Suitable for Long term immersion in water, resistant
to corrosion, good color retention
Certification NSF 61 if in contact with potable water

Surface preparation and Coating System

Surface
Preparation
Products Total System
(mils)
SSPC-SP10
Near-White Blast
Cleaning with
Primer: Tnemec 140 Pota-Pox Plus
Intermediate: Tnemec 140 Pota-Pox Plus
Finish: Tnemec 140 Pota-Pox Plus
Primer: 3-5 DFT
Intermediate: 4-6 DFT
Finish: 4-6 DFT
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 7
minimum angular
profile of 1.5 mils
Primer: Sherwin Williams Tank Clad HS
Intermediate: Sherwin Williams Tank Clad
HS
Finish: Sherwin Williams Tank Clad HS
Primer: Carboline Carboguard 891 VOC
Intermediate: Carboline Carboguard 891
VOC
Finish: Carboline Carboguard 891 VOC
(For AWWA C210 only)

Application
For use on the interior and exterior of steel surge tanks, pipes, valves, pumps,
equipment in potable water service including concrete embedded surfaces of
metallic items under submerged conditions, such as wall pipes, pipes, pipe
sleeves, casings, access manholes, gate guides and thimbles, and structural steel,
except reinforcing steel.
System No. 2 Steel – Immersion Non-Potable Water (NOT USED)
System No. 3 Steel – Interior Exposed
Materials

Type Polyamide Epoxy
VOC content, max, g/L 250
Volume Solids, min, % 67
Demonstrated Suitable for Ferrous, galvanized, surfaces in
industrial exposure, resistant to mild
corrosion and chemical fumes, has
good color and gloss retention
Certification None

Surface preparation and Coating System

Surface
Preparation
Products

Total System
(mils)
Ferrous Metal:
SSPC-SP6
Commercial
Blast Cleaning
with a minimum
angular anchor
profile of 1.5 mils

Galvanized and
Non-Ferrous:
SSPC-SP16 with
a minimum
angular anchor
profile of 1.5 mils
Primer: Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build
Epoxoline II
Finish: Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build
Epoxoline II
Primer: 3-5 DFT
Finish: 4-6 DFT
Primer: Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646
Fast Cure Epoxy
Finish: Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646
Fast Cure Epoxy
Primer: Carboline Carboguard 60
Finish: Carboline Carboguard 60

01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 8
Application
All exposed metal surfaces located inside of structures.
Special Requirements
The surface preparation and primer shall be shop applied to all surfaces prior to
installation. Finish coats need only be applied to the surfaces exposed after
completion of construction.
System No. 4 Steel – Exterior Exposed (NOT USED)
System No. 5 Buried Steel Pipe (NOT USED)
System No. 6 Steel – Doors and Frames
Materials

Type Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy with
Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane (topcoat)
VOC content, max, g/L 250
Demonstrated Suitable for Interior and Exterior Industrial,
Architectural, and Commercial
applications

Surface preparation and Coating System

Surface Preparation Products

Total System
(mils)
SSPC-SP2/SP3 Hand
and Power Tool
Cleaning; feather
rough edges; remove
loose rust, dirt, and
other contaminants
with sandpaper
Primer: Tnemec Series 135 Chem-
Build
Finish: Tnemec Series 1095
Endura-Shield
Primer: 3-5 DFT
Finish: 3-5 DFT
Primer: Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy
Finish: Sherwin Williams HS
Polyurethane 250
Primer: Carboline Carboguard 60
Finish: Carboline Carbothane
133LV(Satin) or 134VOC(Gloss)

Application
Factory primed steel doors and frames
Exterior and Interior steel in corrosive and non-immersion environments.
Maintenance of existing marginally prepared rusty steel and tightly adhering old
coatings.
System No. 7 Galvanized Steel and Cast/Ductile Iron – Exterior Exposed
Materials

Type Polyamide Epoxy with
Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane (topcoat)
VOC content, max, g/L 250
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 9
Demonstrated Suitable for Ferrous, galvanized, nonferrous,
cast/ductile iron surfaces in industrial
exposure, highly resistant to abrasion,
wet conditions, corrosive fumes, and
exterior weathering

Surface preparation and Coating System

Surface Preparation Products

Total System
(mils)
Galvanized Steel and
Non-Ferrous: SSPC-
SP16 brush-off blast
cleaning of coated
and uncoated
galvanized steel and
non-ferrous metals to
achieve a uniform
anchor profile of 1.0-
2.0 mils.

Ductile and Cast Iron:
Prepare all surfaces
as per NAPF 500-03 -
Uniformly abrasive
blast the entire
exterior surface using
abrasive to an NAPF
500-03-04 with a
minimum angular
anchor profile of 1.5
mils.
Primer: Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build
Epoxoline II
Finish: Tnemec Series 1095
Endura-Shield
Primer: 3-5 DFT
Finish: 2.5-4 DFT
Primer: Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy
Finish: Sherwin Williams HS
Polyurethane 250
Primer: Carboline Carboguard 890
Finish: Carboline Carbothane
133LV(Satin) or 134VOC(Gloss)

Application
Exposed galvanized and cast/ductile iron surfaces located outside of structures
requiring painting and the following specific surfaces unless noted otherwise:
All exposed galvanized pipe
All exposed cast/ductile iron pipe
System No. 8 Galvanized Steel and Cast/Ductile Iron – Interior Exposed
Materials

Type Polyamide Epoxy
VOC content, max, g/L 250
Demonstrated Suitable for Ferrous, galvanized, nonferrous,
cast/ductile iron surfaces in industrial
exposure, resistant to mild corrosion
and chemical fumes, has good color
and gloss retention

01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 10
Surface preparation and Coating System

Surface Preparation Products

Total System
(mils)
Galvanized Steel and
Non-Ferrous: SSPC-
SP16 brush-off blast
cleaning of coated
and uncoated
galvanized steel and
non-ferrous metals to
achieve a uniform
anchor profile of 1.0-
2.0 mils.
Ductile and Cast Iron:
Prepare all surfaces
as per NAPF 500-03 -
Uniformly abrasive
blast the entire
exterior surface using
abrasive to an NAPF
500-03-04 with a
minimum angular
anchor profile of 1.5
mils.
Primer: Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build
Epoxoline II
Finish: Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build
Epoxoline II
Primer: 3-5 DFT
Finish: 3 – 5 DFT
Primer: Sherwin Williams
Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy
Finish: Sherwin Williams Macropoxy
646 Fast Cure Epoxy
Primer: Carboline Carboguard 60
Finish: Carboline Carboguard 60

Application
Exposed galvanized and cast/ductile iron surfaces located inside of structures
requiring painting and the following specific surfaces unless noted otherwise:
All exposed galvanized pipe
All exposed cast/ductile iron pipe
Do not paint galvanized steel mechanical pipe and equipment supports unless
noted otherwise.
System No. 9 Concrete Floors – Light Traffic, Low Impact (NOT USED)
System No. 10 Concrete Floors – Chemical Exposure (NOT USED)
System No. 11 – Gypsum Wallboard and Plaster
Materials

Type Waterborne Epoxy/Acrylic Polymer
VOC content, max, g/L 175/94
Demonstrated Suitable for long term protection in both
interior/exterior exposures

Surface preparation and Coating System

Surface Preparation Products

Total System
(mils)
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 11
Sand joint compound
smooth and feather
edge. Clean and dry.
Primer: Tnemec Elasto-Grip FC
Series 151-1051
Intermediate: Tnemec
Enduratone Series 1028
Finish: Tnemec Enduratone
Series 1028
Primer: 0.7-1.5 DFT
Intermediate: 2-3 DFT
Finish: 2-3 DFT Primer: Carboline Sanitile 120
Intermediate: Carboline
Carbocrylic 3359
Finish: Carboline Carbocrylic
3359

Application
Interior gypsum wallboard and plaster on walls and ceilings.
System No. 12 – Concrete Walls and Concrete Masonry Units, Interior – Not Exposed to
Chemicals (NOT USED)
System No. 13 – Concrete Walls and Concrete Masonry Units, Interior – Exposed to
Chemicals (NOT USED)
System No. 14 Concrete – Concrete Exposed to Severe Wastewater (NOT USED)
System No. 15 Wood, Interior Exposed
Materials

Type Acrylic
VOC content, max, g/L 50
Demonstrated Suitable for Wood trim and plywood sheathing in
pump stations and similar municipal
water and wastewater facilities.

Surface preparation and Coating System

Surface Preparation Products

Total System
(mils)
Surface Preparation:
Sand rough areas,
Clean and Dry
Primer: Sherwin Williams Multi-
purpose Interior-Exterior Latex
Primer-Sealer
Intermediate: Sherwin Williams
Pro-Industrial Acrylic Coating
Finish: Sherwin Williams Pro-
Industrial Acrylic Coating
Primer: 0.7-1.5 DFT
Intermediate: 2-3
DFT
Finish: 2-3 DFT
Primer: Tnemec Series 51-1051
Elasto-Grip
Intermediate: Tnemec Series
1026 EnduraTone
Finish: Tnemec Series 1026
EnduraTone
Primer: Carboline Sanitile 120
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 12
Intermediate: Carboline
Carbocrylic 3359
Finish: Carboline Carboguard
3359

Application
Trim and plywood sheathing
SPECIAL COATING SYSTEMS – INCLUDING FOR BURIED PIPING
System 200 - PVC Tape: Prior to wrapping the pipe with PVC tape, the pipe and fittings
first shall be primed using a primer recommended by the PVC tape manufacturer. After
being primed, the pipe shall be wrapped with a 20-mil adhesive PVC tape, half-lapped, to
a total thickness of 40 mils. PVC Tape wrap buried pipe where indicated on the Drawings.
System 201 – Water Retardant, Concrete and Masonry
Materials and Coating System

Type Silane-modified siloxane
Demonstrated suitable for Repelling water from vertical concrete
and masonry surfaces
VOC Content, g/L, max 250
Products, or approved equal TAMMS Barracade M.E./9
Rainguard Blok-Lok
Tnemec Dur A Pell 20 Series 636

Preparation
Surface cracks, holes, or other imperfections in concrete surfaces only that
exceed 1/64 of an inch shall be filled with pointing mortar. Masonry joints found
to be unsound, hollow, or otherwise defective shall be raked out to a depth of 1/2
inch and pointed with mortar.
Remove loose particles and foreign matter. Remove oil or foreign substance
with a cleaning agent which will not affect the coating.
Scrub and rinse surfaces with water, and let dry.
Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating and landscaping,
property and vehicles from over spray and drift.
Concrete shall cure a minimum of 28 days before application.
Apply coating per manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.

Application
Exterior concrete walls of pump station
System 202 – Polyethylene Encasement is required for all buried Ductile Iron Pipe:
Application of polyethylene encasement shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105
using Method C. Provide polyethylene encasement where indicated on the drawings or
per Section 30 05 05 – Ductile Iron Pipe.
System 203 – Wax Tape Coating is required coating for all buried valves, buried
dismantling joints, buried flanges, buried DIP mechanical joints, and buried tapping
saddles.
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 13
Wax Tape Coating
Apply coating in accordance with AWWA C217, except as modified herein.
Provide filler material to fill and smooth irregular surfaces, such that no tenting or
voids remain under the applied wax tape.
Protect coating from damage and provide special sand backfill protect wax coating
from damage.
Coating System
Surface Preparation: SP3 Power Tool or SP11 Power Tool to Bare Metal.
Primer: Petroleum or petrolatum wax.
Filler Material: Filled petroleum or petrolatum wax.
Inner Tape: Petroleum or petrolatum wax impregnated fabric, 6-inch width
maximum, 40-mils thick.
Outer Wrap: PVC or tape suitable for application to inner tape.
Wax tape coating system shall be as manufactured by, or approved equal:
Petrolatum Tapes by Denso North American
Wax-Tape by Trenton
System 204 – Ductile or Cast-Iron, Valves and Gates - Immersion in Water and
Wastewater
Materials

Type High Solids Epoxy
VOC content, max, g/L 285
Demonstrated Suitable for Ductile or Cast-Iron immersion in water
or wastewater
Certification NSF 61 if used for immersion in potable
water

Surface preparation and Coating System

Surface
Preparation
Products

Total System
(mils)
Prepare all
surfaces by
uniformly abrasive
blasting the entire
exterior surface to
ensure cleanliness
and to create a
minimum angular
anchor profile of
2.0 mils.
Primer: Tnemec Hi-Build Epoxoline II
Series N69(1)
Intermediate: Tnemec Hi-Build
Epoxoline II Series N69(1)
Finish: Tnemec Hi-Build Epoxoline II
Series N69(1)
Primer: 3 - 5 DFT
Intermediate: 4 - 6
DFT
Finish: 4 - 6 DFT
Primer: Ameron Amerlock 400
Intermediate: Ameron Amerlock 400
Finish: Ameron Amerlock 400
Primer: International Interseal 670
HS
Intermediate: International Interseal
670 HS
Finish: International Interseal 670 HS
Primer/wastewater: Carboline
Phenoline 1205
Finish/wastewater: Carboline
Phenoline 1205
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 14

Prime (NSF61): Carboline
Carboguard 635VOC
Intermediate (NSF 61): Carboline
Carboguard 635VOC
Finish (NSF 61): Carboline
Carboguard 635VOC
(1) For NSF 61 certified potable water
applications use Tnemec Pota-Pox
Plus Series N140.

Application
Exterior coating on pump bowls
CONCRETE FINISHES
Exterior Above Grade Concrete: Concrete surfaces exposed to view outside the building
and including 6 inches below finished grade on the building or structure should be finished
with a “Class B” finish. Products for the “Class B” finish are identified or specified in
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
Interior Exposed Above Floor Concrete: Interior above grade concrete shall be finished
with a “Class B” finish. Products for the “Class B” finish are identified or specified in
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
Interior Concrete Floors: Interior concrete floors shall be finished with a “Trowel” finish.
Products for the “Trowel” finish are identified or specified in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-
Place Concrete.
Exterior Concrete Flat Surfaces: Exterior concrete flat surfaces shall be finished with a
“Broom” finish. Products for the “Broom” finish are identified or specified in Section 03 30
00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
GENERAL
The intention of this specification is for all new, interior and exterior, masonry, concrete,
and metal, whether atmospheric or submerged exposure surfaces to be painted whether
specifically mentioned or not, except as modified herein. Concealed structural steel
surfaces shall receive a prime coat only unless modified herein.
Surface preparation and coating application shall be in accordance with these
specifications and the coating manufacturer’s written product data sheets and written
recommendations of the manufacturer’s technical representative. Where conflict occurs
between the manufacturer’s recommendations and these specifications, the more
stringent of the two shall apply unless approved by ENGINEER.
For immersion coatings, obtain full cure for completed system before immersing or
allowing exposure to water of condensation for more than 12 hours.
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 15
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic
compounds and worker exposures.
Protect workers and comply with applicable federal, state, and local air pollution and
environmental regulations for surface preparation, blast cleaning, disposition of spent
aggregate and debris, coating application, and dust prevention including but not limited to
the following Acts, Regulations, Standards, and Guidelines:
Clean Air Act
National Ambient Air Quality Standard
Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)
SSPC Guide 6
Comply with applicable federal, state, and local regulations for confined space entry.
Provide and operate equipment that meets explosion proof requirements.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Do not apply paint in extreme heat, temperatures below 40 degrees F, nor in dust, smoke-
laden atmosphere, damp or humid weather. The Applicator shall adhere to the
manufacturer’s recommendations regarding environmental conditions. The Applicator
shall monitor humidity, air temperature, and surface temperature with properly calibrated
instruments.
Do not perform abrasive blast cleaning whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent,
nor whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point of ambient
air. Strictly adhere to manufacturer’s recommendations.
Surface preparation power tools and blast equipment shall contain dust collection devices
that will prevent discharge of dust particles into the atmosphere around electrical or
mechanical equipment unless otherwise permitted by ENGINEER.
Where weather conditions or project requirement dictate, the Applicator shall provide and
operate dehumidification equipment to maintain environmental conditions suitable for
abrasive blasting and coating application as specified.
WORKMANSHIP
Skilled craftsmen and experienced supervision shall be used on coating work.
Coating shall be done in a workmanlike manner so as to produce an even film of uniform
thickness. Edges, corners, crevices, and joints shall receive special attention to insure
thorough surface preparation. The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, ridges,
waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. The hiding shall be
so complete that the addition of another coat would not increase the hiding. Special
attention shall be given so that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and similar areas receive
a film thickness equivalent to adjacent areas, and installations shall be protected by the
use of drop cloths or other precautionary measures.
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 16
Damage to other surfaces resulting from the work shall be cleaned, repaired, and
refinished to original condition.
STORAGE, MIXING, AND THINNING OF MATERIALS
Unless otherwise indicated, the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations and
instructions for thinning, mixing, handling, applying, and protecting its coating materials,
for preparation of surfaces for coating, and for other procedures relative to coating shall
be strictly observed.
Coating materials shall be used within the manufacturer's recommended shelf life.
Coating materials shall be stored under the conditions recommended by the Product Data
Sheets, and shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at a uniform consistency during
application. Coatings from different manufacturers shall not be mixed together.
SURFACE PREPARATION
All surfaces which receive paint or other coatings shall be prepared in accordance with
the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being used. The Applicator shall
examine surfaces to be coated and shall correct surface defects before application of any
coating material. Marred or abraded spots on shop-primed and on factory-finished
surfaces shall receive touch-up restoration prior to any field coating application.
Perform sandblasting for piping and any other items and equipment where specified and
as required to restore damaged surfaces previously shop or field blasted and primed.
Materials, equipment, and procedures shall meet requirements of the Society for
Protective Coatings (formerly the Steel Structures Painting Council).
PROTECTION OF MATERIALS NOT TO BE PAINTED
Surfaces that are not to receive coatings shall be protected during surface preparation,
cleaning, and coating operations.
Remove, mask or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, aluminum
surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and
other surfaces not intended to be painted.
Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces.
Protect working parts or mechanical and electrical equipment and motors from damage.
Care shall be exercised not to damage adjacent work during blasting operations. Spraying
shall be conducted under carefully controlled conditions. CONTRACTOR shall be fully
responsible for and shall promptly repair any and all damage to adjacent work or adjoining
property occurring from blasting or coating operations.
SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS
The following referenced surface preparation specifications of the the Society for
Protective Coatings shall form a part of this specification:
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 17
Solvent Cleaning (SSPC SP1): Removal of oil, grease, soil, salts, and other soluble
contaminants by cleaning with solvent, vapor, alkali, emulsion, or steam.
Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC SP2): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint,
and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by hand chipping, scraping, sanding, and
wire brushing.
Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC SP3): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint,
and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by power tool chipping, descaling, sanding,
wire brushing, and grinding.
White Metal Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP5): Removal of all visible rust, oil, grease, soil,
dust, mill scale, paint, oxides, corrosion products and foreign matter by blast cleaning.
Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP6): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust,
mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except that
staining shall be limited to no more than 33 percent of each square inch of surface
area.
Brush-Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP7): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust,
loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint.
Near-White Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP10): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust,
mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except that
staining shall be limited to no more than 5 percent of each square inch of surface area.
Surface Preparation of Concrete (SSPC-SP13): Removal of protrusions, laitance and
efflorescence, existing coatings, form-release agents, and surface contamination by
detergent or steam cleaning, abrasive blasting, water jetting, or impact or power tool
methods as appropriate for the condition of the surface and the requirements of the
coating system.
Surface Preparation (SSPC-SP16): Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated
Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals
FERROUS METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (UNGALVANIZED)
The minimum abrasive blasting surface preparation shall be as indicated in the coating
system schedules included at the end of this Section. Where there is a conflict between
these requirements and the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations for the
intended service, the higher degree of cleaning shall apply.
Oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants shall be removed by solvent
cleaning per SSPC SP1 - Solvent Cleaning prior to blast cleaning.
Round or chamfer all sharp edges and grind smooth burrs and surface defects and weld
splatter prior to blast cleaning.
Surfaces shall be cleaned of dust and residual particles of the cleaning operation by dry
air blast cleaning, vacuuming, or another approved method prior to painting.
Enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem shall be vacuum cleaned
and wiped with a tack cloth.
Damaged or defective coating shall be removed by the blast cleaning to meet the clean
surface requirements before recoating.
If the required abrasive blast cleaning will damage adjacent work, the area to be cleaned
is less than 100 square feet, and the coated surface will not be submerged in service, then
SSPC SP2 or SSPC SP3 may be used as per manufacturers recommendations.
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 18
Shop-applied coatings of unknown composition shall be completely removed before the
indicated coatings are applied. Valves, castings, ductile or cast iron pipe, and fabricated
pipe or equipment shall be examined for the presence of shop-applied temporary coatings.
Temporary coatings shall be completely removed by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP1
before the abrasive blast cleaning has been started.
Shop primed equipment shall be solvent-cleaned in the field before finish coats are
applied.
Exposed ductile iron pipe shall be given a shop coat of rust-inhibitive primer conforming
to these specifications. Abrasive blasting of the asphaltic coating on ductile iron pipe will
not be allowed.
FERROUS METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (GALVANIZED)
Galvanized ferrous metal shall be alkaline cleaned per SSPC SP1 to remove oil, grease,
and other contaminants detrimental to adhesion of the protective coating system, followed
by blast cleaning per SSPC SP16.
Pretreatment coatings of surfaces shall be in accordance with the printed
recommendations of the coating manufacturer.
CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY SURFACE PREPARATION
Surface preparation shall not begin until at least 30 Days after the masonry has been
placed.
Oil, grease, and form release and curing compounds shall be removed by detergent
cleaning per SSPC SP1 before abrasive blast cleaning.
Concrete block masonry surfaces to be coated shall be abrasive blast cleaned to remove
existing coatings, laitance, deteriorated concrete, and to roughen the surface equivalent
to the surface recommended by manufacturer.
If acid etching is required by the coating application instructions, the treatment shall be
made after abrasive blasting. After etching, rinse surfaces with water and test the pH. The
pH shall be between neutral and 8.
Surfaces shall be clean and as recommended by the coating manufacturer before coating
is started.
Unless required for proper adhesion, surfaces shall be dry prior to coating. The presence
of moisture shall be determined with a moisture detection device such as Delmhorst Model
BD-2100, or equal.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SURFACE PREPARATION
Concrete surfaces to receive protective coating shall be cast with a Smooth Form Finish
in accordance with ACI 301. Surfaces shall not be rubbed, sacked, troweled or otherwise
finished in any manner that will obscure or cover the parent concrete surface with
materials other than materials as specified in this Section.
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 19
All surfaces must be clean, dry and free of oil, grease and other contaminants, prior to
preparation in accordance with NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP13. Concrete surfaces must be
sound and capable of supporting the corrosion protection lining system.
Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP13 Joint Surface
Preparation Standards and ICRI Technical Guidelines. Abrasive blast, shot-blast, water
jet or mechanically abrade concrete surfaces to remove laitance, curing compounds,
hardeners, sealers, existing coatings, and other contaminants and to provide the
recommended ICRI-CSP Profile.
Level or grind concrete substrates to produce a uniform and smooth surface, including
removal of sharp edges, ridges, form fins, and other concrete protrusions.
Unless required for proper adhesion, surfaces shall be dry prior to coating. The presence
of moisture shall be determined with a moisture detection device such as Delmhorst Model
BD-2100, or equal.
SHOP COATING REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise indicated, items of equipment or parts of equipment which are not
submerged in service shall be shop-primed and then finish-coated in the field after
installation with the indicated or selected color. The methods, materials, application
equipment, and other details of shop painting shall comply with this Section. If the shop
primer requires topcoating within a specific period of time, the equipment shall be finish
coated in the shop and then be touched up after installation.
Items of equipment or parts and surfaces of equipment which are submerged or inside an
enclosed hydraulic structure when in service, with the exception of pumps and valves,
shall have surface preparation and coating performed in the field.
For certain pieces of equipment, it may be undesirable or impractical to apply finish
coatings in the field. Such equipment shall be primed and finish coated in the shop and
touched up in the field with the identical material after installation. CONTRACTOR shall
require the manufacturer of each such piece of equipment to certify as part of its Shop
Drawings that the surface preparation is in accordance with these specifications. The
coating material data sheet shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings for the equipment.
For certain small pieces of equipment, the manufacturer may have a standard coating
system that is suitable for the intended service conditions. In such cases, the final
determination of suitability will be made during review of the Shop Drawing submittals.
Equipment of this type generally includes only indoor equipment such as instruments,
small compressors, and chemical metering pumps.
Shop-painted surfaces shall be protected during shipment and handling by suitable
provisions including padding, blocking, and the use of canvas or nylon slings. Primed
surfaces shall not be exposed to the weather for more than 2 months before being
topcoated, or less time if recommended by the coating manufacturer.
CONTRACTOR shall make certain that the shop primers and field topcoats are compatible
and meet the requirements of this Section. Copies of applicable coating manufacturer's
data sheets shall be submitted with equipment Shop Drawings.
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 20
Damage to shop-applied coatings shall be repaired in accordance with this Section and
the coating manufacturer's printed instructions.
APPLICATION
General
Schedule inspection with ENGINEER in advance for cleaned surfaces and all coats
prior to each succeeding coat.
Apply coatings in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s recommendations and
these specifications, whichever is more stringent. Allow sufficient time between coats
to assure thorough drying of previously applied paint.
Blast cleaned ferrous metal surfaces shall be painted before any rusting or other
deterioration of the surface occurs. Blast cleaning shall be limited to only those
surfaces that can be coated in the same day.
Special attention shall be given to materials that will be joined so closely that proper
surface preparation and application are not possible. Such contact surfaces shall be
coated prior to assembly or installation.
Finish coats, including touch-up and damage repair coats shall be applied in a manner
that will present a uniform texture and color matched appearance.
Non-buried steel piping shall be abrasive blast cleaned and primed before installation.
Finish coats shall be applied after concrete, masonry, and equipment installation is
complete, and the working areas are clean and dust free.
CURING OF COATINGS
CONTRACTOR shall maintain curing conditions in accordance with the conditions
recommended by the coating material manufacturer or by this Section, whichever is the
most stringent, prior to placing the completed coating system into service.
In the case of enclosed areas, forced air ventilation, using heated air, if necessary, may
be required until the coatings have fully cured.
SHOP AND FIELD OBSERVATION AND TESTING
CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER a minimum of 3 Days advance notice of the start
of any field surface preparation or coating application, and a minimum of 7 Days advance
notice of the start of any surface preparation activity in the shop.
Observation by ENGINEER, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the
work, shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of its responsibility to perform the work in
accordance with these Specifications.
CONTRACTOR shall furnish inspection devices in good working condition for the
detection of holidays and measurement of dry film thicknesses of coatings. Dry-film
thickness gauges shall be made available for ENGINEER's use while coating is being
done, until final acceptance of such coatings. CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of
a trained operator of the holiday detection devices until the final acceptance of such
coatings. Holiday detection devices shall be operated only in the presence of ENGINEER.
CONTRACTOR shall test for continuity (holiday test) all coated surfaces inside reservoirs,
other surfaces that will be submerged in water or other liquids, surfaces that are enclosed
01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 21
in a vapor space in such structures, and surfaces coated with any of the submerged and
severe service coating systems. Areas that contain discontinuities shall be marked and
repaired or recoated in accordance with the coating manufacturers’ printed instructions
and then be retested.
Coatings with thickness exceeding 20-mils total DFT: Pulse-type holiday detector such
as Tinker & Rasor Model AP-W, D.E. Stearns Co. Model 14/20, or equal shall be used.
The unit shall be adjusted to operate at the voltage required to cause a spark jump
across an air gap equal to twice the required coating thickness.
Coatings with thickness of 20-mils or less total DFT: Tinker & Rasor Model M1
nondestructive type holiday detector, K-D Bird Dog, or equal shall be used. The unit
shall operate at less than 75 volts. For thicknesses between 10- and 20-mils, a
nonsudsing type wetting agent, such as Kodak Photo-Flo or equal, shall be added to
the water prior to wetting the detector sponge.
On ferrous and non-ferrous the dry film coating thickness shall be measured in
accordance with the SSPC PA 2 using a magnetic type dry film thickness gauge such as
Mikrotest Model FM, Elcometer Model 111/1EZ, or equal. Each coat shall be tested for
the correct thickness. No measurements shall be made until at least 8 hours after
application of the coating. On non-ferrous metals and other substrates, the coating
thicknesses shall be measured at the time of application using a wet film gauge.
Evaluation of blast cleaned surface preparation will be based upon comparison of the
blasted surfaces with the standard samples available from SSPC and NACE, such as
using NACE standards TM-01-70 and TM-01-75.
Visually inspect concrete, nonferrous metal, plastic, drywall, and wood surfaces to ensure
proper and complete coverage has been attained.
CLEANUP
Place cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers or
destroy at the end of each day.
Upon completion of the work, remove staging, scaffolding, and containers from the site or
destroy in a legal manner.
Completely remove paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces and floors and leave
entire job clean.
Damages due to overspray on buildings, vehicles, trees, or other surfaces not specified
to be painted would be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
MANUFACTURER’ SERVICES
Furnish paint manufacturer’s representative to visit jobsite at intervals during surface
preparation and painting as may be required for product application quality assurance,
and to determine compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and these specifications,
and as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable to, or associated with,
manufacturer’s products furnished under this Contract.

01/2023 PAINTING & FINISHES
254.07.100 09 90 00 - 22
- END OF SECTION –

03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 1
SECTION 09 98 10
STEEL PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
CONTRACTOR shall apply external coating and internal lining on steel pipe (field
coating of joints not allowed) and field repair of coating damage, complete and in place,
in accordance with the specifications.
Buried steel pipe shall be dielectrically-coated with a tape wrap.
Exposed steel pipe will be coated in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and
Finishes, unless noted otherwise.
RELATED WORK
Related Work in other sections includes, but is not limit to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes
Section 33 92 10 Steel Pipe, Specials, and Fittings (AWWA C200, modified)
Section 33 12 00 Miscellaneous Appurtenances
REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the
Contract:
OSHA - Occupation Safety and Health Act: State of Utah and Federal
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water
Pipe-4-inch and Larger- Shop Applied.
AWWA C209 Cold-Applied Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Special
Sections, Connection, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines
AWWA C210 Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel
Water Pipelines
AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
AWWA C217 Cold-Applied Petrolatum Tape and Petroleum Wax Tape Coatings
for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for
Steel Water Pipelines
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF CORROSION ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (NACE)
NACE RP 274 High Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings Prior to
Installation
SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 2
SSPC-SP-1 Solvent Cleaning Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-3 Power Tool Cleaning Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-5 White Metal Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-6 Commercial Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-10 Near White Metal Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-11 Power Tool to Bare Metal
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Submit catalog cuts and other manufacturer’s performance information for products
proposed that demonstrate compliance with the Specifications herein described.
Provide a copy of approved coating system submittals to the coating applicator. Provide
Paint System Data Sheets (PSDS) and/or Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for
coating and lining materials.
Quality Control Submittals
Applicator's experience with list of references substantiating compliance.
If the manufacturer of field-applied coating differs from that of the shop-applied primer,
furnish written confirmation from both manufacturers that the 2 coating materials are
compatible
QUALITY ASSURANCE
All inspection for quality assurance shall ultimately be the responsibility of
CONTRACTOR. OWNER retains the right to observe, accept, or reject the work based
on the results of CONTRACTOR’s inspection or observations by ENGINEER, at
OWNER’s discretion, in accordance with the specifications.
Coating applicator shall have a minimum of 2 years experience applying the specified
coating system and the application supervisor (Certified Applicator) for the coating
application personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years practical experience in
application of the indicated products.
Coating and/or lining manufacturer technical representative shall be present for a
minimum of 3 days to furnish technical assistance and instruction at the start of coating
and/or lining operations within the shop and at the Site. During these visits, the technical
representative shall observe surface preparation and coating application and conduct
tests of the coating to insure conformance with application instructions, recommended
methods, and conditions.
Coating and/or lining manufacturer shall furnish 8 hours per month of field or shop
coating technical support if requested by ENGINEER.
Technical representative shall provide a written report to ENGINEER for each visit.
Report shall include copies of test data collected, description of observations, and
recommended corrective actions. Report shall be submitted within 10 working days after
the visit. When deemed necessary by ENGINEER, work will not be permitted to proceed
03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 3
until the recommended corrective actions have been implemented. After corrective
recommendations have been implemented; the manufacturer representative shall return
and certify that the application complies with the manufacturer’s coating application
recommendations.
Additional visits by the manufacturer’s representative shall be made at sufficient intervals
during surface preparation and coating or lining as may be required for product
application quality assurance and to determine compliance with manufacturer’s
instructions, and as may be necessary, to resolve problems attributable to or associated
with, manufacturer’s products furnished for this project.
Repair and recoat all runs, overspray, roughness, or any other signs of improper
application in accordance with paint manufacturer’s instructions and as reviewed by
ENGINEER.
CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER and minimum of 14 days prior to the
commencement of any work. CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER and/or
ENGINEER with full access to facilities and application documentation. Observation by
OWNER and/or ENGINEER, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the
work, shall not be construed to relieve CONTRACTOR of his responsibility to perform
the work in accordance with these specifications.
DEFINITIONS
Manufacturer's Representative: Employee of coating manufacturer who is factory
trained and knowledgeable in technical aspects of manufacturer's products and systems.
Sales representatives are not acceptable as a technical representative unless written
authorization from the coating manufacturer is furnished stating the sales representative
has full authority to act on behalf of the coating manufacturer.
ABBREVIATIONS
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AWWA American Water Works Association
MDFT Minimum Dry Film Thickness
Mil Thousandths of an Inch
OSHA Occupation Safety and Health Act
SSPC Society for Protective Coatings
SPECIAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENT
CONTRACTOR and coating applicator shall warrant the work under this Section against
defective workmanship and materials for a period of two (2) years commencing on the
date of final acceptance of the pipeline.
This warrantee shall be in addition to the prime CONTRACTOR’s warrantee that covers
repair of all defective work, including linings and coatings.
03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 4
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not apply paint in extreme heat, temperatures below 40 degrees F, nor in dust,
smoke-laden atmosphere, damp or humid weather.
Do not perform abrasive blast cleaning whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent,
nor whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point of ambient
air. Strictly adhere to manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
GENERAL
Exterior and interior pipe and fitting surfaces shall be prepared and coated in
accordance with referenced standards, written directions of the coating or lining
manufacturers, and this Section, whichever is more stringent.
Pipeline coating or lining materials shall be the products of a single manufacturer.
Product substitutions during the project will not be considered or permitted.
Coating applicator shall provide a monitoring system approved by the coating
manufacturer that constantly records pipe and coating conditions during coating
application. Recorded monitoring parameters shall include pipe temperature, line
speed, surface preparation, holiday test and other parameters applicable to the type of
coating.
Coatings and linings will be stored, handled and applied per the manufacturer’s written
directions.
EXTERIOR SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS
General
Buried dielectrically coated steel pipe shall be coated in accordance with AWWA
C214 and buried steel pipe specials and fittings or pipes with outlets shall be coated
in accordance with C209, except where noted otherwise.

Buried dielectrically coated pipe and fittings passing through a structure wall or floor
shall be coated for a minimum of 2-inches beyond the interior wall or floor surface.

Pipe that is atmospherically exposed shall be shop primed as specified herein and in
accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Finishes.
Polyethylene Tape Wrap
Steel pipe shall be coated with the following 80-mil (nominal) tape-coating system
applied in accordance with AWWA C214 and this Section.

Polyken YGIII Tape Coating System:

Primer: Polyken 1019, 1027, 1029, or as recommended by the coating
manufacturer.
03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 5
Weld Stripe Tape: Polyken 931 without backing, 25-mils nominal, 4-inches wide
minimum.
Inner Wrap: Polyken 989 YGIII, 20-mils nominal, corrosion protection layer.
Middle Wrap: Polyken 955 YGIII, 30-mils nominal, mechanical protection layer.
Outer Wrap: Polyken 956 YGIII, 30-mils nominal, mechanical protection layer.

Weld Preparation: Provide weld stripe tape or grind welds at pipe fabricator’s option.

Steel Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP5, White Metal blast, 2.5-mils blast profile,
minimum.

Tape Coating Requirements

Tape layers shall have adhesive for the full width of the tape. Adhesive shall
have the ability to stick to itself and to the proceeding tape layer or pipe.
Each layer shall be a different color or shade with the outer layer white.
Outer wrap shall have sufficient ultraviolet (UV) inhibitors to resist above grade
exposure for a minimum of 12 months or the proposed storage and construction
time, whichever is greater.
Tape width shall be 12-inches maximum. Wider tape will be conditionally
allowed if the coating applicator can demonstrate that proper tensioning can be
maintained and mechanical wrinkling prevented throughout the coating
application. If at any time during the pipe fabrication, tape quality becomes
inconsistent with a wider tape, OWNER may require the remainder of the pipe to
be coated using the maximum indicated tape width.
Exterior Coating for Exposed Coating or Overcoat
All atmospherically exposed or vault piping shall be shop primed with the coating
system as specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Finishes.
Manufacturer of shop-applied primer shall be coordinated with field application to
provide a completed system by a single manufacturer as specified in Section 09 90
00 – Painting and Finishes. OWNER approval of a coating system with two or more
coating manufacturer’s will required written approval from all coating manufacturer’s
as to compatibility and acceptance under warranty.
INTERIOR SHOP-APPLIED LININGS
Cement Mortar Lining
Clean and cement mortar line steel pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA
C205.
Cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type II.
Shop applied cement mortar lining shall be uniform in thickness over the full length of
the pipe joint.
Aggregate shall be silica sand or other aggregate that is not subject to leaching.
Conform to ASTM C33.
Water for cement mortar: Clean and free from organic matter, strong alkalis,
vegetable matter, and other impurities.
03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 6
EXTERIOR FIELD JOINT COATING
Welded field joints (and associated coating) are not allowed on this project.
Buried field joints (flanged or grooved end couplings) shall be wax tape coated.
Wax Tape Coating
Wax tape coatings shall be limited to field application on joints, fittings, or
irregular shapes or complex configurations that are not suited for the use of heat
shrink or hand-applied tape wrap coating systems.
Apply coating in accordance with AWWA C217, except as modified herein.
Provide filler material to fill and smooth irregular surfaces, such that no tenting or
voids remain under the applied wax tape.
Protect coating from damage and provide special sand backfill to protect wax
coating from damage.
Coating System
Surface Preparation: SP3 Power Tool or SP11 Power Tool to Bare Metal.
Primer: Petroleum or petrolatum wax.
Filler Material: Filled petroleum or petrolatum wax.
Inner Tape: Petroleum or petrolatum wax impregnated fabric, 6-inch
width maximum, 40-mils thick.
Outer Wrap: PVC or tape suitable for application to inner tape.
Wax tape coating system shall be as manufactured by, or approved equal:
Petrolatum Tapes by Denso North American
Wax-Tape by Trenton
INTERIOR FIELD JOINT LINING
Welded field joints (and associated lining) are not allowed on this project.
FIELD REPAIR OF COATINGS AND LININGS
General
Field repair materials for coatings and linings shall be compatible with shop-applied
coating or lining systems and be approved by coating or lining manufacturer.
Minor repairs on tape wrapped pipe shall be with heat applied patches.
Buried Pipe - Coating Repair Materials
Heat Shrink Sleeves (major repair)
Filler Mastic: Provide mastic filler to fill tape void as required.
Full Wrap Coating: Cross-linked polyolefin wrap with a mastic sealant, 85-mil
thickness minimum, suitable for pipeline operating temperature, sleeve material
recovery as recommended by the manufacturer. Sleeve length shall provide a
minimum of 3-inches overlap onto intact pipe coating.
Manufacturers: AquaSleeve by Canusa-CPS, Covalence by Berry CPG, or
approved equal.
Heat-Applied Patches (minor repair)
Heat applied adhesive, polyolefin-backed, mastic coated tape, 12-inches
maximum size.
Patch shall provide a minimum of 2-inches overlap onto intact pipe coating.
03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 7
Manufacturers: CRP patch by Canusa, PERP patch Berry CPG, or approved
equal.
Exposed Pipe Coating System
Touch-up repair all damage to primer and/or intermediate coats with the specified
coating system prior to final coating of the pipeline in accordance with Section 09 90
00 – Painting and Finishes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
ENVIRONMENTAL LIMITATIONS
General
Products shall comply with federal, state, and local requirements limiting the
emission of volatile organic compounds and worker exposure.
Comply with applicable federal, state, and local, air pollution and environmental
control regulations for surface preparation, blast cleaning, disposition of spent
aggregate and debris, and coating application.
Do not perform abrasive blast cleaning whenever the relative humidity exceeds 85
percent or whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees above the dew point
of the ambient air.
Do not apply coatings when:
Surface and ambient temperatures exceed the maximum or minimum
temperatures recommended by the coating manufacturer or these specifications.
In dust or smoke-laden atmosphere, blowing dust or debris, damp or humid
weather, or under conditions that could cause icing on the metal surface.
When it is expected that surface temperatures would drop below 5 degrees
above dew point within 4 hours after application of coating.
Whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent for polyurethane coating
application.
Where weather conditions or project requirements dictate, CONTRACTOR shall
provide and operate heaters and/or dehumidification equipment to allow pipe
surfaces to be abrasive blasted and coated as indicated and in accordance with the
manufacturer's coating application recommendations.
Work activities may be restricted until adequate temperature and humidity controls
are in place and functioning within the environmental limits given.
Coating applicator shall provide a monitoring system approved by the coating
manufacturer that constantly records pipe and coating conditions during coating
application. Recorded monitoring parameters shall include pipe temperature, line
speed, surface preparation, holiday test, and other parameters applicable to the type
of coating.
Temperature Control
In cold weather or if moisture collects on the pipe, if the temperature of the pipe is
less than 45 deg F, preheat the pipe to a temperature of 50 deg F or 5 degrees
above dew point, whichever is greater.
When temperatures are above or below the coating manufacturer's recommended
application temperatures, CONTRACTOR shall provide temperature controls as
03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 8
necessary to permit the work to proceed within the manufacturer’s temperature
limitations.
Provide tenting, insulating blankets, baffles, or bulkheads as required to zone and
control heating or cooling effectiveness.
Heating shall be with indirect propane fired heaters that do not increase humidity
levels within the working area. Heaters shall be sized for the area to be heated.
Dehumidification
CONTRACTOR shall provide dehumidification equipment when necessary for shop
or field environmental control during surface preparation and/or coating application.
Dehumidification equipment shall be properly sized to maintain dew point
temperature 5 degrees or more below surface temperature of metal surfaces to be
cleaned and coated.
Cleaned metal surfaces shall be prevented from flash rusting throughout the project
duration; condensation or icing shall be prevented throughout surface preparation
and coating application.
Equipment size and power requirements shall be designed by personnel trained in
the operation and setup of dehumidification equipment based on project
requirements and anticipated weather conditions.
Dehumidification equipment shall operate 24 hours per day and continuously
throughout surface preparation and coating application.
CONTRACTOR shall use personnel properly trained in the operation and
maintenance of the dehumidification equipment or provided adequate training by the
dehumidification equipment supplier.
Daily maintenance requirements of the equipment shall be documented in writing
and posted near the equipment for review if required by ENGINEER.
Re-blasting of flash rusted metal surfaces or removal of damaged coatings because
of equipment malfunction, shutdown, or other events that result in the loss of
environmental control, will be at the sole expense of CONTRACTOR.
OBSERVATION OF WORK
CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER a minimum of 14 days advance notice of the start
of any pipe fab work and 14 days notice in advance of any shop coating work to allow
scheduling for shop or field observation. Notify ENGINEER a minimum 3 days in
advance of actual start of surface preparation and coating application Work.
Provisions shall be made to allow ENGINEER full access to facilities and appropriate
documentation regarding coating application.
Observation by ENGINEER or the waiver of observation of any particular portion of
the coating work shall not be construed to relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility to
perform the coating in accordance with these Specifications.
Materials shall be subject to observation for suitability as ENGINEER may determine,
prior to or during incorporation into the work.
SURFACE PREPARATION
General
03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 9
Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these
Specifications and the printed directions and recommendations of coating
manufacturer whose product is to be applied.
Visible oil, grease, dirt, and contamination shall be removed in accordance with
SSPC-SP1, solvent cleaning.
Surface imperfections such as metal slivers, burrs, weld splatter, gouges, or
delaminations in the metal shall be removed by filing or grinding prior to abrasive
surface preparation.
Protect prepared pipe from humidity, moisture, and rain. Flash rust, imperfections, or
contamination on cleaned pipe surface shall be removed by reblasting.
Priming and coating of pipe shall be completed the same day as surface preparation.
Weld Surface Preparation
Application
Spray applied coating systems do not require weld grinding.
Grind welds on tape wrap coated pipe or apply weld stripe tape over the weld, at
the pipe fabricator’s option, unless otherwise indicated.
Weld Grinding: Under the weld grinding option, welds taller than 3/32-inch above
pipe surface shall be ground to a tolerance of +3/32-inch to zero-inches above the
pipe surface as measured on the highest side of the weld.
Weld Stripe Tape
Weld stripe tape shall be applied to primed metal.
Tape shall either have no polyethylene backing or be double sided adhesive tape
to permit adhesion of the inner corrosion protection layer to the weld stripe tape.
Apply tape with a pressure roller to fully conform the tape to the weld surface.
Adhesion of the weld stripe tape shall be the same as for the coating system.
Steel Surface Preparation
Surface preparation of steel pipe shall be in accordance with SSPC surface
preparation standards utilizing the degree of cleanliness appropriate to the coating
system to be applied.
Grit and/or shot abrasive mixture and gradation shall be as required to achieve the
degree of cleanliness and coating adhesion required.
Pipe cleaned by abrasive blasting with recyclable steel grit and/or shot or other
abrasive shall be cleaned of debris and spent abrasive in an air wash separator.
Preparation of the steel pipe for the Polyurethane coating system shall have a sharp
angular surface profile of the minimum depth indicated.
Work shall be performed in a manner that does not permit the cleaned metal surface
to rust back or flash rust.
Rust back or flash rust shall be fully removed with the steel surface cleanliness equal
to the required metal surface cleanliness prior to rust back or flash rusting.
Determination of the equivalent surface cleanliness shall be at ENGINEER’S sole
discretion.
SHOP-APPLIED COATING SYSTEMS
Exposed Piping Coatings – See Section 09 90 00.
Buried Pipe - Tape Wrap Coating:
03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 10
Applicator shall use a monitoring system approved by the tape manufacturer that
constantly records pipe and tape conditions during coating application. Recorded
monitoring parameters shall include, but not be limited to; pipe temperature, line
speed, primer and tape roll body temperature, and tape tension.
Pipe surface temperature shall be between 45 and 120 degrees and 5 degrees
above dew point, whichever is greater.
Tape roll temperature shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations, but shall not be less than 55 degrees for the inner wrap and
65 degrees for the outer wraps.
Apply a uniform coat of primer as recommended by the manufacturer without skips,
runs, or sags. Allow to properly dry prior to applying the tape as required by the tape
manufacturer and as necessary to achieve maximum tape adhesion. Rug type
application will not be allowed.
If welds are not ground flush, apply a weld stripe tape to longitudinal or spiral pipe
welds prior to application of the inner wrap.
Tape layers shall be applied continuously with the use of hydro-tension tape stands.
Tension shall be maintained between the manufacturer’s minimum and maximum
tension recommendations or as required to achieve approximately 2.0 percent
reduction in tape width.
Inner tape wrap shall adhere tightly to the pipe surface. Coating shall be 100
percent adhering to the metal surface and shall not have any visible damage,
wrinkles, voids, disbondment, contamination, or holidays.
Tape coating adhesion testing shall be performed on the pipe per this Section.
Holidays testing shall be conducted on the inner layer tape prior to proceeding with
subsequent tape layers. Holidays shall be primed and patched using coating repair
procedures herein.
Perform coating and lining repairs per this Section.
PIPE LINING APPLICATION
For Buried Pipe: Shop-Applied Cement Mortar Lining
Place mortar lining used in steel piping and steel plate specials in pipe to thickness
below.

Pipe Diameter,
Inches
Lining Thickness,
Inches
Tolerances,
Inches
4 through 10
11 through 24
24 through 36
Greater than 36
3/8
5/16
3/8
1/2
-1/16, +1/8
-1/16, +1/8
-1/16, +1/8
-1/16, +3/16

Centrifugally line straight sections of pipe. Lining of special pieces or fittings shall be
by mechanical, pneumatic, or hand placement. Provide cement mortar lining of
uniform thickness. Finish to a smooth dense surface.
Steel plate specials larger than 16-inches in diameter shall have lining reinforced
with 2-inch by 4-inch No. 13-gauge welded steel wire mesh.
03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 11
Brace and support pipe during lining application to minimize pipe distortion or
vibration. Bracing and supports shall not damage the pipe, coating, or lining.
Tightly close ends of pipe and fittings with plastic sheet caps within 30 minutes of
lining application. Plastic end caps shall be of sufficient thickness and strength to
resist shipping, handling, and storage stresses.
Damage to the cement mortar lining, including disbondment, cracking, or
blistering, caused by improper curing, shipping, handling, or installation shall be
repaired in accordance with AWWA specifications.
Other requirements of mortar lining materials and processes are in AWWA C205.
Field Mortar Lining of Steel Pipe Joints (not used)
FIELD COATING JOINTS
Except for Wax Tape coatings of flanged and grooved joints, field coating of joints is not
allowed on this project.
REPAIR OF COATING AND LININGS
General
Areas where holidays are detected or coating is visually damaged, such as blisters,
tears, rips, bubbles, wrinkles, cuts, or other defects shall be repaired. Areas where
no holidays are detected, but are visually damaged shall also be repaired.
Maximum defects allowable shall be as indicated for the coating system.
Tape Wrap Coating Repairs
General
No more than 5 repairs per joint of pipe will be permitted with tape wrap coating,
excluding adhesion test damage. The coating on any pipe with more than 5
coating repairs or with more than 2 areas of coating damage greater than 5
square feet will be rejected.
Pipes exceeding the maximum number or size of coating defects shall be
stripped, reblasted, and recoated at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.
Pipe arriving in the field with defects or repairs exceeding the maximum number
or size of coating defects will be returned to the shop for recoating at
CONTRACTOR’s expense.
The number of layers and total thickness of the tape repair coating shall be the
same as the shop-applied coating; unless heat applied coating materials are
used.
Wipe the area to be repaired with solvent for a minimum distance of 4-inches
outside the damaged area.
Defect Size
Minor repairs - repairs that are less than 6-inches in the greatest dimension,
measured after cutout of damaged tape layers. Damage to the inner tape layer
will be considered minor only if repairs are made using heat-applied patch
materials.
Major repairs - repairs that exceed 6-inches in the greatest dimension or where
damage to the inner tape layer has occurred.
Minor Repairs
Complete minor repairs using a heat-applied coating patch material.
03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 12
Cut patch material to overlap onto the undamaged coating a minimum of 2-
inches on all sides with one-inch radius on each corner of the patch.
Carefully remove damaged layers by cutting the coating with a sharp knife
without cutting or damaging the inner wrap.
Cut middle and outer layers in stepped fashion to expose one-inch or more of the
underlying tape layer for the circumference of the repair.
Major Repairs
Coating repairs shall be with heat shrink sleeves as indicated for joints.
Carefully remove damaged layers by cutting the coating with a sharp knife
without cutting or damaging the inner wrap.
Holiday test the inner wrap and if a holiday is detected cut outer layers back to
fully exposed the holidays and retest for holidays.
Cut middle and outer layers in stepped fashion to expose one-inch or more of the
underlying tape layer for the circumference of the repair.
Width of sleeve shall be the width of the damaged area plus 4-inch overlap.
Multiple sleeves may be used for larger repairs, but must be overlapped a
minimum of 2-inches.
INSPECTION AND TESTING
Inspection
Applicator shall inspect and test the coating system in accordance with referenced
standards and these specifications, whichever is more stringent.
The frequency of the testing shall be determined by the applicator, but shall not be
less than the requirements of this Specification.
CONTRACTOR will conduct random independent inspections and tests for the final
acceptance or rejection of pipe coating or lining.
Adhesion Testing, General
Adhesion testing shall be conducted at the shop prior to shipment. Pipe shipped
without adhesion testing will be field-tested. Pipe rejected in the field will be returned
to the shop for repair at the sole expense of CONTRACTOR.
A minimum of 2 pipes will be tested for adhesion from each lot of pipe coated up to
4,000 square feet of pipe. An additional adhesion test will be conducted on every
increment up to 3,000 square feet of pipe coated in excess of the first 4,000 square
feet of pipe. (i.e., if one workday of production is 8,000 square feet of pipe, 4
adhesion tests will be conducted on the pipe lot.
A pipe lot is defined as the quantity of pipe that is coated by a single crew within a
work shift, but not to exceed 12 hours.
The pipe coating applicator shall repair coating damage from adhesion testing.
Adhesion tests will be performed not less than 24 hours after coating application.
Tests conducted prior to 24 hours will be acceptable only if the test meets or
exceeds the adhesion criterion and the test was requested by the pipe fabricator.
Pipe will be randomly selected for adhesion testing.
If any pipe tested fails the adhesion test, all pipes within the lot will be rejected. Each
pipe within the rejected pipe lot will then be individually tested for adhesion and
accepted or rejected on a pipe-by-pipe basis.
Rejected pipe shall have the coating fully removed from the pipe and the pipe
abrasive blasted and recoated.
03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 13
Adhesion Testing, Tape Wrap
Inner tape coating shall have an adhesion of 20 pounds per inch width on steel pipe
or 15 pounds per inch width on ductile iron pipe, minimum, when tape is pulled in a
continuous manner at an angle of 180 degrees to the pipe surface.
Adhesion tests shall be conducted at temperatures above 60 degrees F and less
than 80 degrees F.
Pulling tension shall be continuous, without stopping, and monitored throughout the
length of the pull, which shall be not less than 12-inches in length.
The pull tension shall be recorded for each inch of pull. The 2 highest and 2 lowest
readings shall be discarded and the remaining values averaged. Pull speed shall be
not less than 5 seconds per inch nor greater than 10 seconds per inch. If elongation
of the tape backing occurs, pull speeds may be exceed 10 seconds per inch
provided the minimum adhesion rating can still be achieved.
Failure shall be by cohesive failure of the adhesive only. Delamination failure,
defined as separation of the adhesive from the backing material, will result in
rejection of the tape lot. Intermittent skip failures will be counted as zero pounds of
adhesion and included in the calculations for average coating adhesion. Adhesive
failure, defined as separation of the adhesive from the metal substrate, will be
rejected.
Pipe that fails the test by delamination will be retested on 2 other pipes within the
same lot of coated pipe. Failure of any 2 pipes within the lot will result in rejection of
all pipes coated with the rejected tape lot.
Holiday Testing
Holiday test the inner layer of tape wrap coatings after application and prior to the
subsequent tape layer in accordance with AWWA C214 and NACE Standard RP
0274.
Holiday tests on polyurethane coatings shall be conducted on the completed coating
after cure or 24-hours, whichever is less, using a high voltage spark test in
accordance with NACE Standard RP 0274 and these specifications.
Coating thickness used for holiday testing shall be the minimum coating thickness.
Dry Film Thickness Testing

Coatings shall be tested for dry film thickness using a properly calibrated
magnetic pull off or eddy current equipment.
Coating thickness measurements shall be conducted as necessary and without
limitation. Testing conformance to the requirements of SSPC PA-2 is specifically
excluded from this specification.
HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION, AND STORAGE
Pipe shall be handled in such a manner as to protect the pipe and coating from damage.
Coated pipe shall not be shipped or installed until coating has developed full adhesion
and cure.
During coating application, storage, loading, and transportation, every precaution shall
be taken to protect and prevent damage to pipe, lining, and coating. Forklift equipment
shall have load-bearing surfaces padded with suitable material. Lift pipe with web slings
a minimum of 12-inches wide and of a type that will not damage the coating. Metal
03/2023 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
254.07.100 09 98 10 - 14
chains, cables, tongs, forklifts or other equipment likely to damage the coating will not be
permitted. Dragging or skidding of pipe on grade or in the trench will not be permitted.
Provide transportation vehicles with padded bolsters between each layer of pipe and
heavy padding under load ties. Bolsters shall be curved to fit the outside of the pipe and
12-inches wide, minimum. Pipe contact locations shall be heavily padded with carpet
and strips of the outer tape wrap material (adhesive side against the carpet) during
shipment to the Site and from the storage yard to the point of installation.
Pipe shall not be stored on rocks, gravel, or other hard materials that might damage the
coating. Provide padded 12-inch wide skids and chucks, sand bags, select loamy or
sand berms, or suspended from cutback ends, where possible, to minimize coating
damage. Pipe shall not be laid on asphalt without suitable padding at contact points.
Pipe shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR at the Site for damage. Any damage to the
pipe, lining, or coating shall be repaired if a satisfactory repair can be made; otherwise,
the damaged section shall be replaced at the sole expense of CONTRACTOR.
No metal tools or heavy objects shall be permitted to come into contact unnecessarily
with the finished coating. Workers shall not be permitted to walk on the coating except
when absolutely necessary. When required, shoes with rubber or composition soles and
heels or other suitable footwear that will not damage coating shall be used.
Long-term Exposure: Pipe shall either be provided with UV inhibitor for length of above
grade exposure or covered to prevent UV degradation of outer wrap. Amount of UV
stabilizers required shall depend on the project location, laying schedule, anticipated
length of exposure, and type of outer wrap. Coating manufacturer shall be consulted for
recommended UV inhibitors requirements or pipe shall be stored under a protective
cover. Protective covering can be colored plastic sheeting, canvas, or other UV
blocking material. Clear plastic sheets are not acceptable. Areas of coating that display
UV degradation shall be removed and repaired at sole cost of CONTRACTOR.
End Caps: Pipe ends of mortar lined pipe and fittings shall be tightly closed with a
plastic wrap to aid in curing and to minimize drying out of and contamination of the lining.
Plastic end cap shall consist of a minimum of one 10-mil sheet of polyethylene or other
suitable material. End caps shall be substantial enough to resist shipment, handling,
and storage loads and to remain firmly attached in place. The plastic end cap shall
remain intact and in place until pipe installation. Damaged or missing plastic end caps
shall be repaired or replaced.
- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
254.07.100 PAGE 10 44 00 - 1
SECTION 10 44 00
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
The CONTRACTOR shall provide fire protection equipment and appurtenant work,
complete and in place, according to the Contract Documents.
If more than one fire extinguisher or other fire protection equipment is required, provide
products from a single manufacturer.
RELATED WORK
Related work in other Sections includes but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract.
The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM E 814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop
Systems
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION PUBLICATIONS (NFPA)
NFPA No. 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE (IFC)
SUBMITTALS
Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
Submit manufacturer’s literature, installation instructions, and fire protection equipment
details.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for fire protection equipment. Full
compensation for the equipment shall be considered as included in the contract unit or
lump sum bid prices for the various items of the Contract to which it relates.
01/2023 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
254.07.100 PAGE 10 44 00 - 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
GENERAL
Mount one fire extinguisher in wellhouse Chlorine Room and another fire extinguisher in
Fluoride Room.
Fire protection equipment shall comply with the IFC, NFPA Pamphlet No. 10, and the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
MATERIALS
Fire Extinguisher Designated FE-1: FE-1 fire extinguishers shall be 10 pound minimum
capacity, A.B.C. dry-chemical type, with minimum UL rating of 4A:80BC.
Mounting brackets shall be specially designed for fire extinguisher.
Other materials not specifically shown on the drawings or listed in the specifications but
required for a complete and proper installation shall be as selected by the CONTRACTOR,
subject to approval by the ENGINEER.
Fire protection equipment shall be manufactured by Larsen’s Manufacturing, Amerex
Corporation, Potter-Roemer, or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Fire protection equipment shall be delivered to the site in unbroken packages or containers
bearing the manufacturer’s label with product description and rating.
Products shall be carefully stored in an area that is protected from deleterious elements
as recommended by the manufacturer. Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent
damage to the material and finish of the equipment.
INSTALLATION
All equipment shall be mounted and installed as per NFPA Pamphlet No. 10 and the
manufacturer recommendations unless otherwise directed by the Fire Marshall.
Coordinate final location and mounting heights with the fire Marshall prior to installation.
Fire extinguishers shall be provided with and installed on brackets or brackets within
cabinets. The CONTRACTOR shall provide blocking and other reinforcing in walls to
support the fire extinguishers.

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES
254.07.100 PAGE 22 10 10 - 1
SECTION 22 10 10
PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install plumbing piping and specialties, complete
and operable, as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
Plumbing piping and specialties includes piping, pipe hangers, sleeves, supports,
brackets, valves, drains, cleanouts, hose bibs, yard hydrants, and related items.
RELATED WORK
Related work specified in other Sections includes but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 05 45 00 Mechanical Metal Supports
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes
Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines
Section 33 05 03 Copper Pipe
Section 33 05 26 Utility Identification
Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances
Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection
Section 40 05 13.19 Stainless Steel Process Piping
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Plumbing piping shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be included
as part of the various items to which it relates.
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the
extent referenced. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)
B31.1 Power Piping
AMERICAN STANDARDS FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 74 Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM B 43 Standards for Seamless Red Brass Pipe
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)
CISPI 301 Standard Specification for Hub-less Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping
Applications.
01/2023 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES
254.07.100 PAGE 22 10 10 - 2
INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC)
INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE (IPC)
FACTORY MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY (FM GLOBAL)
FM 1680 Approval Standard for Couplings Used in Hubless Cast Iron
Systems for Drain, Waste or Vent, Sewer, Rainwater or Storm
Drain Systems Above and Below Ground, Industrial/Commercial
and Residential
PIPING SYSTEM LAYOUTS
Piping system drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show approximate
location of equipment and piping. Verify dimensions, whether in figures or scaled, in the
field. CONTRACTOR is responsible for the installation of complete and workable
systems whether completely detailed on the plans or not.
Ascertain locations of apparatus, fixtures, equipment, and piping in the field, and layout
work accordingly. ENGINEER reserves the right to make minor changes in location of
piping and equipment up to the time of installation without additional cost to OWNER.
SUBMITTALS
Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Submit general arrangement drawings of system components.
Submit product catalog cut sheets and other manufacturer information.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
Install work per applicable provisions of codes, rules, regulations, statutes, and
ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
GENERAL
Plumbing piping and specialties shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the
intended use.
Any pipe, plumbing fitting or fixture, solder, or flux used in the installation or repair of any
potable water system shall be “lead free” except where necessary for the repair of
leaded joints of cast iron pipes.
PIPING AND FITTINGS
Below ground drains and fittings (for building and backwashing drains) shall be PVC
Schedule 80 unless noted otherwise.
Cast iron sanitary, storm, vent pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with
ASTM A 74.
01/2023 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES
254.07.100 PAGE 22 10 10 - 3
Hub-less cast iron soil pipe and fittings with Camp-All type pipe couplings, or approved
equal, shall be used for above ground sanitary, storm, and vent piping where approved
for use by local authorities.
Hub-less cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall meet CISPI Standard 301.
Pipe couplings shall have high-torque capacity and shall meet FM Standard 1680.
Copper tubing and fittings for potable water shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 03
– Copper Pipe.
Brass piping shall match iron pipe size standards and meet ASTM B 43 Standards for
Seamless Red Brass Pipe.
Stainless Steel Pipe shall be Type 304 Stainless Steel, unless otherwise specified, and
shall be in accordance with Section 40 05 13.19 – Stainless Steel Process Pipe.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Pipe hangers and supports shall meet the requirements of IMC Section 305 Pipe
Support, Section 05 45 00 – Mechanical Metal Supports, and the following. If there is a
discrepancy in the requirements of these documents the more stringent requirement
shall apply.
Properly support, suspend, or anchor all piping and fittings to prevent sagging, over
stressing, or longitudinal movement of piping, and to prevent thrust or loads on or
against other equipment.
Support horizontal piping on adjustable split steel ring or clevis hangers. The following
schedule shows minimum spacing.
Steel, Brass and Copper:
a. 1-1/4" and smaller 6'-0" on center
b. 1-1/2" thru 3" 8'-0" on center
c. 4" and larger 12'-0" on center

PVC, CPVC, AND ABS:
a. 1" and smaller 4'-0" on center
b. 1-1/4" thru 2" 5'-0" on center
c. 2-1/2" thru 4" 6'-0" on center
d. 5" and larger 8'-0" on center
Support insulated piping with pipe saddles and hangers that fit on outside of insulation.
Do not compress or damage pipe insulation with hangers or supports.
Provide all rigid hangers with a means of vertical adjustment after erection.
Use copper or copper plated hangers for supporting uninsulated copper pipe.
All vertical and horizontal piping supports shall be fiberglass EnduroStrut by Enduro
Systems, Inc., or approved equal.
Perforated strap hangers or wire supports will not be permitted.
01/2023 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES
254.07.100 PAGE 22 10 10 - 4
INSERTS
Furnish and set inserts in concrete forms; provide reinforcing rods for pipe sizes over 3
inches or equivalent.
Furnish concrete inserts as follows: Black, malleable iron, universal type for threaded
connections with lateral adjustment. Inserts shall be galvanized unless noted otherwise
on the Drawings.
INSULATION
Hot water piping, valves, fittings, and exposed horizontal sanitary, storm, and vent piping
shall be provided with one-inch thick insulation.
Covering valves, flanges, fittings, and ends of insulation with pre-molded high- and low-
temperature PVC fitting cover, end cap, or similar pre-formed unit. The pre-formed unit
covers shall be sized to receive the same thickness insulation as used in adjacent ping.
Exposed supply and drain piping for lavatories shall be insulated under the wash basins
in order to prevent burns and abrasions to handicapped persons. Removeable insulated
covers shall be Handy-Shield Type by Plumberex Specialty Products, or approved
equal.
SHIELDS
Provide shields to protect insulation in all areas.
Provide approved galvanized form shields to isolate pipe in contact with hangers and
supports.
Furnish low compressive insolation protector shields. Size the shields per the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
SLEEVES
Where pipes pass through floors, footings, foundations, walls, or ceilings, furnish and
install pipe sleeves. Sleeves for concealed piping shall be of Schedule 40 galvanized
steel pipe one size larger than the pipe passing through. For exposed piping Schedule
40 black steel pipe installed so as to be completely covered by escutcheons. Extend
sleeves through floors 1/2 inch above finish floor.
ESCUTCHEONS
Fit pipe passing through walls, floors, or ceilings with escutcheons with set screws.
Use prime painted escutcheons where surface is to receive a paint finish; otherwise, use
escutcheons that are nickel or chromium plated.
Where piping is insulated, use escutcheon outside the insulation.
01/2023 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES
254.07.100 PAGE 22 10 10 - 5
JOINTS
For screwed pipe make ends with sharp, clean tapered threads using Teflon tape on the
male thread only. Do not use mill cut threads. Ream cut pipe to full inside diameter.
Welding may be done by either the arc or acetylene process conforming to the
requirements for the ASME B31.1.
For solder joints use fittings specifically made for soldering. Clean all burrs and roughen
pipe to clean; solder complete around joint.
For grooved pipe jointing systems use mechanical pipe couplings and fittings.
For no-hub cast iron soil pipe use double screw joint neoprene coupler.
UNIONS
Furnish and install unions for each valve or piece of equipment to permit easy
installation and removal of equipment.
VALVES
Water shutoff valves shall be the gate or ball type as designated on the drawings, except
on fixture supply piping where globe style valves shall be used.
Hose Bibs shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. The hose nipple shall be
a female iron pipe thread inlet with hose thread outlet. Hose bibs shall be 3/4-inch size
unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
Gate and ball valves shall be in accordance with Section 33 12 00 – Mechanical
Appurtenances.
TRENCH DRAIN IN CONCRETE FLOOR
Floor trench drains in concrete floors shall be 4-inch internal width, invert channel of
polymer concrete sloped at 0.5% with slotted stainless steel cover.
Trench pieces shall be numbered for proper installation. Provide cleanout catch basin at
90 degree bend into drain pipe.
Floor trench drain shall be ACO KS100 w/ Type 450 SS grate, or approved equal.
FLOOR DRAINS IN CONCRETE FLOORS
Floor drains in concrete floors shall be constructed of cast iron of the size indicated on
the Drawings and provided with sediment buckets.
Each floor drain located on an upper floor shall have a clamping collar with 4 pound
sheet lead flashing 12 inches minimum all around. Where flashing does not comply with
local code use epoxy waterproofing membrane.
Floor drains shall be Z520-Y by Zurn Industries, 32100-AE-81 by Josam Company,
Figure 2350 by Jay R Smith Mfg. Co., or approved equal.
01/2023 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES
254.07.100 PAGE 22 10 10 - 6
FLOOR CLEANOUTS
Cleanouts in concrete floors shall be heavy plugs with tapered shoulders against heavy
brass plugs.
Cleanout shall have a minimum diameter of 3-inches.
Floor cleanouts shall be fabricated from cast iron with gas and watertight ABS tapered
thread plug.
Floor cleanout shall be Z1400 by Zurn Industries, 55000 Series by Josam Company,
4237 Series by Jay R Smith Mfg. Co., or approved equal.
NON-FREEZE HYDRANTS
Hydrants in exposed locations subject to freezing shall be the non-freeze type. Hydrant
shall have a brass pipe outer casing, brass operating rod, and brass male hose nozzle.
Hydrants shall be Model Iowa Y1 by Woodford Manufacturing Co., or approved
equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
FIELD JOINTS
Unless required otherwise, provide restrained field joints (threaded, glued, or otherwise
restrained) that comply with manufacturer recommendations for joints.
PREPARATION
Prior to installation of piping, verify that it will not interfere with clearances required for
the erection and finish of structural members, architectural members, electrical,
sprinkler, or mechanical items.
Hang or support piping materials from roof support system whenever possible.
Do not cut any structural members for installation of piping.
INSERTS
Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams wherever practicable.
Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in
concrete for inserts carrying pipe over 3 inches in diameter.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface.
Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide rod with
recessed squared steel plate and nut above slab.
SLEEVES
01/2023 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES
254.07.100 PAGE 22 10 10 - 7
Set sleeves in position in advance of concrete work. Provide suitable reinforcing around
sleeves.
Extend sleeves through potentially wet floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk
sleeves full depth and provide floor plate.
Where piping passes through floor, ceiling, or wall, close-off space between pipe and
construction with noncombustible insulation. Provide tight-fitting metal caps on both
sides and caulk.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Support all piping and make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope and
anchorage.
The use of pipe hooks, chains, or perforated metal for pipe support will not be permitted.
Suspend all piping in the building as indicated.
Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2-inch clear space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
Place a hanger within 1 foot of each horizontal elbow.
Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inch minimum after piping is erected.
Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple
or trapeze hangers.
Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
PIPING INSTALLATION
Cut piping accurately for fabrication to measurements established at the construction
site and work into place without springing or forcing.
Remove burrs and cutting slag from pipe by reaming or other approved cleaning
methods.
Make changes in direction with proper fittings.
Arrange piping so as not to interfere with the removal of other equipment, ducts, or
devices. Do not block doors, windows, or access openings. Provide unions in the piping
at connections to all equipment. Unions must be accessible.
Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment with PVC caps or expanding neoprene
plugs to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of the system. Plugs of rags, wool,
cotton, waste, or similar materials are not acceptable.
Install all piping systems so they can easily be drained. Provide anti-siphon hose bibbs
at low points on water lines.
01/2023 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALITIES
254.07.100 PAGE 22 10 10 - 8
Slope all soil and waste lines within the building at 1/4 inch per foot fall in the direction of
flow unless indicated otherwise.
PRIMING AND COATING
Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports and hangers and supports located in
crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces in accordance with Section 09
90 00 – Painting and Finishes.
PIPE LABELING
Exposed pipe shall be labeled in accordance with Utah State Regulation R309-525-8,
Section 33 05 26 – Utility Identification, and the IPC.
Labeling shall include direction arrows for flow.
DISINFECTION AND TESTING
The CONTRACTOR shall perform such tests as are required by local ordinances and
codes in the presence of the local governing authority inspector to show that piping is
tight, leak free, and otherwise satisfactory, and shall perform such tests as the
ENGINEER may direct to ensure that fixtures and equipment operate properly.
Disinfect potable water piping in accordance with Section 33 13 00 - Pipeline Testing
and Disinfection.
Test all potable water piping.
Repair defects which develop under tests promptly and repeat tests. No caulking or
screwed joints, cracks, or holes will be permitted. Replace pipe or fitting or both with
new material when repairing leaks in screwed joints.
Repair leaks in copper tubing by melting out joint, thoroughly cleaning both tubing and
fitting, and resoldering.

- END OF SECTION -
01/2023 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 00-1
SECTION 23 05 00
GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
Sections of other Divisions which relate to HVAC work apply to the work of this section.
See various Sections on sitework, underfloor work, structural work, finish materials, etc.
Related Sections: Refer to "Electrical Requirements for HVAC Equipment Section in
Division 23 for basic electrical requirements for all HVAC equipment. Special and specific
electrical requirements are specified within each respective equipment specification
section.
Section 26 00 00 – “Electrical General Provisions” applies to the HVAC work.
1.2 SUMMARY: This Section specifies the basic requirements for HVAC installations and
includes requirements common to more than one of the Division 23 HVAC sections. It
expands and supplements the requirements of Division 1 and the Mechanical Sections 21,
22 and 33.
This Division does not define, nor is it limited by, trade jurisdictions. All work described
herein is a part of the General Contract and is required of the Contractor regardless.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT: The HVAC work described in these Division 23
specifications is for a Pump Station project located in Davis County, Utah. Design weather
conditions are: 97°F db, 63°F wb and winter 0°F. Altitude readings, unless otherwise
noted, are for an elevation of 4300 feet above sea level. Make adjustment to
manufacturer's performance data as needed.
Work includes:
HVAC systems for the New Pump Station and Fluoridation Building.
1.4 CODES AND PERMITS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION:

A. Perform the HVAC work in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of the various
codes. Where the drawings and/or specifications indicate materials or construction in
excess of code requirements, the drawings and/or specifications govern.
B. Hold and save the Owner and Engineer free and harmless from liability of any nature or
kind arising from Contractor failure to comply with codes and ordinances.
C. Secure permits necessary for the prosecution of the work under this contract. Contractor
to pay all fees.
01/2023 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 00-2
D. Referenced Standards:
American Welding Society
International Mechanical Code/State Code
International Building Code/State Code
International Plumbing Code with amendments
SMACNA Duct Design Standards
Locally enforced NFPA Codes
NFPA 90A related to general Heating and Ventilation
NFPA 820 related to Ventilation of Water Treatment Plants
Local Power Utility Regulations
ASME Codes for Pressure Vessels and Piping
ANSI B31.1 Piping
E. Review of work in progress will be made throughout the course of the work. Final review
by the Engineer will not be made nor Certificate of Substantial Completion issued until
certificates of acceptability from the Authorities having jurisdiction are delivered.
1.5 DEFINITION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The HVAC drawings at reduced scale
show the general arrangement of equipment, etc., and, after prior coordination, are to be
followed as closely as the actual building construction and the work of other trades will
permit. The architectural and structural drawings shall be considered as part of the work
insofar as these drawings furnish the Contractor with information relating to design and
construction of the building. Structural, Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings
take precedence over HVAC drawings. Request clarification and participate in resolution
in the event of conflict.
Examine the actual construction site prior to bidding and obtain an understanding of the
existing conditions under which the work will be performed. No allowances will be made
for failure to make such examination.
During construction, set up the rough work, and verify the evolving dimensions governing
the HVAC work at the building. Do not claim or expect extra compensation because of
differences between actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings. Examine
adjoining work on which HVAC work is dependent for perfect efficiency, and report any
work of other trades which must be corrected. No waiver of responsibility for defective
work shall be claimed or allowed due to unfavorable construction consequent conditions
affecting the HVAC work.
1.6 ROUGH-IN:
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of
the actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 3 through 44 for rough-in requirements.
01/2023 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 00-3
1.7 HVAC INSTALLATIONS:
A. Equipment Arrangement: Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the arrangement of
equipment indicated is based upon information available at the time of design and is not
intended to show exact dimensions particular to a specific manufacturer. Some aspects of
the drawings are diagrammatic and some features of the illustrated equipment
arrangement may require revision to meet the actual equipment requirements. Structural
supports, foundations, and electrical and instrumentation connections indicated may have
to be altered to accommodate the equipment provided. No additional payment will be
made for such revisions and alterations. Substantiating calculations and drawings shall be
submitted prior to beginning the installation of equipment.
B. Coordinate HVAC equipment and materials installation with other building components.
C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
D. Arrange for openings in building wall to allow for HVAC installations.
E. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in building
wall structural components, as they are constructed.
F. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of HVAC materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work.
G. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate installation of
HVAC equipment and materials.
H. Install HVAC equipment at mounting heights as indicated on the plans. Make adaptations
as field conditions require after consulting with the HVAC and Structural Engineers.
I. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment
components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with
minimum of interference with other installations.
J. Where HVAC work penetrates other trade work such as masonry walls, etc., penetration
shall be neatly cut and sleeved, and the rough wall opening shall be filled and patched.
1.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS
A. Equipment Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, equipment supports, anchors, and
restrainers shall be adequately designed for static, dynamic, wind, and seismic loads as
stated in the 2015 (or latest edition) International Building Code (IBC), Chapter 16 and
ASCE 7-05. Submitted design calculations for equipment supports and anchorage shall
bear the signature and seal of a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of
Utah, unless otherwise indicated. Calculations shall account for forces and distribution of
forces on supporting structures resulting from normal operation, normal operation plus
seismic loadings, normal operation plus wind loadings, as well as the other load
combinations stated the 2006 IBC.
01/2023 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 00-4
1. Wall-mounted equipment weighing more than 250 pounds shall be provided with
fabricated steel supports as shown on the contract document sections. Pedestals
shall be of welded steel. If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet or is
enclosed with removable sides, the pedestal shall match the supported equipment in
appearance and dimensions.
B. Wind Load: The wind load shall be calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-05, Chapter 6,
using the following design parameters:
1. Wind Speed: 90 mph
2. Exposure: C
3. Importance Factor: Iw = 1.15
C. Seismic Loads: The seismic lateral and vertical forces shall be calculated in accordance
with the ASCE 7-05, Chapters 11 and 13, using the appropriate design parameters for the
respective site location. Provide values for the following categories as part of the Seismic
Submittal.
1. Site Class
2. Seismic Design Category (SDC)
3. Seismic Importance Factor:
4. Short Period Spectral Acceleration
5. 1 Second Period Spectral Acceleration
D. Hydrodynamic Forces: Hydrodynamic forces calculated in accordance with AWWA D100,
API 650 or ACI 350.3-06 shall be based on the appropriate parameters for the respective
site location. Provide values for the following categories as part of the Seismic Submittal.
1. Site Class
2. Seismic Design Category (SDC)
3. Seismic Importance Factor:
4. Short Period Spectral Acceleration
5. 1 Second Period Spectral Acceleration
E. Anchors: Anchor bolts shall be in accordance with Section 05500 - Miscellaneous
Metalwork, and shall be designed to resist the above loads. Anchor bolt calculations shall
clearly show that the capacity of the anchor and the capacity of the concrete that the
anchor is embedded in are adequate to resist all loads stated in the 2015 (or latest edition)
IBC and ASCE 7-05, including lateral wind and lateral and vertical seismic loads.
Reduction factors associated with edge distance embed length, and bolt spacing shall all
be considered and based on the actual dimensions of the concrete that resists the
anchorage forces. Anchor bolt details shall include required bolt diameter, embed, and
edge distances. Further, the design of Anchors shall consider the ductility requirements
stated in ASCE 7-05, Chapter 13, Section 13.4.2 and Chapter 15, Section 15.7.3. Anchor
bolt calculations and details shall be submitted and shall bear the signature and seal of a
Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Utah.

F. Equipment Foundations: Where indicated on the Contract Documents the structural steel
supporting the Wall Mounted AC Unit serving the Electrical Room shall be mounted on a
minimum 6-inch high concrete base. The CONTRACTOR, through the equipment
manufacturer, shall verify the size and weight of equipment foundation to insure
compatibility with equipment. The dimensions of the concrete base shall be sufficient to
provide the edge distances required by the anchor bolt calculations.
01/2023 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 00-5
1.1 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance.
Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing.
B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location.
C. Establish required clearance to all installation features involving operation and
maintenance. Respect manufacturer’s recommendations for access and clearance.
1.9 CHANGE ORDERS See General Conditions.
1.10 ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION/SUBSTITUTION: These documents outline a way in
which the Owner may be delivered a functional and reliable facility. Drawings and
specifications describe reasonable engineering practice for the Contractor to follow.
Coordination between trades may result in periodic needs to adjust the installation from
that indicated, but in no case shall the intended function be compromised.

The Contractor may perceive some material or work methods which differ from those
specified which could save time and effort without compromising quality. These may be
presented to the Engineer with a breakdown of possible cost savings for review.
Implement changes only with authorization.

Materials substitutions will generally be covered in a review process prior to bidding. After
bidding, material or equipment substitutions shall be proposed only on the basis of
definitive cost accounting and implemented only with authorization.
1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Lay out the project where new work is involved ahead of time, providing sleeves and block
outs, and have work specifically formed, poured and framed to accommodate HVAC
installations. Cut and patch only as needed. Repair wall where cutting and patching is
needed to match existing.
B. Refer to Division 26 Section: ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for
requirements for cutting and patching for electrical equipment, components, and materials.
C. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting
and patching.
D. Arrange for repairs required to restore other and any work damaged as a result of HVAC
installations.
E. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is
necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.
F. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of HVAC equipment and materials required to:
1. Remove and replace defective Work;
01/2023 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 00-6
2. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents;
3. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing:
G. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for
Engineer observation of concealed Work.
H. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or
scheduled to be removed.
I. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread
of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
1.12 SUBMITTALS: Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted
only from the Contractor to the Engineer. Submittal shall meet the requirements of section
01 30 00 – Submittals. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly
to the Engineer will not be processed. There is opportunity and allowance for discussion
prior to submittal. Document each transmittal at each transfer level of the process, and
sign and stamp the submittal indicating that it has been reviewed and is in compliance with
the criteria of the project, any exceptions being clearly noted. Submittals are to include all
supporting calculations for the equipment, supports and anchorage of the equipment.
A. SHOP DRAWINGS: As soon as possible after the contract is awarded, submit to the
Engineer, an electronic copy of the descriptive literature covering all equipment and
materials to be used in the installation of HVAC systems for this project. Obtain written
confirmation of acceptable review by the Owner's Representative before ordering,
purchasing, acquiring or installing any such equipment or materials for the project.
Prepare the submittals in an orderly manner after the order of this specification, with
identification tabs for each item or group of related items. Clearly indicate performance,
quality, utility requirements, dimensions of size, connection points and other information
pertinent to effective review.
Equipment must fit into the available space with allowance for operation, maintenance, etc.
The Contractor shall take full responsibility for space and utility requirements for
equipment installed. Don’t submit anything that won’t fit or won’t work.
Factory-wired equipment shall include shop drawings of all internal wiring to be furnished
with unit.
Review by the Engineer will be for general conformance of the submitted equipment of the
project specification; in no way does such approval relieve Contractor of his obligation to
furnish equipment and materials that comply in detail to the specification, nor does it
relieve the Contractor of his obligation to lay out ahead of time to determine actual field
dimensions and conditions which may affect his work.
01/2023 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 00-7
B. Record Drawings: See Division 1. During the course of construction, maintain a set of
drawings, specifications, change orders, shop drawings, addenda, etc., for reference and
upon which all deviations from the original layout are recorded. Turn these marked up
documents over to the Engineer within 90 days of system acceptance so that the original
tracings can be revised. If the Contractor fails to mark up the prints, he shall reimburse the
Engineer for the time required to do so.
1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING
A. Instruction of Owner's Personnel: At a time prior to Owner making use of a device or
system, and in general after testing and balance work for a building or major system is
complete, prepare, schedule and conduct a series of training sessions for Owner's
operating and supervisory personnel. Instructions shall cover each device and system with
emphasis on understanding of the purpose and function, the maintenance requirements
and the proper adjustment and operating technique.
B. Instruct building operating staff in operation and maintenance of HVAC systems utilizing
Operation and Maintenance Manual when so doing.
C. Contractor to video tape instruction sessions, and give video tape to owner.
D. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows:
1. HVAC - 8 hours, or more as needed, allocated among the various systems.
2. Temperature Control - 4 hours, or more. Programming help as needed. Coordinate
with Division 26 HVAC control.
E. Initial instruction periods shall occur after pre-final inspection when systems are properly
working and before final payment is made. Schedule subsequent visits with the Building
Operation Personnel throughout the first year.
F. Vendors for each piece of equipment, controls, etc., shall participate along with the
Contractor(s).
1.14 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY: The following guarantee is a part of this specification and is
binding on the part of the Contractor and his assigns:
"Contractor guarantees that this installation is in accordance with the terms of the Contract
and is free from HVAC defects. He agrees to replace or repair, to the satisfaction of the
Owner's Representative, any part of this installation which may fail or be determined
unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance. See also the General
Conditions of these specifications. Failed equipment in the repair or replacement shall be
guaranteed for one full year from the date of “Substantial Completion."
Compile and assemble the warranties required by Division 23 into a separated set of vinyl
covered, insert sheets, tabulated and indexed for each reference, included in the O & M
Manual.
01/2023 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 00-8
Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to
include date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names,
addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining
warranty services.
HVAC systems and equipment shall not be considered for substantial completion and
initiation of warranty until they have performed in service continuously without malfunction
for at least thirty (30) working days.
1.15 TESTS AND CERTIFICATIONS: Make all tests required by code or specification in the
presence of a representative of the Owner, with tests recorded and certified by the
Contractor and Representative. Involve local authorities where required.
1.16 PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES: Refer to General Conditions.
1.18 HVAC RELATED CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
A. Include Division 26 – Electrical section in the following work.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on controls
and/or unit control panels. Includes starters, disconnects, and required
electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed,
by manufacturer.
2. Interlock wiring between electrically operated equipment units; and
between equipment and field installed control devices. Interlock wiring
specified as factory installed is work of this section.
3. Control wiring between field installed equipment, controls, indicating
devices, and unit control panels.
4. 24 volt and 120 volt service work required by instrumentation/control
systems.
B. Participate in "System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing".
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 QUALITY AND CHARACTER OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

A. New and conventional: All equipment and materials shall be new, and shall be the
standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of heating,
ventilating and air conditioning equipment, and shall be the manufacturer's latest design.
Specific equipment shown in schedules on drawings and specified herein is to be the basis
for the Contractor's bid. Provisions for substitute equipment are outlined in the General
Conditions.
01/2023 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 00-9
B. Complete: Furnish and install all major items of equipment herein specified and/or called
out in the equipment schedules on the drawings complete with all accessories normally
supplied with catalog items listed, and with all other accessories necessary for a complete
and satisfactory installation.
2.2 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

A. Close duct openings with caps or plugs to prevent lodgement of dirt or trash during the
course of installation. Cover equipment tightly and protect against dirt, water and chemical
or HVAC injury. At the completion of the work, clean equipment and materials and polish
thoroughly and deliver in a factory dock condition for the Owner's acceptance. Make
damage and defects developing before acceptance of the work good at Contractor's
expense.

B. Do not make temporary use of project equipment, during construction. DO NOT USE
PERMANENT HVAC SYSTEMS FOR TEMPORARY HEAT!!

2.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF WORKMEN:

A. All mechanics shall be capable journeymen, skilled in the work assigned to them.
Apprentices may be used with appropriate direction.
B. Do not employ unskilled persons in the work; execute all work in a skillful and workmanlike
manner. All persons employed shall be competent, faithful, orderly and satisfactory to the
Owner. Should the Owner's Representative deem anyone employed on the work
incompetent or unfit for his duties, and so certify, Contractor shall remove that employee
from this project and he shall not be again employed upon the project without permission
of the Owner's Representative.

2.4 FOREMAN: Designate an experienced and qualified general HVAC foreman for the
project work to be consistently available on site during the life of the project for
consultation. Do not replace this individual without prior approval from the Owner's
Representative.
2.5 USE OF COMMON VENDORS: Regardless of subcontract delegations, coordinate
purchasing between trades so that equipment and materials of similar nature come from a
single vendor, i.e., all package HVAC units shall be common source. Do not burden the
Owner with multiple brands of similar equipment unless so directed.
2.6 WALL PENETRATIONS - SLEEVES:
A. Install metal sleeves through all wall openings for supply air diffuser and return air grille
ductwork, caulked and sealed. Reference Duct Penetration Detail on the contract
drawings.

01/2023 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 00-10
2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (GENERAL):

A. Provide mountings and supports for all HVAC equipment. Primary information is contained
in these specifications as noted in, but not limited to, paragraph 1.8 above and on the
drawings. Correlate HVAC work with the work of other trades to obtain a consistent
manner of installation.

B. Provide supports to correlate with seismic restraint, expansion/contraction, and vibration
isolation.
2.8 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: Install all equipment in strict accordance with
directions and recommendations furnished by the manufacturer. Where such directions
are in conflict with the plans and specifications, report such conflicts to the Engineer.

2.9 LUBRICATION: Lubricate equipment at startup. Then, provide all lubricants for the
operation of all equipment until acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor is held
responsible for all damage to equipment consequent to pre-acceptance operation.
2.10 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL:

A. In general, primary motor starters, related motor starter equipment and power wiring
indicated on the electrical drawings and control diagrams are to be furnished and installed
under the Division 26 Specification. Items of electrical control equipment specifically
mentioned to be furnished by the HVAC (Controls) Contractor either in these specifications
or on the related drawings, shall be obtained and mounted by this Contractor and shall be
connected under and as required by specifications, all in compliance with the National
Electric Code, and Division 26. Many control devices and fan motors are to be furnished
and terminal block wired to a unit mounted power or control panel. The project requires
this single location of connection for fan and pump motors, damper actuators, valve
actuators, sensors smoke detectors and the like.
B. Refer to the control equipment and wiring shown on the diagrams. Any changes or
additions required by specific equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of
the contractor.
C. HVAC electrical work must be fully coordinated with Division 26 to insure that all required
components of the work are included and fully understood. No additional cost shall accrue
to the Owner as a result of lack of coordination.

D. Where the detailed electrical work is not shown on the electrical drawings, the HVAC
Contractor shall furnish, install and wire or have prewired all specified and necessary
controls for package air equipment specified for this project. The objective of this
paragraph is to make sure a complete operating system is obtained at no additional cost to
the Owner for field wiring required related to the equipment.
2.11 CLEANING OF DUCTS: Duct systems shall have all debris removed and fans shall be run
to blow out all dust and foreign matter before grilles and diffusers are installed and
connected.
01/2023 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 00-11
Damp wipe all ductwork on installation, cap open ducts, cover fan inlets, vacuum fan
plenums and related installation before starting fans. Run fans only with filters in place.
2.12 JOBSITE CLEANUP:
A. Keep site clean during progress of work.
B. At the conclusion of work, clean all installation thoroughly. Leave equipment in a factory
dock condition. Correct any damage and touch up or repaint if necessary. Remove all
debris from site.
END OF SECTION
01/2023 HVAC IDENTIFICATION
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 20-1
SECTION 23 05 20
HVAC IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-23 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods section apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Label all heating, air conditioning, automatic temperature control equipment (excluding
thermostats), and distribution systems. Also label all electrical switches and starters for all
HVAC equipment.
PART 2 – GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIAL AND METHODS
2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION:
A. Equipment Identification:
1. Identify all HVAC equipment including, but not limited to controllers, etc., a with
signs made of laminated plastic with 1/8" or larger engraved letters.
2. Give each piece of equipment its own unique equipment number or symbol.
3. Information on sign shall include name of equipment, identification on plans and
schedules, rating, maintenance instructions, and any other important data not
included on factory attached name plate.
4. Signs shall be attached to equipment so they can be easily read. Attachment
shall be by rust proof screws or rivets. Do not use adhesive.
5. Identification signs for equipment shall be similar to the following:
a. Supply Fan (F-2)
Rating: 49,850 cfm @ 3.5" s.p. (At 1600 ft. elevation)
Maintenance: Check bearings for lubrication every 30 days and
lubricate as required with S.A.E. 30 oil.
01/2023 HVAC IDENTIFICATION
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 20-2
2.2 PANEL IDENTIFICATION:
A. Provide all panel devices on panel faces with engraved black face Formica with white
engraved lettering labels.
B. Provide all internal panel components with engraved black face Formica labels with white
engraved lettering. Fasten label beneath each device.
C. Numerically or alphabetically code all panel wiring and tubing.
END OF SECTION
01/2023 HVAC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 30-1
SECTION 23 05 30
HVAC - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.
B.Division-23, Section 23 05 00 General HVAC Requirements sections apply to work of this
section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A.Furnish four sets of bound operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals within 90 days of
system acceptance. Manuals shall contain descriptive drawings and data which identify
equipment installed at the project and detail the procedures and parts required to operate,
maintain and repair the equipment. Copies of approved submittals shall be included for all
equipment.
1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL HVAC SYSTEMS:
A.General:
1.The "Operating and Maintenance Manual" is a bound compilation of drawings and data
that the owner requires for each building or project. Furnish these manuals, complete
with drawings and data, to the Owner through the Engineer.
2.The mechanical contractor has overall responsibility to obtain the necessary data from
and compile the data as set forth in this specification.
3.The number of binders (or "volumes") required will depend on the amount of information
to be catalogued. Total "sets" see paragraph 1.2A.
4.Make all information legible and sufficiently marked to indicate the exact size, model, type,
etc., of equipment furnished and installed.
B.Purpose: The Operating and Maintenance Manual is prepared to provide a ready reference
to all important pieces of mechanical and electrical equipment installed on the project. It is
also to provide the necessary operating and maintenance data for use by service personnel.
It is also to provide information required for checking equipment performance or for planning
of plant expansion or redesign.
PART 2 – MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.1 PAGE SIZE: All pages shall be standard 8-1/2 x 11 inches size or approximate multiples
(preferably 17 x 11 inches) folded to 8-1/2 x 11 inch.
2.2 DRAWINGS: All drawings larger than 8-1/2" x 11" shall be folded and inserted in individual 8-
1/2" x 11" manila pockets, which shall have standard three-ring side punching for insertion in
the binders. The equipment name, drawing description and number shall be written on the
face of each manila pocket.
01/2023 HVAC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 30-2
2.3 BINDERS: Binders shall be piano hinge, bar-lock type, Buckram (stiffened fabric cover)
binders with block lettering for sheet size 8-1/2 x 11 inches with 2" to 3-1/2" expandable metal
capacity as required for the project. The number of binders, on not filling them beyond 4".
A. Place the following information on the front cover and backbone:
1."Operation and Maintenance Manual".
2.Project Name (and volume number if more than one volume).
Project Number (Per owner’s project number).
`
3.Building name and number.
4.Owner’s name.
5.(Architect’s name.)
6.Engineer's name.
7.General Contractor's name.
8.HVAC Contractor's name.
Items 5 through 7 need not be printed on the backbone.
2.4 CONTENTS AND INDEXING:
A.Manuals shall contain descriptions of the building systems in sufficient detail to adequately
indicate the type of systems installed and the basic details of their operation.
B.All purchased equipment data shall be used to designate the sections. Within each section
additional indexing of component parts may be required.
C.Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall contain to the fullest extent all possible
information pertinent to the equipment. The arrangement and type of information to be filed
shall be as follows:
1.11 x 17 size project drawings in “As-built” condition.
2.Outline drawings, special construction details, “As built” electrical wiring and control
diagrams for all major and supplementary systems.
3.Manufacturer’s test or calculated performance data and certified test curves.
4.Installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, including a complete parts list and
sectional drawing with parts identification numbers. Mark with model, size and plan
number.
5.Manufacturer’s brochures marked to indicate exact equipment purchased. Brochures on
component parts supplied by a manufacturer with his equipment, but not manufactured
directly by him, shall also be included. Include performance data similar if not equivalent
to the shop drawing submittal.
6.List the serial numbers of each item of equipment installed with the model numbers and
plan symbols.
01/2023 HVAC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 30-3
7.Include a Table of Contents. The contents shall be divided with tabbed index dividers into
the following suggested parts:
Part I Building and System Descriptions
Part II Purchased Equipment Data
Part III Test Reports and Valve Charts
Part IV Start-Up and Operation
Part V Preventative Maintenance Recommendations
8.A copy of the approved submittals for each piece of equipment.
9.A copy of all testing, adjusting and balancing reports.
10.Wiring diagrams, marked with model and size and plan symbol.
11.Operating and Maintenance Manuals data for Part I shall be obtained directly from the
mechanical and electrical consultants. (Allow consultant preparation cost.)
12.The index for each section shall contain the name and address of the manufacturer and, if
different, where replacement and repair parts may be obtained.
PART 3 – EXECUTION - (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
01/2023 HVAC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 30-4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 93-1
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS:

A. Work of this section shall be subject to the requirements of the General Conditions of this
contract, the Mechanical - General Requirements, HVAC General Requirements, General
Electrical Requirements and other sections where this work shares a responsibility.
B. System commissioning and startup of the HVAC systems shall be the responsibility of the
HVAC Division 23 Contractor and his subcontractors with the participation of the Divisions
26/40 Electrical and Instrumentation Contractor(s) related to electrical and instrumentation
work and the General Contractor related to general construction items.

C. Testing and balancing shall be under the direction of the General Contractor with the full
participation of all of the mechanical and electrical trades employed on the project and
shall include the participation of an independent testing and balance subcontractor to
coordinate all elements of the work and to perform special technical services outlined
herein.

1.2 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING - SCOPE OF WORK:

A. The work required under this section shall include but not necessarily be limited to the
following:
1. The pre-startup inspection of all HVAC systems and subsequent correction of any
incorrect items.
2. The initial first run inspections.
3. System operations inspection.

B. The intent of this section is to provide for proper installation, startup, service and operation
of the mechanical systems in preparation for system balancing. See section for balancing
of air system. After completion of the balancing, the mechanical system shall be ready for
owner occupancy, with all systems operating as intended.

C. Repair, replacement or adjustment of each item shall be performed by the respective
installing subcontractor.

1.3 TESTING AND BALANCING - SCOPE OF WORK:

A. This work incorporates a checkout of construction work, individual component activation
and overall system activation into one work program which shall serve as the transition
period from the Contractor's job to Owner's facility.
B. The Contractor shall be skilled in the operation and manipulation of systems and in the
direction of parties involved in the work.
01/2023 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 93-2
C. The Contractor shall participate in the startup and shakedown of all mechanical systems
installed and modified in this contract; test adjust and balance these systems to obtain
optimum performance at a level which minimizes the required energy input, prepare and
submit a complete report of work done and the final system condition obtained, participate
in the instruction of Owner's personnel in the proper operation of systems and equipment.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS OF SYSTEM COMMISSIONING AND TAB TEAM:

A. Representatives of Contractor shall be available on a daily basis through the
commissioning and adjustment period. These men shall be experienced journeymen with
prior experience in system operation and with specific experience on the construction of
this project. Section 23 09 00 – HVAC Control Systems is a particular participant in the
work.

B. Balancing shall be done at the Contractor's expense by an independent firm specializing in
this work. A definition of independent shall mean the firm is not associated with any
engineering, contracting, or manufacturing firm and derives its income solely from testing,
adjusting and balancing mechanical systems. Approved firms to do this work include:
Bob’s Test and Balance – Salt Lake City, UT
Certified Test and Balance – Salt Lake City, UT
Barnett, Inc. (Payson Sheet Metal) – Payson, UT

C. The balancing work including air portions shall be performed by the same firm having total
professional responsibility for the final testing, adjusting and balancing of the entire system.
A principal of the firm shall be directly involved in the project.

D. The testing and balancing firm shall furnish all necessary tools, scaffolding and ladders
that are required and shall provide all required instruments, take all readings and make all
necessary adjustments.

E. After all adjustments are made a detailed written report shall be prepared and submitted
for approval and shall bear the signature of the professional supervising the work. Final
acceptance of this project will not be made until a satisfactory report is received. Furnish
an electronic copy of the report for Engineer Review.

F. Treat each individual system as separate elements for reporting purposes.
PART 2 – EXECUTION, SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
2.1 PRE-STARTUP INSPECTION:

A. The pre-startup inspection of all systems shall provide for verifying that each piece of
equipment is properly installed and prepared for startup.
B. All pertinent items shall be checked, including but not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Removal of shipping stops.
2. Vibration isolators properly aligned and adjusted.
3. Flexible connections properly aligned.
4. Belts properly adjusted.
01/2023 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 93-3
5. Belt guards and safety shields in place.
6. Safety controls and high or low limits in operation.
7. Filters in place and seal provided around edges.
8. All test stations and measuring devices installed.
9. Initial lubrication of equipment is complete.
10. Filters are clean.
11. Motor rotations are correct.
12. Voltages match nameplate.
13. Control system is in operation.
14. All interlocks are wired and verified.
15. All controls have been connected and verified.
16. All factory dampers and operators are properly installed and operating.
17. All supply diffusers and return air grilles with associated ductwork is installed and
connected.
18. All other items necessary to provide for proper startup.
C. Correct all incomplete or defective items.
2.2 FIRST RUN INSPECTION:

A. Recheck all items outlined in pre-startup inspection to insure proper operation.

B. Check the following items:
1. Excessive vibration or noise.
2. Loose components.
3. Initial control settings.
4. Motor amperages.
5. Heat buildup in motors, bearings, etc.
6. Control system is properly calibrated and functioning as required.

C. Correct all items which are not operating properly.

2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION:

A. Observe the mechanical systems under operating conditions for sufficient time to verify
proper operation under varying conditions, such as day-night and heating-cooling.
B. Periodically check the following items:

1. Filters.
2. Visual checks of air flow for "best guess" settings for preparation for system air
balancing under section applying.
3. Control operation, on-off sequences, system cycling, etc.
4. Visual checks of seals, packings, operation pressures.
5. Cleaning of excessive oil or grease.
6. Dampers close tightly.
7. Refrigerant System leaks.
8. All other items pertaining to the proper operation of the mechanical system whether
specifically listed or not.

01/2023 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 93-4
PART 3 – EXECUTION – TESTING AND BALANCING
3.1 TOTAL MECHANICAL SYSTEM BALANCE:
A. The mechanical systems consist of many elements. Total system balance requires that all
elements be not only individually correct, but also correct as a composite system.
Therefore, participation of all parties is required in the test and balance procedure.
B. Prior to beginning work, submit a written description of the anticipated sequence of action
to the Engineer for review and comment.
C. The testing and balance specialist shall review the contract drawings during the bid period
and shall advise the Engineer of any modifications to the layout which he might suggest to
facilitate the balance procedure. Modifications will be incorporated into the contract by
Addendum during the bidding period.
D. The test and balance specialist shall visit the project from time to time during the rough
installation making a thorough inspection of those items which will affect his subsequent
work. He shall advise the Contractor in writing with a copy to the Engineer of any work
required by the contract which is not being performed adequately. This is in addition to the
regular review efforts of the Engineer.
3.2 AIR SYSTEMS BALANCE:
A. Before any adjustments are made, the systems shall be checked for such items as dirty
filters, duct leakage, filter leakage, damper leakage, equipment vibrations, correct damper
operations, etc. All fan systems are to be adjusted to deliver design air quantities within
+5%. Design static pressure is based on filters approximately 50% loaded with dirt.
Pressure drop across filters during balancing shall be simulated to that condition. After
balancing is completed, check motor amperage with the filters clean.
B. Adjust wall mounted air conditioning air systems for air quantities shown on drawings and
the proper relationship between supply and exhaust established.
C. Adjust the RPM of all fan ECM’ motors so they handle specified air quantity.
1. Determine the ECM setting on supply fan motors so that the fan will deliver not less
than 100% cfm with fully loaded filters.
D. Verify the proper operation of all air side related control functions.
3.3 MAJOR EQUIPMENT:
A. The Testing and Balancing subcontractor shall work with the HVAC Controls Contractor,
Owners technical staff, and Electrician in placing new wall mounted air conditioning units in
operation. The factory representative of the equipment manufacturer shall also participate
in a team effort to place these systems in all anticipated operating modes and make
adjustments as required to obtain correct operation. The Project Engineer shall witness
the final operating sequence.
01/2023 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 93-5
3.4 INSTRUMENTATION/CONTROL SYSTEMS:
A. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall go through the entire HVAC control system
with the HVAC Controls Contractor and Owner’s technical staff, verifying proper operation
of each wall mounted air conditioning unit. The report shall indicate and certify such effort.
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS:
A. Observe all furnished thermal overload protection and note such in the data sheets. If
thermal overload protection is incorrect, it shall be the responsibility of the trade or vendor
which furnished the overload devices to furnish and install the correct size overload
protection devices, and it is the responsibility of the balancing firm to verify that proper
overload protection has been installed at the completion of the job.
B. The adjusting crew shall measure and set any special conditions such as minimum air
quantities; coordinate outside air, return air and relief air damper operation; check and
adjust outside and return air intakes so that the system will deliver substantially the same
volume on either; make tests and record data as required in "REPORT" below.
C. When deemed necessary, take 24-hour space temperature recording and any required
partial rebalance of the system shall be performed without additional cost. Successful
function supercedes nominal settings in order of importance.
3.6 REPORT:
A. Provide a bound report in four copies which shall contain a general information sheet
listing instruments used, method of balancing, altitude correction, and manufacturer's grille,
register and diffuser data.
B. Provide equipment data sheets listing make, size, serial number, rating, etc., of all
mechanical equipment including fans, motors, starters and drives. Operating data shall
include rotational speed, pressure drop across filters, coils, and other system components
and measured motor current and voltage.
C. Reports shall contain a reduced set of contract drawings with outlets marked thereon for
easy identification of the nomenclature used in the data sheets.
D. The report shall contain any abnormal or notable conditions not covered in the above.
3.7 Keep and submit a copy of a daily log of all work performed with a list of work scheduled
for the day and the workers on the job.
END OF SECTION
01/2023 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
254.07.100 PAGE 23 05 93-6
01/2023 SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR HVAC
254.07.100 PAGE 23 06 03-1
SECTION 23 06 03
SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.This section is a Division-23 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods section, and is part of each
Division-23 HVAC section making reference to supports and anchors specified herein.
C.This section heavily references Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and
Fittings Industry (MSS) manuals of standard practices.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A.Extent of supports and anchors described by this section is generally indicated on drawings
and/or specified in other Division-23 HVAC sections. Much support and anchorage is implied
in that all HVAC installations, equipment and specialties require support and restraint.
Correlate this section with Section 23 06 05 related to sound, vibration and seismic restraint.
B.Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following:
1.Building Attachments.
2.Anchors.
3.Equipment Supports.
C.Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified or
presumed as part of equipment assembly.
D.Relate this section to Section 23 06 05 regarding seismic and vibration control.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and
anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years. Typical vendors of support systems include Grinnell.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation
instructions for each type of support and anchor.
B.Shop Drawings:
1.Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor,
indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of
components.
C.Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and
anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in
accordance with requirements of Division-1.
01/2023 SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR HVAC
254.07.100 PAGE 23 06 03-2
1.5 REFERENCES:
A.Codes and Standards:
1.Code Compliance: Comply with applicable building, mechanical and plumbing codes
pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors.
2.UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are UL-listed and FM approved.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTSIDE AREAS: Use galvanized attachments, rods, nuts, bolts and other accessories for
all outside areas.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A.Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1.
B.Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36.
C.Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly
graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts
sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. Use
Embeco or Engineer approved equal grout for non-shrink applications.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A.Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable
to Installer.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A.Proceed with installation of supports and anchors only after required building structural work
has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies
including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural
attachments.
B.Prior to installation of supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at project
site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and testing
agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination with work of this
section and Engineer for purpose of reviewing material selections and procedures to be
followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS:
A.Provide structural steel stands to support equipment where indicated on the contract
documents. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A.Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION
01/2023 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
254.07.100 PAGE 23 06 05-1
SECTION 23 06 05
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this
section.
This section is a Division-23 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods section, and is part of each
Division-23 HVAC section making reference to pipes and pipe fittings specified herein.
1.2 SUMMARY: Furnish and install complete support, restraint and vibration control systems for
all work installed under Division 23 HVAC sections. Work to be responsive to the intent of the
International Building Code, latest adopted edition, for the respective seismic zone. Correlate
this work with Section 23 06 03 related to general supports of Mechanical / HVAC systems
and equipment.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Engage the services of an independent support, restraint and
vibration control subcontractor who has the technology, the experience, computer capabilities
and manufactured products to prepare the required computations, shop drawings and special
devices to meet the minimum requirements described herein.
The support, restraint and vibration control subcontractor shall visit the site during
construction at a minimum of two specific periods.
1.When equipment is mounted in place, prior to placement of seismic restraint devices for
the purposes of directing the contractor in properly locating and installing the approved
devices.
2.At the completion of the project, prior to final mechanical inspection, for the purpose of
verifying the correctness of the support, restraint and vibration isolation device installation
and preparing certification of the vibration-isolation work.
3.The support, restraint, vibration control subcontractor shall exercise the quality control for
this work and shall include, but not be limited to instructions direct to the Mechanical
(Division-23 and Division-33) Contractor concerning:
a.Anchoring of all mechanical equipment.
b.Vibration mounting of equipment.
c.Bracing and anchoring of conduit.
d.Vibration isolation of supply air fans.
4.The subcontractor shall be responsible for identifying the need for the size and location of
steel sole plates and their attachment to structural steel or concrete.
5.The subcontractor shall certify in writing that he has inspected the installation and that all
isolation, anchors and seismic restraint materials are installed correctly and functioning
properly. Certification shall be provided after all corrective work has been completed.
01/2023 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
254.07.100 PAGE 23 06 05-2
1.4 SUBMITTALS: Submittal data is required and shall consist of computations, vibration
isolation selection, equipment anchors, anchor bolt sizes, supports, seismic restraints, sole
plate data, restraint locations and type of restraints.
Submittal data shall identify dimensions, load deflection data, center of gravity, standard
connections, manufacturer's recommendations, behavior problems including vibrations,
thermal expansion, etc., associated with equipment, ductwork and conduit.
Calculations need not be submitted when restraint devices for piping, conduit and ductwork
are proposed in accordance with the SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints.
Selection of isolator anchors and restraints shall be clearly made known along with the basis
for selection so that proposed systems can be reviewed.
Calculations furnished for anchors, anchor bolts, sole plates and other support steel for
restraining devices shall be signed and stamped by an engineer licensed in the State of Utah.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A.Codes and Standards:
International Building Codes Latest Adopted Edition
NFPA bulletin 90A,Latest Adopted Edition
UL Standard 181 Latest Adopted Edition
National Electric Code Latest Adopted Edition
Guidelines for seismic restraint of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems.
Published by the Sheet Metal Industry Fund of Los Angeles, California, and the Plumbing and
Piping Industry Council, Inc., Los Angeles, California.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - PRODUCTS: Restraint devices shall be especially designed to resist system
induced forces in all directions.
A.Conduit Restraints: Restraint materials for exposed installation shall be standard fabricated
flat steel, angle rod and channel members.
Restraint members shall be bolt connected. Cabling materials and methods shall be used
only in chases or concealed ceiling spaces.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 RESTRAINT GUIDELINE:
Guidelines for SMACNA seismic restraints for conduit, piping and ductwork are to serve as the
basis for restraint methods. (Exception – Use rigid member bracing and attachment concepts.
No cabling shall be used in the restraint systems except as noted.)
3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT- CONDUIT:
A.General: All conduit shall be protected in all planes by restraints, designed to accommodate
thermal and physical movement.
01/2023 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
254.07.100 PAGE 23 06 05-3
B.Locations of the restraints shall include, but not be limited to:
1.At all drops or risers to equipment connections.
2.At all changes in direction of conduit.
3.At all horizontal runs of conduit to keep it in alignment and prevent sagging with restraints
not to exceed the following:
Transverse bracing at 40'-0" O.C. maximum.
Longitudinal bracing at 80'-0" O.C. maximum.
4.Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through building expansion joints.
5.On both sides of flexible connectors.
C.Exceptions:
1.Seismic bracing may be omitted:
When the top of the conduit is suspended 12" or less from the supporting structure
member and the conduit is suspended by an individual hanger.
On all conduit 3/4" and smaller.
3.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION:
A.General: Furnish and install devices to isolate moving equipment from the structure. (Or
confirm that equipment may be securely fastened directly to the structure without negative
effect.) Review isolation furnished with factory package equipment, require conformance with
project criteria.
B.Basic Criteria: Vibration isolation devices which have natural frequencies approximately 1/10
that of the related driving frequency.
C.Equipment to Include:
Supply Air Fan(s): Verify that each supply fan is vibration isolated and seismic restrained on
inertia base. Inertia base shall have 1.5 times total weight of assembly.
D.Field Verify: All required devices and installation.
END OF SECTION
01/2023 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
254.07.100 PAGE 23 06 05-4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 MOTORS, DRIVES & ELEC. REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 06 07-1
SECTION 23 06 07
MOTORS, DRIVES & ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Related Sections: Separate electrical components and materials required for field
installation and electrical connections are specified in Division-26 and Division-40.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This section specifies the basic requirements for motors and drives furnished by Division-
23 HVAC and for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged HVAC
equipment. Package components include, but are not limited to factory installed motors,
starters, and disconnect switches, etc.
B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for HVAC
equipment are noted within these documents.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. For items with electrical aspects furnished by this Division and these Sections, provide
electrical components and materials which are UL labeled and assembled with U.L.
listings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit product data for motors, and other electrical components with submittal data
required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the individual equipment
specification sections. Verify project electrical characteristics with submittal. Confirm
suitability for altitude, maintaining full nameplate rating plus service factor. Include this
data in maintenance manual in accordance with Section 23 05 30 "HVAC Operation and
Maintenance Manuals".
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators.
B. NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
C. NEMA Standards 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
D. NEMA Standards KS 1: Enclosed Switches.
E. IEEE Standard 519: Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control
in Electrical Power Systems.
F. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
01/2023 MOTORS, DRIVES & ELEC. REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 06 07-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTORS: See Section 26 05 74 “Electrical Motors” but not less than the following:
A. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors,
more detailed and specific requirements are given in the individual equipment
specifications.
1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate and maintain
the driven loads.
2. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor
to operate in the service factor range.
3. Provide two-speed motors with two separate windings for poly-phase motors.
Confirm 2-speed starter requirements with Division-26.
4. Fraction Horsepower Single speed motors shall be of the permanent split capacitor
type. (PSC)
5. Temperature Rating: Minimum rate for 40oC environment with maximum 90oC
temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class H Insulation for altitude,
Class B leads allowed).
6. Starting Capability: Capable of handling not less than 6 evenly timed/spaced starts
per hour, (10 minute cycle time) or more as indicated by the automatic control
system,
7. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors, 1.0
for TEFC motors.
8. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, TEFC, continuous duty, design "B",
except design "C" where required for high starting torque. Provide motors rated for
“Inverter duty” where motors are fed power from variable frequency drives.
9. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; T-frame, use driven equipment
manufacturer's standards to suit specific application.
10. Bearings:
a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals. Provide with electrically
isolated bearings when the motor is fed power from a variable frequency drive.
b. Re-greasable with zerk fittings, except permanently sealed where motor is
normally inaccessible for regular maintenance;
c. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce
lateral or axial thrust on motor;
d. For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted;
11. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) for wet or harsh/dirty
environments. Typical throughout this project.
12. Overload Protection: Provide motors with built-in thermal overload protection.
Where indicated for industrial motor applications, Provide motors with an internal
sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter.
13 Noise Rating: "Quiet"
01/2023 MOTORS, DRIVES & ELEC. REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 06 07-3
14. Efficiency: "Premium Energy Efficient" motors shall have a minimum efficiency as
scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. If efficiency not
specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry
motors", in accordance with IEEE Standard 112.
15. Nameplate: indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics,
construction, special features and similar information.
16. Acceptable Manufacturers: Allis-Chalmers, Baldor, General Electric, Louis-Allis,
Reliance, Toshiba, U.S. Motors.
END OF SECTION
01/2023 MOTORS, DRIVES & ELEC. REQUIREMENTS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 06 07-4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
04/2023 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 1
SECTION 23 09 00
HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of
this section.
B.Division-23, Section 23 05 00 - General HVAC Requirements sections apply to
work of this section.
C.Division 40 is responsible for the overall instrumentation and control work for the
exhaust fans. The HVAC systems are supportive of, but in many ways are
independent of the fundamental process control aspects of the project. This
section is an integration of the HVAC work into the overall plant instrumentation
and control system.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A.Extent of control systems work required by this section is indicated on “H”
drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.
1.This work has a multi-faceted HVAC Controls responsibility.
a.Provide Local Control Panels (LCPs) as described below to manage
and control the HVAC devices and systems.
b.Controls for the stand alone HVAC related systems is to be provided by
the Division 23 HVAC controls contractor using components described
in this Section.
2.Follow control sequences as described in these documents. It is common
for sequences and set points to require adjustment in the field to
accommodate the final character of overall assemblies. Allow time to make
adaptations and adjustments as needed. System setups are often
seasonally variable. Re-visit the operation at least four times during the first
year to make sure that the functions of the systems are being satisfied.
3.During the bidding period, thoroughly review the documents and request
clarification of insufficient, ambiguous or contradictory presentation. The
fundamental assumption is that there is a duty to be met and that the
documents require as a minimum that devices, materials and installation will
be provided to result in fully coherent and functional systems. Provide
devices with any and all optional features required to obtain required
function. Provide devices of materials that are compatible with the plant
environment.
04/2023 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 2
B.Refer to other Section 23 31 10 – “Ductwork Accessories” for installation dampers
in mechanical systems.
C.Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work.
1.Interlock wiring between electrically-operated equipment units; and between
equipment and field-installed control devices.
a.Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section.
D.Provide all field electrical work complying with and as work of the Division-26
sections.
1.Control wiring between field-installed equipment, controls, indicating
devices, and unit control panels.
2.120 volt service required by instrumentation and control systems.
E.Participate in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing".
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture
of instrumentation and electric control equipment, of types and sizes required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
B.INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firms and workmen specializing and
experienced in programmable logic control, pneumatic and electric control system
installations for not less than 5 years. Installer shall be under the direction of the
instrumentation subcontractor and able to act as an authorized agent thereof.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A.PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control
device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics,
electrical characteristics, finishes of materials, and including installation
instructions and start-up instructions. Confirm that devices offered are suitable for
the indicated duty, inherently hardened against the adverse environment of the
wastewater treatment plant. Note that exposed copper and copper bearing
materials (i.e. bronze) are inappropriate for this duty. Provide devices of stainless
steel, etc.
B.SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit material catalog sheets and shop drawings for each
control system, containing the following information:
1.Schematic flow diagram of system showing, but not limited to, fans, unit
heaters, coils, dampers and control devices, etc.
2.Label each control device with final designated setting or adjustable range
of control.
04/2023 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 3
3.Indicate all required tubing and/or electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate
between portions of work that are factory-installed and portions to be
field-installed. Note contract responsibility to provide complete system
regardless of delegation. Completely interface with and show existing
installation in the existing building.
4.Provide details of faces of control panels, including controls, instruments,
and labeling.
5.Include verbal written description of sequence of operation. Confirm correct
function of proposed sequences.
C.SAMPLES: Submit sample of each type of proposed thermostat cover.
D.MAINTENANCE DATA: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists.
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in
accordance with requirements of Section 23 05 93.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A.CODES AND STANDARDS:
1.Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested,
listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA standards.
2.NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to
components and devices for electric control systems.
3.NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of
Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and
control sequences.
4.Comply with NEPA 70, "National Electric Code" for all electrical installation.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Provide factory shipping cartons for each
piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage and
handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture
from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.
1.7 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: (See Section 23 05 00)
A.Purpose is to provide a transition of the systems from the Contractor to the Owner,
leaving the Owner's personnel familiar with and well qualified to operate and
maintain the systems.
B.Instruction to cover purpose and function of each system and its components, to
show proper operating technique, to show proper maintenance technique.
C.Prepare an outline of information to be conveyed, list materials available for
reference. Submit to Engineer along with a proposed schedule of instruction.
Schedule to allow individual time for each trade and each system.
04/2023 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 4
D.Convey information in formal classroom session. Teachers to include qualified
contractor personnel and sales representatives for each major piece of equipment.
Go from the classroom to the actual location to graphically illustrate concepts
discussed.
1.8 WARRANTIES:
A.As part of the overall project warranty, furnish individual manufacturer warranties
for each piece of equipment for a period of not less than one year from date of
Owner's beneficial use (substantial completion not date of delivery).
B.Warrant the overall assembly of equipment, materials and labor comprising these
systems.
1.9 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION: All instruments, control panel and control piping shall
be thoroughly cleaned before final acceptance. Provide lubrication for all furnished
equipment.
1.10 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM:
A.During the system commissioning, testing and balancing of the various building
systems, have a controls representative(s) present and available to interpret and
adjust controls as needed. Demonstrate and report the integrity and accuracy of
each function and control point.
B.At the termination of the testing period, the Controls representative shall spend
one working day instructing the Owner's operating personnel in the control system
operation, and one working day checking each system for day-night and manual
override with the Owner's operating personnel on each air handling system. A
complete operating booklet shall be provided and used during the training period.
Schedule this training with the Owner and Mechanical Contractor.
Since system performance is partly a function of climatic conditions, the Controls
contractor shall be available during the changing seasons of the warranty period to
make further adjustments and modifications if required. A final complete check of
all systems shall be made at the conclusion of the one year warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOM THERMOSTATS:
A.The thermostats and controllers for the Unit Heaters and Wall Mounted A/C unit shall
be furnished by the respective vendors. Coordinate field wiring requirements with
each vendor’s installation instructions manual.
04/2023 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 5
2.2 AUXILIARY RELAYS:
A.Light Duty - as required. (verify current model number)
B.Heavy Duty - Square D, Class 8501, Type X. (For motor control)
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A.Provide devices with all components needed to make a complete and functional
installation.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A Factory-calibrate each instrument according to manufacturer’s standard at a facility
that is traceable to the NIST.
B.Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration
instruments.
2.5 HVAC CONTROL DAMPERS:
A.A.In supplying dampers, vendor shall instruct workers in the proper installation of the
dampers. Ductwork shall be reinforced and the damper properly supported at the
point of insertion without strain. In mounting dampers at a wall, provide clearance for
the damper actuator and linkages. Make the damper installation airtight in terms of
the air flow path.
B.Protect all dampers with a phenolic epoxy powder coating.
Provide damper operators with motors of proper size, so that the motors will operate
against the static pressure of the systems. Provide each damper motor with a
bracket for attaching to ductwork, building structure or equivalent. Damper motors in
plenums shall be rigidly mounted on damper frames. Do not install motors in ducts.
Modulating motors shall be provided with end switches and with integral stops for
both minimum and maximum stop. Voltage ranges or pressure ranges shall be
adjustable, the equivalent of pilot positioning for pneumatic or electric functions.
C.Control dampers for handling of outside air, relief air, exhaust air, ventilating air and
other dampers exposed to weather temperatures in built-up or factory assembled
systems: shall be low leakage type with spring loaded side seals, inflatable butyl or
neoprene fabric edge seals, sleeve type bearings of stainless steel, nylon or Teflon,
reinforced extruded blades. Parallel or opposed action or a combination thereof. Air
leakage not to exceed 6 CFM per square foot at 4" upstream static pressure.
D.Provide dampers equivalent to Ruskin CD-403 (3”), CD-40 (4"), CD-50 (6")
04/2023 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 6
E.Provide actuators for control dampers with not less that 33% excess torque capacity
over and above the minimum needed to drive a given damper, load at not more than
5 inch-lbs per square foot of damper, more if damper requires. Actuators shall be
configured for the duty, typically modulating, explosion proof for rated areas, manual
over-ride, dual end switches, 24 volt or 120 volt drive as indicated, on board choice of
2 – 10 volt DC or 4 – 20ma signal input, mounting bracket assemblies, jack shafting
and adapters as needed.
F.Provide actuators equivalent to Belimo AF(SR).
PART 3 – CONTROL SEQUENCES AND EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL:
A.Provide control systems to manage and manipulate mechanical equipment in a
functional and energy conserving way.
B.Reference Division 40 for control sequences related to the exhaust fans under a
separate contract.
3.2 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER (EUH-1, 2, 3, 4, & 5):
A.Each electric unit heater cycles on its own controls to satisfy the heating set point
temperature of 45°F (adj.) when activated by the local unit mounted thermostat.
3.3 ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS (EWH-1 & 2):
A.Each electric wall heater cycles on its own controls to satisfy the heating set point
temperature of 45°F (adj.) when activated by the local unit mounted thermostat.
3.4 ROOFTOP EXHAUST FAN (REF-1, MD-1):
A.When the Fluoridation Room thermostat calls for cooling, motorized damper MD-1
shall open and rooftop exhaust fan REF-1 shall be energized to run to satisfy the
local space temperature. The unit operates until the room temperature is satisfied
and then powers off and MD-1 closes. Thermostat set point shall be 85°F (adj.).
B.Motorized damper MD-1 shall open and rooftop exhaust fan REF-1 shall run
whenever the Fluoridation Room is occupied.
3.5 ROOFTOP EXHAUST FAN (REF-2, MD-2):
A.When the Electrical Room thermostat calls for cooling, motorized damper MD-2
shall open and rooftop exhaust fan REF-2 shall be energized to run to satisfy the
local space temperature. The unit operates until the room temperature is satisfied
and then powers off and MD-2 closes. Thermostat set point shall be 85°F (adj.).
04/2023 HVAC CONTROL SYSTEMS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 09 00 - 7
3.6 SLIT SYSTEM A/C UNIT (SAC-1, 2, & 3):
A.Each split A/C unit operates through its own controller to start the indoor unit fan
and cycle on the outdoor unit in order to satisfy the local cooling space set point
temperature.
B.The programmable thermostat shall initially be set at 80°F (adj.) set point in the
cooling mode.
END OF SECTION
01/2023 DUCTWORK
254.07.100 PAGE 23 31 00-1
SECTION 23 31 00
DUCTWORK
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-23 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of metal and high density polypropylene ductwork is indicated on drawings and in
schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of ductwork required for the project include the following:
1. Rectangular
C. Refer to Section 23 05 93 for system commissioning, testing and balancing.
D. Refer to Section 23 09 00 for mechanical controls and control dampers (HVAC related
only).
E. Refer to Section 23 31 10 for ductwork accessories.
F. Refer to Section 23 37 00 for louvers.
G. Refer to Section 23 82 00 for power ventilators.
H. Refer to Section 23 90 00 for filters.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal and high
density polypropylene ductwork products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience
on projects with metal and high density polypropylene ductwork systems work similar to
that required for project.
The installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover
this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor.
All workmen on the project shall carry Utah state licenses as journeymen or apprentice
sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions
for metal and high density polypropylene ductwork materials and products.
01/2023 DUCTWORK
254.07.100 PAGE 23 31 00-2
B. Shop Drawings: Submit coordinated scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings
including, but not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs,
wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spacial relationship
between ductwork and proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated
requirements, made to conform to local shop practice, and how those modifications ensure
that free area, materials, and rigidity are not reduced.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed metal ductwork
and ductwork products, in accordance with requirements of Division-1.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materials
and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division-1.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards,
Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter
1 "Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of
Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the
Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems".
4. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code/equivalent Utah Codes:
Comply with all sections pertaining to mechanical work.
B. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and
purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end
damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where
necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK - GENERAL:
A. Standards: All duct fabrications shall comply with standards and techniques detailed by
SMACNA "Duct Construction Manuals" for the appropriate pressure class, and with the
ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Systems and Equipment, 2016 edition, Chapter 19, Duct
Construction
01/2023 DUCTWORK
254.07.100 PAGE 23 31 00-3
2.2 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK:
A. General: For all rectangular ductwork and fittings construct/fabricate from aluminum, PVC
coated galvanized steel or stainless steel. Contractor may choose between aluminum,
PVC coated galvanized steel or stainless steel except where specifically directed on the
drawings.
If using galvanized sheet steel, provide galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A
527, lock forming quality, with G 120 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; mill
phosphatized for exposed locations.
If using stainless steel, fabricate of Type 304 SS or Type 316 SS stainless steel sheet
complying with ASTM A-167 with all welded joints and seams. Provide polished No. 4
satin finish for all duct exposed to view, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces
with mill applied adhesive protective paper through fabrication and installation.
If using aluminum ductwork, aluminum ductwork shall be constructed of 3003-H-14
aluminum using construction for nominal 4" SMACNA rated systems. Seal all transverse
joints with duct cement.
B. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Provide materials which are free from visual imperfections
including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other
imperfections, including those which would impair painting. Installation of exposed
ductwork shall be laid out in advance and submitted for review. Ductwork shall be hung
straight and uniform, points shall be true, and seams shall show continuity.
C. Note a special requirement for hangers and supports for process areas. Project rejects
strap hangers for ductwork. Make angle, insert, or clamp attachment to structure and hang
suspended duct with rod or angle iron verticals and angle, channel or Unistrut horizontals.
Brace and restrain ductwork as for piping with rigid assemblies. Do not use a cabling
system for such duty.
2.3 FITTINGS AND FABRICATION:
A. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15o
change of direction per section.
B. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as
applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line
radius equal to associated duct width. Limit angular tapers to 30o for contracting tapers
and 20o for expanding tapers.
C. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent
possible. Refer to Division-23 section "Duct Accessories' for accessory requirements.
D. Offset, transition, and adapt ductwork to structural obstacles and work of other trades in a
coordinated effort. Layout work to avoid conflict with piping, etc. With review of conditions,
teardrop around conflicting piping, lights, etc., all at no added cost to the project.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and,
where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork
system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.
01/2023 DUCTWORK
254.07.100 PAGE 23 31 00-4
B. Duct Sealing Compound for metal ductwork: Use a U.L. listed, fiber reinforced, water
based adhesive duct sealing compound by Foster, Hard cast, United-McGill, Nova,
Miracle, 3M, Duct mate, Duro Dyne. Verify that the material is listed for use in a moist,
corrosive environment compatible with duct material. Follow manufacturer’s directions for
joint cleaning and preparation; seal all duct and plenum joints prior to and during assembly.
Use mastics that will not weep if the duct is warmed above room temperature.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK:
A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices
which will achieve air tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems
rated over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each
indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork
accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces
smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which
will hold ducts true to shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor.
All necessary allowance and provisions shall be made in the installation of sheet metal
ducts for the structural conditions of the building, and ducts shall be transformed or divided
as may be required. Whenever this is necessary, the required area shall be maintained.
All of these changes, however, must be approved and installed as directed at project.
During the installation, the open ends of ducts shall be protected to prevent debris and dirt
from entering.
B. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-
fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements.
C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally
and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details
and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not
obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts
close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for
enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where
possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever
possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in
mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase
horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with
suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
D. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Except as indicated, do not run ductwork through
transformer vaults and other electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. Maintain
clearances above of and in front of electrical panels.
01/2023 DUCTWORK
254.07.100 PAGE 23 31 00-5
E. Ducts at Structural and Architectural Penetrations: Where ducts are shown connecting to
or passing through concrete, gypsum board, masonry openings and along edges of all
plenums at floors and walls, provide a continuous 2" x 2-1/8" stainless steel angle iron
which shall be bolted to the construction and made airtight to the same by applying
caulking compound. Sheet metal in these locations shall be bolted to the angle iron.
Round high velocity ducts in vertical chases shall be supported with rolled angle rings.
Close openings between duct and structure.

F. Cross Breaking: Rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be cross broken or rolled rib
reinforced on the four sides of each 4-foot panel. All vertical and horizontal sheet metal
barriers, duct offsets, elbows, as well as 4-foot panels of straight sections of ducts shall be
cross broken. Cross breaking shall be applied to the sheet metal between the standing
seams or reinforcing angles; the center of cross break shall be of the required height to
assure surfaces being rigid. Larger ducts shall include intermediate reinforcing angles or
members to stiffen the panel faces.
G. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil
frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.
H. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards.
Related to final installation cleanliness, damp wipe all ductwork on installation. Cap open
duct ends, cover fan inlets, vacuum fan plenums and related installation before starting
fans. Run fans only with filters in place.
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR METAL DUCTWORK.

A. It is essential that all ducts shall be rigidly supported. Hangers for low velocity ducts up to
18" in width shall be placed on not more than 10' centers.
Low velocity ducts 19" through 35" in width and greater shall be supported on not more
than 5' centers. Where vertical ducts pass through floors or roofs, heavy supporting
angles shall be attached to ducts, and to structure. Angles shall be of sufficient size to
support the ductwork rigidly and shall be placed on at least two sides of the duct.

B. For rectangular ducts 36" and greater in width, construct hangers with all-thread rods and
aluminum channel, galvanized iron channel, or Unistrut sections, minimum dimension 2” x
2” x 1/8".
C. Ductwork Support Materials for ductwork in Process Areas: Provide 316 stainless steel
fasteners, anchors, and rods, washers, nuts and provide 316 stainless steel or 6061-T6
aluminum alloy angles for support of ductwork in process areas. Do not use straps.

D. Supporting Dampers: Parallel and opposed blade motor operated dampers shall be
supported by reinforcing the ductwork or sheet metal walls at the damper locations to carry
the weight of the dampers and the force exerted on the dampers due to air pressure, or
shall be supported independent of ductwork from the ceiling or floor, as conditions at the
site determine.
3.5 CONNECTIONS: All duct joints, transverse and longitudinal, shall be made airtight by
coating joints with duct sealing compound before joining, and then sealing the joint with
one layer of "Glass Fab" reinforcing tape set in a coating of the compound. Tape and
sealant shall not exceed a flame spread of 25 or a smoke development of 50.
01/2023 DUCTWORK
254.07.100 PAGE 23 31 00-6
3.6 WELDED JOINTS: Welded metal ductwork shall have either an angle or a piece of 1/8"
steel bar behind each weld to allow lying of a neat and continuous bead.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Leakage Tests: After each duct system which is constructed for duct classes over 3" is
completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage
Test Manual. Air leaks which are in excess of that required to bubble the soap suds (that
is, actually blow the suds away) shall be sealed by additional taping and caulking to reduce
the leakage to a rate not to exceed slow bubbles forming. Repair leaks and repeat tests
until total leakage conforms with Chart of Figure 4-1, Seal Class A, Leakage Class 3 for
round/oval, 6 for rectangular.
B. Allow 24 hours for the HDPE ductwork sealant to cure after final assembly before testing
the duct system. Additional curing time may be required in high ambient conditions.
3.8 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION:
A. General: Connect metal and high density polypropylene ductwork to equipment as
indicated; provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted
on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access
doors where indicated.
3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Clean ductwork internally of dust and debris, as follows: With filters in place where
applicable, operate the fans at full capacity to blow out dirt and debris from ducts. If it is
not practical to use the main supply blower for this test, the ducts may be blown out in
sections by a portable fan.
B. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of
metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint
deterioration.
C. Balancing:
1. Refer to Section 23 05 93 section "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" for air
distribution balancing of metal or high density propylene ductwork; not work of this
section. However, the Sheet Metal Contractor shall participate fully in this work. Seal
any leaks in ductwork that become apparent in balancing process.
2. If specified conditions cannot be obtained due to deficiencies in equipment
performance or improper installation or workmanship, the Mechanical Contractor and
his subcontractors shall make any changes necessary to obtain the specified
conditions.
END OF SECTION
01/2023 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
254.07.100 PAGE 23 31 10-1
SECTION 23 31 10
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-23 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by
requirements of this section.
B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following:
1. Duct hardware.
2. Flexible connections.
C. Refer to 23 05 93 for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork accessories; not work of
this section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork
accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 3 years.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork
accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings for each type of
ductwork accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening
or support, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each
type of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance
manual; in accordance with requirements of Division-1.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to
construction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.
3. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL
01/2023 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
254.07.100 PAGE 23 31 10-2
Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers".
4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated accessories and purchased
products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and
prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
B. Storage: Where possible, store accessories inside and protect from weather. Where
necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCT HARDWARE:
A. General: Provide duct hardware, typically of one manufacturer, for all items on project, for
the following:
1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated,
duct test holes, cover, for instrument tests. Ventlok No. 699 closures shall be provided
and installed for each test hole, with sufficient neck length to penetrate the insulation.
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of
the following:
1. Ventfabrics, Inc.
2. Young Regulator Co.
2.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:
A. Extent of Work: Provide flexible connections between ductwork and equipment, such as at
fan inlets and discharges, and at other places indicated on the drawings or called for by
note or specification.
B. Non-Corrosive Environment or Airstream: For system pressures up to 5” w.c, provide
material of heavy waterproof woven glass fabric double coated with neoprene or Hypalon
equivalent to “Ventglas” for interior locations and “Ventlon” for exterior locations, fabric not
less than 3-1/4" wide clamped between strips of 24 gauge stainless steel or 20 gauge
aluminum alloy. Material by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, Ill.
C. Corrosive Environments or Airstream: Provide material of heavy waterproof woven
fiberglass fabric coated with Teflon equivalent to “Ventel” by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, Ill.
By nature, the material is slippery and requires rigid clamping in the field installation. Install
with the coated side to the corrosive air stream. Clamp the material into a stainless steel
edging or hinge with a folded fabric edge. Be careful in securing the clamped fabric to the
fan or duct as to not penetrate or disturb any protective coatings or surfaces.
01/2023 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
254.07.100 PAGE 23 31 10-3
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES:
A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions,
with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended
function.
B. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either
side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.
C. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of
ductwork accessories properly with other work.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as
required to obtain proper operation and leak proof performance.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings
Label access doors in accordance with Division-23 section "Mechanical Identification".
Cleaning: Clean factory finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION
01/2023 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 37 00-1
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by
requirements of this section.
B. Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the following:
1. Louvers
C. Refer to other Division-23 sections for ductwork and duct accessories required in
conjunction with air outlets and inlets; not work of this section.
D. Refer to other Division-23 sections for balancing of air outlets and inlets; not work of this
section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and
inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 3 years of successful installation experience
on projects with metal ductwork systems work similar to that required for project.
The Installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to
cover this work and all other work in progress by the Installer.
All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice sheet
metal workers with additional certification for welders.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets
including the following:
1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location,
number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating
construction, finish, and mounting details.
3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration
ability, temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings.
Indicate selections on data.
01/2023 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 37 00-2
B. Samples: 3 samples of each type of finish furnished.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawing for each type of air
outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for
finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in
maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division-1.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650
"Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets".
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with
ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and
Inlets".
3. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test
Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters".
4. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
5. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A
"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory fabricated fiber-board type containers.
Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid
crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction
work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store
above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DRAINABLE BLADE LOUVERS:
A. Extent of Work: At air openings in the outside wall where indicated on drawings, install
AMCA rated drainable stationary extruded aluminum 6" deep weather louvers with bird
screens.
B. Material: Blades shall be 6 inches deep with integral downspouts to drain the water from
the louver blades. Stationary louvers shall pass 1000 fpm free area velocity with less
than 0.15" static pressure drop and shall carry less than .03 ounces of water per square
foot when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Install screens on interior
face and louver.
C. Finish system shall be 2.0-mil, PVF2 Kynar 500, formulated by a licensed formulator to
contain 70 percent PVF resin and applied by a licensed applicator.
01/2023 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 37 00-3
1. Epoxy prime coat shall be applied to exposed sides to a dry film thickness of
approximately 0.2-mil. One coat of PVF color coating shall be applied to exposed
sides to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 0.8-mil, for a total of 1.0-mil total
coating.
2. The surface condition of this finish coat shall be 100 percent free of holidays, drip
marks, scratches, roll marks, or abrasions that are visible from a distance of 5-feet in
good light when in installed position. Surfaces shall be free of checking, crazing,
peeling, or loss of adhesion.
3. Finish shall meet or exceed AAMA 2605.
4. Color shall be selected and approved by owner from manufacturer’s standard color
selections.
a. Color shall be uniform with no variation in shade, and louvers or accessories of
different color batches will not be acceptable.
b. The Owner reserves the option of changing this tentative color selection during
the submittal process at no additional cost to Owner.
D. Manufacturer: Louvers shall be equal to American Warming and Ventilating, Louvers
and Dampers, Krueger, Ruskin, Cesco, NCA Manufacturing or U.S. Louvers.
2.2 Contractor is required to coordinate louver size, flange type, and construction with
structural and architectural openings to assure fit and appearance. Except for very large
units, louvers shall be one piece.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products
serve intended function.
B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of
air outlets and inlets with other work.
END OF SECTION
01/2023 TERMINAL ELECTRIC HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 76 00-1
SECTION 23 76 00
TERMINAL ELECTRIC HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of
this section.
B. Division-23 Motors Drives and Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Systems,
General Mechanical Requirements, and General Pipes and Fittings sections
apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Types of terminal units required for project include the following:
1. Unit heaters, electric
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WASH DOWN TYPE ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS (EUH):
A. General: Provide wash down type electric unit heaters in location as indicated,
and of capacities, and style and having accessories as scheduled. The heater
shall be constructed from 18-gauge type 304 Stainless Steel.
B. Unit shall be complete factory assembled, wired and tested. Ready for
installation and connection to electrical power source and control package.
C. Electric unit heaters shall be provided with totally enclosed, corrosion-resistant,
UL listed motor with permanently lubricated ball bearings, NEMA 4X enclosure,
epoxy coated. Single point power connection. Furnish with heavy duty hanging
bracket.
D. Heating elements and motor shall be enclosed in a, heavy-gauge stainless steel
shroud.
E. Provide unit heaters with an adjustable stainless steel louvered air outlet grille,
heavy gauge plate rear grille for protection against accidental contact with the fan
blade.

F. Provide with automatic temperature controls built into unit with fan mounted
thermostat, 40 degree to 100 degree temperature range, three position switch
wired to control for on, standby and fan only settings, indicating light for when
heating elements are energized.
01/2023 TERMINAL ELECTRIC HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 76 00-2
G. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electric unit
heaters of one of the following:
1. King
2. Reznor
2.2 ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS: (EWH)
A. Cabinet constructed of steel with epoxy / polyester powder coat finish. With
adjustable louvers.
B. Safeties and Controls:
1. High temperature control with automatic reset.
2. Built-in tamper proof thermostat.
3. Fan delay to purge heater of residual heat.
C. Aluminum-finned, copper clad steel sheath heating element
D. See equipment schedules on drawings for supply voltage.
E. Appropriate mounting brackets for recessed mount.
F. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electric wall
heaters of one of the following:
1. Reznor
2. King
3. Raywall,
4. Brasch Manufacturing Co.
5. Indeeco
6. Heatrex
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in
manner acceptable to installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS:
A. General: Install heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
B. Locate heaters where indicated.
C. Provide and install hangers and supports for heater.
3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING:
01/2023 TERMINAL ELECTRIC HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 76 00-3
A. General: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to
be factory-mounted.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed
surfaces, vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets.
B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using
finish materials furnished by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
01/2023 TERMINAL ELECTRIC HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 76 00-4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
04/2023 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 81 26 - 1
SECTION 23 81 26
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install heat pumps as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division: Concrete pads.
2. Section 230500: General Mechanical Requirements.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Assurance / Control: Equipment check-out sheets.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Each unit shall be UL / ULC or ETL labeled.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Provide five-year warranty on compressors beginning from date of start-up. Record
start-up date on warranty certificate for each unit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (SAC)
A. Cooling Only Units:
1. Indoor Units:
a. Wall mounted units as scheduled.
b. Isolate moving parts from cabinets to reduce noise.
c. Provide with condensate pump.
2. Outdoor Units:
a. Compressor serving the multi-split system shall be of swing rocker
design, provided with multi-ports to match indoor units served with
inverter power modulating control.
b. Fans shall be direct driven and discharge horizontally.
04/2023 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 81 26 - 2
c. Casings shall be fully weatherproof for outdoor installations.
d. Microprocessor Controls shall be factory wired with field installed
remote pendant station.
e. Refrigerant shall be R-410a.
f. Isolate moving parts from cabinets to reduce noise.
g. Use dry-charged tubing for connection of unit's refrigerant system.
3. Accessories:
a. Provide all indoor units with wired remote controllers installed in
secure housings.
4. In addition to that specified above, provide air conditioning split systems with
all standard features to match features of those scheduled.
5. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Mitsubishi Electronics America Inc, HVAC Div, Norcross, GA
www.mrslim.com.
b. Daikin Air Conditioning (Americas) Inc, Carrollton, TX
www.daikinac.com.
c. Carrier Corp, Syracuse, NY www.commercial.carrier.com.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Units shall be started up, checked out, and adjusted
by Unit Manufacturer's authorized factory trained service mechanic. Use
equipment check-out sheet provided by Manufacturer. Complete and sign all
items on sheet.
END OF SECTION
04/2023 POWER VENTILATORS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 82 00- 1
SECTION 23 82 00
POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of
this section.
B. Division-23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this
section.
C. See Section 23 06 07 Motors, Drives and Electrical Requirements for Mechanical
Work.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of power and gravity ventilator work required by this section is indicated on
drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of power and gravity ventilators specified in this section include the
following:
1. Centrifugal Rooftop Mounted Exhaust Fans.
C. Refer to Division 23, Section 23 05 93 "System Commissioning, Testing and
Balancing" for balancing of power and gravity ventilators; not work of this section.
D. Refer to Division-23 and 40 temperature control and instrumentation systems
sections for control work required in conjunction with power and gravity
ventilators; not work of this section.
E. Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work; not work of this section.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on ventilators.
Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where
specified as furnished, or factory installed, by manufacturer.
2. Interlock wiring between ventilators; and between ventilators and field
installed control devices as shown in Division-26.
Interlock wiring specified as factory installed is work of this section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of power
and gravity ventilators, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
04/2023 POWER VENTILATORS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 82 00- 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for power and gravity
ventilators, including specifications, capacity ratings, dimensions, weights,
materials, accessories furnished, and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings showing unit dimensions,
construction details, methods of assembly of components, and field connection
details.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply
wiring to power ventilators. Submit manufacturer's ladder type wiring diagrams for
interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that
are factory installed and portions to be field installed.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of
power and gravity ventilator, accessory, and control. Include this data, product
data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance
with requirements of Division-23.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. AMCA Compliance: Provide power ventilators which have been tested and
rated in accordance with AMCA standards, and bear AMCA Certified
Rating Seal.
2. UL Compliance: Provide power ventilators which are listed by UL and have
UL label affixed.
3. NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and electrical accessories complying
with NEMA standards.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFTOP MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FAN - UPBLAST (REF-1&2):
A. General: Fans shall be spun aluminum, curb mounted, direct drive, upblast, with
air flow capacity as scheduled, centrifugal exhaust ventilator.
B. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705). Fan shall bear the
AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance. Fan shall be provided
with a phenolic coating for all components exposed to the airstream.
C. The fans shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing
the model number and individual serial number for future identification.
D. Fans shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant
fasteners. The spun aluminum structural components shall be constructed of
minimum 16 gauge marine alloy aluminum, bolted to a rigid aluminum support
structure.

04/2023 POWER VENTILATORS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 82 00- 3
E. Provide fans with a wind band or discharge baffle having a rolled bead for added
strength.
F. Provide fans with a two piece cap having stainless steel quick release latches to
provide access into the motor compartment without the use of tools.
G. An integral conduit chase shall be provided into the motor compartment to
facilitate wiring connections.
H. The motor, bearings and drive shall be mounted on a minimum 14 gauge steel
power assembly, isolated from the unit structure with rubber vibration isolators.
These components shall be enclosed in a weather-tight compartment, separated
from the exhaust air stream. Lifting lugs shall be provided to help prevent
damage from improper lifting.
I. The fan wheels shall be non-sparking centrifugal backward inclined, constructed
of 100 percent aluminum, including a precision machined cast aluminum hub.
Wheel inlet shall overlap an aerodynamic inlet cone. Wheel shall be statically and
dynamically balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-96.
J. The Motor shall be an electronically commutated motor rated for continuous duty
and furnished either with internally mounted potentiometer speed controller or
with leads for connection to 0-10 VDC external controller.
K. Accessories:
1. Provide fans with galvanized wire insect screen on fan outlets and
motorized control damper.
L. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wall mounted
centrifugal exhaust fans of one of the following:
2. Cook
3. Pace
4. Greenheck
5. Penn
6. Twin-City
PART 3 - GENERAL
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which power ventilators are to be
installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF POWER VENTILATORS AND FANS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install power ventilators in
accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recognized industry
practices to insure that products serve the intended function.
B. Coordinate ventilator work with work of roofs, walls and ceilings, as necessary for
04/2023 POWER VENTILATORS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 82 00- 4
proper interfacing.
C. Ductwork: Refer to Divisions-23 sections 23 31 00 "Ductwork" and 23 31 10
“Ductwork Accessories.” Connect ducts to ventilators in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not
specified to be factory mounted.
E. Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within ventilators. Adjust dampers
for free operation.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Testing: After installation ventilators have been completed, test each ventilator to
demonstrate proper operation of unit at performance requirements specified.
When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate
compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Cleaning: Clean factory finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched
surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION
04/2023 AIR FILTERS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 90 00 - 1
SECTION 23 90 00
AIR FILTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-23, Section 23 05 00 General HVAC Requirements sections apply to work of this
section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of air cleaning work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules,
and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of air cleaning equipment specified in this section include the following:
1. Air Filters.
a. Extended surface self-supporting.
C. Refer to Division-23 duct accessories section for duct access door work required in
conjunction with air filters; not work of this section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air cleaning
equipment of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data including, dimensions,
weights, required clearances and access, flow capacity including initial and final pressure
drop at rated air flow, efficiency and test method, fire classification, and installation
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for filter rack
assemblies indicating dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of filter
and rack required. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division-23.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Standards pertaining to safety performance of air
filter units.
04/2023 AIR FILTERS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 90 00 - 2
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE Standard 52 for
method of testing, and for recording and calculating air flow rates.
3. ARI Compliance: Comply with provisions of ARI Standard 850 pertaining to test and
performance of air filter units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR FILTERS:
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, replaceable filter media and
holding frames shall be a product of one of the following:
1. American Air Filter
2. Continental
3. Farr
B. Holding Frames: Suitable for filters specified. Frame and brace into solid assemblies.
1. May be side access, factory fabricated type.
C. Replaceable pleated media type filters.
1. Pleated, medium efficiency in a cardboard holding frame, 2" or 4" thick as scheduled,
0.32" s.p. maximum initial pressure drop at 500 feet/minute, to change out at 0.50".
U.L. Class 2, 25-30% efficiency, 90-95% arrestance per ASHRAE Standard 52-76.
Typical selection for 300 feet/min, or less.
2. Equivalent to Farr 30/30.
D. Startup Set:
1. Install a set of filters immediately upon fabrication of any filter bank. Install scheduled
set of filters at completion of construction at the time of testing and balancing.
E. Replacement Set:
1. Furnish a second set of filters for each unit to be turned over to Owner as initial
replacement stock.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air filters and filter housings will be installed.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Comply with installation requirements as specified elsewhere in these
specifications pertaining to air filters housing/casings, and associated supporting devices.
04/2023 AIR FILTERS
254.07.100 PAGE 23 90 00 - 3
B. Install air filters and holding devices of types indicated, and where shown; in accordance
with air filter manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices; to
ensure that filters comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
C. Locate each filter unit accurately in position indicated, in relation to other work. Position
unit with sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding
frames securely to substrate.
D. Coordinate with other work including ductwork and air handling unit work, as necessary to
interface installation of filters properly with other work.
E. Install filters in proper position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
F. Install air filter gage pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters to indicate air
pressure drop through air filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter
plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages if any, for proper readings.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Operate installed air filters to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air
leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating. Correct malfunctioning units at site,
then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units, and
proceed with retesting.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 05 07 – ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The licensed professional electrical ENGINEER of record, directly contracted with the
owner, with the assistance of the CONTRACTOR shall provide electrical power system
studies for the project. The type and content of each study is specified in the following
articles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Completed electrical power system studies shall be submitted to the OWNER.
1. A PDF Copy of the completed study report shall be provided.
2. The software database and library used to model the power system shall be
submitted in native file format zipped together into a single ZIP file.
B. The OWNER shall provide to the ENGINEER the following information:
1. The utility available fault current
2. The utility minimum, normal, and maximum operating service voltage levels, three-
phase short circuit MVA and X/R ratio, as well as line-to-ground short circuit MVA
and X/R ratio at the point of connection as shown on the drawings.
3. The utility protective device settings for all service entrance over-current devices
affecting coordination of the facility
C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide to the ENGINEER the following information:
1. The length of feeders used, new or previously installed affecting the new
equipment.
2. The gauge of feeders used, new or previously installed affecting the new
equipment.
3. The count of runs of feeders used, new or previously installed affecting the new
equipment.
4. The feeder breaker information, new or previously installed affecting the new
equipment.
a. Cut sheet of the breaker
b. Make and model and part number
c. Photo of the breaker
d. Available settings
e. KAIC
5. Transformer information, new or previously installed affecting the new equipment.
a. Cut sheet of the transformer
b. Make and model and part number
c. Photo of the nameplate
d. kVA
e. Primary and Secondary Voltage
f. Primary and Secondary Phases
g. Primary and Secondary Winding type
h. Impedance Z%
6. As-Built one-line diagram
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
D. The ENGINEER shall submit to owner in a single zip file all images and files used
containing the information used in preparing the model including those received by the
CONTRACTOR.
E. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for compliance with all performance specifications
in this proposal. Any deviation from complete compliance must be noted on the
performance specification submitted for review and approved before work begins.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The analysis software shall be the latest version SKM Analysis Software or equal
meeting all performance specifications.
2.2 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
A. An electrical arc flash hazard analysis, including:
1. The development of an up-to-date electrical system one-line diagram and model to
provide staff members with an accurate representation of the installed electrical
system.
2. Determination of system operating modes and conditions that can impact short
circuit currents and arc flash hazard energy levels.
3. Short circuit and equipment duty study to verify that equipment is rated to safely
handle short circuit currents without creating hazardous conditions.
4. Protective device coordination study and review to help ensure proper electrical
system reliability and to determine if arc flash hazard energy levels can be reduced.
5. Arc flash hazard analysis study to determine arc flash energy levels and Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE).
6. Power System Modeling and Arc Flash Analysis software for ongoing use by the
staff members maintaining and updating the system study as the plant changes.
7. Arc flash hazard labeling.
a. INDOOR Labels shall be waterproof and vinyl / plastic / similar. Paper labels
are not acceptable.
b. OUTDOOR Labels shall be waterproof, fade resistant, and UV resistant
completely legible for a minimum 5 years. Labels that fail shall be provided to
OWNER free of charge for any labels that fail within the 5 year period.
c. ENGINEER shall provide to OWNER a PDF document with a separate label per
sheet, and a PDF document with labels arranged with 4 labels on each sheet of
standard 8-1/2” x 11” Letter sized sheets.
B. An electrical arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed to determine incident energy,
arc flash protection boundaries, and required PPE for all electrical equipment in the
facility. The calculations shall comply with the latest adopted NFPA-70E, and the latest
adopted IEEE-1584. An integral part of NFPA-70E compliance is integrating work
permits with arc flash assessment for all equipment in this facility. OWNER is
responsible for integrating arc flash assessment information into their work permit
documentation and procedures.
C. The purpose of this study is to provide a comprehensive software model of the
electrical distribution system, which will document facility compliance with NFPA 70E
mandates as described below.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
1. Article 205.3, 120.2(F)(1): Updated and verified one-line diagram for all electrical
distribution voltages including all sources for lock-out and tag out procedures.
2. Article 400.5, 400.6: Updated short circuit and equipment duty verification study
showing all electrical equipment is properly rated to withstand and interrupt the
available short circuit duty per ANSI Standards and NEMA/UL/NEC requirements.
3. Article 400.6, 410.9: Updated protective device coordination study showing the
system protective devices are properly set to coordinate and clear a fault without
extensive equipment damage or personnel risk.
4. Article 130.3(A)(B), 110.8: Updated arc flash study providing maximum incident
energies, arc flash boundaries, and PPE requirements for each equipment in the
system.
5. Article 130.16(E), 400.11, 400.14, 400.21(C)(2), 410.8: Updated labeling
displaying the worst-case arc hazard values for each equipment in the facility.
D. The analysis shall consist of the following:
1. Field data collection by qualified personnel (as defined by NFPA 70E).
2. Data entry and system one-line modeling in commercially available power system
software.
3. Model verification.
4. Short Circuit and equipment verification study.
5. Protective device coordination study.
6. Arc flash hazard study.
7. Detailed report and findings of the analysis.
8. Electronic copies of the Project Report and the System Modeling File.
E. The analysis and procedures shall comply with the latest adopted revision of the
following standards and recommended practices for power system studies.
1. NFPA-70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
2. IEEE-1584
3. IEEE-242 “Buff Book” Protection and Coordination of Industrial Power Systems
4. IEEE-399 “Brown Book” Power System Analysis
5. IEEE-141 “Red Book” Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants
2.3 DATA COLLECTION
A. Field data collection shall be performed by qualified individuals (as defined by the latest
adopted NFPA 70E) to ensure accurate equipment modeling.
B. Field data collection and system modeling shall be based on the system installed.
C. Equipment shall be visually inspected to collect the necessary nameplate data used in
the analysis, including transformers, switchgear and breakers, relays, direct-acting trip
units, etc. Data that may not be readily accessible or may not have nameplate data
such as conductors, busway, etc. can be taken from drawings.
D. Data collection shall include the step down transformer from the utility service
(including primary relaying) down through each 480-volt motor control center (MCC)
and 240/208 volt panels for all systems served by transformers rated greater than 125
kVA as per the latest adopted IEEE-1584.
E. The OWNER shall obtain from the utility the minimum, normal, and maximum operating
service voltage levels, three-phase short circuit MVA and X/R ratio, as well as line-to-
ground short circuit MVA and X/R ratio at the point of connection as shown on the
drawings.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
2.4 SYSTEM MODELING
A. The system model shall be developed using a commercially available, fully integrated
software package that meets the performance specifications developed in this Section.
To ensure compliance with the latest adopted NFPA-70E, ANSI, and IEEE Standards,
and OSHA mandates, no exceptions or substitutions to the performance specification
are allowed.
B. The system model shall be laid out in one drawing/view and in a manner that provides
for easy viewing of all analysis results. The one drawing/view requirement ensures
that problem areas found and highlighted by the program are easily seen and not
hidden or buried in multiple drawings, eliminating potential human errors where
multiple drawing verification is required.
C. All one-line symbols shall be spaced properly to facilitate viewing results on the one-
line.
D. Equipment names used in the modeling software shall be identical to the equipment
and naming convention shown on the drawings and equipment unless conflicts exist.
The CONTRACTOR shall bring all naming convention conflicts or deficiencies to the
attention of the ENGINEER for clarification.
E. The facility may have multiple operating conditions, including, but not limited to,
generation on/off, shutdown, bus-ties, start-up, emergency operation, etc. Each of the
operating modes shall be documented and modeled in the software in order to
determine the worst-case arc flash hazard and associated parameters for the electrical
equipment. For the purpose, assume that up to four (4) operating modes are possible.
F. The software shall model each operating mode in a manner such that each mode is a
scenario or change case from the base case. Each scenario shall be a simple
differential algorithm storing only the difference from the base case and the scenario.
Modifications to the base case model shall automatically update all scenarios to
eliminate the necessity to store complete databases for each condition, providing for a
manageable file size that can be Emailed and eliminating the associated time, man
hours, and errors with updating each database individually.
G. Project files created by the software shall be single files and not project directories
containing multiple files. The file shall be self-contained and have all necessary
information to describe the one-line, system data, settings, and analysis information.
Files shall be easily transferable to any site via Email or disk and operable with no
setting changes to the database file to eliminate the maintenance and administrative
problems associated with multi-file project directories, and to provide an easy method
to transfer the file for engineering review.
H. The software shall accurately model daisy-chained MCC’s, panels, and sub-
transformers without the use of intermediate buses, nodes or fake impedances.
I. Lumped motor groups for MCC’s shall be modeled per IEEE standards using groups
>50 Hp, and <50 Hp. Where motor list data is not available, single lumped groups may
be modeled per IEEE-141 “Red Book”.
J. Medium voltage motors greater than 1.0 kV shall be modeled individually on their
respective buses including all protective phase and ground overcurrent relays and
fuses.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 5
01/2023
254.07.100
K. All low voltage power circuit breaker (LVPCB), insulated case (ICCB), molded case
(MCCB) and fuse data shall be modeled based on the actual nameplate data including
manufacturer, type, style, trip device, and actual settings. Generic substitutions or
assumptions shall not be allowed unless data cannot be field verified. All assumptions
shall be documented in the report.
L. All relay data shall be modeled based on the actual nameplate data including
manufacturer, type, style, trip device, and actual settings. Generic substitutions or
assumptions shall not be allowed unless data cannot be field verified. All assumptions
shall be documented in the report.
M. All overcurrent relay types for the distribution system shall be modeled on the one-line
diagram (and database) including phase and ground overcurrent, differential, residual,
ground neutral, etc. to establish a complete and detailed system model where
protective device data can be easily modified and updated by the facility and all data is
available for a comprehensive protective device coordination study if required in the
future.
N. Relay models shall depict the actual connection requirements. See Figure-1.3M.
Programs using symbols as shown in Figure-1.3M(na) are not acceptable since they
do not depict the actual system and can lead to confusion in determining arc flash
results and proper protective device modeling.
O. Multi-function relays shall have all their overcurrent devices modeled in a single device
and shall be able to accept multiple CT’s.
P. All equipment modeling must have a corresponding one-line diagram symbol. This
means that there can be no hidden database models. The purpose is for the facility to
easily see all equipment, its associated data, to be able to link documents to the
equipment as a data repository, etc. and to see problems right on the one-line.
Q. All system modeling shall conform to accepted modeling practices as outlined in IEEE-
399 “Brown Book”. Contractor/consultant may provide more advanced modeling
techniques where compliance with the specification is maintained.
2.5 MODEL VERIFICATION
A. The system model shall be verified by reviewing the results of short circuit current flows
for all buses/equipment in the system. The results shall be viewed on each branch and
total flow into a bus/equipment on the system one-line diagram. The purpose is to
visually spot check values with recognized industry benchmarks as to the expected
amount of short circuit current, and correct any problem areas.
2.6 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY
A. A short circuit study shall be performed to verify all equipment duties in the system.
The calculations shall comply with ANSI C37.010, C37.13, C37.5, IEEE-141, and
IEEE-399. The short circuit study shall verify the system electrical equipment is
properly rated to withstand and interrupt the expected bolted and arcing faults in the
system. Improperly rated and applied equipment may not protect personnel against
arc flash hazards even if properly applied PPE is used. The software program must
comply with the above standards in order to properly verify equipment installed in North
America. No substitutions will be allowed.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 6
01/2023
254.07.100
B. The equipment duty verification shall determine both the line side and load side fault
current through each equipment and use the highest current to verify equipment
ratings. Standard bus faults are not acceptable for protective devices in that they do
not accurately model the current through the device and consequently they provide
erroneous results. For solidly grounded systems, both three-phase and single-line-to-
ground faults should be modeled. For other grounding configurations only a three-
phase fault is required.
C. Equipment duty results shall be graphically displayed on the electrical one-line as well
as tabular report format.
D. The results of the equipment duty verification tabular format report shall provide the
following data:
1. Equipment name and kV
2. Manufacture, type, style, and ratings of the device
3. Actual line or load side currents through the device and percent over/under duty
4. Flag for the device showing VIOLATION or WARNING level for visual identification
E. A report of all problem areas shall be provided. Contractor shall notify owner
immediately of all problems found in this system before proceeding in the study. A
recommended action list shall be provided for all underrated equipment in the system.
2.7 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION (PDC) STUDY
A. A PDC study shall be performed in order to determine if the system protection
characteristics are sufficient to provide reliable power to the facility. The PDC study
will also determine if the settings entered in the software will provide proper personnel
protection in the arc flash portion of this study. For facilities where the main distribution
is low voltage (under 600 volts) and only instantaneous breakers or fuses are used,
this section may not apply.
B. The PDC study shall consist of system feeders and branch circuits 100amps and
larger, and plotting the time-current curves (TCC’s) to verify proper selective operation
of the protective devices. The study should also determine if the settings can be
enhanced to provide increased personnel/equipment protection without sacrificing
selective coordination.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER of any potential problems in the
protective device settings that affect either selective operation and reliability or
personnel protection and shall provide recommendations for changes in writing before
continuing with the study.
D. As specified in the data collection and modeling sections, all PDC data shall be
modeled on the one-line diagram and in the equipment database.
E. The OWNER in coordination with the ENGINEER shall contact the serving utility and
obtain protective device settings for all service entrance over current devices in series
with the facility and affecting coordination with facilities distribution system.
F. TCC Specifics: The TCC’s shall graphically illustrate on log-log paper that adequate
time separation exists between series devices. The specific time - current
characteristics of each protective device shall be plotted in such a manner that
sufficient upstream devices will be clearly depicted on one sheet to prove selective
coordination.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 7
01/2023
254.07.100
1. TCC’s shall include a system one-line diagram and protective device coordination
curves for each device in the selected area. The TCC shall be in color on 8 ½ x 11”
paper – full size portrait mode, using a log-log scale. The one-line diagram shall be
part of the TCC and include all protective devices, equipment names, and short
circuit currents calculated from the main one-line. The purpose of this requirement
is to provide all necessary information on one sheet, in a format easily readable
and standard to the industry.
2. For low voltage systems, TCC’s shall be developed for both phase and ground
protective devices. One phase and one ground TCC should be developed for each
unit substation. The TCC should show the largest feeder/motor protective device in
the MCC or panel up through the switchgear/switchboard feeder breaker,
transformer secondary main, unit substation primary fuse, and medium voltage
feeder breaker. For secondary switchboards serving large loads or a wide variety
of loads that may affect upstream coordination, additional TCC’s may be required.
3. For medium voltage systems, TCC’s shall be developed for both phase and ground
protective devices. The TCC should show the largest feeder/motor protective
device in the lineup up through the switchgear/transformer secondary main, unit
substation primary fuse, and medium voltage feeder breaker.
4. The following specific information shall also be shown on the coordination curves:
a. Device identification.
b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.
c. Transformer three - phase and single-line-to-ground ANSI damage curves.
d. Transformer inrush points.
e. Minimum melting, and clearing curves for fuses, and if available the no-damage
curve.
f. Cable damage curves.
g. Motor starting locked rotor curves, and if available the motor locked rotor
damage point.
h. Maximum short circuit cut-off point.
i. Clearly marked short circuit current levels through each protective
device/branch, which should be based on the appropriate current through the
device, i.e. Momentary, Interrupting or 30 Cycle current.
j. Protective device one-line diagram clearly showing all protective devices on the
time-current curve, labels for each device, open breakers, faulted buses, and
the short circuit current flowing in each branch.
k. Each TCC sheet shall have appropriate identification and a one-line diagram
that applies to the specific portion of the system associated with time-current
curves on that sheet.
l. Each protective device curve shall be terminated at a point reflecting maximum
symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current through the device.
m. Identify the device associated with each curve by its name on the included one-
line diagram.
n. Primary Protective Device Settings for Delta-Wye Connected Transformer:
1) Secondary Line-To-Ground Fault Protection: Provide primary protective
device operating band within the transformer’s characteristics curve,
including a point equal to 58 percent of ANSI C57.12.00 withstand point.
2) Secondary Line-To-Line Faults: Provide 16 percent current margin between
primary protective device and associated secondary device characteristic
curves.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 8
01/2023
254.07.100
G. A setting table shall be developed to summarize the settings selected/existing for the
protective devices. The table shall include the following:
1. Device identification.
2. For low voltage breakers, the circuit breaker manufacturer, type, and style, sensor
rating, long-time, short-time, instantaneous settings, and time bands. For breakers
with ground fault capability, the pickup and time delay.
3. Fuse manufacturer, type, style, and rating.
4. Protective relay manufacturer, type, style, function (51, 50, 67, etc.) pickup, current
multiplier, time dial, and delay. For multi-function units, list all devices being used.
Include the CT and/or PT ratios for each function.
H. The software shall provide complete integration of the one-line, database, short circuit,
protective device coordination and arc flash analysis functions to provide accurate
calculations and avoid errors associated with multiple data entry programs. Programs
using separate PDC or TCC plotting packages are not allowed. Complete PDC
integration is defined as the following:
1. The TCC shall automatically be plotted for the selected area including all short
circuit levels. The TCC plot shall automatically include the selected one-line area in
a drag and drop window on the TCC showing all one-line attributes without user
additions required. These attributes shall automatically include all short circuit
currents and voltages displayed on the main one-line, equipment names, etc. and
update automatically without additional user input.
2. Programs requiring the user to build a separate TCC one-line are not integral with
system short circuit calculations and do not automatically update as the system
one-line changes, requiring additional man-hours for one-line development and are
consequently prone to errors as the system changes. These types of programs
shall not be considered for the study.
3. Each TCC shall have momentary (1/2 cycle), interrupting (1-4 cycle), and 30 cycle
short circuit currents (tick marks) displayed on the TCC plot for each protective
device or as required to properly model the tripping characteristics of the device.
The tick marks shall be user adjustable for visual appearance. The purpose is to
provide accurate tripping currents for each device.
4. The software model shall allow each protective device to model momentary (1/2
cycle), interrupting (1-4 cycle), and 30 cycle short circuit currents simultaneously
depending on the characteristics of the device.
5. The software shall model remote voltages and currents for any single fault and
display them on the TCC showing all trip cutoffs based on the remote currents.
The purpose is to accurately model and verify backup relaying to ensure selective
operation under all fault conditions. PDC programs that perform only batch faults,
or fail to model remote voltages and currents for all fault types shall not be
considered.
6. The software shall model and display time difference calculations for any selected
pair of protective devices. The difference calculator shall include bracketing bars
with the calculated difference to clearly show the selective time between the
devices. The calculated time shall update dynamically for instant visual setting as
the devices are dragged (settings modified). In addition, tool tips shall clearly show
the time difference and the protective device settings for all devices as they are
dynamically changed or set to allow the user to accurately determine the proper
setting between devices in the most efficient manner, reducing coordination time
and providing more accurate results.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 9
01/2023
254.07.100
7. TCC’s shall have the ability to display short circuit currents and arc flash hazard
results within the fully integrated system one-line in the PDC focus. Short circuit
currents and arc flash hazard values shall change on the fly as the protective
device settings change, allowing the user to instantly see the results of PDC
changes and the associated impact to short circuit currents and arc flash hazard
values.
8. The software model shall provide a detailed library for the most common protective
devices available in North America. The library shall be user definable.
2.8 ARC FLASH STUDY
A. A detailed arc flash study shall be performed to determine potential arc flash incident
energies, arc flash boundaries, shock hazard boundaries and proper personal
protective equipment (PPE) for all energized electrical system equipment tasks for the
electrical system studied. The calculations shall comply with the latest adopted NFPA-
70E, and IEEE-1584. Bolted short circuit calculations used in the above standards
shall comply with ANSI C37.010, C37.13, C37.5, IEEE-141, and IEEE-399. The
purpose of this study is to determine arc flash hazards in conformance with NFPA-70E,
and to provide a comprehensive software model of the electrical distribution system,
which provides integral arc flash calculations in compliance with NFPA 70E Article
130.1(A)(2) for all equipment in the facility. The OWNER is responsible for integrating
information from the power system studies into their safety and work permit
documentation and procedures. The software program used in this study shall comply
with the above standards. No substitutions in calculation methods will be allowed.
B. The arc flash study shall determine the following results for each system mode of
operation. The results shall be provided in spreadsheet format for each mode and
electrical system location to provide easy viewing and comparison. Worst-case arc
flash energy levels shall be flagged and the spreadsheet comparison table shall be
capable of providing its output directly to high quality vinyl label printers. The
calculations shall, as a minimum, include a comparison of both 100% and 85% arcing
currents for low voltage equipment for each electrical system configuration or operating
mode, indicating worst-case arc flash hazards. The spreadsheet results shall include:
1. Equipment name and voltage.
2. Upstream equipment device name and ANSI function, i.e. 51/50, etc.
3. Equipment type, i.e. switchgear, MCC, Panel, VFD, etc.
4. Equipment arc gap.
5. Bolted and estimated arcing fault current at the fault point (equipment) in
symmetrical amperes. The estimated arcing current should be based on the arcing
current equations used.
6. Trip time, opening time, and total clearing time (total Arc time) of the protective
device.
7. Worst-case arc flash boundary for each bus/equipment in the model.
8. Worst-case arc flash hazard incident energy in cal/cm2 for each bus/equipment in
the model.
9. Worst-case personal protective equipment (PPE) for each bus/equipment in the
model.
10. Working distances for up to five different distances showing items 7, 8, and 9 for
each distance.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 10
01/2023
254.07.100
11. Indicate “Danger/Hazardous” areas where incident energy is greater than 40
cal/cm2 and provide recommendations to reduced arc flash energy levels for these
areas.
12. Flag results where 85% arcing current provided worst-case results.
C. Each mode of operation shall include a detailed write-up indicating areas where
incident energy calculations and PPE requirements are higher than calculated in the
normal operating mode.
D. ENGINEER shall provide a detailed arc flash analysis report including as a minimum:
1. Introduction.
2. Methodology.
3. Information Sources.
4. Key Assumptions.
5. Arc Flash Energy and other consideration for various System Modes of Operation
(maintenance mode, bus-tie, co-gen on/off, etc.).
6. Arc Energy at 100% and reduced currents.
7. IEEE 1584 Considerations.
8. Overcurrent Protective Device Changes, Replacements or Setting Changes
implemented in study to reduce arc flash hazard exposure.
9. Explanation of Data in Arc Flash Hazard Report Tables.
10. NFPA 70E Information.
a. Shock Hazards with covers removed.
b. Shock Hazard Approach Boundaries.
1) Limited Approach Boundary.
2) Restricted Approach Boundary.
3) Prohibited Approach Boundary.
c. Arc Flash Hazard Boundaries.
11. Results of Arc flash Hazard Analysis for high voltage, medium voltage and low
voltage systems, including:
a. Working distances.
b. Energy Levels.
c. PPE Requirements.
d. Recommendations to reduce arc flash hazard energy and exposure.
12. Arc Flash Hazard Report.
a. 5 Hard Copies.
b. 1 Electronic Copy in Adobe Acrobat format (5.0 or later).
13. Electronic file for Power System Modeling Software as developed and utilized for
this analysis.
E. The ENGINEER shall provide printed labels for all equipment in the system from the
project study file. Assume three (3) labels per equipment/bus in your estimate using 4”
x 6” labels or one (1) 6” x 8” label per equipment bus. The labels shall be UV resistant
vinyl labels (white with orange warning strip and black letters) conforming to ANSI-
Z535. The labels shall be printable directly from the power system software utilized for
the study with a Duralabel, Brady PowerMark or GlobalMark printer to ensure that the
OWNER’s personnel have the option of printing the labels without the extra expense of
going to an outside printing service, converting arc flash results to spreadsheet format
or performing tedious manual data entry.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 11
01/2023
254.07.100
F. Software Requirements: The software shall provide complete integration of the one-
line, database, short circuit, PDC and Arc flash functions. Software using separate
short circuit, PDC, TCC or arc flash programs is not allowed. Spreadsheet calculations
and hand calculations are not allowed except as confirmation of the master software
and correct configuration of the master software. If a spreadsheet or hand calculation
is used, include a copy in the zip file sent to the OWNER. The purpose of this section
is to ensure that the arc flash hazard calculations comply with NFPA-70E and IEEE-
1584, and that the calculations are programmed with necessary requirements to help
eliminate possible errors in the arc flash calculations. The additional purpose is to
establish a detailed software model of the electrical distribution system, which will
document compliance with the OSHA requirements and NFPA 70E mandates. The
OWNER is responsible for integrating information from the power system studies into
their safety and work permit documentation and procedures.
1. Arc flash calculations shall be performed with enhanced IEEE-1584 equations,
which eliminate voltage discontinuities and the non-conservative/average results of
the standard equations. The purpose of this requirement is to ensure that the
calculated incident energies are closer to actual test results insuring a conservative
calculation minimizing personnel risk.
2. Arc flash calculations shall be based on the fastest clearing upstream protective
device protecting the equipment for single sources and the slowest upstream
protective device for multiple sources. The calculations shall automatically
compare all series and parallel upstream protective devices in the system to
determine the fastest series device or a conservative parallel clearing time. The
algorithm shall incorporate a traversing routine that can search back an unlimited
number of buses/nodes and consider all series and parallel branches in the
comparison to ensure accurate answers and to prevent hazards associated with
incorrect results. Software shall not have trace back limits (5-10 buses) that can
provide incorrect answers for low voltage faults that require high voltage protective
device clearing to prevent potential errors.
3. The arc flash calculations including arc flash boundary, incident energy, PPE
requirements, and working distance shall be displayed on the software one-line
diagram and TCC simultaneously. The software must show visually the arc flash
values as the settings are incrementally changed (dragging curves) so the
protection can be optimized in the most efficient manner, allowing the protection
engineer to visually balance the competing objectives of personnel protection with
that of system selectivity.
4. The arc flash calculations shall include four (4) calculation options to ensure that
the software provides the flexibility required to meet any system configuration or
training requirement that may be considered. Each calculation option shall comply
with the graphic and spreadsheet display requirements of this section. Each option
is more specifically described below.
a. The detailed option shall provide the let-through energy for each protective
device in the system. This is the energy on the load side of the protective
device. The equipment shall be highlighted when the let-through energy
exceeds a user defined threshold-clothing limit.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 12
01/2023
254.07.100
b. Worst-case including main protective device. This option shall provide the
worst-case arc-hazard energy for the equipment based on the let-through
energy of the equipment’s main protective device. If the equipment is not
equipped with a main device, the program must traverse back the entire system
to determine the fastest series upstream protective device. The equipment
shall be highlighted when the let-through energy exceeds a user defined
threshold-clothing limit.
c. Worst-case excluding main protective device. This option shall provide the
worst-case arc-hazard energy for the equipment based on the let-through
energy of the fastest upstream series protective device in the system. The
program shall traverse back the entire system to determine the fastest
upstream protective device. The equipment shall be highlighted when the let-
through energy exceeds a user defined threshold-clothing limit.
d. Worst-case excluding and including the main protective device. A combination
of options ‘b’ and ‘c’ as stated above.
5. The power system software shall be fully compatible with facility arc flash hazard
and electrical safety implementation software that provides the following
capabilities:
a. Calculates shock hazards, shock hazard boundaries, arc flash boundaries,
incident energies, PPE requirements, etc. for power systems modeled in
EasyPower or EasyPower EasySolv.
b. Program shall support creation of arc flash labels with direct output to high
quality UV resistant vinyl label printers.
c. Program shall also have customizable output. Includes one-line printing, text
report creation, export to AutoCAD, etc.
d. Program shall be a Windows based operating system and shall use Windows
conventions.
2.9 REPORTING AND ANALYSIS SUMMARY
A. Executive Summary: The executive summary shall be brief 1-2 pages maximum and
cover at an executive level the findings of the study, recommendations, and
requirements for maintaining NFPA-70E compliance.
B. Scope of studies performed: The scope shall provide details of what actions were
intended to be performed for each aspect of the study, including short circuit, protective
device coordination, and arc flash.
C. Description of system and explanation of bus and branch numbering system.
D. Modes of operation studied: Each scenario/plant operating condition shall be
thoroughly documented.
E. Detailed report and results of short circuit, coordination, and arc flash studies including:
1. Recommendations and additions to equipment rating and/or PDC characteristics.
2. Recommendations to reduce arc flash hazards for equipment with incident energies
over 40 cal/cm2.
F. Prioritized recommendations for all studies.
G. Action list and check off column for all recommendations.
2.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 13
01/2023
254.07.100
A. The studies shall be in conformance with the NFPA and ANSI Standards, and IEEE
recommended practices detailed in this section. No substitutions in study methods or
software conformance will be allowed.
END OF SECTION
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 26 05 05 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 05 05 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-26 Electrical General Requirements sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish four sets of bound operation and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall contain
descriptive drawings and data which identify equipment installed at the project and
detail the procedures and parts required to maintain and repair the equipment. Copies
of approved submittals shall be included for all equipment.
B. Refer to Section 01 34 00 for additional requirements.
1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL AND
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS
A. General:
1. The "Operating and Maintenance Manual" (Electrical and Instrumentation) is a
bound compilation of drawings and data that the owner requires for each building or
project. These manuals, complete with drawings and data, shall be furnished to the
Owner.
2. The electrical CONTRACTOR has overall responsibility to obtain the necessary
data and compile the data as set forth in this specification, including items or
equipment purchased by the Owner and delivered to the CONTRACTOR for
installation.
3. The number of binders (or "volumes") required will depend on the amount of
information to be catalogued. Total "sets" see paragraph 1.02A.
4. Make all information legible and sufficiently marked to indicate the exact size,
model, type, etc., of equipment furnished and installed.
B. Purpose: The Operating and Maintenance Manual is prepared to provide a ready
reference to all important pieces of mechanical and electrical equipment installed on
the project. It is also to provide the necessary operating and maintenance data for use
by service personnel. It is also to provide information required for checking equipment
performance or for planning of plant expansion or redesign.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAGE SIZE:
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 26 05 05 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
A. All pages shall be standard 8-1/2 x 11 inches size or approximate multiples (preferably
11 x 17 inches) folded to 8-1/2 x 11 inch.
2.2 DRAWINGS:
A. All drawings larger than 8-1/2" x 11" shall be folded and inserted in individual 8-1/2" x
11" manila pockets, which shall have standard three-ring side punching for insertion in
the binders. The equipment name, drawing description and number shall be written on
the face of each manila pocket.
2.3 BINDERS:
A. Binders shall be Buckram (stiffened fabric), bar-lock type binders with block lettering for
sheet size 8-1/2 x 11 inches with 2" to 3-1/2" expandable metal capacity as required for
the project. The number of binders, however, shall be based on not filling them beyond
4".
B. Place the following information on the front cover and backbone:
1. "Operation and Maintenance Manual".
2. Project Name and Number (and volume number if more than one volume).
3. Equipment name and number.
4. ENGINEER's name.
5. General CONTRACTOR's name.
6. Electrical CONTRACTOR's name.
(Items 4 through 6 need not be printed on the backbone.)
2.4 CONTENTS AND INDEXING
A. Manuals shall contain descriptions of the electrical, control, and instrumentation
systems in sufficient detail to adequately indicate the type of systems installed and the
basic details of their operation.
B. All purchased equipment data shall be used to designate the sections. Within each
section additional indexing of component parts may be required.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall contain to the fullest extent all possible
information pertinent to the equipment. The arrangement and type of information to be
filed shall be as follows:
1. Copy of purchase order change (if any).
2. Outline drawings, special construction details, “as-built” electrical wiring and control
diagrams with wire and terminal number for panel and field wiring for all major and
supplementary systems.
3. Manufacturer’s test or calculated performance data and certified test curves.
4. Installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, including a complete parts list
and sectional drawing with parts identification numbers. Mark with model, size and
plan number.
5. Manufacturer’s brochure marked to indicate exact equipment purchased.
Brochures on component parts supplied by a manufacturer with his equipment, but
not manufactured directly by him, shall also be included.
6. The serial numbers of each item of equipment installed are to be listed with the
model numbers and plan symbols.
7. Include a Table of Contents. The contents shall be divided with tabbed index
dividers into the following suggested parts:
Part I Building and System Descriptions
Part II Purchased Equipment Data
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 26 05 05 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
Part III Test Reports and Charts
Part IV Start-Up and Operation
Part V Preventative Maintenance Recommendations
Part VI Software/Programming Data/Program CD’s
8. A copy of the approved submittals for each piece of equipment.
9. A copy of all testing reports.
10. Wiring diagrams, marked with model and size and plan symbol.
11. The index shall contain the name and address of the manufacturer and, if different,
where replacement and repair parts may be obtained.
12. Copies of developed software, programmed setpoints, screens, etc. on C.D.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 05 07 – ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.The electrical equipment manufacturer shall provide electrical power system studies for
the project. The studies shall be prepared by the licensed professional electrical
engineer of record for the plant. The type and content of each study is specified in the
following articles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Completed electrical power system studies shall be bound and submitted to the
ENGINEER.
1.Five (5) printed copies (hardcopies) of the completed study report shall be provided
and one (1) copy in Microsoft Word or Adobe Acrobat format.
2.The software database and library used to model the power system shall be
submitted in native file format including all updates to the library necessary to
complete the model.
B.The CONTRACTOR shall attach brochures, resumes, references and other information
indicating how your firm is qualified to provide the services outlined in this document.
C.The CONTRACTOR is responsible for compliance with all performance specifications in
this proposal. Any deviation from complete compliance must be noted on the
performance specification submitted for review and approved before work begins.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.The analysis software shall be SKM Analysis Software or equal meeting all performance
specifications.
2.2 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
A.An electrical arc flash hazard analysis, including:
1.The development of an up-to-date electrical system one-line diagram and model to
provide staff members with an accurate representation of the installed electrical
system.
2.Determination of system operating modes and conditions that can impact short
circuit currents and arc flash hazard energy levels.
3.Short circuit and equipment duty study to verify that equipment is rated to safely
handle short circuit currents without creating hazardous conditions.
4.Protective device coordination study and review to help ensure proper electrical
system reliability and to determine if arc flash hazard energy levels can be reduced.
5.Arc flash hazard analysis study to determine arc flash energy levels and Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE).
6.Power System Modeling and Arc Flash Analysis software for ongoing use by the
staff members maintaining and updating the system study as the plant changes.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
7.Arc flash and safety program implementation software for ongoing use by the staff
members for arc flash and safety program management and tracking.
8.Arc flash hazard labeling.
9.Assistance with the development of Energized Work Permits.
10.Arc flash and electrical safety training.
11.Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) training.
B.An electrical arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed to determine incident energy,
arc flash protection boundaries, and required PPE for all electrical equipment in the
facility. The calculations shall comply with NFPA-70E 2004, and IEEE-1584-2002. An
integral part of NFPA-70E compliance is integrating work permits with arc flash
assessment for all equipment in this facility. This section describes in detail the
requirements for the study as well as integrating work permits in the system model for
70E compliance.
C.The purpose of this study is to provide a comprehensive software model of the electrical
distribution system, which will document facility compliance with NFPA 70E mandates
as described below. This model will serve as an integral part of an ongoing safety
program by providing integral work permits and arc flash calculations in compliance with
NFPA-70E 2004 Article 130.1(A)(2) for each electrical equipment in the facility.
1.Article 205.3, 120.2(F)(1): Updated and verified one-line diagram for all electrical
distribution voltages including all sources for lock-out and tag out procedures.
2.Article 400.5, 400.6: Updated short circuit and equipment duty verification study
showing all electrical equipment is properly rated to withstand and interrupt the
available short circuit duty per ANSI Standards and NEMA/UL/NEC requirements.
3.Article 400.6, 410.9: Updated protective device coordination study showing the
system protective devices are properly set to coordinate and clear a fault without
extensive equipment damage or personnel risk.
4.Article 130.3(A)(B), 110.8: Updated arc flash study providing maximum incident
energies, arc flash boundaries, and PPE requirements for each equipment in the
system. In addition, these calculations shall be integrated with 70E compliant work
permits as part of an ongoing safety program.
5.Article 130.16(E), 400.11, 400.14, 400.21(C)(2), 410.8: Updated labeling displaying
the worst-case arc hazard values for each equipment in the facility.
D.The analysis shall consist of the following:
1.Field data collection by qualified personnel (as defined by NFPA 70E).
2.Data entry and system one-line modeling in commercially available power system
software.
3.Model verification.
4.Short Circuit and equipment verification study.
5.Protective device coordination study.
6.Arc flash hazard study.
7.Detailed report and findings of the analysis.
8.Electronic copies of the Project Report and the System Modeling File.
E.The analysis and procedures shall comply with the following standards and
recommended practices for power system studies.
1.NFPA-70E, 2004 Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
2.IEEE-1584-2002
3.IEEE-242 “Buff Book” Protection and Coordination of Industrial Power Systems
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
4.IEEE-399 “Brown Book” Power System Analysis
5.IEEE-141 “Red Book” Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants
2.3 DATA COLLECTION
A.Field data collection shall be performed by qualified individuals (as defined by NFPA
70E – 2004) to ensure accurate equipment modeling.
B.Field data collection and system modeling shall be based on the system installed.
C.Equipment shall be visually inspected to collect the necessary nameplate data used in
the analysis, including transformers, switchgear and breakers, relays, direct-acting trip
units, etc. Data that may not be readily accessible or may not have nameplate data
such as conductors, busway, etc. can be taken from drawings.
D.Data collection shall include the step down transformer from the utility service (including
primary relaying) down through each 480-volt motor control center (MCC) and 240/208
volt panels for all systems served by transformers rated greater than 125 kVA as per
IEEE-1584-2002.
E.The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the utility the minimum, normal, and maximum
operating service voltage levels, three-phase short circuit MVA and X/R ratio, as well as
line-to-ground short circuit MVA and X/R ratio at the point of connection as shown on
the drawings.
2.4 SYSTEM MODELING
A.The system model shall be developed using a commercially available, fully integrated
software package that meets the performance specifications developed in this Section.
To ensure compliance with NFPA-70E 2004, ANSI, and IEEE Standards, and OSHA
mandates, no exceptions or substitutions to the performance specification are allowed.
B.The system model shall be laid out in one drawing/view and in a manner that provides
for easy viewing of all analysis results. The one drawing/view requirement ensures that
problem areas found and highlighted by the program are easily seen and not hidden or
buried in multiple drawings, eliminating potential human errors where multiple drawing
verification is required.
C.All one-line symbols shall be spaced properly to facilitate viewing results on the one-
line.
D.Equipment names used in the modeling software shall be identical to the equipment and
naming convention shown on the drawings and equipment unless conflicts exist. The
CONTRACTOR shall bring all naming convention conflicts or deficiencies to the
attention of the ENGINEER for clarification.
E.The facility may have multiple operating conditions, including, but not limited to,
generation on/off, shutdown, bus-ties, start-up, emergency operation, etc. Each of the
operating modes shall be documented and modeled in the software in order to
determine the worst-case arc flash hazard and associated parameters for the electrical
equipment. For the purpose, assume that up to four (4) operating modes are possible.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
F.The software shall model each operating mode in a manner such that each mode is a
scenario or change case from the base case. Each scenario shall be a simple
differential algorithm storing only the difference from the base case and the scenario.
Modifications to the base case model shall automatically update all scenarios to
eliminate the necessity to store complete databases for each condition, providing for a
manageable file size that can be Emailed and eliminating the associated time, man
hours, and errors with updating each database individually.
G.Project files created by the software shall be single files and not project directories
containing multiple files. The file shall be self-contained and have all necessary
information to describe the one-line, system data, settings, and analysis information.
Files shall be easily transferable to any site via Email or disk and operable with no
setting changes to the database file to eliminate the maintenance and administrative
problems associated with multi-file project directories, and to provide an easy method to
transfer the file for engineering review.
H.The software shall accurately model daisy-chained MCC’s, panels, and sub-
transformers without the use of intermediate buses, nodes or fake impedances.
I.Lumped motor groups for MCC’s shall be modeled per IEEE standards using groups
>50 Hp, and <50 Hp. Where motor list data is not available, single lumped groups may
be modeled per IEEE-141 “Red Book”.
J.Medium voltage motors greater than 1.0 kV shall be modeled individually on their
respective buses including all protective phase and ground overcurrent relays and
fuses. This model will provide individual work permits for each starter/motor on the one-
line.
K.All low voltage power circuit breaker (LVPCB), insulated case (ICCB), molded case
(MCCB) and fuse data shall be modeled based on the actual nameplate data including
manufacturer, type, style, trip device, and actual settings. Generic substitutions or
assumptions shall not be allowed unless data cannot be field verified. All assumptions
shall be documented in the report.
L.All relay data shall be modeled based on the actual nameplate data including
manufacturer, type, style, trip device, and actual settings. Generic substitutions or
assumptions shall not be allowed unless data cannot be field verified. All assumptions
shall be documented in the report.
M.All overcurrent relay types for the distribution system shall be modeled on the one-line
diagram (and database) including phase and ground overcurrent, differential, residual,
ground neutral, etc. to establish a complete and detailed system model where protective
device data can be easily modified and updated by the facility and all data is available
for a comprehensive protective device coordination study if required in the future.
N.Relay models shall depict the actual connection requirements. See Figure-1.3M.
Programs using symbols as shown in Figure-1.3M(na) are not acceptable since they do
not depict the actual system and can lead to confusion in determining arc flash results
and proper protective device modeling.
O.Multi-function relays shall have all their overcurrent devices modeled in a single device
and shall be able to accept multiple CT’s.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 5
01/2023
254.07.100
P.All equipment modeling must have a corresponding one-line diagram symbol. This
means that there can be no hidden database models. The purpose is for the facility to
easily see all equipment, its associated data, to be able to link documents to the
equipment as a data repository, etc. and to see problems right on the one-line.
Q.All system modeling shall conform to accepted modeling practices as outlined in IEEE-
399 “Brown Book”. Contractor/consultant may provide more advanced modeling
techniques where compliance with the specification is maintained.
2.5 MODEL VERIFICATION
A.The system model shall be verified by reviewing the results of short circuit current flows
for all buses/equipment in the system. The results shall be viewed on each branch and
total flow into a bus/equipment on the system one-line diagram. The purpose is to
visually spot check values with recognized industry benchmarks as to the expected
amount of short circuit current, and correct any problem areas.
2.6 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY
A.A short circuit study shall be performed to verify all equipment duties in the system. The
calculations shall comply with ANSI C37.010, C37.13, C37.5, IEEE-141, and IEEE-399.
The short circuit study shall verify the system electrical equipment is properly rated to
withstand and interrupt the expected bolted and arcing faults in the system. Improperly
rated and applied equipment may not protect personnel against arc flash hazards even
if properly applied PPE is used. The software program must comply with the above
standards in order to properly verify equipment installed in North America. No
substitutions will be allowed.
B.The equipment duty verification shall determine both the line side and load side fault
current through each equipment and use the highest current to verify equipment ratings.
Standard bus faults are not acceptable for protective devices in that they do not
accurately model the current through the device and consequently they provide
erroneous results. For solidly grounded systems, both three-phase and single-line-to-
ground faults should be modeled. For other grounding configurations only a three-
phase fault is required.
C.Equipment duty results shall be graphically displayed on the electrical one-line as well
as tabular report format.
D.The results of the equipment duty verification tabular format report shall provide the
following data:
1.Equipment name and kV
2.Manufacture, type, style, and ratings of the device
3.Actual line or load side currents through the device and percent over/under duty
4.Flag for the device showing VIOLATION or WARNING level for visual identification
E.A report of all problem areas shall be provided. Contractor shall notify owner
immediately of all problems found in this system before proceeding in the study. A
recommended action list shall be provided for all underrated equipment in the system.
2.7 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION (PDC) STUDY
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 6
01/2023
254.07.100
A.A PDC study shall be performed in order to determine if the system protection
characteristics are sufficient to provide reliable power to the facility. The PDC study will
also determine if the settings entered in the software will provide proper personnel
protection in the arc flash portion of this study. For facilities where the main distribution
is low voltage (under 600 volts) and only instantaneous breakers or fuses are used, this
section may not apply.
B.The PDC study shall consist of system feeders and branch circuits 100amps and larger,
and plotting the time-current curves (TCC’s) to verify proper selective operation of the
protective devices. The study should also determine if the settings can be enhanced to
provide increased personnel/equipment protection without sacrificing selective
coordination.
C.The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER of any potential problems in the
protective device settings that affect either selective operation and reliability or
personnel protection and shall provide recommendations for changes in writing before
continuing with the study.
D.As specified in the data collection and modeling sections, all PDC data shall be
modeled on the one-line diagram and in the equipment database.
E.The CONTRACTOR shall contact the serving utility and obtain protective device
settings for all service entrance over current devices in series with the facility and
affecting coordination with facilities distribution system.
F.TCC Specifics: The TCC’s shall graphically illustrate on log-log paper that adequate
time separation exists between series devices. The specific time - current
characteristics of each protective device shall be plotted in such a manner that sufficient
upstream devices will be clearly depicted on one sheet to prove selective coordination.
1.TCC’s shall include a system one-line diagram and protective device coordination
curves for each device in the selected area. The TCC shall be printed in color on 8
½ x 11” paper – full size portrait mode, using a log-log scale. The one-line diagram
shall be part of the TCC and include all protective devices, equipment names, and
short circuit currents calculated from the main one-line. The purpose of this
requirement is to provide all necessary information on one sheet, in a format easily
readable and standard to the industry.
2.For low voltage systems, TCC’s shall be developed for both phase and ground
protective devices. One phase and one ground TCC should be developed for each
unit substation. The TCC should show the largest feeder/motor protective device in
the MCC or panel up through the switchgear/switchboard feeder breaker,
transformer secondary main, unit substation primary fuse, and medium voltage
feeder breaker. For secondary switchboards serving large loads or a wide variety of
loads that may affect upstream coordination, additional TCC’s may be required.
3.For medium voltage systems, TCC’s shall be developed for both phase and ground
protective devices. The TCC should show the largest feeder/motor protective
device in the lineup up through the switchgear/transformer secondary main, unit
substation primary fuse, and medium voltage feeder breaker.
4.The following specific information shall also be shown on the coordination curves:
a.Device identification.
b.Voltage and current ratio for curves.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 7
01/2023
254.07.100
c.Transformer three - phase and single-line-to-ground ANSI damage curves.
d.Transformer inrush points.
e.Minimum melting, and clearing curves for fuses, and if available the no-damage
curve.
f.Cable damage curves.
g.Motor starting locked rotor curves, and if available the motor locked rotor
damage point.
h.Maximum short circuit cut-off point.
i.Clearly marked short circuit current levels through each protective
device/branch, which should be based on the appropriate current through the
device, i.e. Momentary, Interrupting or 30 Cycle current.
j.Protective device one-line diagram clearly showing all protective devices on the
time-current curve, labels for each device, open breakers, faulted buses, and the
short circuit current flowing in each branch.
k.Each TCC sheet shall have appropriate identification and a one-line diagram
that applies to the specific portion of the system associated with time-current
curves on that sheet.
l.Each protective device curve shall be terminated at a point reflecting maximum
symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current through the device.
m.Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function,
and setting – i.e. tap, time delay, and instantaneous, pickup, etc.
n.Primary Protective Device Settings for Delta-Wye Connected Transformer:
1)Secondary Line-To-Ground Fault Protection: Provide primary protective
device operating band within the transformer’s characteristics curve,
including a point equal to 58 percent of ANSI C57.12.00 withstand point.
2)Secondary Line-To-Line Faults: Provide 16 percent current margin between
primary protective device and associated secondary device characteristic
curves.
G.A setting table shall be developed to summarize the settings selected/existing for the
protective devices. The table shall include the following:
1.Device identification.
2.For low voltage breakers, the circuit breaker manufacturer, type, and style, sensor
rating, long-time, short-time, instantaneous settings, and time bands. For breakers
with ground fault capability, the pickup and time delay.
3.Fuse manufacturer, type, style, and rating.
4.Protective relay manufacturer, type, style, function (51, 50, 67, etc.) pickup, current
multiplier, time dial, and delay. For multi-function units, list all devices being used.
Include the CT and/or PT ratios for each function.
H.The software shall provide complete integration of the one-line, database, short circuit,
protective device coordination and arc flash analysis functions to provide accurate
calculations and avoid errors and inefficiencies associated with multiple data entry
programs. Programs using separate PDC or TCC plotting packages are not allowed.
Complete PDC integration is defined as the following:
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 8
01/2023
254.07.100
1.TCC’s shall be developed by simply selecting (highlighting) with the mouse the one-
line area to be coordinated. The TCC shall automatically be plotted for the selected
area including all short circuit levels. The TCC plot shall automatically include the
selected one-line area in a drag and drop window on the TCC showing all one-line
attributes without user additions required. These attributes shall automatically
include all short circuit currents and voltages displayed on the main one-line,
equipment names, etc. and update automatically without additional user input.
2.Programs requiring the user to build a separate TCC one-line are not integral with
system short circuit calculations and do not automatically update as the system one-
line changes, requiring additional man-hours for one-line development and are
consequently prone to errors as the system changes. These types of programs
shall not be considered for the study.
3.Each TCC shall have momentary (1/2 cycle), interrupting (1-4 cycle), and 30 cycle
short circuit currents (tick marks) displayed on the TCC plot for each protective
device or as required to properly model the tripping characteristics of the device.
The tick marks shall be user adjustable for visual appearance. The purpose is to
provide accurate tripping currents for each device.
4.The software model shall allow each protective device to model momentary (1/2
cycle), interrupting (1-4 cycle), and 30 cycle short circuit currents simultaneously
depending on the characteristics of the device.
5.The software shall model remote voltages and currents for any single fault and
display them on the TCC showing all trip cutoffs based on the remote currents. The
purpose is to accurately model and verify backup relaying to ensure selective
operation under all fault conditions. PDC programs that perform only batch faults, or
fail to model remote voltages and currents for all fault types shall not be considered.
6.The software shall model and display time difference calculations for any selected
pair of protective devices. The difference calculator shall include bracketing bars
with the calculated difference to clearly show the selective time between the
devices. The calculated time shall update dynamically for instant visual setting as
the devices are dragged (settings modified). In addition, tool tips shall clearly show
the time difference and the protective device settings for all devices as they are
dynamically changed or set to allow the user to accurately determine the proper
setting between devices in the most efficient manner, reducing coordination time
and providing more accurate results.
7.The software model shall provide for WYSIWYG drag and drop modeling of all
protective devices and provide for tool tips and notes to display all settings
dynamically. The purpose is to provide accurate adjustments and settings in the
most time efficient and accurate manner.
8.TCC’s shall have the ability to display short circuit currents and arc flash hazard
results within the fully integrated system one-line in the PDC focus. Short circuit
currents are available at any equipment with a single mouse click. Short circuit
currents and arc flash hazard values shall change on the fly as the protective device
settings change, allowing the user to instantly see the results of PDC changes and
the associated impact to short circuit currents and arc flash hazard values.
9.The software model shall provide a detailed library for the most common protective
devices available in North America. The library shall be user definable.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 9
01/2023
254.07.100
2.8 ARC FLASH STUDY
A.A detailed arc flash study shall be performed to determine potential arc flash incident
energies, arc flash boundaries, shock hazard boundaries and proper personal protective
equipment (PPE) for all energized electrical system equipment tasks for the electrical
system studied. The calculations shall comply with NFPA-70E 2004, and IEEE-1584.
Bolted short circuit calculations used in the above standards shall comply with ANSI
C37.010, C37.13, C37.5, IEEE-141, and IEEE-399. The purpose of this study is to
determine arc flash hazards in conformance with NFPA-70E and to facilitate a safety
program for the OWNER, and to provide a comprehensive software model of the
electrical distribution system, which provides integral work permits and arc flash
calculations in compliance with NFPA 70E Article 130.1(A)(2) for all equipment in the
facility. The software program used in this study shall comply with the above standards.
No substitutions in calculation methods will be allowed.
B.The arc flash study shall determine the following results for each system mode of
operation. The results shall be provided in spreadsheet format for each mode and
electrical system location to provide easy viewing and comparison. Worst-case arc
flash energy levels shall be flagged and the spreadsheet comparison table shall be
capable of providing its output directly to high quality vinyl label printers. The
calculations shall, as a minimum, include a comparison of both 100% and 85% arcing
currents for low voltage equipment for each electrical system configuration or operating
mode, indicating worst-case arc flash hazards. The spreadsheet results shall include:
1.Equipment name and voltage.
2.Upstream equipment device name and ANSI function, i.e. 51/50, etc.
3.Equipment type, i.e. switchgear, MCC, Panel, VFD, etc.
4.Equipment arc gap.
5.Bolted and estimated arcing fault current at the fault point (equipment) in
symmetrical amperes. The estimated arcing current should be based on the arcing
current equations used.
6.Trip time, opening time, and total clearing time (total Arc time) of the protective
device.
7.Worst-case arc flash boundary for each bus/equipment in the model.
8.Worst-case arc flash hazard incident energy in cal/cm2 for each bus/equipment in
the model.
9.Worst-case personal protective equipment (PPE) for each bus/equipment in the
model.
10.Working distances for up to five different distances showing items 7, 8, and 9 for
each distance.
11.Indicate “Danger/Hazardous” areas where incident energy is greater than 40 cal/cm2
and provide recommendations to reduced arc flash energy levels for these areas.
12.Flag results where 85% arcing current provided worst-case results.
C.Each mode of operation shall include a detailed write-up indicating areas where incident
energy calculations and PPE requirements are higher than calculated in the normal
operating mode.
D.Consultant/contractor shall provide a detailed arc flash analysis report including as a
minimum:
1.Introduction.
2.Methodology.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 10
01/2023
254.07.100
3.Information Sources.
4.Key Assumptions.
5.Arc Flash Energy and other consideration for various System Modes of Operation
(maintenance mode, bus-tie, co-gen on/off, etc.).
6.Arc Energy at 100% and reduced currents.
7.IEEE 1584-2002 Considerations.
8.Overcurrent Protective Device Changes, Replacements or Setting Changes
implemented in study to reduce arc flash hazard exposure.
9.Explanation of Data in Arc Flash Hazard Report Tables.
10.NFPA 70E Information.
a.Shock Hazards with covers removed.
b.Shock Hazard Approach Boundaries.
1)Limited Approach Boundary.
2)Restricted Approach Boundary.
3)Prohibited Approach Boundary.
c.Arc Flash Hazard Boundaries.
11.Results of Arc flash Hazard Analysis for high voltage, medium voltage and low
voltage systems, including:
a.Working distances.
b.Energy Levels.
c.PPE Requirements.
d.Recommendations to reduce arc flash hazard energy and exposure.
12.Arc Flash Hazard Report.
a.5 Hard Copies.
b.1 Electronic Copy in Adobe Acrobat format (5.0 or later).
13.Electronic file for Power System Modeling Software as developed and utilized for
this analysis.
E.The CONTRACTOR shall provide printed labels for labels for all equipment in the
system from the project study file. Assume three (3) labels per equipment/bus in your
estimate using 4” x 6” labels or one (1) 6” x 8” label per equipment bus. The labels shall
be UV resistant vinyl labels (white with orange warning strip and black letters)
conforming to ANSI-Z535. The labels shall be printable directly from the power system
software utilized for the study with a Duralabel, Brady PowerMark or GlobalMark printer
to ensure that the OWNER’s personnel have the option of printing the labels without the
extra expense of going to an outside printing service, converting arc flash results to
spreadsheet format or performing tedious manual data entry.
F.Software Requirements: The software shall provide complete integration of the one-
line, database, short circuit, PDC and Arc flash functions. Software using separate
short circuit, PDC, TCC or arc flash programs is not allowed. Spreadsheet calculations
are not allowed. The purpose of this section is to ensure that the arc flash hazard
calculations comply with NFPA-70E and IEEE-1584, and that the calculations are
programmed with necessary requirements to help eliminate possible errors in the arc
flash calculations. The additional purpose is to establish a detailed software model of
the XYZ Corporation – Abc Facility electrical distribution system, which will document
compliance with the OSHA requirements and NFPA 70E mandates. This model will
serve as an integral part of the OWNER’s safety program by providing integral work
permits and arc flash calculations in compliance with NFPA-70E Article 130.1(A)(2) for
each electrical equipment in the facility.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 11
01/2023
254.07.100
1.Arc flash calculations shall be performed with enhanced IEEE-1584 equations,
which eliminate voltage discontinuities and the non-conservative/average results of
the standard equations. The purpose of this requirement is to ensure that the
calculated incident energies are closer to actual test results insuring a conservative
calculation minimizing personnel risk.
2.Arc flash calculations shall be based on the fastest clearing upstream protective
device protecting the equipment for single sources and the slowest upstream
protective device for multiple sources. The calculations shall automatically compare
all series and parallel upstream protective devices in the system to determine the
fastest series device or a conservative parallel clearing time. The algorithm shall
incorporate a traversing routine that can search back an unlimited number of
buses/nodes and consider all series and parallel branches in the comparison to
ensure accurate answers and to prevent hazards associated with incorrect results.
Software shall not have trace back limits (5-10 buses) that can provide incorrect
answers for low voltage faults that require high voltage protective device clearing to
prevent potential errors.
3.The arc flash calculations including arc flash boundary, incident energy, PPE
requirements, and working distance shall be displayed on the software one-line
diagram and TCC simultaneously. The software must show visually the arc flash
values as the settings are incrementally changed (dragging curves) so the protection
can be optimized in the most efficient manner, allowing the protection engineer to
visually balance the competing objectives of personnel protection with that of system
selectivity.
4.The arc flash calculations shall include four (4) calculation options to ensure that the
software provides the flexibility required to meet any system configuration or training
requirement that may be considered. Each calculation option shall comply with the
graphic and spreadsheet display requirements of this section. Each option is more
specifically described below.
a.The detailed option shall provide the let-through energy for each protective
device in the system. This is the energy on the load side of the protective
device. The equipment shall be highlighted when the let-through energy
exceeds a user defined threshold-clothing limit.
b.Worst-case including main protective device. This option shall provide the
worst-case arc-hazard energy for the equipment based on the let-through
energy of the equipment’s main protective device. If the equipment is not
equipped with a main device, the program must traverse back the entire system
to determine the fastest series upstream protective device. The equipment shall
be highlighted when the let-through energy exceeds a user defined threshold-
clothing limit.
c.Worst-case excluding main protective device. This option shall provide the
worst-case arc-hazard energy for the equipment based on the let-through
energy of the fastest upstream series protective device in the system. The
program shall traverse back the entire system to determine the fastest upstream
protective device. The equipment shall be highlighted when the let-through
energy exceeds a user defined threshold-clothing limit.
d.Worst-case excluding and including the main protective device. A combination
of options ‘b’ and ‘c’ as stated above.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 12
01/2023
254.07.100
5.The arc flash calculations shall provide integral “Work Tasks” for the listed
equipment types. The tasks shall be derived from 70E Table 130.7(C)(9)(a) and be
specific to the equipment type. Work tasks shall be user definable in the software to
allow customization and integral with the “Work Permit” feature of the software.
Listed equipment types shall include:
a.Switchgear, Switchboards, Panelboards, MCC, VFD, UPS, ATS, Interrupting
Switch, NEMA E2 Contactor, Conductor, Open Air for 100-200 volt equipment.
b.Switchgear, Switchboards, Panelboards, MCC, VFD, UPS, ATS, Interrupting
Switch, NEMA E2 Contactor, Conductor, Open Air for 200-1000 volt equipment.
c.Switchgear, MCC, VFD, UPS, ATS, Interrupting Switch, NEMA E2 Contactor,
Conductor, Open Air for 1.0-5.0 kV equipment.
d.Switchgear, MCC, VFD, ATS, Interrupting Switch, NEMA E2 Contactor,
Conductor, Open Air for 5.0-15.0 kV equipment.
e.Switchgear, Interrupting Switch, Conductor, Open Air for 15.0-38.0 kV
equipment.
f.Interrupting Switch, Conductor, and Open Air for 38.0-1500 kV equipment.
6.Work Tasks shall have a user-defined library that provides the following
customizable features for each work task:
a.Work Tasks for each specific equipment type and voltage range.
b.Working distance units English or Metric.
c.Work distance for each task.
d.V-rated gloves and tool requirements.
e.Job description and procedures.
f.Safe work practices description.
g.Hazard Risk Category (HRC) reduction. *Note: HRC reduction can only be used
based on a documented risk assessment as an integral part of a safety program.
7.Work tasks shall be accessible from the one-line diagram for any equipment through
a mouse click on the equipment in the electrical system model one-line. A dialog
box shall appear listing all 70E and user definable work tasks for the specific
equipment selected. The work task dialog shall include a user definable working
distance for each work task and allow the user to select tasks specific to any
equipment feeder or the incoming main. Work tasks for each equipment type shall
be voltage specific and user definable in the library. The purpose of these
requirements is to integrate 70E work tasks to the one-line diagram for specific
equipment types. This will provide the basis for a customized safety program and
work permit process compliant with 70E mandates. The level of detailed
requirements for the “work task” software is necessary to ensure that any variation
of equipment type, equipment layout, or work procedure can be handled and
documented in the software.
a.The software interface shall allow the user to select any breaker fuse or switch
on the one-line, and get a specific work task generated for that device showing
the load side arc flash hazard (let-through energy) for that device. The purpose
of this requirement is to detail specific feeder hazards when work tasks dictate
working downstream from a feeder protective device.
b.The arc flash calculations shall provide integral work permits for compliance with
NFPA-70E, 2004 Article 130.1 (A). The work permits shall be integral with the
system one-line diagram and the arc flash calculations and shall detect and
account for work between feeder and main breaker.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 13
01/2023
254.07.100
8.Work permits shall be activated by mouse click, for all equipment types listed in K5.
Work permits shall have the following calculated values and provide the following
information specific to the “work task” and equipment selected:
a.Shock hazard.
b.Shock hazard boundaries.
c.Arc flash boundary – worst-case for each equipment.
d.Arc flash hazard incident energy in cal/cm2 for the equipment.
e.Hazard Risk Category (HRC) and any applicable risk reduction.
f.Required PPE category based on calculated energy level and optional risk
reduction.
g.Required PPE description based on PPE category.
h.Determination of V-rated gloves and tools.
i.Auto fill job description and procedures for each work task.
j.Auto fill safe work practices description for each work task.
k.Job briefing and planning check list.
l.Approval sign off section.
m.Working distance measurements in English or Metric units.
n.Required work distance for each task.
o.Documentation for safety program in compliance with 70E 130.1(A).
9.The work permits shall be created by the software in MS Word and have the
following user customizable features:
a.Work Tasks for each specific equipment type and voltage range.
b.Restricted shock boundary.
c.Arc flash boundary – worst-case for each equipment.
d.Arc flash hazard incident energy in cal/cm2 for the equipment.
e.Hazard Risk Category (HRC) reduction for low risk tasks.
f.Required PPE category based on risk reduction.
g.Working distance in English or Metric units.
h.Working distance for each task.
i.V-rated gloves and tool requirements.
j.Flame Resistant clothing requirements.
k.Job description and procedures for each work task.
l.Safe work practices description for each work task.
m.Job briefing and planning check list.
n.Approval sign off section.
10.The power system software shall allow the created work permits to be linked via
Windows “hyperlinks” to each equipment on the one-line diagram. The purpose is to
provide a data repository of work permits performed on each equipment for 70E
review, as well as providing a one-stop location where documents pertaining to the
equipment can be accessed by maintenance and job planning.
11.The power system software shall be fully compatible with facility arc flash hazard
and electrical safety implementation software that provides the following capabilities:
a.Calculates shock hazards, shock hazard boundaries, arc flash boundaries,
incident energies, PPE requirements, etc. for power systems modeled in
EasyPower or EasyPower EasySolv.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 14
01/2023
254.07.100
b.Built in Work Permit Feature for creation of custom Energized Work Permits
complying with the NFPA-70E requirements. Work permit feature shall include
NFPA risk assessment categories based on the task performed for all types of
electrical equipment and voltage ranges. The work permit feature shall include
an extensive library of user definable work tasks, safety procedures and safe
work practices, saving XYZ Corporation – Abc Facility plant engineering staff,
maintenance staff and contractors hours of productive time.
c.Energized work permits, safety procedures, equipment instruction manuals, etc.,
shall be capable of being directly linked to the equipment one-line through a
Hyperlinks feature, providing a one-stop data repository easily accessible to all
plant and safety personnel, saving plant personnel and contractors significant
productive time in locating the right instruction manual, equipment safety
procedure, drawing, pictures and maps for the equipment. This feature shall
also help XYZ Corporation – Abc Facility comply with OSHA and NFPA 70E
record keeping requirements.
d.Additional equipment information and records such as Maintenance Records,
Maintenance Manuals, Operations Manuals, Lock out / Tag out procedures, etc.
shall also be capable of being Hyperlinked to the equipment on the graphical
one-line.
e.Program shall support creation of arc flash labels with direct output to high
quality UV resistant vinyl label printers.
f.Program shall also have customizable output. Includes one-line printing, text
report creation, export to AutoCAD, etc.
g.Program shall be a Windows based operating system and shall use Windows
conventions.
h.Program shall be capable of being installed on stand alone personal computers
or on networked systems.
i.Program shall be easily operable by the OWNER’s staff without any specialized
training.
12.The software shall be licensed to the OWNER and the original software package will
be delivered at project completion.
2.9 REPORTING AND ANALYSIS SUMMARY
A.Executive Summary: The executive summary shall be brief 1-2 pages maximum and
cover at an executive level the findings of the study, recommendations, and
requirements for maintaining NFPA-70E compliance.
B.Scope of studies performed: The scope shall provide details of what actions were
intended to be performed for each aspect of the study, including short circuit, protective
device coordination, and arc flash.
C.Description of system and explanation of bus and branch numbering system.
D.Modes of operation studied: Each scenario/plant operating condition shall be
thoroughly documented.
E.Detailed report and results of short circuit, coordination, and arc flash studies including:
1.Recommendations and additions to equipment rating and/or PDC characteristics.
2.Recommendations to reduce arc flash hazards for equipment with incident energies
over 40 cal/cm2.
F.Prioritized recommendations for all studies.
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 07 - 15
01/2023
254.07.100
G.Action list and check off column for all recommendations.
2.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.The studies shall be in conformance with the NFPA and ANSI Standards, and IEEE
recommended practices detailed in this section. No substitutions in study methods or
software conformance will be allowed.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 09 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 05 09 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, appliances, and perform all operations in
connection with, and complete in strict accordance with, this section of specifications
and the applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract for
the following work:
1. Nameplates.
2. Labels.
3. Wire and cable markers.
4. Conduit markers.
1.2 APPLICABLE SECTIONS:
A. Section 26 05 00 - Electrical General Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit product literature including manufacturer name, model number, material, size,
and specifications. Material shall not be installed until the Engineer has reviewed the
submittal data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES:
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white
background.
B. Locations:
1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
2. Communication cabinets.
3. Each junction box.
C. Letter Size:
1. 1/8" letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2. 1/4" letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
D. Identify control device stations, motor control equipment, process equipment and
instrumentation equipment. All such devices shall be labeled with equipment served,
identifying name, and circuit number with panel.
2.2 WIRE MARKERS:
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 09 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
A. Manufacturers:
1. 3M
2. Thomas & Betts
3. Panduit
B. Description: Heat shrink tubing, imprinted, type wire markers.
C. Locations: Each conductor at panel-board gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction
boxes, and each load connection, PLC panels, instrument panels, instruments, MCC’s,
etc.
D. Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number shall be indicated on
project Record Drawings.
E. Control Circuits: Control wire number shall be indicated on schematic and
interconnection diagrams.
F. Data Wiring: Address number shall be indicated on each end of conductor on the face
of the outlet cover, and on the space of the patch panel.
G. All conductor numbers and terminal block numbers shall be reflected on the
CONTRACTOR submitted Record Drawings.
2.3 CONDUIT MARKERS:
A. Manufacturers:
1. Tech Products
2. Thomas & Betts
3. Panduit
B. Description: 3/16" poly tag in poly tag holder. Tie wrapped to conduit.
C. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet.
D. Spacing: Label at each junction and terminal end.
E. Legend: Number as indicated in contractor prepared Record Drawings.
2.4 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE:
A. Description: 4" wide detectable plastic tape, colored red with suitable warning legend
describing buried electrical lines.
B. Location: Along length of each underground conduit, 12" above conduit.
2.5 LABELS:
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 09 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
A. Self adhesive, plastic coated, machine printed.
B. Manufacturer: Brother or equal.
C. Locations:
1. Convenience outlet circuit adhered to outlet faceplate showing panel and circuit
number.
2. Data address number to outlet faceplate and patch panel face plate.
3. Light switches, indicating lighting switched panel and circuit number.
4. Process wiring indicating connection point terminal block and cabinet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION:
A. De-grease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.
B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws.
C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panel-board that is recessed in finished
locations.
D. Identify each conduit at each end.
E. Identify underground conduits using one underground warning tape per trench at 12"
above conduit.
END OF SECTION
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 05 19 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install conductors and cables as required, and as shown on the Drawings.
Materials employed shall be as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product literature including manufacturer part number, model number, material,
size, and specifications. Material shall not be installed until the Engineer has reviewed
the submittal data.
B. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for review and acceptance showing routing, conduit
size, and number and size of wires in each conduit before installation of conduit and
any related work. Show proposed routing of conduits buried under floor slabs-on-
grade, conduit and rebar embedded in floor slabs, columns, etc. Identify conduit by tag
number of equipment served and by conduit schedule number.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MANUFACTURERS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of conduits and raceway
systems of type and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than (3) years.
B. STANDARDS: Comply with applicable portions of the NEMA standards pertaining to
raceways. Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to
electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components which have been
UL listed and labeled. Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction of
raceway systems.
1.4 APPLICABLE SECTIONS
A. Section 26 05 00: Electrical General Requirements.
B. Section 26 05 08: Electrical Acceptance Tests
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. 600 Voltage Conductors:
1. Copper with AWG sizes as shown or required:
a. Minimum size shall be No. 12 except where specified otherwise.
b. Conductors shall be stranded.
1) Insulation:
a) Conductor Size No. 2 And Smaller: 600V type XHHW (75° C). All
conductors run in underground conduits shall be XHHW.
b) Conductor Size No. 1 And Larger: 600V Type XHHW-2 (90° C).
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
2) Colors:
a) 120/240 V System
(1) Black: Line 1.
(2) Red: Line 2.
(3) Green: Ground.
(4) White: Neutral.
b) 208Y / 120 V System:
(1) Black: Phase A.
(2) Red: Phase B.
(3) Blue: Phase C.
(4) Green: Ground.
(5) White: Neutral.
c) 480Y / 277 Volt System:
(1) Brown: Phase A.
(2) Orange: Phase B.
(3) Yellow: Phase C.
(4) Neutral: Gray.
(5) Ground: Green.
d) Conductors size No. 10 and smaller shall be colored full length.
Tagging or other methods for coding of conductors size No. 10 and
smaller not allowed.
e) For feeder conductors larger than No. 10 at pull boxes, gutters, and
panels, use taped band or color tag color-coded as specified above.
B. Instrumentation Cables:
1. Instrument cable shall be Type TC, and have the number of individually shielded
twisted pairs indicated on the Drawings and shall be insulated for not less than 600
volts. Unless otherwise indicated, conductor size shall be No. 16 AWG minimum.
Shielded, grounded instrumentation cable shall be used for all analog and low
voltage digital signals.
2. The jacket shall be flame retardant with 90 degrees C temperature rating. The
cable shield shall be a minimum of 2.3 mil aluminum or copper tape overlapped to
provide 100 percent coverage and a tinned copper drain wire.
3. The conductors shall be bare soft annealed copper, Class B, 7 strand minimum
concentric lay with 15 mils nominal thickness, nylon jacket, 4 mil nominal thickness,
90 degrees C temperature rating. One conductor within each pair shall be
numerically identified.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
4. Pairs shall be assembled with a nominal 2-inch lay and shall then be group
shielded with a minimum of 1.3 mil aluminum or copper tape overlapped to provide
100 percent coverage. All group shields shall be completely isolated from each
other.
C. Control Wires:
1. Copper with AWG sizes as shown or required:
a. Minimum size shall be No. 14 except where specified otherwise.
b. Conductors shall be stranded.
1) Insulation:
a) 600V type XHHW (75° C). All conductors run in underground conduits
shall be XHHW.
2. Control wires may be run in same conduits as instrumentation cables.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Conductors and cables shall be continuous from source to equipment.
2. Do not use direct burial cable.
3. Instrumentation and control wires shall be run in conduits separate from power
conduits.
B. 600 Voltage Conductors:
1. Install conductors in raceway except where specifically indicated otherwise. Run
conductors of different voltage systems in separate conduits. All raceways shall
include an equipment ground conductor.
2. Route circuits at own discretion, however, circuiting shall be as indicated or
required. Group circuit homeruns to panels as shown on Drawings. No other
groupings of circuits will be allowed.
3. Neutrals:
a. On three-phase, 4-wire systems: Do not use common neutral for more than
one three phase circuit.
b. On single-phase, 3-wire systems: Do not use common neutral for more than
one circuit per phase.
c. Run separate neutrals for each circuit where specifically noted on Drawings.
d. Where common neutral is run for two or three home run circuits, connect
phase conductors to breakers in panel which are attached to separate phase
legs so neutral conductors will carry only unbalanced current. Neutral shall be
sized at 200% of full load.
4. Pulling Conductors:
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
a. Do not pull conductors into conduit until raceway system is complete and
enclosures, cabinets, and boxes are free of foreign matter and moisture.
b. Install conductors in accordance with the manufacture’s requirements.
c. Use only listed non-hardening wire pulling lubricants.
5. Provide positive supports for conductors in vertical raceways at following spacing
minimum, unless shorter is recommended by manufacturer.
a. No. 18 to 1/0 100 feet.
b. No. 2/0 to 4/0 80 feet.
c. 250MCM to 350MCM 60 feet.
d. d. 350MCM to 500MCM 50 feet.
C. Feeder and branch circuits shall be isolated from each other, and from instrumentation
and control circuits. Instrumentation cables shall be installed in separate raceways
from other cables and wiring. This includes portions running through manholes.
Instrumentation cable shall be continuous between instruments or between field
devices and instrument enclosures. There shall be no intermediate splices or terminal
boards, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
D. Maintain electrical continuity of the shield when splicing twisted shielded pair
conductors. Drain wires shall be terminated inside enclosures at grounded terminal
blocks. Only one end of each instrument loop cable drain wire shall be grounded.
Ground drain wire of shielded conductors at one end only.
E. Terminate instrumentation and control wiring, including spare wires, at control panels
and motor control centers on terminal boards mounted inside the equipment.
1. CONTRACTOR shall supply terminal boards as required.
2. Do not field wire directly to devices.
F. Low Voltage Cables In Office Spaces (70 Volts or Less):
1. In inaccessible, concealed spaces, run cables in raceway. In accessible,
unfinished areas, cables may be run exposed without raceway.
2. Run exposed cables parallel to or at right angles to building structure lines. Do not
run exposed cables on floors or in such a way that they obstruct access to,
operation of, or servicing of equipment. Keep cables 6 inches minimum from hot
water pipes.
a. Support cables every 3 feet with permanent clips, straps, staples, or tie wraps
approved for application and which will not cause cables to be pinched or
deformed.
b. Securely attach clips and straps with nails or screws. Do not use wire or tape
to support cables.
3. Bundle only cables of same systems together.
END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES 26 05 22 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 05 22 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install wiring devices as required, and as shown on the Drawings.
Materials employed shall be as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product literature including manufacturer, model or part number, materials of
construction, size, ratings, and listings as a minimum.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NECA - Standard of Installation.
B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -Dimensional Requirements.
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell, Model HBL-1221, 1223, 1224 series.
2. Arrow Hart, Model 1991.
B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty Specification Grade AC only general-use snap
switch.
C. Body and Handle: Gray plastic with toggle handle.
D. Indicator Light: Lighted handle type switch red color handle.
E. Locator Light: Lighted handle type switch; red color handle.
F. Ratings:
1. Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC.
2. Current: 20 amperes.
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell, Model HBL 5362-SP.
2. Arrow Hart, Model 5362-CR.
B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty specification grade general use receptacle.
C. Device Body: Gray plastic.
D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
E. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.
WIRING DEVICES 26 05 22 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter
to meet regulatory requirements.
2.3 WALL PLATES
A. Decorative Cover Plate: Brushed stainless steel in electrical/control/blower rooms.
B. Process Room/Exterior Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device
cover. Lever type switch cover. Classified hazardous as required for process areas
per drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that outlet or device boxes are installed at proper height.
B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for
connection to wiring devices.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Install devices plumb and level.
C. Install switches with OFF position down.
D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.
E. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding
conductor.
F. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
H. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
I. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas,
above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor.
B. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above back-splash of counter.
D. Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor.
E. Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor.
WIRING DEVICES 26 05 22 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
F. Install telephone jack for side-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54
inches above finished floor.
G. Install telephone jack for forward-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at
48 inches above finished floor.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each wiring device for defects.
B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
F. Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 05 24 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 05 24 - EQUIPMENT WIRING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, appliances, and perform all operations in
connection with, and complete in strict accordance with, this section of specifications
and the applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract for
the following work:
A. This section includes wiring connections to equipment specified in other sections.
B. Electrical connections to equipment: Provide the materials and make the electrical
connections to all equipment having electrical requirements as indicated in the
architectural and/or mechanical section of the specifications and drawings.
C. Provide conduit, wiring, connect motors and other mechanical equipment and electrical
devices in other sections; also install, provide, support for, and connect starters, other
control devices, control panels, furnished for such motors and equipment; complete all
circuit leave in satisfactory operating conditions.
D. Provide control devices for equipment in addition to those furnished by the trades
providing such equipment; refer to schedules on electrical and mechanical drawings for
control devices to be furnished under scope of the electrical work.
E. Control devices and panels furnished by trades providing equipment will be delivered
to electrician at site of project; acknowledge acceptance in writing; assume
responsibility for particular installation before proceeding with installing and wiring
them. Follow each manufacturer's printed installation directions and wiring diagrams for
installing and making connections to his equipment and controls.
F. Consult contract drawings and specifications of trades providing equipment and
controls, for control wiring diagrams, also refer to their shop drawings in order to
become familiar with equipment type and operation of controls, their locations and
extent of work required for installing, wiring and connecting them.
G. Starters for all motors requiring same shall be furnished by electrical contractor.
1.2 APPLICABLE SECTIONS
The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, alternates, and
addenda, applicable drawings, and the specifications including but not limited to the
following:
A. Section 26 05 00 - Electrical General Requirements.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Section 01 50 00 - Quality Control:
B. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices.
C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements.
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Section 01 30 00 – Submittals: General.
EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 05 24 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
B. Section 26 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
C. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer's catalog information showing
dimensions, configurations, and construction.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and
manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.
B. Determine connection locations and requirements.
C. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of
equipment.
D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CORDS AND CAPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell.
2. Or equal.
B. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1.
C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for
equipment.
D. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SJO multi-conductor flexible cord with identified
equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
E. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch
circuit over-current protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energizing
3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid-tight flexible
conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for
temperatures encountered.
EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 05 24 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.
F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and
equipment connection boxes.
G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to
complete equipment wiring requirements.
H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete
equipment wiring requirements.
END OF SECTION
GROUNDING AND BONDING
01/2023
254.07.100
26 05 26 - 1
SECTION 26 05 26 – GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, appliances, and perform all operations in
connection with, and complete in strict accordance with, this section of specifications
and the applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract for
the following work:
1. Grounding electrodes and conductors.
2. Equipment grounding conductors.
1.2 APPLICABLE SECTIONS
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, alternates and Addenda,
applicable drawings and the technical specification including but not limited to the
following:
1. Section 26 05 00 - Electrical General Requirements.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association).
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4 GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Metal underground water pipe.
B. Metal frame of the building.
C. Concrete-encased electrode.
D. Rod electrode.
E. Plate electrode.
F. Active electrode.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms maximum.
1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Section 01 30 00 – Submittals: General.
B. Section 26 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
C. Product Data: Provide for grounding and bonding equipment.
D. All submittals shall include a list of all items being submitted by description,
manufacturer and catalog number.
GROUNDING AND BONDING
01/2023
254.07.100
26 05 26 - 2
1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
A. Section 26 05 05 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding
electrodes.
C. Certificate of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by the authority having
jurisdiction.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum 5 years documented experience.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROD ELECTRODES
A. Material: Copper Clad Steel.
B. Diameter: ¾ inch.
C. Length: 10 feet (3000 mm).
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. T&B
2. Burndy - Hi-Ground
3. ERICO® - Cadweld®
B. Material: Irreversible Crimp Style or Exothermic Weld.
2.3 WIRE
A. Material: Stranded copper, tinned.
B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size as indicated in the Drawings, or if modified or not
indicated, size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
GROUNDING AND BONDING
01/2023
254.07.100
26 05 26 - 3
A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod
electrodes.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrodes at locations indicated and in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified
resistance to ground.
B. Provide grounding electrode conductor (UFER) and connect to reinforcing steel in
foundation footing. Bond steel together.
C. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform inspections and tests listed in NFPA ATS, Section 7.13.
END OF SECTION
CONDUITS 26 05 30 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 05 30 - CONDUIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install conduits and raceway systems as required, and as shown on the
Drawings. Materials employed shall be as indicated on the Drawings and specified
herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product literature including manufacturer part number, model number, material,
size, and specifications. Material shall not be installed until the Engineer has reviewed
the submittal data.
B. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for review and acceptance showing routing, conduit
size, and number and size of wires in each conduit before installation of conduit and
any related work. Show proposed routing of conduits buried under floor slabs-on-
grade, conduit and rebar embedded in floor slabs, columns, etc. Identify conduit by
tag number of equipment served and by conduit schedule number.
C. Proposed location and details of construction for openings in slabs and walls for
conduit runs.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MANUFACTURERS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of conduits and raceway
systems of type and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than (3) years.
B. STANDARDS: Comply with applicable portions of the NEMA standards pertaining to
raceways. Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to
electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components which have been
UL listed and labeled. Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction of
raceway systems.
1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. GENERAL:
1. Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials shall be sized and derated for
ambient site conditions, but in no case less than an ambient temperature of 40
degrees C at an elevation ranging from seal level to 4,300 feet without exceeding
the manufacturer’s stated tolerances.
B. AREA CLASSIFICATIONS
1. For the purpose of delineating the basic electrical construction materials and
installation requirements for this project, areas of the project have been classified
on the contract drawings as defined below. Electrical work within these areas shall
conform to the requirements described below as well as the referenced code
requirements.
CONDUITS 26 05 30 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
a. General Purpose (NEMA 1): Areas requiring general purpose (NEMA 1)
construction are indoor areas typically architecturally finished, always dry, and
occupied by plant personnel.
b. Corrosive Process Areas (NEMA 4X): Areas requiring corrosion resistant
(NEMA 4X) construction. Corrosive process areas typically contain pumping or
piping systems and are subject to spills and washdown. Corrosive process
areas shall also include those areas containing corrosive chemicals.
c. Outdoor Areas (NEMA 3R): Areas outdoors require weather resistant (NEMA
3R) rating.
d. Hazardous Areas (NEMA 7): Unless otherwise indicated on the contract
drawings, areas requiring hazardous location (NEMA 7) construction are
classified as Class 1, Division 2 or Class1, Division 1 hazardous locations per
Articles 500 and 501 of the National Electrical Code. See classification
drawings.
e. Process Areas (NEMA 12): Areas requiring drip-proof (NEMA 12) construction
are indoor process and support system areas and are not typically subject to
spills, direct washdown, or corrosive chemicals under normal operating
conditions, but may experience occasional or unintended wetness.
C. CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS:
1. Construction materials required for each area classification are listed in table A
below. Refer to the individual specification section for each component for material
composition and installation practices.
Area Classification
Component NEMA 1 NEMA 3R1
Outdoor
NEMA 4X1
Indoor
Corrosive
NEMA 121
NEMA 7
Classified
Explosion
Proof/Process
Area
Conduit
(exposed)GRS RA
PGRS
RA
PGRS
RA
PGRS PGRS
Conduit
(concealed)4 EMT3 PGRS
GRS
RA GRS GRS
Flexible conduit5 LFS LFS LFN LFN Classified
Support systems Galvanized
Steel Aluminum Stainless
steel Aluminum Stainless
steel
CONDUITS 26 05 30 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
Fastening
hardware and
hanger rods
Cadmium
plated steel
Stainless
steel
Stainless
steel
Cadmium
plated
steel
Stainless
steel
Control
Stations2,6
Painted
Steel Non-Metallic Non-Metallic Painted
Steel Classified
Enclosures2,6 Painted
Steel Non-Metallic Non-Metallic Painted
Steel Classified
Receptacles2
Surface
Recessed
General
General WP8
WP8
WP8
N/A
WP8
WP8
Classified
N/A
Switches2
Surface
Recessed
General
General WP8
WP8
WP8
N/A
WP8
WP8
Classified
N/A
Notes:
1. Enclosures, device boxes, control stations and raceway systems shall be
mounted with ¼-inch (minimum) space between the electrical system and
supporting structure.
2. Conduit terminations to control stations, enclosures, and device boxes in
NEMA 3R, 4X, 7 and 12 areas shall be made through threaded hubs.
3. Rigid conduit concealed in framed walls, block walls and ceiling spaces shall
be electrical metallic tubing, type EMT.
4. Conduit ductbank or beneath slab on grade shall be rigid PVC-40 conduit,
without pullboxes, and with waterproof conduit splices beneath grade to limit
water penetration.
5. Flexible conduit shall be utilized for final connections to equipment.
6. Control station and enclosure sealing ratings shall meet or exceed the rating
designated by the area classification.
7. Exposed conduit systems in areas containing equipment handling Ferric
Chloride shall be PGRS.
8. Use gasketed lever type switches and up-in use red dot steel receptacle
covers.
Legend:
EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing
GRS Galvanized Rigid Steel
LFS Liquid Tight Flexible Steel
LFN Liquid Tight Flexible Non-Metallic
PGRS PVC Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
PVC4 PVC Schedule 40
CONDUITS 26 05 30 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
PVC8 PVC Schedule 80
RA Rigid Aluminum
WP Weatherproof – Use cast device boxes with threaded hubs
XP Explosion proof – Approved conduit systems per classification listing
N/A Non applicable
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. GENERAL: Provide conduit and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall
thicknesses) as indicated; with minimum trade size of 3/4".
B. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT):
1. Per UL "Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing" No. 797. Galvanized mild steel with
interior coat of enamel.
2. Fitting shall be steel, compression type. Cast type or indenter type fittings are not
acceptable.
3. Approved for interior locations of the Electrical Room.
C. GALVANIZED RIGID METAL CONDUIT (GRC): FS WW-C-0581 and ANSI C80.1.
1. Per USAS C80.1, zinc-coated by hot-dip galvanizing or sherardizing with additional
enamel or lacquer coating.
2. Couplings shall be threaded type of same material and finish as conduit.
Connectors shall be Myers hubs or equal of same material and finish as conduit.
3. Approved Locations: Interior where exposed, where not exposed to moisture or
corrosive atmosphere. Shall not be used in the pumping pit or the metering rooms.
D. POLY VINYL CHLORIDE PLASTIC PIPE (PVC), SCHEDULE 40, Based on Outside
Diameter:
1. PVC heavy wall (PVC-40) suitable for direct burial. 1” minimum size.
2. Fittings shall be of same material as conduit. Water-tight splices required to limit
water penetration. All elbows shall be PVC coated GRS
3. Approved for underground direct burial, May be used where buried in earth under
floor slabs.
4. Minimum depth of bury under slab shall be 18 inches or of sufficient depth to allow
for bending radius to rise out of the slab vertically. Shall have an exposed
grounding electrode conductor in each trench.
5. Not approved for above grade installation nor for embedding in concrete slabs.
CONDUITS 26 05 30 - 5
01/2023
254.07.100
E. PVC COATED GALVANIZED RIGID METAL CONDUIT (PGRC): NEMA RN 1.
1. Rigid galvanized conduit, prior to plastic coating, shall conform to ANSI Standard
C80.1, UL 6, and CSA Standard C22.2 #45.
2. Nominal thickness of exterior PVC coating shall be 40 mils. A two-part red
urethane coating of 2 mil thickness shall be applied to the interior of all conduits
and fittings.
3. All hollow conduit fittings which serve as part of the raceway system shall be
coated with exterior PVC coating and red interior urethane coating as described
above.
4. Coated conduit shall conform to NEMA Standard No. RN1-1989. Shall be "Plastic-
Bond Red" as manufactured by Robroy Industries, Inc.
a. Approved Locations: Shall be used in all locations where conduits are buried, in
contact with earth, and in wet and corrosive areas, and as noted on the
drawings. All buried conduit between VFDs and motors. All risers through
concrete floors, all embedded conduit, and all elbows of ductbanks
underground.
5. Taped GRC will not be permitted.
F. LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: UL 360.
1. Galvanized steel with an extruded liquidtight PVC cover that is moisture and oil-
proof, and UV resistant.
2. Fittings shall be liquidtight compression type, listed for grounding. Provide fittings
with external bonding jumper where required for bonding.
3. Approved for flexible connections to equipment subject to vibration such as motors,
fan, pumps, dry transformers, etc., 36-inch maximum, 18" minimum length for each
connection.
G. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: UL 1.
1. Galvanized steel.
2. Approved for flexible connections to equipment in unclassified areas of the
Administration Building.
H. RIDGED ALUMINUM CONDUIT:
Couplings shall be threaded type of same material and finish as conduit. Connectors
shall be Myers hubs or equal of same material and finish as conduit.
Approved Locations: Interior where exposed, on the exterior exposed to moisture or
corrosive atmosphere. Approved for above grade installation. May be used within the
process area of the plant.
I. CONDUIT BODIES:
1. Form 7 malleable iron with hot dip galvanized finish, PVC coated in wet or process
areas of plant.
2. Gasketed cast iron, zinc plated cover with stainless steel screws.
CONDUITS 26 05 30 - 6
01/2023
254.07.100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
A. General Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, wiring shall consist of insulated
conductors installed in conduits or raceways.
3.2 CONDUIT AND TUBING SYSTEMS
A. Conduit and tubing systems shall be installed as indicated. Conduit sizes are based
on the use of insulated, copper conductors. Minimum size of raceways shall be as
noted. Only metal conduits will be permitted when conduits are required for shielding
or other special purposes indicated, or when required by conformance to NFPA 70.
PVC coated rigid metal conduit will be used in damp, wet or corrosive locations and
the conduit or tubing system will be provided with the appropriate boxes, covers,
clamps, screws or other appropriate type of fittings. Any exposed threads or metal
shall be touched up with 3 coats of touch up material provided with conduit. Raceways
shall be kept 6" away from parallel runs of any mechanical piping. Raceways shall be
concealed where possible. Raceways crossing structural expansion joints shall be
provided with suitable expansion fittings and will provide continuity for grounding.
3.3 BELOW SLAB-ON-GRADE OR IN THE GROUND
A. All electrical wiring below slab-on-grade shall be protected by a conduit system.
Conduit passing through slabs-on-grade shall be PVC coated rigid metal conduit. PVC
conduits shall be installed below slab-on-grade or in the earth. All underground bends
over 22º and risers through concrete slab shall be PVC coated GRC.
3.4 INSTALLED IN SLABS INCLUDING SLABS ON GRADE
A. Conduit shall not be embedded in concrete slabs except as specifically detailed.
3.5 EXPOSED RACEWAYS
A. Exposed raceways shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural
members, or intersections of vertical planes and ceilings. Raceways under raised
floors and above ceilings shall be considered as exposed installations.
CONDUITS 26 05 30 - 7
01/2023
254.07.100
3.6 CHANGES IN DIRECTION OF RUNS
A. Changes in direction of runs shall be made with symmetrical bends or cast-metal
fittings. Field made bends and offsets shall be made with an approved hickey or
conduit bending machine. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be installed.
Trapped raceways in damp or wet locations shall be avoided where possible. Care
shall be taken to prevent the lodgment of plaster, dirt, or trash in raceways, boxes,
fittings and equipment during the course of construction. Clogged raceways shall be
entirely freed from obstructions or shall be replaced.
3.7 SUPPORTS
A. Metallic conduits and tubing shall be securely and rigidly fastened in place at intervals
of not more than 10' and within 3' of boxes, cabinets, enclosures, and fittings, with U-
channel support systems, one hole conduit straps with clamp backs, and conduit
hangers. All supports mounted in exterior, process, or exposed areas subject to
corrosive atmosphere shall be stainless steel. Supports in other areas shall be hot
dipped galvanized. C-clamps or beam clamps shall have strap or rod type retainers.
Rigid plastic conduits (if permitted as wiring method) shall be supported as indicated
above, except that they shall be supported at 3’-0” maximum on centers and as
indicated in the NEC (NFPA 70). Loads and supports shall be coordinated with
supporting structure to prevent damage or deformation to the structures, but no load
shall be applied to joist bridging.
B. Fastenings shall be by wood screws or screw-type nails to wood; by toggle bolts on
hollow masonry units; by expansion bolts on concrete or brick; by machine screws,
welded threaded, heat-treated or spring-steel-tension clamps on steel work. Nail-type
nylon anchors or threaded studs driven in by a power charge and provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in lieu of expansion bolts or machine screws.
Raceways or supports shall not be welded to steel structures. Holes cut to a depth of
more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to a depth of more than 3/4" in
concrete joints shall avoid cutting the main reinforcement bars. Holes not used shall
be filled. In partitions of light steel construction, sheet metal screws shall be used.
Conduits shall not be supported using wire or nylon ties.
C. Raceways shall be installed as a complete system and shall be independently
supported from the structure. Upper raceways shall not be supported of lower
raceways. Supporting means shall not be shared between electrical raceways and
mechanical piping or ducts and shall not be fastened to hung ceiling supports.
D. Support Installations:
1. U-channel supports generally are not detailed but must be adequate to support
combined weights of conduit and conductors.
2. Clamps: Galvanized malleable iron one-hole straps with clamp backs, beam
clamps or other approved device with necessary bolts, expansion shields.
Perforated metal straps shall not be used.
3. Adjustable U-channel Supports: Used to support horizontal runs only, use trapeze
hangers for parallel runs of conducts.
CONDUITS 26 05 30 - 8
01/2023
254.07.100
4. Surface mounted raceway bases shall be anchored to ceiling members or block
walls on 5'-0" centers maximum spacing and at all junction and device boxes and at
angle fittings. Anchors shall be: Expansion shields on concrete or solid masonry,
toggle bolts on hollow masonry units or on suspended ceilings.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS:
A. General:
1. All Conduit: In accordance with requirement of National Electrical Code and
applicable local codes.
2. Steel Conduit: In accordance with recommendations of American Iron and Steel
Institute "Design Manual on Steel Electrical Raceways," latest edition.
B. Electrical Continuity:
1. All metallic conduit systems shall be electrically continuous throughout.
C. Moisture:
1. All conduit systems shall be essentially moisture tight.
D. Alignment of Exposed Conduit:
1. Parallel with or at right angles to lines of structure.
E. Field Cuts and Threads:
1. Cuts shall be square, threads clean and sharp. Remove sharp or rough edges by
reaming burrs. Before couplings or fittings are attached, apply one coat of red lead
or zinc chromate to male threads of rigid steel conduit. Apply coat of red lead, zinc
chromate or special compound recommended by manufacturer of conduit where
conduit protective coating is damaged.
F. Bends:
1. Uniform, whether job-fabricated or made with standard fittings or boxes. Do not
dent or flatten conduit.
2. Exposed Conduit: Symmetrical insofar as practicable.
G. Location:
1. Routing: Generally shown in schematic fashion, unless dimensioned or noted to
contrary. Contractor shall determine actual routing as approved.
2. Conduit Not Shown: Contractor shall route as required to connect equipment as
specified.
3. Vertical Risers, Equipment and Device Locations: Approximately as shown.
Contractor shall coordinate installation of conduit, in locations indicated, with
structure and equipment.
4. Conduit in Relation to Steam or Hot Water Lines or Other Hot Surfaces: Locate
minimum of 6" away. If such separation is impracticable, protect from heat as
approved.
CONDUITS 26 05 30 - 9
01/2023
254.07.100
H. Buried Conduit:
1. Depth of Burial: Minimum of 24" below finished grade with warning tape 12" above
conduit.
I. Wall Penetrations: Required for passage of conduits installed by CONTRACTOR
through walls, or partitions.
1. Penetrations Through Exterior Building Walls: Cast in sleeve/Core drill wall and
provided conduit entrance seals as detailed. All penetrations shall be with rigid
steel conduit PVC coated within the plant process areas.
2. Openings Required Through Existing Partitions: Shall be provided at
CONTRACTOR's expense. Holes through masonry construction shall be cast/
drilled with suitable coring machine. Perform work neatly. Patches shall match
original material in composition and appearance.
3. Provide fire seals where a fire rated partition or wall is penetrated.
J. Expansion Fittings:
1. Install in all conduit runs crossing structural expansion joint or in straight runs 75
feet or more in length.
K. Conduit Ends:
1. Cap spare conduits.
2. Open Conduit Ends Terminating in Switchboards, Cabinets or Similar Locations
Where Exposed to Entrance of Foreign Material: Install insulating grounding
bushing. Plug space around cables with sealing compound.
3. Cap or plug conduit ends to prevent entrance of foreign material during
construction.
L. Conduit Connections:
1. Cabinets, Enclosures, and Boxes: Double lock nuts and insulating bushings for
rigid conduits in unclassified areas, NEMA 1. Hubs for rigid conduits in damp, wet,
exterior, or corrosive areas, NEMA 12, 3R, 4, 4X. Bushings, insulating type, bell
ends, or insulated throat fittings shall be installed on the ends of all conduits.
Grounding type fittings and bushings shall be utilized as required for bonding.
a. All hubs 3 piece gasketed.
2. Metallic Conduit Terminating in Non-Metallic Manholes or Pull Boxes: Insulated
grounding bushing with lay-in ground lugs.
3. Flexible conduit for connection to movable equipment shall be liquidtight, utilizing
listed liquidtight fittings.
M. Cleaning:
1. Clean and swab inside of conduits by mechanical means to remove foreign
materials and moisture before conductors are installed.
CONDUITS 26 05 30 - 10
01/2023
254.07.100
N. Spare Conduits:
1. Install nylon pull line for future installation of cables. Cap all conduits and mark
where end is located on Record Drawings with dimensions.
END OF SECTION
CONDUIT DUCTBANKS 26 05 32 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 05 32 - CONDUIT DUCTBANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install conduit ductbanks as required, and as shown on the Drawings.
Materials employed shall be as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. All
exterior conduit shall be buried underground and embedded in sand as detailed. No
splices are allowed underground due to high water table at the site.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product literature including manufacturer part number, model number, material,
size, and specifications. Material shall not be installed until the Engineer has reviewed
the submittal data.
B. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for review and acceptance showing routing, conduit
size, and number and size of wires in each conduit before installation of conduit and
any related work. Show proposed routing of conduits buried under floor slabs-on-
grade, conduit and rebar embedded in floor slabs, columns, etc. Identify conduit by tag
number of equipment served and by conduit schedule number.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of duct
system components of type and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than (3) years.
B. STANDARDS: Comply with applicable portions of the NEMA standards pertaining to
underground ducts. Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining
to electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components which have been
UL listed and labeled. Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction of
raceway systems.
1.4 APPLICABLE SECTIONS
A. Section 31 22 00 - Earthworks
B. Section 26 05 00 - Electrical General Requirements.
C. Section 26 05 19 – Conductors and Cables.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTS
A. Ducts shall be a single continuous length, round-bore, size as indicated, Nonmetallic
Conduit, PVC.
B. Duct elbows, bends, and off-sets shall be per the manufacturer’s requirements. Metal
conduits underground are not allowed. 90’s and offsets shall be PVC coated GRC
(tape not permitted.)
C. Splices shall be water-tight underground in order to minimize the entrance of water.
CONDUIT DUCTBANKS 26 05 32 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUIT BANKS
A. Each ductbank shall be completely encased in red concrete. Thickness of sand over,
under and around ductbank shall be not less than 3 inches as detailed. All ductbanks
shall include a grounding electrode conductor as detailed.
B. Unless noted otherwise, the top of the concrete envelope shall be not less than 2'-6"
below finished grade or paving.
C. Ducts shall be installed to provide a water-tight, continuous length duct. If required,
joints in duct shall be as per the manufacturer’s requirements, and staggered at least 6
inches.
D. Saddles shall be used for support as indicated on the drawings. Hold down anchors
shall be provided as indicated and required to prevent duct from floating on wet
concrete.
E. During construction, ends of ducts shall be plugged to prevent debris from entering into
ducts. Particular care shall be taken to keep ducts clean of concrete or any other
substance during the course of construction.
F. After each duct line has been completed, a mandrel not less than 12 inches long,
having a cross section approximately 1/2" less than the inside cross section of the duct,
shall be pulled through to clean out the duct of earth, sand or gravel.
G. Trenching, backfilling and surface repair shall be done in accordance with Division 2 of
these specifications.
H. Ductbanks shall be straight without bends or off-sets if at all possible.
I. Over each ductbank at approximately 12 inches below grade, provide a detectable
continuous red plastic warning tape to alert future excavators of the presence of the
ductbank.
J. Provide nylon pull line in all ducts.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 05 34 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 05 34 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install electrical boxes and electrical fittings as required, and as shown on
the Drawings. Materials employed shall be as indicated on the specified herein.
B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following:
1. Outlet boxes
2. Junction boxes
3. Pull boxes
4. Conduit bodies
5. Bushings
6. Locknuts and hubs
7. Knockout closures
8. Miscellaneous boxes and fittings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product literature including manufacturer, model or part number, materials of
construction, size, ratings, and listings as a minimum.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical boxes and
fittings.
B. Comply with ANSI C 134.1 (NEMA Standards Pub No. OS 1) as applicable to sheet-
steel outlet boxes, device boxed, covers and box supports. Provide electrical boxes
and fittings, which have been UL listed and labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATED MATERIALS
A. Flush Interior Outlet or Device Boxes: Provide one piece, galvanized flat rolled sheet
steel interior wiring boxes of types, shapes and sizes, including box depths, to suit
each respective location and installation; construct with stamped knockouts in back
and sides, and with threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing
box covers and wiring devices; minimum depth 1-1/2". Provide minimum 2-1/8" depth
for boxes with three or more conduit entries.
B. Interior Outlet or Device Box Accessories: Provide box accessories as required for
each installation, including mounting brackets, hangers, extension or plaster rings,
fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting boxes, which are
compatible with boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of individual wiring
applications.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 05 34 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
C. Exposed Outlet or Device Boxes: Provide corrosion- resistant cast-metal type FD
weatherproof wiring boxes of types, shapes and sizes (including depth) required, with
integral threaded conduit hubs, face plates with spring-hinged waterproof caps suitable
configured for each application, with face plate gaskets and corrosion-resistant
fasteners.
D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide junction and pull boxes with covers of types, shapes
and sizes to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and
equipped with stainless hardware. Provide underground concrete junction boxes as
required or indicated on the Drawings. Provide cast steel boxes with threaded hubs
and gasketed cover as required or indicated on the Drawings.
E. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast-metal Form 7 conduit bodies of types,
shapes and sizes to suit respective locations and installation, construct with threaded-
conduit-entrance ends, removable covers, and corrosion-resistant screws.
F. Bushings, Knockout Closures, Locknuts, and Hubs: Provide corrosion-resistant
punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and hubs, and conduit bushings
and offset connectors of types, and sizes to suit respective uses and installation.
G. All boxes, fittings, and conduit bodies shall be PVC coated wherever PVC coated
conduits are required elsewhere in this specification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS:
A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with
manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's
"Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to
ensure that products fulfill requirements.
B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway
installation work.
C. Provide cover plates for all boxes. See Section 26 05 22, Wiring Devices.
D. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or
moisture.
E. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been
removed.
F. Install boxes and conduit bodies to ensure ready accessibility of electrical wiring.
Install recessed boxes with face of box or ring flush with adjacent surface.
G. Fasten boxes rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly
embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. Use bar hangers for stud construction.
Use of nails for securing boxes is prohibited. Set boxes on opposite sides of common
wall with minimum 10" of conduit between them.
H. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL MOTORS 26 05 74 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 05 74 - ELECTRICAL MOTORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section specifies alternating current induction motors 300 horsepower and less to be
provided with the driven equipment. This section refers to motors by the enclosure type as
defined in NEMA MG 1. Compliance by the supplier to the requirement of the specification
does not relieve them of responsibility of furnishing motors and motor accessories that are
suitable for the specified service conditions.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General
1. Motors shall be built in accordance with UL 1004, NEMA Standard MG 1, and
to the requirements specified herein.
B. References
1. This section references the following documents. They are a part of this section as
specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and
those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title
FORM A-1 1 Motor Data Sheet
IEEE 85 Test Procedure for Airborne Sound Measurements on
Rotating Machinery
NEMA ICS 6 Enclosure for Industrial Controls and Systems
NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators
UL 1004 Motors, Electric
NEC National Electric Code, Latest Edition
1.3 SUBMITTAL DATA
A. Complete motor data shall be submitted with the driven machinery submittals. Motor data
shall include.
1. Machine tag and loop number, as identified in the P&IDs, and specifications
number of driven machine.
2. Motor manufacturer.
3. Motor Type or model and dimension drawing.
4. Nominal horsepower at installed altitude, 4,800’.
5. Nominal efficiency.
6. NEMA design.
7. Frame size.
8. Enclosure.
9. Winding insulation class and treatment, Class H.
10. Rated ambient temperature.
11. Service factor.
12. Voltage, phase, and frequency rating.
13. Full load current at rated horsepower for application voltage.
14. Starting code letter, or locked rotor KVA, or current.
15. Special winding configuration such as part winding, star-delta.
16. Rated full load speed.
17. Power factor at full load.
18. Power and connection requirements of motor winding heaters.
19. Temperature protective devise ratings and connection information.
20. Recommended maximum size power factor correction capacitor.
19013 March 2021
ELECTRICAL MOTORS 26 05 74 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
21. Motor insulation dielectric withstand rating.
22. If driven from a variable frequency drive:
a. Certification that the motor meets the requirements of NEMA MG-1 1993 part 31.
b. Certification that the motor and mechanical drive are matched in design and
suitable for use together for the specific installation and driven equipment
conditions.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall complete the motor data sheet at the end of this Section for the
motor supplied, and submit the completed form to the OWNER for review, as part of the
submittal package for each piece of equipment.
C. Motor insulation resistance test report.
1.4 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions
1. All motors are subject to hose directed spray and up to a temperature 40°C.
Motors shall be totally enclosed unless otherwise specified and shall be rated
for service at elevation 4,800 feet above mean sea level. Motors shall meet
the criteria as specified in NEMA MG 1 for usual environmental conditions.
B. Operating Conditions
1. Motors shall be selected for the operating conditions of the driven equipment in
accordance with NEMA MG 1. Motors shall be subject to the vibration performance
limits as follows:
a. The rotor shall be dynamically balanced according to NEMA Standards. Balance
limits shall be 1/2 the limits shown on NEMA MG 1-12.06. The depositing of metal
on the rotor (solder, weld, etc.) to achieve balance is not acceptable. Pavement
metal is to be removed to achieve a balance only without effecting the structural
strength of the rotor. Chiseling or sawing parent metal is prohibited. The addition of
weights is acceptable.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors shall be continuous duty of the type generally described as having normal starting
torque with low current, NEMA design “B”.
B. Starting current for fully loaded motors shall be as defined by NEMA design “B”.
C. Motors shall be sized for operation at their respective horsepower rating, never at their
service factor rating. All motors shall be rated with a service factor of at least 1.15.
D. The motor must develop sufficient locked rotor torque to provide breakaway of the load and
to provide adequate torque during the acceleration period to overcome the load and inertial
forces.
E. Acceleration time must be short enough to be within the thermal limits of the motor, but not so
short that it over stresses the driven equipment.
F. Overhung load requirements such as the number and pitch radius of the motor-shaft-
mounted pulley sprocket, etc., and the distance from the motor front bearing to the center of
the pulley, sprocket, etc. must be determined and included in the purchase order.
19013 March 2021
ELECTRICAL MOTORS 26 05 74 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
G. Motors are to be manufactured with multiple dips of Class H varnish in order to accommodate
the application of adjustable speed drive systems voltage and severe duty environments.
H. All equipment manufacturers shall provide a totally enclosed fan cooled motor, corrosion
resistant and rated for severe, continuous duty operation.
I. Motors shall operate successfully at rated load under the various combinations of voltage and
frequency variations specified in section 12.44 of NEMA MG1-1998.
J. Motors shall operate successfully under running conditions at rated load and frequency when
the voltage unbalance at the motors terminals does not exceed 1%.
K. Motor balance and vibration shall meet NEMA standards as defined in MG1-1998 part 7. The
motor shall be dynamically balanced to meet 0.08 in/s maximum velocity at the bearing
housing when measured in the horizontal, vertical and axial plane (0.12 in/s on 2-pole motors
frame 280 and above).
L. Unless otherwise specified in the equipment description, the motor rotation shall be possible
in either direction – application permitting. See motor data sheet.
1.6 MOTOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Guiding requirements
1. Motor shall have class H insulation and be Inverter duty rated.
2. Motor shall have grounding provisions on the shaft and the terminal box with
an Inpre-MGS or equal for shaft grounding protection and IP55 ingress
protection. The bearings shall also be insulated with shaft grounding device.
3. Motor shall have a no reversing ratchet device.
4. The pump contractor shall coordinate with the motor manufacture such that
all required mounting plates, jackscrews, shims, anchor bolts, lifting lugs,
grouting, coatings and all other items necessary for the frame installation are
provided.
5. Provide a steady bushing to eliminate vibration.
6. Provide self-cooled, oil-ring type lubrication system. Bearing housing shall be
equipped with constant level sight-feed oilers.
7. Provide low power density, 120-volt 60 HZ single phase space heater with
leads brought out to a separate terminal box.
8. The guaranteed motor efficiency at rated voltage and frequency shall not be
less than 95.5 percent at full load, 95.5 at ¾ load, and 94.8 percent at ½ load.
Al expected efficiencies shall be determined in accordance with IEEE 112,
Method F.
B. Mechanical and Electrical Features:
1. All motors ¼ Hp through 2 Hp may have either NEMA C-Face or floor
mounted feet, or both. Motors above 2 Hp shall be foot mounted in
preference to any other method. Mounting requirements are provided in the
horsepower descriptive section of the documents.
2. All motors controlled by a variable speed drives shall be equipped with motor
shaft ground rings.
19013 March 2021
ELECTRICAL MOTORS 26 05 74 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
3. Long shaft motors are preferred over short shaft for close-coupled
applications. Shafts shall have Impro seal supplied on both bearings. Motor
shaft diameter shall comply with NEMA standard size for the motor frame
size specified. Reduced, custom, or special shaft diameter motors are not
acceptable unless specifically required by the application and approved, in
writing, by project engineer. Notification of such variance must be submitted
with bid proposals.
4. Motor speeds are dictated in the equipment descriptive documents included
with this specification.
5. The following NEMA frame size shall be provided unless specifically
approved by the project engineer (1800 RPM):
a. 125 Hp through 300 Hp on a 445TS to 5010 US
6. Stator frame, end brackets, fan cover and conduit box shall be manufactured
of high 25 grade cast iron. All frames shall be designed and constructed such
that on direct-coupled applications the motor can be mounted and aligned
without distortion of the feet, and sufficient strength to withstand overhung
loads for belt drive applications. The motor shall be designed with the
capabilities for mounting the drive side vertically up or down as required by
the application.
7. Ventilating fans shall be non-sparking bronze alloy or non-conductive nylon
66 materials. The ventilation shall be such that cool air is drawn in and hot air
expelled to avoid mixing with the incoming air.
8. All motors 1 Hp to 300 Hp shall be rated and wired as 3 phase, 60 Hertz 460
volt operation. Exceptions to this requirement must be reviewed and
authorized by the owner. If wired for 230/460 volt, a wiring diagram shall be
illustrated on the inside of the conduit box or name plate.
9. Moisture inhibiting coating shall protect the rotor and stator. These coatings
must match or exceed the anticipated full load thermal conditions, vibration,
and shock electrical insulation ratings of the motor.
10. All cast iron motor parts shall be primed and painted with epoxy or polyester
resin enamel or similar coatings for additional corrosion and moisture
protection.
11. Motor stator and rotor steel shall be low-loss C-5 electrical grade silicon steel
with interlamination insulation capable of withstanding a minimum of 1000 oF
burnout. Stator random windings shall be copper and shall be insulated with
class H insulation.
12. Bearings shall be either 300 series ball bearings or cylindrical roller bearings
on the drive end and opposite drive end. Bearings shall be selected to
provide a minimum L-10 life of 50,000 hours with an external load per NEMA
MG 1-14 and a L-10 life of 100,000 hours in direct coupled applications.
Bearing type shall be defined on the motor data sheet.
13. Bearings shall have a maximum of 45oC rise at rated horsepower (50 oC for
2-pole motors).
14. Bearings on frames 143T through 5010UZ shall be regreaseable with
regreasing instructions labeled on the motors. The bearings found in frames
213T and larger shall have open bearings with cast iron inner bearing caps. If
motor is to be operated by a variable frequency drive the manufacturer shall
provide insulated bearings on both end of direct coupled motors. See motor
data sheets for VFD motors.
15. The motor bearing housing shall have an extended automatic grease relief
valve to effectively prevent bearings from being over-lubricated.
16. The motor nameplate shall have raised letters stamped on 304 stainless steel
and be fastened to the motor frame with four stainless steel drive pins.
17. All motor hardware shall be English type and grade 5 zinc-dichromate plated.
19013 March 2021
ELECTRICAL MOTORS 26 05 74 - 5
01/2023
254.07.100
18. The winding insulation system shall be Class H or better, non-hygroscopic,
chemical, corrosion, fungus and humidity resistant. The complete insulation
system will have a minimum resistance of 1.5 megohms after 168 hours of
testing in a humidity chamber maintained at 100% relative humidity and 40º C
ambient with both end bells removed. Motors used in adjustable speed drive
applications shall have an insulation rating of 1860 vac peak with a 0.1 micro
second rise time.
19. Motor leads shall be stranded copper, permanently identified on both ends
and are brought out into the motor terminal box through a neoprene lead-
positioning gasket with compression type terminal lugs. Each of the three
leads shall be brought through a single hole into the conduit and termination
box.
20. The conduit box shall be cast iron and threaded for rigid conduit connection.
Conduit box shall be located at the F1 position of the motor unless otherwise
noted on the motor data sheet. Conduit box volumes shall exceed the NEMA
minimum standards by a minimum of 25% and boxes shall be able to rotate
90-degree increments. A bronze ground lug shall be provided in the conduit
box.
21. A lifting eyebolt shall be provided for motor lifting (180 frame and larger).
Eyebolt holes shall be threaded blind holes.
22. Motors shall be suitable for field configuration to any ceiling, wall, or floor
mounting by rotating conduit box, end shield, and rotor – per application
requirements (143T through 365T).
23. All motors shall meet the “NEMA Premium” efficiency requirements as outline
by NEMA Table 12.12. Any deviation from this specification shall be received
in writing from the project engineer. WP1 Rated.
24. Upper thrust bearing shall be rated for the existing pump and it’s down thrust.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. U.S. Motors Corporation
2. Toshiba.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall assign to the designated equipment supplier the responsibility to
select and supply suitable electric motors for the equipment. The choice of motor
manufacturer shall be subject to review and acceptance by the OWNER. Such review will
consider future availability of replacement parts and compatibility with driven equipment.
2.2 MOTORS 1/2 HORSEPOWER THROUGH 300 HORSEPOWER:
A. General
1. The nominal motor horsepower shall be adequate for the driven machine
without infringement upon the motor service factor at the installed altitude and
specified ambient conditions.
2. The motor horsepower shall be not more than the estimated maximum
specified for each driven machine.
19013 March 2021
ELECTRICAL MOTORS 26 05 74 - 6
01/2023
254.07.100
a. If the estimated maximum horsepower specified is not adequate to satisfy the
foregoing restriction or any other requirements of these specifications, the motor
with the next larger horsepower shall be supplied at no additional cost to the
OWNER.
3. Some requirements of the Section may be excluded for motors which are part
of valve operators, submersible pumps, or motors which are an integral part
of standard manufactured equipment (i.e., non-NEMA mounting, common
shaft with driven element), to the extent that such variation reflects a
necessary condition of motor service or a requirement of the specified driven
equipment.
4. Motor Voltage Ratings: The CONTRACTOR is required to review the
Electrical Drawings and Specifications and to furnish all motors with voltage
and phase as shown on the electrical drawings.
a. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER of any discrepancy between any
motor sizes indicated by the Drawings and specified elsewhere, and any
requirements of the driven equipment and the availability of motors from the
manufacturers listed above.
5. Special Requirements: The CONTRACTOR shall refer to individual
equipment specifications and the Drawings for special requirements such as
motor part winding start, multi-speed windings, protective devices, auxiliary
devices, etc.
B. Vertical Motors
1. Comply with the requirements for three phase motors except where the following
requirements are more stringent.
1. Enclosure:
a. All vertical motors installed outdoors shall have Weather Protected Type II (WPII)
enclosures.
b. All vertical motors installed indoors shall have Weather Protected Type I (WP I)
enclosures.
2. All vertical motors shall have a Service Factor of 1.15.
3. Motor Bearings:
a. Antifriction, oil lubricated, and filled initially with oil suitable for ambient
temperatures to 40º C.
1) Suitable for intended application and have AFBMA B-10 rating life of 100,000 hours
or more.
2) Bearing mounting shall be designed with easily accessible oil supply, flush, drain,
oil level gauge, and relief fittings using extension tubes where necessary.
b. Furnished with re-lubricate ball, spherical, roller, or plate type thrust bearings.
Lubrication shall be per manufacturer’s recommendation for smooth operation and
long life of the bearings.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Motor Enclosures:
1. Open Drip Proof:
a. Stamped steel conduit boxes.
b. 1.15 service factor at 40º C ambient.
2. Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled:
a. Cast iron conduit box.
b. 1.15 service factor at 40º C ambient
c. Tapped drain holes with Type 316 stainless steel plugs for frames 286T and
smaller.
d. Automatic breather and drain devices for frames 324T and larger.
19013 March 2021
ELECTRICAL MOTORS 26 05 74 - 7
01/2023
254.07.100
e. Upgraded insulation by minimum of 3 dips and bakes and sealer coat of epoxy or
silicone.
3. Severe Duty:
a. Corrosion resistant type conforming to motors designated by manufacturer as:
1) Chemical Duty.
2) Mill and Chemical.
3) Custom Sever Duty.
4) Or similar applicable manufacturer’s quality designation.
b. 1.15 service factor at 40º C ambient.
c. Tapped drain holes with Type 316 stainless steel plugs for frames 286T and
smaller.
d. Automatic breather and drain devices for frames 324T and larger.
e. 2 cycles of vacuum epoxy impregnation of the motor windings.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Conduit Boxes
1. Boxes on motors other than open drip-proof shall be gasketed.
2. Boxes shall be furnished with the size and number of openings as required
for the conduits indicated on the Drawings.
3. Boxes shall be rotatable through 360 degrees in 90 degree increments.
4. Shall be furnished with an integral equipment ground lug installed and sized
as required for the conductors indicated on the Drawings.
B. Lifting Devices: All motors weighing 265 lb (120 Kg) or more shall have suitable lifting devices
for installation and removal.
C. Space Heaters:
1. Provide low power density 120VAC 60Hz single phase space heater with
leads brought out to a separate terminal box.
2. Bring power leads for heaters into conduit box.
D. Nameplate:
1. All motors shall be fitted with a permanent, stainless steel nameplate indelibly stamped
or engraved with:
a. NEMA Standard motor data.
b. Bearing description and lubrication instructions.
c. Insulation class.
d. Ambient temperature.
e. Altitude rating.
f. Power factor at full load.
2.5 CURRENT BALANCE
A. Current unbalance on polyphase motors shall not exceed the values tabulated below when
motor is operating at any load within its service factor rating and is fed by a balanced voltage
system:
1. Under 5 horsepower: 25 percent
2. 5 horsepower and above: 10 percent
2.6 OVER-TEMPERATURE PROTECTION
A. Requirements
19013 March 2021
ELECTRICAL MOTORS 26 05 74 - 8
01/2023
254.07.100
1. Over temperature protection for motors rated 200 horsepower or greater shall
consist of a minimum of six 100 OHM Platinum RTD’s embedded in the motor
windings, and one 100 OHM for each bearing. Wiring to an external junction
box shall be provided. Thermal switch approved for this motor.
2.7 SHAFT CURRENT PROTECTION
A. All motors coupled with a variable frequency drive (VFD) shall include a shaft grounding
system. Acceptable systems include AEGIS.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING
A. Each motor shall be given a routine commercial test as required by NEMA MG 1 to
demonstrate that it is free from electrical or mechanical defects. Copies of routine test reports
shall be submitted in the format specified by NEMA.
END OF SECTION
CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 13 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 09 13 - CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section sets forth the general specification and requirements for the control
devices that shall be provided with control panels, motor starters, and other
enclosures in order to assemble a complete and operable control, alarm, or
indicating system.
B. The SUPPLIER shall coordinate the installation of items specified herein as required
to ensure the complete and proper interfacing of all the components and systems.
1.2 APPLICABLE SECTIONS
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions,
alternates and Addenda, applicable drawings and the technical specification herein
shall apply to work under this Section.
1.3 APPLICABLE REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250 (1985; Incl. Rev. I and 2; ICS-6) Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment
NEMA ICS 1 (1988) General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, Inc. (UL)
UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide complete submittal information for the control devices in accordance with
Section 26 05 00.
B. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Submit certified dimensional drawings and manufacturer’s data sheets for each
size and type of device specified herein to be utilized. Data sheets are to be
highlighted to define the specific materials of construction and features specified
herein along with detailed manufacturer’s model number.
2. Submit instruction bulletins for each type of control device. The instruction
bulletins shall include installation instructions, wiring diagrams, power
requirements, maintenance instructions, calibration instructions, and any other
details of a specialized nature to the devices furnished.
C. Additional submittal requirements:
1. Circuit Breakers and/or fuses:
CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 13 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
a. Provide a complete schedule showing load and rating of circuit breakers
and/or fuses.
2. Control power transformers and/or power supplies:
a. Provide complete sizing calculations in accordance with the requirements
identified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Named manufacturers have been indicated for various specified devices to establish
the standard of quality and performance of the equipment to be supplied.
B. Devices of a given type shall be of the same model, class, or rating, have the same
general appearance, and be from the same manufacturer.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Analog measurements and control signals shall:
1. Be electrical as indicated herein, and shall vary in direct linear proportion to the
measured variable, except as noted.
2. Electrical signals outside control panels shall be 4 to 20 mA DC, except as noted.
3. Signals within enclosures may be 1 to 5 VDC, or 0-10 VDC.
4. Dropping resistors shall be installed at all field side terminations in the control
panels to ensure loop integrity.
B. Control panels provided with integral power supplies and control power transformers
shall be configured to match the voltage and current requirements of the loads.
C. Each 120 VAC control loop or instrument shall have an individual circuit breaker or
fuse within its respective control panel and clearly identified for function.
D. Each PLC output shall have its own individual fuse external of the I/O card, with
blown fused indication.
1. Size external fuse to open before any I/O card mounted fuses.
E. Signal isolators, Signal Converters, and Power Supplies:
1. Signal isolators shall be furnished and installed in each measurement and control
loop, wherever required:
a. To ensure adjacent component impedance match.
b. Where feedback paths may be generated.
c. To maintain loop integrity when the removal of a component of a loop is
required.
2. Signal converters shall be included where required to resolve any signal level or
signal type incompatibilities.
3. Power supplies shall be included, as required by the device manufacturers’ load
characteristics, to ensure sufficient power to each loop component.
2.3 CONTROL DEVICES
CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 13 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
A. Signal Isolators and Converters.
1. Signal isolators shall have complete isolation of input, output and power input.
a. Signal input shall be 4-20 mA into 50 ohms, maximum.
b. Signal output shall be 4-20 mA into 1000 ohms, minimum.
c. Power input shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz or 24 VDC.
d. Span and zero shall be adjustable.
e. Accuracy shall be ±1 percent of span.
f. Units shall be surface or DIN rail mounted.
2. Signal Converters
a. Signal inputs of 1-5 V, 0-10 V, ect.
b. Signal output shall be 4-20 mA into 1000 ohms, minimum.
c. Power input shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz or 24 VDC.
d. Span and zero shall be adjustable.
e. Accuracy shall be ±1 percent of span.
f. Units shall be surface or DIN rail mounted.
3. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Accromag.
b. AGM Electronics Model TA-4000.
c. Or approved equal.
B. Relays
1. General Purpose Relays:
a. General purpose relays shall be plug-in type.
b. Contacts rated 10 amperes at 120 volts AC.
c. With LED indication when engergized.
d. Quantity and type of contacts shall be as shown on the Plans or as needed
for system compatibility.
e. Each relay shall be enclosed in a clear plastic heat and shock resistance dust
cover.
f. Sockets for relays shall have screw type terminals.
g. Provide transient surge protection across the coil of each relay.
h. Relays shall be:
1) Potter and Brumfield Type KRP or KUP.
2) IDEC.
3) Square D Type K.
4) Allen Bradley.
CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 13 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
5) Or approved equal.
2. Slave and Interposing Relays:
a. Additional slave relays shall be provided when the number or type of contacts
shown exceeds the contact capacity of the specified relays and timers.
b. Additional relays shall be provided when higher contact rating is required in
order to interface with starter circuits or other equipment.
c. Shall be provided to compensate for voltage drop due to long wire runs.
d. The slave and interposing relays shall be as the general purpose relays.
e. Provide transient surge protection across the coil of each relay.
3. Time Delay Relays
a. Time delay relays shall be on-delay or off-delay type.
b. Contacts shall be rated 10-amperes at 120 VAC.
c. Units shall be including adjustable dial with graduated scale covering the time
range in each case.
d. Provide transient surge protection across the coil of each relay.
e. As manufactured by Agastat, Series 7000 or equivalent Omron.
C. Manual Operators and Interface Devices - Unclassified Areas
1. General Requirements
a. NEMA Type 13 Oil tight.
b. With synthetic rubber gasket.
c. Heavy duty.
d. Industrial grade full size 1 – 13/64” diameter.
2. Pushbutton Units:
a. Contacts rated:
1) NEMA A600.
2) 600 VAC maximum.
b. Color Code:
1) Red - Stop
2) Green - Start
3) Orange - Open
4) Blue - Closed
c. As manufactured by:
1) Allen Bradley 800T.
2) Square D Type K.
CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 13 - 5
01/2023
254.07.100
3) Cutler-Hammer 10250T Series.
d. Furnish one spare normally open and normally closed contact with each
switch.
3. Selector Switches:
a. Contacts rated:
1) NEMA A600.
2) 600 VAC maximum.
b. As manufactured by:
1) Allen Bradley 800T.
2) Square D Type K.
3) Cutler-Hammer 10250T Series.
c. Furnish one spare normally open and normally closed contact with each
switch.
4. Pilot Lights:
a. Transformer type LED pilot lights.
b. 120 VAC.
c. Push to Test type.
d. As manufactured by:
1) Allen Bradley.
2) Square D Type K.
3) Cutler-Hammer 10250T Series.
E. Terminal Blocks
1. Din rail mounted.
2. Terminal to be of the tubular screw type with pressure plate to minimize the
possibility of breaking wire strands during tightening.
3. Recessed terminal hardware to minimize the possibility of contact with current
carrying parts.
4. Molded of high dielectric material.
5. Minimum rating 600 VAC, 30 amp.
6. External connections to and from all control panel must be via terminal blocks,
including power, control, alarm, instrumentation, monitoring, and solenoid
circuits.
7. Individual terminals and terminal blocks shall be marked in a permanent manner
with printed identification.
8. As manufactured by:
a. Entrelec M 4/6
b. Phoenix Contact UK 5 N
CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 13 - 6
01/2023
254.07.100
c. Or approved equal
F. Conductors within Control Panels
1. Single conductors shall be as follows:
a. Material: Soft annealed coated copper per ASTMB33 or B189.
b. Standard: ICEA S-19-81.
c. Stranded Wire - Class B.
d. Insulation and Coverings:
1) Thickness: Per ICEA.
2) Material:
a) No. 8 and Smaller: Type XHHW single conductor, copper power
cable, moisture resistant, flame retardant thermoplastic insulation, 600
volt, 75 °C.
b) No. 6 and larger: Type XHHW-2 single conductor, copper power
cable, heat and moisture resistant, flame retardant, thermoplastic
insulation, 600 volt, 75°C.
e. No. 14 AWG minimum, shall be used for field control circuits, unless
otherwise noted.
f. No. 16 AWG minimum, Type MTW shall be used for all PLC I/O connections
within the panel; between I/O device and field wiring terminal blocks.
2. Instrumentation Cable (Shielded Twisted Pair STP):
a. Minimum conductor size 16 AWG.
b. Stranded and tinned copper conductors.
c. Polyethylene conductor insulated.
d. Foil aluminum-polyester shield – 100% shielding.
e. Minimum 18 AWG, stranded, tinned, copper drain wire.
f. PVC outer jacket.
g. UL Listed, TC rated.
h. 600 volt insulation level.
G. Wire markers:
1. Conductors within the control panel are to be permanently marked with wire
numbers at each end.
2. Wire numbers are to correspond to the wire numbers indicated on the submittal
drawings and are to correspond to the terminal block number to which they are
attached in the control panel.
3. Markers shall be heat shrinkable tubing, imprinted type wire markers.
4. Manufacturers:
a. 3M.
CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 13 - 7
01/2023
254.07.100
b. Thomas & Betts.
c. Panduit.
H. Nameplates:
1. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black
background.
2. Control components within the control panel shall have nameplates secured with
stainless steel screws. Nameplates cannot be attached to the covers of the
panel wireways.
3. The enclosure and components on the front cover or interior swing out panels
shall be identified by nameplates.
a. Use standard manufacturer engraved nameplates for all pushbuttons, and
selector switches only if color matches that specified for engraved
nameplates. If not, then furnish nameplates to match colors as specified
herein.
b. Use engraved plastic laminated nameplates for all other devices, displays,
keypads, and annunciator LED’s.
c. For NEMA 12, 4, and 4X enclosures, use an epoxy based adhesive to affix
nameplates to enclosure cover.
4. A nameplate shall be provided for each signal transducer, signal converter,
signal isolator, power supply, relay, terminal strips, and the like mounted inside
the panel. The nameplate nomenclature shall match the component names
identified in the submittal drawings.
5. Lettering, styles, abbreviations and sizes shall be in conformance with ISA-RP-
60.6 (1984) with an intended viewing distance of 3 to 6 feet for external
nameplates and 1 to 2 feet for internal nameplates.
I. Control Circuit Breakers:
1. Each 120 VAC control circuit, instrument, or loop shall be powered from an
individual control circuit breaker.
2. Din rail mounted using the same DIN rail as used for the terminal blocks.
3. Manual ON-OFF Switch.
4. Rated 240 VAC.
5. Rated 2000 AIC.
6. Current ratings as needed load served.
7. Provide complete nameplate identifying each circuit.
8. As manufactured by:
a. ABB
b. Phoenix Contact
c. Entrelec
d. Square D
CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 13 - 8
01/2023
254.07.100
J. Fused Terminals:
1. Isolate all PLC Digital Outputs with fuses.
2. Isolate all PLC Digital Inputs with fuses.
3. Isolate all PLC Analog Inputs and Outputs with fuses.
4. Coordinate fuse size to be as recommended by the manufacturers. For PLCs,
the fuse size to be below internal output protection of the PLC output module.
5. Fuses to be terminal block mounted.
6. Furnish nameplate identifying each fused terminal.
7. As manufactured by:
a. Entrelec
b. Phoenix Contact
c. Or approved equal
K. Field / Remote Connections:
1. Field/remote connections shall be made at terminal blocks within the panel.
2. Furnish an individual terminal block space for each wire.
a. Two wires on one terminal block will not be allowed.
3. Furnish an empty wire channel on the backpanel adjacent to the field/remote
terminal block strip to be used to route the field/remote wires to the connection
terminal blocks.
4. Provide spare terminal blocks as specified herein.
L. Control Voltages:
1. Control voltage shall be supplied via control circuit breakers in the panel.
2. Control power shall be sourced from the 120V power supplied to the panel,
unless otherwise noted in the Plans.
3. AC control voltages other than that supplied shall be transformed via a control
power transformer within the panel. DC control voltages shall be supplied by AC
to DC power supplies, specified herein.
M. Control Power Transformers:
1. Low impedance type.
2. The control power transformers shall have fused over current protection on both
the primary and secondary sides of the transformer.
3. Use actual coil power factors in calculating the VA rating of the transformer. Use
a power factor of 35% if power factor of coils is unavailable.
CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 13 - 9
01/2023
254.07.100
4. Determine the continuous VA rating of the transformer based on maximum
sealed VA load current from the coils of the starters, relays, and pilot lights.
Maximum inrush current shall be calculated based on the maximum inrush of
devices that can be energized at one time plus the load presented by the devices
already energized, and the actual power factor of the loads. This maximum
inrush current must not cause the secondary voltage of the transformer to fall
below 85% of rated voltage when the primary voltage has been reduced to 90%
of rated voltage. Based on these calculations then actual transformer size shall
be the calculated value times 1.5.
N. Transient / Surge Protection
1. Data and Signal Line Protectors to be used on each and every analog input or
output, and on each and every data and signal line external connection point:
a. Provide electronic circuits and components from damaging surge voltage and
currents.
b. Provide protection of signal and data lines associated with computer, data,
communications, instrumentation, broadcasting, and industrial control
interfaces.
c. Shall be used directly with EIA standard interfaces:
1) RS-232
2) RS-422
3) RS-423
4) RS-485
5) 4-20 mA instrumentation loops.
d. Repeatedly provide protection against surge voltages currents in excess of
10,000 Amps.
e. DIN rail mounted.
f. Cable shields shall be passed through and may be either grounded or not
grounded at the protector.
g. System:
1) Heavy duty multi-staged protectors.
2) Solid state stage intercepts the leading edge of the surge with sub-
nanosecond response time.
3) Within micro-seconds, a 3-pole common chambered gas tube capable of
handling 20,000 ampere lightning current operates and crowbars the
surge to ground.
4) The protector remains in the crowbar state until the surge has passed and
line voltages return to safe levels.
h. Location:
CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 13 - 10
01/2023
254.07.100
1) Place at each end of a signal line, data line, or current loop.
2) In the case of daisy chain configuration, such as RS-485, protectors shall
be placed at each node.
i. Electrical Characteristics:
1) Surge Life:
a) Greater than 1000 operations with 200 Amps, 10 x 100 µsec.
b) Greater than 10 operations with 10,000 Amps, 8 x 20 µsec.
2) Leakage current at rate line to ground voltage < 10 µAmps.
3) Signal/Data attenuation at maximum data rate 3 db with 600 terminations.
4) Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C.
j. As manufactured by:
1) Joslyn:
a) For differential signals, such as RS-422 or RS-485, and current loops
– Model 1820.
b) For high frequency differential signals and current loops – Model
1821.
c) For line to ground protection, two separate circuits, and ground
referenced signals (RS-232) and 4-20 mA loops where the return wire
is grounded at the protector – Model 1810.
d) For high frequency line to ground protection, two separate circuits,
and ground referenced signals (RS-232) and 4-20 mA loops where
the return wire is grounded at the protector – Model 1811.
2. Protection from inductive spikes within the control panel.
a. Provide surge protection across all inductive coils for control relays, starters,
solenoids, etc.
O. Power Supplies: Power supplies shall convert 120 VAC ±10% to 24 volt DC or other
DC voltages as necessary.
1. Power supplies shall have an excess rated capacity of 40 percent or be rated
100 watt minimum.
2. The failure of a power supply shall be annunciated at the control panel and
repeated to the SCADA system through a connection to PLC.
3. Output regulation shall be accurate within ±0.05% for a 10% line change or a
50% load change and shall include remote voltage sensing.
4. The power supply shall be rated for temperatures of 32 to 122 degrees F and
shall be UL recognized.
5. Power supplies shall have fully isolated primary and secondary coils which shall
be surrounded by an insulating enclosure which shall also provide mechanical
isolation.
CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 13 - 11
01/2023
254.07.100
6. All power supplies shall be designed and configured as fully redundant systems
so that the failure of one power supply will automatically transfer to the other
power supply with no interruption in power.
a. The power supply failure shall supply a dry contact for connection to a PLC
input for an alarm indication.
7. As manufactured by:
a. Power One W Series.
b. Phoenix Contact Quint Series.
c. IDEC Slim Line.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to all application provisions of the NEMA and UL standards, NEC and local,
state, and federal codes when fabricating the equipment.
B. Install each item in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in
accordance with the Contract Documents. Locate devices, including accessories,
where they shall be accessible from grade, except as shown otherwise.
C. Mount components in accordance with the installation details as prepared by the
manufacturers.
D. Mount equipment so that each device is rigidly supported, level and plumb, and in
such a manner as to provide accessibility; protection from damage; isolation from
heat, shock, and vibration; and freedom from interference with other equipment
within the panel.
E. Items, components, devices, and accessories shall be mounted and anchored using
stainless-steel hardware, unless otherwise noted.
3.2 SPARES
A. Unused inputs and outputs from the PLC shall be wired to field terminal blocks and
identified.
B. Furnish one spare normally open and one spare normally closed dry contact for each
push-button, selector switch, relay, etc.
C. Furnish ten spare fuses for each type of fuse in the panel.
D. Furnish 15 spare terminal blocks or 20% whichever is greater.
E. Furnish five spare relays for each type used in the panel.
F. Spare contacts of relays, switches, etc., shall be internally wired to terminal blocks.
END OF SECTION
PANELS AND CONSOLES 26 16 00 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 16 00 - PANELS AND CONSOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: This section sets forth the general specifications and requirements for all the
control panels and enclosures being provided under this contract.
1. Including but not limited to all:
a. All custom built and designed control panels.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, supply and install all custom panels for this
project in accordance Contract documents.
3. This section also covers requirements for local control panels being supplied by
the Equipment Manufacturers as part of the packaged equipment.
a. The CONTRACTOR shall design all interfaces between
these control panels and the SCADA/PLC System.
4. This specification covers the requirements for the fabrication of instrument panel
boards or enclosures, mounting, finishing, piping and wiring of instrument
equipment.
B. Related Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all
Divisions and Section apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and
its Sub-Contracts to review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated
project.
1.2 PANEL FABRICATION
A. The following paragraphs describe general fabrication requirements for the instrument
panels, enclosures, and subpanels:
1. All internal instrument and component device wiring shall be as normally
furnished by the manufacturer. With the exception of electronic circuits, all
interconnecting wiring and wiring to terminals for external connection shall be
stranded copper, insulated for not less than 600 volts, with a moisture-resistant
and flame-retardant covering rated for not less than 90 C.
2. Power distribution wiring on the line side of panel fuses shall be minimum 12
AWG. Secondary power distribution wiring and wiring for control circuits shall
be minimum 14 AWG. Annunciator and indicating light circuits shall be
minimum 16 AWG. Electronic analog circuits shall be 16 AWG twisted and
shielded pairs rated not less than 300 volts. Analog circuits shall be separated
from ac power circuits. Wiring for ac power distribution, dc power distribution,
and control circuits shall have different colors and shall agree with the color
coding legend on the system supplier's panel wiring diagrams.
PANELS AND CONSOLES 26 16 00 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
3. The power entrance to each panel shall be provided with a surge protection
device. Surge protectors shall be nominal 120 volts ac with a nominal clamping
voltage of 200 volts. Surge protectors shall be a non-faulting and non-
interrupting design with a response time of not more than 5 nanoseconds.
Surge protectors shall be Transtector "ACP-I00BW", Power Integrity Corporation
"ZTAS”, or equal.
4. Terminal blocks for external connections shall be suitable for No. 12 AWG wire,
and shall be rated 30 amperes at not less than 300 volts. Terminal blocks shall
be fabricated complete with marking strip, covers, and pressure connectors.
Terminals shall be labeled to agree with identification shown on the Supplier's
submittal drawings. A terminal shall be provided for each conductor of external
circuits plus one ground for each shielded cable. All wiring shall be grouped or
cabled and firmly supported to the panel. Not less than 8 inches of clearance
shall be provided between the terminal strips and the base of vertical panels for
conduit and wiring space. Not less than 25 percent spare terminals shall be
provided. Each control loop or system shall be individually fused, and all fuses
or circuit breakers shall be clearly labeled and located for easy maintenance.
5. The panel fabricator shall provide such additional circuits as may be indicated
on the electrical schematic drawings.
6. Nameplates shall be provided on the face of the panel or on the individual
device as required. Panel nameplates shall have approximate dimensions and
legends as indicated on the drawings and shall be made of laminated phenolic
material having engraved letters approximately 3/16 inch high extending through
the black face into the white layer. Nameplates shall be secured firmly to the
panel.
7. All panels shall be thoroughly cleaned, sanded, and given not less than one coat
of rust-inhibiting primer both inside and out. The panel interior shall be given not
less than one coat of white enamel or lacquer. All pits and blemishes in the
exterior surface shall be filled. Exterior surfaces shall be smoothed and given
not less than two coats of enamel, polyurethane, or lacquer finish. Color
samples shall be submitted to the Engineer for color selection. One quart of
finish color paint shall be furnished with the panels to cover future scratches.
B. FACTORY TEST
1. Panels shall be factory-tested electrically and pneumatically by the panel
fabricator in the presence of the ENGINEER before shipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Control Panel Engineering Submittals: Submit a two phase control panel engineering
submittal for each and every control panel and enclosure being provided for this
project.
1. Phase I shall be the Control Panel Hardware submittal which shall include but
not be limited to:
a. Enclosure construction details and NEMA type.
b. Finish, including color chart for ENGINEER selection of color.
c. Layout.
PANELS AND CONSOLES 26 16 00 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
d. Power circuits.
e. Signal and safety grounding circuits.
f. Fuses.
g. Circuit breakers.
h. Signal circuits.
i. Internally mounted instrumentation.
j. PLCs.
k. SCADA system components.
l. Face plate mounted instrumentation components.
m. Internal panel arrangements.
n. External panel arrangements.
o. Construction drawings drawn to scale which define and quantity.
1) The type and gage of fabrication steel to be used for panel
fabrication.
2) The ASTM grade to be used for structural shapes and straps.
3) Panel door locks and hinge mechanisms.
4) Type bolts and bolt locations for section joining and anchoring.
5) Details on the utilization of “UNISTRUT” and proposed locations.
6) Stiffener materials and locations.
7) Electrical terminal box and outlet locations.
8) Electrical access locations.
9) Print pocket locations.
10) Writing board locations.
11) Lifting lug material and locations.
p. Physical arrangement drawing drawn to scale which define and quantity
the physical groupings comprising:
1) Control panel sections.
2) Auxiliary panels.
3) Subpanels.
4) Racks.
5) Cutout locations with nameplate identifications shall be provided.
q. A bill of material which enumerates all devices associated with the control
panel.
2. Phase II shall be the Control Panel Wiring Diagram submittal which shall include
but not be limited to:
PANELS AND CONSOLES 26 16 00 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
a. Schematic/Elementary diagrams shall depict all control devices and
circuits and their functions.
b. Wiring/Connection diagrams shall locate and identify:
1) Electrical devices.
2) Terminals.
3) Interconnecting wiring.
4) These diagrams shall show interconnecting wiring by lines,
designate terminal assignments, and show the physical location of
all electrical and control devices.
c. Interconnection diagrams shall locate and identify all external connections
between the control panel/control panel devices and associated
equipment.
1) These diagrams shall show interconnecting wiring by lines,
designate terminal assignments, and show the physical location of
all panel ingress and egress points.
d. Control sequence diagrams shall be submitted to portray the contact
positions or connections required to be made for each successive step of
the control action.
3. All panel drawings shall be 22” x 34” reduced to and fully legible at 11” x 17”,
and submitted at 11” x 17” format size, with all data sheets and manufacturer
specification sheets being 8.5” x 11”.
4. The submittal shall be in conformance with NEMA Standard ICS-1-1.01, and
each phase shall be submitted as a singular complete bound volume or multi-
volume package and shall have the following contents.
a. A complete index shall appear in front of each bound volume.
1) All drawings and data sheets associated with a panel shall be
grouped.
2) All panel tagging and nameplate nomenclature shall be consistent
with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
b. Completed ISA-S20 data sheets for all instrumentation devices
associated with each control panel supplemented with manufacturer
specification sheets which verify the products conformance to the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
c. A listing of spare parts in conformance with each equipment specification
section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Environmental Suitability:
1. All indoor and outdoor control panels and instrument enclosures shall be
suitable for operation in the ambient conditions associated with the locations
designed in the Contract Documents.
PANELS AND CONSOLES 26 16 00 - 5
01/2023
254.07.100
2. Heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices shall be provided in order to
maintain all instrumentation devices to within a range equal to 20% above the
minimum and 20% below the maximum of the rated environmental operating
ranges.
3. Provide all power wiring for these devices.
4. Enclosures suitable for the environment shall be furnished.
5. All instrumentation in hazardous areas shall be suitable for use in the particular
hazardous or classified location in which it is to be installed.
B. All control panels and assemblies shall be labeled and listed by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory.
1. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc.
2. Or equal.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All panels are to be crated for shipment using a heavy framework and skids.
1. The panel sections shall further be cushioned satisfactorily to protect the finish
of the instruments and panel during shipment.
2. All equipment which is shipped with the panel shall further have suitable
shipping stops and cushioning material installed in a manner to protect
instrument parts which could be damaged due to mechanical shock during
shipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL PANELS
A. The following paragraphs describe specific requirements for the control panels:
B. CONSTRUCTION - NEMA 12 by Hoffman or equal in control room locations.
NEMA 3R by Hoffman or equal outside.
1. NEMA 12
a. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth.
b. Door and body stiffeners as needed to make a rigid enclosure.
c. Heavy gauge continuous hinge.
d. Oil-resistant gasket attached to door with oil-resistant adhesive.
Gasket to seal against roll lip on the enclosure opening.
e. Internal mounting panel held in place by collar studs welded to
enclosure.
f. Lockable door latching and handle mechanism to allow easy
access to interior of enclosure and keyboard.
g. Panel cut-outs for instruments, devices, and windows shall be cut,
punched, or drilled and smoothly finished with rounded edges.
1) Reinforce around cut-outs with steel angles or flat bars.
2. Large panel cutouts such as for HMIs.
PANELS AND CONSOLES 26 16 00 - 6
01/2023
254.07.100
3. Pilot device groupings where the removed metal exceeds 50% of the
available metal in an area bound by a 3” envelope around said pilot
devices.
a. Finish.
1) Interior, smooth, polyester power coating.
2) Exterior polyester powder coating gray in color.
a) Panels that are in the same room as, motor control
centers, switchboards, etc shall be of the same
color as the motor control center or switchboards
so that the control panel blends into the line up.
b. Manufacturer’s standard gauge steel.
c. Each door to have a three-point latching mechanism and
padlocking handle with rollers on the ends of the latch rods.
d. With heavy duty lifting eyes.
e. With flange mounted disconnect.
f. Mounting panel
1) 10 gauge steel
2) With stiffeners
C. SIZE AND ARRANGEMENT - Panel dimensions and general instrument
arrangement shall be as indicated on the drawings.
D. Interconnecting wiring and wiring to terminals for external connection shall be
MTW or SIS 16 AWG, stranded copper wire, insulated for not less than 600 volts,
with a moisture-resistant and flame-retardant covering rated for not less than 90
degrees Celsius except for electronic circuits and special instrument interconnect
wiring which shall be in accordance with manufacturer requirements. Provide a
switched fluorescent light at every four feet of panel length.
E. PANEL WIRING:
1. Power distribution wiring on line side of panel fuses minimum 12 AWG.
2. Secondary power distribution wiring and wiring for control circuits:
Minimum number 14 AWG.
3. Annunciator and indicating light circuits: Minimum 14 AWG.
4. Electronic analog circuits within instrument and control panels: Minimum
16 AWG twisted and shielded pairs or triads rated not less than 16 volts.
5. Provide a 15 amp, 120 volt GFCI service outlet within each panel.
6. Wire Insulation Colors:
a. Conductors supplying 120-volts AC power on the line side of a
disconnecting switch shall have a black insulation for the
ungrounded conductor.
b. Grounded circuit conductors shall have white insulation.
PANELS AND CONSOLES 26 16 00 - 7
01/2023
254.07.100
c. Insulation for ungrounded 120-volt AC control circuit conductors
shall be red.
d. All wires energized by a voltage source external to the control
panels shall have yellow insulation.
e. Insulation for all DC conductors shall be blue.
7. Wire Marking:
a. Each signal, control, alarm, and indicating circuit conductor
connected to a given electrical point shall be designated by a
single unique number which shall be shown on all shop drawings.
b. These numbers shall be marked on all conductors at every
terminal in accordance with Section 26 05 09.
8. For case grounding, panels shall be furnished with a ¼-inch by 1-inch
copper ground bus complete with solderless connectors for all equipment
ground conductors.
a. Refer to Division 26 – Conduit Schedule for size and number of
conductors.
9. Power Supply Wiring:
a. Each and every loop and instrument requiring 120 VAC shall be
protected by individual DIN rail mounted circuit breakers.
1) The number of circuits depends on the circuit load as
noted herein.
2) The circuit load shall not exceed 10 amp.
3) Different panel section or different process units must not
use common branch circuits.
4) Furnish and install DIN rail mounted circuit breakers for all
individual instruments.
a) Circuit breakers shall be mounted on the back of
the panel.
b) Identified by a service name tag.
b. Each potentiometer type instrument, electronic transducer,
controller or analyzer shall have an individual DIN rail mounted
circuit breaker located within the control panel.
1) Circuit breakers shall have plastic tags indicating
instrument tag numbers.
2) Individual plug and cord set power supply connections
require DIN rail mounted circuit breakers ahead of the
receptacle.
10. Furnish circuit breakers for the panel lights, and for the panel receptacle.
11. Alarm Wiring:
PANELS AND CONSOLES 26 16 00 - 8
01/2023
254.07.100
a. Install and wire all alarms including light cabinets, audible signal
units, test and acknowledge switches and remote logic units as
specified.
b. Interconnecting wiring to panel mounted initiating devices shall
also be wired.
c. Where plug and cord sets are provided for component
interconnection, harness and support the cables in neat and
orderly fashion. Where separate wire is required, install No. 16
AWG with MTW or TFFN insulation between all components.
12. Signal Wiring:
a. Signal Wire – Non Computer Use
1) Signal wire shall be twisted pair or triads in conduit or
troughs. Cable shall be constructed of No. 16 AWG with
MTW or TFFN insulation between all components.
2) Color code for instrument signal wiring shall be as follows:
a) Positive (+) – Black
b) Negative (-) – White.
3) Multiconductor cables where specified shall consist of No.
18 AWG copper signal wires twisted in pairs, pairs, with
90°C, 600 V insulation.
a) A copper drain wire shall be provided for the bundle
with a wrap of aluminum polyester shield. The
overall bundle jacket shall be PVC.
4) Use for connections between field terminal blocks and the
PLC wiring arms for analog inputs and outputs.
b. Signal Wire – Computer Use
1) Signal wires shall be similar to those for non-computer use
but each pair shall be triplexed with a copper drain wire
and aluminum polyester tape shall be applied over the
triplexed group.
2) All cable shields, including thermocouple extension leads
shall be terminated at a single point within the control
panel.
3) Continuity of the shield is to be maintained throughout the
cable runs.
c. Multi-conductor cables, wireways and conduit shall be sized to
allow for 20 percent signal wire.
13. Wiring Installation:
a. All wires shall be run in plastic wireways.
b. Exception:
1) Field wiring.
PANELS AND CONSOLES 26 16 00 - 9
01/2023
254.07.100
2) Wiring run between mating blocks in adjacent sections.
3) Wiring runs from components on a swing-out panel to
components on a part of the fixed structure.
a) Wiring run from components on a swing-out or front
panel to other components on a fixed panel shall be
made up in tied bundles.
b) These bundles shall be tied with nylon wire ties,
and shall be secured to panels at both sides of the
“hinge loop” so that conductors are not strained at
the terminals.
4) Wiring run to front panel-mounted components.
c. Signal and low voltage wiring shall be run separately from power
and 120 VAC control wiring.
1) 120 VAC circuits shall be run through grey colored plastic
wireways.
2) 24 VDC circuits shall be run through white colored plastic
wireways.
d. Wiring to rear terminals on panel-mount instruments shall be run
in plastic wireways secured to horizontal brackets run above or
below the instruments in about the same plane as the rear of the
instruments.
e. Provide an empty wireway for all field wiring connections.
1) 120 VAC circuits shall be run through grey colored plastic
wireways.
2) 24 VDC circuits shall be run through white colored plastic
wireways.
f. Conformance to the above wiring installation requirements shall
be reflected by details shown on the shop drawings for the
ENGINEER’s review.
14. Grounding
a. Furnish equipment ground bus with lugs for connection of all
equipment grounding wires.
F. ANALOG CIRCUITS AND AC POWER CIRCUITS: Separated.
G. INTERNAL PANEL WIRING COLORS:
a. AC Power Distribution: Red
b. DC Power and Control: Blue
c. Instrument: Black and white twisted shielded pair.
d. Other and in agreement with manufacturer's wiring diagrams as stated on
manufactured drawing legend.
PANELS AND CONSOLES 26 16 00 - 10
01/2023
254.07.100
H. SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE FOR POWER ENTRANCES: Nominal 120 volts
AC with a nominal clamping voltage of 200 volts; nonfaulting and noninterrupting
design with a response time of not more than 5 nano-seconds. Utilize a branch
panel TVSS unit as described in Section 26 35 53.
I. TERMINAL BLOCKS FOR EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS: Suitable for specified
AWG wire, rated 30 amperes at not less than 600 volts (for incoming power
circuits, and for field 1/0 terminals they shall be Phoenix contact or equal as
shown on the drawings); with marking strip, covers, pressure connectors, and
labeled terminals, each conductor of external circuits plus one ground terminal
for each shielded cable. Provide minimum 25 percent spare terminals.
J. Group cables, and firmly support wiring to the panel. Provide minimum 8 inches
clearance between terminal strips and the base of vertical panels for conduit and
wiring space. Individually fuse each control loop or system, and clearly label and
locate fuses or circuit breakers for maintenance.
K. Furnish and install equipment grounding conductor in accordance with NEC 250.
Provide power ground lugs. Provide signal insulated and isolated ground lugs.
L. Nameplates on Internal and External Instruments and Devices: Materials
approximate dimensions with legends as indicated on the Drawings made of
laminated phenolic material having engraved letters approximately 3/16 inch high
extending through the black face into the white layer; firmly secured to panels.
M. POWER SUPPLIES/FUSING
1. Design and arrange regulated 24 volt DC power supplies for instrument
loops so that loss of I loop does not affect more than one instrument loop
or system. Provide power supplies suitable for an input voltage variation
of plus or minus 10 percent. Fuse or short circuit protects the supply
output.
2. Selectively fuse the power distribution from multi-loop supplies so that a
fault in one instrument loop will be isolated from the other loops being fed
from the same supply. Label and locate fuses for easy access.
3. Output Voltage Regulation: As required by the instrument or control
equipment being supplied.
4. Backup power supply units shall be provided to automatically supply the
load upon failure of the primary supply. Design backup supply systems
so that either the primary or backup supply can be removed, repaired,
and returned to service without disrupting the instrument system
operation.
5. Oversize the multi-loop supply systems for an additional 25 percent future
load. Indicate failure of a multi-loop supply on the respective instrument
panel or enclosure.
6. Furnish and install signal repeaters for instrument loops that exceed the
load impedance of the power supplies. Indicating fuses: Neon bulb type
for 120 VAC circuit and glass indicating fuse type for 24 VDC circuits.
PANELS AND CONSOLES 26 16 00 - 11
01/2023
254.07.100
N. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL:
1. Functionally factory test instrument and control panel items electrically
and pneumatically before shipment.
O. PANEL ACCESSORIES:
1. Manufacturers: Weidmuller SAKS; Entrelec; Phoenix Contact; Wago; or
equal.
a. Terminal Blocks: Nickel plated copper only; DIN rail; universal foot
with the following as required for the application.
1) Universal type
2) Feed through
3) Ground
4) Neutral disconnect
5) Intrinsically safe
6) Explosion-proof
7) Fuse
8) Knife disconnect
9) Ground fault indicator
10) Bolt connecting
b. Terminal Block Labeling: Each terminal and each conductor as
previously specified with machine labels only.
1) Manufacturers: Phoenix Contact; Entrelec; or equal.
a) Signal Interface Modules:
1. Analog isolating converter
2. Ground loop isolations
3. Signal amplification
4. Signal level matching
5. 24 VDC power supply (120 VAC input)
2. Disconnect Switches:
a. Switches shall consist of a thermal magnetic circuit breaker with
integral door operator – lockable
1) Minimum 22 KAIC
2) Not required for panels fed with 120 VAC or less. A
nameplate must be furnished on the cover of the control
panel identifying all sources of supply and foreign voltages
within the control panel.
b. The main disconnect shall disconnect all power sources within the
control panel.
PANELS AND CONSOLES 26 16 00 - 12
01/2023
254.07.100
c. Sized in accordance with the NEC and total connected
horsepower and associated locked rotor currents.
d. A disconnect shall be provided for each motor controller/starter
within the control panel. This disconnecting means shall
disconnect power and control power to each motor controller.
Each disconnect shall be equipped with a dead front operator
through either the cabinet door or a dead front panel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
END OF SECTION
SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 26 20 00 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 20 00 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Provide all operations, methods, labor and equipment and provide and install all
materials and incidentals necessary for the completion of the work as specified herein
or included on the Drawings.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Electrical work required is indicated on the Drawings and specified herein and
elsewhere includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Complete electrical distribution systems for power, control, and instrumentation as
shown.
2. Complete system of raceways, conductors, and equipment for all other auxiliary
systems required. If noted, the equipment and wiring of these auxiliary systems will
be furnished and installed under their respective sections; however, the conduit or
raceway systems will be furnished and installed in accordance with Division 26 05
00.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all component parts of all the systems
required for their safe and proper operation, whether or not specifically mentioned or
noted on the Drawings, except those items or articles which are specifically noted as
being supplied otherwise.
C. Perform all trenching and backfilling required in connection with the work which shall
be in strict accordance with the provisions of Division 31 of these specifications.
D. Provide all required electrical conduits, conductors, and connections to items described
in all other sections of these specifications.
1.3 APPLICABLE SECTIONS
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, Alternates
and addenda, applicable drawings and the technical specifications herein shall apply.
B. Section 26 24 17 – Distribution Panelboards.
1.4 ELECTRICAL SERVICE
A. New underground electrical service(s) from the local transformer shall be at 480/277
volt, three phase, four wire, 60 hertz AC with current ratings as indicated on the
Drawings. Conduit from utility pole to owners metering cabinet with pull rope.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall install service conduits and conductors from the OWNER
metering cabinet to transformer and then service disconnect location to the service
entrance section. The installation shall be in accordance with the utility company’s
published requirements. See Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 26 20 00 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of the service entrance sections shall be in accordance with the
manufacture’s requirements.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A. The service entrance section shall be bonded to the grounding electrode system
(GES). The GES consists of, but not limited to, the metal underground water pipes,
metal frame of the building or structure, concrete encased electrode (UREF), ground
rings, rods, pipe, or plate electrodes, and other metal underground systems or
structures as in compliance with the NEC. Provide bonding jumper same size as
system ground to provide ground continuity from customer's side of metallic lines
service entrance and street side of metallic mains. The neutral (grounded conductor)
and grounding electrode system shall be connected together at the service disconnect
only.
B. UFER ground connections to existing UFER Ground shall be exothermic welds or
otherwise irreversible.
C. The equipment grounding system shall be such that all metallic structures, enclosures,
raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, portable equipment
and other conductive items in close proximity with the electrical circuits operate
continuously at ground potential and provide a low impedance path for the possible
ground fault currents. The system shall comply with the National Electrical Code,
modified as indicated on the Drawings or specifications.
D. The distributions system shall be provided with a separate equipment grounding
conductor for each single or three-phase feeder, each branch circuit, each motor
circuit, control or instrument raceways as indicated. The grounding conductor shall be
installed in the common raceway with the related phase and/or neutral conductors.
Flexible conduit equipment connections utilized in conjunction with branch circuits or
feeders shall be provided with suitable bonding jumpers connected to listed grounding
type fittings when required.
3.3 TESTING
A. General: Upon completion of this portion of the work, test all parts of the electrical
system in the presence of the ENGINEER.
B. Test Requirements: All systems shall test free from short circuits and grounds, shall be
free from mechanical and electrical defects, and shall show an insulation resistance
between phase conductors and ground of not less than that required by the
manufacturers.
3.4 FINAL INSPECTION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be present at the final acceptance of the work by the
OWNER.
SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 26 20 00 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
B. The CONTRACTOR shall have pad and pencil to list all deficient items noted.
Corrections and adjustments of deficient items shall be done after the inspection, not
during.
C. See Section 26 05 00 for other requirements for final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 22 00 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This Section consists of dry type transformers and related items necessary to
complete the work indicated within the Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NEMA ST 1 – Specialty Transformers (Except General – Purpose Type).
B. NEMA ST 20 – Dry Type Transformers for General Applications.
C. NETA ATS – Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment (International Electrical Testing Association).
D. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
E. UL – Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: provide outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and
accessories, unit weight, voltage, kVA, and impedance ratings and
characteristics, tap configurations, insulation system type and rated temperature
rise.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional
heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water construction
debris, and traffic.
B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Lift only with lugs
provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer
internal components, enclosure, and finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
A. Transformers shall be premium high efficiency quiet type with copper windings,
and shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings. The primary winding of
the transformers shall have two 2-1/2 percent taps above, and below normal.
B. The transformers shall have a BIL of 10 KV with a temperature class of 185
degrees C for transformers up to 25 KVA, and a temperature class of 220
degrees C for larger transformers.
C. The sound level shall not exceed 44 dBa measured at 5 feet from the transformer
after installation. Core and coil assemblies 30 KVA and larger, shall be mounted
on rubber vibration isolators, designed to reduce harmonics generated noise.
D. The transformers shall be NEMA 3R outdoor rated with rodent screens.
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set transformer plumb and level.
B. Use flexible conduit, 2 feet minimum length for connections to transformer case.
Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
C. Mount wall-mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets
furnished by the manufacturer.
D. Mount floor-mounted transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for
isolating the transformer noise from the building structure.
E. Mount trapeze-mounted transformers as indicated.
F. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.2.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjusting installed work.
B. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.
END OF SECTION
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 24 16 - BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - Furnish and install lighting and appliance
panelboard(s) as specified herein and where shown on the associated schedules
drawings.
1.2 REFERENCES
The panelboard(s) and circuit breaker(s) referenced herein are designed and
manufactured according to the latest revision of the following specifications.
A. NEMA PB 1 – Panelboards
B. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
C. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers
D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600
Volts Maximum)
E. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
F. UL 67 – Panelboards
G. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-front Switches
H. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
I. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 29-M1989 - Panelboards and Enclosed Panelboards
J. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 5-M91 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers
K. Federal Specification W-P-115C - Type I Class 1
L. Federal Specification W-C-375B/Gen - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch
Circuit And Service.
M. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
N. ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials
1.3 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Approval documents shall include drawings. Drawings shall contain overall
panelboard dimensions, interior mounting dimensions, and wiring gutter
dimensions. The location of the main, branches, and solid neutral shall be
clearly shown. In addition, the drawing shall illustrate one line diagrams with
applicable voltage systems.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
A. Company specializing in manufacturing of panelboard products with a minimum
of fifty (50) years documented experience.
B. Panelboards shall be manufactured in accordance with standards listed.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period.
B. Handle carefully to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure,
and finish.
C. Store in a clean, dry environment. Maintain factory packaging and, if required,
provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect enclosure(s)
from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
1.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer shall provide installation instructions and NEMA Standards
Publication PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance
of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
B. Refer to Sections 26 05 00 and 26 05 05 for additional requirements.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment free from defects in materials
and workmanship for the lesser of one (1) year from the date of installation or
eighteen (18) months from the date of purchase.
1.8 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 35 53 – Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D Company Type NF - Class 1670.
B. Cutler Hammer.
C. General Electric.
2.2 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARD TYPE
A. Fabrication:
1. Interior
a. Continuous current ratings, as indicated on Drawings, not to
exceed 600 amperes maximum for main breaker panelboards and
not to exceed 800 amperes for main lug panelboards.
b. Minimum Short Circuit Rating: as indicated on the Drawings.
c. Provide one (1) continuous bus bar per phase. Each bus bar shall
have sequentially phased branch circuit connectors limited to bolt-
on branch circuit breakers. The bussing shall be fully rated.
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
Panelboard bus current ratings shall be determined by heat-rise
tests conducted in accordance with UL 67. Bussing rated 100-400
amperes shall be plated copper. Bussing rated for 600 and 800
amperes shall be plated copper as standard construction. Bus bar
plating shall run the entire length of the bus bar. Panelboards
shall be suitable for use as Service Equipment when application
requirements comply with UL 67 and NEC Articles 230-F and -G.
d. All current-carrying parts shall be insulated from ground and
phase-to-phase by high dielectric strength thermoplastic.
e. A solidly bonded copper equipment ground bar shall be provided.
f. Split solid neutral shall be plated and located in the mains
compartment up to 250 amperes so all incoming neutral cable
may be of the same length.
g. Interior trim shall be of dead-front construction to shield user from
energized parts. Dead-front trim shall have pre-formed twistouts
covering unused mounting space.
h. Nameplates shall contain system information and catalog number
or factory order number. Interior wiring diagram, neutral wiring
diagram, UL Listed label and short circuit current rating shall be
displayed on the interior or in a booklet format.
i. Interiors shall be field convertible for top or bottom incoming feed.
Main circuit breakers in 125A interiors shall be vertically mounted.
Main circuit breakers over 125A shall be vertically mounted. Sub-
feed circuit breakers shall be vertically mounted. Main lug
interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main
breaker. Interior leveling provisions shall be provided for flush
mounted applications.
j. Interior phase bus shall be pre-drilled to accommodate field
installable options. (i.e., Sub-Feed Lugs, Sub-Feed Breakers,
Thru-Feed Lugs)
k. Interiors shall accept 125 ampere breakers in group mounted
branch construction.
2. Main Circuit Breaker
a. Shall be bolt-on type circuit breakers.
b. Main circuit breakers shall have an over center, trip-free, toggle
mechanism which will provide quick-make, quick-break contact
action. Circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip unit with
thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Each thermal
element shall be true RMS sensing and be factory calibrated to
operate in a 40° C ambient environment. Thermal elements shall
be ambient compensating above 40° C.
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
c. Two and three pole circuit breakers shall have common tripping of
all poles. Circuit breakers frame sizes above 100 amperes shall
have a single magnetic trip adjustment located on the front of the
breaker that allows the user to simultaneously select the desired
trip level of all poles. Circuit breakers shall have a push-to-trip
button for maintenance and testing purposes.
d. Circuit breaker handle and faceplate shall indicate rated ampacity.
Standard construction circuit breakers shall be UL Listed for
reverse connection without restrictive line or load markings.
e. Circuit breaker escutcheon shall have international I/O markings,
in addition to standard ON/OFF markings. Circuit breaker handle
accessories shall provide provisions for locking handle in the ON
or OFF position.
f. Lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid or stranded copper
conductors only. Lugs shall be suitable for 90° C rated wire, sized
according to the 75° C temperature rating per NEC Table 310-16.
Lug body shall be bolted in place; snap-in designs are not
acceptable.
g. The circuit breakers shall be UL Listed for use with the following
accessories: Shunt Trip, Under Voltage Trip, Ground Fault Shunt
Trip, Auxiliary Switch, Alarm Switch, Mechanical Lug Kits, and
Compression Lug Kits.
3. Branch Circuit Breakers
a. Shall be Square D type circuit breakers or approved equal. Circuit
breakers shall be UL Listed with amperage ratings, interrupting
ratings, and number of poles as indicated on the panelboard
schedules drawings.
b. Molded case branch circuit breakers shall have bolt-on type bus
connectors.
c. Circuit breakers shall have an over center toggle mechanism
which will provide quick-make, quick-break contact action. Circuit
breakers shall have thermal and magnetic trip elements in each
pole. Two- and three-pole circuit breakers shall have common
tripping of all poles.
d. There shall be two forms of visible trip indication. The circuit
breaker handle shall reside in a position between ON and OFF. In
addition, there shall be a red VISI-TRIP® indicator appearing in
the clear window of the circuit breaker housing.
e. The exposed faceplates of all branch circuit breakers shall be
flush with one another.
f. Lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid or stranded copper
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 5
01/2023
254.07.100
conductors only. Lugs shall be suitable for 90° C rated wire, sized
according to the 75° C temperature rating per NEC Table 310-16.
g. Breakers shall be UL Listed for use with the following factory
installed accessories: Shunt Trip, Auxiliary Switch, and Alarm
Switch.
h. Breaker shall be UL Listed with the following ratings: (15-125A)
Heating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration (HACR), (15-30A)
High Intensity Discharge (HID), and (15-20A) Switch Duty (SWD)
4. Enclosures
a. Type 1 Boxes
1) Boxes shall be galvanized steel constructed in accordance
with UL 50 requirements. Galvannealed steel will not be
acceptable.
2) Boxes shall have removable end walls with knockouts
located on one end. Boxes shall have welded interior
mounting studs. Interior mounting brackets are not
required.
3) Box width shall not exceed 26” wide.
b. Type 1 Fronts
1) Front shall meet strength and rigidity requirements per UL
50 standards. Shall have ANSI 49 gray enamel
electrodeposited over cleaned phosphatized steel.
2) Fronts shall be hinged 1-piece with door. Mounting shall
be surface as indicated on associated drawings. All covers
shall be hinged cover type.
3) Panelboards rated 250 amperes and below shall have
MONO-FLAT fronts with concealed door hinges and trim
screws. Front shall not be removable with the door locked.
Panelboards rated above 250 amperes shall have vented
fronts with concealed door hinges. Doors on front shall
have rounded corners; edges shall be free of burrs.
4) Front shall have flat latch type lock with catch and spring
loaded stainless steel door pull. All lock assemblies shall
be keyed alike. One (1) key shall be provided with each
lock. A clear plastic directory card holder shall be mounted
on the inside of door.
c. Type 4, and 12
1) Enclosures shall be constructed in accordance with UL 50
requirements. Enclosures shall be painted with ANSI 49
gray enamel electrodeposited over cleaned phosphatized
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 6
01/2023
254.07.100
steel.
2) All doors shall be hinged cover type. All doors shall be
gasketed and equipped with a tumbler type vault lock and
two (2) additional quarter turn fasteners on enclosures 59
inches or more in height. All lock assemblies shall be
keyed alike. One (1) key shall be provided with each lock.
A clear plastic directory card holder shall be mounted on
the inside of door.
3) Maximum enclosure dimensions shall not exceed 21” wide
and 9.5” deep.
5. Surge Protective Device
a. Integral Surge Suppressor shall be provided for each branch circuit
panelboard. See Section 26 35 53 for requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, NEMA
PB 1.1 and NEC standards.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect complete installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage,
and grounding.
B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits
in the panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20% of each other. Maintain
proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
C. Check tightness of bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using
calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written
specifications.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF PANELS
A. Installation: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, install wall panels with
the top of the trim 6'-0" above the finished floor. Panels located in equipment
rooms and wire closets shall be surface mounted. Floor mounted panels shall be
provided with a 4" concrete housekeeping pad. Floor mounted panels shall be
anchored to floor at all four corners and to wall or structural member at top for
seismic restraint.
B. Directories: Mount a typewritten directory behind glass or plastic on the inside of
each panel door. On the directory, show the circuit number and complete
description of all outlets with specific locations on each circuit. In addition,
provide a typewritten label inside door showing source of power to panel to
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 7
01/2023
254.07.100
feeder switch, panel designation and location within buildings.
END OF SECTION
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 26 24 17 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 24 17 - DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Power Distribution Panelboard - Furnish and install distribution panelboard(s) as
specified herein and where shown on the associated schedules and drawings.
1.2 REFERENCES
The panelboard(s) and circuit breaker(s) referenced herein are designed and
manufactured according to the latest revision of the following specifications.
A. NEMA PB 1 – Panelboards
B. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
C. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers
D. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
E. UL 67 – Panelboards
F. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
G. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 29-M1989 - Panelboards and Enclosed Panelboards
H. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 5-M91 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers
I. Federal Specification W-P-115C - Type I Class 1
J. Federal Specification W-C-375B/Gen - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch
Circuit And Service.
K. Federal Specification W-C-865C - Fusible Switches
L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
M. ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials
1.3 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Approval documents shall include drawings. Drawings shall contain overall
panelboard dimensions, interior mounting dimensions, and wiring gutter
dimensions. The location of the main, branches, and solid neutral shall be
clearly shown. In addition, the drawing shall illustrate one line diagrams with
applicable voltage systems.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Company specializing in manufacturing of panelboard products with a minimum
of fifty (50) years documented experience.
B. Panelboards shall be manufactured in accordance with standards listed Article
1.2 - REFERENCES.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period.
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 26 24 17 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
B. Handle carefully to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure,
and finish.
C. Store in a clean, dry environment.
Maintain factory packaging and, if required, provide an additional heavy canvas
or heavy plastic cover to protect enclosure(s) from dirt, water, construction
debris, and traffic.
1.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer shall provide installation instructions and NEMA Standards
Publication PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance
of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
B. Refer to Sections 26 05 00 and 26 05 05 for additional requirements.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment free from defects in materials
and workmanship for the lesser of one (1) year from the date of installation or
eighteen (18) months from the date of purchase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D Company.
B. Cutler Hammer.
C. Or Approved Equal. Siemens brand equipment is not approved.
2.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Circuit Breaker Distribution Panelboard
1. Interior
a. Shall be rated 600 Vac or 250 Vdc maximum. Continuous main
current ratings as indicated on associated schedules and
drawings not to exceed 1200 amperes maximum. Panelboard bus
current ratings shall be determined by heat-rise tests conducted in
accordance with UL 67.
b. Provide UL Listed short circuit current ratings (SCCR) as indicated
on the associated drawings not to exceed the lowest interrupting
capacity rating of any circuit breaker installed with a maximum of
200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. Main lug and main breaker
panelboards shall be suitable for use as Service Equipment when
application requirements comply with UL 67 and NEC Articles
230-F and -G.
c. The panelboard interior shall have three flat bus bars stacked and
aligned vertically with glass reinforced polyester insulators
laminated between phases. The molded polyester insulators shall
support and provide phase isolation to the entire length of bus.
d. The bussing shall be fully rated with sequentially phased branch
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 26 24 17 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
distribution. Panelboard bussing rated 100 through 600 amperes
shall be plated copper. Bussing rated 800 amperes and above
shall be plated copper. Bus bar plating shall run the entire length
of the bus bar. The entire interleaved assembly shall be
contained between two (2) U-shaped steel channels, permanently
secured to a galvanized steel mounting pan by fasteners.
e. Interior trim shall be of dead-front construction to shield user from
all energized parts. Main circuit breakers through 800 amperes
shall be vertically mounted. Main circuit breaker and main lug
interiors shall be field convertible for top or bottom incoming feed.
f. A solidly bonded copper equipment ground bar shall be provided.
g. Solid neutral shall be equipped with a full capacity bonding strap
for service entrance applications. As scheduled, UL Listed
panelboards with 200% rated solid neutrals shall have plated
copper neutral bus for non-linear load applications. Gutter-
mounted neutral will not be acceptable.
h. Nameplates shall contain system information and catalog number
or factory order number. Interior wiring diagram, neutral wiring
diagram, UL Listed label, and Short Circuit Current Rating shall be
displayed on the interior or in a booklet format. Leveling
provisions shall be provided for flush mounted applications.
2. Group mounted circuit breakers through 1200A
a. Circuit breaker(s) shall be group mounted plug-on with mechanical
restraint on a common pan or rail assembly.
b. The interior shall have three flat bus bars stacked and aligned
vertically with glass reinforced polyester insulators laminated
between phases. The molded polyester insulators shall support
and provide phase isolation to the entire length of bus.
c. Circuit breakers equipped with line terminal jaws shall not require
additional external mounting hardware. Circuit breakers shall be
held in mounted position by a self-contained bracket secured to
the mounting pan by fasteners. Circuit breakers of different frame
sizes shall be capable of being mounted across from each other.
d. Line-side circuit breaker connections are to be jaw type.
e. All unused spaces provided, unless otherwise specified, shall be
fully equipped for future devices, including all appropriate
connectors and mounting hardware.
3. Electronic trip molded case 100% rated circuit breakers.
a. All electronic circuit breakers shall have the following time/current
response adjustments: Long Time Pickup, Long Time Delay, Short
Time Pickup, Short Time Delay, Ground Fault Pickup Ground
Fault Delay and Instantaneous settings. Each adjustment shall
have discrete settings (fully adjustable) and shall be independent
of all other adjustments.
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 26 24 17 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
b. Circuit breaker trip system shall be a microprocessor-based true
RMS sensing designed with sensing accuracy through the
thirteenth (13th) harmonic. Sensor ampere ratings shall be as
indicated on the associated schedule and drawing.
c. Local visual trip indication for overload, short circuit and ground
fault trip occurrences.
d. Long Time Pickup indication to signal when loading approaches or
exceeds the adjustable ampere rating of the circuit breaker shall
be provided.
e. Communications capabilities for remote monitoring of circuit
breaker trip system, to include phase and ground fault currents,
pre-trip alarm indication, switch settings, and trip history
information shall be provided.
f. Circuit breaker shall be provided with Zone selective Interlocking
(ZSI) communications capabilities on the short-time and ground
fault functions compatible with all other electronic trip circuit
breakers and external ground fault sensing systems as noted on
schedules and drawings.
g. Furnish thermal magnetic molded case circuit breakers for 250A
frames and below.
4. Electronic trip molded case standard function 80% rated circuit breakers.
a. All electronic circuit breakers shall have the following time/current
response adjustments: Long Time Pickup, Long Time Delay, Short
Time Pickup, Short Time Delay, Ground Fault Pickup Ground
Fault Delay and Instantaneous settings. Each adjustment shall
have discrete settings (fully adjustable) and shall be independent
of all other adjustments.
b. Circuit breaker trip system shall be a microprocessor-based true
RMS sensing designed with sensing accuracy through the
thirteenth (13th) harmonic. Sensor ampere ratings shall be as
indicated on the associated schedule and drawing.
c. Local visual trip indication for overload, short circuit and ground
fault trip occurrences
d. Long Time Pickup indication to signal when loading approaches or
exceeds the adjustable ampere rating of the circuit breaker shall
be provided.
e. Furnish thermal magnetic molded case circuit breakers for 250A
frames and below.
5. Thermal magnetic molded case circuit breakers
a. Molded case circuit breakers shall have integral thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole.
b. Ampere ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings.
6. Enclosures
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 26 24 17 - 5
01/2023
254.07.100
a. Type 1 Boxes
1) Boxes shall be galvanized steel constructed in accordance
with UL 50 requirements. Zinc-coated galvannealed steel
will not be acceptable.
2) Boxes shall have removable blank end walls and interior
mounting studs. Interior support bracket shall be provided
for ease of interior installation.
3) Maximum enclosure dimensions shall be 44” wide and 9.5”
deep.
b. Type 1 Trim Fronts
1) Trim front steel shall meet strength and rigidity
requirements per UL 50 standards. Shall have an ANSI 49
medium gray enamel electrodeposited over cleaned
phosphatized steel.
2) Trim front shall be 4-piece with door available in surface
mount. Trim front door shall have rounded corners and
edges free of burrs. A clear plastic directory cardholder
shall be mounted on the inside of the door.
3) Locks shall be cylindrical tumbler type with larger
enclosures requiring sliding vault locks with 3-point
latching. All lock assemblies shall be keyed alike. One (1)
key shall be provided with each lock.
c. Type 4, and 12
1) Enclosures shall be constructed in accordance with UL 50
requirements. Enclosures shall be painted with ANSI 49
gray enamel electrodeposited over cleaned phosphatized
steel.
2) All doors shall be gasketed and be equipped with a
tumbler type vault lock and two (2) additional quarter turn
fasteners. A clear plastic directory cardholder shall be
mounted on the inside of door. All lock assemblies shall
be keyed alike. One (1) key shall be provided with each
lock.
3) Maximum enclosure dimensions shall not exceed 44” wide
and 14.5” deep.
7. Surge Protection Devices: Provide surge suppression equipment (TVSS)
for each panelboard and service entrance panelboards. See Section 26
35 53.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 26 24 17 - 6
01/2023
254.07.100
A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, NEMA
PB 1.1 and NEC standards.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect complete installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage,
and grounding.
B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits
in the panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20% of each other. Maintain
proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
C. Check tightness of bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using
calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written
specifications.
END OF SECTION
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR 26 24 18 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 24 18 - DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, appliances, and perform all operations in
connection with, and complete in strict accordance with, this section of specifications
and the applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract for
the following work:
1. Low Voltage Metal Enclosed Distribution Switchgear.
2. Circuit breakers shall be draw out type with electronic trip units as specified with trip
ratings and features as shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Circuit
breakers shall have interrupting, close and latch, and 30-cycle withstand ratings
that meet the application requirements.
3. Standard NEMA circuit breakers are approved for this project.
1.2 APPLICABLE SECTIONS
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, alternates and Addenda,
applicable drawings and the technical specification including but not limited to the
following:
1. Section 26 05 00 - Electrical General Requirements.
2. Section 26 35 53 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppression.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. Equipment shall be designed, tested and manufactured according to the following:
1. ANSI C37.20.1 – Metal Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear
2. ANSI C37.51 – Testing of Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breaker
Switchgear.
3. NEMA SG-5 – Power Switchgear Assemblies
4. UL 1558 – Switchgear Assemblies
B. Main and Feeder Circuit Breakers shall be designed, tested and manufactured to the
following:
1. ANSI C37.13 – Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used In Equipment
2. ANSI C37.16 – Preferred Rating, Related Requirement And Application
Recommendations For Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and AC Power Circuit
Protectors.
3. ANSI C37.50 – Testing Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers
4. NEMA SG-3 – Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
5. UL1066 – Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR 26 24 18 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions
show; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and
number of bus-bars per phase, neutral if present, and ground; and switchgear
instrument details.
C. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip
ratings, fault current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and
components.
D. Test Reports: Indicate results of factory production tests.
E. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency specified under standards. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of
Product.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 26 05 05.
B. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of
replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and
intervals.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this
Section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 26 05
00.
B. Deliver in 48" inch maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped for protection
and mounted on shipping skids.
C. Accept switchgear on site. Inspect for damage.
D. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR 26 24 18 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
E. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift
only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to
switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NEMA PB 2 service conditions during and after installation of switchgear.
B. Switchboard lay-outs shall not exceed the space allocations detailed on the drawings.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify that all switchgear fit in building space provided prior to rough-in.
1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Provide two of each key.
1.12 RATINGS
A. The ampacity of the Low Voltage Switchgear shall be as shown in the Drawings.
B. The short circuit current rating of the system shall as shown on the Drawings. All
circuit interruption shall be accomplished by the circuit breaker and without the aid of
limiter fuses. The Short time rating shall also be a function on the desired selectivity of
the electrical system. Short time ratings shall be equal to interrupting ratings for
systems delivering up to 42k amperes available fault current.
C. The assembly is designed for use on 60 Hz electrical systems up to 600 VAC. The
assembly shall be properly braced to the ratings of the circuit breaker installed within
the assembly.
D. Any items not specifically mentioned but which are obviously necessary for proper
operations are implied in this specification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D Power - Zone 4.
B. Cutler Hammer – Magnum DS.
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR 26 24 18 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
C. Or Approved Equal. Siemens brand equipment is not approved.
2.2 STRUCTURE
A. General
1. Each steel section shall contain one or more individual circuit breakers, or
instrumentations compartments, and a rear compartment for the buses and
outgoing cable connections.
2. Rigid removable steel base channel shall be provided at the front and rear of each
section.
3. The finish shall be medium gray ANSI #49.
B. Dimensions
1. Section widths should be 22, 30, or 36’ wide dependent on the size of the circuit
breakers being installed.
2. The lineup shall provide adequate wire bending space for mains and feeders
breakers using up to 750 kcmil wires.
3. Section depth shall be 54” minimum when using 800A feeders. Additional depth to
the lineup shall be for the sole purpose of additional wire bending and conduit
space.
4. Adequate conduit space hall be provided to allow all conductors to exit the structure
at the same end.
C. Moving and Handling
1. The Lineup shall be divided into shipping splits not to exceed 64” wide and shall be
capable of being lifted overhead or by a forklift.
2. Each shipping split shall be provided with removable lifting straps.
3. Removable Base Channels shall be provided with prying slots for ease of final
positioning at the job-site.
4. For circuit breakers, an overhead or floor mounted lifter shall be provided to ease
the installation or removal of circuit breakers in excess of 75 pounds.
2.3 BREAKER COMPARTMENT
A. Circuit Breakers
1. Each circuit breaker shall be mounted in its own barriered compartment.
2. Feeder circuit breakers rated 2000A or less shall be capable of being mounted in
the uppermost compartment without de-rating.
3. Operational buttons on the circuit breaker as well as the trip unit and the display
shall be accessible without opening the breaker compartment door.
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR 26 24 18 - 5
01/2023
254.07.100
4. Circuit breakers of like sizes and rated 1600A or less shall be interchangeable as
standard. Circuit breakers of lower interrupting ratings shall be mechanically
prohibited from being placed in the cell.
5. Prepared spaces shall be totally complete, include the racking mechanism,
bussing, and secondary contacts as necessary, so that a circuit breaker of the
correct frame size can be installed with no modifications required.
6. Circuit Breaker and prepared space compartments shall be “keyed” such that a
breaker cannot be incorrectly installed with respect to Interrupting rating, Frame
Size, or secondary connections.
B. Secondary Connections
1. All customer secondary control and communications connections shall be made
from the front of the switchgear lineup.
2. A dedicated wiring area accessible from the front shall allow easy access to all
control or communications terminations.
3. Control Connections shall be optional ring tongue terminals. All control wire shall
be 14 gage SIS.
4. Dedicated conduit entry for control wires shall be provided at the top and bottom of
each section, capable of landing up to 3 each 1 ½” conduits and accessible from
the front.
5. All interconnections between sections at shipping splits shall use locking-pull apart
terminal blocks.
6. All secondary and communication wiring shall be securely fastened to the
switchgear without the use of adhesive backed wire anchors.
C. Instrumentation
1. Where additional space is required for instrumentation, CPT’s, metering, etc., a
barriered instrumentation compartment shall be used.
2. The instrumentation compartment shall not inhibit the routing of control or
communication wires.
2.4 BUSING AND CABLE COMPARTMENT
A. Busing
1. All vertical and horizontal distribution bussing shall be rated for the full ampacity of
the lineup.
2. All bus joints consist of Grade 5 hardware and conical spring (e.g. Belleville)
washers to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short circuits. All joints
shall consist of a minimum of 2 bolts.
3. Busing shall be copper plated along its entire length.
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR 26 24 18 - 6
01/2023
254.07.100
4. Busing shall be braced to withstand the instantaneous interrupting rating of the
main breaker(s) or 42kA minimum.
5. Optional barriers shall be available to separate the busing and cable compartment.
B. Cable Compartment
1. All incoming or outgoing power conductors shall be routed through this area.
2. Feeder Breakers shall have adequate wire bending space regardless of the
interrupting rating.
3. Conduit area for each section shall be a minimum of 17” wide and provide
adequate depth for all section conduits. Select depth based on the tables below:
4. Barriers separate the busing and cable compartments shall be provided.
2.5 LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit Breakers
1. The circuit breaker shall be Square D Masterpact NW Low Voltage Power Circuit
Breaker, Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS, or equal, and listed to UL 1066.
2. Circuit breakers shall be suitable for the required instantaneous rating without the
use of current limiting fuses.
3. All circuit breakers shall have field interchangeable electric accessories including
shunt trip, spring release, electrical operator, auxiliary contacts, and Trip Unit.
4. All secondary connections shall be made directly to the front of the circuit breaker
cradle.
5. Each circuit breaker shall have built in contact temperature and contact wear
sensors.
B. Padlocking provisions shall be furnished to receive up to three padlocks when circuit
breaker is in the disconnected position, positively preventing unauthorized closing of
the circuit breaker contacts.
C. Provisions for up to two key locks shall be furnished allowing locking in the
disconnected position. Provisions for locking in the connected, test and disconnected
position by padlock or key lock shall be available as an option.
D. Located on the face of the circuit breaker shall be buttons, with optional lockable clear
cover to open and close the circuit breaker and indicators to show the position of the
circuit breaker contacts, status of the closing springs, and circuit breaker position in
cell. An indicator shall show “charged-not OK to close” if closing springs are charged
but circuit breaker is not ready to close. Circuit breaker racking system must have
positive stops at the connected, test, disconnected and withdrawn positions.
E. Circuit breaker must be equipped with an interlock to discharge the stored energy
spring before the circuit breaker can be withdrawn from its cell. Circuit breaker must
provide a positive ground contact check between the circuit breaker and cell when the
accessory cover is removed while the circuit breaker is in the connected, test or
disconnected positions.
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR 26 24 18 - 7
01/2023
254.07.100
F. Circuit breaker shall provide long service life. The 3200 A circuit breaker frame and
those of lower ratings must be certified to perform a minimum of 10,000 operations
without maintenance. The 4000 A and 5000 A frames must be certified to 5,000
operations without maintenance.
G. Trip Units
1. Circuit breaker trip system shall be a MICROLOGIC, Digitrip, or equal electronic trip
unit.
2. All trip units shall be removable to allow for field upgrades.
3. Trip Units shall incorporate “True RMS Sensing”, and have LED long-time pickup
indications.
4. Trip unit functions shall consist of adjustable long-time pickup and delay, short-time
pickup and delay, instantaneous neutral protection and ground-fault pickup and
delay.
5. Adjustable long-time pickup (Ir) delay shall be available in an adjustable rating plug
that is UL Listed as field-replaceable. Adjustable rating plug shall allow for nine
long-time pickup settings from 0.4 to 1 times the sensor plug (In). Other adjustable
rating plugs shall be available for more precise settings to match the application.
Long-time delay settings shall be in nine bands from 0.5-24 seconds at six times Ir.
6. Short-time pickup shall allow for nine settings from 1.5 to 10 times Ir. Short-time
delay shall be in nine bands from 0.1-0.4 I 2 t ON and 0-0.4 I 2 t OFF.
7. Instantaneous settings on the trip units with LSI protection shall be available in nine
bands from 2 to 15 times In. The Instantaneous setting shall also have an OFF
setting when short-time pick-up is provided.
8. All trip units shall have the capability for the adjustments to be set and read locally
by rotating a switch.
9. Trip unit shall provide local trip indication and capability to indicate local and remote
reason for trip, i.e., overload, short circuit or ground fault.
10. Ground fault protection shall be available for solidly grounded three-phase, three-
wire or three-phase, four-wire systems. Trip unit shall be capable of the following
types of ground-fault protection: residual, source ground return, and modified
differential. Ground-faulting sensing systems may be changed in the field.
11. Ground fault settings for circuit breaker sensor sizes1200 A or below shall be in
nine bands from 0.2 to 1.0 times In. The ground-faul settings for circuit breakers
above 1200 A shall be available for four-wire systems.
12. Neutral current transformers shall be available for four-wire systems.
13. Trip units shall be available to provide additional protection by offering adjustable
inverse definite minimum time lag (IDMTL). IDMTL provides optimized coordination
by the adjustment of the slope of the long-time delay protection.
14. Trip units shall be available to provide real time metering. Metering functions
include current, voltage, power and frequency.
H. Accessories
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR 26 24 18 - 8
01/2023
254.07.100
1. A test set shall be available to provide automatic function testing of the circuit
breaker. No disassembly of circuit breaker shall be required.
2.6 METERING AND INSTRUMENTATION
A. Metering:
1. The metering capabilities of the Circuit Breaker Trip Units shall be networked
together and be provided as a connection to the plant control system for
monitoring.
2. CT’s shall be appropriately sized for use.
3. On site set-up, commissioning, and system integration shall be included including
all travel, lodging, and meal expenses.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine area to receive switchgear to provide adequate clearance for switchgear
installation.
B. Check the concrete pads are level and free of irregularities.
C. Start work only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchgear in accordance with manufacturer’s written guidelines, the NEC, and
local codes.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and
grounding.
B. Measure, using a Megger, the insulation resistance of each bus section phase-to-
phase and phase-to-ground for one minute each, at minimum test voltage of 1000 Vdc;
minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 1 megaohms. NOTE: Refer to
manufacturer’s literature for specific testing procedures.
C. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using calibrated torque wrench per
manufacturer’s recommended torque values.
D. Physically test key interlock systems to check for proper functionality.
E. Test ground fault systems by operating push-to-test button.
3.4 ADJUSTING
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR 26 24 18 - 9
01/2023
254.07.100
A. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement per manufactures
specifications.
B. Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values as instructed by the
Architect/Engineer.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION
TERMINAL BLOCKS 26 26 00 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 26 00 - TERMINAL BLOCKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. This section covers terminal blocks for control and other wiring.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 26 05 00, and elsewhere in the
Contract Documents, prior to installation.
1.3 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Terminal blocks shall be Entrelec, Phoenix Contact, Weidmuller, or equal.
B. Surge protection blocks shall be MTL Surge Technologies, Series SD, or equal.
C. Power distribution blocks shall be Ilsco Corporation, or equal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TERMINAL BLOCKS:
A. Terminal blocks shall mount on standard DIN rail, and be of the size required for
conductors therein. A minimum of 25 percent spares shall be provided in each
terminal box. No more than 2 conductors shall be allowed per termination. Jumper bar
assemblies shall be installed for interconnecting terminal blocks, distributing power and
signal commons. Terminal blocks shall be U.L. rated for 600 Volts, and 30 Amps,
minimum.
B. Grounding terminal blocks shall be provided for instrumentation cable shields. The
terminal blocks shall have distinctive 2-color bodies, and shall be mounted to the DIN
rail with metal screw down type clamps, providing a positive ground connection. One
grounding terminal block shall be installed for every 2 instrument cables terminated.
Grounding terminal blocks shall be U.L. rated for 600 Volts, and 20 Amps, minimum.
C. Terminal blocks shall be available in a variety of colors, including red, green, blue,
gray, black, yellow, and orange.
D. DIN mount fuse holders shall have blown fuse indicators for EC and AC circuits. Fuse
holders shall be of the compression clamp type. Fuse holders shall be U.L. listed, and
rated for 600 Volts. Fuse sizes shall not exceed the U.L. current rating for the fuse
holders.
E. DIN rail shall be prepunched, zinc bichromate plated steel. Symmetrical DIN rail shall
be 35 mmX7.5mm, minimum.
F. Terminal blocks for 4 to 20 milliamp signals shall have knife disconnect switches, and
accessible test points for testing and measurement of current loop signals, without the
need for removing wire terminations.
2.2 SURGE PROTECTION BLOCKS (SPB):
TERMINAL BLOCKS 26 26 00 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
A. Analog inputs and outputs shall be terminated at surge protection blocks (SPB). He
SPBs shall be designed for a working voltage of 32 volts, and shall be fused.
B. SPBs shall provide full hybrid line to line protection, and shall have a GDT rating of
10,000 A (8/20us pulse waveform).
C. SPBs shall be UL94 V-2 listed.
2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS (PDB):
A. PDBs shall be Electro-tin plated and manufactured from high strength 6061-T6
aluminum alloy.
B. PDBs shall be UL Recognized rated 90º and CSA Certified.
C. PDBs shall provide flexibility in using the connector as an in line splice or to reduce
conductor size.
D. PDBs shall be rated for 600 Volts and dual rated for Copper and Aluminum Conductor.
E. PDBs shall have the sizes and ratings per NEC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Each terminal block and fuse holder shall be identified with the circuit number, or
conductor number, corresponding to the identification appearing on the shop Drawings
for the equipment, or system.
B. Terminal block and fuse holder markers shall be computer printed plastic-type, with
permanent markings.
C. End clamps and end sections shall be installed on each terminal block and fuse holder
assembly.
D. Terminal blocks for DC voltages shall be blue, and AC voltages shall be gray.
END OF SECTION
FUSES 26 28 13 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 28 13 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, appliances, and perform all operations in
connection with, and complete in strict accordance with, this section of specifications
and the applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract
for the following work:
B. Fuses.
C. Spare Fuse Cabinet.
1.2 APPLICABLE SECTIONS
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions,
Alternates and Addenda, applicable drawings and the technical specifications
including but not limited to the following:
1. Section 26 05 00 - Electrical General Requirements
2. Section 26 05 19 – Conductors and Cables
1.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Bussmann.
B. Other acceptable manufacturers: Gould Shawmut, Little Fuse.
C. All fuses shall be of one manufacturer. Fuses shall have a 200,000 ampere RMS
symmetrical interrupting rating unless noted otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSE TYPES AND RATINGS
A. Fuses from 0 to 600 ampere for each circuit serving a single motor shall be UL Class
RK5 dual-element Low Peak, LPN-RK (250 volt), LPS-RK (600 Volt).
B. All other fuses in the 0 to 600 ampere range shall be UL Class RK5, dual-element,
time delay, Iow peak, LPN-RK (250 volt), LPS-RK (600 Volt).
C. Fuses larger than 600 ampere shall be UL Class L with time delay, Hi Cap, KRP-C.
D. High voltage fuses - see drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Spare fuses shall be furnished for all fuse types. Spares shall amount to 10% of
FUSES 26 28 13 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
installed fuses with a minimum of one set of each fuse type and ampere rating. The
set shall equal the number of poles in the appropriate switch.
B. Provide Spare Fuse Cabinet equal to Bussmann for storing spare fuses. Mount on
wall in Equipment Room as directed by the ENGINEER.
END OF SECTION
PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26 29 23 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 29 23 - PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A.Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install, place in
operation and field test variable frequency drive. With active front-end harmonics
mitigation.
B.The adjustable frequency controller shall be a flux vector sine-wave, pulse width
modulated (PWM) design. A modulation method which incorporates “gear changing” is not
acceptable. The final responsibility of the completed drive system is that of the
manufacturer. One manufacturer shall provide all drives systems under this contract. The
drive systems shall be manufactured within the United State of America to alleviate
concerns of future spare part availability and technical support. All drive systems shall be
purchased and furnished by the CONTRACTOR.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE STANDARDS
A.The entire VFD system as described herein shall be assembled and factory tested to
assure a properly coordinated system.
B.Codes: Provide equipment is full accordance with the latest applicable rules, regulations,
and standards of:
1.Local Laws and Ordinances.
2.State and Federal Laws.
3.National Electrical Code (NEC).
4.Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
5.American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
6.National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA).
7.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
C.The complete drive system shall be UL listed.
D.The manufacturer will have a minimum of 12 years experience in Integrated Bi-polar
Transistor technology.
1.3 ACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
A.Schneider Electric
B.Toshiba
PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26 29 23 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.Submittals shall conform in all respect to this section.
B.Submittals shall be prepared specifically for this project by the VFD manufacturer. For this
specific application submittal package will be due three weeks upon request.
C.Submittal information shall include, but not be limited to:
1.Equipment dimensions, including stub-up locations, shipping split and shipping
weights.
2.Approval electrical drawings, termination drawings and component location diagrams.
3.Manufactures equipment specification.
4.Catalog cut sheets of major components.
5.Spare parts list, per Paragraph 3.03.
6.Certifications, including:
a.Warranty, per section 1.04
b.Efficiencies, per section 2.02. A.1.
c.Harmonic distortion analysis study, per section 2.01E.
1.5 WARRANTY
A.All equipment furnished under this section shall be warranted for all parts and labor by the
CONTRACTOR and the original equipment manufacturer for a period of not less than one
(1) year from the date of startup.
B.The manufacturer shall meet the quality and program requirements of ISO 9001.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.Any modification to the standard product is disallowed. Distributors and panel
manufactures changes to the VFD products are specifically disallowed.
B.The VFD system shall consist of an active front-end harmonic filter unit, converter section,
output inverter and control logic. All components shall be wired and tested together as a
complete system. The labor and materials for field interconnection of the system are to be
provided by the VFD manufacturer. Each drive shall be designed for stand alone operation.
Multiple drive units shall not utilize shared components. The drive shall be housed in a free
standing, front accessible, general purpose indoor enclosure rated NEMA 12, gasketed, with
fans and filters. Cabinets shall be single or multi-bay, sheet steel with hinged doors. Doors will
have concealed hinges with lockable through-the-door handle operator mechanism.
Provisions shall be made for top or bottom entry/exit of incoming line power cables, outgoing
load cables and control wiring. All VFD’s shall include DC link reactors.
PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26 29 23 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
C.Each VFD shall have a molded case, circuit breaker type main power disconnect switch, with
an external operating handle. The circuit breaker and the drive unit shall have a minimum
short circuit rating of 42,000 amperes RMS symmetrical interrupting capacity and shall be
labeled in accordance with UL Standard 489.
D.The following safety features shall be standard on all drives:
1.Provisions to padlock main disconnect handle in the “OFF” position.
2.Mechanical interlock to prevent opening cabinet door with disconnects in the “ON”
position, or moving disconnect to the “ON” position while the unit door is open.
3.Auxiliary contact on main disconnects to isolate control when fed from external source.
4.Barriers and warning signs on terminals that are energized with the power disconnect
“OFF”.
E.Any VFD over 60 horsepower shall meet all requirements as outlined in the latest edition of
IEEE 519 for each individual and total harmonic voltage and current distortion and as
indicated in this specification. As per Table 10.2 of IEEE 519-2014, individual or
simultaneous operation of the VFD’s shall not add more than 3% total voltage harmonic
distortion while operating at full load and speed from the utility source, or more than 5%
while operating from a standby generator (if applicable).
1.The VFD manufacturer cannot predict or be responsible for pre-existing voltage
distortion on the line or distribution from sources supplied by others. Maximum input
voltage unbalance shall be .5% as defined in NEMA MG1 section 14.35.2.
2.As per Table 10.3 of IEEE 519-2014, maximum allowable total harmonic current
demand distortion limits for each VFD operation at full load and speed shall not exceed
5% as calculated and measured at the point of common coupling Isc/II>20).
3.The point of common coupling for all harmonic calculation and field measurement for
both voltage and current distortion shall be defined as the main bus feeding each drive.
4.The short circuit current used for harmonic calculations shall be defined as the total
full load current with all VFD’s operating multiplied by twenty. Example (5) 100 HP
VFD’s Full load current = 5 x 126 amps = 630 amps. Short circuit current = 20x 630
amps = 12600 amps.
5.If harmonic filters are required to meet these requirements, the VFD manufacturer
must provide as a minimum 5th, 7th, and 11th harmonics filters and is responsible for the
design and manufacturing of the filters. The vendor must supply cabling and
installation for the filters. The filters are to be provided with a separate contactor such
that the VFD can operate in the event of a filter failure. Failure of a filter shall not cause
the entire drive system to shutdown.
F.Harmonic compliance shall be verified with onsite field measurement of both the voltage
and current harmonic distortion on the main bus of the VFD termination without the VFD in
operation. A recording of harmonic analysis displaying individual and total harmonic
currents and voltage must be utilized.
G.VFD system shall maintain a 95 minimum true powerfactor throughout the entire speed
range.
PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26 29 23 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
H.Displacement power factor shall be .95 percent or higher throughout the entire operating
speed range, measured at drive input terminals.
I.For motors over 250HP, the drive shall include an RTD monitoring module which shall
monitor 8 – 100 ohm platinum RTD’s in the motor. The RTD module shall provide a trip and
an alarm contact. The RTD alarm contact shall cause an alarm light to illuminate on the VFD
front panel. The RTD Trip contact shall cause the VFD to trip, and send the trip status to the
PLC. The alarm and trip contacts shall be settable and adjustable to variable trip and alarm
settings. Motors 20HP to 250HP shall include a thermal switch for shutdown.
J.Variable Frequency Drive Ratings:
1.The minimum drive efficiency for NEMA 12 enclosed drive shall be 95.0 percent or
better at motor base speed and rated torque. Losses shall include all control power
and cooling system losses associated with the drive as well as the input phase shifting
transformer.
2.Input Power rating shall be 400-460VAC, plus 10 percent, minus 10 percent, 3 phase, 60
Hz, plus 2, minus 2 Hertz.
3.The voltage ride through of the VFD shall be capable of sustaining continued operation
with a 40% dip in normal line voltage. Output speed may decline only if current limit rating
of VFD is exceeded.
4.Power loss ride through of the VFD shall be capable of a minimum of 3 cycles loss.
5.The output power shall be HP, 460 Volt, 3 Phase, 60 Hertz, per motor nameplate FLA
at installed altitude plus service factor of 25%.
6.The operating ambient Temperature -10 to 40oC (14 to 104oF).
7.The storage temperature shall be -20 to 60oC (4 to 140oF).
8.The relative operating humidity shall be 0 to 95% Non-Condensing.
9.The site operating vibration condition shall be acceleration at 0.6 G maximum (10-55 Hz).
Amplitude at 0.1mm maximum (50-100 Hz).
10.Drives shall be sized/de-rated to operate at full load at an elevation of 4700 ft.
11.Power unit rating bases shall be 100% rated current continuous and 120% for one minute
at rated temperature.
2.2 CONSTRUCTION
A.The controller shall produce an adjustable AC voltage / frequency output. It shall have an
output voltage regulation to maintain correct output V/Hz ratio despite incoming voltage
variations.
B.The controller shall have a continuous output current rating of 100% of the motor
nameplate rating as a minimum.
PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26 29 23 - 5
01/2023
254.07.100
C.The converter section will incorporate three distinct diode bridges configured in a series
connection. The series connection will provide continued balance of the bridges to insure
the harmonic litigation remains consistent throughout the life of the drive. The variable
frequency drive system shall also include a filter network and a transistorized inverter
section. The drive manufacturer will also manufacture the Transistors used in the inverter
section of the drive to reduce harmonics to flow back to the incoming power source.
D.The inverter output shall be generated by to be Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT’s)
with a PIV rating of 1200 volts minimum. The VFD shall not induce excessive power losses in
the motor. The worst case RMS motor lines current measured at rated speed, torque and
voltage shall not exceed 1.05 times the rated RMS motor current for a pure sin wave
operation.
E.The controller (s) shall be suitable for operating standard NEMA Design-B induction squirrel-
cage motor having a 1.15 service factor. The drive can be located up to 300 feet from the
motor without requiring special cabling or a separate motor protection devices. Motor
nameplate information shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR, prior to contract award to the
VFD manufacture to properly size the inverter drive to be sized + 1 standard size in HP over
that of the motor, and ALSO de-rated for altitude of the project location. In the future, is shall
be possible to substitute any standard inverter rate motor (equivalent house power, voltage
and RPM) in the field. Output filters shall be installed for motors over 300 foot from VFD.
F.The control logic section shall be fully digital and not require analog adjustment pots or fixed
selector resistors. A power failure will not necessitate a reload of any drive parameter or
configuration.
2.3 BASIC FEATURES
A.The door of each adjustable speed drive system shall include an operator interface station
and key pad with a manual speed device. The interface shall be LED and have a minimum
of 4 – digit, 7 – segment display. Each drive shall have operator interface devices as called
out in the drawings.
B.For safety the drive will require manual restart for customer programmable faults. The fault
displays shall include over current, over voltage, heat sink overheat, load side short circuit,
load-side ground fault, inverter overload, stator over-current during start-up, load-side over
current during start-up, EEPROM error, RAM error, ROM error, communication error,
(Dynamic braking resistor over current), Under voltage, low current, over torque, lose of
phase, and motor overload.
C.The door mounted key pad interface shall be capable of controlling the VFD and setting
the drive parameters. The key pad shall have the following programming features:
1.The digital display must present all diagnostic messages and parameters values in
English engineering units when accessed.
PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26 29 23 - 6
01/2023
254.07.100
2.The digital interface keypad shall allow the operator to enter exact numerical settings in
engineering units. A plain English user menu (rather than codes) shall be provided in
software in nonvolatile memory as a guide to parameter setting and reset table in the
field through the key pad. The drive set up parameters must be able to be transferred
to new boards to reprogram spare boards.
3.The VFD shall have the capabilities of communicating via network via modbus TC/IP to
the PLC. All status shall be communication to the PLC including 3 phase voltage, 3
phase current, speed, status alarms, errors, etc.
4.Programmable output relay contacts and inputs shall be rated for 250 VAC, 2 Amps. A
separate 24 VDC power supply (50 mA) shall be available to control exterior control
devices. Programmable analog output signals shall be available to meet system
requirements. Programmable analog input speed signals shall be available to accept a
speed command.
5.The principle output frequency shall be programmable from 0-400 Hz and acceleration
/ deceleration from .1 to 6000 seconds. The PWM carrier frequency shall be adjustable
from .5 to 15 kHz and shall be self adjusting.
6.The VFD shall have internal to the drive a proportional gain; integral gain anti-hunting
gain, lag time constant and PID error limit adjustments. This shall be programmable
through the key pad.
2.4 ENCLOSURE
A.All VFD components shall be factory mounted and wired on a dead front, grounded indoor
NEMA Type 12, gasketed enclosure. It shall be suitable for mounting on a concrete house
keeping pad. The steel enclosure shall have a minimum of two-layer of primer and one-
layer of industrial finished Sherwin Williams Precision enamel paint or equal.
B.A forced air cooling system will automatically start and stop as necessary to extend the life
of the fan.
C.VFD systems shall be stand alone system with an integral through the door mounted
disconnect switch operator.
D.The dimensions of the VFD enclosure shall be maximum 36” wide, 24” + 8” depth, 90”
height.
2.5 PROTECTIVE FEATURES AND CIRCUITS
A.The VFD shall have the following additional protective features that will protect against
damage to the motor, load conductor, contactors or solid state soft starts and the VFD
internal devices and electronics.
B.Three phase short circuit on the VFD output terminals.
C.Losses of input power due to opening VFD input disconnect device or loss of utility power
during VFD operation.
PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26 29 23 - 7
01/2023
254.07.100
D.A loss of one (1) phase of the input power shall cause the drive to trip off protecting the
drive systems electronics.
E.The VFD will run without connection to the motor load but have low current trip.
F.The VFD shall sense an output short circuit that may occur during operation.
G.The key pad display shall provide a minimum of the last 50 system faults.
H.There shall be stall protection on an overload condition with inverse time overcurrent trip.
Current limits shall be adjustable from 10 to 215% of the drive current.
2.6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
A.The following system configuring setting shall be provided and field adjustable, without
exception, through the keypad/display unit. Except for motor nameplate data, all
parameters must be adjustable while the processor is on-line and the drive is running.
1.Motor Nameplate Data.
2.Motor Full Load Amps.
3.Motor Frequency.
4.Number of poles.
5.Full Load RPM’s.
6.Motor Voltage.
7.Operating current limits. – Min/Max.
8.VFD Configuration Parameters.
9.Independent accel/decel rates.
10.Min./Max. speed (Frequency
11.Forward or Reverse operation.
12.Catch a spinning load selection.
13.Preset Speed capabilities.
14.Volts per Hertz ratio.
15.No load / Full Load boost.
16.Over current trip selection.
17.Frequency jump selection.
18.Programmable meter output signals (Hz. Speed, RPM, Voltage, Torque, PID feed
back, input/output power, and DC bus voltage.
B.Automatic Control
1.4-20 mA input control signal.
2.PID internal or external set point capabilities.
3.Programmable preset speed operational run conditions.
PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26 29 23 - 8
01/2023
254.07.100
4.Automatic load reduction during overload condition or soft stall.
5.Programmable loss of signal control: Stop, maintain speed or default to preset speed
or set point.
C.All drive setting adjustable and operation parameters shall be restored in a parameter log
which allows minimum and maximum points as well as the present set values. This
parameter log shall be accessible via a RS-232 or RS485 serial port or other
communications method as well as on the keypad or internal to the drive.
D.The drive shall have the following inputs/output features that will provide control and
monitoring of the VFD. The analog outputs shall be isolated as required by this
specification.
1.Three programmable analog outputs.
2.Two programmable analog inputs. The 4-20mA analog input speed reference signal
will be galvanically isolated. Calibration adjustments shall be provided by the keypad.
3.4-groups of 8 pattern runs or 32 pattern runs shall be available.
4.Three programmable digital output (form C, dry contact relays)
5.One potential pot input (three wire control) +10 V, wiper and common, if specified in
drawing.
6.System control program providing built–in drive control or application specific
configuration capabilities.
7.Input / output function shall match those indicated in the drawings.
8.Minimum / maximum dry contact output.
2.7 DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES AND FAULT HANDLING
A.The VFD shall include a comprehensive microprocessor based digital diagnostic system
that monitors its own control functions and displays faults and operating conditions.
B.A “Fault Log” shall be accessible through the keypad digital illustrations in English. The
display shall be capable of illustrating 50 past faults. Optional output shall be through the
serial port link. All drive possible fault conditions will be accessible through the fault log.
2.8 DRIVE OPTIONS
A.For drives located more then 300 feet from motor, the drive shall be modified to include a
factory or SI wired output line reactor.
B.Information included elsewhere:
1.Drive feed location – See Drawings.
2.Drive overall dimensions allowed – See Drawings.
3.Additional control information – See Drawings.
PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26 29 23 - 9
01/2023
254.07.100
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 FACTORY TESTING
A.The drives will be completely assembled, wired, and tested in the United States of
America. The following tests will be performed:
1.The manufacturer shall use the ISO-9001 standards in the purchase, engineering,
manufacturing and testing of the VFD system.
2.Upon completion of manufacture and assembly, the drives shall be subjected to a
complete factory test to demonstrate compliance with specified features and
characteristics of the specification. The purchaser at his option shall be able to witness
factory testing of his unit, with factory coordination.
3.The testing procedure shall be the manufacturer’s standard procedure (except for loss
of phase) to assure maintenance free service. The buyer shall be given a 5 day notice
prior to the start of factory testing for the buyer's representative to witness the testing.
4.All equipment, devices, instrumentation, and personnel required to perform the factory
tests shall be supplied by the manufacturer. Upon satisfactory completion of the test,
the seller shall upon request submit two (2) certified copies of the test report to the
buyer. Component failure during testing will require repeating any test associated with
the failure or modified components to demonstrate proper operation.
5.A loss of each phase testing shall be conducted at the factory to guaranty the safe and
orderly shutdown of the drive under load. These tests shall conclude that the drive will
not fail its electronic circuits or causes sever over heating of the bridges. These tests
shall not limit the life of the drive system. There are no exceptions to this test. This test
shall be performed and test reports provided to the ENGINEER prior to installation of
the drive system package.
3.2 STARTUP AND FIELD TESTING
A.The VFD manufacturer shall provide the services of a factory trained technician for startup
assistance, programming and testing. Verification of the VFD input harmonics voltage and
current distortion limits specified must be verified as part of the start-up and acceptance. If
harmonics distortion requirements are not met, it is the responsibility of the VFD supplier to
meet these specifications at the manufacturer’s expense. Meg-ohm testing will be done to
the load conductors and motor to verify condition of the equipment prior to startup. The
VFD manufactures shall certify the VFD and motor system as compatible. UL508
technicians shall not be allowed to perform startup procedures.
B.A 10% payment retention will be released upon factory field test verification of harmonic
specifications requirements and final test report and acceptance.
C.Spare Parts
1.The following spare parts shall be furnished. The net price per item shall be provided
with the request for proposal. Each spare part shall be package and identified by part
number and type for long term customer storage.
PULSE WIDTH MODULATED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26 29 23 - 10
01/2023
254.07.100
a.Three of each type of fuse rated 480 Volts or less. Manufacturer’s recommended +
1 of each fuse.
b.Two of each type of converter power semi-conductor. Manufacturer’s
recommended + 1 of each fuse.
c.Two of each type of inverter power semi-conductor. Manufacturer’s recommended
+ 1 of each fuse.
d.One of each type of control board, gate firing board and communication board.
Manufacturer’s recommended + 1 of each fuse.
e.One key pad assembly. Manufacturer’s recommended + 1 of each fuse.
f.OR Replacement VFD for items b. through e. Manufacturer’s recommended + 1 of
each fuse.
g.Five of each type of panel lamp. Manufacturer’s recommended + 1 of each fuse.
h.Three of each size MOV’s. Manufacturer’s recommended + 1 of each fuse.
END OF SECTION
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 35 53 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 263553 - SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
1.01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish and install the Surge Protective Device (SPD) equipment
having the electrical characteristics, ratings, and modifications as specified herein and as
shown on the contract drawings. To maximize performance and reliability and to obtain
the lowest possible let-through voltages, the ac surge protection shall be integrated into
electrical distribution equipment such as switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, busway
(integrated within bus plug), or motor control centers. Refer to related sections for surge
requirements in:
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
1.Section 262418 – Switchboards – Low Voltage
2.Section 262417 – Distribution Panelboards – Low Voltage
3.Section 262416 – Branch Circuit Panelboards - Low Voltage (Commercial Metering)
1.03 REFERENCES
1.SPD units and all components shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in
accordance with the latest applicable standards
A. ANSI/UL 1449 4th Edition or later
B.ANSI/UL 1283 5th Edition or later (type 2 applications)
C.IEEE C62.41.1
D.IEEE C62.41.2
a.IEEE C62.43-2005
E.IEEE C62.45-2002
F.IEEE C62.48-2005
G.IEEE C62.62-2010
H.UL 96A
I.NFPA 780
1.04 SUBMITTALS – FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL
1.The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:
A.Provide verification that the SPD complies with the required ANSI/UL 1449
4th Edition or later listing by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Compliance may
be in the form of a file number that can be verified on UL’s website www.ul.org,
the website should contain the following information at a minimum: model
number, SPD Type, system voltage, phases, modes of protection, Voltage
Protection Rating (VPR), and Nominal Discharge Current (In).
2.Where applicable the following additional information shall be submitted to the
engineer:
PART 1 - GENERAL
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 35 53 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
A.Descriptive bulletins
B.Product sheets
1.05 SUBMITTALS – FOR CONSTRUCTION
1.The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:
A.Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Section 1.04 and shall
incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
1.The manufacturer of the electrical distribution equipment shall be the manufacturer of
the SPD within the electrical distribution equipment.
2.For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 14001 and ISO
9001 or 9002 certified.
3.The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment
for a minimum period of twenty-five (25) years. When requested by the Engineer, an
acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating
compliance with this requirement.
4.The SPD shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
Directive 2011/65/EU and have a visible label showing compliance.
5.The SPD shall be UL 1449 current edition listed, 20 kA nominal discharge current,
Type 1 or Type 2 for use in UL 96A systems.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions. One (1) copy of manufacturer’s instructions shall be included with the
equipment at time of shipment.
1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each SPD shipped.
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
1.Eaton
The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products
that do not meet the specified ratings, features, and functions. Manufacturers listed
above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in
compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be
considered only if pre-approved by the Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date.
2.02 VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION – GENERAL
2.Electrical Requirements
PART 2 - GENERAL
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 35 53 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
A.Unit Operating Voltage – Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit
configuration.
B.Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) – The MCOV shall not be
less than 115% of the nominal system operating voltage.
C.The suppression system shall incorporate thermally protected metal-oxide
varistors (MOVs) as the core surge suppression component for the service
entrance and all other distribution levels. The system shall not utilize silicon
avalanche diodes, selenium cells, air gaps, or other components that may
crowbar the system voltage leading to system upset or create any
environmental hazards. End of life mode to be open circuit. Unit with end of life
short-circuit mode are not acceptable.
D.Unit shall operate without the need for an external overcurrent protection
device, and be listed by UL as such. Unit must not require external overcurrent
protective device or replaceable internal overcurrent protective devices for the
UL Listing.
E.Protection Modes – The SPD must protect all modes of the electrical system
being utilized. The required protection modes are indicated by bullets in the
following table:
Protection Modes
Configuration L-N L-G L-L N-G
Wye ●●●●
Delta N/A ●●N/A
Single Split Phase ●●●●
High Leg Delta ●●●●
A.Nominal Discharge Current (In) – All SPDs applied to the distribution system
shall have a 20kA In rating regardless of their SPD Type (includes Types 1 and
2) or operating voltage. SPDs having an In less than 20kA shall be rejected.
B.ANSI/UL 1449 4th Edition Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) – The maximum
ANSI/UL 1449 4th Edition VPR for the device shall not exceed the following:
Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347
L-N; L-G; N-G 700 1200 1500
L-L 1200 2000 3000
2.SPD Design
F.Maintenance Free Design – The SPD shall be maintenance free and shall not
require any user intervention throughout its life. SPDs containing items such
as replaceable single-mode modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable
batteries shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring any maintenance of any sort
such as periodic tightening of connections shall not be accepted. SPDs
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 35 53 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
requiring user intervention to test the unit via a diagnostic test kit or similar
device shall not be accepted.
G.Balanced Suppression Platform – The surge current shall be equally
distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum
performance. The surge suppression platform must provide equal impedance
paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating replaceable SPD modules
shall not be accepted.
H.Electrical Noise Filter – Each Type 2 unit shall include a high-performance
EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be
up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz using the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss
test method. Products unable able to meet this specification shall not be
accepted.
a.Type 2 units with filtering shall conform to UL 1283 5th Edition
b.Type 1 units shall not contain filtering or have a UL 1283 5th Edition Listing.
I.Internal Connections – No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards
shall be used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be
soldered, hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors.
J.Monitoring Diagnostics – Each SPD shall provide the following integral
monitoring options:
a.Protection Status Indicators - Each unit shall have a green / red solid-state
indicator light that reports the status of the protection on each phase.
i.For wye configured units, the indicator lights must report the status
of all protection elements and circuitry in the L-N and L-G modes.
Wye configured units shall also contain an additional green / red
solid-state indicator light that reports the status of the protection
elements and circuitry in the N-G mode. SPDs that indicate only
the status of the L-N and L-G modes shall not be accepted.
ii.For delta configured units, the indicator lights must report the status
of all protection elements and circuitry in the L-G and L-L modes
iii.The absence of a green light and the presence of a red light shall
indicate that damage has occurred on the respective phase or
mode. All protection status indicators must indicate the actual
status of the protection on each phase or mode. If power is
removed from any one phase, the indicator lights must continue to
indicate the status of the protection on all other phases and
protection modes. Diagnostics packages that simply indicate
whether power is present on a particular phase shall not be
accepted.
a.Remote Status Monitor (optional) – The SPD must include Form C dry
contacts (one NO and one NC) for remote annunciation of its status. Both the
NO and NC contacts shall change state under any fault condition.
b.Audible Alarm and Silence Button (optional) – The SPD shall contain an
audible alarm that will be activated under any fault condition. There shall also
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 35 53 - 5
01/2023
254.07.100
be an audible alarm silence button used to silence the audible alarm after it
has been activated.
c.Surge Counter (optional) – The SPD shall be equipped with an LCD display
that indicates to the user how many surges have occurred at the location. The
surge counter shall trigger each time a surge event with a peak current
magnitude of a minimum of 50 ± 20A occurs. A reset pushbutton shall also
be standard, allowing the surge counter to be zeroed. The reset button shall
contain a mechanism to prevent accidental resetting of the counter via a
single, short-duration button press. In order to prevent accidental resetting,
the surge counter reset button shall be depressed for a minimum of 2
seconds in order to clear the surge count total.
i.The ongoing surge count shall be stored in non-volatile memory. If
power to the SPD is completely interrupted, the ongoing count
indicated on the surge counter’s display prior to the interruption shall
be stored in non-volatile memory and displayed after power is
restored. The surge counter’s memory shall not require a backup
battery in order to achieve this functionality.
B.Thermal MOV Protection
The unit shall contain thermally protected MOVs. These self-protected
MOVs shall have a thermal protection element integrated with the MOV and
a mechanical disconnect with arc quenching capabilities in order to achieve
overcurrent protection of the MOV. The thermal protection assembly shall
disconnect the MOV(s) from the system in a fail-safe manner should a
condition occur that would cause them to enter a thermal runaway condition.
Fully Integrated Component Design – All of the SPD’s components and
diagnostics shall be contained within one discrete assembly. The use of plug in
single-mode modules that must be ganged together in order to achieve higher
surge current ratings or other functionality shall not be accepted.
K.Safety Requirements
The SPD shall minimize potential arc flash hazards by containing no single-
mode plug in user serviceable / replaceable parts and shall not require
periodic maintenance. SPDs containing items such as replaceable single-
mode plug in modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries shall not be
accepted. SPDs requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic
tightening of connections shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring user
intervention to test the unit via a diagnostic test kit or similar device shall not
be accepted.
a.SPDs designed to interface with the electrical assembly via conductors shall
require no user contact with the inside of the unit. Such units shall have any
required conductors be factory installed.
2.03 SYSTEM APPLICATION
3.The SPD applications covered under this section include distribution and branch
panel locations, busway, motor control centers (MCC), switchgear, and switchboard
assemblies. All SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C, B, and A environments.
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 35 53 - 6
01/2023
254.07.100
4.Surge Current Capacity – The minimum surge current capacity the device is capable
of withstanding shall be as shown in the following table:
Minimum surge current capacity based on ANSI / IEEE C62.41 location category
Category Application Per Phase Per Mode
C Service Entrance Locations
(Switchboards, Switchgear, MCC,
Main Entrance)
250 kA 125 kA
B High Exposure Roof Top Locations
(Distribution Panelboards)
160 kA 80 kA
A Branch Locations (Panelboards,
MCCs, Busway)
120 kA 60 kA
2.04 LIGHTING AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD REQUIREMENTS
3.The SPD application covered under this section includes lighting and distribution
panelboards. The SPD units shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for
application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category B environments.
A.The SPD shall not limit the use of through-feed lugs, sub-feed lugs, and sub-
feed breaker options.
B.SPDs shall be installed immediately following the load side of the main breaker.
SPDs installed in main lug only panelboards shall be installed immediately
following the incoming main lugs.
C.The panelboard shall be capable of re-energizing upon removal of the SPD.
D.The SPD shall be integral to the panelboard and connected directly to the bus.
Alternately, an integral SPD can be connected to a circuit breaker for
disconnecting purposes if a disconnect is required.
E.The SPD shall be included and mounted within the panelboard by the
manufacturer of the panelboard.
F.The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboard.
G.The complete panelboard including the SPD shall be UL67 listed.
2.05 SWITCHGEAR, SWITCHBOARD, MCC AND BUSWAY REQUIREMENTS
H.The SPD application covered under this section is for switchgear, switchboard,
MCC, and busway locations. Service entrance located SPDs shall be tested and
demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C
environments.
I.The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the switchgear, switchboard,
MCC, or busway
J.The SPD shall be factory installed integral to the switchgear, switchboard, MCC,
and/or bus plug at the assembly plant by the original equipment manufacturer
K.Locate the SPD on the load side of the main disconnect device, as close as
possible to the phase conductors and the ground/neutral bar.
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 35 53 - 7
01/2023
254.07.100
L.The SPD shall be connected through a disconnect (30A circuit breaker). The
disconnect shall be located in immediate proximity to the SPD. Connection
shall be made via bus, conductors, or other connections originating in the SPD
and shall be kept as short as possible.
M.The SPD shall be integral to switchgear, switchboard, MCC, and/or bus plug as
a factory standardized design.
N.All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the
equipment.
2.06 SERVICE ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS
O.Service entrance located SPDs shall be tested and designed for applications within
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C environments.EXECUTION
2.07 EXAMINATION
2.08 FACTORY TESTING
5.Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this section. All
tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA, IEEE, and UL
standards.
2.09 INSTALLATION
4.The installation of the SPD shall be factory installed integral to the distribution
equipment. The Contractor shall install all distribution equipment per the
manufacturer's recommendations, applicable electrical codes and the contract
drawings.
2.10 WARRANTY
6.The manufacturer shall provide a ten (10) year warranty (15 year warranty with
registration) that covers replacement of the complete unit from the date of shipment
against any SPD part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written
instructions and any applicable national or local electrical code.
END OF SECTION
HVAC SYSTEMS CONTROL 26 80 10 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 26 80 10 - HVAC SYSTEMS CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, appliances and perform all operations in
connection with, and complete in strict accordance with, this section of specifications
and the applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract for
the following work:
A. Electrical work associated with the systems including, but not necessarily limited
to:
1. All electrical installation including power distribution and special systems,
is included in the scope of the general contract. Of specific concern are
the control systems related to mechanical equipment. Responsibility for
the control work is divided between the project electrician (Division 26)
and his controls sub-contractor.
2. All electrical work shall be in accordance with Division 26.
3. Division 26 shall provide all power to and throughout the building, to
include motor control centers, breaker panels, and all other systems
designated to Division 26, and specified herein. Division 26 shall install
all conduit systems.
4. Division 26 shall run and connect all wiring and devices which power or
control motors and other mechanical or control devices. Where control
devices are located in power circuit, the controls contractor shall interrupt
the circuit in the mechanical equipment junction box, wire through the
control device and back to the junction box.
5. Breakers and disconnects, auxiliary contacts, standard pilot lights and
magnetic starters are the responsibility of Division 26 and shall be as
specified herein.
6. Auxiliary relays, low voltage transformers, control panel switches and
devices, thermostats, pressure switches, electric operated valves, etc.,
are the responsibility of Division 26.
7. All wiring shall terminate at labeled terminal strips.
1.2 APPLICABLE SECTIONS
The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, alternates and Addenda,
applicable drawings and the technical specification including but not limited to the
following;
A. Section 26 05 00 - Electrical General Requirements.
B. Section 26 05 19 – Conductors and Cables.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Reference Section 26 05 00
B. The controls contractor shall provide shop drawings for control system circuits.
HVAC SYSTEMS CONTROL 26 80 10 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Terminal Blocks: DIN rail mounted, modular type, single layer, non-fused.
Entreloc or approved equal.
B. Twisted, Shielded Pair Conductors for Control Wiring: Conductors shall be
copper with 100 % shielding, plenum rated. Beldon type 89418 or approved
equal. Cables shall be run in conduit.
C. Conductors: All control conductors shall be #14 AWG XHHN-2 minimum.
D. Labeling: All control conductors shall be labeled with a number corresponding to
the mechanical control system drawings. All labeling shall be heat-shrink ink
printed type by Panduit Pan-Quick LS3 system or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GROUNDING
A. Labeling: All control conductors shall be numerically labeled corresponding to the
mechanical control systems record drawings.
B. Grounding Lugs: Ground all shielded pair shields at one end only to avoid ground
loops. At terminal block connections, the shield shall be continuous from one
conductor to another and shall be isolated from the local ground plane.
C. Conductors: All conductors shall be run in conduit unless specifically noted
otherwise. The minimum size of conduit shall be 3/4" unless specifically noted
otherwise.
END OF SECTION
ACCESS CONTROL 40 91 20 - 1
05/2023
254.07.100
28 10 00 - 1
SECTION 281000 - ACCESS CONTROL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Section Includes:
1.Access control system.
B.Products Furnished and Installed under This Section:
1.Electric strike(s). (ES)
2.Request to Exit (REX)
3.Card Reader (CR)
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.Shop Drawings:
1.Project general notes.
2.Head-end hardware, equipment, and device locations.
3.Block diagram and cable/conduit routing illustrating end-to-end system wiring.
4.End-to-end system communications details.
5.Secondary power calculations
B.Field Quality-Control Submittals:
1.Field quality-control reports.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.Sample warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.Manufacturers' Published Instructions: Record copy of official installation and testing instructions
issued to Installer by manufacturer for the following:
1.Installation and programming instructions for operating system software, including all
applicable software add-ons.
2.Installation and programming instructions for antivirus and security protection software.
3.Manufacturer's recommended setup and testing procedure for operating system software and
applicable software add-ons.
4.Troubleshooting instructions for operating system software and applicable software add-ons.
5.Troubleshooting instructions for antivirus and security protection software.
ACCESS CONTROL 40 91 20 - 2
05/2023
254.07.100
28 10 00 - 2
6.Installation instructions for access control system servers.
7.Installation instructions for access control system DGPs.
8.Installation instructions for access control system input/output interface.
9.Installation instructions for access control system door controllers.
10.Installation instructions for access control system workstation.
11.Installation instructions for access control system power supplies and battery chargers.
12.Installation instructions for access control system printers.
13.Manufacturer's recommended testing and inspection procedure for operation of access
control system servers, panels, input/output interfaces, door controllers, and workstations.
14.Manufacturer's recommended testing and inspection procedure for operation of access
control system power supplies and battery chargers.
15.Manufacturer's recommended testing and inspection procedure for operation of access
control system printers.
16.Installation instructions for integrated credential readers and entry management devices.
17.Printing, programming, and handling instructions for access control credentials.
18.Installation instructions for electrified locking devices and accessories.
19.Installation instructions for egress management devices.
20.Manufacturer's recommended tests and inspections for integrated credential readers and
entry management devices.
21.Manufacturer's recommended tests and inspections for electrified locking devices and
accessories.
22.Manufacturer's recommended tests and inspections for egress management devices.
23.Manufacturer's recommended testing and inspection procedure for end-to-end operation of
access control system software, hardware, and integrated hardware devices.
B.Warranty documentation.
1.5 WARRANTY FOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
A.Special Installer Extended Warranty: Installer warrants that fabricated and installed access control
system performs in accordance with specified requirements and agrees to repair or replace
components that fail to perform as specified within extended-warranty period.
1.Extended-Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion; full coverage
for labor, materials, and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT FOR ACCESS CONTROL
A.1 x DSX-1040 Power Distribution Panel
ACCESS CONTROL 40 91 20 - 3
05/2023
254.07.100
28 10 00 - 3
B.1 x DSX-1042 Intelligent 2 Door Package
C.1 x DSX-1042 Intelligent Controller per 1-2 additional doors
D. HID Proximity ProxPro II 5455 125 kHz Wall Switch Proximity Reader per 1 door
1.URL: https://www.hidglobal.com/products/5455
E.If door has crash bar hardware:
1.h.e.s.|AssaAbloy 9800 Series Surface Mounted Electric Strike per 1 door
a.URL: https://www.hesinnovations.com/en/products/electric-strikes/9800-series
OR
2.h.e.s.|AssaAbloy 9400 Series Surface Mounted Electric Strike per 1 door
a.URL: https://www.hesinnovations.com/en/products/electric-strikes/9400-series
F.If door has standard door handle and door jamb hardware:
1.h.e.s.|AssaAbloy 8000 Series Electric Strike per 1 door
a.URL: https://www.hesinnovations.com/en/products/electric-strikes/8000-series
G.If door opens outward from building:
1.Alarm Controls|AssaAbloy 1200S, 1200L, 1200LB Single Magnetic Lock per 1 door
a.URL: https://www.alarmcontrols.com/en/products/magnetic-locks/1200s-1200l-1200lb/
2.Securitron|AssaAbloy PB2 Push Buttons (or equivalent) per 1 door
a.URL: https://www.securitron.com/en/products/push-buttons---egress-devices/pb2
3.Securitron|AssaAbloy XMS Exit Motion Sensor per 1 door
a.URL: https://www.securitron.com/en/products/push-buttons---egress-devices/xms
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
A.Acceptable Installing Companies
1.Peak Alarm of Salt Lake City, UT
2.Mountain Alarm of Orem, UT
B.Description: Access control system provides a means of regulating or controlling physical entry into
an area, or access to or use of a device by electrical, electronic, and/or mechanical means. Typical
access control system includes a card reader at a controlled door, which reads a user credential and
sends the collected data to a centrally located DGP over the cabling infrastructure. DGP may hold a
user database onboard or may communicate with a user database over the network. If user is
authorized for access at a controlled door, DGP signals the electronic lock at the door to unlock. If
user credential is not authorized according to user database, the door remains locked and access is
denied. In addition to card readers and electronic locks, access control systems may include various
other connected devices programmed for a desired function.
ACCESS CONTROL 40 91 20 - 4
05/2023
254.07.100
28 10 00 - 4
C.Performance Criteria:
1.Regulatory Requirements:
a.Components listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 72, by
qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended location and application.
b.Comply with NFPA 1, NFPA 730, NFPA 731, and ICC IBC.
c.Certification: Provide certificate, authorized under UL Certification Service, that access
control system installation complies with installation requirements of UL CCN ALOV.
2.Listing Criteria: UL CCN ALOV and UL CCN ALVY; including UL 294.
3.Consult Architect for resolution of conflicting requirements.
D.Selection of Access Control System Components:
1.Source Limitations: Obtain components for access control system from sources approved by
manufacturer warranting performance of entire system.
E.Special Techniques:
1.Comply with manufacturer's published instructions.
2.Mounting Heights: Mount field devices in accessible locations in accordance with United
States Access Board ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines standards.
3.Wiring Methods:
a.Cable Type: Cat 6 Cable
b.Analog Maximum Cable Length: 1000ft
c.Digital Maximum Cable Length: 300ft
F.Interfaces with Other Work / Systems Integration:
1.Coordinate installation of new access control system components with OWNER’S existing
System
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL OF ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.Field tests and inspections must be witnessed by OWNER.
B.Tests and Inspections:
1.Perform manufacturer's recommended tests and inspections for access control system
components.
2.Perform industry standard tests and inspections for power supplies, batteries, and other
standby power provisions.
3.Engage factory-authorized service representative to test end-to-end system connection and
functionality.
4.Verify monitoring of access control system status and diagnostics information.
ACCESS CONTROL 40 91 20 - 5
05/2023
254.07.100
28 10 00 - 5
C.Nonconforming Work:
1.Access control equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
2.Remove and replace defective units and retest.
D.Collect, assemble, and submit test and inspection reports.
3.3 SYSTEM STARTUP
A.Perform startup service.
1.Complete installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's published
instructions.
3.4 PROTECTION
A.After installation, protect access control system components from construction activities. Remove
and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use
prior to acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 281000
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 23 00 - 1
05/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 282300
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The video surveillance equipment will be provided and installed by the OWNER.
B. The conduits, and single-gang box near the video camera installation will be by the
CONTRACTOR.
C. The Cat 6 Cable terminated with RJ-45 Connectors will be provided and installed by the
CONTRACTOR from the single-gang box to the location of the network switch. Leave 2-4ft slack
in each cable run to accommodate the whip to the camera.
A. END OF SECTION 282300
01/2023 GEOSYNTHETICS
254.07.100 PAGE 31 05 19 - 1
SECTION 31 05 19
GEOSYNTHETICS
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
This Section covers the manufacturing and installation of geosynthetics.
RELATED WORK
Related work specified in other sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 31 22 00 Site Grading
Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines
Section 33 46 16 Sub-Drainage System
Section 33 16 00 Underground Water Storage Reservoir
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text to by basic designation
only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
B16.1/ASTM D 751 Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics
ASTM D 1777 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Textile Materials
ASTM D 3786 Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textile
Fabrics - Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method
ASTM D 4533 Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of
Geotextiles
ASTM D 4632 Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and
Elongation of Geotextiles
ASTM D 4751 Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening
Size of a Geotextile
ASTM D 4833 Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of
Geomembranes and Related Products
ASTM D 5034 Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength and
Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test)
ASTM D 5035 Standard Test Method for Breaking Force and Elongation
of Textile Fabrics (Strip Method)
ASTM D 5261 Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass per Unit Area
of Geotextiles
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Quality Control Certificates shall be provided at a minimum frequency of one (1) per
every hundred thousand (100,000) square feet of geosynthetics produced consecutively,
01/2023 GEOSYNTHETICS
254.07.100 PAGE 31 05 19 - 2
and which is supplied to the project. These certificates shall be supplied only for the
individual rolls of geosynthetics sampled and tested by the Manufacturer or his
representative. An individual Quality Control Certificate shall be provided for each roll of
geosynthetics provided to the project, which was not produced consecutively within the
hundred thousand (100,000) square foot lot. Quality Control Certificates shall be
submitted two (2) weeks prior to installation of geosynthetics and shall state that the
geosynthetics meets the requirements of these specifications for:
Mass per Unit Area
Grab Tensile Strength
Mullen Burst Strength
Equivalent Opening Size
Geosynthetics shall not be accepted and/or incorporated into the project without the
approved quality control documentation.
Certification stating that all geosynthetics is furnished by one manufacturer shall be
submitted two (2) weeks prior to installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Storage and handling of the geosynthetics shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
During shipment, handling and storage, the geosynthetics shall be protected from
ultraviolet light exposure, precipitation, or other inundation, mud, dirt, dust, puncture,
cutting or any other damage or deleterious conditions. To that effect, geosynthetics rolls
shall be shipped and stored in relatively opaque and watertight wrappings. An opaque
tarp shall be placed over all rolls where the outer wraps are removed or damaged and
where the geotextile is exposed. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the
replacement of damaged or unacceptable materials at no cost to OWNER.
Storage of Materials: A storage area shall be provided on site by OWNER. The storage
of geosynthetic materials shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR until the
completed installation is accepted by ENGINEER.
Damaged Geosynthetics: Damaged geosynthetic materials shall be repaired, if possible,
in accordance with these specifications, or shall be replaced at no additional cost to
OWNER.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Geosynthetics shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be included
as part of the various items to which it relates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
GEOSYNTHETICS (FILTER FABRIC)
The geosynthetics shall be 10-ounce (or heavier) non-woven filter fabric.
Geosynthetics shall be provided in rolls.
01/2023 GEOSYNTHETICS
254.07.100 PAGE 31 05 19 - 3
Each roll of geosynthetics shall be externally labeled or tagged to provide product
identification sufficient for field determination as well as inventory and quality control
purposes. Each roll shall be labeled with the name of manufacturer, roll number,
physical dimensions (length and width) and the material type. Any roll of geosynthetics
from which the labeling has been removed or has become illegible, shall not be used,
but shall be removed from the site and replaced at the expense of CONTRACTOR.
The geosynthetics shall be sampled, tested, and certified by the manufacturer for the
following properties:

MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRIC
Property Specification ASTM Test Method
Mass per Unit Area (min) 10.0 oz./S.Y. D-5261
Grab Tensile Strength (min) 250 lbs. D-4632
Elongation at Break 50 % D-4632
Tear Strength (min) 100 lbs D-4533
Apparent Opening Size
(maximum U.S. Sieve size)
100 mesh D-4751

Filter Fabric shall be Mirafi 1100N by TenCate, 250NW by U.S. Fabrics, or approved
equal.
GEOSYNTHETIC (DRAINAGE COMPOSITE)
Geosynthetic drainage composite materials shall be provided in rolls. The system shall
have a polypropylene dimpled core bonded to a non-woven filter fabric.
Each roll of geosynthetic material shall be externally labeled or tagged to provide
product identification sufficient for field determination as well as inventory and quality
control purposes. Each roll shall be labeled with the name of manufacturer, roll number,
physical dimensions (length and width) and the material type. Any roll of geosynthetic
material from which the labeling has been removed or has become illegible, shall not be
used, but shall be removed from the site and replaced at the expense of
CONTRACTOR.
The geosynthetic materials shall be sampled, tested, and certified by the manufacturer
for the following properties:

01/2023 GEOSYNTHETICS
254.07.100 PAGE 31 05 19 - 4
MATERIAL PROPERTIES PREFABRICATED DRAINAGE COMPOSITE
Property Specification ASTM Test Method
Mass per Unit Area (min) 15.8 oz./S.Y. D-5261
Grab Tensile Strength of
Geotextile (min)
100 lbs. D-4632
Puncture of Geotextile 30 lbs D-4833
AOS of Geotextile (min) 70 D-4751
Thickness 0.40 inch D-1777
Compressive Strength of Core 15,000 psf D-1621
Flow (gal/min/ft) 17.5 D-4716 @ 4000 psf and i=1

Prefabricated Drainage Composite shall be J-DRain 420 by JDR Enterprises, Inc.,
Delta-Drain 6000 by Cosella-Dorken, or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
DEPLOYMENT
Prior to deployment, CONTRACTOR shall inspect each roll of geosynthetics to verify
that the roll has a valid Quality Control Certificate and that has been previously approved
by ENGINEER.
Adjacent rolls shall be joined by overlapping the edges a minimum of twelve (12) inches.
The overlap shall be glued, sewn or otherwise fastened or secured at intervals no
greater than two feet along a line through the midpoint of the overlap. Additional
fasteners shall be installed as necessary to prevent slippage of the geosynthetics
regardless of location.
CONTRACTOR shall visually inspect the geosynthetics during deployment for holes,
tears or improperly formed geosynthetics. Defective areas shall be repaired or removed
and replaced by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to OWNER.
Smoking shall not be permitted on the geosynthetics.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to provide adequate loading (e.g., sand bags or
similar items that will not damage the underlying geosynthetic) to prevent movement of
the geosynthetics. Any damage to the geosynthetics shall be repaired at
CONTRACTOR’s expense.
The geosynthetics shall not be exposed to the sun and elements for more than 72 hours
unless the filter fabric has ultraviolet inhibitors. Fabric with ultraviolet inhibitors shall not
be exposed for a period in excess of the manufacturer’s recommendations, in which
case manufacturer shall provide prior to product delivery.
01/2023 GEOSYNTHETICS
254.07.100 PAGE 31 05 19 - 5
Any damage to the geosynthetics during installation or any fabric that has been exposed
to the sun or elements for longer than the 72 hours, or as specified by the manufacturer,
shall be replaced by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to observe placement of geosynthetics.
CONTRACTOR shall provide a daily inventory of all geosynthetics deployed to
ENGINEER.
REPAIRS
Any holes, tears or defective areas in the geosynthetics shall be repaired by patching
with same type of geosynthetics. The patch shall extend a minimum of twelve (12)
inches in all directions beyond the area to be repaired. The patch shall be secured in
place by gluing, sewing, or securing the fabric as per these specifications.
- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 GEOSYNTHETICS
254.07.100 PAGE 31 05 19 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING
254.07.100 PAGE 31 11 00 - 1
SECTION 31 11 00
CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND STRIPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
This Work shall consist of removing and disposing of all trees; shrubs; brush; stumps;
windfalls; roots; and other vegetation, including dead and decayed matter; and debris
that exist within the designated construction limits, borrow areas, and soil stockpile
areas and which are not specifically designated to remain.
DEFINITIONS
Clearing: Clearing operations shall consist of cutting, removing and disposing of trees,
shrubs, bushes, windfalls and other vegetation within the construction limits, borrow
areas, and soil stockpile areas. All brush shall be cut off within six inches of the ground
surface.
Grubbing: Grubbing operations shall consist of removing and disposing of stumps,
roots, debris deleterious materials, and other remains (such as organic and metallic
materials) which if left in place would interfere with proper performance or completion of
the contemplated work, would impair its subsequent use or form obstructions therein.
Organic material from clearing or grubbing operations shall not be incorporated in fill or
backfill.
Stripping: Stripping operations shall consist of removing all soil material containing sod,
grass, or other vegetation and topsoil to a minimum depth of six (6) inches from all areas
that will receive fill or over all trenches in field or yard areas.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Measurement and payment for clearing, grubbing and stripping shall not be paid as a
unit item, but considered as included in the contract unit or lump sum prices for the
various items of the contract to which it relates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
CLEARING
All trees, stumps, shrubs, bushes, windfalls and other vegetation (except such trees and
vegetation as may be indicated or directed by ENGINEER to be left standing) shall be
cut off to within six inches of the ground surface and shall be removed from the
construction limits. Trees and vegetation to be left standing shall be protected from
damage incident to clearing, grubbing, and construction operations by such means as
the circumstances require.
GRUBBING
All stumps, roots, debris, deleterious and other organic or metallic materials not suitable
for foundations shall be removed completely from the construction limits, borrow areas
01/2023 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING
254.07.100 PAGE 31 11 00 - 2
and soil stockpile areas. Unless otherwise permitted by ENGINEER, stumps shall be
removed completely. If any stumps are permitted to remain, they shall be cut off not
more than six inches above the ground.
STRIPPING
Soil material containing sod, grass, or other vegetation and topsoil shall be removed to a
minimum depth of six (6) inches from all areas to receive fill from the area within lines 5
feet outside all foundation walls, over all trenches, and from beneath pavement and curb
and gutter areas. Place and compact stripped material at east 2:1 slope of pump station
property, see plans, or in other locations acceptable to ENGINEER. Topsoil shall be
placed over areas which may be landscaped in future (outside of paved areas).
DISPOSAL
Open burning of combustible materials will be not allowed.
All trees, timber, stumps, roots, debris, shrubs, bushes, and other vegetation removed
during the clearing and grubbing operations shall be removed from the project site and
disposed of by CONTRACTOR subject to specific regulations imposed by laws and
ordinances and in a manner that will not create a public nuisance nor result in unsightly
conditions. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for acceptable disposition of
the material as well as for any damages resulting from his disposal operations.

- END OF SECTION -
01/2023 SITE GRADING
254.07.100 PAGE 31 22 00 - 1
SECTION 31 22 00
SITE GRADING
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
This Work consists of site grading and related activities.
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 45 00 Quality Control and Materials Testing
Section 01 50 00 Temporary Construction Utilities & Environmental Controls
Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines
Section 31 23 23 Excavation and Backfill for Structures
Section 32 11 23 Untreated Base Course
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of these Specifications to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3)
ASTM D 2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering
Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Site grading shall not be paid as a separate item but shall be paid as part of the items to
which it relates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
EMBANKMENT MATERIAL
Embankment materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487, the Unified
Soil Classification System (USCS) of CL, ML, SM, SC, SP or combinations of these
materials.
Embankment material shall be free from frozen lumps, rocks larger than 6 inches in the
larger dimension, roots, trash, lumber, or organic material. Suitability of material for
embankment in accordance with these criteria will be as determined by ENGINEER.
Use of natives as embankment material in fills. Outside the perimeter of those fills which
must be structural fill material (ie outside the 1:1 sloped fill lines which support pump
station footings and floor), fills may be native excavated earth (per goetech report) if it
meets fill compaction requirements.
01/2023 SITE GRADING
254.07.100 PAGE 31 22 00 - 2
Using native (onsite excavated earth) materials below AC paving and concrete. The
geotech report indicates if native excavated earth (ie native clay) is too wet or too dry
it may be impractical to achieve the required 96% minimum compaction required
below asphalt paving, sidewalks and curb & gutter. NOTE: Minimum compation is
based on the average of the two Proctor tests required in Section 31 23 23,
paragraph 2.1. Remove and replace any non-compliant fills with compliant fills.
Using natives in fills outside of areas covered with asphalt or concrete. If native
materials meet a 90% compaction requirement, they may be used in the shallow fills
which are outside of areas covered with asphalt and concrete. These areas are
shown on grading plans covered with open graded rock.
It is anticipated that CONTRACTOR will be required to furnish additional quantities of
embankment fill material from off-site sources to supplement material available from on-
site excavations. However, if required, CONTRACTOR shall not borrow materials from
adjacent private or public lands without providing to OWNER written verification of such
approval from the appropriate landowner or agency. CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible for all costs associated with providing additional quantities of embankment
fill as may be required to complete the work described herein and as shown on the
Contract Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
GENERAL
Grading shall produce uniform grades or slopes between spot elevations or contours
shown.
Areas of construction activity shall be left in condition of uniform grade, blending into
pre-existing contours and concealing, as much as possible, evidence of construction
activity by back dragging or raking to conceal tire marks. Revegetation shall not be
performed until the subgrade is acceptable to OWNER.
Unless otherwise directed by OWNER, all excess excavated materials shall be removed
from the site and disposed of by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall restore
stockpile area to pre-existing condition.
SITE PREPARATION
Prior to placement of embankment fill, loose or disturbed soil shall be removed and
replaced with compacted structural fill, or disturbed soil shall be properly compacted.
Prior to placement of embankment fill, the top 6-inches, or as noted on the Contract
Drawings, of the subgrade shall be scarified and compacted to 95% minimum Modified
Proctor density as determined by ASTM D1557.
Embankment shall include the placement of materials to raise the existing grade to the
established elevations indicated and the construction of driving surfaces.
Embankment material shall be placed in no more than 8-inch loose lifts for heavy
equipment, and 4-inch loose lifts for hand operated equipment.
01/2023 SITE GRADING
254.07.100 PAGE 31 22 00 - 3
All embankment fill material shall be placed and compacted to 96% minimum Modified
Proctor Density as determined by ASTM D1557. Embankment under roadways, to a
minimum depth of four feet, shall be compacted to 96% minimum as determined by
ASTM D1557.
Where the moisture content is not suitable and/or sufficient compaction has not been
obtained, the fill shall be reconditioned to an approved moisture content and
recompacted to the minimum required compaction, unless recommended otherwise by
the Soils Testing Agency, prior to placing any additional fill material.
Unless otherwise specified, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for arranging for the
placing and compacting of approved fill material in accordance with these Specifications.
If the Soils Testing Agency should determine that CONTRACTOR is failing to meet the
minimum requirements, CONTRACTOR shall stop operations and make adjustments as
necessary to produce a satisfactorily compacted fill at no additional cost to OWNER.
GRADING
The final grade of all completed areas shall be between plus and minus one-tenth (± 0.1)
of a foot from the grade designated on the Contract Drawings.

- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 SITE GRADING
254.07.100 PAGE 31 22 00 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 31 22 16
FINE GRADING
01/2023 FINE GRADING
254.07.100 PAGE 31 22 16 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Perform fine grading work required to prepare site for landscape finish grading
and soil preparation as described in Contract Documents.
2. Furnishing of conditioner to stockpiled topsoil.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 32 91 13: Finish grading and soil preparation for landscaping.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society For Testing And Materials:
1. ASTM D 1557-02, 'Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.'
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not commence work of this Section until site grading tolerances are met.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Protect utilities and site elements from damage.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Before placing topsoil, dig out weeds from planting areas by their roots and
remove from site. Remove rocks larger than 1 inch in size and foreign matter
such as building rubble, wire, cans, sticks, concrete, etc.
2. Remove imported paving base material present in planting areas down to natural
sub-grade or other material acceptable to Architect.
3. Limit use of heavy equipment to areas no closer than 6 feet from tank or other
permanent structures.
01/2023 FINE GRADING
254.07.100 PAGE 31 22 16 - 2
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Interface with Other Work: Do not commence work of this Section until site grading
tolerances are met.
B. Site Tolerances:
1. Maximum variation from required grades shall be 1/10 of one foot.
2. To allow for final finish grades of planting areas, sub-grade elevations in
landscape areas, before placing topsoil are:
a. Upland Grass Seed Areas: 5 inches below top of walk or curb.
C. Do not expose or damage existing shrub or tree roots designated to remain.
D. Distribute approved imported topsoil as required. Remove organic material, rocks
and clods greater than 1 inch in any dimension, and other objectionable materials.
E. Slope grade away from structure for 12 feet minimum from walls at slope of 1/2 inch
in 12 inches minimum unless otherwise noted. Direct surface drainage in manner
indicated on Drawings by molding surface to facilitate natural run-off of water. Fill low
spots and pockets with specified fill material and grade to drain properly.
END OF SECTION

01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 15 - 1
SECTION 31 23 15
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
This item shall consist of excavating all pipeline trenches to the lines and grades
indicated on the Contract Drawings or as directed by ENGINEER in the field, and the
backfilling of all pipeline trenches. Excavation shall include the removal of all materials
of whatever nature encountered to the depths shown on the Contract Drawings, or as
modified in the Field by ENGINEER.
RELATED SECTIONS
Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 45 00 Quality Control & Materials Testing
Section 01 50 00 Temporary Construction Utilities and Environmental Controls
Section 31 23 19 Dewatering
Section 33 05 05 Ductile Iron Pipe
Section 33 05 11 HDPE Pressure Pipe
Section 33 92 10 Steel Pipe, Specials, and Fittings
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the
extent referred. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION
OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
M 145 Standard Specification for Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes
T 27 Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
T 88 Standard Method of Test for Particle Size Analysis of Soils
T 96 Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
T 180 Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of Soils Using a
10 lb. (4.54 kg) Rammer and an 18 in (457 mm) Drop
T 191 Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In Place by the Sand Cone
Method
T 205 Density of Soil In-Place by the Rubber-Balloon Method
T 238 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
T 239 Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods
(Shallow Depth)
T 310 Standard Specification for In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Soil
and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 15 - 2
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
C 131 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
C 136 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
D 422 Standard Test Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils
D 698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3)
D 1556 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand Cone method
D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/ft3)
D 2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for
Sewers and Other Gravity -Flow Applications
D 2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification System)
D 6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
DEFINITIONS
Degree of Compaction: Degree of compaction shall be expressed as a percentage of
the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557.
Pipe Zone: That zone in an Excavation which supports, surrounds, and extends to 12
inches above the top of the pipe barrel. Specifically, 4 inches below the bottom (where
rock, hard pan, boulders, etc. are encountered), 12 inches above the top of the pipe, and
1 foot laterally beyond both sides of the pipe, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
Trench Zone Backfill: That zone in an Excavation which begins 12 inches above the top
of the pipe barrel and extends to the natural surface level or the finished grade indicated
on the Plans.
Unyielding Material: Unyielding material shall consist of rock and gravelly soils with
stones greater than 12 inches in any dimension or as defined by the pipe manufacturer,
whichever is smaller.
Unstable Material: Unstable material shall consist of materials too wet to allow backfill
compaction or to properly support the utility pipe, conduit, or appurtenant structures.
Rock: Solid mineral material which cannot be removed with equipment reasonably
expected to be used in the Work without cutting, drilling or blasting. Minimum equipment
size, in good running order, shall be similar to a Komatsu 300, Caterpillar 320 or 330,
or equal.
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures:
01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 15 - 3
Copies of Field Density Test reports shall be submitted to ENGINEER or RPR at the
beginning of each workday for the previous day’s testing of subgrades,
embankments and backfill Materials.
Copies of all Laboratory Test Reports shall be submitted to ENGINEER or RPR
within 24 hours of the completion of the test.
Submit gradations and proctors for Pipe Zone Material and Trench Zone Backfill.
Excavation Protection Plan: Describe sheeting, shoring, and bracing materials and
installation required to protect excavations and adjacent structures and property;
include structural calculations to support plan.
SITE CONDITIONS
Unsuitable Weather Limitations: CONTRACTOR shall not place, spread, or roll any fill
material during unsuitable weather conditions. CONTRACTOR shall not resume
operations until moisture content of material is satisfactory.
Weather Softened Subgrade: CONTRACTOR shall remove and replace at no additional
cost to OWNER soft subgrade materials resulting from adverse weather conditions.
Protection of Graded Areas: CONTRACTOR shall protect all graded areas from traffic
and erosion and shall keep these areas free of trash and debris. Work required to repair
and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas shall be completed to
specified tolerances at CONTRACTOR’s expense.
Reconditioning Compacted Areas: All areas compacted to required specifications that
become disturbed by subsequent construction operations or weather conditions shall be
scarified, moisture conditioned, and re-compacted to the required density prior to further
construction.
Grading: the final compacted surface of base course shall not vary more than 1/4 inch
above or below design grade.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Stabilization Material: Stabilization material shall consist of hard, durable particles of
stone or gravel, screened or crushed to the required size and gradation. The material
shall be free from vegetation matter, lumps or balls of clay, or other deleterious matter
and shall conform to the following gradation when tested in accordance with AASHTO T
27 or ASTM C 136.
Coarse material shall be crushed or washed and fine material shall be wasted to
meet the grading requirements set forth below. Note that if stabilization material is
required, an 8 oz. non-woven filter fabric shall be placed between the stabilization
material and the pipe zone material.
01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 15 - 4
Coarse aggregate, retained on the No. 4 sieve, shall have a percentage of wear not
greater than 40 percent when tested by the Los Angeles Test, AASHTO T-96 or
ASTM C 131.
Sieve Size
(Square Opening)
Percent By Weight
Passing Screen 2-inch 100 1-1/2 inch 10 - 50 3/4-inch 0 - 25 No. 4 0 - 10 No. 200 0 - 3

Pipe Zone Material: All material in the pipe zone shall be clean and free from alkali, salt,
petroleum products, vegetative matter or other deleterious matter, slag, cinders, ashes
and rubbish or other material that in the opinion of the ENGINEER may be objectionable
or deleterious. “Squeegee” or any other flowable material shall not be permitted. Pipe
zone material shall conform to the following:
Storm Drain – Gravel, 100 percent crushed mineral aggregate per the following
gradation:
U.S. Standard
Sieve Size
(Square Opening)
Percent By Weight
Passing Screen

1 1/2 - inch
1 - inch
1/2 - inch
No. 4
No. 200
100
95-100
25-60
0-10
0-5

Waterline – Sand per the following gradation:
U.S. Standard
Sieve Size
(Square Opening)
Percent By Weight
Passing Screen
1/2 - inch
No. 10
No. 40
No. 200
100
30-60
0-30
0-15

Waterline – Controlled Low-Strength Material (Flowable Fill):

01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 15 - 5
a. Flowable Fill shall be per APWA Section 03 31 05 – Controlled Low Strength
Material. Contractor shall submit a CLSM material – which is sand-cement-flyash
slurry mix that has between 50 to 150 psi strength at 28 days. Submit any
proposed admixtures.

Select Trench Backfill: When pipes are below structures (and below 1:1 sloped planes
supporting footings), Trench Zone Backfill must be Structural Fill Material.
Native Trench Backfill: Do not use native earth for trench backfill.
Imported Granular Trench Backfill: Use non-plastic imported granular trench backfill
meeting soils classifications A-1, A-2 or A-3 (A-1-a for Granular Borrow material) of
AASHTO M 145 with max particle size under 6 inches and meet a 96% compaction
requirement.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXCAVATION
Excavation shall be performed to the lines and grades indicated. All excavated
materials not intended for reuse shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the
Contractor.
Rock Removal
CONTRACTOR shall cut away Rock at excavation bottom to form level bearing.
All shaled layers shall be removed to provide sound and unshattered base for
foundations.
CONTRACTOR shall remove and legally dispose of excess excavated material and
debris off-site unless indicated otherwise.

CONTRACTOR shall correct unauthorized Rock removal at no additional cost to
OWNER.
SAFETY
Excavations shall be sloped or otherwise supported in a safe manner in accordance with
applicable State safety requirements and the latest requirements of OSHA Safety and
Health Standards for Construction (29 CFR 1926). CONTRACTOR is responsible for
assessing safety needs to meet such requirements, arranging for proper equipment
and/or construction methods, and maintaining such equipment, methods and
construction practices so as to fully comply with all safety requirements.
CONTRACTOR is responsible for assessing needs related to confined space entry, as
defined by OSHA. CONTRACTOR shall meet all such requirements, arranging for
proper equipment and/or construction methods, and maintaining such equipment,
methods and construction practices so as to fully comply with all confined space safety
requirements.
01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 15 - 6
DEWATERING
Water removal shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 19 - Dewatering.
TRENCH WIDTH
The bottom of the trench shall have a minimum width equal to the outside diameter of
the pipe plus 24-inches or as detailed on the Contract Drawings.
The width of the trench shall be ample to permit the pipe to be laid and jointed properly,
and the backfill to be placed and compacted as specified. Trenches shall be of such
extra width, when required, as will permit the convenient placing of timber supports,
sheeting, and bracing, and the handling of special units as necessary.
TRENCH PREPARATION
Each trench shall be excavated so that the pipe can be laid to the alignment and grade
as required. The trench wall shall be so braced that the workmen may work safely and
efficiently. All trenches shall be drained so the pipe laying may take place in dewatered
conditions.
Bottom Preparation
Where rock, hard pan, boulders or other material which might damage the pipe are
encountered, the bottom of the trench shall be over excavated 4 inches below the
required grade and replaced with Stabilization Material. Otherwise, the bottom of the
trench shall be over excavated 6 inches or 1/12 the outside diameter of the pipe,
whichever is greater, below the required grade and replaced with Pipe Zone Backfill.
The bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and
support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Bell holes shall be
excavated to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing.
Stones of 1-inch or greater in any dimension, or as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer, whichever is smaller, shall be removed to avoid point bearing.
Removal of Unstable Material
Where unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such material
shall be removed to the depth directed by ENGINEER and replaced to the proper
grade with Stabilization Material. When removal of unstable material is required due
to the fault or neglect of CONTRACTOR in his performance of the work, the resulting
material shall be excavated and replaced by CONTRACTOR without additional cost
to OWNER.
The trench bottom (at the level of the base of the pipe) shall be given a final trim using a
string line, laser, or another method approved by ENGINEER for establishing grade,
such that each pipe section when first laid will be continually in contact with the ground
along the extreme bottom of the pipe. Bell holes shall be provided at each joint to permit
the jointing to be made properly. The trench grade shall permit the pipe spigot to be
accurately centered in the preceding laid pipe joint, without lifting the pipe above the
grade, and without exceeding the permissible joint deflection.
01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 15 - 7
SHEETING AND SHORING
Sheet, shore, and brace excavations to prevent danger to persons, structures and
adjacent properties and to prevent caving, erosion, and loss of surrounding subsoil.
Support trenches excavated through unstable, loose, or soft material. Provide sheeting,
shoring, bracing, or other protection to maintain stability of excavation.
Design sheeting and shoring to be removed at completion of excavation work.
Repair damage caused by failure of the sheeting, shoring, or bracing and for settlement
of filled excavations or adjacent soil.
Repair damage to new and existing Work from settlement, water or earth pressure or
other causes resulting from inadequate sheeting, shoring, or bracing.
LAYING AND JOINING PIPE
Laying pipe: Provide proper facilities for lowering pipe sections into place. Dropping
pipe will not be permitted. Place each section true to line and gradient in close and true
contact with adjacent sections.
Joining pipe:
Use methods of joining conduit sections ensuring ends are fully entered and inner
surfaces are flush and even. The equipment used to force the joints together must
be adequate to overcome the gasket pressure involved. Pipe shall be installed in
accordance with these specifications and the manufacturers written specifications.
Just prior to joining the pipes, both spigot and bell ends shall be thoroughly cleaned
to remove all foreign substances which may have adhered to the bell and spigot
surfaces. All dust and dirt shall be removed with a clean rag. An approved lubricant
(recommended by the manufacturer), that is not injurious to the gasket, shall be
applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
In the event any foreign material becomes embedded in the lubricant, or the lubricant
becomes contaminated by water or other substances before the joint is started, the
area affected shall be re-cleaned and new lubricant applied.
The pipe being joined shall be carefully moved into position, line and grade checked,
and, as the spigot end is started into the bell of the section previously laid, the gasket
shall be checked to insure uniform entry into the bell at all points. Align the spigot to
the bell and insert the spigot into the bell until it contacts the gasket uniformly. Apply
firm steady pressure either by hand or by bar and block assembly, until the spigot
easily slips through the gasket. Care must be taken to ensure that the spigot is not
over-inserted and that previously assembled pipe joints are not disturbed.
PIPELINE TRENCH BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
Pipe Zone:
Pipe Zone Backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 6 inches loose thickness
for compaction by hand operated machine compactors, and 8 inches loose thickness
for other than hand operated machines, unless otherwise approved or specified. The
backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the
01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 15 - 8
pipe. Care shall be taken to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the
haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of the
maximum Modified Proctor density (ASTM D-1557), unless otherwise specified.
Replacement of Unyielding Material: Unyielding material removed from the bottom
of the trench shall be replaced with Stabilization Material placed in layers not
exceeding 6 inches loose thickness.
Replacement of Unstable Material: Unstable material removed from the bottom of
the trench or excavation shall be replaced with Stabilization Material placed in
layers not exceeding 6 inches loose thickness.
Where the pipe grade exceeds 30%, cohesive material shall be used in lieu of pipe
bedding. The cohesive material shall be moistened to within 2% of optimum
moisture and compacted as noted.
The relative density of the compacted cohesionless material shall not be less than
60% as determined by the Bureau of Reclamation Relative Density of Cohesionless
Soil Test (Designation E-12) of the "Earth Manual."
Trench Backfill: Trenches shall be backfilled to the grade shown with Trench Zone
Backfill material as specified.
Trench backfill in asphalted road shall consist of backfilling the trench from above the
pipe zone up to underneath the noted recommended depth for untreated base
course and asphalt or concrete of finished grade with Trench Backfill material
compacted to 95 percent of maximum density (ASTM D-1557). Backfill shall be
placed in layers not exceeding 6-inches loose thickness for compaction by hand
operated machine compactors, and 8 inches loose thickness for other than hand
operated machines, unless otherwise approved or specified.
Trench backfill in unimproved or landscaped areas shall consist of backfilling the
trench from above the pipe zone to 8-inches below finished grade with Trench
Backfill material compacted to 95 percent of maximum density (ASTM D-1557).
Backfill from 8-inches below finished grade to finished grade shall consist of topsoil
replacement in addition to replacement of all landscaped materials. Trench backfill
shall be placed in layers not exceeding 8 inches loose thickness.
It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to be assured that the Trench Backfill
material is capable of being compacted to the degree specified. It shall be
CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to remove and dispose of all excess excavated
material.
Final Backfill:
Unimproved and Landscaped Areas: The top 8-inches of the trench shall be filled
with topsoil. Topsoil may be native material stripped prior to excavation of the
trench. Backfill shall be deposited in layers of a maximum of 12-inch loose
thickness and compacted to a minimum of 85 percent maximum density (ASTM D-
1557). Compaction by water flooding or jetting will not be permitted. This
requirement shall also apply to all other areas not specifically designated above.
Roadways shall be completed with the type and thickness of materials (i.e.,
Untreated Road Base and Asphalt) as indicated or shown on the Contract Drawings
01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 15 - 9
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the specific utilities from
above the pipe zone to the natural surface level or the finished grade indicated on the
Plans shall be placed and compacted as follows:
Where existing underground pipes or conduits larger than 3 inches in diameter and
all sizes of sewer lines or sewer laterals cross the trench above the new work, the
backfill from the bottom of the trench to 1 foot above the top of the intersecting pipe
or conduit shall be pipe zone material compacted to 95 percent of maximum density
(ASTM D-1557). The pipe zone material shall extend 2 feet on either side of the
intersecting pipe or conduit to ensure that the material will remain in place while
other backfill is placed.
The maximum trench length open at any given time shall not exceed 200 feet unless
approved by ENGINEER and must be backfilled in a timely manner.
MAINTENANCE OF BACKFILL
All backfill shall be maintained in satisfactory condition, and all places showing signs of
settlement shall be filled and maintained during the life of the Contract and for a period
of one year following the day of final acceptance of all work performed under the
Contract. When CONTRACTOR is notified by ENGINEER or OWNER that any backfill
is hazardous, CONTRACTOR shall correct such hazardous condition at once. Any
utility, road and/or parking surfacing damaged by such settlement shall be repaired by
CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of OWNER and ENGINEER. In addition,
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost to OWNER of all claims for damage
filed with the Court, actions brought against the said OWNER for, and on account of,
such damage.
FINISH GRADING AND CLEANUP
CONTRACTOR shall grade the trench line to a smooth grade to affect a neat and
workmanlike appearance of the trench line.
All tools, equipment and temporary structures shall be removed. All excess dirt and
rubbish shall be removed from the site by CONTRACTOR.
CONTRACTOR shall restore the site to at least as good as original condition, including
but not limited to final trench grade and restoration of affected public and private facilities
whether in the public right-of-way or on private property. Any exception to this
requirement must be in writing from ENGINEER for the job specific conditions.
COMPACTION TESTS
It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to accomplish the specified compaction
for backfill, fill, and other earthwork. It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to
control his operations by performing any additional tests necessary to verify and confirm
that CONTRACTOR has complied, and is complying at all times, with the requirements
of these Specifications concerning compaction, control, and testing.
Testing of Backfill Materials
01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR BURIED PIPELINES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 15 - 10
a. Characteristics of backfill materials shall be determined in accordance with the
requirements of Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control & Materials Testing.
b. The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate the adequacy of compaction equipment
and procedures before exceeding any of the following amounts of earthwork
quantities:
50 linear feet of trench backfill.
c. Until the specified degree of compaction on the previously specified amounts of
earthwork is achieved, no additional earthwork of the same kind shall be
performed.
d. After satisfactory conclusion of the initial compaction demonstration and at any
time during construction, earthwork which does not comply with the specified
degree of compaction shall not exceed the previously specified quantities.
e. Compliance tests may be made by ENGINEER to verify that compaction is
meeting the requirements previously specified at no cost to CONTRACTOR.
f. ENGINEER may require retesting of backfill that has settled from water
penetration in the trench. CONTRACTOR shall remove the overburden above
the level at which ENGI¬NEER wishes to test and shall backfill and recompact
the excavation after the test is complete at no additional cost to the OWNER.
g. If compaction fails to meet the specified requirements, CONTRACTOR shall
remove and replace the backfill at proper density or shall bring the density up to
specified level by other means acceptable to ENGINEER. Subsequent tests
required to confirm and verify that the reconstructed backfill has been brought up
to specified density shall be paid by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR's
confirmation tests shall be performed in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER

Field Density Tests

a. Field density tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM D 1557.

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 DEWATERING
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 19 - 1
SECTION 31 23 19
DEWATERING
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This Section provides specifications for dewatering systems and appurtenances to be
used during construction as required to remove water and continuously maintain
groundwater at a level at least 1-foot below the bottom of the excavation.
CONTRACTOR shall obtain all necessary permits for disposal of water removed from
the excavation.
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Before dewatering is commenced, CONTRACTOR shall provide information to
ENGINEER outlining the method, installation and details of the proposed dewatering
system. CONTRACTOR shall provide ENGINEER with plans setting forth details of the
proposed dewatering systems. The dewatering system plans shall be of sufficient detail
to indicate sizes of pumps, piping, appurtenances, the ultimate disposal point for water,
and to indicate the overall completeness and effectiveness of the proposed system.
CONTRACTOR shall certify to OWNER that the design and implementation of the
proposed dewatering system is sufficient to complete the Work.
Submit a plan to monitoring settlement of adjacent structures.
QUALITY CONTROL
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to control the rate and effect of dewatering to avoid
all settlement and subsidence.
Where critical structures exist immediately adjacent to areas of proposed dewatering,
reference points shall be established and observed at frequent intervals to detect any
settlement which may develop. CONTRACTOR is responsible for protecting adjacent
structures from settlement. The cost of repairing any damage to adjacent structures and
restoration of facilities shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for selection of dewatering means, methods and
materials.
01/2023 DEWATERING
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 19 - 2
Standby pumping equipment shall be maintained on the Site.
PART 3 EXECUTION
DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for complete design and implementation of the
dewatering system.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the design and implementation of any
modifications that may be required to the initial design of the dewatering system (at no
additional cost to OWNER) to provide a dewatering system that operates adequately to
complete the Work.
CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, operate and maintain all machinery, appliances,
and equipment to maintain all excavations free from water during construction.
CONTRACTOR shall dispose of water so as to not cause damage to public or private
property, or to cause a nuisance or menace to the public or violate the law.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to obtain groundwater discharge permits, if
required.
CONTRACTOR shall install and operate the dewatering system so as to not cause
damage or endanger adjacent structures or property.
The control of groundwater shall be such that softening of the bottom of excavations, or
formation of "quick" conditions or "boils," does not occur. Dewatering systems shall be
designed and operated so as to prevent removal and migration of the natural soils.
CONTRACTOR shall have sufficient stand-by equipment at the project site at all times to
continuously maintain the dewatering program until Work necessitating dewatering is
complete.
CONTRACTOR shall have on hand equipment and machinery in good working condition
for emergencies and shall have personnel available for operation of such equipment and
machinery.
CONTRACTOR shall control surface water to prevent entry into excavations.

- END OF SECTION -
01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 23 - 1
SECTION 31 23 23
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This section covers excavating, backfilling, and compacting of disturbed areas for
structures and roadways as directed by ENGINEER.
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 45 00 Quality Control and Materials Testing
Section 01 45 23 Testing Agency Services
Section 01 50 00 Temporary Construction Utilities and Environmental Controls
Section 31 11 00 Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping
Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines
Section 31 23 19 Dewatering
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this specification to the
extent referred. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION
OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
M 145 Standard Specification for Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes
T 27 Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
T 88 Standard Method of Test for Particle Size Analysis of Soils
T 180 Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of Soils Using a
10 lb. (4.54 kg) Rammer and an 18 in (457 mm) Drop
T 191 Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In Place by the Sand Cone
Method
T 310 Standard Specification for In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Soil
and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
D 422 Standard Test Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils
D 698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3)
D 1556 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand Cone method
D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/ft3)
D 2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 23 - 2
(Unified Soil Classification System)
D 6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
The latest Edition of the Utah Department of Transportation Standard Specification for
Road and Bridge Construction.
The latest Edition of the American Public Works Association (APWA) and Associated
General Contractors of America Standard Plans and Standard Specifications.
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal
Procedures:
Submit gradations and proctors for structural fill materials and each backfill material
used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
WALL BACKFILL MATERIAL
Wall backfill material shall consist of native or import fill material meeting soils
classifications A-1, A-2 or A-3 of AASHTO M 145, with a maximum particle size no
greater than 6 inches in any dimension and shall be capable of meeting the compaction
requirements.
Wall backfill material shall be free from frozen lumps, rocks larger than 6 inches in
the largest dimension, roots, trash, lumber and organic material.
STRUCTURAL FILL
Structural fill material shall be imported, non-expansive, granular soil with less than 35
percent passing the No. 200 sieve, with a liquid limit less than 30, and free from rocks
larger than 4 inches in the largest dimension, frozen lumps, roots, trash, lumber and
organic material.
Overexcavate below footings and compact 12-inches of structural fill below footings. See
plans.
FLOOR SLAB FILL (UPPER 4 INCHES)
Material shall be non-expansive granular soil (sand or gravel) with less than 5 percent
passing the No. 200 sieve, and free from rocks larger than 2 inches in the largest
dimension, frozen lumps, roots, trash, lumber and organic material.
3/4" WASHED ROCK (DRAIN ROCK)
3/4" Washed Rock shall consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or
crushed, to the required size and gradation. The material shall be free from vegetation
matter, lumps or balls of clay, or other deleterious matter and shall conform to the
following gradation when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 27 or ASTM C 136.
01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 23 - 3
Sieve Size
(Square Opening)
Percent By Weight
Passing Screen 3/4-inch 100 3/8 inch 78-92 No. 4 0 - 50 No. 8 0 - 5 No. 200 0 - 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXCAVATION
Excavation shall be performed to the lines and grades indicated. Excavated material not
required or not satisfactory for backfill shall be removed from the site.
Excavations shall be braced and supported as needed to prevent the ground adjacent to
the excavation from sliding or settling. Slides shall be promptly removed and corrected
by CONTRACTOR.
PREPARATION
Compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.
Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with granular
fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill
material.
Scarify subgrade surface to depth of 6 inches.
Pump Station Building subgrade shall be prepared by removing approximately 13 feet
native earth (collapsible clays) down to a stable gravel layer (which layer is field
determined by geotechnical engineer), and then constructing a structural fill to support
the pump station as shown in the plans and described in the specifications.
Subgrade below asphalt pavement shall be prepared by removing native earth to
subgrade, compacting native subgrade to 96% relative compaction, before placing base
and asphalt.
Geotechnical Engineer shall observe the subgrade conditions after the +/-13 foot over-
excavation (ie gravel layer is exposed in bottom of excavation,) and verify native clays
have be adequately remove before CONTRACTOR may start backfilling with Structural
Fill.
DEWATERING
Water removal shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 19 - Dewatering.
BACKFILL
Backfill material shall not be placed against concrete structures that have not been
properly cured. No backfill material shall be placed until concrete has cured for a
01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 23 - 4
minimum of 7 days or until the compressible strength is 3,400 psi, whichever is greater.
Backfill material shall be placed in no more than 6-inch loose lifts for compaction by
hand operated machine compactors, and 8 inches loose lifts for other than hand
operated machines.
Structural fill placed beneath foundations, footings or the floor slab shall be placed and
compacted to at least 96% of maximum dry density at a moisture content within 2
percent of optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 1557.
Backfill material shall be placed and compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum dry
density at a moisture content within 2 percent of optimum moisture content in
accordance with ASTM D-1557.
Where the moisture content is not suitable and/or sufficient compaction has not been
obtained, the fill shall be reconditioned to an approved moisture content and re-
compacted to the minimum required compaction prior to placing any additional fill
material.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for arranging for the placing and compacting of
approved fill material in accordance with these Specifications. If it is determined that
CONTRACTOR is failing to meet the minimum requirements, CONTRACTOR shall stop
operations and make adjustments as necessary to produce a satisfactorily compacted fill
at no additional cost to OWNER.
Sufficient personnel, equipment, sumps or other means should be provided to maintain
the site in an acceptable dry condition for the duration of this contract.
Excavations shall be so braced and supported as needed to prevent the ground,
adjacent to the excavation, from sliding or settling. Localized slides or settlements shall
be promptly removed and corrected by CONTRACTOR.
FINISHED GRADE
The finished subgrade and grade of the fill shall not vary more than 0.05 feet from the
established grades and cross sections shown on the Contract Drawings.
COMPACTION TESTS
Compaction testing shall be the provided and paid for in accordance with Section 01 45
00 – Quality Control and Materials Testing.
It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to accomplish the specified compaction
for backfill, structural fill, Untreated Base Course and other earthwork. It shall be the
responsibility of CONTRACTOR to control his operations by performing any additional
tests necessary to verify and confirm that CONTRACTOR has complied, and is
complying at all times, with the requirements of these Specifications concerning
compaction, control, and testing.
01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 23 - 5
Testing of Backfill Materials

a. Characteristics of backfill materials shall be determined in accordance with the
requirements of Section 01 45 00.
b. Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of compaction equipment and
procedures before exceeding any of the following amounts of earthwork
quantities:

One (1) test per 1.0 feet of backfill thickness placed per structure.

c. Until the specified degree of compaction on the previously specified amounts of
earthwork is achieved, no additional earthwork of the same kind shall be
performed.
d. After satisfactory conclusion of the initial compaction demonstration and at any
time during construction, earthwork which does not comply with the specified
degree of compaction shall not exceed the previously specified quantities.
e. Quality Control tests may be made by ENGINEER to verify that compaction is
meeting the requirements previously specified at no cost to CONTRACTOR. If
ENGINEER requires retesting of backfill, CONTRACTOR shall remove the
overburden above the level at which ENGINEER wishes to test and shall backfill
and recompact the excavation after the test is complete at no additional cost to
OWNER.
f. If compaction fails to meet the specified requirements, CONTRACTOR shall
remove and replace the backfill at proper density or shall bring the density up to
specified level by other means acceptable to ENGINEER. Subsequent tests
required to confirm and verify that the reconstructed backfill has been brought up
to specified density shall be paid in accordance with Section 01 45 23 – Testing
Agency Services. The confirmation tests shall be performed in a manner
acceptable to ENGINEER. Frequency of confirmation tests for remedial work
shall be double that amount specified for initial confirmation tests.

Field Density Tests

a. Tests shall be performed in sufficient numbers to meet the requirements of
Section 01 45 00 and to ensure that the specified density is being obtained.
Field density tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM D1557 and ASTM D6938.

- END OF SECTION –

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

01/2023 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
254.07.100 PAGE 31 23 23 - 6

01/2023 ROAD BASE – UNTREATED BASE COURSE
254.07.100 PAGE 32 11 23 - 1

SECTION 32 11 23
ROAD BASE - UNTREATED BASE COURSE
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This Work consists of the placement of Sub-Base and Untreated Base Course (UBC)
material at designated roadways and all driving surfaces as indicated on the
Drawings.
RELATED SECTIONS
Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 45 00 Quality Control and Materials Testing
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publication forms a part of this Specification to the
extent referenced. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION
OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
AASHTO T 88 Standard Method of Test for Particle Size Analysis of Soils
AASHTO T 180 Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of Soils
Using a 10 lb. (4.54 kg) Rammer and an 18 in (457 mm) Drop
AASHTO T 191 Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand
Cone Method
AASHTO T 310 Standard Specification for In-Place Density and Moisture Content
of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods. (Shallow Depth)
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM D 422 Standard Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils
ASTM D 698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3)
ASTM D 1556 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place
by the Sand Cone method
ASTM D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lnf/ft3)
ASTM D 2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering
Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D 6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of
Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
The latest edition of the Utah Department of Transportation Standard Specification
for Road and Bridge Construction (UDOT).
01/2023 ROAD BASE – UNTREATED BASE COURSE
254.07.100 PAGE 32 11 23 - 2

SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Untreated Base Course (State approved 1-1/2” gradation, APWA Grade 1 or Grade
3/4).
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Road Base shall not be measured or paid as a separate item, but shall be included
as part of the various items to which it relates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Untreated Base Course: Untreated Base Course Materials shall meet the APWA
Specifications for Grade 1 or Grade 3/4 as shown in Table 32 11 23-1 and shall meet
A-1-a soil classification (ASHTO M145 or ASTM D3282). Recycled concrete will not
be allowed.
TABLE 32 11 23-1

SIEVE SIZE

MASTER
GRADING BAND
LIMITS
(PERCENT
PASSING)

GRADE 1
GRADATION

(PERCENT
PASSING)

GRADE 3/4
GRADATION

(PERCENT
PASSING)
1 1/2 inch
1 inch
3/4 inch
1/2 inch
3/8 inch
No. 4
No. 16
No. 200
100
90-100
70-85
65-80
55-75
40-65
25-40
7-11
-
100
-
79 - 91
-
49 - 61
27 - 35
7 - 11
-
-
100
-
78 -92
55 - 67
28 - 38
7 - 11

PART 3 EXECUTION
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
Prior to placement of untreated base course materials, the foundation area to receive
untreated base course materials shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 8-inches
and recompacted to 95% minimum laboratory density as determined by ASTM
D1557.
UNTREATED BASE COURSE MATERIAL PLACEMENT
No Untreated Base Course material shall be placed on sub-grade materials until the
sub-grade has been checked and accepted by ENGINEER.
01/2023 ROAD BASE – UNTREATED BASE COURSE
254.07.100 PAGE 32 11 23 - 3

Road base material placed on driving surfaces shall be compacted to a minimum
density of 96% in accordance with ASTM D1557 to provide a uniform graded smooth
surface.
Untreated Base Course material shall be placed to a minimum thickness eight (8)
inches or as shown on the Contract Drawings.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for directing proper placement of all road base
materials. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the stability of the road base
materials during placement and shall replace any portions which have become
displaced due to careless or negligent work on the part of CONTRACTOR, or to
damage resulting from natural causes, such as storms.
Whenever the work areas to receive Sub-Base and/or Untreated Base Course
material are covered with snow, the snow must be removed prior to placing the road
base and/or Untreated Base Course and deposited outside the immediate
construction areas at CONTRACTOR's expense.

- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 ROAD BASE – UNTREATED BASE COURSE
254.07.100 PAGE 32 11 23 - 4

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
01/2023 HOT-MIX ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
254.07.100 PAGE 32 12 16 - 1
SECTION 32 12 16
HOT-MIX ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
This section addresses the requirements for installing hot-mix asphalt concrete, as
outlined in Section 33 05 25 – Pavement Restoration of the APWA Specifications, and
as modified herein.
RELATED SECTIONS
Related work specified in other sections includes but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 45 00 Quality Control and Materials Testing
Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Environmental Controls
Section 32 11 23 Road Base - Untreated Base Course
Section 32 11 24 Pulverized Pavement Base Course (APWA)
Section 32 12 05 Bituminous Concrete (APWA)
Section 32 12 13.13 Tack Coat (APWA)
Section 32 12 16.13 Plant-Mix Bituminous Paving (APWA)
Section 32 17 23 Pavement Marking (APWA)
Section 33 05 25 Pavement Restoration (APWA)
REFERENCES
The American Public Works Association General Conditions and Standard
Specifications for Construction, latest edition
The latest edition of the following publication forms a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM D 2041 Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity
and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 2950 Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in
Place by Nuclear Method
ASTM D 3665 Standard Practice for Random Sampling of Construction Materials
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Laboratory mix design for proposed hot-mix asphalt concrete paving.
Means and methods for removal, reprocessing, and placement of existing asphalt
surfaces as base course material.
Laboratory mix design for proposed tack coat application.
01/2023 HOT-MIX ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
254.07.100 PAGE 32 12 16 - 2
Quality assurance tests for asphalt and aggregate material sources.
Copies of batch delivery tickets shall be submitted during progress of the work, and shall
show the following information:
Name of production facility
Serial number of ticket
Date and truck number
Name of CONTRACTOR
Job name and location
Weight of asphalt concrete
Loading temperature
Signature or initial of plant representative
Type and grade of asphalt cement
Type and grade of aggregate
Applicable mix design method
Separate weights of aggregate and asphalt
Submit type and number of rollers required for compacting asphalt concrete
SITE CONDITIONS
Pave only when air and roadbed temperatures in the shade are greater than 40 deg. F
and rising. The temperature restrictions may be waived only upon written authorization
from ENGINEER.
Do not pave during rain or unsuitable weather or when surface is wet.
ACCEPTANCE
Acceptance of hot-mix asphalt concrete paving is based upon minimum density,
minimum thickness, smoothness, and surface appearance. Smoothness and surface
appearance shall be as defined by Section 32 12 16.13 of the APWA Specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT
The bituminous material shall be PG 64-22, DM-1/2, 50 blow per APWA Section 32 12
05 unless noted otherwise. Maximum allowable reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) is
15% and shall be free from detrimental quantities of deleterious materials.
Sampling and testing shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR, and shall be
performed as required in Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control and Materials Testing.
TACK COAT
Tack coat material shall be Grade SS-1 and conform to all requirements of Section 32
12 13.13 - Tack Coat (APWA).
01/2023 HOT-MIX ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
254.07.100 PAGE 32 12 16 - 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
PREPARATION
Preparation shall conform to all requirements of Section 32 12 16.13 and Section 33 05
25 of the APWA specifications.
CONTRACTOR shall map and mark all existing surface utilities within the line of work,
and shall lower fixtures if pavement machine is not capable of passing over structure.
All asphalt and concrete surfaces within the line of work are to be removed and disposed
of properly by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR may, upon written authorization of
OWNER, use processed asphalt materials as base course material. Excess materials
shall be removed and disposed by CONTRACTOR.
Existing asphalt pavements and drive approach extensions to be removed shall be cut
by a wheel cutter or other device capable of making a neat, reasonably straight and
smooth cut without damaging adjacent pavement and/or concrete that is not to be
removed. The cutting device operation shall be subject to the approval of ENGINEER.
Any existing base, surfacing, or pavement shall be thoroughly cleaned immediately prior
to receiving the plant-mixed surfacing. Where existing pavement is being widened or
extended, it shall be cut to a straight vertical face prior to the paving operations and
treated with asphalt paint binder.
BASE COURSE
Base course material shall be placed in accordance with Section 32 11 23 of these
specifications.
Base course surfaces shall be maintained in an acceptable condition for both moisture
and density, as defined by Section 32 11 23 - Road Base – Untreated Base Course, until
the overlying hot-mix asphalt cement materials have been placed, at no additional
expense to OWNER.
Processed asphalt materials may be used as base course provided that the resulting
gradation for the 1" or 3/4” and -200 sieves comply with the requirements of Section 32
11 23 - Road Base. Processed asphalt materials may also be used if they meet the
requirements of APWA Section 32 11 24 – Pulverized Pavement Base Course with the
addition of stabilizers and if approved by the OWNER. Processed asphalt which has
been contaminated with clay or silt materials will not be accepted.
PLACEMENT OF TACK COAT
Apply tack coat to all existing asphalt concrete surfaces preparatory to placing asphalt
concrete pavement in accordance with Section 32 12 13.13 – Tack Coat of the APWA
specifications.
PLACEMENT OF HOT-MIX ASPHALT CONCRETE
For all excavations within twenty-four (24) inches of any structure, concrete, or edge of
existing pavement surface; CONTRACTOR shall remove and replace existing pavement
surface to the concrete, structure, or edge of existing pavement surface.
01/2023 HOT-MIX ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
254.07.100 PAGE 32 12 16 - 4
Where a longitudinal trench is partly in pavement, the pavement shall be replaced to the
original pavement edge, on a straight line, parallel to the center line of the roadway.
Where no part of a longitudinal trench is in the pavement, surfacing replacement will
only be required where existing surfacing materials have been removed.
Spreading shall be as nearly continuous as possible. The mixture shall be spread and
struck off in such a manner that the finished surface shall result in a uniform smooth
surface. The longitudinal joints in succeeding courses shall be offset at least 6 inches
transversely to avoid a vertical joint through more than one course.
All cold transverse joints shall be paper-patched or saw-cut to a clean vertical edge
before paving resumes.
Placement shall also allow for line, grade, elevations, and thickness specified herein and
as shown on the drawings.
When asphalt concrete is laid against vertical surfaces such as gutters, the face of the
vertical surface shall be roughened for proper bonding, cleaned, and then painted with a
light coating of asphalt cement or emulsified asphalt.
At terminations of new surface course, the asphalt concrete shall be feathered into the
existing surface over such a distance as may be required to produce a smooth riding
transition. Base course and single course construction shall be joined by vertical butt
joints finished and rolled to a smooth surface.
Asphaltic concrete shall not be placed when frozen materials are present in the base or
sub-base.
Asphaltic concrete shall not be placed during adverse conditions, i.e., rain or when a
roadway surface is wet.
Asphaltic concrete shall be placed between April 15 and October 15. Asphalt concrete
shall not be placed after October 15 and before April 15 of the following year unless
roadway surface temperatures are 40° F and rising in the shade. Approval to place the
asphalt concrete after October 15 and before April 15 of the following year requires
written approval from the OWNER.
Roadways not completed prior to October 15, and not meeting the requirements of this
section, shall be repaired by placing a temporary 2-inch thick asphalt (or other
ENGINEER approved surface) course over all exposed, earthen surfaces. These
temporary surfaces shall be completely removed and repaired in accordance with these
specifications at no additional expense to OWNER.
Asphalt rolling shall be in accordance with Section 32 12 16.13 of the APWA
specifications. CONTRACTOR shall establish and document a rolling pattern for
obtaining densities. The test strip shall be no shorter than 300 feet. Establishment of
rolling patterns are for the purpose of establishing minimum rolling patterns, and shall
not release CONTRACTOR of meeting all requirements of these specifications and
drawings. After the mixture has been spread, the surface shall be rolled in longitudinal
direction commencing at the outside edge or lower side and proceeding to the higher
side. Each pass of the roller shall overlap the preceding pass at least one-half the width
01/2023 HOT-MIX ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
254.07.100 PAGE 32 12 16 - 5
of the roller. Rolling shall continue until 95% of the laboratory density as determined in
accordance with ASTM Designation D1559 for the asphalt mixture being used has been
obtained. Density tests shall be done following the procedures of ASTM D2950.
Complete compaction before temperature drops to 180° F. Rolling operations shall be
conducted in such a manner that shoving or distortion will not develop beneath the roller.
The target density for asphalt placement shall be 94 percent of laboratory density plus or
minus two (2) percent. If an individual test result falls below 92 percent of maximum
density, the material represented by that test will be considered defective, and shall be
removed and replaced by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to OWNER.
The minimum acceptable thickness of asphalt for completed roadways shall be 3 inches,
as verified by core samples. Areas found to contain less than the minimum thickness
shall be removed and replaced at no additional expense to OWNER.
Allowable tolerance shall be 1/4 inch vertical deviation from design elevation in 10 feet.
Match existing adjacent surface slopes.
The completed finish shall be as specified in Section 32 12 16.13 of the APWA
specifications. The surface of the pavement, after compaction, shall be uniform and true
to the established grade. When tested with a ten-foot straight edge placed on the
surface of the pavement, at any point, the surface shall not deviate more than one-
eighth of an inch from the lower edge of the straight edge. All high and low spots shall
be remedied immediately by removing the wearing course material over the affected
areas and replacing it with fresh, hot wearing course and surface finish material and
immediately compacting it to conform with the surrounding area.
CONTRACTOR shall adjust the height of all street fixtures to match final grade. If
required, concrete collars shall be placed around all surface street fixtures (i.e.
manholes, valve boxes, monuments, etc.).
CONTRACTOR shall complete all concrete collars within 2 weeks of completion of
paving each roadway section.
CONTRACTOR shall restripe streets, as required, in accordance with Section 32 17 23 -
Pavement Markings of the APWA specifications.
A 2% minimum cross-slope and 4% maximum cross-slope is required. Any slopes
higher or lower than the required range must be approved by the City Engineer or
designee.
REPAIR
Remove bumps and depressions exceeding 1/4 inch vertical deviation in 10 feet.
Repair options include mill and inlay, or grinding. Feather edges on bituminous concrete
repairs are not allowed. Apply a cationic or anionic tack emulsion to make miller
surfaces water resistant.
SITE SAFETY AND TRAFFIC CONTROL
Site safety and traffic control shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
01/2023 HOT-MIX ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
254.07.100 PAGE 32 12 16 - 6
CONTRACTOR shall verify full compliance with all applicable local, county, state and/or
federal regulations, and shall comply with Section 01 55 26 Traffic Control.

- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
254.07.100 PAGE 32 31 13 - 1
SECTION 32 31 13
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
This section covers the furnishing of labor, materials and appurtenances necessary for
installation of the black PVC coated chain link fence system defined herein. The
manufacturer shall provide a total fence system including all components, panels, posts,
gates, and hardware required.
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specifications to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text to by basic designation
only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of
Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
ASTM F 552 Standard Terminology Relating to Chain Link Fencing
ASTM F 567 Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence
ASTM F 626 Standard Specification for Fence Fittings
ASTM F 668 Standard Specification for Polyvinyl (PVC), Polyolefin and Other
Polymer-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric
ASTM F 900 Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates
ASTM F 934 Standard Specification for Standard Colors for Polymer-Coated
Chain Link Fence Materials
ASTM F1083 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures
ASTM F1664 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Other
Conforming Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Tension Wire Used
with Chain-Link Fence
ASTM F1665 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Other
Conforming Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Barbed Wire Used
with Chain-Link Fence
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Full compensation for chain link fences and gates shall be considered at the contract
unit bid prices for each lineal foot of chain link fences and gates installed and accepted.
01/2023 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
254.07.100 PAGE 32 31 13 - 2
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Shop drawings: Site plan showing layout of fence location with dimensions, location of
gates and opening size, cleared area, elevation of fence, gates, footings and details of
attachments.
Certifications: Manufacturers material certifications in compliance with the current ASTM
specifications.
Domestic certifications: Material certifications, Made in U.S.A., Buy American Act or Buy
America when required.
Material samples: When required, provide representative samples of chain link fabric,
framework and fittings.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage
occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to
ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather,
vandalism and theft.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer: Company headquartered in the United States having U.S. manufacturing
facility/facilities specializing in manufacturing chain link fence products with at least 5
years’ experience.
Fence contractor: Company with demonstrated successful experience installing similar
projects and products in accordance with ASTM F567 and have at least 5 years’
experience.
Tolerances: Current published edition of ASTM specifications tolerances apply. ASTM
specification tolerances supersede any conflicting tolerance.
WARRANTY
All structural fence components (i.e. rails, pickets, and posts) shall be warranted within
specified limitations, by the manufacturer for a period of 20 years from date of original
purchase. Warranty shall cover any defects in material finish, including cracking,
peeling, chipping, blistering or corroding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
Wheatland Tube Co.,
Master Halco, Inc.,
Southwestern Wire, Inc.,
01/2023 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
254.07.100 PAGE 32 31 13 - 3
Or approved equal
GENERAL
Dimensions indicated herein for roll-formed pipe and H-sections are outside dimensions,
excluding coatings.
Fence fabric height shall be 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.
Fencing materials shall be galvanized and PVC coated after fabrication.
The color of the fencing fabric, poles, and fittings shall be black.
Fencing shall be topped with 3 lines of barbed wire on single, 45 degree supporting
arms, sloped outward. Fence height with barbed wire shall be over 6.6 feet.
STEEL FABRIC
Fence fabric shall be 9 gauge steel wire, 2-inch mesh, with top selvages knuckled and
bottom selvages twisted and barbed.
Fabric shall be hot-dip galvanized and PVC coated according to ASTM F668, Class 2a
or Class 2b. The weight of the zinc shall meet the requirements of STM F 668, Table 4.
FRAMING AND ACCESSORIES
Round steel pipe and rail: Schedule 40 standard weight pipe, in accordance with
ASTM F1083, 1.8 oz/ ft² hot dip galvanized zinc exterior and 1.8 oz/ft² hot dip galvanized
zinc interior coating. Intermediate Strength Grade: Minimum yield strength 50,000 psi.
Line post shall be 2-3/8” outside diameter, 1.8 oz/ft² zinc coating.
End, Corner, Pull post 2-7/8” outside diameter, 1.8 oz/ft² zinc coating.
Top, brace, bottom and intermediate rails, 1.660” outside diameter, 1.8 oz/ft² zinc
coating.
Polymer Coated Pipe: Polymer coated pipe shall have a PVC coating fused and
adhered to the exterior zinc coating of the galvanized pipe in accordance with ASTM
F1043. The minimum thickness of the PVC coating shall be 10-mils (0.254 mm). The
color shall match fabric black per ASTM F934.
Tension Wire: Tension wire shall be located at the bottom of the fabric and shall consist
of 7 gauge wire complying with ASTM F 1664. Wire gauge specified is the core wire
gauge. The color shall match the coating of the chain link fabric and shall be Class 2a or
Class 2b. Tension wire shall be interlaced with the fabric or attached to the fabric with
wire ties at a spacing of no more than 18 inches apart.
Barbed Wire Support Arms: Support arms shall be manufacturer’s standard
fabrication with finish to match fence framework. Support arms shall be single 45
degree arm type and shall be capable of withstanding 250 pounds of downward pull.
Barbed Wire: Polymer coated steel barbed wire shall comply with ASTM F 1665, double
14 gauge twisted strand wire, with 4 point 14 gauge round barbs spaced 5 inches on
center. Match coating of the chain link fabric.
01/2023 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
254.07.100 PAGE 32 31 13 - 4
Tension and Brace Bands: Galvanized pressed steel complying with ASTM F626,
minimum steel thickness of 12 gauge (0.105 in.), minimum width of 3/4 inch and
minimum zinc coating of 1.20 oz/ft². Secure bands with 5/16 inch galvanized steel
carriage bolts.
Terminal Post Caps, Line Post Loop Tops, Rail and Brace Ends, Boulevard
Clamps, Rail Sleeves: In compliance to ASTM F626, pressed steel galvanized after
fabrication having a minimum zinc coating of 1.20 oz/ft².
Truss Rod Assembly: In compliance with ASTM F626, 3/8-inch diameter steel truss
rod with a pressed steel tightener, minimum zinc coating of 1.2 oz/ft², assembly capable
of withstanding a tension of 2,000 lbs.
Tension Bars: Tension bars shall conform to ASTM F626 and shall be galvanized steel
one-piece length 2-inch less than the fabric height. Minimum zinc coating 1.2 oz. /ft².
Bars for 2 inch mesh shall have a minimum cross section of 3/16 inch by 3/4-inch.
Polymer Coated Color Fittings: In compliance with ASTM F626, PVC coating
minimum thickness 0.006-inch fused and adhered to the zinc coated fittings. Match color
to fence system.
Tie Wire and Hog Rings: Galvanized minimum zinc coating 1.20 oz/ft², 9-gauge
(0.148”) steel wire in compliance with ASTM F626. Tie wire and hog rings shall be
polymer coated and match the color of the fence system.
SWING GATES
Swing Gates: Galvanized steel pipe welded fabrication in compliance with ASTM
F900. Gate frame members 1.900-inch outside diameter, ASTM F 1083 schedule 40
galvanized steel pipe. Frame members spaced no greater than 8 ft. apart vertically and
horizontally. Welded joints protected by applying zinc-rich paint in accordance with
ASTM Practice A 780. Positive locking gate latch, pressed steel galvanized after
fabrication. Galvanized malleable iron or heavy gauge pressed steel post and frame
hinges. Provide lockable drop bar and gate holdbacks with double gates. Match gate
fabric to that of the fence system. Gateposts per ASTM F1083 schedule 40 galvanized
steel pipe. The gatepost diameter from table 2.5.B. Gate frames and gate posts shall be
PVC coated and match the color of the fence system.
Gateposts: Schedule 40 pipe in compliance with ASTM F1083.
Gate fabric height up to and including 6 ft.
Gate leaf width Post Outside Diameter Weight
up to 4 ft. 2.375 in. 3.65 lb/ft
over 4 ft. to 10 ft. 2.875 in. 5.79 lb/ft
over 10 ft. to 18 ft. 4.000 in. 9.11 lb/ft
Gate fabric height over 6 ft. to 12 ft.
Gate leaf width
up to 6 ft. 2.875 in. 5.79 lb/ft
over 6 ft. to 12 ft. 4.000 in. 9.11 lb/ft
over 12 ft. to 18 ft. 6.625 in. 18.97 lb/ft
over 18 ft. to 24 ft. 8.625 in. 28.58 lb/ft
01/2023 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
254.07.100 PAGE 32 31 13 - 5
CONCRETE
Concrete for post footings shall have a 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi in
accordance with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
FRAMEWORK INSTALLATION
Posts: Posts shall be set plumb in concrete footings in accordance with ASTM
F567. Minimum footing depth, 24 inch plus an additional 3 inch depth for each 1 ft.
increase in the fence height over 4 ft. or as indicated on the contract drawings whichever
is greater. The minimum footing diameter shall be four times the largest cross section of
the post up to a 4.00” dimension and three times the largest cross section of post
greater than a 4.00” dimension or as indicated on the contract drawings, whichever is
greater. Top of concrete footing to be at grade and crowned to shed water away from
the post. Line posts installed at intervals not exceeding 10 ft. on center.
Top rail: When specified, install 21 ft. lengths of rail continuous thru the line post or barb
arm loop top. Splice rail using top rail sleeves minimum 6 inches long. Rail shall be
secured to the terminal post by a brace band and rail end. Bottom rail or intermediate rail
shall be field cut and secured to the line posts using boulevard clamps or brace band
with rail end. Fences 12 feet high or higher require mid rail.
Terminal posts: End, corner, pull and gate posts shall be braced and trussed for fence 6
ft. and higher and for fences 5 ft. in height not having a top rail. The horizontal brace rail
and diagonal truss rod shall be installed in accordance with ASTM F567.
Tension wire: Shall be installed 4 inches up from the bottom of the fabric. Fences
without top rail shall have a tension wire installed 4 inches down from the top of the
fabric. Tension wire to be stretched taut, independently and prior to the fabric, between
the terminal posts and secured to the terminal post using a brace band. Secure the
tension wire to each line post with a tie wire. Install the top tension wire through the
barb arm loop for fences having barbed wire and no top rail.
CHAIN LINK FABRIC INSTALLATION
Chain Link Fabric: Install fabric to outside of the framework. Attach fabric to the terminal
post by threading the tension bar through the fabric; secure the tension bar to the
terminal post with tension bands and 5/16 inch carriage bolts spaced no greater than 12
inches on center. Chain link fabric shall be stretched taut free of sag. Fabric to be
secured to the line post with tie wires spaced no greater than 12 inches on center and to
horizontal rail spaced no greater than18 inches on center. Secure fabric to the tension
wire with hog rings spaced no greater than 18 inches on center.
Tie wire shall be wrapped 360 degrees around the post or rail and the two ends
twisted together three full turns. Excess wire shall be cut off and bent over to prevent
injury. The installed fabric shall have a ground clearance on no more than 2 inches.
01/2023 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
254.07.100 PAGE 32 31 13 - 6
BARBED WIRE INSTALLATION
Barbed Wire: Stretched taut between terminal posts and secured in the slots provided
on the line post barb arms. Attach each strand of barbed wire to the terminal post using
a brace band.
GATE INSTALLATION
Swing Gates: Installation of swing gates and gateposts in compliance with ASTM F 567.
Direction of swing shall be inward. Gates shall be plumb in the closed position having a
bottom clearance of 3 inch, grade permitting. Hinge and latch offset opening space shall
be no greater than 3 inches in the closed position. Double gate drop bar receivers shall
be set in a concrete footing minimum 6 inch diameter 24 inch deep. Gate leaf holdbacks
shall be installed for all double gates.
GROUNDING
Fences crossed by powerlines of 600 volts or more shall be grounded at or near the
point of crossing and at distances not exceeding 150-feet on each side of the crossing.
Ground conductor shall consist of No. 8 AWG solid copper wire. Grounding electrodes
shall be 3/4-inch by 10-foot long copper-clad steel rod. Electrodes shall be driven into
the earth so that the top of the electrode is at least 6 inches below grade. Where driving
is impractical, electrodes shall be buried a minimum of 12-inches deep and radially from
the fence. Top of electrode shall be not less than 2 feet or more than 8 feet from the
fence.
Ground conductor shall be clamped to the fence and electrodes with bronze grounding
clamps so as to create electrical continuity between the fence posts, fence fabric, and
ground rods. After installation, the total resistance of fence to ground shall not be less
than 25 ohms. PVC coated shall be ground down prior to installing clamps. Repair
coating around clamp per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Fence grounding is not the responsibility of the fence installer or manufacturer. A
licensed electrical contractor shall install grounding when required.
CLEAN UP
Clean Up: The area of the fence line shall be left neat and free of any debris caused by
the installation of the fence.
- END OF SECTION -
01/2023 COPPER PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 03- 1
SECTION 33 05 03
COPPER PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all copper pipes, fittings, couplings, supports,
joint materials and appurtenances as shown and specified, and as required for a
complete and workable piping system.
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 22 10 10 Plumbing Piping and Specialties
Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances
Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for this section. Full
compensation for Copper Pipe shall be considered as included in the contract unit or
lump sum bid prices for the various items of the contract to which Copper Pipe relates.
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the
Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM B88 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C 800 Standard for Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS
(IAPMO)
INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE (IPC)
INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC)
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
01/2023 COPPER PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 03- 2
Submit catalog information on all fittings and valves shown on the Contract Drawings,
referencing each item by number as shown on the Contract Drawings. Information shall
indicate manufacturer specification compliance and dimensional data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Reject any pipe which does not conform to Contract Documents or is cracked, chipped,
crushed, dented, kinked, or otherwise unacceptable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PIPE
The type and class of the pipe and fittings shall be as indicated on the Contract
Drawings and shall be Type K copper for buried services lines and Type L copper for
interior piping.
Type K and Type L copper pipe shall have smooth surfaces free from bumps. Type K
shall also be flexible enough to be coiled. All piping shall have the capacity to function at
design working pressures.
Copper pipe to be buried or encased in concrete shall be polyethylene coated or
installed in a polyethylene sleeve. Polyethylene coated pipe shall have a coating
thickness of 0.025 inches and shall be Mueller Industries Streamline Plastic Coated
Pipe, or approved equal. Polyethylene sleeve shall be a minimum 6 mil thick and shall
be Northtown Polywrap C, or approved equal. Color shall be blue for cold water, red
for hot water, or purple for reclaimed water. Seal seam joints and around fittings with
Polyken #930, or approved equal, adhesive tape.
CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS
Connections shall be flared or compression type for service lines. All other connections
for above ground and in interior to structures shall be hot 95-5 lead free soldered joints.
Connections for dissimilar piping shall include dielectric insulation unions.
Fittings shall conform to AWWA C-800 standards and shall be capable of operating at
150 psi
COPPER PIPE SUPPORT CLAMPS
See Section 05 45 00 Mechanical Metal Supports.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Pipe shall be installed per manufacturers’ instructions and per the requirements of the
INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE (IPC) and INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL
CODE (IMC). In case of a conflict between the two installation requirements the more
stringent requirement shall apply.
The pipe shall be plugged at the end of each work day or period of suspension.
01/2023 COPPER PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 03- 3
PRELIMINARY CLEANING AND FLUSHING
CONTRACTOR shall flush the pipeline as the work progresses by a means in
accordance with good practice to insure that any foreign materials do not remain in any
of the piping.
TESTING OF PIPING
Source of Water: CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary
water supplies for pressure testing of the pipeline.
Testing Procedure:
Pipe shall be tested in accordance with the INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE,
Section 312 - Tests and Inspections.
In the case of pipelines that fail to pass the leakage test, CONTRACTOR shall
determine the cause of the leakage, shall take corrective measures necessary to
repair the leaks, and shall repeat the pipeline testing until the pipeline passes the
leakage test, all at no additional cost to OWNER.
ENGINEER shall be notified at least 48 hours before the pipeline is to be tested so
that ENGINEER may be present during the test.
DISINFECTION
For all potable water systems and where otherwise required all pipelines shall be
disinfected in accordance with Section 33 13 00 – Pipeline Testing and Disinfection and
approved before being allowed to be connected into a culinary system. Sewer pipelines
do not require disinfection.
Source of Water: CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary
water supplies for disinfection of the water line system.

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 COPPER PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 03- 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 05 - 1
SECTION 33 05 05
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all pipe, fittings, closure pieces, supports, bolts,
nuts, gaskets, jointing material, polyethylene wrap, marker tape, tracer wire, and
appurtenances as shown and specified, and as required for a complete and workable
piping system.
RELATED WORK
Related work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 50 30 Protection of Existing Utilities
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes
Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Pipelines
Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances
Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract.
The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ASTM D 2041 Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, and
250
AMERICAN STANDARDS FOR TESTING AND MATERIAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless-Steel Bolting
for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special
Purpose Applications
ASTM A 194 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless-
Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service,
or Both
ASTM A 283 Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength
Carbon Steel Plates
ASTM A 536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
ASME B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads, (UN And UNR Thread Form)
ASME B18.2.1 Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, And Askew Head Bolts and Hex, Heavy
Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, And Lag Screws (Inch Series)
ASME B18.2.2 Nuts for General Applications: Machine Screw Nuts, Hex, Square,
Hex Flange, And Coupling Nuts (Inch Series)
01/2023 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 05 - 2
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C 104 Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and
Fittings
AWWA C 105 Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe
Systems
AWWA C 110 Standards for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-inch Through
48-inch, for Water
AWWA C 111 Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe
and Fittings
AWWA C 115 Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile Iron or Gray-
Iron Threaded Flanges
AWWA C 150 Standard for the Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe
AWWA C 151 Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water
AWWA C 153 Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3-inch Through 64-
inch for Water
AWWA C 219 Standard for Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe
AWWA C 600 Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their
Appurtenances
AWWA C 606 Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints
AWWA C 651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA M 11 Steel Pipe – A Guide for Design and Installation
SUBMITTALS
Submit catalog information on all pipe, fittings, valves, couplings, gaskets, tapes, bolts
and nuts, wraps, safety tapes, and tracer wires as shown on the Drawings. Information
shall indicate manufacture specification compliance and dimensional data.
Submit shop drawings on all fabricated piping and pipe supports.
Submit bolting patterns, procedures, and bolting equipment data, and calculations for
target torque calculations.
Certified affidavit of compliance for pipe and fittings or other materials furnished under this
Section and as specified in the referenced standards.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Except as modified herein, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested
in accordance with the requirements of the referenced standards as applicable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of the AWWA C151 and AWWA C150
and pipe must be certified for potable water use by the National Sanitation Foundation
(NSF/ANSI 61) and must bear the logo "NSF-pw" or "NSF-61" indicating such certification.
Pipe shall be rated to 350 psi. The pipe shall be provided with rubber gaskets, specials,
and fittings as required. Nominal pipe laying lengths shall be 20-feet.
01/2023 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 05 - 3
Buried Ductile Iron Pipe shall be encased with 8 mil (minimum), Group 2, Class C black
polyethylene, conforming to the requirements of AWWA C105. All seams in the
polyethylene encasement shall be taped with a minimum 12 mil adhesive tape, Polyken
#900, 3M Scotchrap 51, or approved equal, to completely seal the seam.
FITTINGS
MJ and Push-on fittings shall conform to the (AWWA C110 or C153), be NSF certified to
ANSI/NSF 61 and shall be for a minimum rated working pressure of 250 psi.
Flanges shall conform to AWWA C110 AWWA C111, and ANSI B16.1, Class 125 and
shall have either raised or plain faces, and shall have a minimum working pressure rating
of 250 psi. For pipe sizes 24-inch and smaller, flanged joints may be rated for a maximum
of 350 psi with the use of specially designed gaskets.
All buried fittings shall be completely coated with food grade grease, Chevron FM
Grease, or approved equal, and shall be completely encased with 8 mil (minimum), Group
2, Class C polyethylene, conforming to AWWA C105 and color to match the pipe wrap.
All seams in the polyethylene encasement shall be taped with a minimum 12 mil adhesive
tape, Polyken #900, 3M Scotchrap 51, or approved equal, to completely seal the seam.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE JOINTS
Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be furnished with mechanical joints, push-on joints,
flanged joints, or restrained joints as required.
Mechanical and push-on joints shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C111.
Flanged joints shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C115.
Restrained joints shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C151. Restrained joints
shall be Flex-Ring, Field Flex-Ring, or Lok-Ring by American Ductile Iron Pipe,
Field Lok, TR-Flex by U.S. Pipe, or approved equal.
Joint restraining devices that impart point loads and/or wedging action on the pipe wall
as a means of joint restraint shall not be allowed unless there are no other options
available. CONTRACTOR may propose such devices by providing a formal
substitution request indicating the locations the devices are to be used and that the
devices is rated at least for the class of pipe being supplied. The devices shall be
MegaLug Model 1100 by EBAA Iron, or approved equal.
MECHANICAL-TYPE COUPLINGS (GROOVED)
Mechanical-type couplings shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings and shall
conform to the requirements of AWWA C606. Mechanical type couplings shall be
designed for a water working pressure not less than the design pressure of the pipe on
which they are to be installed. Mechanical-type couplings shall be Victaulic Style 31
(flexible or rigid), or approved equal.
Gaskets shall be the flush seal type.
Mechanical-type couplings for equipment connections shall be provided with rigid grooved
couplings or flexible type coupling with harness, unless thrust restraint is provided by other
means.
01/2023 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 05 - 4
Grooved fittings, couplings and valves shall be furnished from the same manufacturer as
the coupling. Grooving tools shall be from the same manufacturer as the grooved
components.
SOLID SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS
Solid sleeve-type couplings shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. Coupling
shall be of ductile iron and shall be of the size to fit the pipe and fittings shown. Coupling
shall be pressure rated 250 psi and comply with AWWA C110. Restraints shall be
provided where indicated on the Drawings.
BOLTED SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS
Sleeve-type couplings shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. Couplings shall
be of ductile iron, without pipe stop, and shall be of sizes to fit the pipe and fittings shown.
Coating shall be fusion bonded epoxy. Couplings shall be pressure rated for 250 psi and
comply with AWWA C219. Couplings shall be Style 501 or FC1 by EJ Prescott, Style
501 by Romac, or approved equal.
RESTRAINED BOLTED SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS
Restrained bolted sleeve-type couplings shall be provided where shown on the Drawings.
Couplings shall be of ductile iron or ASTM A283 Grade C steel, without pipe stop, and
shall be of sizes to fit the pipe and fittings shown. Coating shall be fusion bond epoxy.
Couplings shall be the rated for 250 psi and comply with AWWA C219. Sleeve length
shall be 7 inches for pipe diameters 4-inch through 12-inch and 10 inches for pipe
diameters 14-inch and larger. Restraint gland shall be ductile iron meeting the
requirements of ASTM A 536. Couplings shall be Series 470 by Smith-Blair, Style
400RG by Romac, Series 3800 by EBAA Iron, Inc., or approved equal.
FLANGE COUPLING ADAPTER (DISMANTLING JOINT)
Provide flanged coupling adapters (dismantling joint) were shown on the Drawings.
CONTRACTOR will not be allowed to substitute any other type of flanged coupling adapter
unless approved by ENGINEER. The coupling shall be rated as indicated on the
Drawings.
Flanged coupling adapter bodies shall be fabricated from steel, ASTM A512 or A 513 or
Ductile Iron ASTM A536, without pipe stop. The body shall not be less than 1/4-inch thick
or at least the same wall thickness as the pipe to which the coupling is connected. If the
strength of the body material is less than the strength of the pipe material, the thickness
of the middle ring shall be increased to have the same strength as the pipe. The follower
ring shall be fabricated from steel, ASTM A576 or A36.
For flanged coupling adapters installed in piping systems rated for positive pressure, the
coupling shall be restrained with harness bolts or tie rods. Other means of restraining the
coupling such as set screws will not be accepted. Harnesses shall be designed in
accordance with AWWA Manual 11, or as indicated. Harness sets shall be designed for
the maximum test pressure of the pipe in which they are installed.
Gaskets shall be composed of a rubber-compound material that will not deteriorate from
age or exposure to air under normal storage or use conditions.
01/2023 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 05 - 5
Flanged coupling adapters (dismantling joints) shall be Model 975 by Smith-Blair, Model
309 by JCM, Model DJ400 by Romac, or approved equal.
GASKETS
Except as otherwise provided, gaskets for flanged joints shall be 1/8-inch thick rubber
fabric. Class 250 or less flange gaskets shall be Flange-Tyte by U.S. Pipe, higher
pressure joint gaskets shall be Garlock BLUE-GARD Style 3000, or approved equal.
Wherever blind flanges are shown, the gaskets shall consist of 1/8-inch thick cloth-
inserted rubber sheet which shall cover the entire inside surface of the blind flange and
shall be cemented to the surface of the blind flange.
All buried fittings using steel bolts shall be coated with no-oxide wax and wrapped with
polyethylene or as otherwise approved by ENGINEER.
BOLTS AND NUTS
Bolts and nuts shall be rated for the system working pressure with a minimum safety factor
of three. Bolts and nuts buried, submerged, and inside vaults shall be zinc coated steel
(wax tape coated). Bolts and nuts above grade, exposed or inside structures, shall be
Type 304 stainless steel. Bolts and nuts in exposed to wastewater or in corrosive
environments shall be Type 304 stainless steel.
All flange bolt lengths shall be selected by CONTRACTOR such that three full threads, as
a minimum, protrude from the hex nut and washer after assembly.
Flange bolts shall have ASME B1.1, Class 2A threads, and be manufactured of ASTM A
193, Grade B7 steel. Bolts shall conform to ASME B18.2.1.
Flange nuts shall have Class 2A fit, and be manufactured of ASTM A 194, Grade 2H steel,
having square or hex heavy dimensions in accordance with ASME B18.2.2.
Connection T-bolts for mechanical joint (MJ) fittings shall be Cor-Ten high strength, low
alloy steel conforming to AWWA C111.
CEMENT MORTAR LINING
Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be lined with cement mortar in accordance with the
requirements of the AWWA C104 except that the lining thickness shall be not less than
1/8 of an inch. The pipe interior surfaces shall be smooth and free from factures,
excessive crazing, and roughness.
THRUST BLOCKS AND RESTRAINED JOINTS
Provide thrust restraint by use of thrust blocks or restrained joints. All ductile iron (and
PVC) pipe on this project shall be restrained joint. However, there is one thrust block
required at the connection to the existing 8-inch pipe. Provide a thrust block there per the
Details on the Drawings.
Joint restraints may be tie rods, TR Flex piping system as manufactured by US Pipe,
or approved equal, or a Megalug system as manufactured by EBAA Iron. Where the
required pipeline deflection exceeds the recommended deflection of the TR Flex piping
system, CONTRACTOR shall use Megalugs to achieve specified deflections.
01/2023 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 05 - 6
“RJ MJ” means “Restrained Joint Mechanical Joint” piping with Megalugs (or Engineer
approved equal) to provide restraint.
Restrained joints shall be suitable for 250 psi test pressures.
SAFETY TAPE
Safety tape shall be a minimum of 3-inch wide by 5.0 mil overall thickness, with no less
than a 0.35 gauge solid aluminum foil core. It shall be Safety Blue in color per American
Public Works Association (APWA) National Color Code and shall be clearly labeled with
the words “CAUTION WATER LINE BELOW” or similar wording approved by ENGINEER.
Safety tape shall be MagnaTec by Empire Level Mfg Corp, or approved equal.
TRACER WIRE
All piping (including service lines) shall be installed with 12 gauge solid copper THHN
tracer wire for pipeline location purposes by means of an electronic line tracer.
The wires must be installed along the entire length of the pipe at the top centerline of
the pipe and be held in place with poly tape at all pipe joints and at 5 foot intervals.
Sections of wire shall be spliced together using approved splice caps and waterproof
seals. Twisting the wires together is not acceptable.
PIPE COATINGS
All exposed piping, valves, and fittings including inside vaults and buildings shall be
painted as specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Finishes. Exposed piping, valves
and fittings to be painted shall be primed by the manufacturer in preparation for painting.
CONTRACTOR shall provide verification from the finish coating supplier that the field
applied coatings are compatible with the manufacturer’s prime coat. Pipe to be painted
shall not have asphalt emulsion coating. The exterior of buried pipe and fittings shall be
an asphaltic coating approximately one-mil thick.
COLD-APPLIED WAX TAPE COATING FOR BURIED PIPE
Apply wax tape coating over all the following buried pipe features: flanges, dismantling
joints, mechanical joints, Megalug joints, valves, actuators, joints, nuts, bolts, and all
metallic appurtenances which are buried.
Primer: Primer shall be a blend of petrolatums, plasticizers, and corrosion inhibitors having
a paste-like consistency. The primer shall have the following properties:
Color Brown
Pour Point 100°F to 110°F
Flash Point 350°F
Coverage 1 gallon/100 square feet
Manufacturer Trenton Wax Tape Primer, Denso Paste Primer, or approved
equal.
Wax Tape: Wax tape shall consist of a synthetic-fiber felt, saturated with a blend of
microcrystalline wax, petrolatums, plasticizers, and corrosion inhibitors, forming a tape
01/2023 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 05 - 7
coating that is easily formable over irregular surfaces. The tape shall have the following
properties:
Color Brown
Saturant Pour Point 115°F to 120°F
Thickness 50 to 70 mils
Tape Width 6 inches
Dielectric Strength 100 volts/mil
Manufacturer Trenton No. 1 Wax Tape, Denso "Densyl Tape”, or
approved equal.
Plastic Wrapper: Wrapper shall be a polyvinylidene chloride plastic with three 50-gauge
plies wound together as a single sheet. The wrapper shall have the following properties:
Color Clear
Thickness 1.5 mils
Tape Width 6 inches
Manufacturer Trenton Poly-Ply, Denso Tape PVC Self-Adhesive, or approved
equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Excavation and backfill of trenches and for appurtenances shall be in accordance with
Section 31 23 15 - Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines.
Ductile iron fittings shall be installed in accordance with the ANSI/AWWA C600. Inspect
each pipe and fitting prior to installation to verify there is no damage and clean each pipe
and fitting prior to installation.
Pipe shall be laid directly on the bedding material. Bell holes shall be formed at the ends
of the pipe to prevent point loading.
No pipe shall be installed on a foundation into which frost has penetrated or at any time
that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost at the bottom of the
excavation before backfilling occurs.
Immediately before joining the pipe, the bell end of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned.
The spigot end of the pipe and the inside surface of the gasket shall be cleaned and
lubricated. The lubricant shall be non-toxic, shall not support bacteria growth, shall not be
harmful to the gasket material, and shall be compliant with NSF/ANSI 61 requirements.
The lubricant shall not impart a taste or odor to the water in the pipe. Tilting of the pipe to
insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted.
Buried Ductile Iron pipe shall be polyethylene encased in accordance with the
requirements of AWWA C105 Method A. Remove all lumps of clay, mud, cinders, etc. on
the pipe surface before installation of the encasement. During installation, soil or
embedment material shall not be trapped between the pipe and the polyethylene. Cut
polyethylene tube to a length at least 2 feet longer than the pipe section. Wrap shall
overlap the adjacent pipe joint at least 1 foot. After assembling the pipe joint, overlap the
joint with the polyethylene tube and secure to the pipe with adhesive tape completely
01/2023 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 05 - 8
around the seam. Overlap the joint on the previous pipe with the polyethylene tube and
secure to the existing wrap with adhesive tape and completely seal the seam. Take up
the slack width at the top of the pipe to make a snug but not tight fit along the barrel of the
pipe and secure with poly tape at 5 foot intervals. For installations below the water table
or wet areas, circumferential wraps of tape should be placed at 2 foot intervals along the
barrel of the pipe prior to lowering the pipe into the trench.
DO NOT coat buried bolted joints and valves with food grade grease. Wax tape coat
them per AWWA C217 and this spec. Then encase them with polyethylene wrap and
install in conformance with AWWA C105 standards. Tape polyethylene seams with
Polyken #900, 3M Scotchrap 51, adhesive tape, or approved equal, to completely seal
the seam.
Repair punctures to the polyethylene wrap with adhesive tape. Repair cuts, tears, or
damage to the polyethylene wrap with a tube cut open, wrapped around the pipe to cover
the damaged area, and secure in place with Polyken #900, 3M Scotchrap 51, adhesive
tape, or approved equal, to completely seal the seam.
Provide openings for branches, service taps, blowoffs, air valves, and similar
appurtenances by cutting an “X” in the polyethylene and temporarily folding back the film.
After the appurtenance is installed, tape the slack securely to the appurtenance, and repair
the cut and any other damaged areas.
To make a direct tap, apply two or three wraps of adhesive tape completely around the
polyethylene encased pipe to cover the area where the tapping machine and chain will be
mounted. Install the corporation stop directly through the tape and polyethylene
encasement. After the direct tap is completed, inspect for damage and repair if needed.
Where polyethylene wrapped pipe joins an adjacent pipe that is not wrapped, extend the
polyethylene wrap to cover the adjacent pipe for a distance of 3 feet. Secure the end with
adhesive tape completely around the seam. Service lines with dissimilar metals shall be
wrapped with polyethylene or approved dielectric tape for a minimum clear distance of 3
feet away from the ductile iron pipe.
Valves shall be handled in a manner to prevent damage to any part of the valve.
CONTRACTOR shall adjust stem packing and operate each valve prior to installation to
insure proper operation. Valves shall be installed so that the valve stems are plumb and,
in the location, indicated on the drawings.
The pipe shall be plugged at the end of each work day or period of suspension.
Safety tracer tape shall be installed 12-inches (atop pipe zone) above the pipe along the
entire length of pipeline.
Bring up tracer wire at valve boxes and fire hydrants as shown on the Drawings. Tracer
wire does not need to be brought up at shut-off valves for fire hydrants. When splicing a
wire use a greased filled or approved connector. All splices should occur within a valve
box. Wire is to be continuous underground. Underground splices may only be used by
specific permission of the OWNER and must be inspected before backfill.
01/2023 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 05 - 9
THRUST BLOCKS
Thrust blocks shall be installed at points where the pipe changes direction such as: at all
tees, elbows, wyes, caps, valves, hydrants, reducers, etc.
Thrust blocks shall be constructed so that the bearing surface is in direct line with the
major force created by the pipe or fitting.
Thrust blocks shall bear against solid undisturbed earth at the side and bottom of the
trench excavation and shall be shaped so as not to obstruct access to the joints or the
pipe or fitting.
Thrust blocks shall be sized and constructed per OWNER’s Standards or the drawings,
whichever is greater.
PRELIMINARY CLEANING AND FLUSHING
CONTRACTOR shall flush the pipeline as the work progresses by a means in accordance
with good practice to ensure that sand, rocks, or other foreign material do not remain in
any of the pipeline. If possible, the flushing shall be made with an open pipe end.
CONTRACTOR shall provide to ENGINEER a proposed schedule and method of flushing
for review before the flushing starts.
BOLTING PROCEDURES FOR FLANGED JOINTS
Flange joints shall be assembled per the gasket manufacturer’s instructions and as
specified herein. Utilize calibrated bolting equipment capable of applying a measured
torque to flange bolts during joining. Bolting patterns, procedures, and bolting equipment
data shall be submitted prior to pipe fitting and bolting.
Gaskets, bolts, and anti-seize lubricant used in the bolting procedure shall be selected
from those specified herein. Submit target torque calculations for each application.
Calculations shall identify specific gasket (manufacturer, model, size, configuration,
material), bolts (size and material), and anti-seize lubricant. The calculations shall
document and take into consideration the pipe service, working and test pressures, pipe
diameter, gasket data sheet, bolt material, gasket supplier-recommended assembly
stress, and gasket-supplier recommended bolt stress. Calculations shall be stamped by a
professional engineer. Target torque calculations shall be used in the assembly of bolted
joints.
Flange bolts, nuts, and washers shall be visually inspected and cleaned prior to bolting.
Lubricate bolts and nuts; if hardened washers are not used, lubricate the flange surface
around the bolt holes. This lubricant must be removed by cleaning solvent prior to applying
a coating system. Hand-tighten all nuts and bolts then tighten them to 10 to 20 percent of
the target torque. The initial torque shall not exceed 20 percent of the target torque. The
bolts shall be tightened according to the pattern included in AWWA Manual M11, Figure
12-3.
For flanges having 4 to 8 bolts there shall be three rounds of tightening, after hand
tightening, to 30 percent, 60 percent and then 100 percent of the target torque. For flanges
having 12 or more bolts there shall be four rounds of tightening, after hand tightening, to
01/2023 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 05 - 10
20 percent, 40 percent, 80 percent and 100 percent of the target torque. At 100 percent
of target torque the flange gap shall be measured at every other bolt to confirm uniformity.
The bolts shall be re-tightened to the target torque 24 hours after completion of the initial
bolting sequence.
COLD-APPLIED WAX TAPE COATING APPLICATION
Surfaces shall be clean and free of all dirt, grease, water, and other foreign material prior
to the application of the primer and wax tape.
Apply primer by hand or brush to all surfaces of the pipefitting or valve. Work the primer
into all crevices and completely cover all exposed metal surfaces.
Apply the wax tape immediately after the primer application. Work the tape into the
crevices around fittings. Wrap the wax tape spirally around the pipe and across the fitting.
Use a minimum overlap of 55 percent of the tape width.
Work the tape into the crevices and contours of irregularly shaped surfaces and smooth
out so that there is a continuous protective layer with no voids or spaces under the tape.
For larger voids or irregular shaped surfaces fill spaces with a moldable mastic. Moldable
mastic shall be Trenton Fill-Pro PM-GP, or approved equal.
Overwrap the completed wax tape installation with the plastic wrapping material. Wrap
spirally around the pipe and across the fitting. Use a minimum overlap of 55 percent of
the tape width and apply two layers or applications of overwrap. Secure plastic wrapper
to pipe with adhesive tape.
TRACER WIRE TESTING
Tracer wire shall be installed where indicated above or shown on the Contract Drawings
on the pipe along the entire length of pipeline.
Upon completion of the pipe installation, CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that the wire
is continuous and unbroken through the entire run of the pipe.
Demonstration shall include full signal conductivity (including splices) when energizing
for the entire run in the presence of OWNER and/or ENGINEER.
If the wire is broken, CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace it. Pipeline installation will
not be accepted until the wire passes a continuity test.
TESTING OF PIPELINE
CONTRACTOR shall provide additional temporary blow-off valves and fittings as required
to flush and disinfect new pipelines. Temporary blow-off valves and fittings shall be
removed prior to placing pipeline into service.
Source of Water
CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water supplies
for pressure testing of the pipeline.
Testing Procedure
01/2023 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
254.07.100 PAGE 33 05 05 - 11
Pipe shall be tested at a static pressure of 200 psi for 2 hours and in accordance with
the AWWA C600 standards. Pipe shall be tested in segments such that the test
pressure at the low point of the segment shall be 200 psi, and the minimum pressure
at the high point in the segment shall be 200 psi.
In the case of pipelines that fail to pass the leakage test, CONTRACTOR shall
determine the cause of the excessive leakage, shall take corrective measures
necessary to repair the leaks, and shall repeat the pipeline test, all at no additional
cost to OWNER.
ENGINEER shall be notified at least 48 hours before the pipeline is to be tested so
that ENGINEER may be present during the test.
Pressure and Leak Test
CONTRACTOR shall test all piping either in sections or as a unit. The test shall be
made by placing temporary bulkheads as needed in the pipe and filling the line slowly
with water. Care shall be taken to see that all air vents are open during the filling.
Bulkheads, valves, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If any leaks are
found, corrective measures satisfactory to ENGINEER shall be taken. The test shall
consist of holding a minimum pressure as shown on the Drawings in the section being
tested for a minimum period of two hours using either pneumatic or hydraulic means
to maintain the pressure. Suitable means shall be provided by CONTRACTOR for
determining the quantity of water lost by leakage under the test pressure. The testing
allowance is defined as the quantity of water that must be applied to the pipe section
being tested to maintain a pressure within 5 psi of the specified hydrostatic test
pressure. The maximum allowable leakage shall be defined as follows:

L = SD(P)1/2/148,000

L = Testing allowance (makeup water) in gallons per hour of test
S = Length of pipe in feet
D = Nominal diameter of pipe in inches
P = Average Test Pressure in pounds per square inch (gauge)
DISINFECTING
Disinfection shall be in accordance with Section 33 13 00 – Pipeline Testing and
Disinfection.
PAINTING
All exposed piping including inside vaults shall be painted as specified in Section 09 90
00 – Painting and Finishes.

- END OF SECTION –

03/2023 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (C900)
254.07.100 33 05 07- 1
SECTION 33 05 07
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS
(AWWA C900)
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all PVC pipe, fittings, closure pieces, supports,
gaskets, jointing material and appurtenances as shown and specified, and as required
for a complete and workable piping system.
This Section includes PVC pressure pipe meeting the requirements of AWWA C900.
PVC pressure pipe with solved-welded, flanged, or threaded joints is included in Section
33 05 07.1 - PVC Pressure Pipe (ASTM D 1785, modified).
RELATED WORK
Related work specified in other sections:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 50 30 Protection of Existing Facilities
Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Pipelines
Section 33 05 05.1 Ductile Iron Fittings for PVC Pipe
Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances
Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the
Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM D 1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Compounds
ASTM D 3139 Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM F 477 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C 605 Standard for Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water
AWWA C 651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C 900 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and
Fabricated Fittings, 4-Inch through 60-Inch for Water
Transmission and Distribution
03/2023 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (C900)
254.07.100 33 05 07- 2
AWWA M 23 Manual of Water Supply Practices - PVC Pipe - Design and
Installation
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Submit manufacturer's affidavit certifying product was manufactured, tested and supplied
in accordance with applicable references in this section together with a report of the test
results and the date each test was completed.
Submit shop drawings of pipe, fittings, and appurtenances showing compliance with this
Section; and manufacturer’s literature on tracer wire and accessories.
Submit plan for commissioning the waterline, including but not limited to cleaning,
pressure testing, and disinfection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE
All polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe intended for use in public drinking water supply
pipelines or in pressure pipeline systems shall be manufactured of material conforming
to AWWA C900, ASTM D1784, and cell classification 12454 PVC materials for the size
and class required. All PVC pipe must be certified for potable water use by the National
Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NSF 61) and must bear the logo "NSF-pw" or "NSF-61"
indicating such certification. Standard laying lengths shall be 20-feet. Pipe sections shall
be clearly marked to:
Identify manufacturer's name or trademark
Nominal pipe size and OD base
AWWA material code designation
Dimension ratio
AWWA pressure class
AWWA specification designation
Product record code
The PVC pipe shall be DR-18 (235 psi).
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE JOINTS
All joints and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier.
Joints shall be bell and spigot conforming to the requirements of ASTM D3139. Gaskets
shall comply with the requirements of ASTM F477.
Deflection at the joint shall not exceed 1.0 degree for AWWA C900 pipe or the maximum
deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. No deflection of the joint shall be
allowed for joints that are over-inserted or not inserted to the assembly or stop mark.
FITTINGS
Fittings shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 05.1 – Ductile Iron Fittings for PVC
Pipe.
03/2023 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (C900)
254.07.100 33 05 07- 3
THRUST BLOCKS/ RESTRAINTS
All fittings shall have proper thrust blocks and restraints as noted for the type of
installation required. Joint restraint shall be provided for all bends, fittings, and valves
regardless of pipe size or location. Thrust blocks shall be 3,000 psi concrete.
Joint restraints may be EBAA Iron Megalug Series 2000PV and Series 2200, Star
Pipe Product Series 1100 Pipe Restrainers, Romac Industries RomaGrip for PVC
Pipe or 470 Series Pipe Restraining System with tie rods, or approved equal.
(RESTRAINTS WITH A POINT LOADING ON THE PIPE WILL NOT BE ALLOWED O N
PVC PIPE.)
Restrained joints shall be suitable for a minimum of 150 psi test pressures or the
required project test pressure.
TRACER WIRE
All piping (including service lines) shall be installed with 12 gauge solid copper THHN
tracer wire for pipeline location purposes by means of an electronic line tracer.
The wires must be installed along the entire length of the pipe on the top of the pipe
and be held in place with ties or hitches spaced not more than 12-feet apart.
Sections of wire shall be spliced together using approved splice caps and waterproof
seals or solder. Twisting the wires together is not acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Excavation and backfill of trenches and for appurtenances shall be in accordance with
Section 31 23 15 - Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe shall be installed in accordance with AWWA Manual M23.
The pipe shall be plugged at the end of each work day, or period of work suspension.
Tracer wire shall be installed 3-inch minimum above pipe as required by the Drawings.
THRUST BLOCKS AND JOINT RESTRAINTS
Thrust blocks and/or joint restraints (as indicated on the drawings) shall be installed at
points where the pipe changes direction such as: at all tees, elbows, wyes, caps, valves,
hydrants, reducers, etc.
Thrust blocks shall be constructed so that the bearing surface is in direct line with the
major force created by the pipe or fitting.
Thrust blocks shall bear against solid undisturbed earth at the side and bottom of the
trench excavation and shall be shaped so as not to obstruct access to the joints or the
pipe or fitting.
Thrust blocks shall be sized and constructed per the drawings.
03/2023 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (C900)
254.07.100 33 05 07- 4
PRELIMINARY CLEANING AND FLUSHING
CONTRACTOR shall flush the pipeline as the work progresses by a means in
accordance with good practice to insure that sand, rocks, or other foreign material are
not left in any of the pipeline. If possible the flushing shall be made with an open pipe
end.
CONTRACTOR shall provide to ENGINEER a proposed schedule and method of
flushing for review before the flushing starts.
TRACER WIRE TESTING
Upon completion of the pipe installation, CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that the wire
is continuous and unbroken through the entire run of the pipe.
Demonstration shall include full signal conductivity (including splices) when
energizing for the entire run in the presence of OWNER OR ENGINEER.
If the wire is broken, CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace it. Pipeline installation
will not be accepted until the wire passes a continuity test.
TESTING OF PIPELINE
CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary blow-off valves and fittings as required to flush
and disinfect new pipelines. Temporary blow-off valves and fittings shall be removed
prior to placing pipeline into service.
Source of Water
CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water
supplies for disinfection and pressure testing of the pipeline.
Testing Procedure
PVC pipe shall be tested at a static pressure of 150 psi for 2 hours and in
accordance with the AWWA C605 standards. Pipe shall be tested in segments such
that the test pressure at the low point of the segment shall be 150 psi.
In the case of pipelines that fail to pass the leakage test, CONTRACTOR shall
determine the cause of the excessive leakage, shall take corrective measures
necessary to repair the leaks, and shall repeat the pipeline test, all at no additional
cost to OWNER.
ENGINEER shall be notified at least 48 hours before the pipeline is to be tested so
that the ENGINEER may be present during the test.
Pressure and Leak Test
The Contractor shall test all piping either in sections or as a unit. The test shall be
made by placing temporary bulkheads as needed in the pipe and filling the line
slowly with water. Care shall be taken to see that all air vents are open during the
filling. Bulkheads, valves, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If any leaks
are found, corrective measures satisfactory to ENGINEER shall be taken. The test
shall consist of holding a minimum pressure as shown on the Drawings on the
section being tested for a minimum period of two hours using either pneumatic or
03/2023 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (C900)
254.07.100 33 05 07- 5
hydraulic means to maintain the pressure. Suitable means shall be provided by
CONTRACTOR for determining the quantity of water lost by leakage under the test
pressure. The testing allowance is defined as the quantity of water that must be
applied to the pipe section being tested to maintain a pressure within 5 psi of the
specified hydrostatic test pressure. The maximum allowable leakage shall be
defined as follows:

L = SD(P)1/2/148,000

L = Testing allowance (makeup water) in gallons per hour of test
S = Length of pipe in feet
D = Nominal diameter of pipe in inches
P = Average Test Pressure in pounds per square inch (gauge)
DISINFECTING
Disinfection shall be in accordance with Section 33 13 00 - Pipeline Testing and
Disinfection.

- END OF SECTION –

03/2023 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (C900)
254.07.100 33 05 07- 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D1785)
254.07.100 33 05 07.1 - 1
SECTION 33 05 07.1
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE
(ASTM D 1785, modified)
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all PVC pressure pipe and appurtenances as
shown and specified, and as required for a complete and workable piping system.
This Section includes PVC pressure pipe with solvent-welded, flanged, or threaded joints
in accordance with ASTM D 1785 as modified herein. PVC pipe with bell and spigot
joints is included in Section 33 05 07 - PVC Pressure Pipe, Rubber Joints (AWWA C900
and C905).
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 05 45 00 Mechanical Metal Supports
Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Pipelines
Section 33 05 07 PVC Pressure Pipe, Rubber Joints (AWWA C900 and C905)
Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances
Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the
Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 150
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM D 1785 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D 2467 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM F 1498 Standard Specification for Taper Pipe Threads 60 Degrees for
Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C 605 Standard for Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water
AWWA C 651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains
01/2023 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D1785)
254.07.100 33 05 07.1 - 2
AWWA C 900 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and
Fabricated Fittings, 4-Inch through 12-Inch for Water
Transmission and Distribution
AWWA C 905 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and
Fabricated Fittings 14-Inch through 48-inch
AWWA M 23 Manual of Water Supply Practices - PVC Pipe - Design and
Installation
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Submit manufacturer's affidavit certifying product was manufactured, tested and supplied
in accordance with applicable references in this section together with a report of the test
results and the date each test was completed.
Submit shop drawings of pipe, fittings, and appurtenances showing compliance with this
Section; and manufacturer’s literature on tracer wire and accessories.
Submit plan for commissioning the waterline, including but not limited to cleaning,
pressure testing, and disinfection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE
PVC pipe shall be made from new rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride and shall be
normal impact Type 1, Grade 1, class 12454, listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61,
unless otherwise indicated, in accordance with ASTM D 1785. Use Schedule 80 pipe
unless noted otherwise.
Pipe sections shall be clearly marked to:
Identify manufacturer's name or trademark
Nominal pipe size and OD base
ASTM material code designation
Schedule
Pressure class
ASTM specification designation
Product record code
The PVC pipe shall be Schedule 80. .
PIPE JOINTS
Pipe joints shall be solvent-welded type with solvent cement and primer as
recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the chemical in the pipe.
Threaded joints that are necessary to match up to threaded valves or fittings shall be
made up with appropriate thread sealant, either paste or tape.
Flanged joints shall be made with solvent-welded PVC flanges, drilled to ASME B 16.5 -
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated. Gaskets
01/2023 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D1785)
254.07.100 33 05 07.1 - 3
shall be ANSI 150 lb. full face, 1/8-inch thick Neoprene for water or wastewater service.
Gasket material for chemicals shall be suitable for the chemical service.
FITTINGS
Solvent-welded and threaded fittings shall be Schedule 80 PVC fittings in accordance
with ASTM D 2467 - Socket-Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 80.
Flanged fittings shall be Schedule 80 fabricated PVC fittings with 150 lb. flanges to
ASME B 16.5.
TRACER WIRE
All buried piping (including service lines) shall be installed with 12 gauge solid copper
THHN tracer wire for pipeline location purposes by means of an electronic line tracer.
The wires must be installed along the entire length of the pipe on the top of the pipe
and be held in place with ties or hitches spaced not more than 12-feet apart.
Sections of wire shall be spliced together using approved splice caps and waterproof
seals or solder. Twisting the wires together is not acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Excavation and backfill of trenches and for appurtenances shall be in accordance with
Section 31 23 15 - Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines.
PVC pipe shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly aligned, and cut
from measurements taken at the Site to avoid interferences with structural members,
architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed pipe shall afford maximum
headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary, piping shall be installed with
sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points.
Piping shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial hangers or supports in
accordance with Section 05 45 00 – Mechanical Metal Supports (Pipe Supports). Where
necessary to avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the pipe shall be
anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for pipe
expansion due to temperature changes.
Unless otherwise indicated, connections to fixtures, groups of fixtures, and equipment
shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve has flanged ends.
Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and other devices requiring
occasional removal or disconnection. Valves and flanges attached to PVC pipe shall be
provided with adequate supports.
PIPE PREPARATION
Prior to installation, each pipe length shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any
debris or dust, and be straightened, if not true. Ends of threaded pipes shall be reamed
and filed smooth. Pipe fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly
01/2023 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D1785)
254.07.100 33 05 07.1 - 4
PIPE JOINTS
Pipe threads shall conform to ASTM F 1498 and shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp
dies or molded. Joints shall be made with Teflon tape or thread sealant.
Solvent-welded joints shall be made with fresh primer and solvent cement on clean, dry
pipe ends. The primer and cement cans shall be kept closed at all times and the joints
shall be made up at the recommended ambient temperatures, according to the pipe or
cement manufacturer's written recommendations. Pipe ends shall be inserted to the full
depth of the socket. Solvents used on potable water pipes shall be ANSI/NSF 61
certified.
Flanged joints shall be made with gaskets and Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts,
unless noted otherwise. Care shall be taken not to over-torque the bolts, in accordance
with the manufacturer's written recommendations.
PRELIMINARY CLEANING AND FLUSHING
CONTRACTOR shall flush the pipeline as the work progresses by a means in
accordance with good practice to insure that sand, rocks, or other foreign material are
not left in any of the pipeline. If possible the flushing shall be made with an open pipe
end.
CONTRACTOR shall provide to ENGINEER a proposed schedule and method of
flushing for review before the flushing starts.
TRACER WIRE TESTING
Upon completion of the pipe installation, CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that the wire
is continuous and unbroken through the entire run of the pipe.
Demonstration shall include full signal conductivity (including splices) when
energizing for the entire run in the presence of OWNER OR ENGINEER.
If the wire is broken, CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace it. Pipeline installation
will not be accepted until the wire passes a continuity test.
INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PIPELINE
CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary blow-off valves and fittings as required to flush
and disinfect new pipelines. Temporary blow-off valves and fittings shall be removed
prior to placing pipeline into service.
Source of Water
CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water
supplies for disinfection and/or pressure testing of the pipeline.
Testing Procedure
CONTRACTOR shall allow adequate time for the solvent cement joints to cure.
Curing time shall be per the solvent cement manufacturer's recommendation. Prior
to enclosure or burying, piping systems shall be pressure tested as required on the
Contract Drawings, for a period of not less than one hour, without exceeding the
01/2023 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D1785)
254.07.100 33 05 07.1 - 5
tolerances listed on the Contract Drawings. Caution - Do not use air or gas for
testing PVC pipe. Where no pressures are indicated, the pipes shall be subject to 1-
1/2 times the maximum working pressure. CONTRACTOR shall furnish test
equipment, labor, materials, and devices

In Leakage shall be determined by loss of pressure. Fixtures, devices, or other
accessories that would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be
disconnected and ends of the branch lines shall be plugged or capped as
appropriate during the testing procedures.

Leaks shall be repaired, and the piping shall be re-tested until no leaks are found.

ENGINEER shall be notified at least 48 hours before the pipeline is to be tested so
that ENGINEER may be present during the test.
DISINFECTING
Disinfection shall be in accordance with Section 33 13 00 – Pipeline Testing and
Disinfection.

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D1785)
254.07.100 33 05 07.1 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 HDPE PRESSURE PIPE
254.07.100 33 05 11- 1
SECTION 33 05 11
HDPE PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C901, C906)
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This section covers furnishing and installation of the solid wall high density polyethylene
(HDPE) pipe (3-inch diameter and smaller) in Contract Drawings and specified herein.
Use HDPE pressure pipe for buried water service pipe and buried fluoride water pipe.
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittals
Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill of Buried Pipelines
Section 33 05 07 PVC Pipe
Section 33 05 24 Horizontal Directional Drilling
Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Disinfection
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM D 1248 Standard Specifications for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion
Materials for Wire and Cable
ASTM D 2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic
Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.
ASTM D 2683 Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for
Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing
ASTM D 2837 Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for
Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis for
Thermoplastic Pipe Products
ASTM D 3261 Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE)
Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing
ASTM D 3350 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings
Materials
ASTM F 714 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR)
Based on Outside Diameter
ASTM F 1055 Standard Specification for Electrofusion Type Polyethylene
Fittings for Outside Diameter Controlled Polyethylene and
Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe and Tubing
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C 901 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2"-inch through 3-
inch, for Water Service.
01/2023 HDPE PRESSURE PIPE
254.07.100 33 05 11- 2
AWWA C 906 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4-inch through 63-
inch, for Water Distribution and Transmission.
AWWA M 55 PE Pipe – Design and Installation
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.
The following shall be submitted:
Certified copies of test reports demonstrating conformance to applicable pipe
specifications, before pipe is installed.
A plan for pipe joining and installation. The plan must be reviewed and approved by
ENGINEER prior to pipe installation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture. Notify ENGINEER not
less than 14 days prior to the start of any phase of the pipe manufacture. During
manufacture the ENGINEER shall be given access to all areas of the process and shall
be permitted to make inspections necessary to confirm compliance with the
Specifications.
Materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with this
Section and the referenced standards. CONTRACTOR shall perform said material tests.
ENGINEER shall have the right to witness testing provided that CONTRACTOR’s
schedule is not delayed for convenience of ENGINEER.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PIPE
Pipe up to 3-inch nominal diameter shall meet the requirements of AWWA C901. Pipe
4-inch through 63-inch nominal diameter shall meet the requirements of AWWA C906.
The high density polyethylene pipe shall be as manufactured by ISCO Industries, WL
Plastics Corp., or approved equal, and shall have a minimum pressure rating as noted
on the Contract Drawings. The HDPE pipe shall have designation of PE 4710 (IPS
size), made from prime virgin resin with a minimum cell classification of PE 445574C or
higher in accordance with ASTM F-714 and D 3350. The resin shall be listed by the
Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) in its pipe-grade registry Technical Report (TR) 4, “Listing of
HDB/HDS/SDB/PDB/MRS for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe”.
The manufacturer shall comply with NSF Standard 14 and NSF 61 by certifying in writing
to the design engineer and making the pipe with the NSF logo in the print line. The
manufacturer shall comply with AWWA Standard C901 or C906 by certifying to the
design engineer and marking the pipe with the appropriate AWWA standard in the print
line.
Pipe shall be marked per AWWA C901 or C906 and NSF. Pipe markings shall include
nominal size, OD base, dimension ratio, pressure class, manufacturer’s name,
01/2023 HDPE PRESSURE PIPE
254.07.100 33 05 11- 3
manufacturer’s production code including day, month, and year extruded, and
manufacturer’s plant and extrusion line.
TRACER WIRE
All HDPE piping installed by horizontal directional drilling shall be installed with
continuous tracer wire, 12 AWG SoloShot Extra High Strength (EHS) 1245B by
Copperhead Industries, or approved equal, with 45 mil HDPE jacket with minimum
1150 pound break load or approved equal.
All direct bury piping (including service lines) shall be installed with 12 gauge solid
copper THHN tracer wire for pipeline location purposes by means of an electronic line
tracer.
The wires must be installed along the entire length of the pipe on the top of the pipe
and be held in place with ties or hitches spaced not more than 12-feet apart.
Sections of wire shall be spliced together using approved splice caps and waterproof
seals or solder. Twisting the wires together is not acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
STORAGE AND HANDLING
Pipe shall be stored on clean level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging.
Sections of pipe with deep cuts or gouges shall be removed and ends of pipes rejoined.
Handling of the joined pipe shall be in such a manner that the pipe is not damaged by
dragging over sharp or cutting objects.
Lifting of joined pipe sections shall preclude concentration of bending stresses at joints
and shall be done in a manner which evenly distributes lifting stresses along the full
length of the pipe.
Pipe shall be stored in a shaded area or covered to avoid temperature extremes which
may cause the pipe to bow or warp.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
Excavation and backfill of trenches and for appurtenances and backfilling for high
density polyethylene pipe shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 15 Excavation and
Backfill for Buried Pipelines.
INSTALLATION
High density polyethylene pipe shall be installed according to the requirements of ASTM
D 2321, AWWA M 55, and the manufacturer's requirements. Wherever the
aforementioned requirements are in conflict, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
Sections of pipe shall be joined into continuous lengths by the butt fusion method and
shall be performed in strict conformance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations
using approved equipment. Sections of pipe shall be as long as practical to minimize
the number of joints.
01/2023 HDPE PRESSURE PIPE
254.07.100 33 05 11- 4
High density polyethylene pipe shall be installed, backfilled, and allowed to acclimatize
to the typical soil temperatures prior to connection to other piping systems.
TRACER WIRE TESTING
Safety tracer tape shall be installed above pipe as required by the Contract Drawings.
Tracer wire shall also be installed as required by the Contract Drawings.
Upon completion of the pipe installation, CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that the wire
is continuous and unbroken through the entire run of the pipe. Demonstration shall
include full signal conductivity (including splices) when energizing for the entire run in the
presence of OWNER or ENGINEER. If the wire is broken, CONTRACTOR shall repair or
replace it. Pipeline installation will not be accepted until the wire passes a continuity test.
PRELIMINARY CLEANING AND FLUSHING
CONTRACTOR shall flush the pipeline as the work progresses by a means in
accordance with good practice to ensure that sand, rocks, or other foreign material are
not left in any of the pipeline. If possible, the flushing shall be made with an open pipe
end.
CONTRACTOR shall provide to ENGINEER a proposed schedule and method of
flushing for review before the flushing starts.
PRESSURE AND LEAK TEST
There is no pressure test, leak test, or disinfection test for HDPE (solid wall) storm drain.

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
254.07.100 33 05 13- 1

SECTION 33 05 13
PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
CONTRACTOR shall provide precast concrete manholes and vaults, complete and in
place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 45 00 Quality Control and Materials Testing
Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements
Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines
Section 31 23 23 Excavation and Backfill for Structures
Section 33 05 05 Ductile Iron Pipe
Section 33 05 07 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe
Section 33 05 07.2 PVC Sewer Pipe
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 48 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A 536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A 615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C 478 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections
ASTM C 497 Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or
Tile
ASTM C 857 Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for
Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures
ASTM C 858 Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility
Structures
ASTM C 913 Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Water and
Wastewater Structures
ASTM C 923 Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between
Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals.
ASTM C 990 Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes,
and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint
Sealants.
01/2023 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
254.07.100 33 05 13- 2

SUBMITTALS
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
Shop Drawings: Indicate manhole and concrete structure locations, elevations, and piping
sizes, material, and elevations of penetrations.
Product Data: Submit cover and frame construction, features, configuration and
dimensions. Submit pipe connector materials and dimensions. Submit manhole step
materials and dimensions. Submit manhole and structure joint sealant materials.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that manholes and structures have been properly
installed, level, with tight joints, at correct elevations and orientations, and have been
backfilled and compacted in accordance with the specifications.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
Comply with precast concrete manufacturer’s instructions for unloading, storing and
moving precast manholes and structures.
Store precast concrete manholes and structures to prevent damage to Owner’s property
or other public or private property. Repair property damaged from materials storage.
Mark each precast structure by indentation or waterproof paint showing date of
manufacture, manufacturer, and identifying symbols and numbers shown on Drawings to
indicate its intended use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MANHOLES
Reinforced precast concrete manholes in accordance with ASTM C 478 with HS-20
loading. Axial length of barrel sections shall be selected to provide the correct total height
with the fewest joints. Conical sections shall be designed to support cast iron frames and
covers under HS-20 loading, unless noted otherwise. Design criteria shall be as shown
on the Contract Drawings. Manholes shall be manufactured by Oldcastle Precast,
Geneva Pipe and Precast, or approved equal.
Provide water tight, epoxy lined (per spec 09 90 00) 72-inch concrete manhole (with water
level monitoring device tied to WCWCD SCADA alarm) on drain from Fluoride building.
Joints shall be sealed with butyl-rubber sealants, ConSeal CS-102, Ram-Nek RN101, or
approved equal, conformation to ASTM C 990. Wrap exterior section joints with membrane
waterproofing and exterior joint wrap meeting the requirements of ASTM C877, Type III,
Marmac, Conseal CS212, or Press-Seal Corp EA-Wrap, or approved equal.
Barrel section to pipe connections shall be sealed with resilient connectors, Kor-N-Seal
by Trelleborg, or approved equal, complying with ASTM C 923. Mechanical devices shall
be stainless steel.
01/2023 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
254.07.100 33 05 13- 3

STRUCTURES
Provide reinforced concrete structures and vaults designed for the applications and sizes
as shown on the drawings. Structures shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 857,
ASTM C 858, or ASTM C 913 as required. Minimum wall thickness shall be 5-inches.
Cement shall be Type V Portland cement conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 150.
The minimum 28-day concrete compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi. Reinforcing steel
shall be embedded in the concrete with a minimum rebar clear cover as recommended by
ACI 318. Structure and vaults shall be manufactured by Oldcastle Precast, Geneva Pipe
and Precast, or approved equal
Provide water-tight precast concrete vault (8 ft x 16 ft x 9 foot high inside dims) and
connections for detaining 6000 gallons of backwash water. Provide a water level
monitoring device that can governs Filter Backwash timing and actuation. See plans.
Structures shall be designed for H-20 traffic loading.
Where joints are required, joints shall be interlocking to secure proper alignment between
members and shall prevent migration of soil through the joint. Joints shall be sealed with
butyl-rubber sealants, ConSeal CS-102, Ram-Nek RN101, or approved equal,
conformation to ASTM C 990.
Openings, where required, shall be of the size and location indicated on the drawings and
shall be provided without obstructions from brackets and supports. Unless noted
otherwise, frames and covers shall be fabricated from steel and galvanized after
fabrication. Frames shall be integrally cast into the structure concrete sections. Covers
shall be tight fitting to prevent dirt and debris entering the structure.
Where penetrations are required for piping, conduits, or ducts, such penetrations shall be
through precast openings or core drilled through unreinforced thin-wall knock-out sections.
Penetrations shall be smooth and exposed reinforcing steel will not be allowed. Unless
noted otherwise, structures do not need to be designed to resist thrust from piping passing
through the structure.
FRAMES AND COVERS
Manufacturers:
D & L Foundry and Supply, East Jordan Iron Works, Neenah Foundry Co., or
approved equal. Model Number as shown on the Drawings.
Product Description: Casting frames and covers shall be non-rocking and shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM A 48, Class 35B for Gray Iron and ASTM A 536 for ductile
iron. Unless noted otherwise, cast iron covers and frames shall be 30-inches in diameter,
machined flat bearing surface, removable lid; HS-20 load rating; with embossed lettering
saying (“IRRIGATION”, “WATER”, “SEWER”, “STORM DRAIN”) cast into cover.
COMPONENTS
Provide in all Manholes and Structures: Steps that shall have a 1/2-inch ASTM A 615
grade 60 steel reinforcement rod encased inpolypropylene copolymer plastic. Steps shall
01/2023 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
254.07.100 33 05 13- 4

have a tread width of 14-inches nominal. Steps shall be manufactured by American Step
Company, Inc., M.A. Industries, or approved equal.
CONFIGURATION
Shaft Construction: Square or rectangular with flat lid top section; lipped male/female
joints; shaped to receive pipe sections.
Clear Inside Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings.
Design Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Clear Cover Opening: As indicated on Drawings.
BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS
Bedding: 3/4" Washed Rock as specified in Section 31 23 23.
Soil Backfill to Finish Grade: Trench Backfill Material as specified in Section 31 23 15.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Verify items provided by other sections of Work are properly sized and located.
Verify built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into Work.
Verify correct size of manhole and structure excavation.
PREPARATION
Do not install structures where site conditions induce loads exceeding structural capacity
of structures.
Inspect precast concrete structures immediately prior to placement in excavation to verify
structures are internally clean and free from damage. Remove and replace damaged
units.
PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE AND STRUCTURE INSTALLATION
Lift precast components at lifting points designated by manufacturer.
When lowering manholes and structures into excavations and joining pipe to units, take
precautions to ensure interior of pipeline and structure remains clean.
Set precast structures bearing firmly and fully on crushed stone bedding, compacted in
accordance with provisions of Section 31 23 23.
Assemble multi-section structures by lowering each section into excavation. Lower, set
level, and firmly position base section before placing additional sections.
01/2023 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
254.07.100 33 05 13- 5

Remove foreign materials from joint surfaces and verify sealing materials are placed
properly. Maintain alignment between sections by using guide devices affixed to lower
section.
Joint sealing materials may be installed on site or at manufacturer’s plant.
Verify manholes and structures installed satisfy required alignment and grade.
Remove knockouts or cut structure to receive piping without creating openings larger than
required to receive pipe.
Steps shall be installed 12-inches on centers vertically not more than 1/2-inch out of
plumb. The top step shall not be more than 12-inches below the manhole cover.
Prior to backfilling, fill all cracks and voids in the manholes or vaults with non-shrink grout,
polyurethane sealant, or both.
FRAME AND COVER INSTALLATION
Set frame and cover 2-inches above finished grade for manholes and structures with
covers located within unpaved areas to allow area to be graded away from cover
beginning 1-inch below top surface of frame.
In paved areas set frame and cover 1/4" below finished grade and install concrete collar.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
Leak Tests. Field Test the water tightness of both the 72-inch epoxy lined manhole and
of the 8-ft x 16-ft x 9 foot tall vault - by (closing downstream valve) and filling each with
clean water and verifying water level does not drop over 24 hours. If the water drops,
repair the leaks acceptably to Engineer and retest until both are water tight
Water Level Remote Alarm and Filter Actuation Tests.
Field test 72-inch manhole water level alarm proving that when it gets 6-inches of water
depth that sets off a alarm in WCWCD SCADA controls center.
Field test 8ft x 16 ft x 9ft deep backwash vault water level monitor proving that when
water levels drop to level of 2-inch outlet pipe (ie vault is fully drained to outlet pipe),
then filtration equipment actuates the next filter to automatically begin backwashing.
Vertical Adjustment of Existing Manholes and Structures
Where required, adjust top elevation of manholes and structures to finished grades
shown on Drawings.

Reset existing frames, grates and covers, carefully removed, cleaned of mortar
fragments, to required elevation in accordance with requirements specified for
installation of castings.

01/2023 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
254.07.100 33 05 13- 6

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 UTILITY IDENTIFICATION
254.07.100 33 05 26- 1
SECTION 33 05 26
UTILITY IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
The CONTRACTOR shall provide and install identification markers for all exposed
valves, piping, equipment, tanks, and warning signs, all in accordance with these
specifications and the Contract Documents.
RELATED WORK
Related work specified in other sections includes:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems
ANSI Z535 Safety Signs and Colors
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS (ASTM)

ASTM D 1593 Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Plastic Film and
Sheeting

ASTM D 3652 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Pressure-Sensitive Tapes
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Submit manufacturer’s data sheets showing wording, symbols, letter size, and color
coding.
Submit one sample of each type of identification device to be used.
Submit sample of each proposed color required by the color schedule.
Submit the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Product manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 Quality Certified.
01/2023 UTILITY IDENTIFICATION
254.07.100 33 05 26- 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
VALVE TAGS
General: Provide each valve of size 2-inch and larger with an identification tag. Tag
shall show the pipeline station (if applicable), type, manufacturer, date of manufacture,
and pressure rating.
Plastic Tags:
Acrylic: Flexible 0.060-inch (1.52 mm) thick, multi-layered acrylic engraved tags.
Model Setonply by Seton, B-418 by Brady, or approved equal.
Metal Tags:
Brass: 19 gauge thick solid brass, with 3/16-inch (5 mm) top hole for fastener, natural
brass finish. Manufacturer shall be Seton, Brady, or approved equal.

Aluminum: 19 gauge thick aluminum. Teflon coated both sides, with Code 39 bar
codes. Manufacturer shall be Seton, Brady, or approved equal.

Stainless Steel: 0.6 mm (0.025 inch) thick, Grade 304 stainless steel. Manufacturer
shall be Seton, Brady, or approved equal.

Lettering: stamped or engraved letters; character size and words according to ANSI
A13.1.
Beaded Chains: No. 6 (brass or nickel over steel, or stainless steel, 114 mm (4-1/2 inch)
long, with locking link.
OR Nylon Ties: 150 mm (min), 6 to 10 inches long, nonconductive.
Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
PIPE MARKERS
General: Labels for piping shall bear the full piping system name. Provide flow arrows
and working pressure next to each label.
Mechanically Fastened Pipe Markers:
Vinyl: Factory fabricated vinyl, 0.020 inch to 0.030 inch thick, performed to fit around
pipe or pipe covering. Model Setmark by Seton, B-915 Brady SnapOn Vinyl by
Brady, or approved equal.

Polyester: Factory fabricated polyester, 0.1 mm (4 mil) thick, laminated with UV-
resistant poly vinyl fluoride (PVF), preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering.
Model Ultramark by Seton, B-689 High Performance by Brady, or approved
equal.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers:
01/2023 UTILITY IDENTIFICATION
254.07.100 33 05 26- 3
Vinyl: Factory fabricated vinyl, 0.102 mm (5 mil) thick, preformed to fit around pipe or
pipe covering. Model Opti-Code by Seton, B-946 by Brady, or approved equal.

Polyester: Factory fabricated polyester, 0.05 mm (2 mil) thick, coated with acrylic
adhesive. Model Poly-Code by Seton, or approved equal.

Plastic: Factory fabricated plastic film, roll formed, clear laminated to protect lettering.
Nylon Ties: 150 mm (min), 6 to 10 inches long, nonconductive.
Identify fluid being conveyed and include flow direction arrow.
Language: English.
Lettering: Size and Color according to ANSI A 13.1.
Color and Text per the Schedule at the end of this Section.
LABELS FOR EQUIPMENT AND TANKS
Provide a label for each piece of mechanical equipment and/or tank. The label shall
contain the equipment name, tag number, and identifying information such as size,
liquid, horsepower, etc. Minimum label size shall be1-1/2 inches by 4-inches. Labels
shall be stainless steel, brass, or aluminum. Fiberglass labels may be used for corrosive
environments. Manufacturer shall be Brady, Seton, or approved equal.
LABELS FOR AUTOMATIC START/STOP EQUIPMENT
Provide a sign reading “CAUTION – EQUIPMENT STARTS AND STOPS
AUTOMATICALLY” on equipment as shown on the drawings on identified in the
specifications. Signs shall be vinyl with self-adhesive for application to the equipment.
Minimum size shall be 7-inches by 10-inches. Manufacturer shall be Brady, Seton, or
approved equal.
WARNING SIGNS
Provide a properly labeled, rigid warning sign as shown on the drawings. Signs shall
contain the header, pictogram/alert symbol, and messaging conforming to OSHA/ANSI A
535 requirements. Minimum size shall be 7-inch high by 10-inch wide. Signs shall be
plastic with overlaminate and be pre-drilled for mounting. Manufacturer shall be Seton,
Brady, or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
GENERAL
Markers and identification tags shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
printed instructions and shall be neat and uniform in appearance. Tags and markers
shall be readily visible from all normal working locations.
PREPARATION
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
01/2023 UTILITY IDENTIFICATION
254.07.100 33 05 26- 4
INSTALLATION
Valve Tags:
Install tags with corrosion resistant chains or ties.

Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

Identify small devices, such as in-line pumps, with tags.

Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays.
Pipe Markers:
Identify all above grade piping. Include service, flow direction, and working pressure.

Provide snap-on type markers for pipes 6-inch diameter and smaller. Provide strap-
on type for pipes over 6-inch diameter.

Each pipe shall me marked at:

Intervals of 20-feet in straight runs.
At least once in every room.
Within 2 –feet of bends and valves.
On the upstream side of Tees, branches, and other distribution points.
On both sides of walls and floors through which the piping passes.
Automatic Start/Stop Equipment
Attach signs for exposed equipment directly to the equipment.

Attach signs for sump pumps on the adjacent wall.
Warning Signs
Attach to walls according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Equipment and Tank Labels
Attach labels to equipment with a pop rivet or equal.

01/2023 UTILITY IDENTIFICATION
254.07.100 33 05 26- 5

SCHEDULES

Color Schedule
Pipe Contents Pipe
Color
Marker
Color
Letter
Color Abbreviation Identification
AHP Air, High Pressure Dark Green Blue White
AI Air, Instrument Dark Green Blue White
CL Chlorine (gas or liquid state) Yellow Orange Black
CLS Chlorine Solution Yellow Orange Black
CLV Chlorine Gas Under Vacuum Yellow Orange Black
CV Chlorine Vent & Detection Line Yellow Orange Black
EE Engine Exhaust Yellow Black
EWR Engine Cooling Water Return Green White
EWS Engine Cooling Water Supply Green White
FL Fluoride Light
Blue/Red
Orange Black
FOR Fuel Oil Return Brown White
FOS Fuel Oil Supply Brown White
FSP Fire Protection Sprinkler System Red Red White
HWR Domestic Hot Water Return Yellow Black
HWS Domestic Hot Water Supply Yellow Black
LSS Landscape Sprinkler System Green White
NG Natural Gas Org-Red/Black Yellow Black
OF Overflow Green White
PD Plant Drain Green Green White
PPS Pump Suction (Potable Water) Light Blue Green White
PTW Pump to Waste Green Yellow Black
PW Potable Water Dark Blue Green White
RS Raw Sludge Black Yellow Black
RWL Rain Water Leader Green White
RW Raw Water Olive Green Green White
SA Sample Line Yellow Black
SD Sanitary Drains Dark Gray Yellow Black
SDR Storm Drain Green Green White
SL Sludge Dark Brown Yellow Black
SUC Structure Underdrain Collector Green White
UW Utility Water (Non-Potable
Water)
Magenta Yellow Black
V Vent Dark
Brown
Yellow Black

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 UTILITY IDENTIFICATION
254.07.100 33 05 26- 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
01/2023 MECHANICAL APPURTENANACES
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 00 - 1
SECTION 33 12 00
MECHANICAL APPURTENANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all valves, and equipment, complete and
operable in accordance with the Specifications. All system components shall be rated to
max system pressure or higher.
Where 2 or more valves or equipment of the same type and size are required, the valves
shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.
CONTRACTOR shall verify that flanges on pipe match the bolt hole pattern of the
flanges on the mechanical appurtenances
All products specified herein shall be NSF 61 certified for use on drinking water systems.
RELATED WORK
Related work specified in other sections:
Section 01 33 00 Submittals
Section 01 45 00 Quality Control & Materials Testing
Section 01 50 00 Temporary Construction Utilities and Environmental
Controls
Section 22 10 10 Plumbing Piping and Specialties
Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Buried Pipelines
Section 31 23 23 Excavation and Backfill for Structures
Section 33 05 05 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
Section 33 07 05 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, Rubber Joints
(AWWA C 900)
Section 33 05 07.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (ASTM D 1785)
Section 33 92 10 Steel Pipe, Specials, and Fittings (AWWA C200, modified)
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of these specifications to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text to by basic designation
only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
A 126 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and
Pipe Fittings
A 216 Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion
Welding, for High-Temperature Service
B 584 Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
01/2023 MECHANICAL APPURTENANACES
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 00 - 2
C 504 Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves, 3-inch through 72-inch
C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service
C512 Air-Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Waterworks
Service
C 515 Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service
C 518 Dual-Disc Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service
C 550 Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
B 16.1 Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
B 16.34 Valves – Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.
Submit catalog cut sheets on all mechanical appurtenances including: fittings, valves, or
other items shown on the Drawings referencing each item by mark number. Information
shall indicate manufacturer specification compliance, Cv factor, pressure rating, and
dimensional data. Indicate NSF 61 compliance of all appurtenances and valves.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
GATE VALVES
Gate valves shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C-509 or C-515. Valves shall
be of the resilient-seat type with non-rising stem (NRS), opening to the left, and provided
with a 2-inch square operating nut for buried valves or hand wheel for valves located in
structures. Buried valves shall be of flange or mechanical joint design to match pipe
joint system.
Valves, valve-operating units, stem extensions and other accessories shall be installed
by CONTRACTOR where shown, or where required in the opinion of ENGINEER, to
provide for convenience in operation. Where buried valves are indicated,
CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install valve boxes to 3-inches above grade in
unimproved areas or at grade with concrete collar in improved areas. All valves and
gates shall be new and of current manufacture.
The valve shall have a two part thermosetting or fusion bonded epoxy protective coating
(10 mil minimum inside and out) system that is non-toxic and imparts no taste to water.
The epoxy shall be applied in accordance with AWWA C550 and be ANSI/NSF 61
certified.
The flanges of valves may be raised or plain faced. Flanges of valves shall be faced
and drilled to 125-lb American Standard template. Provide ASME Class 250 flanges for
valves located on the high pressure discharge side piping.
All valves shall be furnished with pressure classes equal to or better than the pressure
class of the pipe with which the valves are to be used. Unless otherwise specified, each
valve body shall be tested under a test pressure equal to twice its design water-working
pressure. Certify valves have zero leakage across closed valve during a 250 psi test.
01/2023 MECHANICAL APPURTENANACES
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 00 - 3
Valves shall be manufactured by Mueller Co., Clow Valve Co., American Flow
Control, Kennedy Valve Co., American AVK Company (high pressure), or approved
equal.
DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BUTTERFLY VALVES
Butterfly valves shall be double eccentric type - so that EPDM seat is not in compression
to any degree except at full closure – shall be rated for 250 psi and 16 fps velocity (min),
certified compliant with AWWA C504 Class 150B and NSF 61, with 2-flanges (ANSI
B16.1 Class 150B drilled), ductile iron body tested to 400 psi. All bolting shall be 316 SS.
Zero Leakage Seats. Provide EPDM seat clamped to disc by continuous 316 SS ring.
Resilient seats shall be field replaceable without special tools or epoxy. Body seat shall
be 316 SS welded to, or mounted on, valve body. Certify valves have zero leakage
across closed valve during a 250 psi test in both directions.
Line and coat all iron parts of valve with 10 mils min of polyamide cured epoxy or fusion
bonded epoxy in accordance with AWWA C550.
Provide dry shaft design with double O-ring seal on shafts that keep water out of disc
portion and body portion of shaft. O-ring seals shall be replaceable without removing
shaft from valve. Provide shaft bearings of self-lubricating sleeve type made of bronze.
Provide AWWA C540 compliant actuator, rated at 450 ft lbs torque, with integral disc
position indicator and self-locking worm gear that holds disc in any position without
creep or flutter. Provide handwheel with each valve.
Where shown on the Drawings valves shall be electrically actuated rated for continuous
modulation at voltage provided. See Section 40 92 57 Electric Motor Actuators.
Provide 1-year warrantee against manufacturer defects, with labor replacement costs.
Double eccentric butterfly valves shall be Av-Tek, VAG, AVK, or approved equal
BALL VALVES
Valves shall MSS SP-110 compliant.
Stainless Steel Ball Valves (1000 psi rated) shall be full port opening stainless steel
and have adjustable stem packing gland. Body and ball shall be stainless steel in
accordance with ASTM A351. Seats shall be reinforced PTFE and packing stem shall
be PTFE. The handle shall be Type 304 stainless steel with vinyl insulator. Provide
Apollo 76F-100, NIBCO T-585-S6-R-66-LL, Watts Series S-FBV-1, or approved equal.
Brass Ball Valves (600 psi rated) shall be full port opening brass, 600 psi min CWP
NSF 16 compliant, blow out proof stem design, adjustable stem packing, secondary O-
ring stem seal, zinc plated steel handle with vinyl insulator. Provide Apollo Series 64,
Watts Series LFFBV, NIBCO FP600A-LF, or approved equal.
PVC Ball Valves shall be Industrial Grade Sealed Unit Heavy Body full port opening
with all wetted materials composed of Schedule 80 PVC. Valve shall have true union
ends or flanged ends to mate with ANSI B16.5 Class 150 flanges. PVC ball valves shall
be NIBCO Chemtrol Series, Spears Mfg. Co. TU-2-2025, or approved equal.
01/2023 MECHANICAL APPURTENANACES
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 00 - 4
SERVICE SADDLES
Shall consist of a 2-piece bronze body and strap, meeting applicable sections of AWWA
C800.
Outlet shall be tapped with AWWA I.P. thread (F.I.P.T.). Outlet shall be o ring sealed.
Saddles shall be ANSI/NSF 61 certified.
Shall be Mueller H-13000 Series, Romac Style 202B, or approved equal.
TAPPING SADDLE AND TAPPING SLEEVES
Tapping Saddles (Service Saddle) shall be as-manufactured by Romac, or approved
equal. Saddles shall be Style 202S for exposed saddles and Style 202NS for buried
services.
WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS
Water service pipe shall be polyethylene tubing (PE 3408 IPS, 200 psi) for buried
service lines. Poly piping shall be 3/4-inch, 1-inch or 2-inch minimum as indicated on
the Contract Drawings. Replacement service pipes shall be the same diameter as
existing pipes.
All water service connections, except 2-inch, shall be made using Mueller Insta-Tite
Connections, Ford Ultra-Tite, or approved equal, fittings and shall conform to AWWA
C800. All 2-inch water service connections shall be made using Mueller Pack Joint,
Ford Pack Joint, or approved equal.
If the existing service is poly pipe, a coupling can be used to extend the poly service to
the new waterline.
New water service lines shall be bored, jacked or augered under the existing pavement,
gutters or sidewalks.
Where the new service line will pass under an existing gas line, in order to prevent
damage, the gas line shall be potholed and shall remain exposed until the service line is
installed.
CORP STOPS
Corp Stops shall be Brass Alloy 85-5-5-5 ASTM B62 and conform to the requirements of
AWWA C800.
Corp Stops for 3/4-inch and 1-inch sizes shall be Mueller H-15026, Ford F1100 Ultra-
Tite joint, or approved equal.
Corp Stops for 2-inch size shall be Mueller E-25029, Ford F1100 Pack Joint, or
approved equal.
VALVE BOXES AND LIDS
01/2023 MECHANICAL APPURTENANACES
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 00 - 5
All buried valves shall be installed complete with 6-inch diameter slide type, two-piece
cast iron valve box. Manufacturer be Tyler 562 Series, or approved equal. The valve
box lid shall be designated “WATER” unless noted otherwise on the Contract Drawings.
Valves and valve boxes shall be set plumb. Valve boxes shall be centered directly over
the valve operating nut. If the top of the valve nut is greater than five (5) feet below
finished grade a valve nut extension shall be required. Earth fill shall be carefully
tamped around the valve box to a distance of four (4) feet on all sides of the box, or to
the undisturbed trench face if less than four (4) feet. Valves shall have the interiors
cleaned of all foreign matter before installation.
Road base around the valve box shall be re-compacted, and the concrete collar placed.
Valve boxes placed in asphalt surfacing shall be constructed such that the cast iron ring
is one-quarter inch (1/4”) lower than the pavement. Valve boxes must be cleaned of all
debris after setting of collars.
Concrete Collars shall be 10" thick x 2'- 6" in diameter centered on the valve box. They
shall have two circumscribing #4 bars, one at three inches from the outside edge and a
second bar nine inches from the outside edge each centered in the concrete. Concrete
shall be 3000 psi.
PRESSURE GAUGES
Pressure gauges shall be provided where shown on the drawings. Gauges shall meet
the requirements of ASME B40.1 Grade 2A and be industrial type with stainless steel
movement, liquid filled, and stainless steel, Polypropylene, or Phenolic case. Gauges
shall have a rear blowout disc or panel. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings,
pressure gauges shall have a 4-1/2-inch dial with white face and black lettering, a ½-
inch threaded connection, and shut-off valve. Measuring element shall be a stainless
steel Bourdon Tube. Gauges shall be calibrated to read in applicable units, with an
accuracy of ± 0.5 percent to 150 percent of the working pressure. Gauges shall be
manufactured be Ashcroft Model 1279 Duragauge, 1900 Series SOLFRUNT by
Ametek (U.S. Gauge), Process Gauge by Marsh Bellofram, or approved equal.
PUMP CONTROL VALVE
The pump control valve shall be a deep well pump control valve pilot operated valve
designed to eliminate pipe surges caused by the starting and stopping of vertical turbine
pumps. A four-way solenoid pilot valve controls the valve operation. It shall contain a
resilient, synthetic rubber disc.
The pump control valves shall be manufactured by Cla-Val, Model 61-02KO (anti
cavitation required), for installation at the location shown on the drawings. The valve
shall be full port globe style and shall include the required pilot, dual position indicator
switches (one for open and one for closed), and solenoid system assemblies. The
pressure class shall be 150 lb, rated for 250 psi working pressure, and the valve shall
include opening and closing speed adjustments, stainless steel trim, stainless steel
tubing, and “Y” strainers. The solenoid shall operate on 120 volts AC.
The pump control valve shall be equipped with the CLA Valve internal check feature.
01/2023 MECHANICAL APPURTENANACES
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 00 - 6
A direct factory representative shall provide start-up assistance, inspection and
adjustments. The representative shall provide 2 to 4 hours of assistance for each valve
installed on the project.
PRESSURE RELIEF AND SURGE ANTICIPATOR VALVE
The pressure relief and surge anticipator valve shall be a pilot operated valve designed
to eliminate pipe surges caused by the rapid changes of flow velocity within a pipeline.
The pressure relief and surge anticipator valves shall be manufactured by Cla-Val Co.,
Model 52-03. The valve shall be globe style, full port, flanged, and shall include
stainless steel pilot system and valve position indicator. The pressure class shall be 150
lb, rated for 250 psi working pressure, and the valve shall include stainless steel trim,
stainless steel tubing, and isolation valve. The adjustment range for the high pressure
pilot CRL-60 shall be 20 to 200 psi, and for the low pressure pilot CRA 30 to 300 psi.
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
Pressure reducing valves 1/2-inch to 2-1/2-inch shall have a bronze ASTM B62 body
and cover with stainless steel trim. Diaphragm shall be reinforced EPDM and the disc
EPDM. Valves shall be balanced, direct acting type Model 990 by Cla-Val Co., or
approved equal. Valves shall be installed at the location(s) shown on the drawings. The
pressure class shall be 150 lb, and the valve shall be set to operate at the pressure
indicated on the drawings.
Pressure reducing valves 1/8-inch to 1/4-inch shall be brass with stainless steel stem
and spring. Valves shall be provided with a gauge and be Model #560G by Watts, or
approved equal. Valves shall be installed at the location shown on the drawings. The
valve shall be set to operate at the pressure indicated on the drawings.
RUBBER FLAPPER SWING CHECK VALVES
Provide rubber flapper type swing check valve, 250 psi rated, complying with AWWA
C508, with flanges complying with ANSI B16.1, Class 125, having a valve body with full
flow area equal to pipe nominal diameter at all points, and a seating surface on a 45-
degree angle to minimize disc travel. Provide a stainless steel disc closure accelerator.
Valve body and cover shall be ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron. Disc shall be
precision molded Buna-N (NBR) ASTM D2000-BG. Valve shall be NSF 61 certified.
Check valve shall be Valmatic Series 7200 Surgebuster, or approved equal.
DRAIN LINE CHECK VALVE
Drain line check valves shall be the low-head “duck bill” type installed at the locations
shown on the drawings. Valves shall be constructed of Rubber, Neoprene, Hypalon,
Chlorobutyl, Buna-N, EPDM, Viton and be Tideflex Model TF-1 by Red Valve, (no
approved equal).
SMALL CHECK VALVES
The globe style check valves shall be APCO Globe Style Series 600 Silent Check
Valves, or approved equal, and shall be rated at 150 psi.
01/2023 MECHANICAL APPURTENANACES
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 00 - 7
The 1-inch and 2-inch brass check valves shall be Watts CVY Series, or approved
equal, with rating 125 WSP/200 WOG.
The 1-inch PVC check valves shall be Spears Industrial Ball Check Valve Model
4521, or approved equal, with a pressure rating of 235 psi.
HOSE BIBBS and SAMPLING TAPS
Hose bibbs shall be as-manufactured by Watts, or approved equal, and shall include an
integral vacuum breaker or built-in backflow protection devices and cast iron wheel
handle. Sampling Taps shall be smooth nose type. Valves shall be stainless steel.
AIR VALVE FOR DEEP VERTICAL TURBINE SERVICE
Provide AWWA C512 compliant air valve for deep well vertical turbine pump rated to
150 psi min Valmatic 102 ST, well service air valves, or Engineer approved equal.
Provide valve with the following functions:
Provides regulated exhausting of large volumes of air during pump startup and filling
Admits large volumes of air during shut down and draining of well
Provides air related surge protection
Protects against column separation
Maintains pipeline efficiency
Provides protection against damage to pipe joints, gaskets, packing
COMBINATION AIR/VACUUM VALVES
Combination Air/Vacuum valves shall be single body, double orifice valves conforming to
the requirements of AWWA C 512. Valve float shall be stainless steel. Valves shall be
the size indicated on the drawings and shall be Valmatic 201.C2, or approved equal.
FLOW METER
See Section 40 91 23 – Miscellaneous Properties Measurement Devices.
PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
See Section 40 91 23 – Miscellaneous Properties Measurement Devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Valves, valve-operating units, stem extensions and other accessories shall be installed
by CONTRACTOR where shown, or where required in the opinion of ENGINEER, to
provide for convenience in operation. Where buried valves are indicated,
CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install valve boxes at grade with concrete collars. All
valves and boxes shall be new and recently manufactured.
Install mechanical appurtenances as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with
the manufacturer's written instructions.
01/2023 MECHANICAL APPURTENANACES
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 00 - 8

- END OF SECTION -

09/2022 DEEP WELL PUMP AND PUMP MOTOR
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 30 - 1
SECTION 33 12 30
DEEP WELL PUMP AND PUMP MOTOR – OIL LUBE
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
Furnish, deliver and install an oil lubricated surface discharge deep well turbine pump
into the well casing to depths as shown on the drawings.
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at time of award of the Contract:
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250
and 800
ANSI/HI 9.6.4 Rotodynamic Pumps for Vibration Measurements and Allowable
Values
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 36 Structural Steel
ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and
Seamless
ASTM A 108 Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality
ASTM A 269 Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic
Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service
ASTM A 536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A 582 Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars
ASTM B 584 Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for
General Applications
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION
AWWA C 651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C 654 Standard for Disinfecting of Wells
AWWA E 103 Standard Specifications for Horizontal and Vertical Turbine Line-
Shaft Pumps
NATIONAL SANITATION FOUNDATION
NSF/ANSI 60 Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals
NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Components
NSF/ANSI 372 Drinking Water System Components – Lead Content
SUBMITTALS
CONTRACTOR shall submit for review to ENGINEER, sufficient literature, detailed
specifications, and drawings to show dimensions, make, style, speed, size, type,
09/2022 DEEP WELL PUMP AND PUMP MOTOR
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 30 - 2
horsepower, head-capacity, efficiency, materials used, design features, internal
construction, weights, and any other information required by ENGINEER for review of all
pumping equipment. No pumping equipment will be accepted, and installation will not
be allowed, until such review has been completed. All submittals shall clearly state any
deviations from specified requirements. Provide the following with the submittal:
Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump
efficiency over entire operating range of pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity.
The equipment shall indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand,
overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at the specified design point.
Equipment manufactured shall provide complete and detailed information regarding
the installation of the pumps. Any installation requirements or operating conditions
which the supplier or manufacturer’ feel to be critical to the safe and reliable
operation of the pumps should be identified and described in detail.
Shop drawings submitted for review also shall include detailed description of motor,
including electrical diagrams, schematic control diagrams, and a detailed description
of how the control system is to function, where applicable.
OPERATING CONDITIONS
Table I indicates the operating conditions of the pumps.
TABLE I - OPERATING CONDITIONS DEEP WELL TURBINE PUMP

DESCRIPTION RED BRIDGE WELL
Design capacity of pump (gpm) 600
Design total dynamic head at
discharge of bowl assembly (feet)
635
Pump Setting Depth 420
Nominal Operating Speed (rpm) 1770
Minimum Efficiency at Design Point 83%
Maximum NPSHR at Design Point 20 feet
Minimum Motor Horsepower 150
Column Size (diameter) (0.375” Wall) 8-inch
Min Shaft & Oil Tube Size (inches) 1-1/2 (C1045)
Diameter of Well Casing (inches) 16-inch (15.25" I.D.)
Maximum Bowl Diameter (inches) 10.5
Approx. Elevation (ft. above MSL) 4600
Design Pump, Model No: National K10MC, 14 stage
Utility Power (volts, phase, hertz) 480, 3, 60
09/2022 DEEP WELL PUMP AND PUMP MOTOR
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 30 - 3

MECHANICAL DEFECTS AND REJECTIONS
CONTRACTOR furnished pumps that have mechanical defects or do not meet the
requirements for head-capacity, horsepower, efficiency, and vibration requirements will
be rejected, and shall be replaced without additional cost to OWNER for furnishing,
removal, reinstallation, and retesting. Mechanical defects shall include excessive
vibration, improper balancing of any rotating parts, improper tolerances, binding,
excessive bearing or motor heating, defective materials, including materials that do not
conform to the Specifications, improper fitting of parts, and any other defect which will in
time damage the pump or unreasonably impair its efficiency or operation.
WARRANTY
CONTRACTOR furnished equipment covered by these specifications shall be warranted
against defective parts due to faulty material or workmanship for one (1) year after date
of start-up. CONTRACTOR shall guarantee to replace any defective parts within the
period of time specified at no additional cost to OWNER. If CONTRACTOR has to pull
pump to replace defective parts, CONTRACTOR shall guarantee to pull and replace
pump at no additional cost to OWNER.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The pumping system and motor shall be measured and paid under the bid item for
Pumping System and Pump Motor.
FACTORY TESTING
Factory testing is not required for this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
DEEP WELL VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP
The pumps shall be of the deep well, oil lubricated, vertical turbine pump suitable for
pumping culinary water. All material, manufacturing and performance standards shall be
in compliance with AWWA E 103, NSF 60, NSF 61 and NSF 372 as applicable.
Performance Requirements
Pump Speed - The pumps shall operate as specified in Table I.
Pump Characteristics - The pump shall be characterized by head capacity curves of
steadily decreasing head with increasing capacity. Maximum head shall be at zero
flow. The pump shall have a minimum efficiency as provided in Table I during
operation against the system head. Pump head - capacity curves shall indicate that
these losses have been included. Pumps shall have head-capacity curves similar to
that of the specified pump. Pumps having curves that show a flatter or near
horizontal slope over a section in the head – capacity curve will not be accepted.
Curves with head-capacity curves with slopes of the curve flatter than that shown for
the specified pump will not be accepted.
09/2022 DEEP WELL PUMP AND PUMP MOTOR
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 30 - 4
The pump and motor shall be capable of producing the flow rate and total dynamic
heads indicated in Table I.
Motor Characteristics - Under no operating conditions shall the required pump brake
horsepower exceed the nameplate rating of the motor being furnished.
The pump shall be designed to operate throughout its entire range without excessive
vibration or noise. Pump shall meet the requirements of the Hydraulic Institute (2016)
paragraph 9.6.4 vibration limits.
Vertical Turbine Pump Components
Pumps
The vertical turbine pump for the wells shall be as manufactured by National
Pump Company or approved equal and shall be a multi-stage oil lube bowl
assembly (or equal). Equals are: Flowserve, Floway, American Marsh if they
meet other spec conditions.
Unless otherwise stated herein, the pump shall in all respects conform to the
American National Standard ANSI/AWWA-E103 for “Horizontal and Vertical
Turbine Line Shaft Pumps” and shall comply with all local and state sanitary and
safety regulations.
Discharge Head
The discharge head shall be fabricated steel (ASTM A53 Grade B Pipe and
ASTM A 36 Steel Plate or as recommended by the manufacturer), accurately
machined and with a surface discharge. Discharge flange shall be machined and
drilled to ANSI standards for 150 lb. rating and shall be sized to match the
specified system. The top of the discharge head shall have a rabbet fit to
accurately locate the vertical hollow shaft driver, and have a diameter equal to
the driver base diameter (BD). Lifting lugs of sufficient strength to support the
weight of the complete unit shall be provided. The base shall be round or
square. Head must be able to accept the monitoring tube, sounding tube, and
well vent as shown on the drawings. The design shall allow the head shaft to
couple above the tube tension assembly. The tube tension assembly shall
consist of a tension bearing installed in the top oil tube. CONTRACTOR shall
modify the well base dimensions on the drawings to match supplied head.
The discharge head shall be furnished with a one gallon oil reservoir with copper
tubing, manual isolation valve, a sight feed drip oiler and a solenoid valve to
initiate or shut-off oil feed. Drip oil system shall be Hoffman Dripmaster EDD-
4C. Mount it on discharge head in accordance with manufacturer.
The head shaft shall be C carbon steel.
The head shaft not exceed 10 feet in length. Impeller adjustment shall be
provided at the top of the head shaft by means of a bronze adjusting nut of
ASTM B 584 alloy C876/C903 which shall be positively locked in position.
The pump manufacturer shall include the method of adjusting the pump impellers
at the top of the head shaft.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ensuring that the discharge head is
structurally and mechanically adequate for the provided and installed pump
configuration.
Head shall be painted inside and out with an NSF 60 approved epoxy paint
conforming to AWWA C210 and D102. OWNER shall select the color.
Column Assembly
The line shaft for the well shall be of C-1045. They shall be furnished in
interchangeable sections not over 20 feet in length.
09/2022 DEEP WELL PUMP AND PUMP MOTOR
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 30 - 5
The butting faces shall be machined square to the axis of the shaft, with
maximum permissible axial misalignment of the thread axis with the shaft axis
0.002” in 6”. The size of the shaft shall be no less than that determined by
ANSI/AWWA E103 Specifications, Section 4.4.2.2 – Line Shaft, for C1045 line
shaft, and shall be such that elongation due to hydraulic thrust will not exceed the
axial clearance of the impellers in the pump bowls. Maximum runout in 20-feet
shall not exceed 0.010-inches.
Shaft Enclosing Tubes: shall be ASTM A53, Grade A Sch 80 steel pipe with ends
machined square and parallel and shall butt to ensure proper alignment sealing;
they shall be straight within 0.005 inches total indicator reading for a 5 ft section;
and threaded internally to receive the line shaft bearings. The enclosing tube
shall be stabilized and centered in the column pipe by rubber centering spiders
spaced at 40 ft intervals throughout the column pipe assemblies.
Line shaft Bearings: shall be bronze, internally grooved to allow proper
lubrication to enclosed lineshaft and threaded externally for connecting oil tube
sections.
The outer column piping shall be of ASTM A53 Grade B Standard Wall steel pipe
in interchangeable sections not over 20 feet in length with the ends of each
section faced parallel and machined with 8 straight threads per inch permitting
the ends to butt and ensuring alignment when connected by standard mill steel
couplings. The weight of the column pipe shall be no less than that stated in
ANSI E 103, Section E.3 Table E.1, “Diameters and Weights of Standard
Discharge Column Pipe Sizes”. Top and bottom sections of column pipe shall not
exceed 5-feet in length.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ensuring that the column piping is
structurally and mechanically adequate for the provided and installed pump
configuration.
Pump Bowl Assembly
Pump bowl castings shall be of close-grained cast iron ASTM A48 Class 30 or
ASTM A536 ductile iron Class 60-40-18 where required to meet the hydrostatic
pressure criteria listed below. The water passages shall be free of blowholes,
sand holes, and other detrimental defects, shall be lined with porcelain enamel,
and shall be accurately machined and fitted. The finished bowls shall be capable
of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure equal to twice the head at rated capacity
or equal to or greater than the shut-off head, whichever is greater.
The impellers shall be ASTM B584 alloy C87600 lead free bronze, enclosed
type, and shall be statically balanced, and shall be fastened securely to the
impeller shaft with 316 stainless steel collets. Impellers shall be adjustable
vertically by an external means. Impeller skirt and series case throat area shall
be thick enough to allow for machining and wearing at the time of repair. The
bowl wear rings and impeller wear rings shall be hardened stainless steel.
The pump shaft shall be of A582 Grade 416 Stainless Steel turned, ground and
polished. Bearings shall be Morse or Durmax Marine Bearings consisting of
sleeve bearings and a fluted rubber bearing surface (or approved equal) above
and below each impeller. The pump shaft shall have chromed journals at the
bearing points. The size of the shaft shall be no less than that determined by
ANSI/AWWA Specifications E103.
The discharge case shall be threaded on the outside for column sizes up to 14
inches and fitted with a cast iron ASTM A48 Class 30 column adaptor of the
proper size to connect to the column selected. Likewise, the suction case shall
also be threaded on the I.D. and fitted with a cast iron or steel suction adaptor.
09/2022 DEEP WELL PUMP AND PUMP MOTOR
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 30 - 6
Suction Pipe and Strainer
A suction pipe shall not be required.
A stainless steel cone strainer shall be provided having a net inlet area equal to
at least four times the suction pipe area. The maximum opening size shall not be
more than 75% of the minimum opening of the water passage through the bowl
or impeller.
MOTOR
Pump motor shall be a vertical hollow shaft, premium efficiency, inverter duty, WP1
enclosure, electric motor, and shall be sized as noted in Table 1. Motor shall have a
non-reverse ratchet, P-base, squirrel cage induction design. Motor shall have Class B or
Class F insulation with temperature rise as specified by NEMA standards for class of
insulation used and shall have a 1.15 service factor. The pump motor will be operating
in an ambient temperature range of 50 - 110 Fahrenheit.
Pump motors shall be provided with a vibration switch. Switch rating 120 VAC, 2 amps
minimum.
Pump motors shall have over temperature protection, which shall consist of a minimum
of six RTD’s embedded in the motor windings and two RTD’s at the two bearings.
Wiring to an external junction box shall be provided. RTD’s shall be 100– ohm platinum
three wire elements.
Thrust bearing shall be chosen to handle the continuous down-thrust as specified by the
pump manufacturer with an AFMBA L-10 bearing life of 12,320 hours and an L-50 of
61,600 hours. Provisions shall be made for momentary up-thrust equal to 30% of rated
down-thrust.
The motor shall be suitable for across-the-line starting, soft start, be inverter duty, and
shall be capable of reduced-voltage starting. It shall also have shaft grounding rings.
The motor rating shall be such that at design it will not be loaded beyond nameplate
rating and at no place on the pump curve shall the loading exceed the service factor.
The motor temperature shall be rated no higher than the allowable operating
temperature of the motor thrust and radial bearings and in no case shall it exceed the
temperature rating of the insulation class used to wind the motor.
The junction box shall be oversized to accommodate wiring connection, and shall be a
minimum of 24”H x 18”W x 14”D with 2 - 4” conduit penetrations on the bottom.
Motors connected to VFD’s shall have factory installed shaft grounding rings. Supplier
shall provide a warranty against VFD-induced bearing damage or failure for the life of
the motor. Motor shall also include insulated bearings to prevent circulation and other
bearing currents.
APPURTENANCES
Well Monitoring and Sounding Tubes
09/2022 DEEP WELL PUMP AND PUMP MOTOR
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 30 - 7
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install two 1 1/4-inch diameter well monitoring
tubes in each well consisting of flush thread Schedule 80 PVC pipe. The PVC tube
shall be joined and banded to the pump column with stainless steel bands at
maximum of 10 feet. A minimum of two 1/4-inch diameter vent holes for every 10
feet of length shall be provided throughout the entire length of the monitoring tube.
The depth of the monitoring tube shall be as indicated on the drawings. The bottom
end shall be capped with a ¼-inch hole drilled in the end.
Well Vent
The well vent shall consist of galvanized steel 1 inch diameter pipe through the soul
plate extended above the bottom plate of the pump discharge head with a 180
degree bend made of two steel ells. The outlet end of the vent pipe shall be covered
with No. 14 stainless steel wire mesh securely fastened by a stainless steel band.
The lower end of the vent pipe shall be threaded into the well surface plate and
provide a water tight seal. See Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Install new pump and motor at the location shown on the drawings and according with
manufacturer's recommendations.
All pumps, complete with drive system, in place at the jobsite, shall not exceed
acceptable field vibration limits given in the latest revisions of the Hydraulic Institute
Standards. All pumps shall be free of static unbalance; shall be free of dynamic
unbalance up to the maximum speed of the pump and drive system; shall be free of
torsional vibration from 10 percent below the minimum speed to 10 percent above the
maximum speed of the pump and drive system; and shall be free of apparent unbalance
caused by defective bearings, by close fittings parts which may rub on the rotating parts
intermittently, or by loose discs or rotor parts, or unbalanced loads.
The motor/discharge head assembly shall be shimmed with respect to the well casing
flange to bring the motor/discharge assembly into optimum alignment with any variations
that the pump column and line shaft may exhibit from being truly plumb. Such shims
must be structurally sound and securely attached. The water tight seal between the
discharge head and the well casing flange must be maintained.
FIELD TESTS
After installation, the pump shall be given an operating test to demonstrate freedom from
mechanical defects, excessive noise, and vibration. The test shall include operating the
pump continuously while throttling the discharge as needed. The operating test shall be
performed for a minimum of one hour, or as directed by ENGINEER. Pumps with
variable speed drives shall be tested at maximum speed, and at the average and
minimum speeds listed under the specification for the pumps. A copy of actual test data
shall be furnished to ENGINEER.
Tests for acceptable vibration shall be made, at no additional cost to OWNER, in the
field on each pump system, which in the opinion of ENGINEER, seem to have excessive
09/2022 DEEP WELL PUMP AND PUMP MOTOR
254.07.100 PAGE 33 12 30 - 8
vibration. All field tests shall be running tests with the pump pumping the product for
which it is intended and each pump system shall be tested separately with no other
pumps running. All testing shall be done in the presence of ENGINEER. Amplitude as
used in this Specification, shall mean total peak-to-peak displacement. The required test
for acceptable vibration will be the measurement of this peak-to-peak displacement and
will be performed with an IRD Vibration Meter, Model 306; Bently-Nevada TK-8; or
equal.
DISINFECTING
Source of Water
The Contractor shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water supplies
for disinfection of the pumping system.
Testing Procedure
Leakage and pressure testing must be completed, and all leaks repaired prior to
disinfection procedures.
Pump and related piping installed under this Contract shall be disinfected using an
approved disinfection method in accordance with the "American Water Works
Association Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains" (AWWA C651) and “American
Water Works Association Standard for Disinfecting Wells” (AWWA C654).
Heavily chlorinated water shall not be discharged onto the ground. Upon completion
of disinfection, Sodium Bisulfate (NaHSO3) shall be applied to the heavily chlorinated
water to neutralize thoroughly the chlorine residual remaining. Water shall be
neutralized to less than 1 ppm.
After completion of the disinfection, CONTRACTOR shall flush the new system until
the chlorine residual is a maximum of 0.3 ppm after which bacteriological test will be
performed by OWNER.
At the end of 24 hours after the first sample is taken, a second bacteriological test will
be performed by OWNER to insure adequate disinfection. If the initial or second
disinfection fails to provide satisfactory bacteriological results, or shows the presence
of coliform, then the well line shall be re-chlorinated, flushed, and retested until
satisfactory results are obtained at the expense to the Contractor.

- END OF SECTION -

01/2023 PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
254.07.100 33 13 00- 1

SECTION 33 13 00
PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This section covers testing and disinfection in order to remove bacteriological
contamination of the pipeline. Disinfection is only required if the pipeline is used for
potable water.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining permits for discharging excess testing
water and dechlorination of such water, if required.
RELATED SECTIONS
Related Work specified in other Sections includes but is not limited to the following:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal procedures
Section 33 05 05 Ductile Iron Fittings
Section 33 05 07 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (AWWA C900 and C905)
Section 33 92 10 Steel Pipe, Specials, and Fittings (AWWA C200, Modified)
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this Specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AWWA C-651 - Disinfecting Water Mains
Utah Public Drinking Water Regulations
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Furnish a written testing plan and schedule, including water source and methods for
conveyance to the project, sequence, control, and disposal. Include the name of the
certified bacteriological testing laboratory.
Disinfection Report:
Type and form of disinfectant used.
Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion.
Test locations.
Name of person collecting samples.
Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in treated water in parts per million (ppm) for
each outlet tested.
Date and time of flushing start and completion.
Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested.

01/2023 PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
254.07.100 33 13 00- 2

PART 2 MATERIALS
DESCRIPTION
All test equipment, temporary valves, bulkheads, and other water control equipment,
shall be as determined by CONTRACTOR. No materials shall be used which damage
the project pipelines for future conveyance of potable water.
Disinfecting materials shall consist of liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution, or
calcium hypochlorite granules or tablets.
Dechlorination agents may be sodium bisulfate, sodium sulfite, or sodium thiosulfate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
GENERAL
Source of Water
CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water for
testing and disinfection of the water line system. All testing water used in the
pipeline shall be potable water from a State approved drinking water system.
All pressure pipelines shall be tested.
Disposal of flushing water and water containing chlorine shall be by methods
acceptable to the State of Utah, Division of Water Quality.
HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES PROCEDURE
Prior to hydrostatic testing, pipelines 24-inches diameter and larger shall be swept free
of debris and visually inspected that all debris has been removed prior to filling.
Prior to hydrostatic testing, pipelines shall be flushed or blown out as appropriate.
CONTRACTOR may test pipelines in sections. Sections to be tested shall be defined by
isolation valves in the pipeline. Where such valves are not present, CONTRACTOR
shall install temporary bulkheads or plugs for the purpose of testing. Sections that do
not have isolation valves shall be tested in approximate one-mile segments. Sections
that have a zero leakage allowance may be tested as a unit. No section of the pipeline
shall be tested until field-placed concrete or mortar has attained an age of 14 Days. The
test shall be made by closing valves when available or by placing bulkheads and filling
the line slowly with water (maximum filling velocity shall not exceed 0.25 foot per
second, calculation based on the full area of the pipe). CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible for ascertaining that test bulkheads are suitably restrained to resist the thrust
of the test pressure without damage to or movement of the adjacent pipe. Unharnessed
sleeve-type couplings, expansion joints, or other sliding joints shall be restrained or
suitably anchored prior to the test to avoid movement and damage to piping and
equipment. Remove or protect any pipeline-mounted devices that may be damaged by
the test pressure. CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient temporary tappings in the
pipelines to allow for trapped air to exit or for water to be drained. After completion of
the tests, such taps shall be permanently plugged. Care shall be taken that air relief
valves are open during filling.
01/2023 PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
254.07.100 33 13 00- 3

The pipeline shall be filled at a rate which will not cause any surges or exceed the rate at
which the air can be released through the release valves at a reasonable velocity. The
air within the pipeline shall be allowed to escape completely. The differential pressure
across the orifices in the air release valves shall not be allowed to exceed 5 psi at any
time during filling. After the pipeline or section thereof has been filled, it shall be allowed
to stand under a slight pressure for at least 24 hours to allow the concrete or mortar
lining, as applicable, to absorb water and to allow the escape of air from air pockets.
During this period, bulkheads, valves, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If
leaks are found, corrective measures satisfactory to ENGINEER shall be taken.
Additional water shall be added to the pipeline to replace any water absorbed by the
cement mortar lining.
The hydrostatic test shall consist of holding 125% of the design operating pressure on
the pipeline segment for a period of 2 hours. Visible leaks that appear during testing
shall be repaired. Add water to restore the test pressure if the pressure decreases 5 psi
below test pressure during the test period.
Pipe with welded joints shall have no leakage. In the case of pipelines that fail to pass
the leakage test, CONTRACTOR shall determine the cause of the leakage, shall take
corrective measures necessary to repair the leaks, and shall again test the pipeline,
repeating as necessary until the pipeline passes.
Exposed piping and valves shall show no visible leaks and no pressure loss during the
test.
Blowoff isolation gate valves and plug valves (throttling valves) shall be operated and
tested during a simulated blow down operation to demonstrate functionality of the valves
to the satisfaction of ENGINEER. Isolation valves (gate valves) shall not be used for
throttling.
DISINFECTING OF PIPELINES PROCEDURE
Leakage and pressure testing must be completed prior to disinfection procedures.
All water and solution piping installed under this Contract shall be disinfected using an
approved disinfection method in accordance with the "American Water Works
Association Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains" (AWWA C651).
CONTRACTOR may use one of the three chlorination methods – tablet, continuous
feed, and slug, as outlined in AWWA C651 that is acceptable to OWNER. Care must be
taken to prevent the strong chlorine solution in the line being disinfected from flowing
back into the line supplying the water.
CONTRACTOR shall provide sampling ports along the pipeline as defined in AWWA
C651. Taps may be at manways and air valves to help facilitate the spacing
requirement.
Heavily chlorinated water shall not be discharged onto the ground. Upon completion of
disinfection, Sodium Bisulfate (NaHSO4), or other approved dechlorination agent, shall
be applied to the heavily chlorinated water to neutralize thoroughly the chlorine residual
remaining. Water shall be neutralized to less than 1 ppm total chlorine residual.
01/2023 PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
254.07.100 33 13 00- 4

After approval of disinfection, CONTRACTOR shall flush the new system until the
chlorine residual is a maximum of 0.3 ppm.
After final flushing and before the new water main is connected to the distribution
system, two consecutive sets of acceptable samples, taken at least 24 hours apart, shall
be collected from the pipeline being tested. Sampling and testing will be completed by
CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall collect at least one set of samples from every
1,200 feet of pipeline, plus one set from the end of the line and at least one set from
each branch. All samples shall be tested for bacteriological (chemical and physical)
quality in accordance with “Standard Methods for Examination of Water and
Wastewater” and shall show the absence of coliform organisms. If the initial disinfection
fails to provide satisfactory bacteriological results, or shows the presence of coliform,
then the line shall be re-chlorinated, flushed, and retested until satisfactory results are
obtained at the expense of CONTRACTOR.
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM
Where connections are to be made to an existing potable water system, the interior
surfaces of all pipe and fittings used in making the connections shall be swabbed or
sprayed with a one percent hypochlorite solution before installation. Thorough flushing
shall be started as soon as the connection is completed and shall be continued until
discolored water is eliminated.
Final Fill: After a successful pressure and disinfection tests, the pipeline(s) shall be filled
with fresh potable water and shall remain filled.

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 DRAINAGE SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 33 14 13 - 1
SECTION 33 14 13
DRAINAGE SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This section covers the work to furnish excavate, install, backfill and complete the
subdrainage system (ring drain), consisting of the drainage pipe, washed rock,
geosynthetics, pipe and pipe fittings as necessary to complete installation of drainage
pipe at the locations and grades shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
This section also includes the supply and installation of the storm drain piping.
RELATED WORK
Related work specified in other sections:
Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Construction Utilities and Environmental Controls
Section 22 10 10 - Plumbing Piping and Specialties
Section 31 05 19 - Geosynthetics
Section 31 23 15 - Excavation, and Backfilling for Buried Pipelines
Section 31 23 23 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures
Section 33 16 16 - Underground Water Storage Reservoir
REFERENCES
The latest edition of the following publications form a part of this specifications to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text to by basic designation
only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION
OFFICIALS (AASHTO
AASHTO M 294 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 12 to 36-in. Diameter.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
1. ASTM C 150 Portland Cement
2. ASTM D 422 Particle-Size Analysis of Soils
3. ASTM D 1248 Standard Specifications for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion
Materials for Wire and Cable
4. ASTM D 2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic
Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.
5. ASTM D 2683 Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for
Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing
6. ASTM D 2837 Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for
Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis for
Thermoplastic Pipe Products
7. ASTM D 3261 Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE)
Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing
01/2023 DRAINAGE SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 33 14 13 - 2
8. ASTM D 3350 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings
Materials
9. ASTM F 714 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR)
Based on Outside Diameter
10. ASTM F 1055 Standard Specification for Electrofusion Type Polyethylene
Fittings for Outside Diameter Controlled Polyethylene and
Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe and Tubing
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C 901 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2"-inch through 3-
inch, for Water Service
AWWA C 906 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4-inch through 63-
inch, for Water Distribution and Transmission
AWWA M 55 PE Pipe – Design and Installation.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for this section. Full
compensation for the drainage system shall be considered as included in the contract
unit or lump sum bid prices for the various items of the contract to which the drainage
system relates.
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted:
Certified copies of test reports demonstrating conformance to applicable pipe
specifications, before pipe is installed.
A plan for pipe joining and installation. The plan must be reviewed and approved by
ENGINEER prior to pipe installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Delivery and Storage: Materials delivered to the site shall be inspected for damage,
unloaded, and stored with a minimum of handling. Materials shall not be stored directly
on the ground. The inside of pipes and fittings shall be kept free of dirt and debris.
Plastic materials adversely impacted by ultraviolet light shall be protected from exposure
to the direct sunlight over extended periods.
Handling: Materials shall be handled in such a manner as to insure delivery to the
trench in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe and other materials shall be carried to the
trench, not dragged.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
BACKFILL FOR STORM DRAIN
Backfill for the reinforced concrete pipe shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 15 -
Excavation and Backfill for Pipelines.
01/2023 DRAINAGE SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 33 14 13 - 3
CURB INLET TYPE PRECAST STORM DRAIN BOXES & GRATES
Provide and install curb inlet type precast concrete storm drain boxes and grates in
accordance with APWA (UT) Plans 315.1 and 308
PIPE FOR STORM DRAIN
Storm Drain Pipe shall either RCP or “ADS HP Storm” drain pipe as follows.
Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP)
RCP for gravity service shall be ASTM C76, Class III minimum. RCP for low head
pressure service shall be ASTM C361, Class A-25 minimum. Cement shall be
ASTM C150 Type II.
Joints shall use either concrete bell and spigot or a double spigot and sleeve. In the
latter case, the sleeve shall be a reinforced thermoset plastic collar. Joints shall be
rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C443
HP Storm Drain Pipe shall be of polypropylene meeting ASTM F2881, Section 5 &
AASHTO M330, Section 6.1; made by ADS, with a smooth interior (Manning’s n=0.012)
and with exterior corrugations. Joints shall meet ASTM F2881 or AASHTO M330.
Submit ADS installation recommendations. Install as recommended by manufacturer.
TRACER WIRE
All direct bury piping (including service lines) shall be installed with 12 gauge solid
copper THHN tracer wire for pipeline location purposes by means of an electronic line
tracer.
The wires must be installed along the entire length of the pipe on the top of the pipe
and be held in place with ties or hitches spaced not more than 12-feet apart.
Sections of wire shall be spliced together using approved splice caps and waterproof
seals or solder. Twisting the wires together is not acceptable.
DRAIN PIPE FOR BUILDINGS AND BACKWASHING
See Section 22 10 10, Plumbing and Piping Specialties.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
Where wet or otherwise unstable soil incapable of properly supporting the pipe, as
determined by ENGINEER, is unexpectedly encountered in the bottom of a trench, such
material shall be removed to the depth required and replaced to the proper grade with
select granular material, and compacted as provided in these specifications. When
removal of unstable material is due to the fault or neglect of Contractor in his
performance of shoring and sheeting, water removal, or other specified requirements,
such removal and replacement shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner.
01/2023 DRAINAGE SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 33 14 13 - 4
SAFETY
Excavations shall be sloped or otherwise supported in a safe manner in accordance with
applicable State safety requirements and the requirements of OSHA Safety and Health
Standards for Construction (29 CFR1926).
TRENCH PREPARATION
Each trench shall be excavated so that the pipe can be laid to the alignment and grade
as required. The trench wall shall be so braced that the workmen may work safely and
efficiently. All trenches shall be drained so the pipe laying may take place in dewatered
conditions.
The trench bottom shall be given a final trim using a string line, laser, or another method
approved by the ENGINEER for establishing grade, such that each pipe section when
first laid will be continually in contact with the ground along the extreme bottom of the
pipe.
REMOVAL OF WATER
CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain at all times ample means and devices with
which to remove promptly and to properly dispose of all water entering the trench
excavation.
Water shall be disposed of in a suitable manner without damage to adjacent property or
without being a menace to public health and convenience. No water shall be drained
into work built or under construction without prior consent of the Engineer.
Dewatering shall be accomplished by well points, sumping, or any other acceptable
method which will insure a dewatered trench. Any dewatering method shall be subject
to the approval of the Engineer.

- END OF SECTION -

03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 1
SECTION 33 92 10
STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS ( AWWA C 200, modified)
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
Provide steel pipe per this section, Section 40 05 13.13, and as follows.
Below Grade Pipe:
Mortar line per this Section. End mortar lining at first flange above floor.
Tape coat per Section 09 99 10, PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
Exposed Pipe:
Galvanize where called for.
Epoxy line and coat in buildings and vaults per Section 09 90 00 unless noted
otherwise. Lap epoxy coating into floor. Raise trowelled floor conc up ¼” around
epoxy coated pipe so any water condensing on pipe flows away from pipe.
and tape coat below grade piping per this Section ProFabricate
CONTRACTOR shall provide fabrication and installation of steel pipe, specials, and
fittings, complete and in place, in accordance with AWWA C200 and as modified herein.
A single pipe manufacturer shall be made responsible for furnishing steel pipe, specials,
fittings, and appurtenances such as bolts and gaskets.
A special is defined as any piece of pipe other than a normal full length of straight pipe.
This includes, but is not limited to, elbows, manhole sections, short pieces of straight
pipe, reducers, tees, and bulk heads.
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 50 30 Protection of Existing Facilities
Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Pipelines
Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances
Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the
Contract:
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI B16.1 Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, and
250
ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24
Metric/Inch Standard
ANSI/AWS B2.1 Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance
Qualification
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 2
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 20 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Plates
for Pressure Vessels
ASTM A 193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special
Purpose Applications
ASTM A 194 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless
Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature
Service, or Both
ASTM A 234 Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel
and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service
ASTM A 283 Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength
Carbon Steel Plates
ASTM A 307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A 370 Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of
Steel Products
ASTM A 563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A 572 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-
Vanadium Structural Steel
ASTM A 578 Standard Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination
of Rolled Steel Plates for Special Applications
ASTM A 1011 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-
Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
ASTM A 1018 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-
Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commercial, Drawing,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy
with Improved Formability
ASTM E 165 Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General
Industry
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C 200 Steel Water Pipe 6-inch and Larger
AWWA C 205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe
– 4-inch and Larger-Shop Applied
AWWA C 206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe
AWWA C 207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4-inch Through
144-inch
AWWA C 208 Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings
AWWA C 209 Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for Steel Water Pipe, Special
Sections, Connections, and Fittings
AWWA C 210 Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel
Water Pipelines
AWWA C 214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
AWWA C 216 Heat-Shrinkable Cross-Linked Polyolefin Coatings for the Exterior
of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings
AWWA C 219 Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe
AWWA C 606 Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 3
AWWA C 651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA M 11 Manual of Water Supply Practices – Steel Pipe – A Guide for
Design and Installation
SUBMITTALS
Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Shop Drawings
Prepare and submit certified dimensional drawings consistent with the pipeline
alignment and grade on the Drawings, including all fittings and appurtenances, and
with the size, location, elevation and slope information of existing utilities, pipelines,
and encasements obtained by CONTRACTOR in accordance with Section 01 50 30 -
Protection of Existing.
Joint and pipe/fitting wall construction details which indicate the type and thickness of
cylinder; the position, type, size, and area of reinforcement; coating and lining
holdbacks, manufacturing tolerances; and other pertinent information required for the
manufacture of the product. Standard joint details shall be submitted where deep
bell or butt strap joints are required for control of temperature stresses.
Details for elbows, wyes, tees, outlets, connections, test bulkheads, and nozzles or
other specials that indicate amount and position of reinforcement. Fittings and
specials shall be properly reinforced to withstand the internal pressure, both
circumferential and longitudinal, and the external loading conditions as indicated in
the drawings. Provide design calculations for all fittings and specials, including all
reinforcement requirements.
Material lists and steel reinforcement schedules that describe materials to be utilized.
Line layout and marking diagrams which indicate the specific number of each pipe
and fitting, the location of each pipe, and the direction of each fitting in the completed
line compatible with requirements of AWWA Manual 11 (M-11). In addition, the line
layouts shall include:
The pipe station and invert elevation at every change in grade or horizontal
alignment.
The station and invert elevation to which the bell end of each pipe will be laid.
Elements of curves and bends, both in horizontal and vertical alignment.
Pipe joint type.
The limits within each reach of each type of field-welded joint and of concrete
encasement.
Location of mitered pipe sections, beveled ends, butt straps and deep bell lap
joints for temperature stress control.
Location and details for each valve, meter, pump, fitting, and other equipment as
shown on the drawings used to determine pipe dimensions. Include location of
closures, cut-off sections for length adjustment, temporary access manways,
vents, and weld lead outlets for construction convenience.
Location of bulkheads, including those shown and as required, for hydrostatic
testing of pipeline.
Welding Information
The Shop Drawings shall define the weld type and distinguish between shop and
field welds. Shop Drawings shall indicate by welding symbols or sketches the
details of the welded joints and the preparation of parent metal required to make
them. Joints or groups of joints in which welding sequence or technique are
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 4
especially important and shall be carefully controlled to minimize shrinkage
stresses and distortion.
Written welding procedures for shop and field welds, including Welding
Procedures Specifications (WPS’s) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQR’s)
shall be submitted.
Written nondestructive testing procedure specifications and nondestructive
testing personal qualifications for shop and field welds shall be submitted.
Current (within the last 6 months) Welder Performance Qualifications (WPQ’s)
shall be submitted for each welder used prior to their performing any Work either
in the shop or field. Qualification testing shall be as specified in paragraph 1.3 –
Quality Assurance.
Submit the credentials of CONTRACTOR’s Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI’s)
and quality control specialist for review prior to starting any welding in the shop or
field. The credentials shall include, but not be limited to, American Welding
Society (AWS), QC-1 Certification. Other nondestructive testing (NDT) quality
control personnel shall be certified as required by AWS D1.1.
Submit NDT data for each shop-welded and field-welded joint. This data shall
include all testing on each weld joint, including re-examination of repaired welds,
using radiographic testing (RT), magnetic particle testing (MT), dye penetrant
testing (PT), ultrasonic testing (UT), or air test examination methods as specified.
Test data shall be reviewed and signed by the CWI.
Submit a welder log for field and shop welding. Log shall list all welders to be
used for the Work and the types of welds each welder is qualified to perform.
Submit a written weld repair procedure for each type of shop and field weld
proposed for use on the project.
Submit a written rod control procedure for shop and field operations
demonstrating how CONTRACTOR intends to maintain rods in good condition
throughout the Work. The rod control procedure shall also demonstrate how the
rods are used for each weld.

Drawings showing the location, design, and details of bulkheads for hydrostatic
testing of the pipeline, and details for removal of test bulkheads and repair of the
lining.
Details and locations of closures for length adjustment and for construction
convenience. Submit proposed sequencing of events to control temperature
stresses in the pipe wall during installation prior to starting any field welding. Submit
the proposed sequencing of events or special techniques to minimize distortion of
the steel as may result from shop welding procedures. Submit plan for monitoring
pipeline temperatures.
Detail drawings indicating the type, number, and other pertinent details of the slings,
strutting, and other methods proposed for pipe handling during manufacturing,
transport, and installation.
Manufacturer's written Quality Assurance/Control Program.
Certifications: CONTRACTOR shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for pipe
and other products or materials in AWWA C 200, AWWA C 205, AWWA C 206, AWWA
C 207, AWWA C 208, AWWA C 209, AWWA C 214, AWWA C 216, AWWA C 219, and
the following supplemental requirements:
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 5
Certified copies of mill test reports on each heat from which steel is rolled. Test shall
include physical and chemical properties. Submit certified copies of mill test reports
for flanges.
Hydrostatic test reports.
Results of production weld tests.
Sand, cement, and mortar tests.
Records of coating application, including technical data sheets, manufacturer name,
product name and thickness.
Performing and paying for sampling and testing necessary for certification are
CONTRACTOR's responsibility.
Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Furnish a copy of manufacturer’s certification to ISO 9000,
SPFA, or LRQA, and documentation of manufacturer’s experience in fabricating AWWA
C200 pipe. Credentials shall include reference names, telephone numbers, and
descriptions of projects for pipe conforming to AWWA C200 that is of similar diameter,
length, and wall thickness to the pipe for this project.
Design Calculations of Fittings and Specials: Furnish a copy of design calculations for
fittings and specials including miters, welds, and reinforcement, prior to manufacture of
pipe, fittings, and specials.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Pipe Manufacturer Qualifications: The pipe manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9000,
the Steel Plate Fabricator’s Association (SPFA), or Lloyd’s Register Quality Assurance
(LRQA) and shall be experienced in fabrication of AWWA C200 pipe of similar
diameters, lengths, and wall thickness to this project. The manufacturer shall have the
capability of meeting the schedule requirements of this project. Experience shall be in
the production facilities and personnel, not the name of the company that owns the
production facility or employs the personnel. Verification of experience and production
capability will be conducted as part of the initial submittal review process for steel pipe
and the CONTRACTOR’s progress schedule.
Inspection: Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture in
accordance with the provisions of AWWA C200, C205, C206, C208, and C214 as
supplemented by the requirements herein. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER in
writing of the manufacturing start date not less than 14 Days prior to the start of any
phase of the pipe manufacture.
Tests: Except as modified herein, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be
tested in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C200, C205, C206, C208, and
C214 as applicable.
After the joint configuration is completed and prior to lining with cement mortar, each
length of pipe of each diameter and pressure class shall be shop-tested and certified
to a pressure of at least 75 percent of the yield strength of the steel. The test
pressure shall be held for 2 minutes and the pipe visually inspected to confirm that
welds are sound and leak-free.
In addition to the tests required in AWWA C200, weld tests shall be conducted on
each 5,000-feet of production welds and at any other times there is a change in the
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 6
grade of steel, welding procedure, or welding equipment. One set of tests per
operator per work shift shall be performed.
Fittings fabricated from straight pipe previously passing a hydrostatic test need not
have an additional hydrostatic test provided welds are tested by nondestructive
means and demonstrated to be sound.
Material tests shall be performed at no additional cost to OWNER. ENGINEER and
OWNER shall have the right to witness testing conducted by CONTRACTOR or pipe
manufacturer/fabricator; provided that CONTRACTOR’s schedule is not delayed for
the convenience of ENGINEER or OWNER.
Welding Procedure Specifications: Welding procedures used to fabricate and install
pipe shall be in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC) for
shop welds and ANSI/AWS D1.1 for field welds. Written welding procedures shall be
required for welds in the shop or the field. Welds qualified per the ASME BPVC shall
include supplementary Essential Variables for notch-tough welding. Provisions of
ANSI/AWS D1.1 qualified welds pertaining to notch-tough welding shall apply.
Welder Performance Qualifications: Welding shall be performed by skilled welders,
welding operators, and tackers who have had experience in the methods and materials
to be used. Welders shall be qualified per the provisions of ASME BPVC for shop welds
and ANSI/AWS D1.1 for field welds.
Shop Testing of Steel Plate Specials:
If any special has been fabricated from straight pipe not previously tested and is of
the type listed below, the special shall be hydrostatically tested with a pressure equal
to 1-1/2 times the design working pressure: This applies to bends, wyes, crosses,
tees with side outlet diameter greater than 30 percent of the main pipe diameter, and
manifolds.
Specials not required to be hydrostatically tested shall be tested by liquid dye
penetrant inspection method in accordance with ASTM E 165, Method A or the
magnetic particle method in ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix VI.
Reinforcing plates shall be tested by the solution method using approximately 40 psi
air pressure introduced between the plates through a threaded test hole. Test hole
shall be properly plugged following successful testing.
Any weld defects, cracks, leaks, distortion, or signs of distress during testing shall
require corrective measures. Weld defects shall be gouged out and re-welded. After
corrections, the special shall be retested.
Where welded test heads or bulkheads are used, extra length shall be provided to
each opening of the special. After removal of each test head, the special shall be
trimmed back to the design points with finished plate edges ground smooth, straight,
and prepared for the field joint.
Testing shall be performed before joints have been coated or lined.
Ultrasonic examination shall be performed in accordance with the following:
Steel plate that will be in welded joints or welded stiffener elements shall be
examined ultrasonically for laminar discontinuities where both of the following
conditions exist:
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 7
Any plate in the welded joint has a thickness exceeding 1/2-inch.
Any plate in the welded joint is subject to transverse tensile stress
through its thickness during the welding or service.
Ultrasonic examination may be waived where joints are designated to minimize
potential laminar tearing.
The ultrasonic examination shall be in accordance with ASTM A578 with a Level
I acceptance standard.

Plates that are not in conformance with the acceptance criteria in ASTM A578 may
be used in the WORK if the areas that contain the discontinuities are a distance at
least 4 times the greatest dimension of the discontinuity away from the weld joint.
Shop Nondestructive Testing: Nondestructive testing shall be performed for various
weld categories as indicated below. Testing shall include submitting written
documentation of procedures per Section V of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME
BPVC.
Field Butt Joint Welds: Spot radiographically examine pipe in accordance with
Paragraph UW-52 of the ASME BPVC Section VIII Division 1. If in the opinion of the
ENGINEER, the welds cannot readily be radiographed, they shall be 100 percent
ultrasonically examined.
Fillet Welds: 100 percent examine every fillet weld using the magnetic particle
inspection method.
Groove Welds: 100 percent ultrasonically examine groove welds that cannot be
readily radiographically spot examined.
CONTRACTOR’s certified welding inspector (CWI) shall 100 percent visually
examine every weld as a minimum.
In addition to weld tests indicated, doubler pads shall be air tested as stated in
AWWA C206.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for performing and paying for said tests and the
ENGINEER has the right to witness testing conducted by CONTRACTOR.
Onsite Observation: SUPPLIER shall provide an experienced staff member if requested
by CONTRACTOR to be onsite while the pipe and fittings are being installed. The staff
member’s duties shall include, but not be limited to the following:
Observe the installation and welding of the pipe and fittings.
Report any concerns to OWNER’S on-site observer.
Answer questions and provide assistance to OWNER and CONTRACTOR.
Certified Welding Inspector: Furnish the services of a certified welding inspector(s)
(CWI) for the shop welding (no field welding allowed) as specified in AWWA C200 and
C206. After receiving CWI qualification, the CWI shall have at least 3 years of
professional work experience similar to the work being performed for the project. The
CWI’s shall be directed by a CWI supervisor with at least 5 years of professional work
experience similar to the work being performed for the project. The certified welding
inspector(s) shall submit written certification that all welds were performed in
conformance with these documents. Shop weld tests shall be reviewed and signed by
the certified welding inspector(s).
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 8
Field Testing: Field testing shall conform to the requirements of Section 33 13 00 -
Pipeline Testing and Disinfection.
Welding Requirements: Welding procedures used to fabricate and install pipe shall be
prequalified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code-Steel or
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9. Welding procedures shall be
required for longitudinal and girth or spiral welds for pipe cylinders, spigot and bell ring
attachments, reinforcing plates and ring flange welds, and plates for lug connections.
Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done by skilled welders, welding operators, and
tackers who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used.
Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 or the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9 by an independent local, approved testing agency
not more than 6 months prior to commencing work on the pipeline. Machines and
electrodes similar to those used in the project shall be used in qualification tests.
WARRANTY
A one-year warranty for the pipe shall be included from CONTRACTOR and shall cover
the cost of replacement pipe and freight to the project site, should the pipe have any
defects in material or workmanship.
In addition to the standard pipe warranty, the welding contractor shall provide in writing a
warranty for a period of one year for all welded joints, including formation, installation,
and pressure testing.
Unless otherwise noted, the warranty periods shall begin when Substantial Completion
is issued for the contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
GENERAL
Manufacturers of steel pipe and steel fittings or specials shall be under the direction and
management of one steel pipe manufacturer only. This does not prevent a separate
fabricator from fabricating specials or fittings; however, WORK shall be directed by the
Main Pipe Manufacturer. The responsibility of the Main Pipe Manufacturer shall include
at a minimum:
Verify pipe, fittings, and specials are being manufactured in full accordance with the
drawings and specifications and applicable codes and standards.
Manage the design, fabrication, testing and delivery of the pipe, fittings, and specials.
Provide field support if requested to CONTRACTOR during installation and testing.
Prepare and submit submittal information and Shop Drawings.
Make any corrections that may be required to the submittal information and Shop
Drawings.
Certify that the pipe and specials have been manufactured in accordance with the
Drawings and Specifications.
Lined and coated steel pipe and specials shall conform to AWWA C 200, C 205, C 209,
C210, C 214, and C 216 subject to the following supplemental requirements. The pipe,
specials, and fittings shall be of the diameter and class indicated and shall be provided
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 9
complete with welded joints as indicated on the Drawings. For pipe, specials, and
fittings 14-inches diameter and larger, the nominal inside diameter after lining shall not
be less than the diameter indicated on the Drawings, allowing for tolerances according to
AWWA C 200 and C 205. Pipe, specials, and fittings smaller than 14-inches diameter
may be furnished in standard outside diameters. When indicated as a minimum, wall
thickness tolerance shall be as allowed by AWWA C200 or the ASTM nominal sheet or
plate tolerance, whichever is less.
Markings: The manufacturer shall legibly mark pipe, specials, and fittings in accordance
with the laying schedule and marking diagram. Each pipe, special, and fitting shall be
numbered in sequence and said number shall appear on the laying schedule and
marking diagram in its proper location for installation. Each pipe, special, and fitting
number shall be located on the inside and outside area of pipe, special, and fitting.
Interior marking shall be in full conformance with NSF 61. Each pipe, fitting and special
shall be marked at each end with top field centerline. The word “Top” shall be painted or
marked on the outside top spigot of each pipe section or fitting. Mark “Top Match Point”
for compound bends per AWWA C 208.
Handling and Storage: The pipe, specials, and fittings shall be handled by use of wide
slings, padded cradles, or other devices designed and constructed to prevent damage to
the pipe coating/exterior. The use of chains, hooks, or other equipment that mig ht injure
the pipe coating/exterior will not be permitted. Stockpiled pipe, specials, and fittings
shall be supported on padded skids, sand or earth berms free of rock exceeding 2-
inches diameter, sand bags, or suitable means so that the pipe including coating and
lining coating will not be damaged. Pipe, specials, and fittings shall not be rolled and
shall be secured to prevent accidental rolling. The ends of pipes shall be securely
bulkheaded or otherwise sealed during transportation and shall remain sealed until
installation.
CONTRACTOR shall replace or repair any pipe, specials, and fittings damaged at no
additional cost to OWNER.
Laying Lengths: Maximum pipe laying lengths shall be 48-feet with shorter lengths
provided as required to accommodate CONTRACTOR’s operation.
Lining: The pipe, specials, and fittings shall have smooth, dense interior surfaces and
shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface crazing, and roughness.
Closures and Correction Pieces: Closures and correction pieces shall be provided as
required so that closures may be made due to different headings in the pipe laying
operation and so that correction may be made to adjust the pipe laying to conform to
pipe stationing indicated. The locations of the correction pieces and closure assemblies
shall be shown on the pipe layout diagrams.
Backfill with CLSM: Where required, backfill with Controlled Low Strength Material
(CLSM) shall be the full depth of the pipe zone from 6 inches below to 6 inches above
the pipe as a minimum.
MATERIALS
Mortar: Materials for mortar shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C 205;
provided, that cement for mortar coating shall be Type II modified or Type V and mortar
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 10
lining shall be Type II modified or Type V. Cement in mortar lining and coating shall not
originate from kilns that burn metal-rich hazardous waste fuel, nor shall a fly ash or
pozzolan be used as a cement replacement. Admixtures shall contain no calcium
chloride.
Steel for Cylinder and Fittings: Pipe, specials, and fittings manufactured under AWWA
C200 shall satisfy the following requirements:
Minimum yield strength of steel is 42,000 psi.
Be manufactured by a continuous casting process.
Be fully killed.
Be fine grain practice.
Maximum carbon content of 0.25 percent.
Maximum sulfur content of 0.015 percent.
Minimum elongation of 22 percent in a 2-inch gauge length.
Be in accordance with one of the following, ASTM A1011, ASTM A283, ASTM A572,
or ASTM A1018.
Maximum carbon equivalent of 0.45, calculated as follows:

CE = C + (Mn+Si) + (Cr+Mo+V) + (Ni+Cu)
6 5 15
Pipe shall be manufactured as fabricated pipe per AWWA C 200 as modified herein.
ASTM pipe manufacturing standards referenced in AWWA C 200 shall not be used.
Pipe sections shall be fabricated by either of the following methods:
Pipe sections may be fabricated by spirally welded short cylindrical coils of steel,
joined circumferentially by complete penetration butt joint welds.
Pipe sections may be rolled or pressed from no more than three (3) sheets the full
length of the pipe and welded with no more than three (3) longitudinal seams.
Steel equal to or greater than 1/2-inch thick used in fabricating pipe shall be tested for
notch toughness using the Charpy V-Notch test in accordance with ASTM A370. Test
each heat of steel by taking one specimen from any two coils per heat number. The
steel shall withstand a minimum impact of 25 ft-lb at a temperature of 30 deg F.
Plate: Charpy tests shall be conducted on each plate as required in ASTM A 20.
Coils: Charpy tests shall be conducted on the first 500 tons of steel by testing each
coil as follows:
Tests shall include representative sampling of steel thicknesses required for the
Work.
Each coil shall be tested by taking coupons from the outer, middle, and inner
wrap of the coil. Middle coil coupons may be taken from the ends of full-length
pipes that are closest to the middle of the coil.
Coils that do not meet the above Charpy acceptance criteria shall not be used in
the production of the pipe.
External Pipeline Coating (for buried pipe): In accordance with Section 09 98 10 –
Pipeline Coatings and Linings.
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 11
DESIGN OF PIPE
General: The pipe shall be suitable to transmit potable water under the conditions
indicated on the Contract Drawings. The steel pipe shall have field welded joints as
indicated. The pipe shall be cement mortar lined per Section 09 98 10 (or epoxy lined as
noted in opening paragraph of this Section) as. Field lining will only be allowed where
specifically approved in advance by ENGINEER.
The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked according to
applicable requirements previously stated and, except as hereinafter modified, shall
conform to AWWA C200.
Pipe Dimensions: Pipe shall be of the diameter and minimum wall thickness indicated
on the Drawings.
Fitting Dimensions: Fittings shall be of the diameter and class to match adjacent piping.
Field Welded Joint Design: Field welded joints are not allowed on this project.
Spiral weld seams shall be tested by the visible penetrant method of ASTM E 165 or
magnetic particle inspection method of ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix VI, for a
minimum distance of 12-inches from each end of each joint after the spigot and bell are
formed. Defects shall be repaired at no additional cost to OWNER.
Shop-applied interior linings and exterior coatings shall be held back from the ends of
the pipe as indicated. Holdback areas shall be coated as indicated in Section 09 98 10 –
Pipeline Coatings and Linings.
Joint Shop Coating: Holdback areas for welded joints and butt straps shall be
thoroughly cleaned and given a shop coat of rust-inhibitive primer. The surface
preparation and primer shall be compatible with the intended finish coating as specified
in Section 09 98 10 - Pipeline Coatings and Linings and Section 09 90 00 Painting and
Finishes.
Shop Fit Test: Make certain that joints are correctly field assembled and that excessive
annular space between spigots and bells and that the pipe meets the requirements of
AWWA C 200. The pipe fabricator shall perform dimensional measurements for all pipe
joints to verify joints are within manufacturing tolerances prior to shipment. The pipe
ends shall be match marked after shop assembly.
The shop fit test shall join the pipe ends in the shop with proposed adjacent pipe
end.
Record the actual annular space with the data to include as a minimum:
Maximum/minimum space at any point.
Space at 90-degree intervals top, bottom, and at springline.
Restrained Joints
Located where indicated and where required to meet seismic requirements,
restrained joints shall be field-welded joints, either single, or double lap-weld, or butt-
weld, flanges, or butt-straps as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Designs shall
include stresses created by the greater of:
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 12
Temperature differential of 50 degrees F plus Poisson’s effect in combination
with hoop stress, or;
Thrust due to bulkheads, bends, reducers, and line valves resulting from working
pressure in combination with hoop stress.
Flanges
Flanges shall be in accordance with AWWA C 207 Class D for operating pressures
up to 175 psi on 4-inch through 12-inch diameter, and operating pressures to 150 psi
on diameters over 12-inches.
Flanges shall be AWWA C 207 Class E for operating pressures over 150 psi to 275
psi or shall be Class F for pressures to 300 psi (drilling matches ANSI B 16.5 Class
250).
Shop lining and coating shall be continuous to the end of the pipe or back of the
flange. Flanges shall be shop coated with a soluble rust preventive compound which
is NSF 61 certified if used on potable water pipelines.
Gaskets shall be full-face, 1/8-inch thick, cloth-inserted rubber, Garlock 3505,
Durlon 7910, or approved equal.
Bolts and Nuts for Flanges
Bolts for flanges shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B for Class B and D
flanges and nuts shall be ASTM A 563, Grade A heavy hex. Bolts for Class E and F
flanges shall be ASTM A 193, Grade B7 and nuts shall be ASTM A 194, Grade 2H
heavy hex.
SPECIALS AND FITTINGS
Design: Except as otherwise indicated, materials, fabrication and shop testing of
Specials and fittings shall conform to the requirements stated above for pipe and shall
conform to the dimensions of AWWA C 208. (Specials consisting of access manways,
outlets for air valves, blow-off valves, etc. are excluded from the criteria as follows and
collar plates, wrapper plates or crotch plates shall be required for reinforcing the outlet
connections in accordance with AWWA M-11 and AWWA C208 requirements.) The
minimum thickness of plate for pipe from which specials are to be fabricated shall be the
greatest of those determined by the following 3 criteria:
Working and Transient Pressure Design
T = PwD/2 T = PtD/2
Y/Sw Y/St
Where:

T = Steel cylinder thickness in inches
D = Outside diameter of steel cylinder in inches
Pw = Design working pressure in psi
Pt = Design transient pressure in psi
Y = Specified minimum yield point of steel in psi
Sw = Safety factor of 2.5 at design working pressure
St = Safety factor at design transient pressure; for elbows 1.875
and 2.0 for other specials

03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 13
Mainline Pipe Thickness: Plate thickness for specials shall not be less than for the
adjacent mainline pipe.
Thickness Based on Pipe Diameter

Nominal Pipe
Diameter, in
Pipe Manifolds
Piping Above Ground
Piping Structures
24 and under 3/16-in
25 to 48 1/4-in
over 48 5/16-in

Minimum plate thickness shall be the greater of the adjacent mainline pipe, the
thickness on the Drawings, the thickness calculated as indicated herein or as
shown on the table above indicating the minimum thickness based on pipe
diameter.
Refer to ASME B36.10M for dimensions of wall thickness for standard weight
pipe and nominal pipe size.
Specials installed on saddle supports shall be designed to limit the longitudinal bending
stress to a maximum of 10,000 psi. Design shall be in accordance with the provisions of
Chapter 7 of AWWA Manual M 11.
Reinforcement for wyes, tees, outlets, and nozzles shall be designed in accordance with
AWWA Manual M 11. Reinforcement shall be designed for the design pressure
indicated and shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Specials and fittings shall be
equal in pressure design strength and shall have the same lining and coating as the
adjoining pipe. Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum radius of elbows shall be 2.5
times the pipe diameter and the maximum miter angle on each section of the elbow shall
not exceed 11-1/4 degrees.
Outlets, Tees, Wyes, and Crosses
Outlets 12-inches and smaller may be fabricated from Schedule 30 or heavier steel
pipe in the standard outside diameters. Minimum plate thickness for reinforcements
shall be 10-gauge.
The design of outlet reinforcement shall be in accordance with the procedures given
in Chapter 13 of AWWA Manual M 11 and the design pressures and factors of safety
above.
In lieu of saddle or wrapper reinforcement as provided by the design procedure in
Manual M 11, pipe or specials with outlets may be fabricated entirely of steel plate
having a thickness equal to the sum of the pipe wall plus the required reinforcement.
Where Manual M 11 requires the design procedure for crotch plate reinforcement,
such reinforcement shall be provided.
Outlets shall be fabricated so that there is always at least a 12-inch distance
between the outer edge of the reinforcing plate and any field welded joints. For
outlets without reinforcing plates, outlets shall penetrate the steel cylinders so that
there is at least a 12-inch clearance between the outlet and any field-welded joints.
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 14
Tees, wyes, crosses, elbows, and manifolds shall be fabricated so that the outlet
clearances and reinforcing plates from any weld joints are a minimum of 5 times
cylinder thickness or 2-inches, whichever is greater. Longitudinal weld joints in
adjacent cylinder sections shall be oriented so that there is a minimum offset of 5
times cylinder thickness or 2-inches, whichever is greater.
Steel Welding Fittings: Steel welding fittings shall conform to ASTM A 234.
Ends for Grooved Mechanical-Type Couplings: Except as otherwise indicated, where
mechanical-type couplings are indicated, the ends of pipe shall be banded with Type C
collared ends using double fillet welds. The collared ends shall be grooved for the fitting.
Where pipe 12-inches and smaller is furnished in standard schedule thickness and
where the wall thickness after grooving equals or exceeds the coupling manufacturer's
minimum wall thickness, the pipe ends may be grooved.
CEMENT-MORTAR LINING
Cement-Mortar Lining for Shop Application: Unless indicated otherwise, interior
surfaces of pipe, specials, and fittings shall be cleaned and lined in the shop with cement
mortar lining applied centrifugally in conformity with AWWA C 205. Lining for all mitered
fittings produced by cutting, rolling and re-welding such as elbows from 5 to 90 degrees
up to 72-inches in diameter shall be centrifugally applied in the shop. Fabricated tees,
manifolds or elbows greater than 72-inches or tees with crotch plates where heat
treating or normalization is required may be lined in accordance with AWWA C205.
During the lining operation and thereafter, the pipe, specials, and fittings shall be
maintained in a round condition by suitable bracing or strutting. The lining machines
shall be of a type that has been used successfully for similar work. Every precaution
shall be taken to prevent damage to the lining. If lining is damaged or found defective at
the Site, the damaged or unsatisfactory portions shall be replaced with lining conforming
to these Specifications at no additional cost to OWNER.
The minimum lining thickness and tolerance shall be in accordance with Section 09 98
10 – Pipeline Coatings and Linings and AWWA C 205.
Defective linings shall be removed from the pipe wall and shall be replaced to the full
thickness required. Defective linings shall be cut back to a square shoulder in order to
avoid feather edged joints. Temperature and shrinkage cracks in the mortar less than
1/16-inch wide need not be repaired. Pipe specials or fittings with cracks wider than
1/16-inch shall be removed and patched.
The progress of the application of mortar lining shall be regulated in order that
handwork, including the repair of defective areas, is cured in accordance with the
provisions of AWWA C205. Cement mortar for patching shall be the same materials as
the mortar for machine lining, except that a finer grading of sand and mortar richer in
cement shall be used when field inspection indicates that such mix will improve the
finished lining of the pipe.
Specials and fittings that cannot be mechanically lined and coated shall be lined and
coated by hand-application using the same materials as used for the pipe and in
accordance with the applicable AWWA or ASTM standards and this Section. Coating
and lining applied in this manner shall provide protection equal to that for the pipe.
Fittings may be fabricated from pipe that has been mechanically lined and/or coated.
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 15
Areas of lining and coating that have been damaged by such fabrication shall be
repaired by hand-application.
Protection of Pipe Lining/Interior: All pipe, specials, and fittings with plant-applied
cement-mortar linings, shall be supplied with a 12-mil polyethylene sheet or other
suitable bulkhead on the ends of the pipe and on each opening to prevent drying out of
the lining. Bulkheads shall be substantial enough to remain intact during shipping and
storage until the pipe is installed.
EXTERIOR COATING OF PIPE
Exterior Coating of Exposed Piping: The exterior surfaces of pipe, specials, and fittings
that will be exposed to the atmosphere inside structures or above ground shall be
thoroughly cleaned and then given a shop coat of primer compatible with the finish
coating required by Section 09 98 10 - Pipeline Coatings and Linings.
Exterior Coating of Buried Piping: Pipe for buried service, including bumped heads,
shall be coated per Section 09 98 10 – Pipeline Coatings and Linings.
PIPE APPURTENANCES
Pipe appurtenances shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications
and Contract Drawings. Access manholes with covers shall be as indicated, installed
during fabrication, not in the field. Threaded outlets shall be forged steel suitable for
3000 psi service.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Handling and Storage: Pipe, specials, and fittings shall be carefully handled and
protected against damage to lining and coating/interior and exterior surfaces, and impact
shocks and free fall. Pipe, specials, and fittings shall not be placed directly on rough
ground but shall be supported in a manner that will protect the pipe against injury
whenever stored at the Site or elsewhere. Pipe, specials, and fittings shall be handled
and stored at the Site in accordance with the requirements stated in Part 2, above. No
pipe shall be installed when the lining or coating/interior or exterior surfaces show cracks
that may be harmful as determined by ENGINEER. Such damaged lining and
coating/interior and exterior surfaces shall be repaired or a new undamaged pipe,
special, or fitting shall be provided at no additional cost to OWNER.
Pipe damaged prior to Substantial Completion shall be repaired or replaced at no
additional cost to OWNER.
Repair of Defects: Patching inserts, overlays, or pounding out defects shall not be
permitted. Repair of notches or laminations on second ends shall not be permitted.
Deformation of pipe ends through mechanical means or other methods to achieve pipe
fit up of defective pipe shall not be permitted. Damaged ends shall be removed to a
point of uniform, non-damaged cylinder end and properly prepared. Distorted or
flattened lengths shall be rejected. Buckled sections shall be removed and replaced with
a full pipe cylinder. CONTRACTOR shall submit a written repair plan and receive
favorable review from OWNER prior to the start of any repair work.
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 16
CONTRACTOR shall inspect each pipe, special, and fitting for damage. CONTRACTOR
shall remove or smooth out any burrs, gouges, weld splatter, or other small defects prior
to laying the pipe, special, or fitting.
Before placement of pipe, specials, or fittings in the trench, each shall be thoroughly
cleaned of any foreign substance that may have collected thereon and shall be kept
clean thereafter. For this purpose, the openings of pipes, specials, and fittings in the
trench shall be closed during any interruption to the project.
Pipe, specials, and fittings backfilled with CLSM shall be laid directly on moist sandbags
or other suitable supports in preparation for the CLSM pipe zone material. Sandbags
shall be placed to provide at least 6-inches of CLSM below the bottom of the pipe.
Sandbags shall be spaced at a maximum interval of 8-feet and one set shall be placed
within 3-feet on both sides of each joint. CONTRACTOR shall provide additional
sandbags as needed to support the pipe on line and grade. Excavation outside the
normal trench section shall be made at field joints as needed to permit adequate access
to the joints for field connection operations and for application of coating on field joints.
Pipe Cleanup: As pipe laying progresses, CONTRACTOR shall keep the pipe interior
free of debris. CONTRACTOR shall completely clean the interior of the pipe of sand,
dirt, mortar splatter, and any other debris following completion of pipe laying, pointing of
joints, and any necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed
pipeline. When pipe laying is not in progress and at the end of each day,
CONTRACTOR shall cover the exposed ends of all pipes to prevent animals, dust, dirt
and other debris from entering the pipe.
FIELD WELDED JOINTS
Field welded joints are not allowed on this project.
BURIED FIELD JOINT COATING AND LINING
Buried field joint coating and lining is per Section 09 98 10..
INSTALLATION OF PIPE APPURTENANCES
Protection of Appurtenances: Where the joining pipe is tape-coated, buried
appurtenances shall be coated with cold-applied tape in accordance with Section 09 98
10 – Pipeline Coatings and Linings.
Installation of Valves: Valves shall be handled in a manner to prevent any injury or
damage to the valve or any part of it. Joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared
prior to installation. CONTRACTOR shall adjust stem packing and operate each valve
prior to installation to verify proper operation.
Valves shall be installed so that the valve stems are plumb and in the location indicated.
Buried valves and flanges shall be coated and protected in accordance with Section 09
98 10 - Pipeline Coatings and Linings.
Installation of Flanged Joints: Before the joint is assembled, the flange faces shall be
thoroughly cleaned of foreign material with a power wire brush. The gasket shall be
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 17
centered and the connecting flanges drawn up watertight without unnecessarily stressing
the flanges. Bolts shall be tightened in a progressive diametrically opposite sequence
and torqued with a suitable calibrated torque wrench. Clamping torque shall be applied
to the nuts only. Full face reinforced rubber gaskets shall be applied to the inside face of
blind flanges with adhesive.
Insulated Joints: Insulated joints and appurtenant features shall be provided as
required. CONTRACTOR shall exercise special care when installing these joints to
prevent electrical conductivity across the joint. After the insulated joint is completed, an
electrical resistance test shall be performed by CONTRACTOR. If the resistance test
indicates a short circuit, CONTRACTOR shall remove the insulating units to inspect for
damage, replace all damaged portions, and reassemble the insulating joint. The
insulated joint shall then be retested to assure proper insulation.
Flexible Coupled Joints: When installing flexible couplings, care shall be taken that the
connecting pipe ends, couplings, and gaskets are clean and free of dirt and foreign
matter with special attention given to the contact surfaces of the pipe, gaskets, and
couplings. The couplings shall be assembled and installed in conformity with the
recommendation and instruction of the coupling manufacturer.
Wrenches used in bolting couplings shall be of a type and size recommended by the
coupling manufacturer. Coupling bolts shall be tightened so as to secure a uniform
annular space between the follower rings and the body of the pipe. Bolts shall be
tightened approximately the same amount. Diametrically opposite bolts shall be
tightened progressively and evenly. Final tightening shall be done with a suitable
calibrated torque wrench set for the torque recommended by the coupling manufacturer.
Clamping torque shall be applied to the nut only.
PRESSURE TESTING
Pressure testing and disposal of test water shall be in accordance with Section 33 13 00
– Pipeline Testing and Disinfection.

- END OF SECTION –
03/2023 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS
254.07.100 PAGE 33 92 10- 18
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

03/2023 STEEL PROCESS PIPING
254.07.100 40 05 13.13 - 1
SECTION 40 05 13.13
STEEL PROCESS PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all steel process piping and appurtenances as
shown and specified, and as required for a complete and workable piping system.
This Section includes schedule 40 and 80 steel process pipe in accordance with ASTM
A53 and ASTM A106 with welded, flanged, grooved, or threaded joints intended for use
within pump station. Fabricated steel pipe and fittings may be used in pump station
but shall be noted and submitted in accordance with AWWA C200 – Steel Water
Pipe, 6-inch and Larger, is included in Section 33 92 10 – Steel Pipe, Specials, and
Fittings (AWWA C200, modified).
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 31 23 15 Excavation and Backfill for Pipelines
Section 33 92 10 Steel Pipe, Specials, and Fittings (AWWA C200, modified)
Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances
Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the
Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)
ASME B 16.1 Gray Iron Flanges and Fittings, Classes 25, 125, and 250
ASME B 16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300
ASME B 16.4 Gray Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250
ASME B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B 16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Butt Welded Fittings
ASME B 16.11 Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
ASME B 16.12 Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings
ASME B 31.1 Power Piping
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A 106 Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service
AMERICA WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

03/2023 STEEL PROCESS PIPING
254.07.100 40 05 13.13 - 2
AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C 207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Services
AWWA C 606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints
AWWA C 651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Submit manufacturer's affidavit certifying product was manufactured, tested and supplied
in accordance with applicable references in this section together with a report of the test
results and the date each test was completed.
Submit shop drawings of pipe, fittings, supports and appurtenances showing compliance
with this Section including necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints and material lists.
Submit gasket material data including manufacturer’s catalog indicating that the
proposed product is suitable for each fluid of service application.
Submit welders’ qualifications in accordance with AWS D1.1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
STEEL PIPE
Fabricate steel pipe in accordance with the Plans and with ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106,
Grade B. When Drawings don’t specify a pipe wall thickness, use Standard Weight pipe,
but in no case shall pipe be under 0.2 inch wall thickness.
Coat steel (buried and exposed) per Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating.
Cement mortar line buried steel pipe per AWWA C205.
NSF 61 Epoxy line piping in wellhouse per Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating.
Galvanized pipe shall galvanized inside and out.
Steel pipe and coatings shall be made by an ISO 9000 certified pipe fabricator, Utility
Coatings, or approved equal.
PIPE JOINTS
Black steel pipe joints shall be screwed ends with NPT threads, welded, or flanged.
Screwed joints shall be up with Teflon tape. Welded joints may have butt-weld or socket
weld fittings or flanges. Where indicated on the Contract Drawings, provide grooved
ends for rigid or flexible mechanical couplings or plain ends for sleeve-type couplings.

03/2023 STEEL PROCESS PIPING
254.07.100 40 05 13.13 - 3
Galvanized steel pipe shall have screwed ends with NPT threads. Screwed joints shall
be up with Teflon tape. Where indicated on the Contract Drawings, provide grooved
ends for rigid or flexible mechanical couplings or plain ends for sleeve-type couplings.
Flanged joints shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 or AWWA C207 flanges for the
pressure class required for the project conditions or as indicated on the Contract
Drawings. CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing the appropriate flanges required
to connect steel pipe to equipment and other appurtenances. CONTRACTOR shall
replace flanges that do not match the mating equipment or appurtenance at no
additional cost to OWNER. Gaskets shall be ANSI 150 lb. full face, 1/8-inch thick
Neoprene for water or wastewater service. Gasket material for chemicals shall be
suitable for the chemical service
Bolts shall comply with ASTM AA193, with ASME 18.2.1, and have ASME B1.1, Class
2A threads with nuts having Class 2A fit and hex heavy dimensions per ASME 18.2.2.
Exposed Flanges: Bolts shall be A193, Grade B7 (high strength steel). Nuts shall be
A194, Grade 2H. Both shall be PTFE coated.
Buried Flanges: Bolts shall be A193, Grade B8M (316 SS). Nuts shall be Grade
A194, Grade 8B (made from 304 SS bars).
FITTINGS
Threaded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.3 or ASME B16.4. Threaded
fittings for gravity pipe systems shall be in accordance with ASME B 16.12.
Welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B 16.11 or ASME B 16.9. Welded
fittings may be fabricated per AWWA C208 requirements.
Flanged fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B 16.1 or ASME B 16.5.
Grooved fittings shall conform to AWWA C 606.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Above ground steel process piping shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner,
properly aligned, and cut from measurements taken at the Site to avoid interferences
with structural members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed pipe
shall afford maximum headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary, piping
shall be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate
to low points.
Piping shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial hangers or supports in
accordance with Section 05 45 00 – Mechanical Metal Supports. Where necessary to
avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the pipe shall be anchored or
harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for pipe expansion due to
temperature changes.

03/2023 STEEL PROCESS PIPING
254.07.100 40 05 13.13 - 4
Unless otherwise indicated, connections to fixtures, groups of fixtures, and equipment
shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve has flanged ends.
Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and other devices requiring
occasional removal or disconnection. Low points shall be provided with a drain valve.
PIPE PREPARATION
Prior to installation, each pipe length shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any
debris or dust, and be straightened, if not true. Ends of threaded pipes shall be reamed
and filed smooth. Pipe fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly
PIPE JOINTS
Pipe threads shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies or molded. Joints shall be
made with Teflon tape.
Welded joints shall conform to the requirements of this Section and the
recommendations of ASME B 31.1. Welding shall be done by skilled and qualified
welders. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1. Machines and
electrodes similar to those used in the work shall be used in qualification tests.
Grooved couplings shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall
conform to AWWA C 606.
All joints shall be visually drip tight.
INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PIPELINE
Completed steel process piping systems shall be inspected for proper supports,
anchorage, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coatings. Any damage shall be repaired by
CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary blow-off valves and fittings as required to flush
and disinfect new pipelines. Temporary blow-off valves and fittings shall be removed
prior to placing pipeline into service.
Source of Water. CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary
water supplies for disinfection and/or pressure testing of the pipeline.
Testing Procedure
Prior to enclosure or burying, piping systems shall be pressure tested as required on
the Drawings, for a period of not less than one hour, without exceeding the
tolerances listed on the Drawings. Where no pressures are indicated, the pipes shall
be subject to 1-1/2 times the maximum working pressure. CONTRACTOR shall
furnish test equipment, labor, materials, and devices
Leakage shall be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, or other positive and
accurate method. Fixtures, devices, or other accessories that would be damaged if
subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines
shall be plugged or capped as appropriate during the testing procedures.
Leaks shall be repaired, and the piping shall be re-tested until no leaks are found.

03/2023 STEEL PROCESS PIPING
254.07.100 40 05 13.13 - 5
ENGINEER shall be notified at least 48 hours before the pipeline is to be tested so
that ENGINEER may be present during the test.
DISINFECTING
Disinfection shall be in accordance AWWA C 651 and the requirements of Section 33 13
00 – Pipeline Testing and Disinfection.

- END OF SECTION –

01/2023 STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPING
360.39.100 40 05 13.19 - 1
SECTION 40 05 13.19
STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all stainless steel process piping and
appurtenances as shown and specified, and as required for a complete and workable
piping system.
RELATED WORK
Related Work specified in other sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the
Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)
ASME B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B 16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Butt Welded Fittings
ASME B 16.11 Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
ASME B 31.1 Power Piping
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 312 Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavy Cold
Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes
ASTM A 403 Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel
Piping and Fittings
ASTM A 409 Standard Specification for Welded Large Diameter Austenitic
Steel Pipe for Corrosive or High-Temperature Service
ASTM A 778 Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic
Stainless Steel Tubular Products
AMERICA WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C 606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints
AWWA C 651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains

01/2023 STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPING
360.39.100 40 05 13.19 - 2
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Submit manufacturer's affidavit certifying product was manufactured, tested and supplied
in accordance with applicable references in this section together with a report of the test
results and the date each test was completed.
Submit shop drawings of pipe, fittings, supports and appurtenances showing compliance
with this Section including necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints and material lists.
Submit gasket material data including manufacturer’s catalog indicating that the
proposed product is suitable for each fluid of service application.
Submit welders’ qualifications in accordance with AWS D1.1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE
Stainless steel process pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM A 312, Type 304
seamless, Schedule 40S or 80S as shown on the Drawings, with screwed fittings for
sizes up to and including 3-inches and welded fittings for sizes 3-inches and larger.
Flange fittings may be used for pipe diameters 2-inches and larger.
PIPE JOINTS
Stainless steel pipe 3-inches and smaller shall have screwed ends with NPT threads.
Screwed joints shall be up with Teflon tape. Stainless steel pipe 3-inches and larger
shall have welded joints or flanges. Flanges shall have stainless steel nuts and bolts the
same material type as the pipe. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide grooved
ends for rigid or flexible mechanical couplings. Pipe grooving is only allowed for
Schedule 40S or 80S pipe. For plain end stainless steel pipe use sleeve-type couplings
where noted on the Contract Drawings.
Flanged joints shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 for the pressure class required
for the project conditions or as indicated on the Drawings. CONTRACTOR is
responsible for providing the appropriate flanges required to connect stainless steel
process pipe to equipment and other appurtenances. CONTRACTOR shall replace
flanges that do not match the mating equipment or appurtenance at no additional cost to
OWNER. Gaskets shall be ANSI 150 lb. full face, 1/8-inch thick Neoprene for water or
wastewater service. Gasket material for chemicals shall be suitable for the chemical
service.
FITTINGS
Threaded fittings shall be forged stainless steel fittings in accordance with ASME B
16.11.
Socket welded fittings shall be forged stainless steel fittings in accordance with ASME B
16.11.
01/2023 STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPING
360.39.100 40 05 13.19 - 3
Butt-welded fittings shall be wrought stainless steel fittings in accordance with ASTM A
403 and ASME B 16.9.
Flanged fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B 16.5.
Grooved fittings shall be wrought stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 403 and ASME
B 16.9 and to AWWA C 606. Gasket material shall be suitable for the intended service.
Fittings shall be in accordance with the pressure class shown on the Drawings or have
the same pressure rating as the pipe.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Stainless steel process piping shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner,
properly aligned, and cut from measurements taken at the Site to avoid interferences
with structural members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed pipe
shall afford maximum headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary, piping
shall be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate
to low points.
Piping shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial hangers or supports in
accordance with Section 05 45 00 – Mechanical Metal Supports. Where necessary to
avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the pipe shall be anchored or
harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for pipe expansion due to
temperature changes.
Unless otherwise indicated, connections to fixtures, groups of fixtures, and equipment
shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve has flanged ends.
Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and other devices requiring
occasional removal or disconnection. Low points shall be provided with a drain valve.
PIPE PREPARATION
Prior to installation, each pipe length shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any
debris or dust, and be straightened, if not true. Ends of threaded pipes shall be reamed
and filed smooth. Pipe fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly
PIPE JOINTS
Pipe threads shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies or molded. Joints shall be
made with Teflon tape.
Welded joints shall conform to the requirements of this Section and the
recommendations of ASME B 31.1. Welding shall be done by skilled and qualified
welders. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1. Machines and
electrodes similar to those used in the work shall be used in qualification tests. Field
welds shall be kept to a minimum by using couplings or shop fabrication as much as
possible. Weld residue, oxide, and heat stain shall be removed shall be removed by
stainless steel wire brushes followed by cleaning with an agent, followed by complete
removal of the agent. Cleaning agent shall be BlueOne Pickling Paste 130 by Avesta
01/2023 STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPING
360.39.100 40 05 13.19 - 4
Finishing Chemicals, STAR Gel by Krystal Surface Solution, or approved equal.
Passivation must following the cleaning process using FinishOne Passivator 630 by
Avesta Finishing Chemicals, STAR Pass 1 by Krystal Surface Solution, or approved
equal. Following the manufacturer’s instruction for the cleaning/pickling and passivation
process.
Grooved couplings shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall
conform to AWWA C 606.
INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PIPELINE
Completed stainless steel process piping systems shall be inspected for proper
supports, anchorage, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coatings. Any damage shall be
repaired by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary blow-off valves and fittings as required to flush
and disinfect new pipelines. Temporary blow-off valves and fittings shall be removed
prior to placing pipeline into service.
Source of Water
CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility to obtain the necessary water
supplies for disinfection and/or pressure testing of the pipeline.
Testing Procedure
Prior to enclosure or burying, piping systems shall be pressure tested as required on
the Drawings, for a period of not less than one hour, without exceeding the
tolerances listed on the Drawings. Where no pressures are indicated, the pipes shall
be subject to 1-1/2 times the maximum working pressure. CONTRACTOR shall
furnish test equipment, labor, materials, and devices

Leakage shall be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, or other positive and
accurate method. Fixtures, devices, or other accessories that would be damaged if
subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines
shall be plugged or capped as appropriate during the testing procedures.

Leaks shall be repaired, and the piping shall be re-tested until no leaks are found.

ENGINEER shall be notified at least 48 hours before the pipeline is to be tested so
that ENGINEER may be present during the test.

DISINFECTING
Disinfection shall be in accordance AWWA C 651 and the requirements of Section 33 13
00 – Pipeline Testing and Disinfection.

- END OF SECTION –

PROCESS CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM – GENERAL 40 10 00 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 40 10 00 - PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM - GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. General requirements applicable to all process control work.
2. The requirements of this Section apply to all components of the Software Systems
unless indicated otherwise.
3. General requirements for programming submittals.
B. Related sections:
1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all
Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its
Subcontractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project:
a. Items involving electrical, control, and instrumentation construction may be
shown on Drawings or referred to in Specifications that do not apply specifically
to electrical, control and instrumentation systems.
C. The Programming Contractor shall program all PLC’s and the SCADA system. The
Programming Contractor shall provide all software as specified herein for programming
the system. The Programming Contractor and the electrical contractor shall be
responsible to test each device and loop to verify proper function of all equipment on
the project, whether provided by the contractor or by the owner. They shall then work
with the owner to test and commission the entire system as described herein. The
programming contractor shall be present to test the I/O for each equipment subsystem.
The I/O to the PLC systems shall be tested at this time. The programming contractor
shall provide and install a simple testing routine in each PLC in order to verify all I/O is
functioning properly. All I/O shall be tested from its respective field device to the
software level in the PLC. If final PLC programming is complete at the time of testing,
the final software programming shall be used to test each device
D. The Programming Contractor shall design the operator interface graphics, human
machine interface (HMI) graphics, PLC logic, and control systems hardware as
specified herein.
E. Contract Documents:
1. General:
a. Contract documents consist of drawings, specifications, and other documents
issued by the ENGINEER. The Drawings and Specifications are
complementary and are to be used together in order to fully describe the Work,
and requirements shown, written or reasonably inferred there from on one is
considered as written, shown or implied in all. In the event work is called for in
more than one place and there are conflicting requirements, the right shall be
reserved to require the installation of the larger or the more expensive.
b. Schematic Diagrams:
1) All controls are shown de-energized.
a) Schematic diagrams show control function only. Incorporate other
necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the system.
PROCESS CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM – GENERAL 40 10 00 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
b) Control schematics are to be used as a guide in conjunction with the
descriptive operating sequences found in the Drawings or
Specifications. Combine all information and furnish a coordinated and
fully functional control system program.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Code Compliance:
1. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. The latest
edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced publications in
effect at the time of Bid governs.
2. The following codes and standards are hereby incorporated into these
Specifications:
a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1) NFPA 70 - National Electric Code (NEC).
2) NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
3) NFPA 496 - Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment,
where applicable.
4) NFPA 820 - Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and
Collection Facilities.
b. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1) UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment.
c. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1) ANSI B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
d. American Petroleum Institute (API):
1) API RP551 - Process Measurement Instrumentation.
2) API RP552 - Transmission Systems.
3) API RP553 - Refinery Control Valves.
4) API RP554 - Process Instrumentation and Control.
5) API RP555 - Process Analyzers.
6) API RP556 - Fired Heaters & Steam Generators.
7) API RP557 - Guide to Advanced Control Systems.
e. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1) ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service.
f. Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA):
1) ISA-5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification.
2) ISA-5.2 - Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations.
3) ISA-5.3 - Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display
Instrumentation, Logic, and Computer Systems.
4) ISA-5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams.
5) ISA-5.5 - Graphic Symbols for Process Displays.
6) ANSI/ISA-7.00.01 - Quality Standard for Instrument Air.
7) ISA-RP - 12.4 - Pressurized Enclosures.
8) ANSI/ISA-18.1 - Annunciator Sequences and Specifications.
9) ISA-20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control
Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves.
10)ISA-TR20.00.01 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and
Control Instruments Part 1: General Considerations Updated with 27 New
Specification Forms in 2004-2005.
PROCESS CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM – GENERAL 40 10 00 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
11)ANSI/ISA-50.00.01 - Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electric Industrial
Process Instruments.
12)ISA-51.1 - Process Instrumentation Terminology.
13)ISA-RP60.3 - Human Engineering for Control Centers.
14)ISA-71.01 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and
Control Systems: Temperature and Humidity.
15)ISA-71.02 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and
Control Systems: Power.
16)ISA-71.03 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and
Control Systems: Mechanical Influences.
17)ISA-71.04 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and
Control Systems: Airborne Contaminants.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set forth
in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society.
4. National Fire Protection Association.
5. National Electrical Testing Association.
B. Specific Definitions:
1. Control Circuit: Any circuit operating at 120 volts AC or DC or less, whose principal
purpose is the conveyance of information (including performing logic) and not the
conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device.
2. Panel: An instrument support system that may be either a flat surface, a partial
enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in
process control systems. Unless otherwise specified or clearly indicated by the
context, the term “panel” in these Contract Documents is interpreted as a general
term, which includes flat surfaces, enclosures, cabinets and consoles.
3. Power Circuit: Any circuit operating at 90 volts (AC or DC) or more, whose principal
purpose is the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered
device.
4. Signal Circuit: Any circuit operating at less than 50 volts AC or DC, which conveys
analog information or digital communications information.
5. Digital Bus: A communication network, such as Profibus, Foundation Fieldbus, or
DeviceNet, allowing instruments and devices to transmit data, control functions and
diagnostic information.
6. 2-Wire Transmitter (Loop Powered): A transmitter that derives its operating power
supply from the signal transmission circuit and requires no separate power supply
connections. As used in this Specification, two-wire transmitter refers to a
transmitter that provides 4 to 20 mA current regulation of a signal in a series circuit
with an external 24 VDC driving potential.
7. Field Bus Communications signal or both.
8. Powered Transmitters: A transmitter that requires a separate power source (120
VAC, 240 VAC, etc.) in order for the transmitter to develop its signal. As used in
this Specification, the produced signal may either be a 4 to 20 mA current signal, a
Digital Bus communications signal or both.
PROCESS CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM – GENERAL 40 10 00 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
9. Modifications: Changing, extending, interfacing to, removing or altering an existing
circuit.
C. Acronym Definitions:
1. ES: Enterprise System: Computer based communications or data sharing
system utilized for non-process control functions such as E-mail, sharing files,
creating documents, etc.
2. FAT: Factory Acceptance Test.
3. HOA: Hand-Off-Auto control function that is totally PLC based. In the Hand
mode of control equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed
through operator direction under the control of the PLC software. In the Auto mode
of control equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed through a
control algorithm within the PLC software. In the Off mode the equipment is
prohibited from responding from the PLC control.
4. HMI: Human Machine Interface: PLC based operator interface device
consisting of an alphanumeric display and operator input devices. The HMI is
typically a flat panel type of display with either a touch screen or tactile button
interface.
5. HVAC Heating, Ventilation, & Air Conditioning.
6. ICSC: Instrumentation and Control System Contractor: Subcontractor who
specializes in the design, construction, fabrication, software development,
installation, testing, and commissioning of industrial instrumentation and control
systems.
7. IJB: Instrument Junction boxes. A panel designed with cord sets to easily
remove, replace or relocate instrument signals.
8. I/O: Input / Output.
9. LCP: Local Control Panel: Operator interface panel that may contain an HMI,
pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, control relays, etc. and does
not contain a PLC or RIO.
10. LAN: Local Area Network: A control or communications network that is limited
to the physical boundaries of the facility.
11. LOR: Local-Off-Remote control function. In the Remote mode equipment is
started or stopped, valves are opened or closed through the PLC based upon the
selection of the HOA. In Local control, equipment is started or stopped, valves are
opened or closed based upon hardwired control circuits completely independent of
the PLC with minimum interlocks and permissive conditions. In the Off mode, the
equipment is prohibited from responding to any control commands.
12. OIT: Operator Interface Terminal. PC based interface device used for operator
interface with the SCADA system.
13. P&ID: Process and Instrumentation Diagram.
14. PC: Personal Computer.
15. PCIS: Process Control and Instrumentation System, includes the entire
instrumentation system, the entire control system, and all of the work specified in
Division 17 and depicted on the Instrumentation Drawings.
16. PCM: Process Control Module: An enclosure containing any of the following
devices: PLC, RIO.
17. PJB: Power Junction Box: An enclosure with terminal blocks that distribute
power to multiple instruments.
18. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller.
19. RIO: Remote I/O device for the PLC consisting of remote I/O racks, or remote
I/O blocks.
PROCESS CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM – GENERAL 40 10 00 - 5
01/2023
254.07.100
20. RTU: Remote Telemetry Unit: A controller typically consisting of a PLC, and a
means for remote communications. The remote communications devices typically
are radios, modems, etc.
21. SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition system consists of the
computer-based software system that includes the operator interface, data storage,
data retrieval, archiving, alarming, historian, reports, trending, and other higher
level control system software.
22. UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply.
23. VCP: Vendor Control Panel: Control panels that are furnished with particular
equipment by a vendor other than the ICSC. These panels may contain PLCs, RIO,
OIT, HMI, etc.
24. WAN: Wide Area Network: A control or communications network that extends
beyond the physical boundaries of the facility.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements:
1. The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and
completing the general requirements for programming the control system described
in the Contract Drawings and Specifications and reasonably inferable there from
including but not limited to:
a. Procure all software.
b. With the electrical contractor, perform post programming tests on panels.
c. With the electrical contractor, oversee, document, and certify system pre-
commissioning.
d. With the electrical contractor, conduct the Performance Tests.
e. Prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
f. Conduct training classes.
g. Develop all requisite loop descriptions, functional narrative and instructions and
record drawings associated with the programs provided under other Divisions of
these Specifications.
2. It is the intent of these Specifications that the programmed system be complete and
operable.
3. Furnish detailed, complete, and thorough operations and maintenance
documentation, including, but not limited to: Operations Manuals, Maintenance
Manuals, Training Manuals, As-Built Software Documentation, final as installed
software configurations, and software disks including installed program disk.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Furnish Submittals that are fully developed for a given section of the work and fully
indexed with a tabbed divider for every element and component.
2. Sequentially number the pages within the tabbed sections. Submittals and
Operation and Maintenance manuals that are not fully indexed and tabbed with
sequentially numbered pages, or are otherwise unacceptable, will be returned
without review.
3. Edit all Submittals and Operation and Maintenance Manuals so that the submittal
specifically applies to only the equipment furnished. Neatly cross out all extraneous
text, options, models, etc. that do not apply to the equipment being furnished, so
that the information remaining is only applicable to the equipment being furnished.
PROCESS CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM – GENERAL 40 10 00 - 6
01/2023
254.07.100
4. Submittal Requirements:
a. Submit copies of shop drawings, and product data, in accordance with the
requirements of this Section:
1) Show information on software to be supplied, SCADA screens, reports,
menus, operation, etc.
5. Exceptions to Specifications and Drawings:
a. Include a list of proposed exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings along
with a detailed explanation of each.
b. Any exceptions to the Specification and Drawings must be noted and the
reason for the exception explained.
c. If there is insufficient explanation for the deviation, the submittal will be returned
requiring Revision and Re-submittal.
d. Acceptance of any exception is at the sole discretion of the ENGINEER.
Furnish all items (materials, features, functions, performance, etc.) that are not
listed as exceptions strictly in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.
e. Replace all items that do not strictly meet the requirements of the
Specifications, which were not previously accepted as exceptions, even if the
Submittals contained information indicating the failure to meet the
requirements.
6. Submittal Organization:
a. First page:
1) Specification Section reference.
2) Name and telephone number of individual who reviewed submittal before
delivery to ENGINEER.
3) Name and telephone number of individual who is primarily responsible for
the development of the submittal.
4) Place for CONTRACTOR's review stamp and comments.
b. Next pages:
1) Provide confirmation of Specification compliance in a tabular form that
individually lists each Specification section, paragraph, and sub-paragraphs
and unequivocally states compliance with said requirement or takes
exception to the requirement and lists the reason for said exception and
offers alternative means for compliance.
2) Include a response in writing to each of the ENGINEER’s comments or
questions for submittal packages which are re-submitted:
c. In the order that the comments or questions were presented throughout the
submittal.
d. Referenced by index section and page number on which the comment
appeared.
e. Acceptable responses to ENGINEER’s comments are either:
f. ENGINEER’s comment or change is accepted and appropriate changes are
made.
g. Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is not made.
h. Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or change
requested by ENGINEER.
i. Any re-submittal, which does not contain responses to the ENGINEER’s
previous comments, shall be returned for revision and re-submittal.
PROCESS CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM – GENERAL 40 10 00 - 7
01/2023
254.07.100
j. No further review by the ENGINEER will be performed until a response for
previous comments has been received.
k. Remaining pages:
1) Actual Submittal data:
a) Organize Submittals in exactly the same order as the items are
referenced, listed, and/or organized in the Specification section.
b) For Submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas under
the same Specification section, the Submittal for the individual devices
must list the area where the device is intended to be used.
l. Specific Submittal requirements:
1) Furnish the submittals required by each Section or Division 17:
a) Product Data.
b) Shop Drawings.
m. Furnish submittals in the following general order, each in a separate bound set:
1) Product Data.
2) After approval of the Product Data, submit the Project Shop Drawing
submittals
3) Testing, Calibration and Start-up procedures.
4) Operation and Maintenance Data.
5) Training Submittals.
6) Record Documents.
B. Product Data:
1. General:
a. Submitted for non-custom manufactured material listed in this and other
sections and shown on shop drawings.
b. Furnish sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed material
or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these
Specifications.
c. Include:
1) Catalog cuts.
2) Bulletins.
3) Brochures.
4) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents.
5) Identify on the data sheets the project name, applicable specification
section, and paragraph.
6) Identify model number and options for the actual equipment being
furnished.
d. Neatly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not intended to be
supplied.
2. Software Data Sheets and Cut Sheets:
a. Provide fully completed data sheets , in hardcopy, for each software package.
Including the following information on the data sheet:
1) License limitations, points, screens available.
2) Description of software compatibilities with hardware (PLC’s, ethernet
communications, P.C.’s, modems, HMI’s, etc.)
3) Description of software capabilities, function and use.
3. Software Program Submittal:
a. Prepare a program submittal to demonstrate how the programs address the
following:
1) Alarm indication and notification.
PROCESS CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM – GENERAL 40 10 00 - 8
01/2023
254.07.100
2) Alarm acknowledgement.
3) Operational sequences.
4) Communications.
5) Recording and trending – show for each recorded or tended tag.
6) Report generation with samples.
7) Maintenance information and notes storage.
8) Samples of each screen shot and report.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Furnish the ENGINEER with a complete preliminary set of written Operation and
Maintenance Manuals 2 weeks before start-up and/or testing.
2. Furnish in accordance with the following additional requirements.
3. Submit preliminary sets of these manuals to the ENGINEER for review of format
and content:
a. ENGINEER will return 1 set with comments.
b. Revise and/or amended as required and submit the requisite number of copies
to the ENGINEER 15 days before Pre-commissioning of the systems.
4. Incorporate changes that occur during startup and submit as part of the final
manuals.
5. Provide comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable
operation, service, maintenance, and repair.
6. Organize the Operation and Maintenance Manuals for each process in the following
manner:
a. Section A-Description of operation.
b. Section B- Screen shots.
c. Section C- Report samples.
d. Section D- Trending/recording operations.
e. Section E- Software information with disks.
f. Section F- Operational Manual.
g. Section G- Spare Parts List.
7. Training Submittals:
a. Develop and submit for review a General Training Plan. Include complete
descriptions of all planned training classes, a preliminary training schedule, a
list of all proposed instructors along with resumes, examples of proposed
training manuals, and a description of any special training tools to be used
(simulators, self-paced modules, personal computer-based training, etc.).
b. The ENGINEER will review the General Training Plan. Special emphasis will be
placed on review of the qualifications of the proposed instructors and the timing
of the individual courses to maximize their effectiveness. If, in the opinion of the
ENGINEER, the proposed instructors are not sufficiently qualified to conduct
the specified training courses, or lack experience, where required, on the
specific configuration of the system provide more qualified instructors.
c. Training Course Plan submittals:
1) For each training course or other training activity, submit a detailed,
complete outline and agenda for each lesson.
2) Describe any student pre-requisites for the course or training activity.
3) Provide an updated schedule for all sessions of the course, including dates,
times, durations, and locations.
4) Submit training materials.
d. Incorporate all submittal review comments into the course.
PROCESS CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM – GENERAL 40 10 00 - 9
01/2023
254.07.100
e. Do not conduct training courses before review and acceptance of the Course
Plan submittal for the course.
D. Responsibilities
1. The Programming Contractor, shall be responsible to the OWNER for the
implementation of the software and programmed systems.
2. Instrumentation & Control System Contractor (ICSC) Responsibilities:
a. The Programming Contractor shall assume full responsibility to perform all
engineering to select, furnish, install, test, calibrate, and place into operation all
software for PLC’s and SCADA P.C.’s.
b. The Programming Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with
OWNER to provide a complete, integrated and functional software system.
c. As a minimum, the Programming Contractor shall perform the following work:
1) Prepare software submittals.
2) Design, develop, and implement controls, screens, reporting, recording, etc.
3) Prepare the test plan, the training plan, and the spare parts submittals.
4) Procure all software.
5) Perform tests on PLC and SCADA software.
6) Participate in system pre-commissioning.
7) Participate in the performance tests.
8) Prepare Technical Manuals.
9) Conduct training classes.
3. Owner’s Responsibilities:
a. Assist the Programming Contractor in coordinating and integrating the system
controls.
b. The Programming Contractor shall not be responsible for providing or testing
any hardware.
4. The Programming Contractor and the Instrumentation & Control System Contractor
will be one and the same for this contract.
E. Programmer Qualifications:
1. The Qualification requirements specified in these paragraphs apply to the portions
of the Process Control and Instrumentation System Work to be provided by the
Programming Contractor.
2. The Programming Contractor shall meet the following minimum qualifications:
a. The Programming Contractor shall have completed at least five (5) successfully
completed projects for a pumping system of similar scope and complexity in
which the Programming Contractor used components the same as those
intended for use on this project, performed system programming,
documentation, including software configuration and documentation, field
testing, calibration and start-up, operator instruction and maintenance training.
b. The Programming Contractor company shall be actively involved in the
instrumentation, PLC based control systems, and SCADA systems business for
a minimum of ten years and has adequate facilities, organization structure,
manpower and technical and managerial expertise to properly perform the
WORK under and in conformance with these Specifications.
1.6 SEQUENCING
A. General:
1. General scheduling requirements are specified in Section 01313.
2. Refer to Section 01010 for summary of work.
3. Testing requirements are specified in Division 27.
PROCESS CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM – GENERAL 40 10 00 - 10
01/2023
254.07.100
4. Work restrictions and other scheduling requirements are specified in
Section 01140.
B. Pre-submittal Conferences:
1. Before producing any submittals, schedule a pre-submittal Conference for the
purposes of reviewing the entire project, equipment, control philosophy, schedules,
and submittal requirements.
C. Training:
1. Complete all training before the pre-commissioning phase of the project may start.
2. Schedule the training sessions a minimum of 15 days prior to the start date of the
courses.
3. Submit training manuals to the ENGINEER a minimum of 10 days before starting
the training session.
4. Within 10 days after the completion of each session, submit the following:
a. A list of all OWNER personnel that attended the session.
b. A copy of the training materials utilized during the lesson with all notes,
diagrams, and comments.
D. Performance Testing:
1. Complete Pre-commissioning test a minimum of 5 days before the Performance
Test.
2. Conduct a 90-day Performance Test.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warrant the Software and Programming in accordance with the General Conditions:
1. Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual Division 17 Specifications.
1.8 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Replace or modify software, and materials that do not achieve design requirements
after installation in order to attain compliance with the design requirements:
1. Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform additional
testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and obtain
compliance acceptance from the ENGINEER.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Before Substantial Completion, perform all maintenance activities required by
any sections of the Specifications including any calibrations, final adjustments,
component replacements or other routine service required before placing
equipment or systems in service.
PART 2 -
PART 3 -
3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PROCESS CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM – GENERAL 40 10 00 - 11
01/2023
254.07.100
A. Training:
1. General:
a. Provide system maintenance and operator training courses for all the
instrumentation and control systems furnished.
b. Conduct all training at the Project Site unless another location is approved by
the ENGINEER and OWNER.
1) Include instruction on the use of all maintenance equipment and special
tools provided under the contract.
c. Tailor training classes to the specific needs of the class participants:
1) The specific categories and number of personnel in each category are
identified below.
2) Furnish training courses that are a combination of classroom and hands-on
training:
3) Present the minimum number of sessions, specified in Table 1, for each
course in order to satisfy class size restrictions and limitations scheduling
OWNER staff.
4) Furnish additional sessions if required to accommodate the total number of
personnel identified for each course.
5) Schedule individual training classes with the OWNER at least 3 weeks
before the start of the class.
6) Schedule all training classes Monday - Friday between 7:30 AM and 3:30
PM.
7) Each individual daily training session, travel time excluded:
a) Minimum duration of 4 hours.
b) Maximum duration of 7 hours.
c) Breaks scheduled at least every 90 minutes and 1 hour for lunch.
8) Complete training for maintenance personnel 90-days before Performance
Testing.
9) Complete operator training classes before startup of the SCADA system, or
any part of it:
10)Refer to Paragraph 1.09 of this Section.
11)Schedule follow-up training classes after SCADA startup on a schedule
determined by the OWNER.
a) Furnish highly qualified training instructors for technical training with
demonstrated expertise in not only control system functionality but also
professional training techniques:
b) Provide completion reports in accordance with Paragraph 1.09 of this
Section.
2. Training Manuals and Materials:
a. Furnish training manuals and other materials for training courses.
b. Manuals are to be professionally written to present the course material in a
format that is easy to comprehend.
c. The manuals are to serve as teaching aids during presentation of the training
classes.
d. Manuals are to serve as reference material after the training has been
completed.
PROCESS CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM – GENERAL 40 10 00 - 12
01/2023
254.07.100
Table 1
Course Title
Minimum
Course
Length (days
per session)
Personnel
(Estimated
Number
of Students)
Minimum
Number
of Sessions
SCADA, HMI, PLC Software 1 5 1
3. Training Course Requirements:
a. Software Training:
1) Furnish training on software and on related systems, including operation
alarms, control, recording, reporting, etc.
2) Furnish training on features, operation, troubleshooting, and maintenance.
b. HMI Training:
1) Provide the following:
a) Overview of firmware, including starting, stopping, and PLC interface.
b) Troubleshooting.
c. Follow-up Training:
1) Provide on-site follow-up training class beginning after startup of the
SCADA system. The intent for these classes is to provide the OWNER’s
personnel the opportunity for a review and “refresher” of the training topics
and material after they have had some experience using the system.
2) Mutually schedule and develop the content of these classes with the
OWNER no later than 1 month before the beginning of the first session:
a) Schedule at the OWNER’s discretion on non-consecutive days spaced
out over the start-up and warranty period.
END OF SECTION
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 40 11 00 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 40 11 00 – PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment, appliances, and perform all operations in
connection with providing a complete and operable programmable logic controller
(PLC) system in accordance with this section of the specifications and applicable
drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.
B. The SUPPLIER shall furnish a PLC control system utilizing Allen Bradley
CompactLogix 5069 PLC family of hardware as specified herein. No like, equal, or
equivalent products will be considered.
C. The OWNER shall furnish PLC programming software.
E. The OWNERS programmer shall work in conjunction with the CONTRACTOR to
train the owner’s staff on the PLC system. The contractor shall train the owner on all
hardware. The programmer shall train on PLC programming, SCADA programming,
operations, fault clearing, start-up and shutdown procedures, etc.
1.2 APPLICABLE SECTIONS
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions,
alternates and Addenda, applicable drawings and the technical specification herein
shall apply to work under this Section.
1.3 APPLICABLE REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI X3.64 (1979) Additional Controls for Use with American National
Standard Code for Information Interchange
ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION (EIA)
EIA232-D (Jan. 1987) Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data
Circuit-Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data
Interchange
EIA RS-485 (1983) Standard for Electrical Characteristics of Generators and
Receivers for Use in Balanced Multipoint System
FEDERAL COMMUNICATION COMMISSION (FCC)
FCC Part 68 (July 1986) Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone
Network
THE INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS, INC. (IEEE)
IEEE No. 100 (1988) IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronic
Terms
IEEE C57.13 (1978) Instrument Transformers
IEEE C62.41 (1980) Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 40 11 00 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
IEEE 802.3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250 (1985; Incl. Rev. I and 2; ICS-6) Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment
NEMA ICS 1 (1988) General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, Inc. (UL)
UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide complete submittal information for the PLC system as specified in Sections
01 34 00 and 26 05 00. Include manufacturer’s data for each part, Bill of Materials,
panel fabrication drawings including elevations and complete wiring diagrams with
wire and terminal numbers for local and remote terminations. Remote terminations
may be submitted with the operational and maintenance information in lieu of the
initial equipment submittals.
B. Provide operational and maintenance information as specified in Section 26 05 00.
1.5 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 26 33 00 - Static Un-Interruptible Power Supply
B. Section 26 09 13 – Control Devices
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER SYSTEM
A.The PLC system shall be Allen Bradley Micrologix 1400 Series. Provide hardware types
as necessary to operate the system according to the design intent of the drawings.
2.2 PLC ENCLOSURE AND ACCESSORIES
A. PLC Enclosure and Accessories: The PLC enclosure shall house the power
supplies, PLC processor, analog input and output modules, discrete input and output
modules, communication module, operator interface terminal (OIT), UPS,
thermostatically controlled vent fan and louvers, heater with thermostat, light with
integral door switch, relays, terminal blocks, and ancillary components. In addition,
provide 25% spare back panel space and space for additional cards as indicated.
The PLC shall be equipped with the following accessories, at a minimum:
1. Enclosure: The PLC shall be housed in a NEMA type 12 enclosure with a
lockable 3-point latch.
2. Redundant Power Supplies: Power supply hardware shall include a PLC power
supply and redundant 24VDC power supplies as required for Inputs and Outputs
(I/O). The redundant power supplies shall be 100 watt, minimum.
3. Fusing: Individual I/O loops shall be individually fused. Fuse holders shall be
indicating type.
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 40 11 00 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
4. I/O Terminal Blocks: Field wiring DIN rail type terminal blocks. 25% spare
terminal blocks shall be provided. Discrete and analog I/O terminals shall be
segregated by I/O type.
5. Plastic Snap-On Cover Wire Management Systems: These shall be sized to
accommodate all wiring with 25% spare capacity.
6. UPS System: A panel mounted UPS shall be included in each PLC cabinet. The
UPS’s shall be sized to provide at least 30 minutes of run time for the PLC and
all system I/O. UPS systems shall be as specified elsewhere.
7. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS): The TVSS system shall protect
all power wiring within the PLC enclosure.
8. Outlet: A 20 amp, 120 volt duplex grounded power outlet shall be mounted
within the PLC enclosure.
9. Ground Terminals: A screw type bonding terminal strip to which all ground
bonding shall take place for all signal reference, TVSS, safety bonding etc. This
grounding terminal shall accept a #6 copper ground bonding conductor. 25%
spare terminals shall be provided.
10. Enclosure Labeling: The enclosure shall carry a phonetic label indicating the
enclosure name, label all pilot devices on the swing out panel, and label all I/O
termination modules, relays, power supplies, etc. Internal wiring shall be labeled
at each terminal and each terminal shall be labeled, all labeling names and/or
numbers shall be reflected on the panel fabrication drawings.
11. Separate Power Warning Signs: The enclosure shall receive power from
external sources and shall be labeled with the source of where the external
power is derived. Each circuit providing power to the cabinet shall be indicated.
B. Operator Interface Terminal (OIT): The OIT is owner-provided.
2.3 INPUT/OUTPUT MODULES
A. Analog transmitters and receivers have 4 to 20 mA signals. Discrete (on/off) inputs
(DI) originate from dry contacts. For discrete outputs (DO), provide interposing
relays with dry contacts. Refer to the PLC Input / Output Point List, Appendix A, for
required inputs and outputs.
B. The discrete input modules shall be 24VDC.
C. The discrete output modules shall be isolated relay contacts suitable for operating
interposing relays. Each discrete output module shall include fuses and fuse blown
indicators.
D. The analog input (AI) modules shall be suitable for accepting 4 to 20 mA from 2, 3, or
4 wire transmitters. The input power shall be from an internal or external 24-volt dc
power supply. The analog to digital converter shall have a 10-bit minimum resolution
with an overall accuracy of + .5% at 60ºC.
E. The analog output (AO) modules shall be 4 to 20 mA signals suitable for driving into
a 0 to 600 ohm load without load adjustments. The digital to analog converter shall
have a 10 bit minimum resolution with an overall accuracy of + 2% to 60ºC. The
output power shall be from an internal or external, 24 volt dc power supply provided
by the SUPPLIER. If the PLC processor fails, the analog outputs shall drop to zero-
scale (4mA).
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 40 11 00 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
F. Discrete PLC I/O modules shall have individual LED status lights for each I/O point.
All discrete and analog modules shall have terminal blocks for termination of the I/O
wires. Individual I/O points shall be capable of withstanding low energy common
mode transients to 1,500 volts.
2.6 PLC START-UP
A. Each PLC shall have start-up software that causes automatic commencement of
operation without human intervention, including start-up of all connected I/O
functions. A restart program based on detection of power failure shall be included in
the software. Upon restoration of power, the program shall prepare the plant to run
according to current inputs. If in auto, those processes will restart if current states
permit restarting. The start-up software shall initiate operation of self-test diagnostic
routines. If the data base and application software are no longer resident or if the
clock cannot be read, the PLC shall not restart and systems shall remain in the
failure mode indicated until the necessary repairs are made.
B. Programming software for the PLC shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. The
programming of the PLC shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR. All loop testing
and debugging shall be performed by the Contractor and electrician.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PANEL FABRICATION
A. Install each item in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The panel shall be fabricated and UL Listed as an assembly by a qualified panel
shop.
3.2 OWNER TRAINING
A. Provide the services of a factory trained, manufacturer’s representative for instruction
of the OWNER’s personnel. The training shall include basic PLC and OIT operation
overview, I/O module normal and fault condition indications, and equipment
maintenance, troubleshooting, and replacement.
B. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be included as a part of the
instruction to the OWNER’s personnel. Refer to Section 01 34 00 for operation and
maintenance data requirements.
C. Refer to Section 01 34 00 for additional training requirements.
END OF SECTION
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 40 12 50 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
PART 1 -
GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall install the pressure transmitters, with all spare parts, accessories,
and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 40 10 00 – Process Control and Information Systems
B. Section 40 20 00 – Instruments, General
PART 2 -
PRODUCTS
2.1 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
A. Gauge Pressure Transmitters
1. Contractor shall provide Rosemount 2088 Pressure Transducer No.
2088G2S22A1B4M5DW (which is 0 to 150 psi rating).
2. Power supply will be 24VDC, powered from PLC panel power supply. Process
connection shall be 1/2-inch female NPT flange adapter. Signal output will be 4 to
20 mA.
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
3.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to Section 40 20 00.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 40 12 50 - PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 40 15 10- 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 40 15 10 – PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A.This section includes the process control strategies for this Contract. Together with the
process input/output schedule, the equipment specifications (including control
strategies for local equipment control panels), and the Drawings, the process control
strategies describe the required operation, monitoring, and control of the facilities
included in this Contract. The Contractor shall provide all equipment, and services
necessary to implement all functions described herein.
B.The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing functioning systems as described
herein. The functional descriptions contain requirements for furnishing and installing
labor and materials that may not appear elsewhere in the contract documents.
1.2 GENERAL DESIGN INFORMATION
A.Indicator lights on all MCCs, control panels, starter enclosures, interfaces, etc. shall
conform to the following color convention:
Condition Color
Running/Open Green
Auto White
Ready / Stopped / Off /
Closed
Red
Fail Amber
Alarm Amber
Generic Status Blue or White
B.Running status shall be provided from auxiliary contacts provided with the motor starter.
Auto status shall be defined as HOA or OA switch in Auto position. Ready status shall
be defined as in remote or auto mode with all interlocks satisfied (no failure conditions
present). Stopped and Off status shall be defined as all interlocks satisfied (no failure
conditions present), except for no remote or auto mode. Failed status shall be defined
as motor overload and/or any other shutdown mode such as over torque, over
temperature, low oil pressure, high vibration, etc.
C.A discrepancy failure shall be indicated through the control system for any drive, motor,
instrument, etc. that should be running or providing a reading but for which the PLC is
not receiving a run status signal or valid reading. An example is a motor which is
commanded to run by the control system but is not subsequently detected as running.
An adjustable time delay shall be provided for each motor to allow time for the motor to
start and satisfy all interlocks.
D.Manual start/stop, open/close, speed/position adjustment, etc., from the Operator work
stations shall be provided for all equipment controlled by the control system.
E.Where devices such as temperature, moisture, and/or vibration sensors, over- or under-
pressure protection, space heaters, etc. are provided with process equipment and their
associated motors under the various sections of Division 11, the Contractor shall
provided all required interconnecting wiring between those devices and their
PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 40 15 10- 2
01/2023
254.07.100
associated MCCs, motor starters, VFDs, local control panels, etc.
F.Where setpoints, operating limits, and other control settings are provided by the
process control strategies, these settings shall be initial settings only and shall be used
for assistance in the initial startup of the plant. All such settings shall be fully
adjustable, and based on actual operating conditions, the Contractor shall make all
necessary adjustments to provide smooth, stable operation.
G.The control system shall be capable of receiving inputs of initial run-times for existing
and proposed equipment. Initial run-time shall not automatically assumed to be zero.
H.All PLC control strategies shall return to a normal control mode upon restoration of
power.
I.All setpoint control shall be by PID control algorithms. Where only proportional control
is specified, tuning constants shall be used to reduce the integral and derivative
functions to zero. All PLC-controlled variable speed equipment shall be provided with
individual speed control PID modules in the PLC which shall be cascaded with the
overall setpoint PID modules as required. All setpoints, sequence timers, sequence
orders, dead bands, PID tuning parameters, PLC delay timers, variable speed
operating range limits, and similar control constants shall be accessible and alterable
from the Operator work stations.
J.All setpoints, alarms, etc. based upon an analog input signal or field variable shall be
provided with time delays and dead bands to prevent nuisance tripping of controls and
alarms.
K.Elapsed run time shall be determined through an auxiliary contract on the starter which
is an input to the PLC.
1.Elapsed run time shall be displayed at the SCADA level for each and every
motor controlled through the PLC system.
2.Individual elapsed run time accumulation may be reset by the operator after
entering a password if the proper security level is associated with said
password.
3.Elapsed run time shall be displayed as 99,999.9 hours after which the
elapsed run time registers shall recycle to 0.0 hours.
4.Provisions shall be made to allow the operator to enter a start value for
runtime accumulation.
5.Elapsed run time shall be accumulated and stored in PLC registers and not
in the SCADA system.
L.PID control algorithms.
1.PID control algorithms shall have operator selectable slew rates for
setpoints that will allow the setpoint to slowly ramp to its final value in order
to minimize system disturbance.
a.Individual setpoint slew rates shall be set at a local HMI if available
as well as through the SCADA system.
2.Each PID control algorithm shall have a face plate associated with the
individual PID control algorithm that shall be displayed at its associated HMI
and at the SCADA terminal. Said face plate shall have the following
functions:
a.Display Output, CV.
PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 40 15 10- 3
01/2023
254.07.100
b.Display Setpoint, SP.
c.Display Process Variable, PV.
d.Allow for operator selection of Automatic or Manual control of
Output.
e.Under manual control of output allow the Operator to enter the
desired output value.
f.Allow for input of the three PID tuning parameters.
M.Programmable settling and proving timers shall be provided in all control sequences for
starting and stopping of pumps, in order to let the process settle down before
proceeding with any additional control functions.
1.These timers shall be imbedded in the PLC logic, tuned in the field, and
listed separately as part of the software submittal and O & M manual.
N.Status indication:
1.The associated pilot light, HMI display, and SCADA display for each valve and
pump shall indicate valve or slide gate position if available by constantly illuminating
the corresponding status indication and report this condition to the SCADA system.
2.As previously described a fault condition shall flash the associated status indicator
and alarm within the SCADA system.
3.When a valve is in transition, not fully closed and not fully opened, then the valve
open and valve closed status indicator shall:
a.For HMI and graphic displays state that the valve is in transition.
b.For pilot lights shall alternately flash on and off the valve fully opened and
fully closed pilot lights.
O.When setpoints or actions are identified to occur on more than one HMI, or both the
HMIs and SCADA, the last action or setpoint shall override the current condition, unless
otherwise noted.
P.Control software and/or hardware shall be so configured and designed as to monitor for
loss of analog signal (signal <4 mA), analog signal too large (signal > 20 mA), or rate of
signal change too fast (individual rate parameter for each analog input signal to be
imbedded in software), when any of these conditions are detected the control system
shall alarm this condition, and close the appropriate valve and or stop the appropriate
motor in order to prevent the process from running away.
Q.The manual control mode shall be completely manual and under the operator control,
there shall be no programmed interlocks requiring completion of a previous step before
operating a device, unless specifically identified in the individual loop descriptions as
occurring in the manual mode.
R.Number of starts shall be accumulated for each motor.
1.The number of starts for the current day shall be moved into a register and
held as the previous day’s number of starts at 0:01 hours each day.
2.The number of starts for the current day shall be entered into the historical
data base time and date stamped at 0:01 hours each day.
3.The current day number of starts shall be reset at 0:01 hours each day.
PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 40 15 10- 4
01/2023
254.07.100
S.Alarm/Fault Indication/Acknowledgement
1.Furnish an alarm acknowledgement pushbutton at each VCP, HMI, or LCP
that shall signal the PLC that an alarm or fail condition has been
acknowledged. This device shall only affect the alarms that are present on
the panel where the device is located.
2.In general any fault condition shall flash the appropriate pilot light and/or
graphic at a rate of on for 0.5 seconds and then off for 0.5 seconds.
3.The individual alarm acknowledgement pushbutton or action shall function
as follows:
a.Shall change the flashing alarm indication to continuously ON if the
alarm or fail condition persists after the acknowledgement button or
action has been depressed.
b.Shall turn OFF the alarm indication if the alarm or fail condition has
been corrected and the alarming system has returned to normal.
4.An alarm beacon and horn shall be located as needed.
a.The alarm silence pushbutton or HMI command shall silence the
horn but continue to show the visual alarm.
5.All alarm and fail conditions shall flash their respective pilot lights,
indicators, HMI, or SCADA graphics, until the condition is acknowledged by
the operator.
a.Once the operator acknowledges the alarm or fail condition the pilot
light, indicator, HMI, or SCADA graphic shall remain ON in a steady
condition.
b.Once the alarm has been cleared and the operator again
acknowledges the alarm or fail condition the pilot light, indicator,
HMI, or SCADA graphic shall turn OFF.
6.All valves, pumps, motors, and other process equipment shall have fail
alarms displayed and reported at the HMI and SCADA level.
T.Tank and vessel levels.
1.All tank and vessels levels shall be displayed both in feet (XX.XX) and gallons,
whether or not specifically identified in the P & IDs or Loop descriptions.
2.All identified tanks and/or vessels that have a level measurement shall include,
whether or not identified, the following minimum functions that shall be displayed
on the associated HMI and SCADA System.
a.Numerical readout of process material level in the tank.
b.Setpoint for high level and high level alarm
c.Setpoint for low level and low level alarm.
d.Setpoints for high level and low level shall be entered as a level or volume
as directed by the ENGINEER.
U.Power failure.
1.The control system upon sensing a power failure shall store, within, the
PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 40 15 10- 5
01/2023
254.07.100
PLC memory the current accumulation of all time records and flow totals
and as necessary, the status of all devices, i.e. ON or OFF, to allow a return
to normal operating condition.
V.PLC System Status
1.There shall be a minimum of one screen that shall include the status of all PLCs
in the system and the status of the PLC communications LAN.
2.The PLC shall monitor communications status with equipment including with
heartbeat status and alarm on communications failure.
W.Analog device calibration override.
1.Provide a SCADA screen for each and every analog input that allows the
Operator to access said analog input to:
a.Disable the analog input in the PLC control system.
b.Enter a value for the analog input from the SCADA system to the
PLC.
c.Hold the last analog input value while the actual analog input is
disabled.
2.Provide a SCADA screen for each and every analog output that allows the
Operator to access said analog input to:
a.Force an output value entered from the SCADA system to the PLC.
b.Hold the last analog output value while the programmed output is
disabled.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL DESCRIPTION
The drinking water system for the purposes of this project consists of a well pump that draws water
from a well into a tank, and a booster pump that pumps water from the tank at line pressure to the
drinking water system. There is a chlorination generation skid that generates sodium hypochlorite
and correctly doses the right amount of chlorine into the egress line. Not within the scope of this
project is an existing fluoride injection station that will continue to run unchanged.
Under normal operation, the well pump controls to a desired flow setpoint, and the booster pump
controls to maintain constant level in the tank.
WELL STARTUP SEQUENCE
The Well startup sequence begins when the control switch is set to Auto. The pre-lube water
solenoid opens the solenoid and upon detection of flow from both the flow switch and the lube
water flow meter, begins a 10 minute timer. If there is no flow detected within a set time, an alarm
is generated. Note that the pre-lube water solenoid is fail open on loss of power or signal.
During the pre-lube cycle, the system prepares for a flush by closing the tank valve and opening
the flush valve.
Once the 10 minute pre-lube cycle is complete and the valves are detected to be in the correct
PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 40 15 10- 6
01/2023
254.07.100
position for a flush, the VFD to the Well Pump is commanded to run. The VFD and controller shall
be set to deliver a water at a speed of 2 ft/minute within the first 2 seconds of starting. The pre-
lube water continues to be delivered for the first 1 minute of runtime.
The flow valve is used to modulate the VFD speed to maintain the Flushing Flow Setpoint. The
controller will be designed to prevent wind-up of the controller until the flow rate can be detected.
There may be a process delay from the point in time the pump starts to the time the flow is sensed
in the flow meter. During that time, the controller will command a speed equal to the anticipated
speed necessary to obtain the flushing flow setpoint. Standard PID control will be resumed when a
flow is detected in the meter. If no flow is detected within a time delay, there will be an alarm and
shutdown of the well pump.
The flushing cycle will continue for 10 minutes, at which time, the flow setpoint will be changed to
the normal water delivery flow setpoint. The flushing valve will begin to close and the tank valve
will begin to open at the same time. The VFD speed will be adjusted by the controller to maintain
the normal water delivery flow setpoint.
The controller speed setpoint to the VFD will be calibrated in the VFD so that 4mA will correspond
to the minimum acceptable VFD speed, and 20mA will be the maximum acceptable VFD speed.
This will be field-verified as to the minimum and maximum speeds. The VFD will not interpret 4mA
as a zero speed, and 20mA as a maximum speed, but will rather function as aforementioned.
WELL PERMISSIVES
The Well Pump will shut down and/or not allow startup for any of the following conditions:
•High discharge pressure as detected by the high discharge pressure switch, or the
discharge pressure transmitter reading a high signal. The discharge pressure transmitter
alarm will have a time delay adjustable in the system. The high discharge pressure switch
will either be selected by hardware to be properly delayed and debounced for momentary
high pressures during startup, or if it does not have the capability, then the controller will
provide the appropriate debounce delay. This condition will lock in the shutdown and
require a reset to resume operation of the pump.
•Low-Low well level will shut down the pump. This condition will lock in the shutdown and
require a reset to resume operation of the pump. An alarm will register for a Low well
level.
•High motor temperature will shut down the pump. This condition will lock in the shutdown
and require a reset to resume operation of the pump.
•VFD Failure will shut down the pump. This condition will lock in the shutdown and require a
reset to resume operation of the pump.
•Low water flow as measured by the well pump discharge flowmeter will shut down the
pump.
•Pre-lube failure will prevent startup of the pump. This condition will lock out the permissive
and require a reset to resume operation of the pump. Upon resuming, the startup
sequence restarts from the beginning requiring the full 10 minute timer to elapse before
starting the pumps.
•Failure of the valves to be in the correct position for the current cycle (flushing or normal)
will on a time delay prevent startup or cause a shutdown of the pump. This condition will
lock out the permissive and/or lock in the shutdown and require a reset to resume
operation of the pump.
•The operator places the control hand switch in the OFF position. This switch will
electrically drop the run command to the VFD. The controller will also detect that the hand
switch is not in AUTO and drop the run command in the controller.
•The HMI will have the capability to cause an Emergency Stop or a stop command.
PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES 40 15 10- 7
01/2023
254.07.100
WELL SHUTDOWN SEQUENCE
The run command to the VFD will simply drop and cut power to the pump which will stop on its own
with mechanical ratcheting. All tank valves will remain in their current position.
WELL COOLDOWN SEQUENCE
The Well pump shall not be permitted to restart until 10 minutes have gone by following a
shutdown, with a maximum number of starts being limited to 4 per hour.
CHLORINE DOSING
The Chlorine dosing enable will be off until the flow rate sensed by the booster pump flow meter is
above a minimum flow, and the pump is commanded to run and is sensed running and the system
valve is commanded to be open and is sensed to not be in the closed position.
The Chlorine dosing rate from the PLC will be calculated from the Flow rate of the flow meter. Any
case causing the dosing enable to drop will also set the dosing rate analog command to a zero
dosing rate.
END OF SECTION
INSTRUMENTS GENERAL 40 20 00- 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 40 20 00 - INSTRUMENTS GENERAL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A.The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place in operation process instrumentation
(flow elements, level transmitters, etc.) as scheduled herein together with all signal
converters, transmitters, isolators, amplifiers, etc. to interface with all instrumentation,
panels, controls, and process equipment control panels with the process control system
as shown on the Drawings and as specified. Mounting of associated transmitters,
indicators, power supplies, brackets, and appurtenances shall be provided as specified
herein and shown on the Drawings.
B.It is the intent of this Specification and the Contract Documents that all process taps,
isolation valves, nipples, penetrations, embedded instrumentation supports, conduit,
wiring, terminations, and the installation of the process instrumentation on process lines
shall be provided under this Contract.
C.Taps and connections for primary process sensors shall be sized to suit each individual
installation and the requirements of the instrument served. It is the Contractor’s
responsibility to ensure that the location, supports, orientation, and dimensions of the
connections and taps for instrumentation as such as to provide the proper bracing, the
required accuracy of measurement, protection of the sensor from accidental damage, and
accessibility for maintenance while the plant is in operation. Isolation valves shall be
provided at all process taps.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.Section 40 10 00 – Process Control and Instrumentation Systems
B.Division 26.
1.3 REFERENCES
A.This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section
as specified and modified. W here a referenced document contains references to other
standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced
directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the
listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title
API RP550 Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control
Systems, Part I – Sections 1 Through 13
ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control
Instrumentation, Primary Elements, and Control Valves
ISA S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology
1.4 GENERAL INFORMATION AND DESCRIPTION
A.These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do
not cover all details which will vary in accordance with the requirements of the equipment
furnished. They are, however, intended to cover the furnishing, the shop testing, the
delivery, and complete installation and field testing of all instruments and appurtenances
INSTRUMENTS GENERAL 40 20 00- 2
01/2023
254.07.100
whether specifically mentioned in the Specification or not.
B.The instruments shall be furnished and installed with all necessary accessory equipment
and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not. The
installations shall incorporate the highest standards for the type of service shown on the
Drawings including loop testing of the entire installation and instruction of operating
personnel in the care, operation, calibration, and maintenance of all instrumentation.
C.All instrumentation shall be of first class workmanship and shall be entirely designed and
suitable for the intended services. All materials used in fabricating the equipment shall be
new and undamaged.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A.All instrumentation supplied shall be the manufacturer’s latest design. Unless otherwise
specified, all instruments shall be solid state, electronic, using enclosures to suit specified
environmental conditions. Microprocessor-based equipment shall be supplied unless
otherwise specified. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor
stands, wall brackets, or instrument racks as shown on the Drawings or as required.
B.Equipment installed in hazardous areas shall meet Class, Group, and Division as shown
on the Drawings, to comply with the National Electric Code.
C.All instruments shall return to accurate measurement without manual resetting upon
restoration of power after a power failure.
D.Unless otherwise shown or specified, local indicators shall be provided for all instruments.
Where instruments are located in inaccessible locations, local indicators shall be
provided and shall be mounted as specified in paragraph 3.1.B. All indicator readouts
shall be linear in process units. Readouts of 0-100% shall not be acceptable, except for
speed and valve position. Floating outputs shall be provided for all transmitters.
E.Unless otherwise specified, field instrument and power supply enclosures in corrosive
environments shall be 316 stainless steel, fiberglass, or PVC coated copper free cast
aluminum NEMA 4X construction.
F.Where separate elements and transmitters are required, they shall be fully matched, and
unless otherwise noted, installed adjacent to the sensor. Special cables or equipment
shall be supplied by the associated equipment manufacturer.
G.Electronic equipment shall utilize printed circuitry and shall be coated (tropicalized) to
prevent contamination by dust, moisture, and fungus. Solid-state components shall be
conservatively rated for long term performance and dependability over ambient
atmospheric fluctuations. Ambient conditions shall be –15 to 50 degrees C and 10 to 100
percent relative humidity, unless otherwise specified. Field mounted equipment and
system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid, and corrosive
service conditions.
H.All devices furnished hereunder shall be heavy-duty type, designed for continuous
industrial service. The system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as
possible, and shall consist of equipment models which are currently in production. All
equipment provided, where applicable, shall be of modular construction and shall be
capable of field expansion.
I.All non-loop powered instruments and equipment shall be designed to operate on a 60 Hz
alternating current power source at a nominal 117 V, plus or minus 10 percent, except
where specifically noted. All regulators and power supplies required for compliance with
INSTRUMENTS GENERAL 40 20 00- 3
01/2023
254.07.100
the above shall be provided. Where equipment requires voltage reduction, constant
voltage transformers shall be supplied.
J.All analog transmitter and controller outputs shall be isolated, 4-20 milliamps into a load of
0-750 ohms, unless specifically noted otherwise. All switches shall have double-pole,
double-throw contacts rated at a minimum of 600 VA, unless specified otherwise.
K.Materials and equipment used shall be U.L. approved wherever such approved
equipment and materials is available.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A.Isolation Valves – Valves shall be full port ball valves with ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless
steel trim and body and with Teflon seats and packing. Valves shall be Parker CPI, W hitey,
Hoke, or equal.
B.Gage Valves – Gage valves shall be machined from ASTM A276 bar stock and shall be
provided with 1/2-inch NPT connections and integral bleed valve. Valves shall be Anderson,
Greenwood & Company M9530, Hoke 6801L8Y, or equal.
C.Root Valves – Root valves shall be ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel bar stock with
1/2-inch NPT male process connection and three 1/2-inch NPT female instrument
connections. One instrument connection shall be provided with an ASTM A276, Type 316
stainless steel bleed valve. ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel plugs shall be provided
for unused ports. Lagging type units shall be provided for insulated vessels and pipes.
Root valves shall be Anderson, Greenwood & Company M5 AVS-44, Hoke 6802L8Y, or
equal.
D.Manifolds – Manifolds shall be three-valve bar-stock type. Manifold body shall be machined
from 316 stainless steel bar stock. Valves shall be globe configuration with 316 stainless
steel ball seats and Teflon stem packing. Manifolds shall be designed for direct mounting to
differential pressure transmitters in place of the flanges normally furnished. Fabricated
manifolds or manifolds employing needle or soft seat valves are not acceptable. Purge
taps, 1/8-inch NPT shall be furnished on manifolds where water purge is specified.
Manifolds shall be Anderson Greenwood M4TVS, Hoke 8123F8Y, or equal.
E.Tubing – Instrument tubing between the process connection and instruments shall be 1/2-
inch x 0.065-inch seamless annealed ASTM A269, Type 316 stainless steel. Tubing fittings
shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Fittings shall be of the swage ferrule design and shall
have components (nut, body and ferrule system) interchangeable with those of at least one
other manufacturer. Flare and ball sleeve compression type are not acceptable. Fittings
shall be Parker CPI, Crawford Swagelok, Hoke Gyrolok, or equal.
F.Chemical Seals
1.Diaphragm – Seal shall be the diaphragm type with flushing connection, Type 316
stainless steel body and Type 316L diaphragm unless otherwise specified. Seal shall
be Mansfield and Green Type SG, Ashcroft Type 101, or equal.
2.Annular Ring – Seal shall be the in-line full stream captive sensing liquid type.
Metallic wetted parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Flexible cylinder shall be
Buna-N unless otherwise specified. Seals shall be rated 200 psig with not more than
5-inch W C hysteresis. Seals shall be Ronningen-Petter Iso-Ring, Red Valve series
40, or equal.
3.Fill Fluid – Chemical seals and associated instruments shall be factory filled as
follows: Instrument side of seal, capillary tubing, and instrument shall be evacuated to
an absolute pressure of 1.0 Torr or less; filled; and sealed. Unless otherwise
specified, fill fluid shall be silicone oil, Dow Corning DC200, Syltherm 800, or equal.
INSTRUMENTS GENERAL 40 20 00- 4
01/2023
254.07.100
G.Bushings and Thermowells – Bushings or thermowells shall comply with SAMA PMC17-10.
Temperature taps shall be 1/2-inch NPT, and lagging extensions shall be provided on
insulated vessels or pipes. Thermowells and bushings shall be machined from Type 316
stainless steel bar stock unless otherwise specified.
H.Purge Assemblies
1.Air – Air purge assembly shall consist of a constant-differential relay, needle valve,
check valve and 0.2 to 2.0 scfh rotameter. Assembly shall be Moore Products 62VA,
Fischer & Porter 10A3137N-3BR2110, or equal.
2.Water – W ater purge assembly shall consist of a strainer, constant-differential
regulator, needle valve, check valve, and 20 to 200 cc/m rotameter. Assembly shall be
Moore Products 63BD4A, Fischer & Porter 10A3137N-53BR2110, or equal. Strainer
shall be 155 micron wye-type, ASCO 8600A2, Crane, or equal.
2.3 POWERED INSTRUMENTS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Powered instruments are those instruments which require power (120 VAC or 24 VDC
loop power) to operate. Each instrument includes an element or analyzer and a
transmitter/controller.
B.Transmitters shall be 4 to 20 milliampere output two-wire type with operating power derived
from the transmission circuit. Transmitter shall support an external load of 0 to 600 ohms or
greater without requiring trimming resistors with a transmission circuit power supply of 24
volts. Transmitter output shall be galvanically isolated from the process and the transmitter
case. Time constant of transmitters used for flow or pressure measurement, including level
transmitters used for flow measurement, shall be adjustable from 0.5 to 5.0 seconds.
Transmitter output shall increase with increasing measurement except where "reverse
action" is specified in the instrument schedule.
C.Electrical parts of transmitter and/or primary element mechanisms shall, as a minimum be
housed in enclosures meeting NEMA 250, Type 4 requirements. Where electrical
mechanisms are located outdoors or in areas specified as corrosive, enclosures shall meet
NEMA 250, Type 4X requirements.
D.Transmitters located outdoors shall be provided with surge protectors: Rosemount Model
470A, Taylor 1020FP, or equal.
E.W here two-wire transmitter is located in an area classified as hazardous, it shall be made
safe by means of an intrinsic safety barrier. Intrinsic safety barriers for two-wire transmitters
shall be of the active, isolating, loop powered type. Barrier shall be Measurement
Technology LTD. type MT3042, Stahl 9005/01-252/100/00, or equal.
F.W here four-wire transmitters are permitted, they shall be provided with a loop powered
signal current isolator connected in the output signal circuit. Isolator shall provide galvanic
isolation of milliampere transmission signals from transmitters with inadequately isolated
output circuits. Isolator shall be housed in a NEMA 250, type 4/7 conduit body and shall
derive its operating power from the signal input circuit. Input and output signals shall be 4 to
20 milliamperes, and error shall not exceed 0.1 percent of span. Input resistance shall not
exceed 550 ohms with an output load of 250 ohms. Isolator shall be Moore Industries
SCX/4-20MA/ 4-20/MA/6.5DC/-RF(EX).
2.4 PROCESS SWITCHES GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Contact outputs used for alarm actuation shall be ordinarily closed and shall open to initiate
the alarm. Contact outputs used to control equipment shall be ordinarily open and shall
close to start the equipment. Contacts monitored by solid state equipment such as
INSTRUMENTS GENERAL 40 20 00- 5
01/2023
254.07.100
programmable controllers or annunciators shall be hermetically sealed and designed for
switching currents from 20 to 100 mA at 24 volts DC. Contacts monitored by
electromagnetic devices such as mechanical relays shall be rated NEMA ICS 2,
designation B300. Double barriers shall be provided between switch elements and process
fluids such that failure of one barrier will not permit process fluids into electrical enclosures.
Switch electrical enclosures shall be rated NEMA 250, type 4 minimum. Contacts in Class
1, Division 1 areas and monitored by solid-state circuits shall be made safe by suitable
intrinsic safety barriers as specified in Section 26 09 13.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.General – Equipment shall be located so that it is accessible for operation and maintenance.
Electrical work shall be performed in compliance with all applicable local codes and
practices. W here these specifications and the Drawings do not delineate precise installation
procedures, API RP550 shall be used as a guide to installation procedures.
B.Equipment Mounting and Support
1.Field equipment shall be wall mounted or mounted on two-inch diameter aluminum
pipe stands welded to a 10-inch square, ½-inch thick aluminum steel baseplate.
Instruments attached directly to concrete shall be spaced out from the mounting
surface not less than ½-inch by use of phenolic spacers. Expansion shields in walls
shall be used for securing equipment or wall supports to concrete surfaces. Unless
otherwise noted, field instruments shall be mounted between 48 and 60 inches above
the floor or work platform.
2.Embedded pipe supports and sleeves shall be schedule 40, 304 stainless steel pipe,
with stainless steel blind flange for equipment mounting as shown on the Drawings.
3.Materials for miscellaneous mounting brackets and supports shall be 304 stainless
steel.
4.Pipe stands, mounting brackets, and supports shall comply with the requirements of
Division 5.
5.Where transmitters are supported from process piping, leveling saddles shall be
provided. Transmitters shall be oriented such that output indicators are readily visible.
C.Control and Signal Wiring – Electrical, control, and signal wiring connections to
transmitters and elements mounted on process piping or equipment shall be made
through liquid-tight flexible conduit. Conduit seals shall be provided where conduits pass
from classified to unclassified areas.
3.2 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT
A.General
1.The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Division 1 and all
instrumentation and control system tests, inspection, and calibration requirements for
all instrumentation and controls provided under this Contract and specified herein.
The Engineer, or his designated representative(s), reserve the right to witness any
test, inspection, calibration, or start-up activity. Acceptance by the Engineer of any
plan, report, or documentation relating to any testing or commissioning activity
specified herein shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for meeting all
specified requirements.
INSTRUMENTS GENERAL 40 20 00- 6
01/2023
254.07.100
.The Contractor shall provide the services of factory trained technicians, tools, and
equipment to field calibrate, test, inspect, and adjust each instrument to its specified
performance requirement in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and
instructions. Any instrument which fails to meet any contract requirements, or any
published manufacturer performance specification for functional and operational
parameters, shall be repaired or replaced, at the discretion of the Engineer, at no cost
to the Owner. The Contractor shall bear all costs and provided all personnel,
equipment, and materials necessary to implement all installation tests and inspection
activities for equipment specified herein.
B.Field Instrument Calibration Requirements
1.Each instrument shall be calibrated at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span using
test instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs. Test instruments shall be rated
to an accuracy of at least five times greater than the specified accuracy of the
instrument being calibrated. Where applicable, such test instruments shall have
accuracies as set forth by the National Bureau of Standards.
2.The Contractor shall provide a written calibration sheet to the Engineer for each
instrument, certifying that it has been calibrated to its published specified accuracy.
This sheet shall include but not be limited to date, instrument tag numbers, calibration
data for the various procedures, name of person performing the calibration, listing of
published specified accuracy, permissible tolerance at each point of calibration,
calibration reading as finally adjusted within tolerance, defect noted, corrective action
required, and corrections made.
3.If doubt exists as to the correct method for calibrating or checking calibration of an
instrument, the manufacturer’s recommendations shall be used as an acceptable
standard, subject to approval of the Engineer.
4.Upon completion of calibration, devices calibrated hereunder shall not be subjected to
sudden movements, accelerations, or shocks, and shall be installed in permanent
protected positions not subject to moisture, dirt, and excessive temperature variations.
Caution shall be exercised to prevent such devices being subjected to overvoltages,
incorrect voltages, overpressures, or incorrect air. Damaged equipment shall be
replaced and recalibrated at no cost to the Owner.
5.Upon completion of instrumentation installation, the Contractor shall perform a loop
check. The Contractor shall submit final loop test results with all instruments listed in
the loop. Loop test results shall be signed by all representatives involved for each
loop test.
END OF SECTION

ULTRASONIC LEVEL MEASUREMENT 40 24 10 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 40 24 10 - ULTRASONIC LEVEL MEASUREMENT
1.1 REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install, and place into satisfactory operation the
Ultrasonic level sensor and transmitter systems, with all spare parts, accessories,
and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 40 10 00-Process Control and Information Systems
B. Section 40 20 00-Instruments, General
PART 2 -
PRODUCTS

2.1 ULTRASONIC LEVEL SENSORS/WITH REMOTE DISPLAY/TRANSMITTERS
A. The ultrasonic level transmitter shall be of the non-contact microprocessor based
type for the continuous measurement of liquid levels.
B. The unit shall be a two piece transmitter/display meter and transducer with
interconnecting cables.
C. The transmitter shall store the ultrasonic profile in the computer memory and
moment by moment, analyze the profile to determine the actual liquid level.
D. All program data shall be safeguarded internally in non-volatile EEPROM memory.
E. The transducer shall be encapsulated and shall be capable of:
1. Accuracy of ± 0.25% of range.
2. Range 0.8 to 26.2 feet.
3. Provide for flange mounting, or provide wall mounted mounting bracket as
detailed on the drawings.
4. With integral temperature compensation.
5. The unit shall utilize a narrow beam ultrasonic transducer which is rated
Class 1 Division 1, explosion proof. The unit shall be provided with factory
fabricated lead cable integral to sensor unit and shall extend to the meter unit
within the electrical room.
F. The control transmitter shall be in a NEMA 4X enclosure with an integral from panel
mounted meter indicating in scaled engineering units.
1. The unit shall provide a 4-20 mA analog output signal directly proportional to
level, driven from the PLC and its associated power supplies.
2. The unit shall be capable of displaying by software selection:
a. Distance to liquid surface from transmitter.
3. The unit shall contain four relays for use as programmable alarm points.
PART 1 -
GENERAL
ULTRASONIC LEVEL MEASUREMENT 40 24 10 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
4. Power requirements shall be 120 VAC
5. 4-20 mA output into 750 Ohms at 24 VDC.
6. Selectable damping 1 to 10 m/min.
7. 4 button HMI, wall mounted controller allowing for programming from the
panel face, including blanking distances and obstruction blanking.
G. The programming unit shall be incorporated into the body of the instrument.
H. Operating temperature range -40º to 60° C.
I. Mount transducer with non-metallic mounting only.
J. Hart Protocol.
K. Three wire extended range.
L. As manufactured by:
1. The system shall be Siemens Hydroranger LT500 with LR100 or LR110 level
transducer. The Hyrdroranger shall include accessories for ethernet
communication.
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
3.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to section 40 20 00.
B. Transducers shall be provided with flange mounting options. Mount to flanged
support rigidly attached to wall or concrete square and plumb to building. Sensor
shall be mounted to avoid all signal interferences.
END OF SECTION
PRESSURE SWITCHES AND SEALS 40 27 60 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
SECTION 40 27 60 - PRESSURE SWITCHES AND SEALS
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A.The Contractor shall furnish, test, install, and place into satisfactory operation the
pressure switches and seals with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances
as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings.
1.2 MANUFACTURERS
A.Section 40 10 00 – Process Control and information Systems
B.Section 40 20 00 – Instruments, General
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Pressure Instrumentation
A.Seals
1.All pressure switches and/or transmitters need not be provided with seals.
2.Pressure switches, gages, and/or transmitters and seals shall be
assembled and oil filled at the factory prior to shipment. Filling fluid shall be
compatible with piping contents and temperature.
3.Pressure switches and/or transducers attached to systems involving
chemical solutions, corrosive fluids, or other liquids containing one percent
or more of solids, shall be equipped with diaphragm or annular seals
whether shown or not on the drawings, or equal protective pressure
sensing devices, as follows:
a)Clear process water applications:
1.Type 316 stainless steel for pressures over 15 psi.
2.Elastomer for pressures of 15 psi and below.
3.Type 316 stainless steel nuts and bolts, fill
connection and valved flush port size of ¼-inch NPT,
capable of disassembly without loss of filler fluid.
4.As manufactured by:
a)Ashcroft Type 101
b)Or prior approved equal.
b)For chemical solutions, sludge, etc., where breakage does not
create major shutdown:
1. Seals with PVC body for removable mounting
rated at 200 psi.
2. Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts
3. ½-inch inlet
PART 1 - GENERAL
PRESSURE SWITCHES AND SEALS 40 27 60 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
4.¼-inch outlet
5. Liquid-filled with Teflon diaphragm for pressure.
6. Elastomer diaphragm for vacuum service.
c) For sludge, liquids containing solids, pulsating flow:
1. Pressure instrument protectors shall be of the
isolation ring type seal with integral instrument
removal device.
2. Construction
a.Unit consists of a body, 360 degree flexible
elastomeric cylinder with positive O-ring type
sealing arrangement, captive fill fluid and two
assembly flanges.
b.Includes integral instrument removal device
to remove instrumentation without
interrupting process flow. The isolation ring
I.D. shall match the pipeline I.D. The isolation
ring O.D. shall not exceed the I.D. of the
piping flange bolt circle. Units are
designed to fit 135#, 150# and 300# ANSI
piping flanges.
3. Materials
a)Body is 316 Stainless Steel unless otherwise required. Two
assembly flanges are 316 S.S. Flexible elastomeric cylinder is
Silicone. Captive sensing liquid is glycerin, Silicone or
Halocarbon as required for the piped fluid.
4.As manufactured by:
a) Ashcroft Type 80, 81.
b) Prior Approved Equal.
2.2 Pressure Switches High
a)General:
1)Enclosure NEMA 4X
2)Manual Reset trip on increasing pressure
3)DPDT
4)Actuator Seal: Teflon
5)Each pressure switch shall have visible scale and contact
operation.
b)Pressure switches shall have a contact rating of 10 amperes at 125
VAC.
c)Pressure switches shall be snap-action switches and shall be in
general-purpose enclosures at indoor installations, or weatherproof
enclosures at outdoor installations.
PRESSURE SWITCHES AND SEALS 40 27 60 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
d)Diaphragm seals shall be provided and included at the locations
shown.
e)Automatic reset
g)Standard Ranges:
1)10” H20, Proof psi 20, Burst psi 35
2)30” H20, Proof psi 20, Burst psi 35
3)60” H20, Proof psi 20, Burst psi 35
4)100” H20, Proof psi 20, Burst psi 35
5)150” H20, Proof psi 20, Burst psi 35
6)15” H20, Proof psi 500, Burst psi 1000
7)30” H20, Proof psi 500, Burst psi 1500
8)60” H20, Proof psi 500, Burst psi 1500
9)100” H20, Proof psi 1000, Burst psi 3000
10)200” H20, Proof psi 1000, Burst psi 3000
11)400” H20, Proof psi 2400, Burst psi 3000
12)600” H20, Proof psi 2400, Burst psi 3000
h)As manufactured by:
13)Mercoid.
14)Or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REQUIREMENTS
A.See Section 40 20 00.
END OF SECTION
PRESSURE GAUGES 40 91 20 - 1
01/2023
254.07.100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install, and place into satisfactory operation the
pressure gauges and seals with all spare parts, accessories, and appurtenances
as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings.
1.2 RELATED SPECIFICATION SECTIONS
A. Section 40 10 00 – Process Control and information Systems
B. Section 40 20 00 – Instruments, General
C. Section 40 27 60 – Pressure Switches and Seals
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00.
B. Product Data
1. Complete manufacturer’s brochures; identify instrument construction,
accuracy, ranges, materials and options.
2. Complete instrument data sheets, including catalog number and source
for determining catalog number for all gauges and seals.
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRESSURE GAUGES MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pressure, Vacuum, Compound Gauges.
1. General
a. Furnish and install pressure and vacuum gauges as specified;
complete, including all fittings, connections, gaskets, supports and
accessories in the locations shown or specified, in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
b. Pressure gauges shall be provided whether or not shown on
the plans:
1) On discharge connection to all pumps.
2) In other locations as shown on the P&IDs and/or
mechanical plans.
c. Sleeve pressure gauges
1) Shall be provided where shown on the plans.
SECTION 40 91 20 - PRESSURE GAUGES
PRESSURE GAUGES 40 91 20 - 2
01/2023
254.07.100
2) Pressure shall be sensed by a flexible sleeve contained in
a flanged cast iron or steel spool or wafer body, and
transmitted to the gauge through a captive fluid.
3) Sleeve shall be of BUNA A and fabricated so as to isolate
the body from the process liquid.
4) Gauges shall be calibrated to read in applicable units.
5) Accuracy of ±1% to 150% of the working pressure of the
system to which they are connected.
2. Construction
a. Gauges shall be industrial quality type with Type 316 stainless
steel movement.
b. Phenolic case.
c. Liquid filled.
d. Unless otherwise shown or specified, gauges shall have:
1) A 4 ½ inch dial.
2) ½ inch threaded connection.
3) Type pulsation dampener adapter.
a) Pulsation Dampener as manufactured by:
b) Cajon Co.
c) Weksler Instruments, Corp.
d) Ashcroft.
e) No equals.
4) A block and bleed valve – ½ inch national pipe thread
process connection and bleed/calibrate valve between
block valve and outlet port.
e. Gauges shall be calibrated to read in applicable engineering units.
f. Accuracy of ±0.5% to 150% of the working pressure or vacuum of
the pipe or vessel to which they are connected.
g. All gauges shall be vibration and shock resistant.
3. Gauges general as manufactured by:
a. Ashcroft Industrial Instruments (Dresser). With Plus Performance.
b. Forboro/Jordan, Inc. Equivalent model
4. Gauges sleeve pressure as manufactured by:
a. Red Valve Co., Inc.
b. Ronningen-Petter.
c. Onyx.
d. No Equal.
PRESSURE GAUGES 40 91 20 - 3
01/2023
254.07.100
4. Pulsation dampeners as manufactured by:
a. Cajon Co.
b. Weksler Instruments, Corp.
c. Ashcroft.
d. No Equal.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Gauges shall be liquid filled or have some equivalent technology.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. All instruments and/or representative instruments shall be calibrated to in
facilities and with instruments traceable to the National Bureau of Standards.
1. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration
instruments.
PART 2 -
EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures and temperatures
and furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure the mechanical system has all
necessary appurtenances, weldolets, valves, orientation, etc. for proper installation
of the instruments.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. All instruments shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
1. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to install all instruments in
conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to notify the ENGINEER of any
installation conditions that may be shown at variance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Install two 2 –valve instrument manifolds for each gauge pressure transmitter.
4. Bolt 3 valve manifolds at non-flange diaphragm type differential pressure
transmitters in place of standard flange adapters.
5. Install root valves at process taps except insertion elements.
6. Install gauge valves on process connections to instruments where multiple
instruments are connected to one tap or where root valves are not readily
accessible.
7. All gauges shall be installed with the face in the vertical position.
8. In strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
PRESSURE GAUGES 40 91 20 - 4
01/2023
254.07.100
9. At the locations shown on the drawings, when so shown.
10. Care shall be taken to minimize the effect of water hammer or vibrations on the
gauges.
11. In extreme cases, and with the approval of the ENGINEER, gauges may be
mounted independently, with flexible connectors.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Instrumentation and Control Systems Contractor shall calibrate all instruments in
the field during the Calibration and Loop Validation Tests as identified in Section 40
10 00.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. All instruments shall be field verified.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Performance of all instruments shall be demonstrated to the ENGINEER prior to
commissioning.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. All instruments shall be fully protected after installation and before commissioning.
The CONTRACTOR shall replace any instruments damaged prior to commissioning.
1. The ENGINEER shall be the sole party responsible for determining the
corrective measures.
3.8 SCHEDULES
A. The following instrument data sheets are included as a guideline for the supply of the
instruments. These sheets are not complete and the instrument selection shall be the
CONTRACTOR’s responsibility. Changes may be made to the instrument materials,
ranges, etc. as part of the submittal review. The CONTRACTOR shall provide
documented evidence for a differential, plus or minus, that results from these
changes.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall supply complete instrument data sheets for each and
every instrument and submit this information in accordance with paragraph 1.05 of
this section.
1. Instrument data sheets shall be furnished in both hard copy and electronic
format.
END OF SECTION

04/2023 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES MEASUREMENT DEVICES
254.07.100 PAGE 40 91 23 - 1
SECTION 40 91 23
MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES MEASUREMENT DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This section covers the Work necessary to install a ready to use and tested process and
analysis system. CONTRACTOR shall provide all components required for a complete
and functional system.
RELATED WORK
Related Work in other sections includes, but is not limited to Section 01 33 00
Submittal Procedures. See also the following related Sections:
40 10 00 Process Control and Instrumentation
40 11 00 Programable Logic Controller
40 12 50 Pressure Transmitter
40 15 10 Process Control Strategies
40 20 00 Instruments General
40 21 20 Ultrasonic Level Measurement
40 27 60 Pressure Switches and Seals
40 91 20 Pressure Gauges
REFERENCES
Work covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest
editions of the following Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the
Contract. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C 207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service—Sizes 4 In. Through
144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm)
AWWA C 751 Magnetic Inductive Flowmeters
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF) / ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components -
Health Effects
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Submit catalog cuts on all process equipment including: switches, meters, sensors, or
other items shown on Contract Drawings referencing each item by mark number.
Information shall indicate manufacturer specification compliance and dimensional data.
CONTRACTOR shall supply operation and maintenance manuals for all process
equipment.

04/2023 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES MEASUREMENT DEVICES
254.07.100 PAGE 40 91 23 - 2
WARRANTY
Manufacturer shall provide to OWNER written guarantee against defects in material or
workmanship for a period of one (1) year.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the
weather, humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.
Each system shall be factory calibrated and certified prior to delivery.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for any systems. Full
compensation for the system shall be considered as included in the contract unit or
lump sum bid prices for the various items of the contract to which it relates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Equipment to be furnished under this section shall be the product of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the design and manufacturing of this type of equipment. The
manufacturer shall assume responsibility for, and guarantee performance of equipment
furnished. However, this shall not be construed as relieving CONTRACTOR from
responsibility for the proper installation and functionality of the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
GENERAL
Each process measurement system shall typically consist of a sensor and
analyzer/transmitter. Where shown on the Contract Drawings, the analyzer/transmitter
may be utilized for multiple sensors. When an analyzer/transmitter is used for multiple
sensors, it shall be capable of displaying simultaneously each process measurement.
Each analyzer/transmitter shall be equipped with a means to transmit process
measurement data to the plant SCADA system.
For hardwired signals, unless indicated otherwise on Contract Drawings, provide the
following:
a. 4-20 mA output signals for each process measurement (for up to 500 Ohm
loads).
b. Two programmable SPDT relay outputs, rated at 5A up to 230 VAC, for each
process measurement.

Where shown on the Contract Drawings, provide the following digital
communications to the plant SCADA system:

04/2023 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES MEASUREMENT DEVICES
254.07.100 PAGE 40 91 23 - 3
a. HART Protocol
b. PROFIBUS
c. MODBUS
Each analyzer/transmitter shall be powered by 115VAC (+/- 10%) at 60 Hz unless
shown on Contract Drawings as being powered by 24 VDC (+/- 15%). Each
analyzer/transmitter shall retain its programmable settings in non-volatile memory.
Battery powered instruments, analyzer, or transmitters will not be accepted.
Each sensor and corresponding analyzer/transmitter shall be supplied as a complete
and operable system. This includes all cabling, mounting hardware and fasteners.
When installed outdoors, the analyzer/transmitter shall be protected from the sun such
that direct sunlight will not shine on the display.
All analyzers/transmitters shall be waterproof and made from corrosion resistant
materials.
All sensors to be immersed in liquids shall be rated for permanent submersion and
shall be corrosion resistant.
MAGNETIC FLOW METERS
Magnetic flow meters shall be the low the low frequency induction type which produces
a DC pulsed signal directly proportional to and linear with the flow rate. Liners shall be
polyurethane. Flow meters shall be rated at 250 psi. Standard output shall be an
analog 4-20 mA signal with a local indication from a liquid crystal display (LCD) reading
in gallons per minute flow. The meter shall also have a totalizer (with pulsed output),
and non-full pipe detection. Meters shall have a minimum of 2 self-cleaning electrodes.
CONTRACTOR shall field verify length of cable for connection.
Flanged connections shall be constructed of Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel with
pressure ratings to match the connecting pipe.
Liner shall be polyurethane or PTFE and electrodes stainless steel suitable for potable
water service. Liners and electrodes for service other than potable water shall be
constructed of materials conforming to the manufacturer’s recommendation for the
intended service.
Meter housing shall be rated for NEMA 6 for submersible operation.
Meters shall include grounding rings.
The transmitter shall have six digit LCD displays for flow rate, percent of span, and
totalization; be capable of measuring flow in both directions; automatic range change;
capability to convert DC pulse signal from the tube to a standardized 4 to 20 mA DC
signal into a minimum of 700 ohms; self-diagnostics and automatic data checking, and
a scaleable frequency output, 0 to 100 Hz.
The flow measuring system shall conform to the following:
Time constant: 0.5 to 1000 seconds; galvanic or optic isolation

07/2023 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES MEASUREMENT DEVICES
254.07.100 PAGE 40 91 23 - 4
Accuracy: 0.50 percent of flow rate from 10 to 100 percent full scale velocities over
3 feet per second.
Repeatability: 0.25 percent of full scale
Power consumption: 30 watts or less
Power requirements: 120 VAC, plus or minus 10 percent, unless indicated
otherwise on the Contract Drawings. Battery powered flow meters will not be
accepted.
Magnetic flow meters shall be Proline Promag W400 by Endress+Hauser, or
Engineer Approved equal by Siemens, or approved equal.
FLUORIDE FLOW METER
See Section 46 31 12 Fluoride Chemical Process System.
HIGH PRESSURE SHUTOFF SWITCH
See Section 40 27 60, Pressure Switches and Seals. A high-pressure shutoff switch
shall be installed on each pump discharge pipe as shown on Drawings, and shall be as
specified in the Electrical Drawings. The switch setting shall be adjustable as specified
on the drawings. The switch shall be rated for the pressure of the system where it is
installed with a safety factor of 1.5.
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
See Section 40 12 50, Pressure Transmitter. A pressure transmitter is required at well
head. Other pressure transmitters are also shown on plans and / or called out in
specified systems.
The pressure transmitter shall be an electronic pressure transducer tailored to the
installation as shown on the drawings and suitable for the planned application. The
system shall include a pressure transducer with integral diaphragm seal. The pressure
transmitter shall operate on 24 VDC, and shall provide a 4-20 mA DC signal to the
RTU panel. The loop signal shall measure the water pressure and have a 4-20 mA
signal output. The pressure transmitter shall have a LCD display showing the pressure
in “psi”. The pressure transmitter shall be coded “DW” for NSF drinking water
certification. Pressure transmitters shall be Rosemount Series 2088, or approved
equal.
PRESSURE GAGE
See Section 40 91 20, Pressure Gauges. Pressure gage shall be Ashcroft 1279 with
Performance Plus and these features:
Engineered dampening media (EDM)
1106 pulsation dampener
Range -15 psi to +200 psi

04/2023 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES MEASUREMENT DEVICES
254.07.100 PAGE 40 91 23 - 5
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
All equipment shall be mounted and installed as per manufacturer recommendations.
Coordinate final location with ENGINEER.
FLOW METER FIELD CALIBRATION AND QUALITY CONTROL
Each instrument shall be tested before commissioning and ENGINEER shall witness
the interface capability in the PLC control system and associated registers.
Each instrument shall provide direct programming capability through the PLC
Each instrument shall provide direct control of totalizer reset functions through PLC
Each instrument shall be supported with a device profile permitting direct
integration in the PLC
ENGINEER shall witness all instrument verifications in the field.
Manufacturers Field Services shall be provided for start-up and commissioning by a
Factory field service representative or a manufacturer’s authorized service provider
(ASP).
Manufacturer representative shall verify installation of all installed flow tubes and
transmitters.
Manufacturer representative shall notify ENGINEER in writing of any problems or
discrepancies and proposed solutions.
Manufacturer representative shall perform field verification at the time of installation
for long-term analysis of device linearity, repeatability and electronics health. A
comparative report shall be generated for each meter tested.
Manufacturer representative shall generate a configuration report for each meter
Meters shall be field calibrated to verify proper operation within the expected flow
ranges for the project.
TESTING
After installation of the equipment is complete, operating tests shall be carried out to
assure that the equipment operates properly. All piping shall be tested hydrostatically
and for leaks. If any deficiencies are revealed during any tests, such deficiencies shall
be corrected and the tests shall be reconducted.
- END OF SECTION –

04/2023 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES MEASUREMENT DEVICES
254.07.100 PAGE 40 91 23 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
03/2023 FLUORIDE CHEMICAL PROCESS SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 31 12 - 1
SECTION 46 31 12
FLUORIDE CHEMICAL PROCESS SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
This section covers work to provide a complete, tested, and ready-to-use fluoride
chemical process system. Provide all components required for a complete and functional
system. Fluoride chemical process system shall comply with current US and
international standards for fluoride chemical processes for drinking water systems.
RELATED WORK
Related Work in other Sections includes, but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 33 05 07.1 PVC Pressure Pipe ASTM D 1785
Section 33 05 11 HDPE Pressure Pipe C901, C906
Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances
Section 40 91 23 Miscellaneous Properties Measurement Devices
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. Work covered by
this Specification shall meet or exceed the provisions of the latest editions of the following
Codes and Standards in effect at the time of award of the Contract.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM B 16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300
ASTM B 88 Seamless Copper Water Tube
ASTM D 1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Compound
(PVC) Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds.
ASTM D 1785 Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D 1998 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks
ASTM D 2466 Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM D 2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride
(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems
ASTM F 441 Standard Specification For Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 And 80
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION
AWWA B703 Standard for Fluorosilicic Acid
AWWA C800 Standard for Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings
AWWA C900 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe & Fabricated
Fittings, 4 In. to 12 In., for Waster Distribution

03/2023 FLUORIDE CHEMICAL PROCESS SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 31 12 - 2
AWWA C901 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 3/4 in to 3 in for
Water Service
AWWA M4 Water Fluoridation Principles & Practices
AWWA M23 PVC Pipe - Design and Installation
AWWD M55 PE Pipe - Design and Installation
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING & MECHANICAL OFFICIALS (IAPMO)
INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC)
INTERNATION PLUMBING COED (IPC)
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Submit manufacturer’s literature, installation instructions, product test reports and
technical data. Submit manufacturer’s certification that the proposed materials and
equipment comply with this Section, including each applicable referenced standard.
Submit operation and maintenance manuals for all fluoride equipment.
WARRANTEE
Provide to OWNER written guarantee against defects in material or workmanship for a
period of two (2) years.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Materials and equipment be delivered and stored in areas protected from the weather,
sun, rain, snow, wind, humidity, heat, cold, temperature variation, dirt and dust, and shall
not be allowed to become wet, soiled, or otherwise damaged.
Manufacturer's recommendations for handling storage and protection shall be strictly
followed.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
There shall be no separate measurement and payment for the fluoride chemical system.
Full compensation for the fluoride chemical system shall be considered as included in the
contract unit or lump sum bid prices for the various items of the contract to which it relates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
FLUORIDE SYSTEM
The fluoride system shall be complete with all piping and fittings as recommended by the
manufacturer and as shown on the Drawings. Supply fire extinguishers designed for the
plastics and chemicals in the fluoride system.
STORAGE TANKS: BULK AND DAY TANK
Tanks shall be of the manufacturer, type and size indicate in the Drawings.
03/2023 FLUORIDE CHEMICAL PROCESS SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 31 12 - 3
The storage tank systems shall consist of a primary tank and a secondary containment
tank. Manways and covers in the tank tops shall be made of crosslinked polyethylene
and shall be fume tight. Tanks shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 1998, Type I:
Tanks molded from cross linkable polyethylene. Tanks may be either dome or flat top
Resin Type
Resin used shall be 100% virgin, UV-stabilized, 35 mesh crosslinkable high density
polyethylene.
Tanks shall have weatherability equal to that of PAXON grade 7004 natural.
Resins shall meet or exceed the following properties listed in Table 1, below.

TABLE 1 - RESIN PROPERTIES

Classification

ASTM Test

Nominal Value

Density

D1505

0.944 g/cm3

Tensile strength at yeild

D638

3,000 psi

Elongation at Break

D638

400%

Tensile modulus of
elasticity

D638

80,000 psi

Flexural modulus

D790

100,000 psi

Heat deflection
temperature, 66 psi load

D648

138 F

Vicat softening
temperature

D1525

248 F

Impact brittleness
temperature

D746

<-180 F

Dart Impact (-40F)

ARM Std.

120 ft. lb

Environmental stress
crack Resistence

D1693

>1,000 hrs

Tank Design: Tank design standards shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 1998.
Molded part lines shall be located above the lower 1/3 of the straight side wall of the tank.
The inner tank wall shall yield gel test results of no less than 65%; entire wall thickness
must be more than 80% gelled. Rotationally molded crosslinked polyethylene tanks shall
have an uninterrupted bottom knuckle radius for maximum strength per design
requirements in ASTM 1998.
Fittings shall be provided as shown on referenced drawings. All fittings shall be located
away from the bottom knuckle radius. Fittings and gaskets must be chemically compatible
with the materials to br handled in the tanks. All fittings shall terminate in socket, threaded
or flanged connections. Flanges shall match 150 lb ANSI, all threaded plumbing
03/2023 FLUORIDE CHEMICAL PROCESS SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 31 12 - 4
connections shall be standard American Pipe thread cut. Any fittings used on upper tank
sidewall or top of tank may be PVC Bulkhead Fittings
Tanks shall have a leak detection system between the primary and secondary tank walls.
The detection sensor shall be a DC Optic Leak Detection device as manufactured by
Intellitank (or equal), capable of being connected to a PLC input.
Seismic restraint shall be supplied and the design for same certified by a licensed
Structural Engineer. Design shall conform to the latest edition of the Uniform Building
Code. Detailed instructions for installation shall be provided, along with all necessary
hardware including anchor bolts. All components of the restraint system shall be protected
against the chemical stored in the tank.
Tanks shall have a warranty for five (5) years to be free of defects in material and
workmanship. The warranty shall fully cover the tank during the first 3 years of service
and be prorated during the remaining two years of warranty period.
A appropriate height ladder if required shall be provided to access the top of the tank
Manufactures shall be one who is regularly engaged in the business of designing and
fabricating crosslinked polyethylene storage tanks. Tanks shall be manufactured by
Central California Container Mfg., Inc., Polyprocessing, or approved equal.
DOSING PUMPS – POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT TYPE
The chemical dosing pump shall be a chemical electronic metering pump designed for
fluoridation. Pumps shall be rated for an maximun feed rate as noted on the drawings or
specified herein. Pumps shall be capable of manual adjustment and instrument
responsive external control for an automatic system. Pumps shall be capable of injection
to a system pressure of 250 psi or as noted on the drawings. Pumps shall have anti-
siphon valves and pressure relief.
Pumps shall be rated for 120 VAC, with a non standard plug (twist lock) for electrical
service. Duty cycle shall be continuous.
Pumps shall be positive displacement, Liquifram type pumps wit NEMA 4X/IP-65
enclosure, and meet IP-68 standards with max capacity of 0.25 GPH (6.0 GPD), and
capable of injecting fluoride solutions into piping with up to 250 psi pressure. Pump “liquid
end” materials shall be as follows: housing (glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic); head
(acrylic); fittings (PVDF); balls (Teflon); seats and o-rings (polyprel); head screws
(stainless steel). Provide petroleum jelly to cover stainless steel screws so they don’t
corrode in fluorine gas.
Pump shall be LMI AD21 1919SI, or approved equal.
DOSING PUMPS – PERISTALTIC TYPE (not used)
The chemical dosing pump - peristaltic type shall be a chemical electronic metering pump
designed for fluoridation. Pumps shall be rated for an maximum feed rate as noted on the
drawings or specified herein. Pumps shall be capable of manual adjustment and
instrument responsive external control for an automatic system. Pumps shall be capable
of injection to a system pressure of 100 or 75 psi as noted. Pumps shall be capable of a
03/2023 FLUORIDE CHEMICAL PROCESS SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 31 12 - 5
minimum suction lift of 30 feet of water. Pumps shall have anti-siphon valves.
Pumps shall be rated for 120 VAC, with a non standard plug (twist lock) for electrical
service. Duty cycle shall be rated continuous.
Pumps shall be Blue-White Model A-100N with Option-E.
TRANSFER PUMP
Mount the transpher pump atop of the tank.
The transfer pump shall be a Diaphragm Pump designed for fluoridation. Pumps shall be
capable of lifts up to 20 feet, system pressures of 10 psi, and flows of 20 gpm minimum.
Pumps shall be Lutz (barrel pump) or Engineer approved equal.
A compressor shall be supplied with the transfer pump rated for the pump operation. The
compressor and air supply piping shall include a regular, desiccant dryer (10 scfm
minimum), flow control valve, solenoid valve, and isolation valve.
The compressor shall be 1 hp, 1700 rpm, 120 vac, 60 hz, with a 4.5 gallon tank, Rol-Air
model no. D1000LPV5 or approved equal.
CALIBRATION COLUMN
Calibration columns shall be 100ml capacity with ½" NPT(F) threads bottom connection
with dust cover top. They shall be made of PVC with Mylar polyester-film shroud.
Columns shall be Accudraw PV#3-100, Cole-Parmer P-74600-01 or approved equal.
ELECTRONIC DRUM SCALE
The Contractor shall furnish and install one (1) electronic drum scale of 0-400 lbs.
capacity. Scale shall be of the digital readout/electronic load cell type. Platform height
shall be no more than 2" to permit easy loading and unloading of drums. Platform shall
be epoxy powder coated steel. The unit shall be designed and fully warranted for
continuous operation, and shall use 115 VAC, 60 hertz.
The scale shall include a wall mounted backlit digital indicator. Indicator shall output net
weight via a 4-20 mA signal for remote monitoring. All indicator operations shall be menu
prompted for ease of operation. Operator shall be able to monitor chemical by weight,
volume or percent full. An “Auto Load” function shall automatically compensate for tank
tare weight during tank change. A data log function shall store the “Daily Usage” for each
of the previous 10 days. Full-scale accuracy shall be better than 1/4 of 1% and display to
0.1 lbs. The unit shall have a set of alarm relays for a low condition. The scales and
indicator shall be Models No. 27-DR4DS and Solo 1000, respectively, as manufactured
by Force Flow/Floquip, or approved equal.
RADAR LEVEL SENSOR
Radar level sensors shall be suitable for measurement of fluoridation liquids. The gauge
shall operate on the Frequency Modulated Continuous Wave (FMCW) principle with an
output signal directly proportional to process level, distance or volume.
03/2023 FLUORIDE CHEMICAL PROCESS SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 31 12 - 6
The sensor assembly and signal converter shall be an integral, compact unit. Converter
shall be capable of operation with wave stick antenna which shall mount directly to
standard 2 inch ANSI flange.
The unit shall be powered by the A 4-20mA current loop. The maximum loop resistance
shall be 750 Ohms. The output shall provide a continuous analog output of signal directly
proportional to volume. The gauge shall be capable of local and remote interrogation
and/or configuration.
On-site startup assistance and operator training shall be required.
The radar level sensor shall be Krohne Model BM702 or approved equal.
LEVEL SENSOR - MILLTRONICS
Level sensors shall be suitable for measurement of fluoridation liquids. The gauge shall
be operated on the ultrasonic principle with an output signal directly proportional to
process level, distance or volume
The level transmitter shall be immune to corrosive and harsh environments. The
transducer shall have an integral temperature sensor to compensate fro temperature
changes. The transducer shall mount directly to standard 2 inch ANSI flange.
Transducers shall be Milltronics or ABB Model No. ST-H.
The Level Instrumentation Ultrasonic Interface Unit shall be Milltronics Miniranger or ABB
Datum UI/1000 or approved equal. The unit shall have a volume conversion feature for
measurement of the Bulk Storage Tank in gallons.
ELECTRONIC FLOW METER – ULTRASONIC METER
The electronic flow meter shall measure flow of the acid solution. The meter shall be 1/12"
in size with ½" flange PVC coupling ends. The accuracy shall be ± 0.2%. and be able to
read in units of gallons. Supply voltage shall be 85 to 260 VAC, 45 to 65 Hz and have the
output/input option of Current / HART, frequency.
The unit shall be Keyence ultrasonic clamp on flow meter (3 parts): FD-XS20 (sensor) +
FD-XC20R4 (bracket) + FD-XA1 (controller) as called out on the Drawings.
Provide an Ethernet connection to Owner’s (WBWCD) system for Owner to continuously
monitor metered fluoride flows.
EMERGENCY EYE WASH AND SHOWER
Emergency eye wash and showers shall meet ANSI Standards. Showers shall be floor
mounted combination eye/face wash station. Inlet piping shall be 1" and have a 150 psi
rating. Showers shall be Speakman Company, Emergency Station, Northern # 108-1217
or approved equal.
Benches in shower rooms shall be preformed fiberglass with stainless steel supports.
Provide a minimum of four wall hooks for installation in the shower room.
03/2023 FLUORIDE CHEMICAL PROCESS SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 31 12 - 7
EMERGENCY SHOWER WATER SUPPLY LINE AND TEMPERING TANK
The Contractor shall furnish and install the water supply line as shown on the drawings
including all tubing, valves, air release valve, couplings, and any other accessories
necessary to have a complete and ready-to-use system
The eye wash and shower shall have a minimum 80 gallon capacity tempering tank
mounted as recommended by the manufacturer and shown on the drawings. The tank
shall be glass lined per ASME HLW procedures using NSF approved glass lining
compound. The tank shall have replaceable magnesium anodes, threaded openings on
each end, and be rated for 150 psi minimum.
Tanks shall be A.O. Smith Water Products or approved equal.
PIPING AND TUBING
Piping and tubing shall be suitable to handle the materials carried as recommended by
the manufacturer.
PVC piping and fittings shall be schedule 80 unless otherwise noted. Only Teflon tape
shall be use for joint gaskets.
Tubing shall be Teflon PFA with a 3/64" wall for 1/4" and 1/16" wall for larger sizes. Fittings
for tubing shall be “O” Ring & Grab Ring type as manufactured by Parker or approved
equal.
Hose fittings shall be nylon with double hose clamps.
Hose shall be reinforced clear PVC.
MULTI-POINT TOXIC GAS DETECTION SYSTEM
A multi-point gas detector shall be supplied for monitoring the concentration of Fluorine
and Hydrogen Fluoride in the Well House. The system shall consist of a NEMA 4X alarm
module and a remote mounted gas sensor/transmitter for each specified gas. A
sensor/transmitter shall provide the gas measurement function for the system. The
sensor/transmitters shall consist of a stable electrochemical gas sensor that shall
generate a signal linearly proportional to gas concentration. The entire assembly shall be
coated to minimize RFI interference. Each sensor/transmitter shall be supplied with an
electrochemical gas generator closely coupled to the sensor which shall automatically
generate a small concentration of gas every 24 hours to verify sensor operation. During
the verification test, alarm relays shall be inhibited. A battery backup module shall be
supplied to provide standby power to the gas detector. The battery backup module shall
be housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure and shall be suitable for operating the detector for at
least 4 hours.
Two programmable alarm setpoints shall be provided for warning personnel of differing
levels of leakage. Gas leak alarms shall be indicated by flashing LED indicators on the
alarm receiver and activation of the SCADA system. The concentration of the gas shall
be displayed directly in PPM units. Three alarm relays shall be provided for external
alarming functions. Each alarm relay shall be independently assignable to either the low
or the high alarm setpoint, and shall be provided on each receiver to indicate the loss of
03/2023 FLUORIDE CHEMICAL PROCESS SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 31 12 - 8
signal from the sensor/transmitter, or to alarm the loss of sensitivity of the gas sensor.
Each receiver shall provide an isolated 4-20 mA output signal proportional to gas
concentration, and shall also contain remote reset input terminals to allow alarm
acknowledge from a remote location.
The gas detection system shall be ATI Series A14 or approved equal.
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall furnish the Safety Equipment listed below in Table 2 -Safety Equipment.

TABLE 2 - SAFETY EQUIPMENT (NIOSH approved where applicable)

Description

Quantity (per site)

Notes

Cartridge Respirator with Full-Face
Shield

2 ea

Northern #152-4340

Chemical Cartridges

5 sets (10)

Northern #153-7253

Gauntlet neoprene gloves (12" glove
minimum length)

6 pair

Northern #121-9934

Full-Face Shield (8" min.)

2 ea

Northern #107-1283

Heavy Duty acid type neoprene aprons

2 ea

Northern #136-1372

12" latex Hazmat Boot Covers

4 pair (Owner to
select sizes)

Northern #145-1473

Spill Containment Drum

5 ea

Northern #195-9877

Spill Containment Pallets

Sets of 1x2 and
2x3 drum pallets.
Including link locks

Northern #195-9882
Northern #195-9884
Northern #195-9886

Combination Emergency Station
(Shower/eyewash)

1 ea

Northern # 108-1217

Tempering Water Storage Tank - 80
gallons

1ea

See paragraph 2.06
B

Wash down Hose with nozzle (Connect
to combination emergency station)

1 ea

Northern #108-1219

Spill control pillows (foamed-sand type)
or Maintenance Sorbents

Capacity: 50 Gal.

Northern #200-17817

Disposable Towels w/ Dispenser

1 dispenser w/ 6
towel rolls

Northern #109-6628

Hazardous Material Identification Signs

1 sign ea door (10"
x 10") and storage
tank (4 ½" x 4 ½")

Northern #233-
5321R
Northern #233-5319P
03/2023 FLUORIDE CHEMICAL PROCESS SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 31 12 - 9

PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
All equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers directions. Weight of valves, hoses
and equipment must not be carried by the fittings themselves. Proper support for all
equipment shall be provided.
The fluoride dosing pump shall not be mounted higher than 4 feet above the highest liquid
level of the day tank. Fluoride injection points shall have anti-siphon valves and diffuser
piping as required mounted on a 45 degree angle off of vertical from the floor.
If noted on the drawings, the bulk fluoride storage tank shall be installed with a 6" high
curb around the perimeter. The floor within the berm area shall slope to a low point at
which a leak sensor shall be mounted. Vents shall extend to the outside of structures and
be turned down and be equipped with a non-corrodible screen.
START UP AND TESTING
Contractor and Fluoride Equipment Supplier (FES) shall verify that structures, equipment,
pumps and motors are compatible for an efficient system.
Contractor and FES shall make equipment adjustments required to place system in proper
operating condition.
Contractor and FES shall test the Fluoride feed system for proper operation in the
presence of the Owner and Engineer.
The FES shall furnish all testing equipment and devices required.
If the Fluoride feed system fails to meet any of the specified performance requirements,
Contractor and/or FES shall modify and/or replace defective equipment until it meets
specified requirements. Re-test system to verify satisfactory operation.
Demonstrate the accuracy of each dosing pump using job supplied calibration column.
The Contractor shall, after installation of storage tanks is complete but before piping
connections are made, block all outlets and fill each tank with water to again check for
leaks. No leakage will be permitted.
The FES field services:
03/2023 FLUORIDE CHEMICAL PROCESS SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 31 12 - 10
Retain, for a period of not less than one (1) day per site for installation of fluoride
system factory trained representatives. For installation, the representative shall
perform the services listed below:
a. Inspect the completed installation and prepare an inspection report.
b. Test, calibrate and adjust all components for optimum performance.
c. Assist in initial start-up and field testing.
d. Instruct Owner’s personnel in the operation and user maintenance of all
components. Conduct a training seminar at the site.
e. Supervise the correction of any defective or faulty work before and after
acceptance by Owner.
The Contractor shall be responsible to supply all chemicals required for testing.
All piping shall be tested hydrostatically for leaks. If any deficiencies are revealed during
any tests, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be reconducted.

- END OF SECTION -

07/2023 ON-SITE HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 33 13 - 1
SECTION 46 33 13
ON-SITE HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
Scope
The On-Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System shall be installed by the On-
Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System Supplier (SUPPLIER) under
subcontract to and with specific support from CONTRACTOR. The Equipment and
installation shall be complete and operational. This requirement includes delivery of
the On-Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System equipment; the installation of
SUPPLIER’s equipment; startup of the complete system; and training of OWNER’s
personnel.
SUPPLIER shall furnish all materials; equipment; above ground piping and valves
shown on the sodium hypochlorite generation and feed system schematic shown on
the drawings; and other appurtenances required to furnish, test and place into
satisfactory operation the complete sodium hypochlorite generator feed system
indicated on the drawing, and as specified herein.
CONTRACTOR shall perform all other work not performed by SUPPLER concurrent
to the work provided by SUPPLIER, in order to provide a fully functional and
operating system.
General
The On-Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System SUPPLIER shall warrant and
support all of the components of the On-Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation
System as if they were components of its own manufacture regardless of the source.
SUPPLIER shall supply all component pieces and shall maintain all overall “single
source responsibility” for the complete system. As is practical, SUPPLIER shall take
responsibility for the design and implementation of the equipment at the Breeze Tank
Site and will immediately bring to ENGINEER’s attention any portion of the design
which may have a negative impact to the performance of the On-Site Sodium
Hypochlorite Generation System.
SUPPLIER shall certify within 5 days of contract award that the proposed plans and
specifications are complete and adequate to support acceptable system operation.
Drawings show a layout of the generation system, various components and the
system’s overall relationships. Not all items incidental to the On-Site Sodium
Hypochlorite Generation System are shown or specified. It is the intent of these
specifications that SUPPLIER is to provide a complete and workable system whether
or not any specific component is shown or specified.
Related work specified in other sections includes but is not limited to:
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements
Section 05 45 00 Mechanical Metal Supports (Pipe Supports)
Section 22 10 10 Plumbing and Piping Specialties
Section 33 05 07 PVC Pressure Pipe (ASTM D1785)
Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances
07/2023 ON-SITE HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 33 13 - 2
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Shop Drawings:
Make and Model of each equipment assembly.
Provide a plan view layout showing equipment location at the site to scale.
Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and
identification of materials of construction.
Outside utility requirements: ie air, water, power, drain, etc. - for each component.
Functional description of internal and external instrumentation and controls to be
supplied including list of parameters monitored, controlled, or alarmed.
Provide power and control wiring diagrams including terminals and numbers.
Submit design for seismic bracing of tank, equipment, and piping signed by a
professional engineer licensed in the State of Utah.
Quality Control Submittals:
Factory functional and performance test reports and log.
Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance that the factory finish system is in
accordance with the requirements specified herein.
System shipping, storage, protection, and handling instructions.
Manufacturer's written/printed installation instructions.
Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation.
List of special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to
and during startup and for future maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
SPARE PARTS
Furnish, tag and box for shipment and long-term storage the following spare parts and
special tools:
Two replacement bellows cups (one for brine pump and one for fresh water).
Two replacement pop-it check valves (one for brine pump and one for fresh water).
WARRANTY
Prior to acceptance of the On-Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System, provide
written warranty from the system manufacturer that includes the following statements:
SUPPLIER has inspected the installation during and after completion and the On-
Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System is free from faults and defects and is in
conformance with the Contract Documents.
The On-Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System will remain free of defects for a
period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance.
If the equipment requires repair or replacement as a result of ordinary wear and tear
under normal conditions, the system manufacturer will repair or replace such
equipment as required without cost to OWNER.
System manufacturer will provide a seven (7) year guarantee for replacement of the
cell pack; 0-2 years full replacement, 3-7 years prorated straight line.
07/2023 ON-SITE HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 33 13 - 3
System manufacturer will provide a two (2) year parts and labor guarantee for the
power supply.
EQUIPMENT DELIVER, STORAGE AND HANDLING
All equipment and materials shall be inspected against approved Shop Drawings at time
of deliver. Equipment and materials damaged or not meeting requirements of the
approved Shop Drawings shall be immediately returned to the system manufacturer for
replacement or repair.
Equipment and materials shall be stored in a dry location and protected from the
elements according to the system manufacturer’s instruction.
Equipment and materials shall be handled in an approved manner according to the
system manufacturer’s instructions.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Full compensation for the On-Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System shall be
considered as included in the contract lump sum bid price as shown on the bid schedule
for the On-Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURER
The On-Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System manufacturer shall be a 75 lbs
per day system, by ClorTec or PSI, no other equal.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Furnish On-Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System capable of generating 75
pounds per day of chlorine equivalent sodium hypochlorite at 0.8% concentration.
Raw materials per day include the following:
Power: 2 kilowatt-hours (per each lb FAC)
Salt: 75 pounds.
Water: 1128 gallons.
Electrical and water requirements include the following:
Chlorine Generator Power Supply: 480 volts, 3-phase, 60 Hz, 20A.
Chlorine Generator Control Panel Power Supply: 120 volts, 1-phase, 60 Hz, 20A.
Water Pressure: 30 to 80 psig.
The On-Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System equipment shall consist of the
following:
Brine mixing and storage tank.
Brine proportioning pump.
Provide complete Clortec or PSI Minichlor system.
Sodium hypochlorite storage tank.
Sodium hypochlorite generation control panel.
07/2023 ON-SITE HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 33 13 - 4
Hydrogen vents.
Assorted piping, filters and water softener.
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Brine Mixing and Storage Tank:
Manufacturer: BrineMaker or approved equal
Salt: Water softener salt (99.7% pure)
Salt Quantity: 11,500 pounds
Tank Material: Rigid high-impact nontoxic polyethylene
Capacity: 1090 gallons
Dimensions: Cylindrical with 8-foot diameter and 6-feet 9-inch height
Salt Level: BinMaster SBR II unit to measure salt level
Brine Level: Pressure transducer manufactured by Flowline, model
LD30 to measure water/brine solution level
Controller: Salt concentration monitor / controller made by
BrineMaker, model BCMS01
Conductivity Analyzer: ATI Q46C67 4E, Kuntze Neon EC Conductivity Analyzer
Provide complete 75 lb per day Clortec or 80 lb per day PSI Minichlor system.
Sodium Hypochlorite Storage Tanks:
Material: Crosslink polyethylene
Capacity: 710 Gallons (approximately 3 day’s storage)
Dimensions: Cylindrical with 7.5-foot diameter by 7.3-foot height
Type: Storage tanks shall be a vertical closed top tank
Manufacturer: Snyder Industries, Central California Container Mfg, Inc, Poly
Processing, or approved equal
Tanks shall be UL classified to ANSI/NSI Standard 61 Drinking Water System
Components - Health Effects.
The system shall be controlled by ultrasonic level transmitters. One located in a 2-
inch threaded port on the top of each tank.
The ultrasonic level transmitters shall be USonic Series by Drexelbrook, Siemens
HydroRanger 200 with XRS-5 Ultrasonic, Siemens LT500 with LR100 Radar, or
approved equal.
Sodium Hypochlorite General Control Panel:
The system shall consist of a singular power supply control cabinet capable of
supporting one power supply module, capable of continuous output up to 1.50 amps
draw, 120 VAC, single phase, 60 Hz, 10 Amp. service.
The control system shall be PLC based with a LCD digital interface for control and
monitoring statuses.
The control cabinet shall be stainless steel with a NEMA 12 enclosure.
The power supply will incorporate the following features and operating parameters:
a. Constant Current Operation: The device will monitor cell current and concurrently
correct cell voltage to maintain constant current.
b. Soft Start Operation: Upon startup, the device will gradually ramp up to full
current over the first 5 seconds of operation.
The interfacing PLC will incorporate the following features and operating parameters:
07/2023 ON-SITE HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 33 13 - 5
a. Touch Control: The PLC will allow the operator to start, stop, engage, disengage,
and reset alarms, cell fill, and display history.
b. Status Display: The display will show amperage, voltage, running hours, standby,
alarm and type, disabled and cell fill.
c. Alarm Status: Upon an alarm condition, the display will acknowledge the alarm
type, cell level, cell temperature, rectifier alarm, and tank limit alarms.
d. Automatic Restart: When an alarm condition occurs, the system shall try to
automatically restart four times before initiating a shutdown condition.
e. Alarm History: the PLC shall contain a history of the last 10 events and their
alarm types.
External Interface:
a. Provide system ON and TROUBLE outputs from the sodium hypochlorite
generation control panel, for remote indication.
b. Discrete outputs shall be SPDT contacts rated 5A at 120 V ac, minimum: On, Off,
Failed.
Hydrogen Vents and Dilution Fan:
There shall be a 2-inch diameter clear PVC schedule 80 pipe from tank to contain
hydrogen gases and serve as a hydrogen vent. The 2-inch pipe will be routed to the
hypochlorite solution tank where the pipe will connect to a 4-inch diameter clear PVC
schedule 80 pipe venting outside the building directly to atmosphere.
The hydrogen dilution fan shall be 1 HP, 204 V, single-phase, 60 hz blower, capable
of producing at least 406 ACFM. The fan shall be manufactured by Cincinnati Fan,
or approved equal.
Flow switch shall be Model ProSense FTS200-1001 by AutomationDirect, or
approved equal.
Water and Brine Filters:
50 micron melt blown cartridges shall be used as shown on the Contract Drawings.
Filter housings shall be Pentek Traditional Standard Series by Pentair, or
approved equal.
The housings shall be sized to accommodate filters recommended by the chlorine
generator supplier.
Miscellaneous Piping:
There are several ball valves located at points in the system to allow for easy
shutdown and maintenance. Ball valves shall be in accordance with Section 33 12 00
– Mechanical Appurtenances.
All piping and fittings shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), Schedule 80, unless
otherwise specified.
All tubing shall be clear reinforced PVC rated for a minimum of 275 psi. Tubing shall
be connected to PVC barbed fittings with SS 316 clamps.
Alternate Equipment:
A supplier proposing to furnish equipment other than what is specified herein, must
provide verifiable performance data of the proposed alternative in accordance with
Specification Section 01 60 00.
The manufacturer of the proposed alternate equipment must have a minimum of 3
years’ experience and five installations of the same type equipment.
07/2023 ON-SITE HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 33 13 - 6
OWNER reserves the right to determine whether the alternate equipment is
acceptable.
Supplier of the alternate equipment must guarantee that the State Health
Department has approved the product.
If at any time within the warranty period the system fails approval by the Utah State
Health Department, CONTRACTOR agrees to replace the system with the Micro-
Clor System as specified herein at no additional cost to OWNER.
ACCESSORIES
Water Softener:
Provide a water softener to condition the influent water prior to entering the salt
saturator tank.
Soft Water System shall be a dual tank type water softener and manufactured by CP
208S Kinetico, or approved equal.
Pertinent specifications include the following:
a. Tank size: 8” x 40”
b. System size (width x depth x height): 17” x 8” x 46”
c. Resin Volume per Tank: 0.70 cubic feet
d. Regeneration Time/Volume: 45 min / 35 gal
e. Flow Range (15/30 psig): 11.5 – 18 gpm
f. Maximum Hardness: 66 gpg
CONTRACTOR may supply alternate equipment provided that the performance
specifications are similar to those listed herein.
Dosing Pump:
Provide a digital dosing pump suitable for pumping a hypochlorite solution from the
storage tank to the influent nozzle of the pipeline.
Stainless steel pump housing and ceramic valve ball.
Flowrate: 3 to 16 gph
Maximum operating pressure 145 psi.
Turndown ratio: 800:1
Inlet diameter: Threaded NPT 3/4-inch, or equal
Outlet diameter: Threaded NPT 3/4-inch, or equal
Dosing pump shall be Grundfos Model Number DME 60-10 AR, no equal.
Injection Unit:
Injection quill shall be a high corrosion resistant, retractable injection quill rated for
250 psi with an integrated check valve. Process connection size shall be 1-inch with
1/2-inch inlet connection. Solution tube size shall be 1/2-inch. Injection quill
insertion length shall be 18 inches with 45-degree beveled end. Valve and solution
tube material shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Check valve seal shall be FKM
(fluorocarbon rubber).
Provide a flexible hose assembly for flexibility maintaining and installing the injection
quill. Assembly shall have a true union ball valve inlet, clear braided PVC reinforced
vinyl hose, stainless steel clamps, and either FNPT or MNPT coupler outlet.
Manufacturer shall be Saf-T-Flo Water Services, Inc. (Injection Quill - Model EB-
155-S-H-18-B-V, with alloy C276 solution tube; Hose Assembly FHA or FHB
Series), or approved equal.
07/2023 ON-SITE HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 33 13 - 7
CONTRACTOR may supply alternate equipment provided that the performance
specifications are similar to those listed herein.
Mixer:
Provide a static mixer downstream of injection unit to thoroughly mix injected
hypochlorite solution.
Static mixer model and manufacturer shall be Series 650 by Statiflo, no equal.
Pertinent specifications include the following:
a. Static mixer shall contain 2.5 fixed elements to provide 95% mixing.
b. Mixing elements shall have a 1.5:1 Pitch Ratio.
c. Housing material: Carbon steel coated with NSF61 approved coating
d. Mixing element material: 316L stainless steel.
e. Injection connection: 1-inch threaded
f. Sample connection: 1-inch threaded
Chlorine Analyzer:
Provide an amperometric chlorine analyzer upstream of the injection unit and
downstream of the static mixer.
Chlorine analyzer shall be Kuntze Krypton DIS with Argon StabiFlow, no equal.
Pertinent specifications include the following:
a. Inlet size: 1/2-inch
b. Drain size: 1/2-inch
c. Analysis method: Amperometric
d. Minimum pressure: 2.5 psi
e. Power requirements: 110 VAC, 60 Hz
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written
instructions and as shown on the Contract Drawings.
Install piping as shown on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s
piping diagrams.
Provide tank and pipe supports in accordance with Section 05 45 00 – Mechanical Metal
Supports.
Tank and equipment drains shall be routed to the nearest floor drain, hub drain, or
trench drain and shall not be allowed to drain across the floor.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Functional Test:
Perform on all complete assemblies prior to startup. Inspect and test installed
equipment for proper alignment and connection, quiet operation, and satisfactory
specified performance.
Leakage Test: A test with units installed as under maximum operation.
07/2023 ON-SITE HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
254.07.100 PAGE 46 33 13 - 8
Performance Test:
Conduct pumps and electrolytic cells assisted by manufacturer’s representative.
Perform under maximum operating conditions.
Test for continuous 3-hour period without malfunction.
Performance tests shall be conducted in the presence of ENGINEER and OWNER.
Test completed without ENGINEER or OWNER will not be accepted.
TRAINING
SUPPLIER shall provide on-site training and startup assistance for OWNER. Training
shall be a minimum of 4 hours not including travel time. Training shall be provided by a
factory authorized representative.
SUPPLIER shall provide a minimum of 4 hours on-site training or assistance during the
first year after final acceptance. Additional assistance may be on multiple visits.

- END OF SECTION –

03/2023 Filter Tech Filter System, Green Road Well
254.07.100 PAGE 46 34 00 - 1
SECTION 46 34 00
FILTER TECH FILTER SYSTEM, GREEN ROAD WELL
PART 1 GENERAL
GENERAL
Contractor shall provide, install, functionally test all components and process of, and
operationally start up and help the District to operate - for the first month of testing and
operation, the:
“Filter Tech Systems 600 gpm AquaSand Pressure Vessel System for Green Road
Well Water Treatment”
according to Contract Drawings and Specifications including this system which is
presented by the Manufacturer in the End of (Appendix to) this Section as follows:
Filter Tech Systems Inc
Proposal No 20-1235d (4 pages Summary of Work with Cost and Schedule)
21 March 2023
Weber Basin – Green Road Well
600 gpm Aqua Sand Filter Skid
Proposal details are shown in original proposal: Sections 1 thru 4 (which follow)

Section 1: Design Criteria
a. 00 Table of Contents - pg 1
b. 01 AquaSand Data Sheets - pgs 1-5 (Iron & Manganese Removal Calcs)
c. 02 Greensand Plus Data Sheet - pgs 6-9
d. 03 AquaSand Operating Instructions - pgs 10-11
e. 04 Aquasand Backwash Cycle Operating Instructions – pg 12

Section 2: Mechanical Drawings Binder
a. 00 Table of Contents - pg 1
b. 1A-0 Item List – pgs 2-3
c. 1A-1 Process Flow Schematic – pg 4
d. 2A-1 Filter Orientation – pg 5
e. 2B-1 Filter Media Schedule – pg 6
f. 3A-1 Skid Elevation – pg 7
g. 3A-2 Skid Plan View – pg 8
h. 3A-3 Piping Side View – pg 9
i. 4A-1 Filter Underdrain Assembly – pg 10
j. 4A-2 Filter Inlet Installation – pg 11
k. 4B-1 Filter Underdrain Assembly – pg 12
l. 4B-2 Filter Underdrain Installation – pg 13
m. 5A-1 Air Release Assembly – pg 14
n. 6A-1 Skid Mounting Details – pg 15

Section 3: Mechanical Equipment Binder
03/2023 Filter Tech Filter System, Green Road Well
254.07.100 PAGE 46 34 00 - 2
a. Table of Contents – pg 1
b. Apollo – Isolation Valves – pg 2
c. Ashcroft-WIKA – Pressure Gauges – pg 3
d. Bray – Butterfly Valves – pgs 4-19
e. Dwyer – Pressure Transmitters – pgs 20-21
f. Matco-Norca – Hose Bibb – pg 22
g. McCrometer – Flow Meter – pgs 24-32
h. Valmatic – Combination Air / Vacuum Breaker Valve – pgs 33-41

For Installation of Equipment and Filter Media see paragraph 3.1.
RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
Related work is also found in these Sections:
Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures
Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements
Section 01 78 00 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Section 01 78 20 Project Closeout
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Finishes
Section 33 05 13 Precast Concrete Manholes and Structures
Section 33 12 00 Mechanical Appurtenances
Section 33 13 00 Pipeline Testing and Disinfection
Section 33 14 13 Drainage System
All Division 40 Specs – Process Control and Instrumentation
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
This system will be paid for when it is complete, operationally tested and proven that it
is ready to go into continuous automated service.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND FILTER MEDIA
The Manufacturer (Filter Tech’s) Installation Instructions are found at the End of
(Appendix to) this Section, including:
Delivery – pg 1
Filter and Project Information – pg 2
Media Depths & Layers, Filter Preparation, Gravel Installation – pg 3
Sand and Anthracite Installation pgs 4-5
Conditioning & Disinfecting Manganese Greensand & GreensandPlus – pgs 6-7
TESTING, STARTUP AND AUTOMATED OPERATION OF SYSTEM
Manufacturer (Filter Tech) and Contractor shall jointly participate in well startup and
testing including, system automation testing and operational running of filtration system
and backwash system until it is proven to be fully automated to District (Owner) a nd
03/2023 Filter Tech Filter System, Green Road Well
254.07.100 PAGE 46 34 00 - 3
Engineer. Assume two weeks of successful automated operation of system. Comply
with Section 01 78 50, Project Closeout.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANAUALS
Manufacturer (Filter Tech) and Contractor shall jointly provide, along with all other
operation and maintenance manuals for project, the most detailed operation and
maintenance manuals, and portions of manuals, which are published by Manufacturer,
all organized with tables of contents and appendices. Comply with Section 01 78 20,
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
TRAINING OF OWNER TO OPERATE AND MAINTAIN SYSTEM
Manufacturer (Filter Tech) and Contractor shall jointly participate in training of Owner
staff to operate and maintain system. Assume two weeks of operational and
maintenance training.
- END OF SECTION TEXT -

FILTER TECH APPENDICES

- Proposal Update Summary March 21, 2023 (with Cost and Schedule) ................. 4 pages
- Section 1 - Design Criteria Binder ....................................................................... 12 pages
- Section 2 - Mechanical Drawings Binder ............................................................ 16 pages
- Section 3 - Mechanical Equipment Binder .......................................................... 41 pages
- Installation Instructions for Equipment and Filter Media ....................................... 7 pages

03/2023 Filter Tech Filter System, Green Road Well
254.07.100 PAGE 46 34 00 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
20-1235d1 Green Road Well 600 gpm AquaSand Proposal R4a Printed: 3/25/2023 Page 1 of 4

Filter Tech Systems, Inc.
Designers & Manufacturers of AquaSand Filters
2844 Chipeta Avenue Grand Junction, CO 81501
[phone] Local [phone] Fax [phone]

Proposal No. 20-1235d1 Weber Basin – Green Road Well
21 March 2023 600 gpm AquaSand Filter Skid

We are pleased to provide a revised proposal for a pressure filter skid capable of
treating 600 gpm of groundwater.

The system will consist of Three (3) AquaSand+ 84” diameter Vertical Pressure Filters
to remove iron and manganese.

Included in our quotation are the following items as noted below and as shown on our
Process Flow Schematic and Item List.

AquaSand+ Iron & Manganese Removal Filter Skid

Three (3) AquaSand+ Vertical Pressure Filters fabricated of steel; epoxy coated.
Mounted on epoxy-coated steel frame

Three (3) 84” diameter x 72” Side Shell Vertical Pressure Vessels
175 psi Operating Pressure
Sch 80 PVC Inlet Distribution Header
Sch 80 PVC Header/Lateral Underdrains
One (1) 14” x 18” Manway per filter
Lifting Eyes and Support Legs

Air/Vac Valve, Isolation Valve and Vent Piping to drain

8” Epoxy-Coated, Welded Steel Face Piping
8” Flanged Filter Inlet
Proposal By Filter Tech Systems, Inc.
DDJ: 20-1235d1 Green Road Well 600 gpm AquaSand Proposal R4a Printed: 3/25/2023 Page 2 of 4

8” Flanged Backwash Outlet
8” Flanged Filter Effluent

One Lot Filter Media in bags and palletized.
AquaSand+ filter media will include 12” Anthracite, 18” Manganese Dioxide
Media for the removal of oxidized (precipitated) iron & manganese and
20” graded support gravel.

Includes an additional 5% over theoretical to allow for conditioning losses.

One (1) Backwash Flow Control Valve
8” Lug-Style Butterfly Valve with Positioner

One (1) Backwash Supply Flow Meter
Flanged Tube Magnetic Flow Meter with Remote Readout
Includes Flow Rate, Flow Total and 4-20 mA Signal Output

Two (2) Pressure Transmitters
For Feed and Effluent of filter skid to determine differential pressure

Two (2) Pressure Gauges
0-200 psi for influent & effluent of each filter for individual filter
monitoring. Pressure Taps integral with filter stubs.

Indicator-gauge mounted in the face of the enclosure.

One Lot 1/2” Sample Taps
For Raw and Filtered Water from each filter skid
See Flow Schematic for locations

One (1) Filter Control Panel
Allen Bradley Compact Logix PLC-Based automated controls
With Ignition Edge Operator Interface
Automatic Filter Backwash

Battery-Backed Up 24V DC Power Supply
15” Full-Color Panel-Mounted Touch Screen
3-Position Lighted HOA switch for every valve

Proposal By Filter Tech Systems, Inc.
DDJ: 20-1235d1 Green Road Well 600 gpm AquaSand Proposal R4a Printed: 3/25/2023 Page 3 of 4

Freight, Start Up & Training

One Lot Freight to accessible jobsite, on truck. Unloading by others.

One Lot Days Start-Up Assistance and Operator Training

As required or as requested.

In addition to any requirements in the specifications, Filter Tech Systems
will provide any additional trips as needed or as requested for the first
one year of operation at no charge.

Includes 24/7 free telephone technical support for the life of the plant.

Four (4) Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Includes plant operating instructions, mechanical and electrical drawings
and equipment cut-sheets, installation, operating and maintenance
instructions.

AquaSand Equipment ProposalAquaSand Equipment ProposalAquaSand Equipment ProposalAquaSand Equipment Proposal ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................$ 5$ 5$ 5$ 541,17941,17941,17941,179

Includes all equipment listed above and Start Up and Operator Training

Items NOTNOTNOTNOT included in this quotation (but not limited to):
Overall Plant Design, Construction, Installation
Excavation and Site Work, Concrete, Building, Utilities
Unloading and Setting Equipment
Mechanical Installation of Equipment
Electrical Installation of Equipment
Interconnecting Piping to and from pressure filter systems
Electrical cabling to equipment
MCCs and Motor Starters
Facility Management and Operating Staff
Sales Taxes, Licenses, Permits

DeliveryDeliveryDeliveryDelivery 30 – 32 Weeks after receipt of approved submittals

FreightFreightFreightFreight FOB Ship Point, Full Freight Allowed

Proposal By Filter Tech Systems, Inc.
DDJ: 20-1235d1 Green Road Well 600 gpm AquaSand Proposal R4a Printed: 3/25/2023 Page 4 of 4

TermsTermsTermsTerms 10% of the contract amount with Purchase Order or Signed Contract
15% of the contract amount upon receipt of equipment submittals
65% of the contract amount as material is shipped or ready to ship on
a pro-rata basis, net 30 days
10% Upon completion of start up

Quotation Valid for Quotation Valid for Quotation Valid for Quotation Valid for SSSSixtyixtyixtyixty DaysDaysDaysDays
FilteFilteFilteFilterrrr TecTecTecTech h h h SystemsSystemsSystemsSystems
600 gpm AquaSand600 gpm AquaSand600 gpm AquaSand600 gpm AquaSand
Pressure Vessel SystemPressure Vessel SystemPressure Vessel SystemPressure Vessel System
Green Road Well Water TreatmentGreen Road Well Water TreatmentGreen Road Well Water TreatmentGreen Road Well Water Treatment

Section 1 Design Criteria
Document Description

00 Table of Contents

01 AquaSand Data Sheets

02 Greensand Plus Data Sheet

03 AquaSand Operating Instructions

04 AquaSand Backwash Cycle Operating Instructions

Process Design CalculationsProcess Design CalculationsProcess Design CalculationsProcess Design Calculations
0.0900 ppm Max
0.2030 ppm Max
pH 7.2000 S.U.
Step 1Step 1Step 1Step 1
Estimated Dosage
Iron 0.0900 ppm x 1.00 ppm =
Manganese 0.2030 ppm x 2.00 ppm =
Total chlorine demand, ppm =
Step 2Step 2Step 2Step 2
< 0.30 ppm
< 0.05 ppm
0.4060
0.4960
Oxidation of iron and manganese.Oxidation of iron and manganese.Oxidation of iron and manganese.Oxidation of iron and manganese.
Filter Tech SystemsFilter Tech SystemsFilter Tech SystemsFilter Tech Systems
600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System
Weber Basin - Green Road Well Weber Basin - Green Road Well Weber Basin - Green Road Well Weber Basin - Green Road Well
This process is designed to remove iron and manganese from a ground water source.
The mechanisms for removal are:The mechanisms for removal are:The mechanisms for removal are:The mechanisms for removal are:
Iron
Manganese
Raw water quality design data:
The chlorine demand to oxidize iron is 1.0 mg/l of chlorine per 1.0mg/l of
iron.
The chlorine demand to oxidize manganese is 2.0 mg/l of chlorine per
1.0mg/l of manganese.
0.0900
Iron
Manganese
The greensand filtration process will remove 100% of the oxidized material
AquaSand Filter Effluent Quality Treatment GoalAquaSand Filter Effluent Quality Treatment GoalAquaSand Filter Effluent Quality Treatment GoalAquaSand Filter Effluent Quality Treatment Goal
Filtration for removal of particulatesFiltration for removal of particulatesFiltration for removal of particulatesFiltration for removal of particulates
4388 AquaSand Data Sheets Printed: 5/7/2021 Page 1 of 4
SourceSourceSourceSource Ground Water
Pump Capacity 600 gpm
Design Maximum 600 gpm
Inlet Pressure 135 psi
Model Number AquaSand Model 8472
Number of Filters 3
Diameter of Filter 84 inches
Area per Filter 38.48 ft2
System Capacity 600 gpm Design Flow to Filters
Service Flow Rate 5.20 gpm/ft2
Service Rate w/two filters 7.80 gpm/ft2
(One Filter in Backwash)
Backwash Flow Required 461.8 gpm
( 12 gpm/ft2)
Filter Pressure Drop 10 psid at backwash maximum
Inlet Pressure Required 15 psi
Filter Tech SystemsFilter Tech SystemsFilter Tech SystemsFilter Tech Systems
600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System
Weber Basin - Green Road WellWeber Basin - Green Road WellWeber Basin - Green Road WellWeber Basin - Green Road Well
AquaSand Iron & Manganese Removal FiltersAquaSand Iron & Manganese Removal FiltersAquaSand Iron & Manganese Removal FiltersAquaSand Iron & Manganese Removal Filters
Design CriteriaDesign CriteriaDesign CriteriaDesign Criteria
4388 AquaSand Data Sheets Printed: 5/7/2021 Page 2 of 4
Anthracite 12 In. 1.0 - 1.1 mm Effective Size; UC 1.5 Max
GreenSand Plus 18 In. 0.30 - 0.35 mm Effective Size; UC 1.6 Max
Underbed 22 In. 2.0 - 3.0 mm Torpedo Sand
Area per Filter 38.48
ft2
Media Quantities (per filter includes 5% extra):
Anthracite 41 Cubic Feet
GreenSand Plus 61 Cubic Feet
Underbed 75 Cubic Feet
AquaSand Iron & Manganese Removal FiltersAquaSand Iron & Manganese Removal FiltersAquaSand Iron & Manganese Removal FiltersAquaSand Iron & Manganese Removal Filters
Media CompositionMedia CompositionMedia CompositionMedia Composition
Weber Basin - Green Road WellWeber Basin - Green Road WellWeber Basin - Green Road WellWeber Basin - Green Road Well
600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System
Filter Tech SystemsFilter Tech SystemsFilter Tech SystemsFilter Tech Systems
4388 AquaSand Data Sheets Printed: 5/7/2021 Page 3 of 4
Area per Filter 38.48 ft2
Backwash Design 12.0 gpm / square foot
Backwash Flow Rate 461.8 gpm/ft2
Backwash Cycle Time 8.0 Minutes
Backwash Volume 3694.5 Gallons
Rinse Flow Rate 5.0 gpm / square foot
Rinse Cycle Time 4.0 Minutes
Rinse Volume 769.7 Gallons
Backwash & Rinse Volume 4464.2 Gallons per Filter
Total Backwash Volume 13392.6 Gallons per Skid
Weber Basin - Green Road WellWeber Basin - Green Road WellWeber Basin - Green Road WellWeber Basin - Green Road Well
600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System600 gpm AquaSand Filtration System
Filter Tech SystemsFilter Tech SystemsFilter Tech SystemsFilter Tech Systems
AquaSand Iron & Manganese Removal FiltersAquaSand Iron & Manganese Removal FiltersAquaSand Iron & Manganese Removal FiltersAquaSand Iron & Manganese Removal Filters
Backwash RequirementsBackwash RequirementsBackwash RequirementsBackwash Requirements
4388 AquaSand Data Sheets Printed: 5/7/2021 Page 4 of 4
AquaSand Filters
Operating Instructions for
Iron, Manganese Removal Filters
Filter Tech Systems

1.1.1.1. Automatic OperationAutomatic OperationAutomatic OperationAutomatic Operation

The AquaSand iron and manganese removal filters have been designed for full automatic operation,
with the backwash cycle being initiated by a differential pressure switch or filtration run time. The
pressure differential set point is set at 7.5 psi differential and must be maintained no higher than 10
psid.

2.2.2.2. Backwash CycleBackwash CycleBackwash CycleBackwash Cycle

The instrumentation is designed so the filters may also be placed into a backwash cycle at any time
by use of a semi-automatic graphic start button. When the selector switch is in the semi-automatic
position the pressure differential switch will not start the filters into a backwash cycle. Care should
be taken so that the backwash switch is maintained in the automatic position unless a manual
operation is to be performed with an operator in attendance.

The chemical feed pump will cycle off and on with the well pumps, provided that the switches on the
control panel for the chemical feed pumps are in the auto position.

When the loss of the head across the filters reaches 7.5 - 10 psi and the DP set point is reached, a
backwash time delay timer is started. The time delay relay should be set for approximately 30
seconds so a sudden surge will not initiate a backwash before the pressure loss has built up to the
DP set point.

The backwash selector switch must be in the full automatic position for the differential pressure
switch to start a backwash cycle. If the selector switch is in semi-automatic position the push button
must pressed to start a backwash cycle.

Approximately 30 seconds after the time delay relay is pulled in the programmed timer is started
into operation.

Programmed timer contacts will energize the pilot solenoids for the pneumatic valves for the filter
selected for operation. Operation of the valves will be in the manner described in the following
backwash cycle.

3.3.3.3. Protect Filters and Filter BedsProtect Filters and Filter BedsProtect Filters and Filter BedsProtect Filters and Filter Beds

The filter tanks have been designed for a maximum working pressure of 135 psi. Do not allow the
pressure to exceed this figure. All surges and/or water hammers must be prevented from reaching
the filters to prevent damage occurring due to surges or water hammer. The AquaSand manganese
greensand filters must not be allowed to operate past a pressure loss of 12 psi. If the filters are
allowed to exceed an excess of 12 psi, pressure loss across the bed will damage the AquaSand
manganese greensand.
4.4.4.4. Chemical FeedChemical FeedChemical FeedChemical Feed

a. The chemical feed pumps must run whenever the well pump(s) is on and water is flowing
through the filter.

b. ADJUST the chlorine feed pump so that the minimum residual is maintained at the minimum
of 0.3 ppm at the effluent of the filters.

5.5.5.5. Operation Record Operation Record Operation Record Operation Record (Log) Sheets(Log) Sheets(Log) Sheets(Log) Sheets

Complete the record sheets EACH DAY so that a history of operation is developed. Record in the
“operator’s notes or comments” section any items that cannot be fit into the labeled sections of the
log sheets, particularly those that would be useful to others diagnosing problems that may develop.
Use record sheets as a diary.

Send one good copy of the record sheets to Filter Tech Systems Inc. at the close of each month.

6.6.6.6. Loss of MediaLoss of MediaLoss of MediaLoss of Media

During operation of the filters, it is inevitable that the larger particles of anthracite and AQUASAND
manganese greensand may break into smaller particles and are lost out the backwash. Within
limits, this attrition is normal. After a period of time, it may be necessary to add AQUASAND
manganese greensand and/or AQUAKOL anthracite medias.

7.7.7.7. Trouble ShootingTrouble ShootingTrouble ShootingTrouble Shooting

Troubles may develop - - - for a variety of reasons. When they do - - - consult first the following
trouble shooting guide for possible explanations and suggestions for remedial actions to be taken.

If following the suggested remedies does not “solve” the problem, consult Filter Tech Systems Inc.

Filter Tech Systems, Inc.Filter Tech Systems, Inc.Filter Tech Systems, Inc.Filter Tech Systems, Inc.
2844 Chipeta Avenue Grand Junction, CO 815012844 Chipeta Avenue Grand Junction, CO 815012844 Chipeta Avenue Grand Junction, CO 815012844 Chipeta Avenue Grand Junction, CO 81501
Tel: 970Tel: 970Tel: 970Tel: 970----254254254254----2855 or 888.287.8292 Fax: [phone] or 888.287.8292 Fax: [phone] or 888.287.8292 Fax: [phone] or 888.287.8292 Fax: 970----254254254254----2858285828582858
www. www. www. www. FilterTechSystems.comFilterTechSystems.comFilterTechSystems.comFilterTechSystems.com
AquaSand Filters
Backwash Cycle

Filter Tech Systems

1. Filters can be backwashed automatically or manually.

2. In automatic mode, filters can be backwashed based on differential pressure or filter run time
or either.

3. START Backwash when the differential-pressure across the filters reaches 7.5 psi or the
filtration run time has been reached.

4. CLOSE Well Water Inlet Valve (leaving open the Filter Effluent/Backwash Inlet Valve).

5. OPEN Backwash Outlet Valve.

6. Backwash for the following:

TIME RATE
8 minutes 462 gpm

7. CLOSE Filter Effluent Valve.
CLOSE Backwash Outlet Valve.

8. OPEN Well Water In Valve.
OPEN Rinse Valve
Rinse for: 10 minutes @ 967 gpm.

9. OPEN Filter Effluent Valve.
CLOSE Rinse Valve.

Filter is now in Service Mode.

10. CHECK the chlorine level to ensure that the water leaving the filters is at the desired
disinfection level.

Filter Tech Systems, Inc.Filter Tech Systems, Inc.Filter Tech Systems, Inc.Filter Tech Systems, Inc.
2844 Chipeta Avenue Grand Junction, CO 815012844 Chipeta Avenue Grand Junction, CO 815012844 Chipeta Avenue Grand Junction, CO 815012844 Chipeta Avenue Grand Junction, CO 81501
Tel: Tel: Tel: Tel: [phone]----254254254254----2855 or 888.287.8292 Fax: [phone] or 888.287.8292 Fax: [phone] or 888.287.8292 Fax: [phone] or 888.287.8292 Fax: 970----254254254254----2858285828582858
www. FilterTechSystems.comwww. FilterTechSystems.comwww. FilterTechSystems.comwww. FilterTechSystems.com
FilteFilteFilteFilterrrr TecTecTecTech h h h SystemsSystemsSystemsSystems
600 gpm AquaSand600 gpm AquaSand600 gpm AquaSand600 gpm AquaSand
Pressure Vessel SystemPressure Vessel SystemPressure Vessel SystemPressure Vessel System
Green Road Well Water TreatmentGreen Road Well Water TreatmentGreen Road Well Water TreatmentGreen Road Well Water Treatment

Section 2 Mechanical Drawings
Document Description

00 Table of Contents

1A-0 Item List

1A-1 Process Flow Schematic

2A-1 Filter Orientation
2B-1 Filter Media Schedule

3A-1 Skid Elevation
3A-2 Skid Plan View
3A-3 Piping Side View

4A-1 Filter Inlet Distribution Header
4A-2 Filter Inlet Installation

4B-1 Filter Underdrain Assembly
4B-2 Filter Underdrain Installation

5A-1 Air Release Assembly

6A-1 Skid Mounting Details

It
e
m
#
It
e
m
#
It
e
m
#
It
e
m
#

Q
t
y
Qt
y
Q
t
y
Qt
y

S
i
z
e
Si
z
e
S
i
z
e
Si
z
e
It
e
m
It
e
m
I
t
e
m
It
e
m

P
u
r
p
o
s
e
Pu
r
p
o
s
e
Pu
r
p
o
s
e
Pu
r
p
o
s
e

M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
De
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
De
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
De
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
1

3

6
"

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
wi
t
h

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
Ra
w

W
a
t
e
r

I
n
f
l
u
e
n
t

B
r
a
y

B
r
a
y

M
o
d
e
l

3
1
-
1
1
9

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
ut
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
Wi
t
h

C
a
s
t

I
r
o
n

B
o
d
y
,

N
y
l
o
n

C
o
a
t
e
d

d
i
s
c
,

4
1
6

S
S

S
t
e
m
,
E
P
D
M

S
e
a
t

S
e
r
i
e
s
An
d

S
e
r
i
e
s

7
0
/
A

1
2
0
V

S
i
n
g
l
e

P
h
a
s
e

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
p/
n

3
1
1
2
0
0
-
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
9
,

C
1

w
i
t
h

p
/
n

7
0
0
1
2
1
-
1
1
3
D
0
5
3
6
/
A

El
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
2

3

6
"

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
wi
t
h

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
Fi
l
t
e
r
e
d

W
a
t
e
r

E
f
f
l
u
e
n
t

B
r
a
y

B
r
a
y

M
o
d
e
l

3
1
-
1
1
9

L
u
g
-
S
t
yl
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
Wi
t
h

C
a
s
t

I
r
o
n

B
o
d
y
,

N
y
l
o
n

C
o
a
t
e
d

d
i
s
c
,

4
1
6

S
S

S
t
e
m
,
E
P
D
M

S
e
a
t

S
e
r
i
e
s
An
d

S
e
r
i
e
s

7
0
/
A

1
2
0
V

S
i
n
g
l
e

P
h
a
s
e

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
p/
n

3
1
1
2
0
0
-
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
9
,

C
1

w
i
t
h

p
/
n

7
0
0
1
2
1
-
1
1
3
D
0
5
3
6
/
A

El
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
3

3

4
"

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
wi
t
h

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
Ri
n
s
e

V
a
l
v
e

B
r
a
y

B
r
a
y

M
o
d
e
l

3
1
-
1
1
9

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y
V
a
l
v
e
Wi
t
h

C
a
s
t

I
r
o
n

B
o
d
y
,

N
y
l
o
n

C
o
a
t
e
d

d
i
s
c
,

4
1
6

S
S

S
t
e
m
,
E
P
D
M

S
e
a
t

S
e
r
i
e
s
An
d

S
e
r
i
e
s

7
0
/
A

1
2
0
V

S
i
n
g
l
e

P
h
a
s
e

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
p/
n

3
1
1
2
0
0
-
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
9
,

C
1

w
i
t
h

p
/
n

7
0
0
1
2
1
-
1
1
3
D
0
5
3
6
/
A

El
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
4

1

4
"

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
wi
t
h

L
e
v
e
r
Ri
n
s
e

R
a
t
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

B
r
a
y

B
r
a
y

M
o
d
e
l

3
1
-
1
1
9

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
ut
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
Wi
t
h

C
a
s
t

I
r
o
n

B
o
d
y
,

N
y
l
o
n

C
o
a
t
e
d

d
i
s
c
,

4
1
6

S
S

S
t
e
m
,
E
P
D
M

S
e
a
t

S
e
r
i
e
s
An
d

S
e
r
i
e
s

7
0
/
A

1
2
0
V

S
i
n
g
l
e

P
h
a
s
e

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
p/
n

3
1
1
2
0
0
-
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
9
,

C
1

w
i
t
h

p
/
n

7
0
0
1
2
1
-
1
1
3
D
0
5
3
6
/
A

El
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
5

3

8
"

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
wi
t
h

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
Ba
c
k
w
a
s
h

S
u
p
p
l
y

B
r
a
y

B
r
a
y

M
o
d
e
l

3
1
-
1
1
9

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
er
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
Wi
t
h

C
a
s
t

I
r
o
n

B
o
d
y
,

N
y
l
o
n

C
o
a
t
e
d

d
i
s
c
,

4
1
6

S
S

S
t
e
m
,
E
P
D
M

S
e
a
t

S
e
r
i
e
s
An
d

S
e
r
i
e
s

7
0
/
A

1
2
0
V

S
i
n
g
l
e

P
h
a
s
e

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
p/
n

3
1
1
2
0
0
-
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
9
,

C
1

w
i
t
h

p
/
n

7
0
0
1
2
1
-
1
1
3
D
0
5
3
6
/
A

El
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
6

3

8
"

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
wi
t
h

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
Ba
c
k
w
a
s
h

E
f
f
l
u
e
n
t

B
r
a
y

B
r
a
y

M
o
d
e
l

3
1
-
1
1
9

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
tt
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
Wi
t
h

C
a
s
t

I
r
o
n

B
o
d
y
,

N
y
l
o
n

C
o
a
t
e
d

d
i
s
c
,

4
1
6

S
S

S
t
e
m
,
E
P
D
M

S
e
a
t

S
e
r
i
e
s
An
d

S
e
r
i
e
s

7
0
/
A

1
2
0
V

S
i
n
g
l
e

P
h
a
s
e

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
p/
n

3
1
1
2
0
0
-
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
9
,

C
1

w
i
t
h

p
/
n

7
0
0
1
2
1
-
1
1
3
D
0
5
3
6
/
A

El
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
7

3

1
"

B
a
l
l

V
a
l
v
e

w
/

L
e
v
e
r

M
a
n
u
a
l

A
i
r

B
l
e
e
d

A
p
o
l
l
o
8

3

1
"

A
i
r

R
e
l
i
e
f

V
a
l
v
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

F
i
l
t
e
r

A
i
r

R
e
l
i
e
f

V
a
l
M
a
ti
c
9
Ba
c
k
w
a
s
h

S
u
p
p
l
y

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
Ba
c
k
w
a
s
h

S
u
p
p
l
y

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
Ba
c
k
w
a
s
h

S
u
p
p
l
y

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
Ba
c
k
w
a
s
h

S
u
p
p
l
y

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
G
r
e
e
n

R
o
a
d

W
e
l
l

W
a
t
e
r

T
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
y
G
r
e
e
n

R
o
a
d

W
e
l
l

W
a
t
e
r

T
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
y
G
r
e
e
n

R
o
a
d

W
e
l
l

W
a
t
e
r

T
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
y
G
r
e
e
n

R
o
a
d

W
e
l
l

W
a
t
e
r

T
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
y
6
0
0

g
p
m

A
q
u
a
S
a
n
d

I
t
e
m

L
i
s
t
6
0
0

g
p
m

A
q
u
a
S
a
n
d

I
t
e
m

L
i
s
t
6
0
0

g
p
m

A
q
u
a
S
a
n
d

I
t
e
m

L
i
s
t
6
0
0

g
p
m

A
q
u
a
S
a
n
d

I
t
e
m

L
i
s
t
F
i
l
t
e
r

T
e
c
h

S
y
s
t
e
m
s
,

I
n
c
.
F
i
l
t
e
r

T
e
c
h

S
y
s
t
e
m
s
,

I
n
c
.
F
i
l
t
e
r

T
e
c
h

S
y
s
t
e
m
s
,

I
n
c
.
F
i
l
t
e
r

T
e
c
h

S
y
s
t
e
m
s
,

I
n
c
.
Fi
l
t
e
r

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
Fi
l
t
e
r

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
Fi
l
t
e
r

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
Fi
l
t
e
r

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
DD
J
:

4
3
8
8

I
t
e
m

L
i
s
t
Da
t
e

P
r
i
n
t
e
d
:

4
/
2
7
/
2
0
2
1

P
a
g
e

1

o
f

2
It
e
m
#
It
e
m
#
It
e
m
#
It
e
m
#

Q
t
y
Qt
y
Q
t
y
Qt
y

S
i
z
e
Si
z
e
S
i
z
e
Si
z
e
It
e
m
It
e
m
I
t
e
m
It
e
m

P
u
r
p
o
s
e
Pu
r
p
o
s
e
Pu
r
p
o
s
e
Pu
r
p
o
s
e

M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r
M
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e
r

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
De
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
De
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
De
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
G
r
e
e
n

R
o
a
d

W
e
l
l

W
a
t
e
r

T
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
y
G
r
e
e
n

R
o
a
d

W
e
l
l

W
a
t
e
r

T
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
y
G
r
e
e
n

R
o
a
d

W
e
l
l

W
a
t
e
r

T
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
y
G
r
e
e
n

R
o
a
d

W
e
l
l

W
a
t
e
r

T
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
y
6
0
0

g
p
m

A
q
u
a
S
a
n
d

I
t
e
m

L
i
s
t
6
0
0

g
p
m

A
q
u
a
S
a
n
d

I
t
e
m

L
i
s
t
6
0
0

g
p
m

A
q
u
a
S
a
n
d

I
t
e
m

L
i
s
t
6
0
0

g
p
m

A
q
u
a
S
a
n
d

I
t
e
m

L
i
s
t
Fi
l
t
e
r

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
Fi
l
t
e
r

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
Fi
l
t
e
r

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
Fi
l
t
e
r

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
31

1

8
"

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
wi
t
h

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
Ba
c
k
w
a
s
h

S
u
p
p
l
y

I
s
o
l
a
t
i
o
n

B
r
a
y

B
r
a
y

M
o
d
e
l

3
1
-
1
1
9

L
u
g
-
St
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
Wi
t
h

C
a
s
t

I
r
o
n

B
o
d
y
,

N
y
l
o
n

C
o
a
t
e
d

d
i
s
c
,

4
1
6

S
S

S
t
e
m
,
E
P
D
M

S
e
a
t

S
e
r
i
e
s
Wi
t
h

G
e
a
r

O
p
e
r
a
t
o
r

a
n
d

H
a
n
d
w
h
e
e
l
p/
n

3
1
0
8
0
0
-
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
9
,

D
1
,

w
i
t
h

0
4
0
3
0
0
-
2
1
2
0
2
0
0
2

H
a
n
d
w
he
e
l

A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
32

1

8
"

M
a
g
n
e
t
i
c

F
l
o
w

M
e
t
e
r

B
a
c
k
w
a
s
h

S
u
p
p
l
y

F
l
o
w

M
c
C
r
o
m
e
te
r

M
c
C
r
o
m
e
t
e
r

U
l
t
r
a

M
a
g

U
M
0
6

F
l
a
n
g
e
d
-
T
u
b
e

E
l
e
c
t
r
o
m
a
gn
e
t
i
c

F
l
o
w

M
e
t
e
r
wi
t
h

R
e
m
o
t
e

M
o
u
n
t

S
i
g
n
a
l

C
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r

a
n
d

2
5
'

o
f

C
a
b
l
e
;
0
-
3
0
0

g
p
m

o
u
t
p
u
t

r
a
n
g
e
33

1

8
"

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
wi
t
h

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r

&

P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r
Ba
c
k
w
a
s
h

S
u
p
p
l
y

F
l
o
w

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

B
r
a
y

B
r
a
y

M
o
d
e
l

3
1
-
1
1
9

L
ug
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
Wi
t
h

C
a
s
t

I
r
o
n

B
o
d
y
,

N
y
l
o
n

C
o
a
t
e
d

d
i
s
c
,

4
1
6

S
S

S
t
e
m
,
E
P
D
M

S
e
a
t

S
e
r
i
e
s
An
d

S
e
r
i
e
s

7
0
/
B

1
2
0
V

S
i
n
g
l
e

P
h
a
s
e

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
w
i
t
h

4
-
2
0

m
A

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
p/
n

3
1
0
6
0
0
-
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
9
,

C
1

w
i
t
h

p
/
n

7
0
0
1
2
1
-
1
1
3
A
0
5
3
6
/
B

El
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
34

1

8
"

L
u
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
wi
t
h

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
Fi
l
t
e
r
e
d

W
a
t
e
r

S
h
u
t

O
f
f

V
a
l
v
e

B
r
a
y

B
r
a
y

M
o
d
e
l

3
1
-
1
1
9

Lu
g
-
S
t
y
l
e

B
u
t
t
e
r
f
l
y

V
a
l
v
e
Wi
t
h

C
a
s
t

I
r
o
n

B
o
d
y
,

N
y
l
o
n

C
o
a
t
e
d

d
i
s
c
,

4
1
6

S
S

S
t
e
m
,
E
P
D
M

S
e
a
t

S
e
r
i
e
s
An
d

S
e
r
i
e
s

7
0
/
A

1
2
0
V

S
i
n
g
l
e

P
h
a
s
e

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
p/
n

3
1
1
2
0
0
-
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
9
,

C
1

w
i
t
h

p
/
n

7
0
0
1
2
1
-
1
1
3
D
0
5
3
6
/
A

El
e
c
t
r
i
c

A
c
t
u
a
t
o
r
PG
I
V

2

1
/
4
"

B
r
a
s
s

B
a
l
l

V
a
l
v
e

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

G
a
u
g
e

I
s
o
l
a
t
i
o
n

A
p
ol
l
o
PG
1
,
2

2

1
/
4
"

0
-
1
6
0

P
S
I

G
a
u
g
e

I
n
f
l
u
e
n
t

&

E
f
f
l
u
e
n
t

P
r
e
s
s
u
re

A
s
h
c
r
o
f
t
PT
1
,
2

2

1
/
4
"

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
t
e
r

I
n
f
l
u
e
n
t

&

E
f
f
l
u
e
n
t

P
re
s
s
u
r
e

D
w
y
e
r
SV
1
,
2

2

1
/
2
"

S
m
o
o
t
h
-
N
o
s
e

B
a
l
l

V
a
l
v
e

S
a
m
p
l
e

V
a
l
v
e

M
a
t
c
o

N
or
c
a

S
m
o
o
t
h
-
n
o
s
e

B
a
l
l

V
a
l
v
e
In
s
t
r
u
m
e
n
t
s

&

A
n
a
l
y
z
e
r
s
In
s
t
r
u
m
e
n
t
s

&

A
n
a
l
y
z
e
r
s
In
s
t
r
u
m
e
n
t
s

&

A
n
a
l
y
z
e
r
s
In
s
t
r
u
m
e
n
t
s

&

A
n
a
l
y
z
e
r
s
DD
J
:

4
3
8
8

I
t
e
m

L
i
s
t
Da
t
e

P
r
i
n
t
e
d
:

4
/
2
7
/
2
0
2
1

P
a
g
e

2

o
f

2
FilteFilteFilteFilterrrr TecTecTecTechhhh SystemsSystemsSystemsSystems
600600600600 gpm gpm gpm gpm AquaSandAquaSandAquaSandAquaSand
Pressure VesselPressure VesselPressure VesselPressure Vessel SystemSystemSystemSystem
Green Road Well Water TreatmentGreen Road Well Water TreatmentGreen Road Well Water TreatmentGreen Road Well Water Treatment

SectionSectionSectionSection 3333 Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical EquipmentEquipmentEquipmentEquipment
Manufacturer Description

Apollo Isolation Valves

Ashcroft-WIKA Pressure Gauges

Bray Butterfly Valves

Dwyer Pressure Transmitters

Matco-Norca Hose Bibb (Sample Valves)

McCrometer Flow Meter

Valmatic Combination Air / Vacuum Breaker Valve

Customer Service [phone] industrial.apollovalves.comA-4
Female NPT Thread, 600 CWP (psig). 150 psig SWP. (See referenced P/T charts)
Vacuum Service to 29 inches Hg.
MSS SP-110 Compliant.
CRN: OC10908.5C
FEATURES
• Lead Free* brass and bronze materials
• NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 Section 8, Annex G
• Easily identifiable blue hang tag & white lever grip
• RPTFE seats and stuffing box ring
• Designed, manufactured, and 100% factory tested in the USA
• NSF/ANSI 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content
VARIATIONS AVAILABLE
• 70LF-140 Series (316 SS Ball & Stem)
• 70LF-HC Hose Cap & Chain
OPTIONS AVAILABLE
(MORE INFORMATION IN SECTION J)
• Minimum quantities apply
• To specify an option, replace the “01” standard suffix with the suffix of the option.
• To specify multiple options, replace the “01” suffix with the desired suffixes in the
numerical order shown below. NOTE: Not all suffixes can be combined together.
(SUFFIX)OPTION SIZES
-01 Standard Configuration All
-04-2-1/4” Stem Extension (Carbon Steel, Zinc Plated)1/4” to 3”
-07-Steel Tee Handle 1/4” to 2”
-10-SS Lever & Nut All
-11-Therma-Seal™ Insulating Tee Handle 1/4” to 2”
-27-SS Latch-Lock Lever & Nut 1/2” to 4”
-32-SS Tee Handle & Nut 1/2” to 2”
-47-SS Oval Latch-Lock Handle & Nut 1/2” to 2”
-92-Balancing Stop 1/4” to 3”
-94-2-1/4” Stem Extension, Balancing Stop 1/4” to 3”
-HC-Hose Cap & Chain with SS Lever & Nut 1/2” to 1”
Pressure/Temperature Ratings - Page M-10, Graph No. 3
DIMENSIONS
PART NO.SIZE A B C D E WT.
70LF-101-01 1/4”0.37 1.03 2.06 1.75 3.87 0.60
70LF-102-01 3/8”0.37 1.03 2.06 1.75 3.87 0.56
70LF-103-01 1/2”0.50 1.12 2.25 1.75 3.87 0.63
70LF-104-01 3/4”0.68 1.50 3.00 2.12 4.87 1.39
70LF-105-01 1”0.87 1.68 3.37 2.25 4.87 1.72
70LF-106-01 1-1/4”1.00 2.00 4.00 2.62 5.50 3.26
70LF-107-01 1-1/2”1.25 2.18 4.37 3.06 8.00 4.61
70LF-108-01 2”1.50 2.34 4.68 3.25 8.00 6.06
70LF-109-01 2-1/2”2.00 3.12 6.25 3.72 8.00 13.96
70LF-100-01 3”2.50 3.37 6.75 4.12 8.00 18.60
70LF-10A-01 4”3.12 3.68 7.37 5.25 10.00 25.50
STANDARD MATERIAL LIST
PART MATERIAL
1 Lever and grip Steel, zinc plated w/vinyl
2 Stem packing RPTFE
3 Stem bearing RPTFE
4 Ball C27451 Lead Free* Brass, Chrome Plated
5 Seat (2)RPTFE
6 Retainer C27451 Lead Free* Brass (1/4”-1”)
C89836 Lead Free* Bronze (1-1/4”-4”)
7 Gland Nut B16 Brass
8 Stem C27451 Lead Free* Brass
9 Lever Nut Steel, Zinc Plated
10 Body C89836 Lead Free* Bronze
LEAD FREE* BRONZE BALL VALVE
70LF-100 SERIES
*LEAD FREE: The wetted surfaces of this product shall contain no more than 0.25% lead by weighted average. Complies with Federal Public Law 111-380. ANSI 3rd party approved and listed.
500
GAUGES Potable Water
Stainless Steel Pressure Gauges
Dry gauges are suitable for applications where vibration isn’t a concern. Stainless steel cases and wetted materials resist corrosion.
Suitable for use with potable water.
RANGE GRADS STOCK # EACH
2 1/2" DIAMETER DIAL
30" to 0" Hg VAC 0.5 68000 $ 67.95
0 to 15 psi 0.2 68001 67.95
0 to 30 psi 0.5 68002 67.95
0 to 60 psi 1 68003 67.95
0 to 100 psi 2 68004 67.95
0 to 160 psi 2 68005 67.95
0 to 200 psi 5 68006 67.95
0 to 300 psi 5 68007 67.95
31/2" DIAMETER DIAL
30" to 0" Hg VAC 0.5 68008 $ 76.95
0 to 15 psi 0.2 68009 76.95
0 to 30 psi 0.5 68010 76.95
0 to 60 psi 1 68011 76.95
0 to 100 psi 2 68012 76.95
0 to 160 psi 2 68013 76.95
0 to 200 psi 5 68014 76.95
0 to 300 psi 5 68015 76.95
21/2" & 31/2" Ashcroft® Duralife®
PLUS!™ Pressure Gauges
• PLUS! performance provides vibration
and pulse dampening in a dry gauge
• A light, easy-to-read gauge with no messy liquid to leak
Accuracy: ±1.0% full scale
Wetted materials: 316 stainless steel internal tube,
no-lead bronze socket
Case material: 304 stainless steel, polycarbonate window
Process connection:1/4" NPT(M), lower mount
Dial size: 21/2" or 31/2"
Pointer: micrometer adjustable
21/2" & 31/2"
Ashcroft® Duralife®
PLUS!™ Gauges with
Back Connection
• PLUS! performance provides
vibration and pulse dampening
without messy liquid
• Optional U-clamp panel kit allows
for easy panel mounting
• Suitable for use with
potable water
Accuracy: ±1.0% full scale
Range limits: vacuum to 15,000 psi
Wetted materials: 316 stainless steel internal tube,
no-lead bronze socket
Case material: 304 stainless steel, polycarbonate window
Process connection:1/4" NPT(M), back mount
Dial size: 21/2" or 31/2"
Pointer: micrometer adjustable
Mounting: stem, or U-clamp with back connection
2 1/2" DIAL GAUGES 3 1/2" DIAL GAUGES
RANGE GRADUATIONS STOCK # EACH STOCK # EACH
30" to 0" Hg VAC 0.5 34490 $ 76.95 34479 $ 99.95
0 to 15 psi 0.2 34491 76.95 34480 99.95
0 to 30 psi 0.5 34473 76.95 34481 99.95
0 to 60 psi 1 34474 76.95 34482 99.95
0 to 100 psi 2 34475 76.95 34483 99.95
0 to 160 psi 2 34476 76.95 34484 99.95
0 to 200 psi 5 34477 76.95 34485 99.95
0 to 300 psi 5 34478 76.95 34486 99.95
Accessories
DESCRIPTION STOCK # EACH
U-Clamp for 21/2" Back Connection Gauge 34487 $ 8.89
U-Clamp for 31/2" Back Connection Gauge 34488 12.49
Back Connection
shown with
optional U-clamp
See pages 918-991 for our
full selection of
Level & Pressure
Equipment.
Back connection for
panel mounting
Nationwide Distribution Network: Chicago, Las Vegas, Boston, Atlanta and Dallas.
USABlueBook-brand products are guaranteed
to deliver the same or better performance as the more
expensive brands.

!

"
# $
% $

&

# # '# ()*
!
% !
!

+'# ()*
, $ # ! -

) %

%
( !
!

# ./0.1

!
!

2
! '&*

(
-
( !
!
! !
&
! !

& 3

4
! # ./0.1 %
!
!

5

%

! !
&

6 !

& '7*
3

8 (

9(
:;

8 #

# #

& '&* %
'# ()*
$ $
4

! (

!

% $ <
=
!
! !

4 <

" $ < (

- $ <

!
"

# $
% & ' (
) )
"
# $
* +
"
# $' , ) "
-
" ./ &
(
* "

)
)

, * ,
" . 0
"
. 1
,
" )
) < ./ &
(2 ( 3 4 !( !
/ 2 5 3&/ /3 2 5 . 6
7& " &
) & ' (8( , ,
& ' ( "

) + "
3

! "#$ %&#

% 7 # > 8 ?
1 $
:@ <A/ 8 5 B/<B@

C $ < . =
! !
%
7#9 $D79 %E"$ ! 6 9 E9
2 FF 4-6>=
1 2 ! # :/! :1! ./! .1 .G
: $ 6 1//1! 9(
# 07 ! (
. 0

2 $ $ & &
. & #
6 1//:
& # 07

G &

@ 2 .
!
1 @

) ./ &
(2 ( " ) , + ,
3 9 4
!( ! / 2 5 3&/ /3 2
5 . 6 7&
" :
) , + ,

) +
) ,

"
:

" ,
"
' ( ( ( )

:
) ,
* ,
" :
) )
; ,
<, < 8( #( $
!<, < ( # "( $"

= , ,
>

= ' 2' >
= < 2 #6 2 $
? < 8( 2 #(! 2 $
@ A
" = )

* -

"

H 8 ! !

H 4
"6#- % 1:@01@/
# 1/ & I 9! #
G@/G 68 1/01B! &-6 6& 1/01B!
"# :1:J K-# 1/
H
'&*

0
H #

(
H

#

H # !

(
H 9
3
H 11/L

H =
:; 1:; = 1A@ ! 1G; :/; = 1@/
F
4 5
!

4
5 = :; 1:; = A@ !
1G; :/; = @/
H 6 3

H # ./ 0
.1

!

: "

H & . B . 5
H 3 & . B .( 5
H . B . 5 :
H . . B 5

H ,/ < = ?
H 4 3B < = ?
H =CB@
H : ,/ < = ?

H
H ! 5 . B .(D ! 5
H ! . B . 85 !
H 5 . B . 85 5
H B

H . ; . B !D,6(!
H 3 & . B .( 5 ? " 5(,!(,
H 3 & / . B .( 5 ? " 5(,!(,
H 3 & ) . B .( 5 ? " 5(,!(,
H 5 . B . ( =DB
H ) , 85 . B (8( . / 85

" # $ %#

3

A
:
A A

@=CB . B 3 ! D = 4
# = $"
) + & & "
) + . %" "." & "
&% ' ( '
) '
* "
+',
" ! !

%

7 # @!1@:!@/1

" & $"M -6 9$6" - 6"F! -
1.... 4 9 E ! ( AA/G1
:N1 NJG @G@G 2"O :N1 NJG JGJJ
P :// - " 1//: 0/

8
!

8

!

& 3
- & F

!
&

5
6
" <
! ! ! ! ! !
! 3
-
!
!
! !
6
!
!

5

$ ! !

$ '# ()*
$
% $
$
!
8 !

8

8
2
!
- &
-

- &
-

6 = '&*

4

!

?
!
"
!
!
-
%

% #
'# ()*

& 8 8 & 2 8
& 6 % 8
) $"M -6 9$6" - 6"F! -
% 6 $ F#
MANUAL OPERATORS
Bray Controls offers three operators for manual control of valve position. All manual operators mount directly to Bray valves, and all are epoxy coated for excellent corrosion, abrasion and impact resistance.
MANUAL OPERATORS
SERIES 01 - Handle 1"-12" (25mm -300mm)
SERIES 04 - Gear Operator 2"-48" (50mm -1200mm)
SERIES 05 - Declutchable Gear Operator 2"-36" (50mm -900mm)
SERIES 01 - HANDLE & NOTCH PLATE Bray offers two handles for on-off and throttling service – one for resilient seated valves from 1"-12" (25mm-300mm), and a high torque handle for high pressure valves from 21⁄2"- 8" (65mm-200mm). These quarter turn handles have a locking spring and a directional pointer for valve disc position indication. Bolted notch plates are offered. For resilient seated valves a 10 position plate is standard. For high pressure valves a 9 position plate is standard. Both contain on-off stops to prevent over rotation of the valve. Optionally available are an infinite position plate, a 180° notch plate, a memory stop, a padlock kit, and a 2" square nut version.
SERIES 04 - GEAR OPERATORFor heavy duty on-off and throttling service of 2"-48" (50mm-1200mm) valves, the Series 04 is self lubricated for smooth, trouble-free operation. The rugged, cast iron body with O-ring body seals is weatherproof to IP65. A self-locking worm and worm gear drive holds the valve in the desired position. Features include a readily accessible handwheel, a valve position indicator and mechanical travel stops which permit field adjustment of valve movement to specific degrees of rotation. Optionally available are chainwheel accessories, padlock kits and 2" square nut versions. A Gear Operator with a stainless steel housing is also available for valve sizes 1"-16".
SERIES 05 - DECLUTCHABLE GEAR OPERATORAvailable for 2"-36" (50mm-900mm) valves. This operator is excellent for the safe handling of spring return actuators. During pneumatic operation, the worm of the gear unit is disengaged. Should the valve require opening or closing in the event of power loss, manual rotation of the declutch lever will provide a camming action and engage the worm to the segmented worm gear, allowing rotation of the valve using the handwheel. The Series 05 can be installed in the field with existing Bray pneumatic actuators.
R
CONTRO LS
All statements, technical information, and recommendations in this bulletin are for general use only. Consult Bray representatives or factory for the specific requirements and material selection for your intended application. The right to change or modify product design or product without prior notice is reserved. Patents issued and applied for worldwide.
Bray® is a registered trademark of BRAY INTERNATIONAL, Inc.© 2010 Bray International. All rights reserved. B-1025_EL_ManualOPS_2014-08
CONTROLS
A Division of BRAY INTERNATIONAL, Inc.13333 Westland East Blvd. Houston, Texas 77041281.894.5454 FAX [phone] www.bray.com
SERIES 05
DECLUTCHABLE GEAR OPERATORThe Series 05 offers the same superior features as the Series 04 gear operator with the added ability to manually override pneumatic actuators or rotate the valve when air pressure is not available.
SERIES 04 OPTIONS
316 Stainless Steel
for sanitary & corrosive applications
Bray Controls proudly offers the Series 04 Stainless Steel Gear Operator for manual operation of quarter turn valves. With stainless steel housings, input shafts and handwheels, the Series 04 is designed for service in highly corrosive environments, sanitary, breweries and pharmaceutical applications. The units are suitable for on-off and throttling service.
Series 04 Stainless Steel Gear Operator units have different gear ratios – providing a torque output range of 2,000 to 24,000 lb-in. The temperature range is -4°F (-20°C) to 250°F (120°C).
These weatherproof gear operators meet NEMA 4, 4x and IP 65 specifications.
CHAINWHEEL for remote access to valve positioning when the handwheel is not accessible, such as valves positioned high out of reach.
A PADLOCK KIT &
2” SQUARE NUT version for buried service are also available with the Series 04 (not shown).
SERIES 01
STANDARD 10 POSITION
NOTCH PLATE has been designed to lock the handle securely in place, preventing position change of disc due to line pressure, vibration or shock. Standard 9 Position Plate for high pressure valves is not shown.
2” SQUARE NUT is used where the valve is buried under the surface. To rotate valve disc position, the nut is reached with a T-handle wrench.
MEMORY STOP allows the operator to set the maximum amount the valve can open. When set, this limit will remain fixed until the stop is reset.
INFINITE POSITION NOTCH PLATE for throttling applications, allows for very precise adjustments of valve disc positioning anywhere from 0° to 90°. Positioning is simply a matter of loosening the set knob, moving the handle, then retightening the knob. For resilient seated valves only.
HANDLE AND 180° NOTCH PLATE allows the operator to switch the handle to either side without removing the notch plate from the valve.
PADLOCK KIT allows the customer to lock the valve in the full open or closed position, tamper proofing the valve. By drilling a new hole in the top plate, the handle can be locked in mid travel.
dwyer-inst.com
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.
®
T: 219-879-8000 | F: 219-872-9057 | [e-mail]
800-872-9141
FEATURES/BENEFITS
Standard:
• NEMA 4X rated enclosure
• Robust 316L SS oil filled sensor
• CE Approved Design
• 626: 0.25% FS
• 628: 1.0% FS
Optional:
• Advanced environmental protection
• C-276 wetted materials
• Digital or Analog Outputs (I2C)
• Custom range configuration
• Overpressure and/or vacuum
protectionAPPLICATIONS
• Booster stations
• Pumping systems
• Irrigation equipment
• PTO systems
• Submersible pump control
DESCRIPTION
The SERIES 626 & 628 Pressure Transmitters feature a piezo-resistive sensor contained in a compact, rugged, NEMA 4X (IP66) stainless steel general
purpose housing or cast aluminum conduit housing.
Dwyer offers optional configurations to address multiple common points of failure that have traditionally challenged the use of similar products in extreme
conditions. The 626 & 628 are uniquely suited for precision irrigation and additional outdoor power equipment applications. The corrosion resistant 316L
stainless steel wetted parts allow the Series 626 & 628 transmitters to measure pressure in a multitude of processes from simple irrigation systems to
chemical dosing and injection systems. Optional wetted materials such as C-276 offer chemical compatibility with aggressive media. The 626 & 628 can be
configured to provide advanced environmental protection. This includes, but is not limited to, freeze/thaw protection for outdoor cold weather applications,
vibration resistance, and/or overpressure protection to protect the sensors against pressure surges or pump cavitation. The Series 626 & 628 are available
in absolute and gauge pressure ranges with a variety of optional outputs, process connections, electrical terminations, and select agency approvals to
allow you to select the correct transmitter for your application.
Contact Dwyer Instruments today to discuss your specific application needs.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service Compatible gases and liquids.
Wetted Materials Type 316L SS. (Consult factory for additional options)
Accuracy 626: 0.25% FS, 0.20% RSS; 628: 1.0% FS, 0.5% RSS; 626 Absolute Ranges: 0.5% FS, 0.30% RSS. (Includes
linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability).
Temperature Limit 0 to 200°F (-18 to 93°C).
Compensated Temperature
Range 0 to 175°F (-18 to 79°C).
Thermal Effect ±0.2% FS/°F (includes zero and span).
Pressure Limits See table on catalog page.
Display Optional 4-1/2 digit LCD field attachable display.
Power Requirement
10 to 30 VDC (for 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5, 1 to 5, VDC outputs); 13 to 30 VDC (for 0 to 10 VDC output); 5 VDC ±0.5 VDC
(for 0.5 to 4.5 VDC ratiometric output), 10 to 35 VDC (for 4 to 20 mA with -CB option); 13 to 35 VDC or isolated 16
to 33 VAC (for selectoable output with -CB option).
Output Signal 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 0.5 to 4.5 VDC, or selectable 0 to 5, 1 to 5, 0 to 10, 2 to 10
VDC for -CB option.
Response Time 300 ms.
Loop Resistance 0 to 1000 Ohms max. R max = 50 (Vps-10) Ohms (4 to 20 mA output), 0 to 1250 Ohms max. Rmax = 50(Vps-10)
Ohms (4 to 20 mA output with -CB option), 5K Ohms (0 to 5, 1 to 5, 0 to 10, 0.5 to 4.5 VDC output).
Stability 1.0% FS/year (typ).
Current Consumption 38 mA maximum (for 4 to 20 mA output); 10 mA maximum (for 0 to 5, 1 to 5, 0 to 10, 0.5 to 4.5 VDC output); 140 mA
maximum (for all 626/628/629-CH with optional LED).
Electrical Connections Conduit housing (-CH): Terminal block, 1/2˝ female NPT conduit; General purpose housing (-GH): Cable DIN EN
175801-803-C.
Process Connections 1/4˝ male or female NPT and BSPT.
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X (IP66).
Weight 10 oz (283 g).
Agency Approvals Standard: CE; Optional: NSF/ANSI 61/372, ANSI/UL 218, ANSI/UL 508, NEPA 20
SERIES 626 & 628 | INDUSTRIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER/TRANSDUCER
626/628 Pressure Transmitters with
General Purpose Housing (-GH)
626/628 Pressure Transmitters
with Conduit Box Housing (-CB)
and LCD display
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.
DS-626/628 Rev. 6 | 1/18
Important Notice: Dwyer Instruments, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to or discontinue any product or service identified in this publication without notice. Dwyer advises its customers to obtain the
latest version of the relevant information to verify, before placing any orders, that the information being relied upon is current.
®
dwyer-inst.com
T: 219-879-8000 | F: 219-872-9057 | [e-mail]
800-872-9141
DIMENSIONS
HOW TO ORDER
SERIES
626 - 0.25% full scale accuracy
628 - 1.0% full scale accuracy
HOUSING
-CB - Conduit box housing
-GH - General purpose housing
RANGE
-00 - 0 to 15 psia*
-01 - 0 to 30 psia*
-02 - 0 to 50 psia*
-03 - 0 to 100 psia*
-04 - 0 to 200 psia*
-05 - 0 to 300 psia*
-06 - 0 to 5 psi
-07 - 0 to 15 psi
-08 - 0 to 30 psi
-09 - 0 to 50 psi
-10 - 0 to 100 psi
-11 - 0 to 150 psi
-12 - 0 to 200 psi
-13 - 0 to 300 psi
-14 - 0 to 500 psi
-22 - 0 to 600 psi
-15 - 0 to 1000 psi
-16 - 0 to 1500 psi
-18 - 0 to 3000 psi
-19 - 0 to 5000 psi
-26 - 0 to 8000 psi
-67 - 0 to 0.5 bar*
-71 - 0 to 2.5 bar*
-75 - 0 to 10 bar*
-81 - 0 to 40 bar*
*Only available on
-GH housing models
SIGNAL OUTPUT
-S1 - 4 to 20 mA
-S2 - 1 to 5 VDC
-S4 - 0 to 5 VDC
-S5 - 0 to 10 VDC
-S7 - 0.5 to 4.5 VDC
-S8 - 0 to 5, 1 to 5, 0 to 10, 2 to 10 VDC
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
-E1 - Cable gland with 3´ of prewired cable
-E3 - Cable gland with 9´ of prewired cable
-E4 - DIN EN 175801-803-C
-E5 - 1/2˝ female NPT conduit
-E6 - M-12 4-pin connector UL listed
-E8 - Packard connector
-E9 - M-12 4-pin connector non-UL listed
PROCESS CONNECTIONS
-P1 - 1/4˝ male NPT
-P2 - 1/4˝ female NPT
-P3 - 1/4˝ male BSPT
-P5 - 1/4˝ female SAE w/ refrigerant
valve depressor
-P9 - 1/2˝ male NPT
OPTIONS
-AT - Aluminum tag
-LED - Bright red LED display
-NIST - NIST traceable calibration certificate
-NW - NSF/ANSI 61/372 certified
626 -05 -CH -P3 -E1 -S1 -NIST
Use the bold characters from the chart below to construct a product code.
ACCESSORIES
Model Description Model Description
A-164
A-62X-LCD
A-960
16.4´ (5 m) cable with M-12 4-pin female connector
Field-upgradeable LCD
3´ (1 m) Packard cable
A-961
A-962
9´ (3 m) Packard cable
20´ (7 m) Packard cable
2-21/32 [67.46]OPTIONAL 1/4 NPT OR BSPTMALE FITTING
2-1/8 [53.975]1/4 NPT OR BSPTFEMALE FITTING
59/64 [23.415]
6-23/64 [161.528]
3-7/32[81.756]OPTIONAL LCD
23/32[18.256]
LIQUID TIGHT FITTINGCORD DIAMETER RANGE.200 TO .350 (5.08 TO 8.89)11 /32 [34.131]
7/8 [22.23]
HEX
1/4 NPT
2-27/64 [61.52]
3-13/64 [81.36]
Ø55/64 [21.83]
Conduit Housing General Purpose Housing
*Product will have LF imprinted on the body for Lead Free
FY-691LF & FY-692LF Hose Bibb • Spec Sheet
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
No. Part Material
1 Bolt JIS G3507-1
2 Handle Zinc Z30A
3 Bonnet Brass B124 C37700
4 Packing Buna SN-719F
5 Washer Stainless Steel 304
6 Stem Brass C 46400
7 Seat Packing Buna SN-719F
8 Seat Screw JIS H3260 - C2600W
9 Body Brass C 46400
FEATURES & BENEFITS
DIMENSIONS
Size H L L1 D
1/2” 2.64 3.36 0.87 2.19
• Lead Free Brass*
• Chrome Plated - FY-691LF
• Rough Brass - FY-692LF
• Plain End Outlet
• 1/2" MIP Inlet
* These product complies with 0.25% weighted average lead content on wetted surfaces in accordance with Safe Water Drinking Act (SDWA) / Federal Public Law No. 111-380.
FY-691LF
FY-692LF
MODEL UM06 AND UM08
ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOW METER
150 PSI FLANGED TUBE METER, SIZES 2" thru 48"
300 PSI FLANGED TUBE METER, SIZES 2" thru 48"
MODELS UM06 AND UM08 FLANGED TUBE
meters are manufactured to the highest standard available for
magmeters. They incorporate microprocessor technology to
offer very low flows and broad rangeability. The flanged end
tube design permits use in a wide range of applications with
up to 300 PSI working pressure. Flanged ends are Class "D" flat
face flanges (150 PSI) or Class "F" raised face flanges (300 PSI).
The fabricated tube is stainless steel with steel or stainless steel
flanges and is lined with UltraLinerTM, an NSF approved, fusion
bonded epoxy material.
INSTALLATION is made similar to placing a short length of flanged
end pipe in the line. The meter can be installed vertically,
horizontally, or inclined on suction or discharge lines. The meter
must have a full pipe of liquid for proper operation. Fluid must
be grounded to the downstream flange of the sensor either via
internal grounding electrodes (4 - 12") or using McCrometer 316
SS Grounding Rings. Any 90 or 45 degree elbows, valves, partially
opened valves, etc. should not be placed closer than five pipe
diameters upstream and two pipe diameters downstream. All
blending and chemical injection should be done early enough
so the flow media is thoroughly mixed prior to entering the
measurement area.
SIGNAL CONVERTER: The M-Series signal converter is the reporting,
input and output control device for the sensor. The converter
allows the measurements, functional programming, control of
the sensor and data recording to be communicated through
the display and inputs/outputs. The M-Series microprocessor-
based signal converter has a curve-fitting algorithm to
improve accuracy, dual 4-20mA analog outputs, a RS485
communication port, an 8 line graphical backlit LCD display
with 3-key touch programming, and a rugged enclosure that
meets IP67. In addition to a menu-driven self-diagnostic test
mode, the converter continually monitors the microprocessor’s
functionality. The converter will output rate of flow and total
volume. The converter also comes standard with password
protection and many more features.
OPTIONAL:
DC powered converter (10-35 VDC, 21 W)
Meter mounted converter
Extended warranty
Hastelloy® electrodes
ANSI or DIN flanges
Special lay lengths, including ISO standard lay lengths
Converter sun shield
Modbus Protocol RS485
WARRANTY 2 Years
ACCURACY TESTS 3-point wet flow calibration of every complete
flow tube with its signal converter. If desired, the
tests can be witnessed by the customer. The Mc-
Crometer test facilities are traceable to the National
Institute of Standards & Technology. Uncertainty
relative to flow is ±0.15%
ACCURACY Plus or minus 0.5% of actual flow
REPEATABILITY ±0.05% or ±.0008ft/s (±0.25mm/s), whichever is
greater
HEAD LOSS None. No obstruction in line and no moving parts
PRESSURE RANGE 150 PSI maximum working pressure (UM06)
300 PSI maximum working pressure (UM08)
TEMPERATURE RANGE Operating: -10 to 77°C (14 to 170°F)
Storage: -15 to 77°C (5 to 170° F)
VELOCITY RANGE .2 to 32 FPS
BI-DIRECTIONAL FLOW Forward and reverse flow indication and forward,
reverse, net totalization are standard with all meters
CONDUCTIVITY 5 µs/cm
LINER UltraLiner NSF approved, fusion bonded epoxy
ELECTRODES Type 316 stainless steel, others optional
POWER SUPPLY AC: 90-265VAC/45-66 Hz (20W/25VA) or DC: 10-
35VDC (21W). AC or DC must be specified at time
of ordering.
OUTPUTS Dual 4-20mA Outputs: Galvanically isolated and
fully programmable for zero and full scale (0-21mA)
Four separate digital programmable outputs: open
collector transistor usable for pulse, frequency, or
alarm settings.

EMPTY PIPE SENSING Zero return when electrodes are uncovered
ALARMS Programmable alarm outputs
DIGITAL TOTALIZER M-Series restrictive based on pipe size. Cubic Meter,
Cubic Centimeter, Mililiter, Liter, Cubic Ddecimeter,
Decaliter, Hecaliter, Cubic Inches, American
Gallons, Imperial Gallons, Cubic Feet, Standard
Barrel, Oil Barrel, Cubic Yard, American Kilogallon,
Imperial Kilogallon, Acre Feet, Megagallon, Imperial
Megagallon
RATINGS • Metering Tube: NEMA 6P/IP68 with remote
converter (six foot depth continuous submersion)
• Electronics enclosure: IP67
CERTIFICATIONS • Listed by CSA to 61010-1: Certified by CSA to
UL 61010-1 and CSA C22.2  No.61010-1-04
• CE Certified (Converter only)
M-SERIES SIGNAL CONVERTER
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
• Volumetric Pulse
• Flow Rate (Frequency)
• Directional Indication
• High/Low Flow Alarms
• Hardware Alarm
• Empty Pipe
• Range Indication
MODEL UM06 AND UM08
ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOW METER
* Laying lengths for meters with ANSI Class 150 Flanges are equal to UM08 laying lengths
** Consult factory
Pipe Size
(Nominal)
Meter
Pipe ID
Flow Ranges GPM
Standard
.2 to 32 FPS
Min - Max
DIMENSIONS
(Lay Lengths)
Estimated
Shipping
Weight (lbs.)
A*B C D E UM06 UM08
UM06 UM08 UM06 UM08
2"2.156 2 - 340 11.00 11.00 6.70 6.00 6.50 7.90 9.26 93 107
3"3.250 5 - 730 13.40 13.40 6.70 7.50 8.25 9.40 10.01 97 111
4"3.750 8 - 1,140 13.40 13.40 n/a 9.00 10.00 n/a 8.06 78 108
6"5.750 19 - 2,660 14.60 14.60 n/a 11.00 12.50 n/a 9.06 82 138
8"7.375 33 - 4,870 16.10 17.25 n/a 13.50 15.00 n/a 10.06 115 195
10"9.750 52 - 7,670 18.50 18.50 n/a 16.00 17.50 n/a 10.46 144 247
12"11.750 74 - 11,180 19.70 19.70 n/a 19.00 20.50 n/a 12.31 193 342
14"13.625 90 - 16,070 21.70 22.75 12.00 21.00 23.00 20.30 15..46 321 476
16"15.625 118 - 20,900 23.60 25.25 14.20 23.50 25.50 21.10 16.21 390 645
18"17.625 150 - 26,480 23.60 25.25 14.20 25.00 28.00 21.10 17.21 446 750
20"19.563 185 - 32,720 25.60 28.25 16.20 27.50 30.50 24.80 18.26 588 874
24"23.500 270 - 47,180 30.70 35.75 21.70 32.00 36.00 29.60 20.11 769 1,568
30"29.250 420 - 73,620 35.80 41.75 26.50 38.75 43.00 35.90 23.26 1,261 2,317
36"35.250 610 - 105,930 46.10 46.10 28.20 46.00 50.00 42.70 26.66 1,696 2,915
42"41.250 830 - 144,370 48.05 **32.10 52.75 **48.35 29.99 ****
48"47.250 1,080 - 188,430 50.00 **36.00 59.50 **54.00 33.31 ****
2" and 3" Models Body Style
4" to 12" Models Body Style
Converter Dimensions
14+" Models Body Style
End ViewSide View
A
E
C
F 9.06"
G 5.75"
H 5.75"
I 6.69"
J 5.44"
Bracket
mounting
holes are
0.27"
F
G
J
IH
Grounding
Rings are
0.125" thick.
End ViewSide View
E
C
B
A
D
Side View End View
Grounding Rings are 0.125" thick.
B
A
C D
E
Note #1: Gaskets must be used on either side of the grounding ring to provide a proper seal on the flanges.
One gasket is used on the flange end opposite of the grounding ring.
Note #2: Rings & gaskets must align concentrically with the pipe so they do not obstruct or affect flow through
the tube.
Note #3: Using 10 awg copper wire, connect the sensor ground lug to plain earth ground (ground bonding).
Factory recommends dedicated grounding rod.
Note #4: Grounding ring is optional for sizes 4” to 12”. However, the connection of the ground lug to a plain
earth ground is still required.
Information.
Meter & Converter Wiring and Grounding
Basic Sensor Wiring And Grounding
Using supplied
wire, connect the
grounding ring to
the ground lug on
the sensor (#10 stud)
See note 3.
See Notes 1 and 2.
SCALE:
SIZE DWG. NO.A REV.
MATERIAL
FINISH
-
125 RMS
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
NAME DATE
DRAWN BY
APPRV. BY
CHECKED BY
-
SHEET 1 OF 1WEIGHT:
COMMENTS:
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS
DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF
MCCROMETER, INC.
ANY REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A
WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
PERMISSION OF MCCROMETER, INC.
IS PROHIBITED.
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL
Drawing#
--
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
TOLERANCES
FRACTIONAL:
ANGULAR:
0:
0.0:
0.00:
0.000:
0.0000:
1/64
0 30'
0.031
0.015
0.010
0.005
0.001
--
--
--
-
--
REVISED BY -
FILE NAMEUM06-08_Ground
-
-
-
TITLE
-
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
-
Insulating Sleeve
and Washer
(not provided)
On meters installed on a line with cathodic
protection, insulated sleeves and washers
must be used on all flange bolts to insulate
the meter from the line. Consult your cathodic
protection vendor.
Information.
Cable Cover
Pulling Sensor Cable Through Electrical Conduit
It is very important to protect the end of the sensor cable when pulling it through a conduit. Water can accumu-
late in low portions of conduit. Always use the factory supplied cable cover, or similar method, to seal the end of
the cable against water when pulling the cable through conduit. See Figure below. This will insure proper opera-
tion of the meter.
Pulling The Sensor Cable:
1. Tie a rope or cable-snake securely around the middle of the cable cover.
2. Carefully pull the rope or snake until the sensor cable end clears the conduit.
3. Bring the cable end to the converter location. If necessary, secure the cable so that it does
not fall back through the conduit.
4. Remove the cable cover by pulling the rip wire. The cable cover will tear off (discard the cover).
Caution: Do not cut the cable cover off. Doing so may damage the sensor cable and adversely effect the
calibration of the meter. i
Sensor Cable
Cable Cover
Secure rope or snake to this
area of the cable cover
Rip Wire
WARNING: Do not connect any form of conduit directly to the converter enclosure. Doing so will allow
moisture and potentially dangerous gasses to enter directly into the converter. Attaching any conduit to the
enclosure, or altering the enclosure in any way will void the warranty.!
Cable Installation, Service Loop And Bonding To Metallic Conduit
Grounding Lead
Sensor Cable
(Showing 8”
Service Loop)
Power Cable
Conduit Grounding
Bushing
Enclosure Front Enclosure Back
Enclosure
Backplate
Screw
IMPORTANT: All cables must have a minimum 8" service loop.
All electrical cables enter the converter through compression fittings located on the side of the converter.
Ensure that all compression glands are properly tightened and all unused fittings are plugged so the case
remains sealed.
Terminal Board
All connections are made on the terminal board. To access the terminal board, loosen the four screws on the
back of the converter to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The terminal
blocks unplug from
the circuit board for
easy connection.
4-20mA load
resistors. Remove
ONLY if using a 4-20mA loop. If
only using one
4-20mA loop, only remove that
one load resistor,
and leave the other load resistor
in place.
FPI MagTM Electrical Cable Connections
Sensor Electrical Cable Connections
Dip switch for block
levels enabling
Signaling LED
IF2 socket Power Supply
Terminal Board Descriptions
E2R E1R C SH
REVERSE ELECTRODES
1 2 3 4 5 76 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
FORWARD ELECTRODES
E1F E2F C SH SH
COLLECTORS
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 C1 C2 C3 C4
EMITTER
OUT1 OUT2OUT3 OUT4 E
RS485
B A GND SH
SH B1 B2
COILS
+ -
INP
+
24V
+ +
OUT1 OUT2
4-20m
-24V
OUT1 OUT2 4-20mA
COMMON
SH
Do Not Remove Jumpers.
This terminal block is
only used for the 394L
bidirectional meter.
CAUTION - Always disconnect the power cord before attempting any electrical connections.!
Figure 12: Terminal Block M1 Assignments
Ultra Mag And Mx Ultra Mag Sensor Cable Connections
Bl
u
e

Pi
n
k

Gr
e
e
n
/
Y
e
l
l
o
w
Bl
a
c
k
Ye
l
l
o
w
Re
d

Shrink
Tube
Cable
Jacket
1 2 3
20 2119
Terminal Wire Color Connected To
#1 (E1F)Blue Right sensing electrodes
#2 (E2F)Pink Left sensing electrodes
#3 (C)Green/Yellow
Ground electrodes
Combination of: Purple, green/yellow
and drain wires from sensing electrode
cables
#19 (SH)Black Magnet shield / overall cable shield
#20 (B1)Red Coil
#21 (B2)Yellow Coil
4-20mA Hook-Up
Isolated 4-20mA current loops are used to output flow data to external devices. Maximum load impedance is
1,000Ω, and the maximum voltage without load is 27VDC. The converter has the capability to detect a loss of
load on this output. To disable this function set the value “mA Val. Fault” under the ALARMS menu to zero (See
Section 8.4.6). A graphical example of the usage of the current loop with external device is shown below:
If the external device requires a voltage input, a precision resistor placed across the input terminals of the
external device will change the current to voltage. Calculate the required resistor using Ohm’s law (V = I x R). For
example, a 250Ω resistor will provide an input voltage of one to five volts with the transmitter range being set
from 4mA to 20mA. An additional 4 to 20mA loop output is available.
4-20mA Hook-Up
IMPORTANT
The converter powers the 4-20mA loops. Do not use external power for the 4-20mA loop as it may cause
permanent damage to the converter.i
NOTE: Remove the jumper
from terminals 25 & 27 and/
or 26 & 27 before attaching
4-20mA cables. See Figure 5.
+
-
+
-
4-20mA Devices
Terminal 25
OUT1 4-20mA
Terminal 26
OUT2 4-20mA
Terminal 27
OUT 1 OUT2 4-20mA
COMMON
Opto-Isolated Pulse Output Hook-Up
The four outputs are open collector transistor outputs used to communicate with or activate external devices
when the flow reaches a predetermined set point.
• Opto-isolated output with collector and emitter terminals floating and freely connectable
• Maximum switching voltage: 40 VDC
• Maximum switching current: 100mA
• Maximum saturation voltage between collector and emitter 1.2V@100mA
• Maximum switching frequency (load on the collector or emitter, RL=470Ω, VOUT=24VDC):
1250Hz
• Maximum reverse current bearable on the input during an accidental polarity reversion
(VEC): 100mA
• Insulation from other secondary circuits: 500 V
A common application of outputs should be connected as follows:
Opto-Isolated Pulse Output Diagram
OUTPUTSExamples Of Types
Of Input Devices
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
Terminal 6
OUT1 C1
Terminal 7
OUT2 C2
Terminal 8
OUT3 C3
Terminal 9
OUT4 C4
Terminal 10
EMITTER COMMON
Pulse Input
Frequency Input
Alarm Input
Alarm Input + -Power Source:
The power
source can
be internal or
external.
IMPORTANT
Outputs are not isolated from each other. All outputs MUST use the same power source.i
Converter Power Hook-Up
WARNING!! Hazardous supply voltage can shock, burn, or cause death.
The power supply line must be equipped with external surge protection for current overload (fuse or circuit
breaker with limiting capacity not greater than 10A). It must be easily accessible for the operator and clearly
identified.
Power connection is made using the power terminal block on the upper right side of the terminal board. NOTE:
The terminal block uplugs from the circuit board for easy connection. Connect earth ground to the protective
grounding terminal before making other connections. The power supply of a standard converter is 90-265VAC,
44-66Hz at maximum 20W. DC converter is available as an option.
AC Power Supply Terminal Block
L N
Neutral Wire
Typically A
White Wire
Ground Wire
Typically A
Green Wire
Line Wire
Typically A
Black Wire
!
Optional DC Power Supply Terminal Block
+ -
Negative Wire
Typically A
White Wire
Ground Wire
Typically A
Green Wire
Positive Wire
Typically A
Black Wire
* INSERT METER SIZE TO COMPLETE PART NUMBER - INSERT -02 FOR 2”, -04 FOR 4”, -06 FOR 6”, ETC.
‡‡ 2” - 6” INSERT -02; 8” - 12”, INSERT -08; 14” -20”, INSERT -14; 24” -30”, INSERT -24; 36”, INSERT -36
When ordering replacement parts, please specify: Meter Size • Meter Model • Meter Serial Number
NO.PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 880003032 AC Converter (Dual 4-20mA Output)
1 880003042 DC Converter (Dual 4-20mA Output)
1 880003043 AC Converter w/ Modbus RS485 Communications Protocol
2 1-1701-11 Cable Submersible
3 3-2757-‡‡Grounding Wire Assembly
4 3-2781-*Grounding Ring, Stainless Steel (Optional on 4”-12”)
5 1-1557-*Gaskets (Optional)
6 1-1201-10 Nut, Hex, Brass
4” And Larger Model
2”- 3” Model 4” - 12” Model
5
1
2
7
4
6
Optional on
4” - 12”
3
2
4
3
55
6
1
7
4
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
V
PROVIDING
SYSTEM
EFFICIENCY
AND
PROTECTION
AIR VALVES
Bulletin 1500
NSF/ANSI 61
Certified
O ne of the most misunderstood aspects of the
Water & Wastewater industry is the presence
of air in a pipeline and its impact on opera-
tions. Many operational problems, especially at the time
of initial start-up, including broken pumps, valves and
pipe, as well as faulty instrumentation readings, are
blamed on inadequate thrust blocking, improper pipeline
bedding, etc. In reality, many of these problems are not
caused by improper installation of the line, but by failure
to de-aerate the line. Properly de-aerating your pipeline
will safeguard it from air-related problems, however if no
steps are taken to accomplish this, you should be ready for
trouble.
SOURCES OF AIR
Air in a pressurized, operating pipeline comes from three
primary sources. First, prior to start-up, the line is not
empty - it is full of air. To entirely fill a pipeline with fluid,
it is necessary to eliminate this air. As the line fills, much
of this air will be pushed downstream to be released
through hydrants, faucets, etc. but a large amount will
become trapped at system high points (Figure 1). This
phenomenon will occur because air is lighter than water
and therefore, will collect at the high points. This air will
continuously be added to by the second and third sources
as the system continues operation.
Source number two is the water itself. Water contains
approximately 2% air by volume. During system opera-
tion, the entrained air will continuously separate out of the
water and once again accumulate at system high points.
To illustrate the potential massive amount of air this 2%
represents, consider the following: A 1000 ft. length of
pipe could contain a pocket of air 20 ft. long if all the air
accumulated in one location. Or a one mile length of pipe
could contain a 100 ft. pocket of air. This would be true
regardless of the diameter of the pipe.
The third source of air is that which enters through
mechanical equipment (Figure 2). This includes air being
forced into the system by pumps as well as air being
drawn in through packing, valves, etc. under vacuum con-
ditions. As one can see, a pressurized pipeline is never
without air and typically the volume is substantial.
IMPACT OF AIR ON SYSTEM
Now that we have identified the air sources, let us consider
their impact on the system. Two problems are apparent.
The pocket(s) of air accumulating at a high point(s) can
result in a line restriction (Figure 3). Like any restriction, the
AIR COLLECTS AT HIGH POINT
F L O W
AIR BUBBLES RISE
TO HIGHT POINT
INCREASING IN SIZE
FLOW
Water Level
Check Valve
Well Service
Air Valve
Vertical Pump
AIR COLLECTS AT HIGH POINT
F L O W
AIR BUBBLES
RISE TO HIGH POINT
INCREASING IN SIZE
RESTRICTED FLOW
INCREASED VELOCITY
INCREASED HEAD LOSS
Figure 1
Air in pipeline collects at high points
Figure 3
Air pockets can lead to line restriction
Figure 2
Air entering through mechanical equipment
AIRAIR&
3
Its Impact on a Water and Wastewater System
4
pocket(s) of air increases headloss, extends pumping
cycles and increases energy consumption. The presence of
air can also promote corrosion of pipe and fittings. As air
continues to accumulate at system high points, the fluid
velocity increases as the fluid is forced through a smaller
and smaller opening.
As the pocket(s) grows, one of two phenomena will occur.
The first possibility is a total flow stoppage (Figure 4). If sys-
tem dynamics are such that the air cannot be continuously
removed by the increased fluid velocity and pushed down-
stream, then this could happen. As the pocket(s) contin-
ues to accumulate air, a pressure drop higher than pump
capacity can develop and stop all flow.
The second, and more likely occurrence, is that the
increased velocity will cause all, or part of, the pocket to
suddenly dislodge and be pushed downstream (Figure 5).
The sudden and rapid change in fluid velocity when the
pocket dislodges and is then stopped by another high point,
can and often will, lead to a high pressure surge (water
hammer). Serious damage to valves, fittings, gaskets, or
even breakage of the line can occur. This is the most
serious of the possible consequences of air being allowed
to accumulate in system high points.
HISTORICAL SOLUTIONS
As we can see, air in a pressurized pipeline is a serious
concern. Obviously, its removal will result in a more effi-
cient, cost effective operation and potentially avoid more
serious problems. In the early 1900's, engineers and water
works personnel started developing an understanding of
the problems associated with air and the search for a solu-
tion began. Some depended on standpipes, believing that a
large portion of the air would be expelled through them.
Many began placing gate or ball valves at system high points
to manually bleed off accumulated air. Unfortunately, it has
proved impossible to predict when it is time to bleed the air.
This proved impractical, especially on larger systems. Open
fire hydrants (Figure 6) are frequently used under the
assumption that all air in the pipeline will be released.
Unfortunately, hydrants are generally connected to the side
of the pipe, leaving air trapped at the top and at system
high points. It should be noted that there are still munici-
palities using these methods.
F L O W
Part of air pocket breaks
away, creating surge
F L O W
Figure 5
Air pockets can lead to surges in the line
“Air in a pressurized pipeline is a serious concern. Obviously, its removal will result in a more
efficient, cost effective operation and potentially avoid more serious problems.”
F L O W
Figure 4
Air pockets can lead to total flow stoppage
Hydrant
Air Pocket
Butterfly Valve Distribution Line
Figure 6
Opening a hydrant may not eliminate air pockets
5
THE AIR VALVE SOLUTION
Today, most municipalities utilize Automatic Air Valves.
They are available in many different designs and
configurations for a wide range of applications. Their
function is to automatically release and admit air without
operator assistance. Today, countless Air Valves are
performing this task around the globe on a daily basis.
Air Valves are available in three basic configurations
(Figure 7): Air Release Valves, Air/Vacuum Valves and
Combination Air Valves. Correct sizing and location of all
three types are critical. Every high point greater than one
pipe diameter where the pipeline converts from a positive
grade to a negative grade requires an air valve. Even min-
imal high points with small air pockets can cause serious
surge problems and reduce line efficiency. In addition, it
is recommended that air valves be installed every half
mile or 2500 feet on straight horizontal runs (AWWA
M51). Air Valve Sizing Software is available, see page 27.
AIR RELEASE VALVES
An Air Release Valve (Figure 8), sometimes referred to as
a "small orifice" valve, will continuously release accumu-
lated air during system operation. As air from the pipeline
enters the valve, it displaces the water, allowing the float
to drop. The air is then released into the atmosphere
through a small orifice. As the air is vented it is replaced
by water, raising the float and closing the valve orifice. As
air accumulates, the valve will continue to cycle in this
manner to remove collected air.
AIR/VACUUM VALVES
Air/Vacuum Valves (Figure 9), sometimes referred to as
"large orifice" valves, are used to exhaust large quantities
of air upon system start-up, as well as allowing air to re-
enter the line upon system shut down or system failure.
As water enters the valve, the float will rise, closing the dis-
charge port. The valve will remain closed until system
pressure drops to near zero psi. It will not open to release
any accumulation of air while the system is under pres-
sure.
Figure 7
Basic Air Valve configurations
Air Release Valve
Air/Vacuum Valve
Combination
Air Valve
“An added benefit of an Air/Vacuum Valve is its ability to provide pipeline vacuum protection. If a
negative pressure develops, the valve will open, admitting air into the line, reducing the potential for
surges related to column separation and possible pipeline collapse.”
CLOSED
POSITION
OPEN
POSITION
AIR EXHAUST
WATER LEVEL
WATER LEVEL
AIR ENTERING
VALVE
Figure 8
Air Release Valve in Operation
AIR EXHAUSTING
WATER LEVEL
AIR INTAKE
Figure 9
Air/Vacuum Valve Operation
OPEN
Air exhausted during
pipeline fill
OPEN
Air enters during
pipeline draining
CLOSED
Pipeline under
pressure
6
An added benefit of an Air/Vacuum Valve is its ability to
provide pipeline vacuum protection. If a negative pressure
develops, the valve will open, admitting air into the line,
reducing the potential for surges related to column separa-
tion and possible pipeline collapse. While Air/Vacuum
Valves will exhaust large quantities of air upon start-up, it
should be remembered that they will not continuously
release air during system operation. For this function, an
Air Release Valve is also required.
COMBINATION AIR VALVES
Combination Air Valves (Figure 10) are the most commonly
used valves. They perform the functions of an Air/Vacuum
Valve (exhaust large quantities of air on start-up, admit air on
shut-down) and Air Release Valves (release air continuously
during operation). Combination Air Valves are available in
single body and dual body (an Air/Vacuum Valve and Air
Release Valve piped together) configurations. The single
body configuration is more compact and economical. The
dual body configuration provides two independent valves
so that if maintenance is being performed on the Air
Release Valve, the Air/Vacuum Valve is still protecting
the pipeline. The dual body valve also provides a much
wider range of sizing options.
SURGE-SUPPRESSION AIR VALVES
Pipelines with high points, where pressure transients or col-
umn separation can occur should have air valves equipped
with slow closing devices (regulated-exhaust device) to
restrict the outflow of air (AWWA C512-07). During these
conditions, typically caused by unexpected pump shut
down, line break, power outage etc., the air valve must
allow air to flow rapidly into the pipeline. The large volume
of air entering the pipeline will prevent the formation of a
severe vacuum pocket and the damaging pressures that
can occur when these pockets collapse. When the water
columns rejoin and the pressure recovers, the air valve
should exhaust the air in a regulated manner to suppress
surges. While the pipeline is pressurized and in operation,
the Air Valve must continue to automatically release
entrained air to maintain the pipeline flow efficiency.
Surge-Suppression Air Valves are Combination Air Valves
equipped with Regulated-Exhaust Devices (slow closing
devices) as shown in Figure 11. The Regulated-Exhaust
Device consists of a flanged or threaded body with a nor-
mally-open restrictor disc. The Surge-Suppression Air Valve
provides full airflow into the pipeline during vacuum condi-
tions to prevent a vapor pocket (vacuum) from forming.
When the pressure recovers and the water column rejoins,
air is expelled through the valve, which lifts the restrictor
disc. This action regulates the discharge airflow creating an
air pocket that cushions the surge effect of the returning
water column. When the column reaches the restrictor
disc, the water flows through the reduced ports and gently
closes the air valve. Transient studies (Kroon 1984,
Lingireddy 2004) have shown a dramatic reduction in pres-
sure surges when the exhausting air is controlled under
these conditions.
WELL SERVICE AIR VALVES
Well Service Air Valves (Figure 12) are a member of the
Air/Vacuum Valve family and are used with vertical pumps.
Vertical pumps (Figure 2) lift water from a reservoir or deep
well at high velocities because they start against little head
Air/Vacuum
Valve
Regulated-Exhaust
Device
Ports
Air
Release
Valve
Restrictor Disc
Figure 11
Surge-Suppression Air Valve
AIR EXHAUST
Figure 10
Single Body Combination Air Valve
and a pump column filled with air. Well Service Air Valves
are specifically designed to vent the air from the pump col-
umn during pump start-up in a controlled manner before
the check valve opens to reduce pressure surges that result
from the accelerating water column.
Val-Matic provides Dual Port Throttling Devices (Figure 12)
on the outlet of ½ to 3 in. Well Service Air Valves. The Dual
Port Throttling Device regulates the exhaust rate through
an adjustable exhaust port and provides full vacuum flow
through a separate vacuum port during pump shutdown.
This exclusive feature of the Dual Port reduces any poten-
tial for contaminated water being drawn into the system by
vacuum during the pump shut down.
Val-Matic provides Regulated-Exhaust Devices on the inlet
of 4 in. and larger (see Figure 11) Well Service Air Valves.
The Regulated-Exhaust Device provides controlled air
exhaust during start-up and full vacuum flow during shut
down. The device controls the flow of air and water into the
air valve and is effective in suppressing water hammer in
the pump column and air valve during pump start-up.
VACUUM BREAKER VALVES
For critical applications where vacuum protection is a must
or where column separation is predicted, a vacuum break-
er (Figure 13) is used. The Vacuum Breaker is mounted at
critical pipeline high points, penstocks, or tanks and allows
for rapid inflow of atmospheric air to reduce vacuum condi-
tions in piping systems.
When positive pressure in the system is restored, the
Vacuum Breaker provides a positive resilient seal to main-
tain system pressure. When equipped with an Air Release
Valve, the Air Release Valve is used to slowly exhaust the air
that was admitted to the pipeline. The slow release of air
prevents the sudden rejoining of separated columns in a
pipeline and the associated pressure surges or water ham-
mer.
SUMMARY
When air is allowed to accumulate in pressurized
pipelines, efficiency is sacrificed and serious damage
can occur. A properly de-aerated pipeline will not solve
all surge problems; however, the elimination of air can
solve one of the most common causes. Air Valves are a
cost effective, reliable method of improving efficiency and
solving air related surge problems.
REFERENCES
Kroon, R. "Water Hammer: Causes and Effects," AWWA
Journal. Nov., 1984. pp. 39-45.
Lingireddy, "Pressure Surges in Pipeline Systems Resulting
From Air Releases," AWWA Journal. July, 2004. pp. 88-94.
7
Dual Port
Throttling
Device
Well Service
Air Valve
Vacuum Port (Full Flow)
Adjustable
Exhaust
Port
Discharge
Pipe
Air Exhaust
Figure 12
Well Service Air Valve with Dual Port Throttling Device
Figure 13
Vacuum Breaker with Air Release Valve
(Open Position)
16
Combination Air Valves
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
COMPONENT STANDARD OPTIONAL
Body and Cover Cast Iron ASTM A126 Class B
Class 125 and 250
Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12
Stainless Steel ASTM A351 Grade CF8M
Trim Type 316 Stainless Steel -
Coating Universal Alkyd Primer (external)Non-Stick Fusion Bonded Epoxy (internal & external)
FLOW CAPACITY OF COMBINATION AIR VALVES
Clean Water*
Wastewater
*
Operational Highlights:
• Provides the functions of both Air Release and Air/Vacuum Valves
• Exhausts large quantities of air at system start-up
• Releases air pockets during system operation
• Provides pipeline vacuum protection
Product Features:
• Single body incorporates both features within one valve
– More compact and economical
• Dual body consists of two independent valves
– Allows individual maintenance while still
protecting the pipeline
–Wider range of sizing options
• Inlets and outlets are equal to full nominal size
• Unconditionally guaranteed stainless steel floats
• Stainless steel 316 internal trim
• Non-clog design eliminates backwashing
• Exclusive high/low pressure resilient seating
Optional Accessories:
• Outlet hood with screen (prevents debris from entering valves)
• Ball, plug and butterfly isolation valves (allows valve maintenance)
• Inflow Preventer on outlet (stops flood water and resulting
contamination from entering pipeline)
• Backwash kit (for severe wastewater applications)
17
Installation Dimensions
WATER COMBINATION AIR VALVES (SINGLE BODY)
Inlet
Size
Outlet
Size
Model
Number
CWP
PSI Orifice Size
Dimensions
A B
1” NPT 1” NPT 201C.2 300 5/64”11 3/8”10 1/2”
2” NPT 2” NPT 202C.2 300 3/32”14”13”
3” NPT 3” NPT 203C.2 300 3/32”16”15”
3” 125lb Flg 3” NPT 203C.14 150 3/32”16”16 3/4”
3” 250lb Flg 3” NPT 203C.15 300 3/32”16”17 1/4”
4” NPT 4” NPT 204C.2 300 3/32”18 1/2”17”
4” 125lb Flg 4” NPT 204C.14 150 3/32”18 1/2”19 3/4”
4” 250lb Flg 4” NPT 204C.15 300 3/32”18 1/2”20 1/4”
6” 125lb Flg 6” NPT 206C 150 3/8”21”20 1/4”
6” 250lb Flg 6” NPT 256C 300 7/32”21”20 1/4”
8” 125lb Flg 8” NPT 208C 150 3/8”25”23 1/2”
8” 250lb Flg 8” NPT 258C 300 7/32”25”23 1/2”
A
B
A
B
201C.2 - 204C.15
Single Body Combination
Air Valves
206C - 258C
Single Body
Combination Air Valves
Surge-Suppression Air Valves and Isolation Valves in a pump discharge application.
A
B
801A - 804
Wastewater
Single Body Combination
Air Valves
Combination Air Valves
WASTEWATER COMBINATION AIR VALVES (SINGLE BODY)
Inlet
Size
Outlet
Size
Model
Number
CWP
PSI Orifice Size
Dimensions
A B
2” NPT 1” NPT 801A 150 1/8”7”14 15/16”
2” NPT 2” NPT 802A 150 9/64”9 1/2”18 1/16”
3” NPT 3” NPT 803A 150 11/64”11”23 1/2”
4” NPT 4” NPT 804 150 11/64”11”23 1/2”
18
Installation Dimensions
WATER COMBINATION AIR VALVES (DUAL BODY)
Inlet
Size
Outlet
Size
Model
Number
CWP
PSI Orifice Size
Dimensions
A B
1” NPT 1” NPT 101S/22.9 300 1/16”7 7/8”15 5/8”
2” NPT 2” NPT 102S/22.9 300 1/16”10 1/4”17 7/8”
3” NPT 3” NPT 103S/22.9 300 1/16”10 1/4”18 1/4”
A
B
104S/38 - 166F/45.5
Dual Body Combination
Air Valves
A
B
101S/22.9 - 103S/22.9
Dual Body Combination
Air Valves
Combination Air Valves
WATER COMBINATION AIR VALVES (DUAL BODY)
Inlet
Size
Outlet
Size
Air/Vacuum
Model
Number
CWP
PSI
Orifice Size
Air Release
Dimensions
A B
4” Flg 4” NPT 104S/38
154S/38.5
125lb - 150
250lb - 300
3/16”
5/32”21”22”
6” Flg 6” NPT 106S/38
156S/38.5
125lb - 150
250lb - 300
3/16”
5/32”24”23”
8” Flg 8” NPT 108S/38
158S/38.5
125lb - 150
250lb - 300
3/16”
5/32”27”26”
8” Flg 8” NPT 108S/45
158S/45.5
125lb - 150
250lb - 300
23/64”
7/32”30”29”
10” Flg 10” Flg 110F/38
160F/38.5
125lb - 150
250lb - 300
3/16”
5/32”30”28”
10” Flg 10” Flg 110F/45
160F/45.5
125lb - 150
250lb - 300
23/64”
7/32”33”31”
12” Flg 12” Flg 112F/38
162F/38.5
125lb - 150
250lb - 300
3/16”
5/32”33”32”
12” Flg 12” Flg 112F/45
162F/45.5
125lb - 150
250lb - 300
23/64”
7/32”37”34”
14” Flg 14” Flg 114F/38
164F/38.5
125lb - 150
250lb - 300
3/16”
5/32”36”34”
14” Flg 14” Flg 114F/45
164F/45.5
125lb - 150
250lb - 300
23/64”
7/32”40”36”
16” Flg 16” Flg 116F/38
166F/38.5
125lb - 150
250lb - 300
3/16”
5/32”39”34”
16” Flg 16” Flg 116F/45
166F/45.5
125lb - 150
250lb - 300
23/64”
7/32”44”37”
Media Installation Instructions Page 1 of 1

AquaSand Filters
Equipment Installation Instructions
GreenSand+ Dual Media Filters

Filter & Project Information:Filter & Project Information:Filter & Project Information:Filter & Project Information:
FTS Project # 4388
For Customer Weber Basin; Green Road Well

DDDDeliveryeliveryeliveryelivery::::
The pre-assembled filter skid will arrive on a flat-bed truck. The contractor is responsible for off-
loading the skid and setting it in place.
The filter skid is 24’-6” long x 9’-10” wide x 11’-4” high.
The bottom heads of each filter must be filled with concrete. This will take about 230 gallons of
concrete (30 ft3) per filter.
The contractor is responsible for installing the 8” Sch80 PVC underdrain header and the laterals prior
to installing the media.
The contractor is responsible for installing the filter media per the following instructions.
Once the media is installed, the contractor is to install an 8” Sch80 PVC Inlet Distribution Header in
each filter.
The contractor is responsible for disinfecting / conditioning the filter media per the following
instructions.
Filter Tech Systems, Inc. 2844 Chipeta Avenue Grand Junction, CO 81501
Media Installation Instructions Page 1 of 4

AquaSand Filters
Media Installation Instructions
GreenSand+ Dual Media Filters

Filter & Project Information:Filter & Project Information:Filter & Project Information:Filter & Project Information:
FTS Project # 4388
For Customer Weber Basin; Green Road Well

Filter Bed Area: 38.5 Ft2
Backwash Rates: 192.5 GPM is 5 GPM/Ft2
385.0 GPM is 10 GPM Ft2
462.0 GPM is 12 GPM/Ft2
577.5 GPM is 15 GPM/Ft2

GeneralGeneralGeneralGeneral
Do not let the bags of media be exposed to direct sunlight, as the bags will rot. Outside storage is
generally acceptable as long as the media is covered n protected from the sun. Try not to let the media
get frozen by storing it outside. If it does become frozen, it will not become damaged, but it MUST be
thawed before it is installed.
Backwash water must be available to clean the media. Installation cannot be done without full backwash
flow.
To complete the installation of the media the following water will be required:
577.5 GPM Max for 10 - 12 minutes up to 5 backwash cycles for each of the three filters.
103,950 Gallons Maximum Total
To avoid bed upset maximum backwash rate is 15 GPM/Ft2 or 577.5 GPM
All layers except the gravel will need to be skimmed to remove the very fine material. Operators can
choose to backwash at faster rates and longer times as opposed to doing multiple skimmings, but every
layer (except gravel) must be skimmed at least once.
Filter Tech Systems, Inc. 2844 Chipeta Avenue Grand Junction, CO 81501
Media Installation Instructions Page 2 of 4
There are many ways to get media into the filter safely and effectively. It can be lowered in bags, dropped
down a chute, dropped down a pipe, etc. One method that has worked effectively on large filters is to
attach a length of hose to the bottom of a drum or basin. The media is then dumped in the basin and is
spread by a person in the filter holding the hose. Otherwise the person in the filter must spread the media
with a shovel or rake. With this technique, the hose must be at least 2-1/2” (fire hose) or larger.
To control dust when placing media in the filter, it is effective to place a garden hose in the chute or pipe
that the media pours down. Filter masks will still be needed for some personnel, however.
Normally more media is shipped than is required for the depth of each layer. Add only the media required
for the proper depth of each layer of grave, regardless of the quantity shipped. Load all of the sand and
anthracite.

Media Depths and LayersMedia Depths and LayersMedia Depths and LayersMedia Depths and Layers
From the bottom to the top (in order of installation) per filter
6” 3/4” x 1/2” Gravel (20) one-cubic foot bags, 100# each
4” 1/2" x 1/4" Gravel (14) one-cubic foot bags, 100# each
4” 1/4” x 1/8” Gravel (14) one-cubic foot bags, 100# each
4” 1/8” x 1/16” Gravel (14) one-cubic foot bags, 100# each
4” 2.0 – 3.0 mm Gravel (14) one-cubic foot bags, 100# each
18” 0.30 – 0.35 mm GreenSand+ (61) one-cubic foot bags, 85# each
12” 1.0 – 1.1 mm Anthracite (41) one-cubic foot bags, 50# each

Filter PreparationFilter PreparationFilter PreparationFilter Preparation
1. With the filter empty, mark the height of the gravel layers on the wall of the filter in a visible location.
2. Check that the filter floor is level.
3. Install the underdrain header and laterals. You can leave one or two laterals off so that you have a
place to stand while loading the bottom layer of gravel. Care must be taken to avoid getting any
gravel into the underdrain header when the laterals are off. Use tap or a rag to plug the open lateral
ports on the header. Additionally, laterals must not be left unsupported!
Gravel InstallationGravel InstallationGravel InstallationGravel Installation
The best & quickest way to level the media is by filling the filter with water. The water must enter the
filter slowly at this point, as air bubbles in new media will cause the layers to mix. If the layers mix, all
media must be removed, and the install started from scratch. 5 GPM/Sq Ft or 192.5 GPM should be
slow enough.
1. After the filter has been prepped, the first layer to be added is the largest gravel, 3/4” x 1/2”. Be very
careful not to slip and fall on the underdrain nozzles. Hand pack the gravel under the laterals. When
slightly less than the calculated amount of gravel has been added, raise the water level to the desired
depth (measured against the marked wall), and grade the gravel gently to the level of the water,
adding more media if necessary. Add only enough gravel to reach the marked levels. Additional media
has been shipped.
2. Next, add the 1/2” x 1/4“ gravel following the same procedure as above.
Media Installation Instructions Page 3 of 4
3. Next, add the 1/4” x 1/8“ gravel following the same procedure as above. At this point you should
stand on plywood or boards to avoid upsetting the graded gravel sections below.
4. Next, add the 1/8” x 1/16“ gravel following the same procedure as above.
5. Next, add the 1.0 – 2.0 mm gravel following the same procedure as above.
6. After all gravel is in, do a 12 minute backwash at 5 GPM/SF or 192.5 GPM. Add water to the filter
very slowly to avoid upsetting the bed, especially since there will be trapped air bubbles. This
backwash will not completely clean the gravel, but it will remove a large percentage of the dust and
silt that sits on the gravel.
7. Lower the water to the top of the gravel.

Sand and Anthracite InstallationSand and Anthracite InstallationSand and Anthracite InstallationSand and Anthracite Installation
ProcedureProcedureProcedureProcedure
1. Now the layer of 0.30 - 0.35 mm GreenSand+ is ready to be added. This layer is 18” thick. Add all of
the GreenSand+ that has been provided for the filter. Spread the GreenSand equally and level it with
a 2x4.
2. Fill the filter slowly at 192.5 gpm maximum until the water is spilling out of the backwash effluent port.
3. NEVER BACKWASH AT A RATE HIGHER THAN 5 GPM/SQ FT UNLESS THE SAND IS IN AND THE
WATER IS AT THE EFFLEUENT LEVEL.
4. Once water starts pouring over the backwash troughs, increase the backwash rate to 15 GPM/Sq Ft or
577.5 GPM. Hold that rate for 10 - 12 minutes. Drain the filter to about 18” below the top of the
GreenSand.
5. There will be a layer of fines on the top of the sand. Remove the top 1/4" of the sand by undercutting
with a flat trowel or shovel and discard. Do not rake the material, as this will cause the fines to be
pushed into the filter bed.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 as required to remove all of the fines. This should remove the extra 1/2” –
3/4" that was added in step 1. At this point all fines should be removed. If they are not, filter runs will
be shortened, and backwashing will be needed more frequently than it would be in a fully cleaned
bed. It may be necessary to backwash as many as five times as determined by Filter Tech Systems’
Technical Representative.
7. Now the filter is ready for the anthracite layer. Allow the water to enter the filter slowly so that it is at
least 24 inches above the sand layer. Add the anthracite. Add all of the anthracite that is shipped for
filter compartment.
8. Level the anthracite with a rake or 2x4.
9. Allow water into the filter at a rate of 5 GPM/Sq Ft. Fill the filter to 12 - 24” above the media. Allow
the anthracite to sit and soak for at least 2 hours so the air can escape the pores in the particles.
10. After the anthracite has been soaked, fill the filter at 5 GPM/Sq Ft. Once water starts pouring oout of
the backwash outlet, increase the backwash rate to 15 GPM/Sq Ft or 577.5 GPM. Hold that rate for 10
-12 minutes.
11. Stop the backwash, and drain the filter to 24 - 36” below the anthracite layer. There should be a layer
of fines on the top of the anthracite. Remove the top 1/4" – 3/8” of the anthracite by undercutting with
a flat trowel or shovel and discard. Do not rake the material, as this will cause the fines to be pushed
into the filter bed.
Media Installation Instructions Page 4 of 4
12. Repeat steps 9 through 11 if necessary.

After all of the media is installed, the media must be conditioned and disinfected. Refer to separate
instruction sheet.
APPENDIX
Well Logs
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Applied GeoTech
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
PROPOSED WELL HOUSE
GREEN ROAD AND HIGHWAY 89
FRUIT HEIGHTS, UTAH
PREPARED FOR:
HANSEN ALLEN AND LUCE
859 WEST SOUTH JORDAN PARKWAY, #200
SOUTH JORDAN, UTAH 84095
ATTENTION: BEN MINER
PROJECT NO. 1200174 MAY 27, 2021
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1
SCOPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2
SITE CONDITIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2
FIELD STUDY.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 3
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 3
SUBSURFACE WATER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 5
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 5
RECOMMENDATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6
A. Site Grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6
B. Foundations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9
C. Concrete Slab-on-Grade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 11
D. Lateral Earth Pressures.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 11
E. Seismicity, Faulting and Liquefaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 12
F. Water Soluble Sulfates.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14
G. Corrosion.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14
H. Pavement.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 15
I. Preconstruction Meeting.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 16
LIMITATIONS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 17
REFERENCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 18
FIGURES
EXPLORATORY BORING AND CPT LOCATIONS
EXPLORATORY BORING LOGS, LEGEND AND NOTES
CONSOLIDATION TEST RESULTS
SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
FIGURE 1
FIGURE 2
FIGURES 3-4
TABLE I
Page 1
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
1. Subsurface soils encountered in the borings consist of approximately 1½ and
3½ feet of fill in Borings B-1 and B-2, respectively. Lean clay was
encountered below the fill and extends to the full depth investigated,
approximately 20½ and 15½ feet in Borings B-1 and B-2, respectively. A
silty sand layer was encountered from approximately 11 to 16 feet in
Boring B-1.
The results of CPT soundings are consistent with the conditions encountered
in Boring B-1 to the depth of the boring. Clay is identified to a depth of
approximately 26 feet. Frequent silty sand and silt layers are identified in the
clay below a depth of about 26 feet to the full depth of the soundings,
approximately 50½ feet.
2. Subsurface water was measured at a depth of approximately 14 feet below
the ground surface in Borings B-1 and B-2 based on measurements taken on
May 11, 2021.
3. The proposed buildings may be supported on spread footings bearing on the
undisturbed natural soil or on compacted structural fill that extends down to
the undisturbed natural soil. Spread footings bearing on the undisturbed
natural soil or on compacted structural fill may be designed using an allowable
net bearing pressure of 1,500 psf. Spread footings bearing on at least 2 feet
of compacted structural fill may be designed using an allowable net bearing
pressure of 2,500 psf.
4. The upper natural soil and some of the existing fill consists of clay and will
be easily disturbed by construction equipment traffic when the upper soil is
very moist to wet. Placement of approximately 1 to 2 feet of granular
borrow consisting predominantly of gravel with less than 15 percent passing
the No. 200 sieve may be needed to provide limited access for rubber-tired
equipment and to facilitate pavement construction when the subgrade is very
moist to wet. Consideration may be given to placing a support fabric over the
subgrade prior to placing granular borrow.
5. Geotechnical information related to foundations, subgrade preparation,
pavement and materials is included in the report.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 2
SCOPE
This report presents the results of a geotechnical investigation for the proposed well house
and fluoride building at Green Road and Highway 89 in Fruit Heights, Utah. The report
presents the subsurface conditions encountered, laboratory test results and
recommendations for foundations and pavement. The study was conducted in general
accordance with our proposal dated March 10, 2020 except that a cone penetration test
(CPT) was added to the scope of the study to evaluate the liquefaction potential at the site.
Field exploration was conducted to obtain information on the subsurface conditions.
Samples obtained from the field investigation were tested in the laboratory to determine
physical and engineering characteristics of the on-site soil. Information obtained from the
field and laboratory was used to define conditions at the site for our engineering analysis
and to develop recommendations for the proposed foundations and pavement.
This report has been prepared to summarize the data obtained during the study and to
present our conclusions and recommendations based on the proposed construction and the
subsurface conditions encountered. Design parameters and a discussion of geotechnical
engineering considerations related to construction are included in the report.
SITE CONDITIONS
The site consists of an undeveloped field with no structures or pavement. A well has been
constructed at the site.
The site has a gentle to moderate slope down to the west. There are several fill piles in the
eastern portion of the site.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 3
Vegetation consists of grass, weeds, brush and some trees.
There are residences to the southeast and east. Green Road borders the south side of the
site and Highway 89 is to the west. There is vacant land to the north.
FIELD STUDY
Two borings were drilled at the approximate locations indicated on Figure 1 on
April 29,2021. The borings were advanced using 8-inch-diameter hollow-stem auger
powered by a truck-mounted drill rig. The borings were logged and soil samples obtained
by a geologist from AGEC. Logs of the subsurface conditions encountered in the borings
are presented on Figure 2.
CPT soundings were conducted at the approximate location indicated on Figure 1 on
May 7, 2021. Information obtained from the CPT soundings is presented in the appendix.
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
Subsurface soils encountered in the borings consist of approximately 1½ and 3½ feet of
fill in Borings B-1 and B-2, respectively. Lean clay was encountered below the fill and
extends to the full depth investigated, approximately 20½ and 15½ feet in Borings B-1 and
B-2, respectively. A silty sand layer was encountered from approximately 11 to 16 feet in
Boring B-1.
The results of CPT soundings are consistent with the conditions encountered in Boring B-1
to the depth of the boring. Clay is identified to a depth of approximately 26 feet. Frequent
silty sand and silt layers are identified in the clay below a depth of about 26 feet to the full
depth of the soundings, approximately 50½ feet.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 4
A description of the soils encountered in the borings follows:
Fill - The fill in Boring B-2 consists of sandy lean clay to silty sand. It is slightly
moist and dark brown. Laboratory tests conducted on a sample of the fill indicate
it has a moisture content of 5 percent and a dry density of 115 pounds per cubic
foot (pcf).
The fill in Boring B-1 consists of silty gravel with sand. It is slightly moist and
grayish brown.
Lean Clay - The clay contains occasional silty sand and silt layers. It is medium stiff
to very stiff, slightly moist to wet and brown.
Laboratory tests conducted on samples of the clay indicate it has natural moisture
contents of 12 to 23 percent and natural dry densities of 104 to 125 pcf.
Consolidation tests conducted on samples of the clay indicate that the soil will
compress a small to moderate amount with the addition of light to moderate loads.
Results of the consolidation tests are presented on Figures 3 and 4.
Silty Sand - The sand contains silt layers and occasional thin lean clay layers. It is
medium dense, very moist to wet and brown.
Laboratory tests conducted on a sample of the sand indicate it has a natural moisture
content of 23 percent.
Results of the laboratory tests are summarized on Table I and are included on the boring
logs.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 5
SUBSURFACE WATER
Subsurface water was measured at a depth of approximately 14 feet below the ground
surface in Borings B-1 and B-2 based on measurements taken on May 11, 2021.
Slotted PVC pipe was installed in the borings to facilitate future measurement of the water
level. Fluctuations in the water level can be expected over time. Generally, water levels are
expected to be highest in the spring and summer and lowest in the fall and winter. An
evaluation of the fluctuations in the water level is beyond the scope of this report.
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION
We understand that the proposed pump house and fluoride buildings will consist of
single-story, masonry structures with a slab-on-grade floors.
We have assumed building loads consisting of wall loads up to 4 kips per lineal foot.
We understand that pavement will be constructed at the site. We have assumed traffic for
the pavement consisting predominantly of car traffic with occasional trucks such as
maintenance vehicles.
If the proposed construction, building loads or traffic is significantly different from what is
described above, we should be notified so that we can reevaluate the recommendations
given.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 6
RECOMMENDATIONS
Based on the subsoil conditions encountered, laboratory test results and the proposed
construction, the following recommendations are given:
A. Site Grading
Site grading plans were not provided for our review. We anticipate that there will
be relatively small amounts of cut and fill for site grading. We have assumed that
the grade in the building areas will be within approximately 3 feet of the existing
grade.
1. Subgrade Preparation
Approximately 1½ to 3½ feet of fill was encountered in the borings.
Unsuitable fill, topsoil, organics, debris and other deleterious material should
be removed from below the proposed buildings, pavement and other
improvements sensitive to differential settlement.
The upper natural soil and some of the existing fill consist of clay and will be
easily disturbed by construction equipment traffic when the upper soil is very
moist to wet. Placement of approximately 1 to 2 feet of granular borrow
consisting predominantly of gravel with less than 15 percent passing the No.
200 sieve may be needed to provide limited access for rubber-tired equipment
and to facilitate pavement construction when the subgrade is very moist to
wet. Consideration may be given to placing a support fabric over the
subgrade prior to placing granular borrow.
2. Excavation
Excavation at the site can be accomplished with typical excavation
equipment.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 7
A flat cutting edge should be used for excavation equipment when excavating
for foundations, to reduce disturbance of the bearing soil.
Excavations that extend below the water table should be dewatered during
fill and concrete placement. Fill placed below the original water level should
consist of free-draining gravel with less than 5 percent passing the
No. 200 sieve.
3. Compaction
Compaction of materials placed at the site should equal or exceed the
minimum densities as indicated below when compared to the maximum dry
density as determined by ASTM D 1557.
Fill To Support Compaction
Foundations $ 95%
Concrete Flatwork $ 90%
Pavement
Base Course
Fill Placed Below Base Course
$ 95%
$ 90%
Landscaping $ 85%
Retaining Wall Backfill 85 - 90%
To facilitate the compaction process, the fill should be compacted at a
moisture content within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content.
Fill and pavement materials placed for the project should be frequently tested
for compaction.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 8
4.Materials
Listed below are materials recommended for imported structural fill.
Fill to Support Recommendations
Footings Non-expansive granular soil
Passing No. 200 Sieve < 35%
Liquid Limit < 30%
Maximum size 4 inches
Floor Slab
(Upper 4 inches)
Sand and/or Gravel
Passing No. 200 Sieve < 5%
Maximum size 2 inches
Slab Support Non-expansive granular soil
Passing No. 200 Sieve < 50%
Liquid Limit < 30%
Maximum size 6 inches
The natural soil and some of the existing fill consist of clay and are not
recommended for use as fill below the proposed buildings. The on-site soils
may be considered for use as wall or utility trench backfill or site grading fill
outside of the proposed building areas if the debris, organics and other
deleterious materials are removed or they may be used in landscape areas.
The existing fill that consists of sand and gravel may be considered for use
as structural fill if it meets the recommendations given below for imported
structural fill.
The moisture content of the soil placed as fill or backfill should be adjusted
to within approximately 2 percent of the optimum moisture content to
facilitate compaction. Drying of the soil may not be practical during cold or
wet times of the year.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 9
Fill placed below the original water level should consist of free-draining gravel
with less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. A filter fabric should be
provided between the free-draining gravel and natural soil.
5.Drainage
The ground surface surrounding the proposed buildings should be sloped
away from the buildings in all directions. Roof downspouts and drains should
discharge beyond the limits of backfill.
The collection and diversion of drainage away from the pavement surface is
important to the satisfactory performance of the pavement section. Proper
drainage should be provided.
B.Foundations
1.Bearing Material
With the proposed construction and the subsurface conditions encountered,
the proposed buildings may be supported on spread footings bearing on the
undisturbed natural soil or on compacted structural fill extending down to the
undisturbed natural soil. Structural should extend out away from the edge of
the footings a distance at least equal to the depth of fill beneath footings.
Topsoil, unsuitable fill, debris and other deleterious materials should be
removed from below proposed foundations.
2.Bearing Pressure
Spread footings bearing on the undisturbed natural soil or on compacted
structural fill may be designed using an allowable net bearing pressure of
1,500 psf. Spread footings bearing on at least 2 feet of compacted structural
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 10
fill may be designed using an allowable net bearing pressure of 2,500 psf.
Footings should have a minimum width of 2 feet and a minimum depth of
embedment of 1 foot.
3.Temporary Loading Conditions
The allowable bearing pressure may be increased by one-half for temporary
loading conditions such as wind or seismic loads.
4.Settlement
Based on the subsurface soil conditions encountered and the assumed
building loads, we estimate that total settlement will be less than 1 inch for
foundations designed as indicated above. Differential settlement is estimated
to be less than ¾ of an inch.
Care will be required to not disturb the natural soil at the base of foundation
excavations to maintain settlement within tolerable limits.
5.Frost Depth
Exterior footings and footings beneath unheated areas should be placed at
least 30 inches below grade for frost protection.
6.Foundation Base
The base of all footing excavations should be cleared of loose or deleterious
material prior to structural fill or concrete placement.
7.Construction Observation
A representative of the geotechnical engineer should observe footing
excavations prior to structural fill or concrete placement.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 11
C.Concrete Slab-on-Grade
1.Slab Support
Concrete slabs may be supported on the undisturbed natural soil or on
compacted structural fill extending down to the undisturbed natural soil.
Unsuitable fill, topsoil, organics and other deleterious materials should be
removed from below proposed floor slab areas.
2.Underslab Sand and/or Gravel
A 4-inch layer of free draining sand and/or gravel (less than 5 percent passing
the No. 200 sieve) should be placed below the concrete slabs for ease of
construction and to promote even curing of the slab concrete.
D.Lateral Earth Pressures
1.Lateral Resistance for Footings
Lateral resistance for footings placed on the undisturbed, natural soil or on
compacted structural fill is controlled by sliding resistance between the
footing and the foundation soils. A friction value of 0.35 may be used in
design for ultimate lateral resistance.
2.Subgrade Walls and Retaining Structures
The following equivalent fluid weights are given for design of subgrade walls
and retaining structures. The active condition is where the wall moves away
from the soil. The passive condition is where the wall moves into the soil and
the at-rest condition is where the wall does not move. The values listed
below assume a horizontal surface adjacent the wall.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 12
Soil Type Active At-Rest Passive
Clay & Silt 50 pcf 65 pcf 250 pcf
Sand & Gravel 40 pcf 55 pcf 300 pcf
3. Seismic Conditions
Under seismic conditions, the equivalent fluid weight should be increased by
39 pcf and 24 pcf for active and at-rest conditions, respectively, and
decreased by 39 pcf for the passive condition. This assumes a peak
horizontal ground acceleration of 0.65g for a 2 percent probability of
exceedance in a 50-year period.
4. Safety Factors
The values recommended above assume mobilization of the soil to achieve
the assumed soil strength. Conventional safety factors used for structural
analysis for such items as overturning and sliding resistance should be used
in design.
E. Seismicity, Faulting and Liquefaction
1. Seismicity
Listed below is a summary of the site parameters that may be used with the
2018 International Building Code.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 13
Description Value1
Site Class D2
s RS - MCE ground motion (period=0.2s)1.29g
1 RS - MCE ground motion (period=1.0s)0.48g
aF - Site amplification factor at 0.2s 1.0
vF - Site amplification factor at 1.0s 1.82
GPGA - MCE peak ground acceleration 0.59g
MPGA - Site modified peak ground acceleration 0.65g
Values obtained from information provided by the Applied Technology Council at1
https://hazards.atcouncil.org
Site Class D was selected based on the subsurface conditions encountered at the site to the2
depth investigated and our understanding of geologic conditions.
2.Faulting
The closest mapped active fault to the site is the Wasatch fault zone,
approximately 0.3 miles to the east (Utah Geological Survey, 2021).
3.Liquefaction
The site is located within an area mapped as having a "moderate" potential
for liquefaction (Anderson and others, 1994).
The liquefaction hazard potential map can be conservative in identifying the
potential liquefaction hazard. Research indicates that the soil type most
susceptible to liquefaction during a large magnitude earthquake is loose, clean
sand. The liquefaction potential for soil tends to decrease with an increase
in fines content and density.
A site specific evaluation of the liquefaction potential was conducted. The
natural clay and the soil above the groundwater level are not considered to
be susceptible to liquefaction. Sand and silt encountered below the water
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 14
level may be susceptible to liquefaction. We estimate a potential for
liquefaction-induced settlement on the order of ½ inch.
F. Water Soluble Sulfates
One sample of the natural soil was tested in the laboratory for water soluble sulfate
content. The test results indicate there is less than 0.1 percent water soluble sulfate
in the sample tested. Based on the results of the test and published literature, the
natural soil possesses negligible sulfate attack potential on concrete. The
concentration of water soluble sulfates present in the soil at the site indicates that
sulfate resistant cement is not needed for concrete placed in contact with the natural
soil. Other conditions may dictate the type of cement to be used in concrete for the
project.
G. Corrosion
One sample of the clay was tested for the following parameters:
Parameter Value
Resistivity 2,000 ohm-cm
pH 8.1
Redox 386 mV
Sulfides 0.228 ppm (Trace)
The above information should be considered in selecting the appropriate level of
corrosion protection for metal placed in contact with the soil.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 15
H. Pavement
Based on the subsoil conditions encountered, laboratory test results and the assumed
traffic as indicated in the Proposed Construction section of the report, the following
recommendations are given:
1. Subgrade Support
The near surface soil consists of fill comprised of silty gravel with sand to
sandy lean clay and the upper natural soil is lean clay. We have assumed a
California Bearing Ratio (CBR) value of 3 percent which represents a clay
subgrade.
2. Pavement Thickness
Based on the subsoil conditions, assumed traffic, a design life of 20 years for
flexible pavement and 30 years for rigid pavement and methods presented
by AASHTO, a pavement section consisting of 3 inches of asphaltic concrete
overlying 6 inches of base course is calculated. Alternatively, a rigid
pavement section consisting of 5 inches of Portland cement concrete placed
on a prepared subgrade may be considered.
Approximately 1 to 2 feet of granular borrow may be needed for construction
equipment access and to facilitate pavement construction when the subgrade
is very moist to wet clay.
3. Pavement Materials and Construction
a. Flexible Pavement (Asphaltic Concrete)
The pavement materials should meet the specifications for the
applicable jurisdiction. The use of other materials may result in the
need for different pavement material thicknesses.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 16
b. Rigid Pavement (Portland Cement Concrete)
The pavement thickness assumes that the pavement will have
aggregate interlock joints and that a concrete shoulder or curb will be
provided.
Pavement materials should meet the specifications for the applicable
jurisdiction. The pavement thickness indicated above assumes that
the concrete will have a 28-day compressive strength of
5,000 pounds per square inch. Concrete should be air entrained with
approximately 6 percent air. Maximum allowable slump will depend
on the method of placement but should not exceed 4 inches.
4. Jointing
Joints for concrete pavement should be laid out in a square or rectangular
pattern. Joint spacings should not exceed 30 times the thickness of the slab.
The joint spacings indicated should accommodate the contraction of the
concrete and under these conditions steel reinforcing will not be required.
The depth of joints should be approximately one-fourth of the slab thickness.
I. Preconstruction Meeting
A preconstruction meeting should be held with representatives of the owner, project
architect, geotechnical engineer, general contractor, earthwork contractor and other
design team members to view construction plans, specifications, methods and
schedule.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
Page 17
LIMITATIONS
This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted soil and foundation
engineering practices in the area for the use of the client for design purposes. The
conclusions and recommendations included within the report are based on the information
obtained from the borings drilled and CPT soundings at the approximate locations indicated
on Figure 1 and the data obtained from laboratory testing. Variations in the subsurface
conditions may not become evident until additional exploration or excavation is conducted.
If the subsurface conditions or groundwater level is found to be significantly different from
what is described above, we should be notified to reevaluate the recommendations given.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.
Jay R. McQuivey, P.E.
Reviewed by Douglas R. Hawkes, P.E., P.G.
JRM/bw
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
5/27/2021
Page 18
REFERENCES
American Society of Civil Engineers, 2017; Minimum design loads and associated criteria
for buildings and other structures: ASCE/SEI 7-16, Reston, Virginia.
Anderson, L.R., Keaton, J.R., Aubrey, K. and Ellis, S., 1994; Liquefaction Potential Map
for Davis County, Utah; Utah Geological Survey Contract Report 94-7.
International Code Council, 2017; 2018 International Building Code, Falls Church, Virginia.
Utah Geological Survey, 2021; Utah Quaternary Fault and Fold Database,
http://geology.utah.gov/apps/qfaults/ Accessed May 25, 2021.
APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1200174
B-
2
B-
1
CP
T
-
1
BM

-

S
e
w
e
r

M
a
n
h
o
l
e

C
o
v
e
r
El
e
v
.

1
0
0
'

a
s
s
u
m
e
d
12
0
0
1
7
4
Ex
p
l
o
r
a
t
o
r
y

B
o
r
i
n
g

a
n
d

C
P
T

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
Fi
g
u
r
e

1
50
0
10
0

f
e
e
t
Ap
p
r
o
x
i
m
a
t
e

S
c
a
l
e
PR
O
P
O
S
E
D

W
E
L
L

H
O
U
S
E
GR
E
E
N

R
O
A
D

A
N
D

H
I
G
H
W
A
Y

8
9
FR
U
I
T

H
E
I
G
H
T
S
,

U
T
A
H
0
I
0 ·;;
0 3 0
4
5
Applied Geotechnical Engineering Consultants, Inc.
--r-----... _ r--,
0.1
Project No. 120017 4
Moisture Content
Dry Unit Weight
Sample of: Lean Clay
From: B-1 @ 9 feet
No movement upon wetting 1
� .. "1 """ "� \ .. �
� � .......... '� --I'-. .....
1.0 10 APPLIED PRESSURE -ksf
CONSOLIDATION TEST RESULTS
23 %
104 pcf
100
Figure 3
I
0 'iii
0 0
Applied Geotechnical Engineering Consultants, Inc.
0 --------� r--, ... r--, 1
3
4
5
0.1
Project No. 120017 4
Moisture Content 18 %
Dry Unit Weight 109 pcf
Sample of: Lean Clay with Sand
From: B-2 @ 2 feet
/ j No movement upon wetting I
......
� " I\ �
'i\
n \ ------r,,
1.0 10 APPLIED PRESSURE - ksf
CONSOLIDATION TEST RESULTS
100
Figure 4
AP
P
L
I
E
D
GE
O
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

E
N
G
I
N
E
E
R
I
N
G

C
O
N
S
U
L
T
A
N
T
S
,

I
N
C
.

TA
B
L
E

I

SU
M
M
A
R
Y

O
F

L
A
B
O
R
A
T
O
R
Y

T
E
S
T

R
E
S
U
L
T
S

PR
O
J
E
C
T

N
U
M
B
E
R
:

12
0
0
1
7
4

SA
M
P
L
E

LO
C
A
T
I
O
N

NA
T
U
R
A
L

MO
I
S
T
U
R
E

CO
N
T
E
N
T

(%
)

NA
T
U
R
A
L

DR
Y

DE
N
S
I
T
Y

(P
C
F
)

GR
A
D
A
T
I
O
N

RE
S
I
S
T
I
V
I
T
Y

(O
H
M
-C
M
)

pH

RE
D
O
X

(M
V
)

SU
L
F
I
D
E

WA
T
E
R

SO
L
U
B
L
E

SU
L
F
A
T
E

(%
)

SA
M
P
L
E

C
L
A
S
S
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

BO
R
I
N
G

DE
P
T
H

(F
E
E
T
)

GR
A
V
E
L

(%
)

SA
N
D

(%
)

SI
L
T
/

CL
A
Y

(%
)

B-
1
0
12

12
5

62

Sa
n
d
y

L
e
a
n

C
l
a
y

4
19

2,
00
0

8.
1

38
6

Tr
a
c
e
0.
0
0
1

Le
a
n

C
l
a
y

9
23

10
4

96

Le
a
n

C
l
a
y

14

23

41

Si
l
t
y

S
a
n
d

B-
2
0
5
11
5

11

73

16

Fi
l
l
;

S
i
l
t
y

S
a
n
d

2
18

10
9

84

Le
a
n

C
l
a
y

w
i
t
h

S
a
n
d

APPENDIX
CPT RESULTS
Pr
o
j
e
c
t
:
12
0
0
1
7
4
60
0

W
.

S
a
n
d
y

P
a
r
k
w
a
y
Sa
n
d
y
,

U
T

8
4
0
7
0
To
t
a
l

d
e
p
t
h
:

5
0
.
5
2

f
t
,

D
a
t
e
:

5
/
7
/
2
0
2
1
Su
r
f
a
c
e

E
l
e
v
a
t
i
o
n
:

1
0
7
.
0
0

f
t
Fr
u
i
t

H
e
i
g
h
t
s

W
e
l
l

H
o
u
s
e
Co
o
r
d
s
:

X
:
0
.
0
0
,

Y
:
0
.
0
0
Co
n
e

T
y
p
e
:

N
o
v
a
Co
n
e

O
p
e
r
a
t
o
r
:

N
a
t
e

S
a
l
a
z
a
r
CP
T
:

C
P
T
-
1
Lo
c
a
t
i
o
n
:
CP
e
T
-
I
T

v
.
3
.
3
.
2
.
1
7

-

C
P
T
U

d
a
t
a

p
r
e
s
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n

&

i
n
t
e
r
p
r
e
t
a
t
i
o
n

s
o
f
t
w
a
r
e

-

R
e
p
o
r
t

c
r
e
a
t
e
d

o
n
:

5
/
7
/
2
0
2
1
,

4
:
5
2
:
4
5

P
M
0
Pr
o
j
e
c
t

f
i
l
e
: